UZ Prospectus 2015 To 2018

PROSPECTUS 2015-18
University Of Zimbabwe
Information Department
P. O Box MP 167 Mt Pleasant, Harare, Zimbabwe
Tel: +263 04 303257
+263- 4-303211 Ext. 11334
Email:info@admin.uz.ac.zw
Website: www.uz.ac.zw
T
RI
EG
NO
WL
EDG
E
DILIGENC E
INT
University Of Zimbabwe
Prospectus 2015-2018
Prospectus
2015-2018
UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE MAIN CAMPUS

Physical:
630 Churchill Avenue

Mount Pleasant
HARARE
Zimbabwe
Postal:
University of Zimbabwe
P O Box MP 167
Mount Pleasant
HARARE
Zimbabwe
TELEPHONE NUMBERS
OFFICE HOURS NUMBERS:
Main Campus:
+263-4-303211-5 / +263-772128220-4
Administration
Library
All Teaching Departments on the University site
Non-Clinical Departments of Medicine
UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE COLLEGE OF HEALTH

SCIENCES (CHS)
Physical:
Parirenyatwa Hospital
Mazowe Street
HARARE
Zimbabwe
Postal:
P O Box A 178
Avondale
HARARE
Zimbabwe
Teaching and Non Teaching Departments on the University Site:

+263-4-303211
Anatomy
Animal House
Electron Microscopic Unit
Pharmacy
Physiology
Teaching and Non Teaching Departments at Parirenyatwa Hospital Site:
College of Health Sciences:
+263-4-791631-9 / 707707
Dean's Office
Anaesthesia and Critical Care Medicine
Central African Journal of Medicine
Chemical Pathology
Clinical Pharmacology
Community Medicine
Computer Centre
Dentistry
Drug & Toxicology Information Service
Electronic Workshop
Haematology
Health Professions Education
Histopathology
Immunology
Institute of Continuing Health Education
Medical Laboratory Sciences
Medical Microbiology
Medicine
Multi-Media & Resource Centre
Multi-disciplinary Teaching Laboratory
Nursing Science
Obstetrics &Gynaecology
Ophthalmology
Paediatrics & Child Health
Psychiatry
Radiology
Rehabilitation
Surgery
Department at Harare Hospital:
Obstetrics and Gynaecology
+263-775 426 268
ii
UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE LAKE KARIBA

RESEARCH STATION
Postal Address:
P O Box 48
KARIBA
Zimbabwe
Physical Address:
Stand No 736/7
Powerline Road
Kariba
Zimbabwe
Telephone No.:
+263-61- 2751 / 3035

(Director: +263-61-2981)
UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE LIBRARY

Postal Address:
iii
P O Box MP 45
Mount Pleasant
HARARE
Zimbabwe
UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE MARONDERA COLLEGE

OF AGRICULTURAL SCIENCES AND TECHNOLOGY
(MCAST)
Postal Address:
P O Box 35
MARONDERA
Zimbabwe
UNIVERSITY OFFICE HOURS

The hours of business are:
08:00 hours to 12:45 hours (Monday to Friday)
14:00 hours to 16:30 hours (Monday to Thursday)
14:00 hours to 16:00 hours (Friday)
EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBERS

NAME/ ORGANISATION
1.
Emergency Control Centre
TELEPHONE NUMBERS
Direct Line+263-4-303216/
303211 Ext 777
2.
Chief Emergency Controller

(Chief Security Officer)
Office+263-4-333685
Cell+263-772601139
3.
Deputy Chief Emergency Controller
Office+263-4-303216/
303211
Ext 12041
Cell+263-772 253 595
4.
UZ Security Gates
Churchill
Library
Visitors
Langham
5.
Zimbabwe Republic Police
Avondale
TELEPHONE NUMBERS
Reception:
Harare Central
+263-279-20239 / 20227 / 20240

+263-37-9522
6.
UZ Staff Clinic
+263-4-303211
Ext 12047
Ext 12048
Ext 12042
Ext 12046
Direct Line +263-4-336603

+263-4-336608
+263-4-336632
+263-4-777777
UZ Line
+263-4-303211
Ext 11336
7.
8.
9.
11.
12.
13.
UZ Student Clinic
Direct Line
UZ Line
UZ Health Services
Sister in Charge
Sr C. Matambanadzo
Resident Nurse
Direct Line
+263-4-335148
+263-4-303211
Ext 21076/7
Cell+263-772 305 094

Cell+263-777 501 140
Cell+263-772 938 088

Direct Line+263-4-303278
UZ Line +263-4-303211
Ext 21026
Chief Electrician: Mr C Chimbwanba: Cell +263-733 234 399
Chief Plumber:
Mr S. Mhunduru: Cell +263-772 106 531
Mr S. Chevo
UZ/Line +263-4-303211
Ext 11105
Dean of Students: Dr M Madambi
Senior Warden:
14.
Fire Brigade
15.
Hospitals
Parirenyatwa
Harare Hospital
Mr Sithole
Avenues Clinic
St Anne's Hospital
West End Clinic
+263-4-335148
Radiation Officer: Dr Chanaiwa

Works Department
Registrar :
Trauma Centre

UZ Line +263-4-303211
Ext 21000
Cell +263-772 235 154
UZ Line+263-4-303211
Ext 21051
Cell +263-772 946 645
+263-4-783981/4
701555
Direct Line+263-4-621100/1/3/55
16.
Ambulance Services
Harare Municipality
Mars
EMRAS
St Johns
Rock Foundation
NetStar
Direct Line +263-4-700666/8

+263-4-707072
+263-4-705691
Direct Line+263-4-251180 / 89
Direct Line+263-4-339933/6
Direct Line+263-4-251730/3
+263-4-783980
771221
+263-4-250012 / 797479
+263-4-704870
17. Child Line
18. Poisoning Information Centre
Direct Line+263-4-790233 /
701555
19. Samaritans
NOTE
Before contacting any of the emergency service units, ensure that you are
able to give precise and correct details to assist the emergency service. Inform
the Emergency Control Centre (UZ Security) to have people available to give
directions to the scene of the emergency incident. Be available on their arrival
to give necessary information and assistance if so required. Take down the
particulars (name & organization & registration of vehicle) of the person
leading the emergency service team. Note time of arrival. Pass their details to
the Emergency Control Centre.
Principal Officers of the University
University Council
Chancellor: His Excellency, Cde R.G. Mugabe, President of the Republic of

Zimbabwe ;BA Fort Hare. BEd, BAdmin, S.A. BSc Econ, LLB, LLM, MSc Econ,
London. Hon LLD. Ahmadu Bello, Morehouse, Zimbabwe, Edinburgh, St
Augustine's (N. Carolina) Massachusetts, Moscow, Michigan State, Solusi.
Hon DCivil Laws, Mauritius. Hon DPSc, Belgrade. Hon DLitt. Africa University.
Hon DComm. Fort Hare. Hon D Tech. NUST. Hon BComm. MSU. Hon D Agric
Science and Tech Chinhoyi. Hon D Agric. ZOU. Cert. of Hon Professor China
University of Foreign Affairs
Chairman of Council:
Vice Chancellor:
Pro Vice Chancellor, Academic Affairs:
Pro Vice Chancellor, Business Development:
Vice Chancellor:Professor L.M. Nyagura, BSc (London) UK, MSc (UNISA),

RSA, PhD (SIU), USA
Pro Vice Chancellor (Academic Affairs): Professor C. Dyanda, B.Ed (UZ)
Zimbabwe, M.Ed (Howard, Washington DC), Ph.D, Erikson Institute, (Loyola
University), Chicago
Pro Vice Chancellor (Business Development): Dr T Munyanyiwa, Msc (UZ)

Zimbabwe, DM (Phoenix, USA)
Registrar:
Mr S. Chevo, B. Admin (Hons) (UZ) Zimbabwe
Bursar
Mr V. Mugabe, BACC (UZ), B. Compt (UNISA), CA(Z)
Librarian
Mrs A.C. Chikonzo, Postgrad. Dip. (University of Botswana),

Masters in Library Information Studies (University of
Botswana)
Senior Proctor: Dr C. Manyeruke, HPA (UZ), MIR (UZ), PhD (UZ)
Dr W.T. Mbizvo
Professor L. M. Nyagura
Professor C. Dyanda
Dr T. Munyanyiwa
Mr A. Nduna
Professor L. Madhuku
Professor F. F. Zindi
Ms A Paradzai
Mrs N. Mukwehwa
GENERAL INFORMATION FOR

STUDENTS
STUDENT DISCIPLINE
The University promotes high standards of communal life and ensures that
these be established and maintained for the benefit of both present and
future members of the University. A high level of personal integrity and a
developed sense of responsibility are as important to the University as
outstanding scholastic achievement. A proper concern for the reputation
of the University and what it ought to stand for makes it incumbent upon
its members to live decent and ordered lives both on and off the
University site.
The teaching and research activities of the University of Zimbabwe are the
responsibility of the Senate as the academic authority of the
University. The senate consists of all Deans, Deputy Deans, Professors,
Associate Professors and Chairpersons of Departments, the Pro Vice
Chancellors, the Librarian and members elected by the full time lecturing
staff of each faculty. The president of the Students' Union is an ex officio
member of Senate and there is provision for membership of five students
elected by the Students' Union. Senate is presided over by the Vice Chancellor. Senate regulates the admission, the provision of programmes
of study and the conduct of examinations. It recommends to the Chancellor
the conferment of degrees and other awards to the University and it
meets two or three times each semester.
ACADEMIC CONDUCT AND RE-ADMISSION
The University of Zimbabwe has 10 faculties in the following areas:

Agriculture, Arts, Commerce, Law, Engineering, Education, Health Sciences,
Science, Social Studies and Veterinary Science. For each Faculty there is a
Faculty Board consisting of the teaching staff of the subjects assigned to
a Faculty . The Faculty Board elects one of its senior members as Chairman
and spokesman on other University committees. He/she is the Dean of
Faculty and he/she is assisted by similarly elected Deputy Dean. Faculty
boards meet two to three times each semester.
Students are required to attend lectures and can only be excused from
attendance during any part of semester on obtaining prior written
permission from the Dean of their Faculty . Students must attend all classes
(which include practical and oral classes , seminars, tutorials and
examinations) required by departments for their approved programmes
and must submit at the prescribed time all written work required by
Departments. For this purpose, students are under the academic
discipline of the Chairman of Department concerned.
Cutting across department and faculty boundaries is the University Library

which provides the bibliographical basis for teaching and research
throughout the University. The University Computer Centre and
Communication Skills (in the Department of Linguistics) also provide services
to all faculties.
The senate may recommend to the Vice-Chancellor that the privilege of

attendance at the University be withdrawn from any student whose
standard of work results at University examinations are considered by the
senate to be so unsatisfactory as to warrant such action; provided that if
the Senate is satisfied that the failure is not due to any lack of diligence it
may recommend that a proportion of the student's fees be remitted. The
Senate may refuse to readmit to the University any student whose work
or conduct was unsatisfactory when he or she was previously at the
University.
For individual counseling in academic, financial and personal matters,

each student is assigned to a Student Adviser within his own Faculty, with
whom he/she is encouraged to discuss his/her progress in the University
and any problems which may arise. Other counseling services are available
in the Student Affairs Division which is headed by the Dean of Students.
When registering as a member of the University, a student is expected to read

and understand rules of conduct and discipline. Every student is also expected
to read, understand and adhere to the Student Charter.
STUDENT AFFAIRS DIVISION
Students are encouraged to participate fully in residential life activities to

enhance maximum human development.
The Division of Student Affairs is an administrative arm of the University that

is strategically positioned to facilitate social, spiritual, physical and
The Student Affairs Division, through the Accommodation Office, is also
intellectual development of students. The Division provides a wide range of
responsible for the efficient allocation of accommodation to students in line
services that prepare students for both life on campus and life after
with the following University priority list:
graduation. Leadership and social skills development, financial aid and

general student welfare form part of the core business of Student Affairs. The
ultimate goal of the Division is to facilitate an environment that fosters all
human potentials, ensuring competitiveness on the job market upon
1st Priority
*
students with disabilities, foreign students without relatives in
graduation from the University of Zimbabwe.

CADETSHIP OFFICE AND LIFE SKILLS DEVELOPMENT CENTRE
Zimbabwean students facing challenges in raising their educational fees can

access the government financial support (Cadetship Scheme) through the
Cadetship Office. The University also has a Life Skills Development Centre
which is responsible for the administration of a wide range of student clubs
and associations on campus. Clubs and associations are designed to engender
in students leadership, governance and entrepreneurial skills. Self-discovery,
self-efficacy, confidence, gender sensitivity, environmentalism and selfactualisation form part of the business of the Life Skills Centre. All students
are encouraged to join a club of their choice.
Harare, MBCHB Part IV & V and BVSc Part V students.

2nd Priority
*
The demand for University accommodation is very high because the

University has limited student residence. Students are reminded that
accommodation is not a right but a privilege. Authorities have the right to
withdraw this privilege should it be abused.
Our philosophy of student residential services is that all programmes and
activities carried out in residence must contribute to the holistic
development of students. This is possible through partnering with
stakeholders from industry and communities in social molding and life skills
development seminars and workshops.
Final Year Undergraduate students whose homes are out of Harare,

MBCHB Part III and BVSc Part IV students.
3rd Priority
*
Third Year Undergraduate students of four year programmes
4th Priority
*
Second Year Undergraduate students whose homes are out of Harare
5th Priority
*
STUDENT RESIDENCE
First Year undergraduate students whose homes are out of Harare,
Final Year students whose homes are in Harare.
6th Priority
*
First Year Undergraduate students whose homes are in Harare.
7th Priority
*
Postgraduate students whose homes are out of Harare.
In all, the University has twelve (12) halls of residence with a total carrying
capacity of 4 200 students.
COUNSELLING AND ADVISORY SERVICES

The University provides a network of counselling services coordinated by a
Psychologist heading the Department of Counselling and Advisory Services.
Their counselling focuses on personal social, economic, health career and
graduate employment-related problems. The University also has Faculty
Counsellors (Lecturers who are found in all the 10 faculties in the University);
Disability Resource Centre (DRC) Staff (University staff members who offer
specialist counseling and support services to students with disabilities);
Student Health Services Staff (Sessional Doctors, Nurses, Psychiatrists and
Clinical Psychologists offering counselling on health-related problems);
Chaplaincy (team of ordained Pastors coordinated by the Senior Chaplain,
trained to offer psycho-social counselling); Wardens (whose residences are
next to the students' halls of residence and offer services to students round
the clock) and Peer Counsellors (Student volunteers trained in basic
Counseling and Advisory skills).
The Department of Counselling and Advisory Services, in liaison with faculty
offices, facilitates the following Career Guidance activities:
?
Graduate Job Placement and Industrial Attachment
?
Career Seminars
?
Career Exhibitions
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
STUDENT HEALTH SERVICES

The Student Health Service Department strives to satisfy the health needs
and expectations of students. The Department's health services delivery
strategies are Promotional, Preventive and Curative in nature.
1.
?
HIV AIDS prevention, management, OI-treatment and
education.
?
Alcohol, tobacco and drug use/abuse awareness, prevention and
education.
?
Stress management and suicide prevention strategies.
?
Gender awareness, harassment, assault, rape, sex and sexuality
awareness etc
?
Family Planning methods.
?
Importance of physical activities, fitness and relaxation.
?
Production and distribution of information on all above topics
and any other topical issues.
?
Peer education program.
The role of the Chaplaincy is to minister effectively to the needs of the

University community and the society at large, through the provision of
spiritual guidance, counselling, moral and material support to students
and members of staff. The Chaplaincy's objectives are:
Promotion of the Christian faith on Campus.
Coordination of Christian activities on campus through liaison
with all registered and active Christian groups on Campus.
Health Education and Promotion

?
Sexually transmitted infections
CHAPLAINCY AND ECUMENICAL SERVICES
1.
2.
Provision of free counselling and advisory services for the

University community. If you are feeling low, depressed, suicidal,
extremely burdened with life, do not hesitate to visit the
Chaplaincy.
Organize funeral and memorial services, and weddings for
members of the University Community.
Visit and pray for the sick in hospitals, hostels and homes (Senior
Chaplain).
Mobilisation of financial and material resources for students in
distress.
Oversee the activities of the University of Zimbabwe Choir.
2.
Prevention of illness among students

?
Vaccinations
?
Awareness, information and guidance to students on
communicable diseases e.g. cholera, typhoid, common

diarrhoea, chicken pox, and the common cold
?
Guidance to students on weather- related illnesses e.g. heat
stroke
3.
CURATIVE SERVICES
?
Privacy, confidentiality about their illnesses.
DISABILITY RESOURCE CENTRE

The Disability Resource Centre (DRC) was introduced in 1987 to cater for
students with disabilities. Its inauguration came about after a notable
increase in the enrolment of visually impaired students in the Faculty of Arts.
The DRC's mandate includes the provision of appropriate and friendly
facilities and equipment, facilitating the admission of students with
disabilities and debilitating medical conditions, guidance and counselling,
among other functions.
?
Information on issues pertaining to their health status.
?
Courtesy from health and auxiliary staff
?
Respect of health staff by students.
4.
FREE HIV /AIDS counseling, testing, management (treatment) and

post test support.
GENERAL INFORMATION
CIMAS MEDICAL AID
?
All undergraduate students are compelled to join the scheme.
?
A student becomes a member after filling in a Cimas Application
Form during orientation week or at the clinic.
?
After processing Cimas membership cards can then be collected
from the clinic.
?
It is important that students collect their membership cards, as
production of a valid Cimas card and current students ID are prerequisite for medical attention at the clinic.
NB Before Cimas cards are available students can be treated at the
clinic upon production of a current students ID.
Clinic Staff consists of:
?
Chief Nursing Sister
?
Part-Time Medical Practitioners (Doctors)
?
Registered General Nurses
?
Part-Time Psychologists and Psychiatrists
?
Clinic support staff (Administrative, Nurse Aides and Cleaning
Staff ).
The Department has three technical sections, namely Braille Production

(responsible for brailling and transcription), Audio Production (responsible
for tape production of reading materials) and ICT (responsible for training
of students in the use of computers and related technologies).
SPORTS AND RECREATION
The Department of Sport and Recreation facilitates and coordinates sport
and recreation on campus. The Department is committed to helping
students, staff and the wider community to participate in sport and physical
activity, helping to combine an active mind with an active body. It promotes
healthy lifestyles through a wide range of sports activities and recreational
programmes.
To effectively fulfill its mission, the Department of Sports and Recreation
provides, within the scope of its resources, the following:
?Opportunities for a variety of cooperative and competitive
activities that will contribute to physical fitness and

wellness;
?Equal access to modern sporting and recreational facilities and
programs by all students;
?A variety of programmes and activities including major areas of
informal/drop-in recreation, intramural sports, sport clubs,

outdoor recreation and fitness;
?Coordination of the scheduling of events, promotion of activities and
maintenance of sports and recreational facilities to maximize

facility use to better serve the University community;
?Development of a medium through which students can develop
leadership, management, program planning and communication

skills;
?Extracurricular opportunities through participation and leadership
roles designed to enhance social, psychological and physiological

development; and
?Sports Code: Aerobics, Athletics, Basketball, Body Building, Chess;
Cricket, Darts, Football, Handball, Hockey, Karate, Netball, Rugby,

Squash, Swimming, Table Tennis, Taekwondo; Tennis, Volleyball.
STUDENTS' UNION
The Student' Union exists to promote the general interests of students in

the University and to provide one of the recognized channels of
communication between students and the University authorities.
Numerous clubs and societies of a sporting, cultural or social nature
have been set up under the auspices of the Students' Union. The students'
Union Building provides attractive recreational facilities, shop and
cafeteria. Students are encouraged to read the following documents in order
to get a full grasp of their rights and privileges: Student Charter, Students
Union Constitution, Ordinance 30 and Academic Regulations.
UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE LIBRARIES

Vision
To maintain the University of Zimbabwe Library as The Leading Academic
Library in the Country
Mission
Provide access to scholarly information resources required to meet the
learning, teaching and research needs of the University of Zimbabwe.
COLLECTION
The existing collection reflects a methodological acquisition of materials
since the establishment of the various faculties. Journal literature makes up
approximately 60% of the collection. Apart from having the largest collection
in the country, the UZ Library is the country's depository for all publications
from the United Nations and its various agencies, World bank, Food and
Agricultural Organization, World Health Organization and regional bodies
like Southern African Development Community (SADC) and Common
Market of Eastern and Southern Africa (COMESA), to name a few. 95% of all
materials in the library are available online.
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
Values
?
Excellence
?
Integrity
?
Innovation
?
Respect for each other
?
Team Work
Introduction
UZ Libraries (UZLIB) is made up of the Main Library and eight (8) Branch
Libraries housed in a number of locations convenient to the faculties. These
are; College of Health Sciences, Education Graduate Library, Institute of
Mining Research Library, Law Library, Map Library, Mpilo Library, School of
Social Work Library and Veterinary Science Library.
The UZLIB is very clear of its pivotal role in the university structure. The
Library's mission statement is explicit in its acknowledgement of the role it is
expected to play i.e. Provide access to scholarly information resources
required to meet the learning, teaching and research needs of the
University of Zimbabwe. UZLIB, as Centre of Pride and Excellence, strives to
offer world class service as well as facilitate access to scholarly collections and
information resources in order to fulfill its mission.
The UZ libraries website www.uz.ac.zw/library is the gateway to a wealth of

resources. It provides immediate online access to thousands of full-text
electronic journals, books and an Online Public Access Catalogue (OPAC) of
books and journals in the libraries. The databases cut across all academic
disciplines. The Library also subscribes to e-Brary, a database with 50,000
electronic books. It provides online access to comprehensive collections of ebooks covering a broad range of subject areas. e-brary includes books from
330 leading publishers such as Cambridge University Press, Oxford University
Press, Sage, Springer, Taylor & Francis, and Wiley. For more information, visit
http://site.ebrary.com/lib/uzlib .
UZ library is not only a net consumer of Internet information, but also
provides access to its locally digitized intellectual output which includes UZ
Institutional Repository (a digital collection of the university's research
output) http://ir.uz.ac.zw, Electronic Theses and Dissertations and Past
Examination Papers Databases.
SUBJECT LIBRARIANS
Getting to know your Subject Librarian can be a good step toward success in
your studies. More information can be accessed via
http://www.uz.ac.zw/library/staff/librarians.html. Also checkout the
website of the particular Library in your subject area.
SERVICES
The online services provided by the Library include the OPAC which can also
be accessed off campus via http://uzlibsys.uz.ac.zw/, electronic resources,
digital full-text collections, online past examination papers, University of
Zimbabwe Research Output which can be accessed via the Institutional
Repository (IR) http://ir.uz.ac.zw, and full text Electronic Theses and
Dissertations (ETDs). There is also a provision for authorized users to access
these online services off campus through the UZ Library website at this
address:
programme is to impart search skills to students and staff of the University of

Zimbabwe so that they are able to recognize the need for information, identify
potential sources, develop successful search strategies and successfully
access all sources of information including print, media, electronic, digital
and others.
Inter-Library Loan
Publications not held in the Library can be sources from other libraries
through the Interlibrary Loan Service. More information on the service is
available from the Reader Services Division.
Binding
Internet Services
Binding services are offered at a fee. Users have to deposit the money at the
Cashier's and only produce the receipt to the Library.
Circulation
All registered university students as well as permanent staff have access to
Library material and can borrow books as per Library loan rules. Loan rules for
staff differ according to staff categories. More information is available from
the Librarian on duty at the Library Information Desk on extension 12017.
Information Literacy (IL) Training
UZLIB has taken full advantage of the available Information and
Communication Technology (ICT) to enhance information dissemination
and information delivery. In the University of Zimbabwe (UZ) strategic plan,
one of the key result areas is to produce information communication literate
graduates. Every graduate from UZ is required to pass at least one
compulsory course in Information and Communication Technology (ICT)
thus, ensuring that UZ graduates come out of university being computer
literate.
In line with the above key result area, UZLIB embarked on Information Literacy
(IL) training programme to equip Library users with skills to use ICTs to
access, organize, evaluate and synthesize information from both print and
electronic resources. The main goal of the Information Literacy Training
Internet facilities are available in the Library to all current registered

University of Zimbabwe staff and students from 08:00am to midnight on
weekdays and from 08:00am to 16:00hrs during weekends. However, all
registered users have remote access to Library electronic resources, thus
access is avialable24/7.
Multi -Media Centre
The Library Multi-media Centre is made of three rooms. Library users can
view academic materials on DVD (for example lectures and experiments) as
well as viewing academic videos and presentations. The second room has a
TV set connected to Digital Satellite Television (DSTV). The DSTV features
News, Geography, Documentaries, History Channels among others.
The Multi-media centre is also equipped with state of the art computers.
Some of the computers have web cameras that can be used for video
chat/conference. The computers can also be used to view CD-ROMs. Users
are also able to stream academic videos on YouTube. Collaborative
discussions can also be done in the room to allow students to share
experiences and ideas.
Photocopying
What is Jaws Professional
The Library outsources photocopying services. Photocopying services are

available at a fee and photocopying is subject to copyright act.
JAWS stands for Job Access With Speech. JAWS Professional is a powerful
accessibility solution and screen reading software that reads information on a
screen using synthesized speech. It provides many useful commands that
make it easier to use programs, edit documents, and read web pages. JAWS is
the world's most popular screen reader, developed for computer users whose
vision loss prevents them from seeing screen content. JAWS reads aloud
what's on the PC screen and gives the user a unique set of intelligent tools for
navigating and accesses web pages and all screen content
JAWS is compatible with most frequently used workplace and classroom
applications such as Microsoft Office Suite, Adobe Acrobat Reader, Internet
Explorer, Fire Fox and many other applications.
Reference Services
Reference services are offered by professional Librarians during the day and
evenings. There is always a Librarian on duty at the Information Desk. For
m o re i n fo r m a t i o n o n t h e L i b ra r y s e r v i c e s , p l e a s e v i s i t
http://www.uz.ac.zw/library/inner/rds.htm.
Students with Special Needs
10
The Library supports users with visual disabilities using two Free & Open
Source Software tools on public access terminals. Available is AccessApps a
suite of over 60 Open Source and freeware Windows applications which run
from a USB stick. AccessApps provides a range of solutions to support writing,
reading and planning as well as specific disabilities. For example, there are
programs to help change the background colour of the computer screen, or
to help locate the cursor on the screen.
Balabolka a free, open source, cross-platform text-to-speech tool is also
available for users. It reads aloud text from the screen to aid people who have
difficulties in reading, whether due to vision impairments or reading
difficulties (including dyslexia). It reads aloud text from the computer's
clipboard or from DOC, EPUB, FB2, HTML, ODT, PDF and RTF files. As well as
reading aloud in 'real time', the on-screen text can be saved as an audio file in
WAV, MP3, MP4, OGG or WMA formats.
The acquisition Job Access With Speech (JAWS) comes as another step in
enhancing library accessiblity to all users.
Access to the Special Needs

Located in the Main Reserve Section of the Main Library, the Special Needs
facility is accessible to all registered users with disabilities during the library
operating hours. There is a team of library staff set in the Main Library to
provide assistance to users with disabilities.
GENERAL ACADEMIC REGULATIONS FOR

UNDERGRADUATE DEGREES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF
ZIMBABWE
1.
APPLICATION OF THESE REGULATIONS

1.1 The Senate shall be the final authority for the interpretation of these
regulations.
1.2 The Senate reserves the right to alter, cancel, suspend or replace any
of these regulations.
1.3 A student who has started a programme of study following one set
of regulations shall not be affected by regulations subsequently
adopted unless agreed to in writing by the student, except that
where a student would not be able to complete a programme within
the minimum period as prescribed in the Faculty Regulations that
student will normally be required to change to the subsequent set of
regulations.
1.4 There shall be academic regulations for each Faculty, which must be
approved by the Senate before implementation. The Senate has the
power to exempt a student from any of these regulations.
1.5 The General Academic Regulations shall take precedence over the
Faculty Regulations.
2.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
In these Regulations the following terms shall be used as described:
Academic year:
means two complete semesters, as defined by these
regulations, and the intervening vacation period.
Such year to commence on the date set by the Senate
for the commencement of the academic year for
undergraduate degree programmes. The Senate may
however, vary the date of commencement for an
academic year in any programme of study.
Assignment:
means a written or practical exercise to be submitted
by a student for assessment as a component of the
continuous assessment requirements for a course as
prescribed in the relevant programme regulations.
Attachment:
means a period of time during which a student is
assigned to a suitable government, non-government,
professional or other organisation, firm, other
approved entity or to an individual for the purpose of
gaining practical skills or experience.
Core Course:
means a compulsory course that must be passed in a
given programme.
Co-requisite:
means a course which must be taken before or at the
course
same time as a specified course.
Course Unit:
means the unit of measure used to calculate the
weighting given to a course in a specified programme
in such a manner that the total of the weights of the

courses in each semester shall be 60 course units.
Course:
means a separately examinable component of a
Subject.
Credit:
means the sum of the course units of the courses a
student has passed in a specified programme.
Dissertation:
means a written report documenting and describing
the research process, findings and analysis of the
findings of a project.
Levels of study:
means the levels of study as prescribed in the Faculty
Regulations.
Major Subject:
means a subject so designated within the Faculty
Regulations for a Programme.
Minor Subject:
means a subject so designated within the Faculty
Regulations for a Programme.
Module:
means a component of a course that may be assigned
a weighting in course units but is not separately
examinable.
Plagiarism:
means, the submission by a student of the work of
another person as his/her own, or the unattributed
incorporation of all or part of the work of another
person, either deliberately or negligently, into a work
being produced for academic assessment and/or
examination.
Practical Course: means a course in which a student is required to carry
out practical exercises under supervision.
Prerequisite:
means a course that must be passed before the
course
specified course can be attempted.
Programme:
means a plan of study which, on successful
completion, leads to the award of an undergraduate
degree of the University.
Project:
means research, a clinical investigation, design,
artistic or practical work undertaken by a student,
either as a course or part of a course which may,
depending on the academic regulations for the
programme for which she or he is registered, be
presented in the form of a dissertation or report, a
script, musical or artistic composition or work, a
model, a design, a visual or oral recording, in an
appropriate digital or other electronic format, or in
such form as may be designated in the regulations for
a specific programme of study.
Semester:
means a specified period of time normally consisting
of fifteen (15) weeks.
Subject:
means a field of study within a Programme.
11
3.
12
PROGRAMMES
3.1 The University offers undergraduate programmes for Bachelors,
Bachelors (Honours), Intercalated (Honours) and Law, Medical and
Veterinary degrees.
3.2 Bachelors Degree Programmes
3.2.1 In a Bachelors degree programme a student shall register for
either TWO major subjects or ONE major subject and at least
ONE minor subject in accordance with the provisions of the
3.2.2 Bachelors degree programmes offered by the University are
listed in Schedule A1. This schedule may be amended from
time to time by the Senate.
3.3 Bachelors Honours Degree Programmes
3.3.1 In a Bachelors [Honours] degree programme a student shall
register for at least ONE major subject in accordance with the
provisions of the Faculty Regulations. Where a faculty offers
both Bachelor's Degree and Bachelor's (Honours) degree
programmes, some of the courses in the Bachelor's
(Honours) degree programme must be designated as
honours courses in a given subject and shall be taught and
examined at a level requiring a greater breadth and depth of
knowledge and understanding than that expected of courses
in the Bachelors Degree Programmes.
3.3.2 Bachelors (Honours) Degree programmes offered by the
University are listed in Schedule A2. This schedule may be
amended from time to time by the Senate.
3.4 Intercalated (Honours) Degree Programmes
3.4.1 In an Intercalated (Honours) Degree programme a student,
while registered for another programme, may interrupt that
programme for a period prescribed in the relevant Faculty
Regulations and register for an Intercalated (Honours)
Degree Programme. The prescribed period for such
programme will be at least one year and during that time the
student will pursue advanced study in a subject. After
successful completion of the Intercalated (Honours) Degree
programme, the student will normally return and complete
the mainstream programme of study.
3.4.2 Intercalated (Honours) Degree programmes offered by the
University are listed in Schedule A3. This schedule may be
3.5 Law, Medical and Veterinary Degrees
3.5.1 A law, medical or veterinary degree programme shall be
designed so as to take into account the requirements for
recognition and registration within the relevant profession.
3.5.2 Law, medical and veterinary degree programmes offered by
the University are listed in Schedule A4. This schedule may be
3.6
4.
Each course shall be allocated a course code for use in computerized

student records, such code shall be alpha/numeric:
3.6.1 alphabetical codes being used to identify programmes and
subjects;
3.6.2 numerical codes being used to identify the individual course
and the level of that course;
3.6.3 A schedule of courses and their codes shall be prepared and
maintained by the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Normal Entry
4.1.1 For normal entry a student must have 4.1.1.1 satisfied the general requirements under Scheme A or
Scheme B as prescribed below;
4.1.1.2 satisfied the special requirements for entry into the
particular Programme chosen;
4.1.1.3 passed English Language at Ordinary Level or the Use
of English Language examination or an approved
equivalent as set by the University in a special test or
by another approved institution.
4.1.2 Scheme A
Passes in five subjects obtained at one or more of the
examinations, listed in \r 4.1.4 and \r 4.1.5, at the level or
standard indicated of which at least two must have been at
Advanced Level.
4.1.3 Scheme B
Passes in four subjects at one or more of the examinations,
listed in \r \h 4.1.4 and \r \h 4.1.5, of which at least three
must have been taken at Advanced Level.
4.1.4 Recognised Ordinary Level Examinations
Zimbabwe School Examination Council (Zimsec) O Level
Ordinary Level of the Associated Examining Board's General
Certificate of Education;
Credit standard of the Cambridge Overseas Higher School
Certificate;
Ordinary Level of the University of London's General
Subsidiary standard of the Cambridge Overseas Higher
School Certificate;
The Matriculation Certificate of the South African Joint
Matriculation Board (or approved equivalent).
4.1.5 Recognised Advanced Level Examinations
Zimbabwe School Examination Council (Zimsec) A Level
Advanced Level of the Associated Examining Board's General
Principal subject standard of the Cambridge Overseas Higher
School Certificate;
Advanced Level of the University of London's General

Certificate of Education.
4.1.6 General Subject Provisions
In either Scheme A or Scheme B:
no subject can be counted at both Ordinary Level and
Advanced Level; and
the subjects must have been chosen from the approved list in
\r 4.1.7 and restrictions against the combination of
overlapping subjects, as stipulated in \r 4.1.8, have been
observed.
4.1.7 Approved subjects for admission purposes are:
4.1.7.1 Subjects offered by the Zimsec and/or the Associated
Examining Board, and/or the Cambridge Local
Examining Syndicate and/or the London General
Certification of Education. These are listed in
Schedule B1.
4.1.7.2 Other Subjects and other Examining Boards may be
accepted by the Senate on the recommendation of
the Deputy Registrar (Academic). These shall be
added after approval to Schedule B1.
4.1.8 Restrictions against the Combination of Overlapping
Subjects
In the selection of subjects for the purpose of satisfying the
general requirements under Scheme A or Scheme B, the
restrictions against the combination of overlapping subjects
must be observed. These restrictions are listed in Schedule
B2.
4.1.9 Faculty Requirements
There may be specific restrictions on the choice of Subjects
under Scheme A or Scheme B in the General Requirements
and/or additional requirements concerning admission to a
particular programme of study and/or for Subjects/Courses
within that programme. Such additional requirements shall
be prescribed in the Faculty Regulations.
4.2 Special Entry
4.2.1 Persons may apply for Special Entry and for permission to
proceed to a first degree with exemption from the whole or
part of the normal entry requirements, the list of these
special criteria are listed in Schedule C1.
4.2.2 A student who qualifies under this regulation for Special
Entry may apply to the Senate to be exempted from certain
courses and examinations. Such a student may be required to
attend interviews and/or sit special tests at the University to
determine his or her suitability for admission to the selected
programme.
4.3 Mature Entry

4.3.1 This option is restricted to programmes in the Faculties of
Arts, Commerce, Education, Law and Social Studies.
4.3.2 An applicant for mature entry must:
4.3.2.1 be at least 30 years of age on the first day of the
academic year in which admission is sought;
4.3.2.2 not be eligible for entry under either the Normal or the
Special Entry Regulations;
4.3.2.3 have passed at least five approved 'O' Level subjects
including English Language or an approved
equivalent;
4.3.2.4 have demonstrated potential suitability for University
studies by virtue of his/her attainments and/or
relevant work experience.
4.3.2.5 normally have completed his/her full-time school or
college education at least five (5) years before the
start of the academic year in which admission is
sought.
4.3.3 An applicant who wishes to be considered under the Mature
Entry provisions may be required to attend interviews and/or
special tests at the University designed to assess their
command of the English Language, numerate and reasoning
ability and general suitability for admission to Bachelor's
degree studies.
4.3.4 An applicant who has previously attended Mature Entry tests
and/or interviews without success will not be considered for
admission under this form of entry unless in the intervening
period he/she has acquired relevant additional qualifications
and/or experience.
4.4 Accreditation and transfer from another institution of higher
learning.
4.4.1 A student from another recognised institution of higher
learning may gain transfer or accreditation of credits on the
recommendation of the relevant Department(s) and Dean(s)
and the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
4.4.2 On so recommending admission under \r 4.4, the
Department(s) and Dean(s) shall determine
4.4.2.1 the courses in the given programme the student will
be exempted;
4.4.2.2 courses for which the student must register;
4.4.2.3 how the degree for the particular student will be
classified on successful completion of the
programme.
13
14
4.4.3 Admission of a student under Regulation \r 4.4 shall require

prior approval by the Academic Committee on behalf of the
Senate.
4.5 Submission of Applications
4.5.1 Applications must be submitted on the official Admission
form.
4.5.2 The closing dates for receipt of application forms shall be
advertised in the Press.
4.5.3 Late applications may be considered upon payment of the
prescribed late-application fee.
4.6 General Provisions
4.6.1 Prior to admission to a programme, a student must complete
the registration formalities of the University.
4.6.2 A student may not register simultaneously for more than one
Programme at the University without the permission of the
Senate.
4.6.3 A student registered on a full-time programme at the
University is deemed to be in full-time attendance at the
University.
4.6.4 Registration will take place in accordance with the
arrangements prescribed each year through the Deputy
Registrar (Academic).
4.6.5 Normally no student shall be admitted to a course more than
two weeks after its commencement. An exception to this
regulation must have the written endorsement of the
Chairperson(s) of the Department(s) and the Dean(s) of the
Faculties concerned and will be subject to approval through
the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
4.6.6 A student's registration shall not be confirmed until he/she
has fulfilled the requirements for the payment of fees.
4.6.7 The University reserves the right to cancel a student's
registration in a given programme if fewer than five (5)
students are registered for that Programme.
4.6.8 A student registered for a course is expected to attend all
classes prescribed for that course. Where tutorials, seminars,
fieldwork, vacation work, practical sessions and other
activities are prescribed a student is required to attend and to
complete all assignments set.
4.6.9 A student who enters or returns to the University late shall
not be entitled to special tuition. Such a student shall be liable
to pay the late registration fine, unless the Deputy Registrar
(Academic) has given permission for such late registration.
4.6.10 A student who is unable to attend classes for valid reasons for
longer than 72 hours must notify the appropriate Faculty
Office of the facts as soon as possible and submit certification
in support thereof. A medical certificate will only be accepted
from a medical practitioner registered in accordance with the
Health Professions Acts. Where possible a student should
seek permission from the Dean on the recommendation of

the Chairperson(s) of Department(s) concerned prior to such
absence.
5.
STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMMES
5.1 A degree programme shall consist of a prescribed minimum
number of course units to be taken at each of the specified levels of
study in accordance with the Faculty Regulations.
5.2 The possible combination of courses within a programme shall be in
accordance with the Faculty Regulations. A student's selection of
courses shall be subject to approval by the Departmental Board(s)
and the Dean(s) concerned.
5.3 Faculty Regulations may prescribe the criteria designating a major
subject or a minor subject.
5.4 Detailed syllabus for courses will not form part of the General or
Faculty Regulations, but shall be submitted to the Academic
Committee for approval when a new course or programme is first
introduced. Subsequent amendments to such syllabus shall be
submitted to the appropriate Faculty Board(s) for approval.
5.5 Faculty Regulations shall stipulate the maximum number of course
units per semester that a student may take in a given programme.
5.6 The minimum duration and the permissible maximum duration of
each programme, whether full-time or part-time, shall be
prescribed in the Faculty Regulations. Normally, a student who
postpones completion of a programme shall not retain credit for the
courses previously passed if the student fails to resume studies
within a period of six consecutive semesters.
5.7 The maximum period of study of a degree programme is twice the
normal duration commencing from the date of initial registration.
A student who fails to complete the programme by the end of the
maximum period shall be required to withdraw from the
programme.
5.8 A student registered for courses with a total weight of forty or more
course units in a semester shall be deemed to be a full-time student.
A student registered for courses with a total weight of less than forty
course units in a semester shall be deemed to be a part-time
student.
5.9 At least one of the courses in a Bachelors (Honours) degree
programme must be a project, which shall normally be taken in the
final year of study.
5.10 A student registered for a Bachelor's (Honours) programme may
take some approved courses from other programmes. For purposes
of classifying the student's degree at least 60% of the final overall
mark must be derived from honours courses.
6.
7.
EXAMINATIONS
6.1 The end of course examination shall normally be at the end of the
semester in which the teaching of the course is completed.
6.2 External Examiners will normally be appointed to moderate end of
course examination question papers. If visiting, the external
examiner shall moderate the examination marks in all courses
taught in that semester.
6.3 All matters relating to the conduct of end of course examinations
shall be the responsibility of the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
6.4 To be admitted to an end of course examination, a student must be
registered for that course and as a student of the University in
accordance with these regulations.
6.5 The Examiners may require a student to attend a viva voce
examination and/or write a special examination.
6.6 Where a project or dissertation is prescribed as a course in a
programme, students shall be informed in advance of the deadline
for submission of the project report. A student who fails to meet this
deadline shall normally fail the project or dissertation unless the
Academic Committee has granted prior permission for an extension
of this deadline. In such cases, on the recommendation of the Board
of Examiners, the student may be permitted to submit the project
report or dissertation at a later date, normally within 3 months after
publication of results.
6.7 Departmental Boards shall administer anti-plagiarism screening to
all submitted dissertations/theses using an anti-plagiarism
software approved by Senate. Normally, only dissertations/theses
exhibiting no evidence of plagiarism shall be marked.
6.8 A student who fails to attend a scheduled examination without a
valid and verified reason shall be awarded a mark of zero for that
examination.
6.9 Misconduct by a student during an examination may lead to
disciplinary action against the student.
ASSESSMENT OF COURSES
7.1 Unless approved otherwise by the Senate, a single overall mark shall
be submitted for each course on a student's profile of marks as
stipulated in \r 8.1.3.1.
7.2 Normally, assessment shall be based on continuous assessment and
end of course examinations. Unless otherwise approved by Senate,
continuous assessment will count for between 20% and 33% of the
overall mark as determined at the beginning of the course by the
examiners concerned.
7.3 Each Department shall determine which items of coursework will be
included in the continuous assessment and shall define the relative
weighting assigned to each item of the coursework. Each
Department shall inform the students of these details at the
beginning of the course and shall maintain written records of each
student's performance in these elements of continuous assessment.
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
8.
Items incorporated in the continuous assessment may include

assignments, tests, essays, practicals, field work and projects.
In assessing course marks, the Departmental Panel of Examiners and
the Faculty Board of Examiners shall have regard to all special
requirements as prescribed in the Faculty Regulations.
If in a given course the Faculty Regulations require that a student
passes each of the components separately and a student is
unsuccessful in one or more of the components, the overall mark for
the student for that course shall be 48% or the mark obtained,
whichever is the lesser.
For a project undertaken by a team of two or more students, each
member of the team shall be required to write an individual project
report independently. The assessment of the project course shall be
based solely on the individual student's report.
The following marking scheme and designations shall be adopted
for all courses
Mark attained
Grade
75% - 100%
1
65% - 74%
2.1
60% - 64%
2.2
50% - 59%
3
Below 50% (Fail)
F
The result of a course for each student shall be designated by an
appropriate symbol from the following list:
P
means that the student has passed that course;
F
means that the student has failed that course;
T
means that, due to verified extenuating circumstances
accepted by the Senate the student is allowed to sit a special
examination in the course, in accordance with Regulation
9.9;
R
means that, having failed the course, the student must repeat
the course or take another approved course in accordance
with the Faculty Regulations;
N
means that the final decision on the course is still pending;
U
means that the student did not study the course for which
he/she was registered and is therefore presumed to have
withdrawn from the course;
W
means the student failed the course and has been required to
withdraw from the University;
PROCESSING OF EXAMINATION RESULTS

8.1 Departmental Panel of Examiners
8.1.1 There shall be for every department a Departmental Panel of
Examiners which shall consist of all full-time lecturing staff in
that Department and the External Examiner(s). The
Departmental Board may invite part-time lecturers and other
persons involved in the teaching of the courses being
examined.
15
16
8.1.2 The Chairperson of the Department is the Chief Examiner for

all the examinations set by the Department and shall preside
over the Departmental Panel of Examiners.
8.1.3 The Departmental Panel of Examiners shall:
8.1.3.1 agree for each course and for each student a mark
expressed as a percentage for continuous assessment
for the end of course examination and an overall mark
combining the continuous assessment and the end of
course examination mark;
8.1.3.2 recommend to the Faculty Board of Examiners
whether a student should pass or fail that course;
8.1.3.3 where course prizes are available for award make
recommendations for their award.
8.2 Processing of marks by Departments
8.2.1 After confirmation of the marks for each course at a meeting
of the Departmental Panel of Examiners, it shall be the
responsibility of the Chairperson of the Department to
ensure that the agreed marks for each course and each
student are entered into the University's central
examinations database.
8.2.2 Each Department shall submit to the Faculty Office duly
signed hard copy schedules of the course marks indicating
the continuous assessment mark, the end of course
examination mark and the overall mark. All such marks must
be expressed as percentages.
8.2.3 Each Department shall keep appropriate records of all the
marks processed.
8.3 Faculty Board of Examiners (to be redrafted)
8.4 There shall be a Faculty Board of Examiners which shall consist of
the Dean and Deputy Dean of the Faculty, the Chairperson of each
Department and the External Examiner(s) for the Department plus
normally one other academic member of the Department
nominated by the Departmental Panel from each Department
involved in the Subjects for that examination.
8.4.1 The Chairperson of the Board of Examiners shall normally be
the Dean of the Faculty who shall have a casting vote.
8.4.2 The Faculty Board of Examiners shall:
8.4.2.1 consider the recommendations of the Departmental
Panels of Examiners and recommend to Senate an
overall result for each student;
8.4.2.2 Make recommendations to the Senate with regard to
the award of any prizes that may be available for
students within each programme.
8.5 After determining the results of all the students in accordance with
Regulation 9 the Dean of the Faculty shall present the results to the
Academic Committee.
8.6 The Faculty Office shall keep proper records of all the mark
schedules considered by the Faculty Board of Examiners.
9. DETERMINATION OF EXAMINATION RESULTS
9.1 The examination results of a student shall be determined in
accordance with the Scheme of Examination as prescribed in the
relevant Faculty Regulations.
9.2 Each Scheme of Examination shall indicate the courses that must be
passed for a student to successfully complete the portion of the
programme that is being examined. Additionally, each scheme of
Examination shall indicate the maximum and minimum number of
applicable courses and course units and designate prerequisites
required per semester/academic year.
9.3 The overall result for each student will normally be any one of the
following:
GRADUATE
PASS: PROCEED
INCOMPLETE: PROCEED
INCOMPLETE: APPLY TO REPEAT FAILED COURSES
INCOMPLETE: PENDING
INCOMPLETE: WRITE EXAMINATION AS A FIRST ATTEMPT
INCOMPLETE: CLEAR OUTSTANDING COURSES
WITHDRAW
PRESUMED WITHDRAWN
DISCONTINUE
9.4 GRADUATE means a student registered for a given programme has
fulfilled all the requirements for the award of the degree.
9.5 PASS PROCEED means a student is eligible to register for further
courses in accordance with the Faculty Regulations.
9.6 INCOMPLETE: PROCEED means a student, having failed some
courses, is allowed to repeat the failed courses and may register for
further courses in accordance with Faculty Regulations.
9.7 INCOMPLETE: APPLY TO REPEAT FAILED COURSES means a
student is no allowed, in accordance with Faculty regulations, to
register for higher level courses in the programme being
undertaken.
9.8 INCOMPLETE: PENDING means that the profile of results for the
student is incomplete and no final decision can be made at that
point in time.
9.9 INCOMPLETE: WRITE EXAMINATION (S) AS FIRST ATTEMPT
means that, for valid reasons supported by appropriate
documentary evidence, and as determined by the Senate, a student
failed to write or complete an examination at the scheduled time. In
this case the student shall normally write the missed examination at
the subsequent examination session. A student who fails to write
the rescheduled examination shall repeat the course when next
offered. Application for first sitting must be made prior to
publication of the results and must be made in accordance with the
requirements spelt out in Schedule D1.
9.10 INCOMPLETE: CLEAR OUTSTANDING COURSES means that the

student has not filled all the requirements to proceed to a
subsequent Part of graduate and shall clear all the outstanding
courses before proceeding to a subsequent Part of graduating.
9.11 WITHDRAW means that a student will not be allowed to register for
any course or programme at the University until after a period of
four consecutive semesters has elapsed. This measure will normally
be taken if a student at the end of an academic year of her/his
programme, other than the first, has an accumulated credit of less
than 60 times the number of academic years she or he has been
registered for that programme.
9.12 PRESUMED WITHDRAWN means that a student was registered for a
given programme but has not attended any class sessions nor
submitted any written work for assessment and has not presented
himself/herself for the end of course examinations for the semester
under consideration.
9.13 Normally a student shall retain credit for all previously passed
courses.
9.14 The final authority in the determination of the examination results
rests with the Senate.
9.15 DISCONTINUE means that a student may no longer be allowed to
proceed with the programme in which he or she has failed to meet
the prescribed requirements for the completion of level one of that
programme, but such a student need not necessarily withdraw from
the University. He or she may apply for admission into a different
programme and his or her application will be considered through
the normal admission procedures.
In appropriate cases, a student may return credit for previously
passed relevant courses.
If a student has discontinued from two programmes, he or she will
be required to withdraw from the University.
10. AWARD OF THE DEGREE
10.1 The requirements for the award of a degree shall be stipulated in the
Faculty Regulations. The Faculty Regulations shall specify how the
final overall mark for the programme shall be computed for the
purposes of classifying the degree.
10.2 All Bachelors degrees, except the MBChB, BDS and BVSc degrees,
shall be classified in the following divisions, using the indicated
designations and mark scheme:
First Division
Upper Second Division
Lower Second Division
Third Division
Fail
(1)
(2.1)
(2.2)
(3)
(F)
75%100%
65%74%
60%64%
50% 59%
Below 50%
10.3 The classification of the MBChB, BDS and BVSc degrees shall apply
the following mark scheme:
Distinction 75%100%
Honours 65%74%
Pass
50%64%
Fail
Below 50%
and as prescribed in the relevant Faculty Regulations.
11. ACADEMIC OFFENCES
11.1 This regulation should be read in conjunction with the
University of Zimbabwe Regulations for the Conduct of
Examinations and the Student Disciplinary Regulations.
11.2 With the exception of the application of the paragraph \r 11.5.1
the procedures laid down for the conduct of Student
Disciplinary Committee and Hearings shall be followed in
relation to the determination of whether or not a student is g u i l t y
of an academic offence.
11.3 A student who:
11.3.1 plagiarises wholly or in part work submitted for assessment
and, or;
11.3.2 falsifies data or results in a practical course, in a practical
exercise in any course, in a dissertation or in a project and, or;
11.3.3 fabricates data or results in a practical course, or in practical
exercise or in any course, in a dissertation or in a project and,
or;
11.3.4 presents as his or her own data or results the work of another
person, except where the student and other person or
person's were working as a team in accordance with the
relevant regulations or rules for that course; shall be guilty of
an academic offence.
11.4 A student who:
11.4.1 takes into a room or place where an examination, test or
other form of assessment is taking place any books, notes,
written or other work on any kind of material, any electronic
calculating, recording or playback device, any
communicating and or sending and receiving device which is
not permitted to be taken into the examination room or place
in terms of the relevant regulations or examination
instructions issued for that course or programme;
17
18
11.4.2 annotates, embellishes, adapts any permitted books, notes,

written work on any kind of material, any electronic
calculating, recording or playback device, any
communicating and or sending and receiving device whether
his or her own property, or that of another or supplied by the
examining authority or body with written materials,
programmes, information however recorded which are not
permitted to be used by such student in such examination,
test or assessment;
11.4.3 brings into the room or place where the examination, test or
assessment is taking place any answer book, whether blank
or otherwise, any writing, blotting or other paper or brings in
any material or materials not permitted in the examination in
terms of the relevant regulations or examination instructions
issued for that course or programme;
11.4.4 communicates, attempts to communicate with any other
person within, outside or beyond the room or place in which
an examination, test or assessment is taking place contrary to
the regulations or instructions issued for the conduct of that
examination, test or assessment, for the purpose of obtaining
assistance from or providing assistance to such other
candidate in the completion of the examination, test or
assignment;
11.4.5 leaves the room or place where the examination, test or
assessment is taking place and, contrary to the regulations
for such course or programme or instructions issued for such
examination, test or assessment, communicates with any
other person, consults any books, notes, written work on any
kind of material, any electronic calculating, recording or
playback device, any communicating and or sending and
receiving device; shall be guilty of an academic offence.
11.5 A student who is guilty of an academic offence shall be liable to:
11.5.1 in relation to \r 11.3.1 to \r 11.3.4, an official warning,
dependent on the severity of the offence, from the lecturer
conducting the course and, or the Chairperson of
Department and, or the Dean of the Faculty. Such warning or
warnings shall be noted for administrative purposes on the
official record of the student's performance maintained by
the University provided that:
11.5.2 if the offence for which the student is charged under \r 11.3.1
to \r 11.3.4 is believed by the lecturer to be an aggravated
one, or it is determined that is a repeated academic offence,
whether a repetition of the same offence or of a different
offence, the matter shall be referred to the Student
Disciplinary Committee and the student may be liable to the
cancellation of his or her registration for that course, the
rendering of a mark of zero for that component of the course
or the whole course, suspension or expulsion from the
University. Provided that: the Student Disciplinary Committee

may recommend that a student found guilty of plagiarism,
falsification or fabrication of results may be permitted to
resubmit such work, or submit a new piece of
work for examination or assessment. Such recommendation
may direct that such new or resubmitted work shall receive a
mark of not more than 50%.
11.5.3 in relation to \r 11.4.1 to \r 11.4.5 dependent on the severity
of the offence and whether it is a repeated offence, whether a
repetition of the same offence or of a different offence, the
cancellation of his or her registration for that course, the
rendering of a mark of zero for the course or a component of
that course, suspension or expulsion from the University.
11.6 A student who is charged with an academic offence, other than one
that may be disposed of in terms of \r 11.5.1, shall have his or her
results for the course or programme for which he or she is registered
withheld until such time as the Student Disciplinary Committee
makes a determination on the charges or the charges are not
pursued.
12. POSTHUMOUS AND AEGROTAT PROVISIONS
12.1 Posthumous award of a degree
12.1.1 If a student who dies in his/her final year of study in a given
undergraduate programme had completed a substantial
component of that year's study, the relevant Departmental
Panel(s) of Examiners and the Faculty Board of Examiners
may recommend to the Senate the award of the degree
posthumously provided that there is clear evidence that the
student had demonstrated consistent progress prior to
his/her death.
12.1.2 The overall result for a deceased student awarded a degree
posthumously shall be POSTHUMOUS AWARD
12.2 Aegrotat award of a degree
12.2.1 If a student in the final year of study in a programme, having
completed a substantial component of the programme, is
prevented by serious illness from completing the prescribed
requirements for the award of the degree, the Departmental
Panel(s) of Examiners and the Faculty Board of Examiners
may recommend the award of the degree provided that it is
established by a medical certificate that the incapacitation is
permanent or that the illness is terminal.
12.2.2 The overall result for a student who qualifies for the aegrotat
award of the degree shall be PASS: AEGROTAT AWARD
12.3 A degree awarded under the posthumous and aegrotat provisions
shall be without classification.
13. PUBLICATION OF EXAMINATION RESULTS

13.1 The Deputy Registrar (Academic) shall be responsible for the
publication of examination results as approved by the Academic
Committee.
13.2 Results lists shall be posted on University notice boards and at any
other designated places and, in addition, the Deputy Registrar
(Academic) shall post to each student at his/her registered address
a copy of the individual student's results.
13.3 The examination results of a student who owes any outstanding
monies to the University shall be withheld from publication.
13.4 All lists of results released by the Deputy Registrar (Academic) shall
be endorsed with the proviso SUBJECT TO RATIFICATION BY THE
SENATE.
14. STUDENT APPEALS AGAINST PUBLISHED RESULTS
14.1 The Senate shall establish an Appeals Committee to consider
student appeals against published results.
14.2 Any student has a right to appeal against his/her results.
14.3 A student who wishes to lodge an appeal against his/her published
results must do so in writing to the Deputy Registrar (Academic)
within 21 working days of the University after the publication of the
examination results.
14.4 Each appellant shall be levied a prescribed fee for the appeal. A
schedule of the levies can be obtained from the Deputy Registrar
(Academic). No appeal shall be considered until such levies have
been paid.
14.5 If an appeal is successful, the appellant shall be refunded the fees
paid; otherwise the appellant forfeits the money.
14.6 On appeal, the student must state clearly the grounds of the appeal.
A medical practitioner registered in terms of the Health Professions
Act must substantiate medical grounds in writing. Any other
evidence that the candidate wishes to submit in support of his/her
case must also be lodged with the written appeal.
14.7 The Deputy Registrar (Academic) shall obtain comments and
recommendations from the relevant Faculty which, together with
the appeals, may be referred to the Appeals Committee for
consideration.
14.8 The Appeals Committee will consider as legitimate grounds for
appeal:
14.8.1 new evidence of mitigating circumstances (except mere lack
of diligence or other fault on the part of the student) which
was not previously available to the examiners; and
14.8.2 extenuating circumstances of a 'force majeure' nature which
explain and are directly relevant to the student's
unsatisfactory academic performance, such as serious illness
or other disability or circumstances which he/she could not
reasonably have been expected to have foreseen or avoided.
14.9 The Committee shall be empowered to hear an appellant orally

and to seek all such information or evidence, as it may consider
pertinent. No right to oral hearing is conferred upon an appellant
and the University will not reimburse any expenses incurred by an
appellant in making a personal appearance before the Committee.
14.10 The Committee shall make a decision in each case, as it deems
appropriate. Its decision shall be submitted to the Academic
Committee for noting.
14.11 The Deputy Registrar (Academic) shall notify in writing each
appellant of the results of his/her appeal, which result shall be
final.
15. ACADEMIC TRANSCRIPT
15.1 Each graduate of the University shall receive ONE copy of a formal
transcript of his/her complete academic record at the University.
15.2 A prescribed fee shall be charged for a duplicate (subsequent to the
issue of the original transcript) or for a transcript requested before
completion of studies.
15.3 An Academic Transcript of the University of Zimbabwe is issued
without any alterations and carries a signed official stamp of the
Deputy Registrar (Academic).
16. AWARD OF A DEGREE CERTIFICATE OF THE UNIVERSITY OF
ZIMBABWE
16.1 The award of a degree Certificate of the University of Zimbabwe shall
be subject to approval by the University Council.
16.2 A student completing the requirements for such an award will be
entitled to receive a formal certificate of the University, bearing the
seal of the University and signed by the Vice-Chancellor and the
Registrar, confirming the award.
16.3 If, subsequent to the award of a degree to a student, it is discovered
that there were gross irregularities and impropriety involved in the
award, the University Council, on the recommendation of the
Senate, reserves the right to withdraw the award and cancel the
certificate.
19
SCHEDULE A: UNDEGRADUATE DEGREE PROGRAMMES OFFERED BY THE

UNIVERSITY
A1: BACHELORS DEGREES
Bachelor of Arts
Bachelor of Business Studies & Computer Science
Bachelor of Science in Tourism & Hospitality Management
Bachelor of Education
Bachelor of Adult Education
Bachelor of Science Education
Bachelor of Nursing Science
Bachelor of Science
Bachelor of Social Work
20
(BA Gen)
(BBS & CT)
(BSc THM)
(Bed)
(Bad Ed)
(BSE)
(BNSc)
(BSc)
(BSW)
A2: BACHELORS [HONOURS] PROGRAMMES

Bachelor of Science Honours in Agriculture
Bachelor of Science Honours in Agricultural Engineering
Bachelor of Science Honours in Applied Environmental Science
Bachelor of Arts Honours
Bachelor of Accountancy Honours
Bachelor of Business Studies Honours
Bachelor of Laws Honours
Bachelor of Science Engineering Honours
Bachelor of Science Mining Engineering Honours
Bachelor of Surveying Honours
Bachelor of Medical Laboratory Sciences Honours
Bachelor of Nursing Science Honours
Bachelor of Pharmacy Honours
Bachelor of Science Honours in Occupational Therapy
Bachelor of Science Honours in Physiotherapy
Bachelor of Science Honours
Bachelor of Science Honours in Economics
Bachelor of Science Honours in Administration
Bachelor of Science Honours in Political Science
Bachelor of Science Honours in Psychology
Bachelor of Science Honours in Rural & Urban
Bachelor of Science Honours in Sociology
(HPS)
(HRUP)
(HSO)
A3: INTERCALATED DEGREE PROGRAMMES

Bachelor of Science (Intercalated) Honours in Anatomy
Bachelor of Science (Intercalated) Honours in Human Physiology
Bachelor of Science (Intercalated) Honours in Vet. Anatomy
Bachelor of Science (Intercalated) Honours in Vet. Physiology
Bachelor of Science (Intercalated) Honours in Vet. Biochemistry
(BSc (Int) An)

(BSc (Int) HP)
(BSc (Int) VA)
(BSc (Int) VP)
(Int) VBC)
A4: MEDICAL AND VETERINARY DEGREES

Bachelor of Dental Surgery
Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery
Bachelor of Veterinary Science
(BDS)
(MBChB)
(BVSc)
(HAG)
(HAE)
(HAES)
(BAH)
(HAC)
(HBS)
(LLBS)
(HEN)
(BSc Mining)
(HSV)
(MLS Hons)
(HNS)
(HPM)
(HOT)
(HPT)
(BSc Hons)
(HEC)
(HPA)
SCHEDULE B: LIST OF O-LEVEL AND A-LEVEL SUBJECTS

O
O&A
A
O
O
A
O&A
O&A
O&A
O&A
O
O&A
O&A
A
O&A
O
O
O
O
A
A
O
O
O&A
O
O&A
O&A
O&A
O
O
O
O
O&A
O&A
O
O
O
O
O&A
A
A
English Language
Literature in English
English Language and Communication Skills
Religious Studies (Syllabus A)
Religious Studies (Syllabus B)
Divinity
History
Geography
Sociology
Economics
Law
French
Ndebele
Zulu
Shona
Mathematics (Non Calculator)
Mathematics (Calculator)
Additional Mathematics (Non Calculator)
Additional Mathematics (Calculator)
Further Mathematics
Mathematics
Statistics
Integrated Science
Biology
Physical Science
Agriculture
Physics
Chemistry
Human and Social Biology
Woodwork
Metalwork
Fashion and Fabrics
Food and Nutrition/Food Science
Computer Studies/Computing
Building Studies
Technical Graphics
Commerce
Commercial Studies
Accounting
Geometric and Mechanical/Building Drawing
Business Studies
SCHEDULE B2: LIST OF SUBJECTS THAT CANNOT BE COUNTED AS

SEPARATE SUBJECTS
?
Accounting cannot be counted with Accounts or Principles of Accounts or
Commerce.
?
Afrikaans cannot be counted with Dutch.
?
Art cannot be counted with History of Art.
?
Biology cannot be counted with Rural Biology, Zoology, Botany or General
Science.
?
Bookkeeping cannot be counted with Principles of Accounts or Accounts
or Accounting.
?
British Constitution cannot be counted with Government and Politics or
Constitutional Law.
?
Chemistry cannot be counted with Physical Science, Physics with
Chemistry or General Science.
?
Computer Science cannot be counted with Computing Science or
Computing Studies.
?
Constitutional Law cannot be counted with Government and
Politics.
?
Divinity cannot be counted with Religious Knowledge or Religious
Studies.
?
Dutch cannot be counted with Afrikaans.
?
Economic Geography cannot be counted with Geography.
?
Economic Principles cannot be counted with Economics.
?
Economics cannot be counted with Commerce or Economic
Principles.
?
Economics International cannot be counted with Public Affairs or
Economics and Public Affairs.
?
Elementary Mathematics cannot be counted with Mathematics.
?
Elementary Physiology cannot be counted with Human Biology.
?
Elements of Sociology cannot be counted with Sociology.
?
Engineering Drawing cannot be counted with Technical Drawing.
?
Environmental Studies cannot be counted with Geography.
?
Further Mathematics cannot be counted with Pure Mathematics,
Mathematics or Applied Mathematics.
?
General Science cannot be counted with Physics, Physical Science,
Physics with Chemistry, Biology, Zoology, Botany or Rural Botany.
?
Geography cannot be counted with Economic Geography.
?
Geometrical and Mechanical drawing cannot be counted with Technical
or Engineering Drawing.
?
Government and Political Studies cannot be counted with Government
and Politics.
?
Health Science cannot be counted with Human Biology.
?
History International cannot be counted with History or Ancient
History.
?
Human Biology cannot be counted with Zoology, Biology, Health
Science.
?
Mathematics, Pure and Applied may not be counted with Mathematics
Pure or Mathematics Applied.
?
Physical Science cannot be counted with Physics, Chemistry, Physics-with
Chemistry or General Science.
?
Physics-with-Chemistry cannot be counted with Physics, Chemistry,
?
Physical Science or General Science.
?
Political Studies cannot be counted with Government Politics.
?
Social Science cannot be counted with Government Politics.
?
Zoology cannot be counted with Human Biology or Health Science.
Only one of the following may be counted:

British Constitution
General Principles of English Law
Constitutional Law
SCHEDULE C1:
4.6.11 a person who has obtained a degree of this or another
University;
4.6.12 a person who has obtained a degree of the Council for
National Academic Awards in the United Kingdom;
4.6.13 a person who has obtained a Certificate in Education of this
University at an Associate College of the University;
4.6.13.1
a person who has obtained from a University

or Institution of similar status, academic
qualifications (other than degrees) acceptable to
the Senate;
4.6.13.2 a person who has obtained an appropriate
number of Subjects at an approved examination
equivalent to the standard of the Ordinary Level
of the Zimsec or the General Certificate of
Education Examination and has subsequently
passed an equivalent examination at a University
acceptable to Senate;
4.6.13.3 a person who has obtained the Diploma in Social
Work of this University through the School of
Social Work in Harare.
21

POSTGRADUATE DEGREES OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE
SCHEDULE D1:
CATEGORIES OF ACCEPTABLE CIRCUMSTANCES FOR GRANTING FIRST
ATTEMPT EXAMINATIONS(S)

MASTERS DEGREES
BY COURSEWORK
The granting of a first attempt examination is at the discretion of the Senate.

1. Medical grounds
A student may be granted a first attempt examination where he or she is
suffering from a medical condition which precludes him or her from
writing a prescribed formal examination. Such first attempt examination
will only be granted where a verifiable letter or verifiable medical records
from a registered medical practitioner are provided in support of the
application. The document or documents must:
1.

1.1
(a) provide details on the nature of the illness and how it would have
adversely affected the student's capability to sit for the examination .
(b) bear the date and signature of the medical practitioner in his or her
own handwriting.
1.2
1.3
Bereavement
22
1.4
A student may apply for a first attempt examination where, in the period
immediately preceding an examination or examinations a close member of
his or here immediate family had died. Granting of such a first attempt shall
be dependent on the Senate determining that the death would have adversely
affected the student's capacity to write the examination. Such application
must be supported by either a death certificate or an affidavit from the police
in the area where the death occurred, verifying the death.
Normally, a student should seek prior permission from the Dean of the Faculty
to attend to the death of the relative.
1.5
2
The Senate shall be the final authority for the interpretation of

these regulations.
The Senate reserves the right to alter, amend, cancel, suspend or
replace any of these Regulations.
The Senate has the power to exempt any student from any of the
regulations.
A student who has started a programme of study following one
set of regulations shall not be affected by regulations
subsequently adopted unless agreed to in writing by the
student.
There shall be academic regulations for each Faculty which shall
be subject to approval by the Senate and which shall include
provisions for admission to Programmes, Subjects and Courses
within the Faculty and schemes of examinations for these
programmes.
The General Academic Regulations shall take precedence over
the Faculty Regulations.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
In these regulations, the following shall be used as described:
Force majeure - unforeseen circumstances:
Academic year:
A student may be granted a first attempt examination where he or she

establishes to the satisfaction of the Senate that through no fault or error on
their own part he or she was precluded from writing the examination. Such
application must be supported by verifiable evidence of the occurrence of
event or events and the effects of such events on the student's capacity to
write the examination or examination.
An academic year of study shall comprise 52

weeks including approved periods of vacation.
The commencement date of the academic year
for a given postgraduate degree programme
shall be set by the Senate. The academic year
may be divided into two complete semesters.
Assignment:
means a written or practical exercise to be

submitted by a student for assessment as a
component of the continuous assessment
requirements for a course as prescribed in the
relevant programme regulations.
Attachment:
means a period of time during which a student

is assigned to a suitable government, nong o v e r n m e n t , p r o fe s s i o n a l o r o t h e r
organisation, firm, other approved entity or to
an individual for the purpose of gaining
practical skills or experience.
Core Course:
means a compulsory course that must be

passed in a given programme.
Co-requisite course: means a course which must be taken before or

at the same time as a specified course.
Course Unit:

weighting given to a course in a specified
programme in such a manner that the total of
the weights of the courses in an academic year
is 120 course units.
Course:
means a separately examinable component of a

programme.
Dissertation:
means a written report documenting and

describing the research process, findings and
analysis of the findings of a project.
Module:
means a component of a course that may be

assigned a weighting in course units but is not
separately examinable
means a defined portion of a Programme.
Part:
Plagiarism:
means, the submission by a student of the work

of another person as his/her own, or the
unattributed incorporation of all or part of the
work of another person, either deliberately or
negligently, into a work being produced for
academic assessment and/or examination.
Practical Course:
means a course in which a student is required to

carry out practical exercises under supervision.
Prerequisite course: means a course that must be passed before the

Programme:
means a plan of study lasting over a specified
period of time which leads to the award of a
Masters degree of the University.
Project:
means research, a clinical investigation, design,

artistic or practical work undertaken by a
student, either as a course or part of a course
Repeat:
Semester:
Subject:
Withdraw:
which may, depending on the academic

regulations for the programme for which she or
he is registered, be presented in the form of a
dissertation or report, a script, musical or
artistic composition or work, a model, a design,
a visual or oral recording, in an appropriate
digital or other electronic format, or in such
form as may be designated in the regulations
for a specific programme of study.
means the student may apply for re-admission
into the same Programme and his/her
application will be considered through the
normal admission procedures. If a student is
repeating a Course(s), he/she shall only be
credited with the marks obtained during the
'repeat' examination. Nevertheless, where this
is provided in the Faculty Regulations, a 'repeat'
student may be exempted from re-examination
in any Course(s) in which he/she previously
passed, or may take another approved Course
or other approved Courses instead of the
Course(s) previously passed.
means a specified period of time normally
consisting of fifteen (15) weeks.
means a field of study within a Programme
offered by a Department.
means that the student must withdraw from
the University. This measure would normally be
taken in respect of a student who failed either in
two programmes or twice in one Part of one
programme. Once 'withdrawn' the student may
not apply again for admission until after a
period of two years has elapsed.
PROGRAMMES
3.1 Taught Masters Degree programmes offered by the University are
listed in Schedule A.
3.2 The current and updated Schedule A shall be kept in the office of
the Deputy Registrar (Academic) and may be amended from time
to time by the Senate.
23
24
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
4.1
4.1.1
Eligibility for Admission

Normally, applicants must have obtained an appropriate
Honours Degree.
4.1.2
Applicants with a general degree or approved equivalent

qualification may be considered by Senate on the
recommendation of the Department(s) and Dean(s)
concerned. Normally, such applicants should also possess
relevant experience and may be required to pass a
qualifying examination set by the University prior to Senate
deciding on their acceptability for admission.
4.2
4.2.1
Submission of Applications for admission

Applications must be submitted on the official forms
provided through the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
4.2.2
Application forms must be submitted by the closing dates

as advertised through the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
Late applications may be considered upon payment of
prescribed late application fee.
4.3
4.3.1
General Provisions
Every student must satisfy the University that he/she has an
adequate command of the English Language.
4.3.2
Prior to admission to any Programme, a student must

complete the registration formalities of the University.
4.3.3
A student may not register simultaneously for more than one

Programme at the University without the permission of
Senate.
4.3.4
Registration will take place in accordance with the

arrangements prescribed each year through the Deputy
4.3.5
Normally, no student shall be admitted to any Programme or

any Course more than two weeks after its commencement.
Any exception to this regulation must have the written
endorsement of the Chairperson of the Department and the
Dean concerned and will be subject to approval through the
A student's registration shall not be confirmed until he/she
has fulfilled the requirements for the payment of fees.
4.3.6
4.3.7
A student registered for a programme is expected to attend

all classes prescribed for such programme. Where tutorials,
seminars, fieldwork, vacation work and practical sessions are
prescribed, a student is required to attend and to complete
any assignments set.
4.3.8
A student who enters or returns to the University late shall

not be entitled to special tuition. Such a student shall be
liable to pay the late registration fine, unless the Deputy
Registrar (Academic) has given permission for such late
registration.
4.3.9
A student who is unable to attend classes for valid reasons for

longer than 72 hours must notify the appropriate Faculty
Office of the facts as soon as possible and submit
certification in support thereof. A medical certificate will
only be accepted from a medical practitioner registered in
accordance with the Health Professions Act. Where possible
a student should seek permission from the Dean on the
recommendation of the Chairperson(s) of Department(s)
concerned prior to such absence.
4.3.10 The University reserves the right to defer a student's
registration in a given programme if fewer than five (5)
students are registered for that Programme.
5
5.1
The duration of a Masters Programme by coursework shall

be Either ONE academic year or 18 months or TWO academic
years on a full-time basis;
Or TWO or THREE or FOUR academic years on a part-time
basis, as specified in the Faculty Regulations.
Note: Other Masters Degrees in Medicine shall be an
exception to this rule.
5.2
Normally, total number of course units in a Masters

programme shall be a minimum of 120 and a maximum of
240 course units.
5.3
Normally, a student who postpones completion of a Masters

programme shall not retain credit for the courses previously
passed if the student fails to resume studies within a period of
two years.
The maximum period of study of a degree programme is
twice the normal duration commencing from the date of
initial registration. A student who fails to complete the
5.4
programme by the end of the maximum period shall be

required to withdraw from the programme.
5.5
A Masters programme may be divided into Parts. Faculty

regulations shall specify the requirements for proceeding
from one Part to the next.
5.6
The possible combination of courses within a programme

shall be in accordance with the Faculty Regulations. A
student's selection of courses shall be subject to approval by
the Departmental Board(s) and the Dean(s) concerned.
5.7
For a given Masters programme, the courses and their

weightings shall be included in the Faculty Regulations.
Detailed syllabus for courses will not form part of the General
or Faculty Regulations, but shall be submitted to the
Academic Committee for approval when a new course or
programme is first introduced. Subsequent amendments to
such syllabus shall be submitted to the appropriate Faculty
Board(s) for approval.
Each course examined in a programme shall be allocated a
course code for use in computerized student records, such
code shall be alpha/numeric:
5.8
5.8.1 alphabetical codes being used to identify programmes and

subjects;
5.8.2 numerical codes being used to identify the individual course
and the level of that course;
5.8.3 A schedule of courses and their codes shall be prepared and
maintained by the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
5.9 A Masters Programme shall contain a taught component as
well as a research component. The research component shall
comprise between 30% and 40% of the entire programme.
5.10 The Departmental Board shall assign to each student
undertaking a research project at least one member of staff as
the supervisor.
5.11 Students shall be informed in advance of the deadline for
submission of dissertations or project reports. Unless prior
permission for an extension of this deadline has been granted
by the Academic Committee, any candidate who fails to meet
this submission deadline shall normally fail the dissertation or
project. An application for extension shall only be considered
by the Academic Committee if submitted at least one (1)
month prior to the deadline.
EXAMINATIONS
6.1 Formal examinations in coursework shall be taken by students
either midway through, or at the end of each Part of the degree
Programme as determined by Senate and as prescribed in the
6.2 External examiners shall normally be appointed to moderate
all formal examinations (except supplementary examinations
for which question papers may be referred to the External
examiner). External Examiners will normally be appointed to
moderate end of course examination question papers. If
visiting, the external examiner shall moderate the
examination marks in all courses taught in that academic year.
6.3 All matters relating to the conduct of formal examinations
shall be the responsibility of the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
6.4
To be admitted to a formal course examination, a student
must be registered for that course and as a student of the
University in accordance with these regulations. In addition,
the student must: have satisfactorily completed approved
Courses of study at the University. 'Satisfactory completion' of
Courses may require submission of written work, attendance
at lectures, seminars, tutorials and other activities as stated in
the Faculty Regulations.
6.5
Exclusion from a formal examination shall require the
authority of Senate.
6.6
The Examiners may require a student to attend a viva voce
6.7
A student who fails to attend a scheduled examination
without a valid and verified reason shall be awarded a mark of
zero for that examination.
6.8
Misconduct by a student during an examination may lead to
disciplinary action against the student in accordance with the
relevant rules of student conduct and discipline.
7.1
Candidates shall be assessed on the basis of their
performance in both coursework and the research work
components of the programme.
7.2
Coursework shall be examined by continuous assessment
and by written and/or practical examinations.
7.3
Each department shall determine which items of coursework
will be included in the continuous assessment and shall
define relative weighting assigned to each item. Each
department shall inform the students of these details at the
beginning of the Course and shall maintain written records of
each student's performance in these elements of coursework.
Items incorporated in the continuous assessment may
25
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
26
D denotes Distinction; M denotes Merit; C denotes Credit,

P denotes Pass F denotes fail as set out in table 7.10 S denotes
supplementary. This means either that the student is allowed
to resubmit the project or dissertation within a period as
specified in the Faculty Regulations or that the student who
fails but obtains a mark of at least 40% in the course or subject
may be allowed a second attempt in the formal examination of
that course or subject.
include assignments, tests, essays, projects and laboratory

work.
Research work shall be examined by a dissertation.
Departmental Boards shall administer anti-plagiarism
screening to all submitted dissertations/theses using an antiplagiarism software approved by Senate. Normally, only
dissertations/theses exhibiting no evidence of plagiarism
shall be marked.
Candidates must satisfy the examiners in both the
coursework and the research work components.
Normally, assessment shall be based on continuous
assessment and end of course examinations. Unless
otherwise approved by Senate, continuous assessment will
count for between 25% and 50% of the overall mark as
determined at the beginning of the course by the examiners
concerned.
The weighting assigned to these components for assessment
purposes shall normally be in the same proportion to the time
assigned to these components in the Programme structure
(Regulation 5.8 refers).
A dissertation or project report submitted for examination
shall normally be marked by the supervisor and one other
examiner, apart from the external examiner.
7.10 The following marking scheme and designations shall be

adopted for all courses and degree classification:
7.11 The result of a course for each student shall be
designated by an appropriate symbol from the following list:
Table 7
MARK
GRADE
(FOR COURSES)
DIVISION
(FOR DEGREE CLASS)
PASS WITH DISTINCTION
70 79%
PASS WITH MERIT
60 69%
PASS WITH CREDIT
50 59%
PASS
BELOW 50%
FAIL
80 100%
means that, having failed the course, the student must repeat
the course or take another approved course in accordance
with the Faculty Regulations;
means that the final decision on the course is deferred;
means that the student did not study the course for which
he/she was registered and is therefore presumed to have
withdrawn from the course;
means that the student failed the course or programme and

has been required to withdraw from the University.
Means that, due to verified extenuating circumstances

accepted by the Senate the student is allowed to sit for a
special examination in a course, in accordance with Regulation
9.2.6.
means failure in a course or project in the range indicated in

7.10 above.

8.1 Examination results shall be processed by Departmental
Panels of Examiners and Faculty Boards of Examiners.
8.2 A Departmental Panel of Examiners shall comprise all fulltime lecturing staff in that department, the External
Examiner(s) and, where appropriate, determined by the
Departmental panel, part-time lecturers and/or teaching
assistants for the Courses concerned.
8.3 A Faculty Board of Examiners shall comprise the Dean and
Deputy Dean of the Faculty and, from each Department
involved in the programme(s) for that examination, the
Chairman plus at least one other academic member of the
Department nominated by the Departmental Panel of
Examiners and the External Examiner, if visiting.
8.4 The Dean of the Faculty shall normally preside over the Faculty
Board of Examiners and shall have a casting vote.
8.5 The Departmental Panel of Examiners shall:

8.5.1 Agree, for each candidate, marks in terms of
percentages, for the continuous assessment, for the
formal examinations and for the coursework
component overall (combining the continuous
assessment marks and the formal examination marks in
Courses as required by the Faculty Regulations). It
should also agree on a mark for the dissertation. Where
all components of the Programme are under the Panel's
jurisdiction it may also agree an overall mark, in terms of
percentages, for the Part/Programme (combining
marks for the coursework component and for the
research component).
8.5.2 Recommend to the Faculty Board of Examiners whether
a candidate should pass or fail the relevant Course(s)
taken.
8.5.3 Where Programme/Course prizes are available for
award, make recommendations for the award of these
prizes.
8.6 The Faculty Board of Examiners shall:
1.6.1 Consider the recommendations of the Panels of
Examiners and recommend to Senate an overall result
for each candidate and any other conditions as it may
deem appropriate;
1.6.2 Make recommendations to Senate with regard to the
award of any prizes which may be available for
candidates within the Programme.
1.6.3 In determining results, all Departmental Panels of
Examiners and Faculty Boards of Examiners shall have
regard to all special requirements as prescribed in the
9
DETERMINATION OF THE RESULTS

9.1
Results shall be determined by Senate on recommendations
from Faculty Boards of Examiners having considered
recommendations from Departmental Panel of Examiners.
9.2
The result for each student will normally be any one of the
following:
PASS WITH DISTICTION
PASS WITH MERIT
PASS WITH CREDIT
PASS
PASS: PROCEED
INCOMPLETE: PROCEED
INCOMPLETE: PENDING
INCOMPLETE: WRITE SUPPLEMENTARY
EXAMINATIONS
INCOMPLETE: WRITE EXAMINATION AS A FIRST
ATTEMPT
INCOMPLETE: CLEAR OUTSTANDING COURSES
PRESUMED WITHDRAWN
WITHDRAW
DISCONTINUE
9.2.1 PASS WITH DISTINCTION or PASS WITH MERIT or PASS
WITH CREDIT or PASS shall apply to a graduating student
who has fulfilled all the requirements for the award of the
degree according to the marking scheme in Regulation 7.8.
9.2.2 PASS: PROCEED means the student has fulfilled all the
requirements to proceed to the subsequent Part, in
accordance with the Faculty Regulations.
9.2.3 INCOMPLETE: PROCEED means that the student may
proceed to the next Part carrying failed courses, in
accordance with the Faculty Regulations.
9.2.4 I N C O M P L E T E : W R I T E S U P P L E M E N T A R Y
EXAMINATION(S) means that, in accordance with the
General and Faculty regulations, the student is allowed to
write supplementary examinations in the indicated failed
courses.
9.2.5 INCOMPLETE: PENDING means that the profile of results
for the student is incomplete and no final decision can be
made at that point in time.
9.2.6 INCOMPLETE: WRITE EXAMINATION(S) AS FIRST
ATTEMPT means that, for valid reasons supported by
appropriate documentary evidence, and as determined by
the Senate, a student failed to write or complete an
examination at the scheduled time. In this case a special
examination shall be set for the student.
9.2.7 INCOMPLETE: CLEAR OUTSTANDING COURSES means
that the student has not filled all the requirements to
proceed to a subsequent Part of graduate and shall clear all
the outstanding courses before proceeding to a
subsequent Part of graduating.
27
9.2.8
PRESUMED WITHDRAWN means that a student was

registered for a given programme but has not attended
any class sessions nor submitted any written work for
assessment and has not presented himself/herself for the
end of course examinations for the semester under
consideration.
9.2.9 WITHDRAW means that a student will not be allowed to

register for any course or programme at the University
until after a period of four consecutive semesters has
elapsed. This measure will normally be taken if a student at
the end of an academic year of her/his programme, other
than the first, has an accumulated credit of less than 60
times the number of academic years she or he has been
registered for that programme.
9.2.10 DEFER means that a student was registered for a given
programme but has not been able to write the final
examination because of short term illness of
circumstances beyond the control of the student, or was
absent for some other compelling reason.
28
9.2.11 DISCONTINUE means that a student may no longer be

allowed to proceed with the programme in which he or she
has failed to meet the prescribed requirements for the
completion of level one of that programme, but such a
student need not necessarily withdraw from the
University. He or she may apply for admission into a
different programme and his or her application will be
considered through the normal admission procedures.
In appropriate cases, a student may return credit for
previously passed relevant courses.
If a student has discontinued from two programmes, he or she will be
required to withdraw from the University.
9.3 Faculty Regulations shall stipulate how decisions in 9.2 shall
be implemented.
9.4 P rov i s i o n s fo r Pa s s i n g a n d / o r P ro c e e d i n g i n a
Programme:
9.4.1 A candidate shall be deemed to have passed a Programme
or a Part thereof if he/she has satisfied the examiners in
accordance with the requirements prescribed in the

relevant Faculty Regulations.
9.4.2 Faculty Regulations shall indicate which courses must be
passed before a candidate may be allowed to proceed to a
subsequent Part of the Programme or portion thereof or
to complete the requirements of the Programme.
9.4.3 Normally, a student shall not be allowed to proceed to the
final Part of any Programme unless he/she has completed
all the requirements for the first Part of that Programme as
specified in Faculty Regulations.
9.4.4 A student who passes sufficiently well in one Part in
aggregate may be permitted to proceed to a subsequent
Part carrying a Course or Courses subject to the provisions
in Faculty Regulations and to timetable feasibility.[see Reg
9.2.3]
9.5 Failure to Satisfy the Examiners
A candidate who fails to satisfy the examiners in terms of the
Faculty Regulations may be required by Senate to 'withdraw', or
to 'repeat' or to write 'supplementary examinations'.
9.6
Supplementary Examinations
9.6.1 The Senate may allow a candidate to attempt a
supplementary examination to enable him/her to pass a
Part of a Programme or to proceed to the next Part in
terms of the Faculty Regulations.
9.6.2 Normally, supplementary examinations shall be held
approximately two months after the results have been
released.
9.6.3 To be eligible for a supplementary examination, a student
must normally obtain a mark of at least 40% in the Course
or Subject to be supplemented in the formal examinations
for that Course. Normally supplementary examinations
will not be awarded in more than half of the Courses for
any one Part of a Programme.
9.6.4 Where supplementary examinations have been allowed,
the examiners will not incorporate continuous assessment
in the determination of the final mark for the
supplementary examination.
9.6.5 A student who passes a supplementary examination
should be awarded a mark of 50% and the result recorded
as : Pass
9.6.6 If a student is required to attempt a supplementary
examination, this fact and the result obtained in the
supplementary examinations of 'Pass' or 'Fail' shall be
recorded on the official transcript of academic record.
9.7 Re-Presentation of Dissertation

9.7.1 On the recommendation of the Examiners, a student who
fails the dissertation or project may be permitted to submit
the dissertation or project at a later date, normally within
three months of the original submission deadline.
9.7.2 Where circumstances justify such action, the Board of
Examiners may recommend to Senate that:
either the candidate be permitted to re-present his/her
dissertation in revised form, within three months of the
decision of Senate in that regard;
or
the candidate be required to make editorial
amendments to his/her dissertation before lodgement of
the final bound copies of the dissertation.
9.8 Repeat of Dissertation
9.8.1 On the recommendation of examiners, a student who fails a
dissertation may be allowed to apply to repeat the
dissertation provided that he/she pursues a different topic.
9.9 Normally a student shall retain credit for all previously passed
courses for a period of not more than twice the duration of the
programme.
9.10 The final authority in the determination of the examination results
rests with the Senate.
9.11 The correct and authentic record of the examination results of a
student, as approved by the Academic Committee, shall be that
which is kept by the office of the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
10 AWARD OF THE DEGREE
10.1 The requirements for the award of a degree shall be stipulated
in
the Faculty Regulations. The Faculty Regulations shall
specify how the final overall mark for the programme shall be
computed for the purposes of classifying the degree.
10.2 The classification of the degree shall be in accordance with the
marking scheme in Regulation 7.9.
11
ACADEMIC OFFENCES AND PENALTIES

Academic offences and penalties as specified in the General
Academic Regulations for Undergraduate Programmes (Schedule
B) shall equally apply to these Regulations.
12
POSTHUMOUS AND AEGROTAT PROVISIONS

12.1.1
If a student who dies in his/her final year of study in a

given postgraduate programme had completed a
substantial component of that year's study, the
relevant Departmental Panel(s) of Examiners and the
Faculty Board of Examiners may recommend to the
Senate the award of the degree posthumously
provided that there is clear evidence that the student
had demonstrated consistent progress prior to
his/her death.
12.1.2 The overall result for a deceased student awarded a

degree posthumously shall be POSTHUMOUS
AWARD
12.2.1 If a student in the final year of study in a programme,
having completed a substantial component of the
programme, is prevented by serious illness from
completing the prescribed requirements for the
award of the degree, the Departmental Panel(s) of
Examiners and the Faculty Board of Examiners may
recommend the award of the degree provided that it is
established by a medical certificate that the
incapacitation is permanent or that the illness is
terminal.
12.2.2 The overall result for a student who qualifies for the
aegrotat award of the degree shall be PASS:
AEGROTAT AWARD.
12.2.3 The aegrotat provisions shall not apply to a candidate
registered in a programme in the Faculty of
Engineering or in the Faculty of Medicine or in the
Faculty of Veterinary Science or registered for the M
Sc (Clinical Psychology), (Occupational Psychology)
degrees.
12.3 A degree awarded under the posthumous and aegrotat
provisions shall be without classification.
29
13
14.8 The Appeals Committee will consider as legitimate grounds

for appeal:
PUBLICATION OF EXAMINATION RESULTS

publication of examination results as approved by the
Academic Committee.
14.8.1
13.2 A student's results shall be posted on University of Zimbabwe

website by the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
14.8.2 extenuating circumstances of a 'force majeure' nature

which explain and are directly relevant to the
student's unsatisfactory academic performance, such
as serious illness or other disability or circumstances
which he/she could not reasonably have been
expected to have foreseen or avoided.
13.3 The examination results of a student who owes any

outstanding monies to the University shall be withheld from
publication.
13.4 All lists of results released by the Deputy Registrar (Academic)
shall be endorsed with the proviso SUBJECT TO
RATIFICATION BY THE SENATE.
14
14.9 The Committee shall be empowered to hear an appellant orally

and to seek all such information or evidence, as it may consider
pertinent. No right to oral hearing is conferred upon an
appellant and the University will not reimburse any expenses
incurred by an appellant in making a personal appearance
before the Committee.
STUDENT APPEALS AGAINST PUBLISHED RESULTS

14.1 The Senate shall establish an Appeals Committee to consider
student appeals against published results.
14.2 Any student has a right to appeal against his/her results.
30
14.3 A student who wishes to lodge an appeal against his/her

published results must do so in writing to the Deputy Registrar
(Academic) within 21 working days of the University after the
publication of the examination results.
14.4 Each appellant shall be levied a prescribed fee for the appeal. A
schedule of the levies can be obtained from the Deputy
Registrar (Academic). No appeal shall be considered until such
levies have been paid.
14.5 If an appeal is successful, the appellant shall be refunded the
fees paid; otherwise the appellant forfeits the money.
14.6 On appeal, the student must state clearly the grounds of the
appeal. A medical practitioner registered in terms of the
Health Professions Act must substantiate medical grounds in
writing. Any other evidence that the candidate wishes to
submit in support of his/her case must also be lodged with the
written appeal.
14.7 The Deputy Registrar (Academic) shall obtain comments and
recommendations from the relevant Faculty which, together
with the appeals, may be referred to the Appeals Committee
for consideration.
new evidence of mitigating circumstances (except

mere lack of diligence or other fault on the part of the
student) which was not previously available to the
examiners; and
15
14.10
The Committee shall make a decision in each case, as it deems

appropriate. Its decision shall be submitted to the Academic
Committee for noting.
14.11
The Deputy Registrar (Academic) shall notify in writing each

appellant of the results of his/her appeal, which result shall be
final.
ACADEMIC TRANSCRIPT
15.1 Each graduate of the University shall receive ONE copy of a
formal transcript of his/her complete academic record at the
University.
15.2 A prescribed fee shall be charged for a duplicate (subsequent
to the issue of the original transcript) or for a transcript
requested before completion of studies.
15.3 An Academic Transcript of the University of Zimbabwe is
issued without any alterations and carries a signed official
stamp of the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
16
AWARD OF A DEGREE CERTIFICATE OF THE UNIVERSITY OF

ZIMBABWE
16.1
The award of a degree Certificate of the University of

Zimbabwe shall be subject to approval by the University
Council.
16.2
A student completing the requirements for such an award

will be entitled to receive a formal certificate of the
University, bearing the seal of the University and signed by
the Vice-Chancellor and the Registrar, confirming the
award.
16.3
If, subsequent to the award of a degree to a student, it is

discovered that there were gross irregularities and
impropriety involved in the award, the University Council, on
the recommendation of the Senate, reserves the right to
withdraw the award and cancel the certificate.
16.4
3.
A duplicate certificate may be issued on the payment of a

prescribed fee.
4.
The following are Masters Degrees by coursework offered by the University:

Faculty of Agriculture
Master of Science Degree in AgriculturalEconomics
(MSAE)
Master of Science Degree in Animal Science

Master of Science Degree in Crop Protectio
Master of Science Degree in Crop Science
Master of Science Degree in Dairy Science and Technology
(MAS)
(MCP)
(MRC)
(MAV)
Faculty of Arts
Master of Arts (MA) in the following Subjects:
African Economic History
African History
African Languages and Literature
Classics
Faculty of Commerce
Master of Science Degree in Tourism and
Hospitality Management
Master of Business Administration Degree
Masters degree in Strategic Marketing
Master of Accountancy degree
(Msc THM)
(MBA)
(MSM)
(MACC)
Faculty of Education
31
(MEH)
(MAFH)
(MAFL)
(MCL)
Adult Education
(MEd AE)
Curriculum Studies
Administration, Planning & Policy Studies
Educational Foundation
Educational Psychology
Science and Mathematics Education
Teacher Education
Technical Education
Master of Science Degree (M Sc) in Educational Psychology
(MEd CS)
(MEd APPS)
(MEF)
(MEP)
(MESM)
(METE)
Msc TE)
(MSc Epsych)
Curriculum and Arts
MASTERS DEGREES BY COURSEWORK OFFERED BY THE UNIVERSITY
2.
(MCMS)
(MEL)
(MESL)
(MAHS)
(MFR)
(MLSP)
(MRS)
(MPL)
(MWAR)
(MEPP)
(MATP)
(MAL)
(MLG)
Master of Education Degree (M Ed) in the following subjects:
SCHEDULE A
1.
Communication and Media Studies

English
English as a Second Language
Heritage Studies
French
Language for Specific Purposes
Religious Studies
Philosophy
War and Strategic Studies
Environmental Policy and Planning
Theatre and Performance
Applied Linguistics
General Linguistics
5.
(Med CA)
Faculty of Engineering
Master of Science Degree in Communication Engineering
Master of Science Degree in Highway Engineering
Master of Science Degree in Integrated Water
Resources Management
Master of Science Degree in Land and Geographic
Information Systems
Master of Science Degree in Renewable Energy
Master of Science Degree in Water Resources
Engineering and Management
Master of Science Degree in Minerals Production
(MCE)
(MHE)
(IWRM)
(MLGIS)
(MRE)
(MWREM)
Engineering and Management

Master of Science Degree in Manufacturing Systems and
Operations Management
Master of Science Degree in Power Engineering
(MPEM)
(MSOM)
(MPE)
6.
Faculty of Law
Master of Laws Degree
Masters in Women's Law
(LLM)
(MWL)
7.
Faculty of Science
9.
Master of Science Veterinary Degrees (MSC) in the following

Subjects:
Veterinary Anatomy
Veterinary Biochemistry
Veterinary Physiology
Veterinary Epidemiology
Small Animal Medicine
Ruminant Medicine
Tsetse and Trypanosomiasis Control
Veterinary Pathology
Veterinary Microbiology
Veterinary Parasitology
Master of Science Degrees (MSc) in the following Subjects:

Agricultural Meteorology
Analytical Chemistry
Applied Physics
Biotechnology
Chemistry
Exploration Geology
Exploration Geophysics
Geography and Environmental Science
Mathematics
Plant Physiology
Statistics
Tropical Entomology
Tropical Hydrobiology and Fisheries
Tropical Phytopathology
Tropical Resource Ecology
32
8.
(MAGM)
(MACH)
(MAPH)
(MBTC)
(MCH)
(MXGL)
(MXPH)
(MSGE)
(MMT)
(MPP)
(MSTC)
(MTE)
(MTFH)
(MTP)
(MTRE)
Faculty of Social Studies

Master of Science Degree (MSc) in the following subjects:
Clinical Psychology
Economics
Rural and Urban Planning
International Relations
Population Studies
Public Administration
Social Ecology
Social Work
Sociology and Social Anthropology
Occupational Psychology
(MCPSY)
(MEC)
(MRUP)
(MIR)
(MPOS)
(MPA)
(SOEC)
(MSW)
(MS&SA)
(MOPS)
Faculty of Veterinary Science
10.
(MVA)
(MVB)
(MVSCPY)
(MVVE)
(MVSCSAM)
(MVCSRM)
(MVTT)
(MVVP)
(MVVM)
(MVVPS)
College of Health Sciences

Master of Science Degree in the following Subjects:
Clinical Epidemiology
Nursing Science
Clinical Biochemistry
Physiotherapy
Biostatistics
(MCEMP)
(MCPC)
(MNS)
(MBC)
(MPT)
(MBST)
(MMB)
Master of Medicine Degree in the following Subjects:

General Medicine
Anaesthetics
Histopathology
Medicine
Ophthalmology
Pathology
Paediatrics
Psychiatry
Radiology and Oncology
Surgery
Urological Surgery
The Masters Degree in Clinical Biochemistry
The Masters Degree in Clinical Pharmacy
The Masters Degree in Public Health
Neurosurgery
Radiotherapy and Oncology
Urology
[Mmed (Gen Med)]

[MMed (Anaes)]
[MMed (Hist)]
[MMed (Med)]
[MMed (Med Micro)]
[MMed (O&G)]
[MMed (Ophthal)]
[MMed (Path)]
[MMed (Paed)]
[MMed (Psych)]
[MMed (R&O)]
[MMed (Sur)]
[MMed (US)]
(MCB)
(MCP)
(MPH)
(MNSG)
(MRO)
(MUG)
4.2 annotates, embellishes, adapts any permitted books, notes, written

work on any kind of material, any electronic calculating, recording or
playback device, any communicating and or sending and receiving
device whether his or her own property, or that of another or
supplied by the examining authority or body with written materials,
programmes, information however recorded which are not
permitted to be used by such student in such examination, test or
assessment;
Masters degrees in the following programmes:

Dentistry (Orthodontics)
(MDent)
General Medicine
(MDGM)
Public Health
(MPH)
Public Health (Health Promotion)
(MPHHP)
SCHEDULE B
4.3 brings into the room or place where the examination, test or
assessment is taking place any answer book, whether blank or
otherwise, any writing, blotting or other paper or brings in any
material or materials not permitted in the examination in terms of
the relevant regulations or examination instructions issued for that
course or programme;
1. This regulation should be read in conjunction with the University of

Zimbabwe Regulations for the Conduct of Examinations and the Student
Disciplinary Regulations.
2. With the exception of the application of the paragraph 5.1 the procedures
laid down for the conduct of Student Disciplinary Committee and
Hearings shall be followed in relation to the determination of whether or
not a student is guilty of an academic offence.
4.4 communicates, attempts to communicate with any other person

within, outside or beyond the room or place in which an examination,
test or assessment is taking place contrary to the regulations or
instructions issued for the conduct of that examination, test or
assessment, for the purpose of obtaining assistance from or
providing assistance to such other candidate in the completion of the
examination, test or assignment;
3. A student who:
3.1 plagiarises wholly or in part work submitted for assessment and/or;
3.2 falsifies data or results in a practical course, in a practical exercise in
any course, in a dissertation or in a project and/ or;
4.5 leaves the room or place where the examination, test or assessment is
taking place and, contrary to the regulations for such course or
programme or instructions issued for such examination, test or
assessment, communicates with any other person, consults any
books, notes, written work on any kind of material, any electronic
calculating, recording or playback device, any communicating and or
sending and receiving device; shall be guilty of an academic offence.
3.3 fabricates data or results in a practical course, or in practical exercise

or in any course, in a dissertation or in a project and/or;
3.4 presents as his or her own data or results the work of another person,
except where the student and other person or person's were working
as a team in accordance with the relevant regulations or rules for that
course shall be guilty of an academic offence.
4. A student who:
4.1 takes into a room or place where an examination, test or other form
of assessment is taking place any books, notes, written or other work
on any kind of material, any electronic calculating, recording or
playback device, any communicating and or sending and receiving
device which is not permitted to be taken into the examination room
or place in terms of the relevant regulations or examination
instructions issued for that course or programme;
5.
A student who is guilty of an academic offence shall be liable to:

5.1 in relation to 3.1 to 3.4, an official warning, dependent on the severity
of the offence, from the lecturer conducting the course and, or the
Chairperson of Department and, or the Dean of the Faculty. Such
warning or warnings shall be noted for administrative purposes on
the official record of the student's performance maintained by the
University provided that:
5.2 if the offence for which the student is charged under 3.1 to 3.4 is
believed by the lecturer to be an aggravated one, or it is determined
that is a repeated academic offence, whether a repetition of the same
offence or of a different offence, the matter shall be referred to the
33
Student Disciplinary Committee and the student may be liable to the

cancellation of his or her registration for that course, the rendering
of a mark of zero for that component of the course or the whole
course, suspension or expulsion from the University. Provided that:
the Student Disciplinary Committee may recommend that a student
found guilty of plagiarism, falsification or fabrication of results may
be permitted to resubmit such work, or submit a new piece of work
for examination or assessment. Such recommendation may direct
that such new or resubmitted work shall receive a mark of not more
than 50%.
5.3 in relation to 4.1 to 4.5 dependent on the severity of the offence and
whether it is a repeated offence, whether a repetition of the same
offence or of a different offence, the cancellation of his or her
registration for that course, the rendering of a mark of zero for the
course or a component of that course, suspension or expulsion from
the University.
6.
34
A student who is charged with an academic offence, other than one that
may be disposed of in terms of 5.1, shall have his or her results for the
course or programme for which he or she is registered withheld until
such time as the Student Disciplinary Committee makes a determination
on the charges or the charges are not pursued.
The following has not been considered:

7. REGULATIONS FOR OCCASIONAL ENTRY (FOR NON-DEGREE STUDIES)
7.1 The following may apply for Occasional Entry (for non-degree
studies only):
7.1.1 a person who, for the purpose of admission into a course or
courses offered at undergraduate level, has passed 5 'O' Level
subjects including English Language, or equivalent;
OR
7.1.2 who, for the purpose of admission into a course or courses
offered at Postgraduate level, holds an approved degree in the
relevant areas;
AND
7.1.3 who, in addition to the provisions of either 15.1.1 or 15.1.2,
above, can prove to the satisfaction of the Academic
Committee or Senate that the course or courses he/she
proposes to study have a direct effect and purpose of
enhancing his/her knowledge, appreciation of, performance
of, or at his/her occupation, profession, or further studies
undertaken elsewhere other than the University of
Zimbabwe;
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
OR
7.1.4 a person who is a full-time registered student of a university
other than the University of Zimbabwe and who, through an
arrangement agreed upon by his/her University and the
University of Zimbabwe, may take a course or courses in the
University for credit or for improving his/her knowledge in
the area in which he/she is registered in his/her University,
for a period of one full academic year only.
Other than the category of persons mentioned in 15.1.4 above, no
person admitted as an Occasional Student may normally be
registered for more than two-thirds of full time load of courses
undertaken by a person registered as a full-time student in a
relevant programme.
Admission into a course or courses as an Occasional Student shall
normally be for one full academic year only at a time, and overall up
to a maximum of two-thirds the minimum number of years
prescribed for the completion of the programme on a full-time
basis.
Occasional Students shall be required to pay fees as set from time
to time in the Fees Ordinance.
Applications must normally be submitted on the official
Admissions form for Study for Non-Degree Purposes, and must be
submitted to the Admissions Office by 30 September of the year
preceding the year for which admission is sought. Late applications
may be considered until 31 October upon receipt of a late
application fee as set in the Fees ordinance from time to time.
Other than the category of persons mentioned in 15.1.4, and those
accepted to study courses offered in the Department of
Accountancy for the purpose of writing the Final Qualifying
Examination (FQE) of the Institute of Chartered Accountants
(Zimbabwe), students registered for non-degree studies shall not
be admitted into formal examinations of the University, and in all
cases, no student registered for non-degree purposes shall receive
accreditation of courses undertaken for the purpose of changing
his/her registration status in the University.
The admission of each applicant into the University as an
occasional student shall be subject to availability of places and
approval by the Academic Committee on behalf of Senate.

POSTGRADUATE DEGREES
OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF
PHILOSOPHY (MPHIL) AND DOCTOR OF
PHILOSOPHY (DPHIL) DEGREES
Field of study/research:
Plagiarism:
Programme:
1. APPLICATION OF THESE REGULATIONS
1.1
The Senate shall be the final authority for the interpretation
1.2
The Senate reserves the right to alter, amend, cancel,
suspend or replace any of these regulations.
1.3
The Senate has the power to exempt any student from any
of the regulations.
1.4
A student who has started a programme of study following
one set of regulations shall not be affected by regulations
subsequently adopted unless agreed to in writing by the
student.
Progress report:
Supervisor:
2. DEFINITION OF TERMS
In these regulations, the following shall be used as described:
Academic year:
Associate Supervisor:
Thesis:
Examiner:
means, for a postgraduate student

registered on an M Phil or D Phil
programme, the 12 months/52 weeks
cycle, effective from the first day the
student is registered on the programme.
means an appropriately qualified
academic/researcher appointed to assist
in the supervision of a student, in
particular in areas of his/her expertise.
describing the research process, findings
and analysis of a research project. It is
submitted by a student in fulfilment for
the award of a postgraduate degree
means a person with the relevant
Research:
Title of thesis:
Viva voce
expertise appointed under these

Regulations to examine a thesis
submitted by a student.
means a defined and recognized
component of a subject within which the
specific area chosen is contained.
means the submission by a student of the
work of another person as his/her own,
or the unattributed incorporation of all
or part of the work of another person,
either deliberately or negligently, into a
work being produced for academic
assessment and/or examination
means a plan of study lasting over a
specified period of time which leads to
the award of an MPhil/DPhil degree of
the University.
means a report written by the student
and endorsed by the Supervisor
cataloguing and explicating work done,
achievements attained, against the plan
of action in a research project for a
degree programme. The report should
also indicate stages to be undertaken in a
given time frame.
means an academic member of staff of
the University or approved institution,
appointed under these Regulations, with
the responsibility of guiding a particular
student with his/her research and
monitoring progress thereof.
means a careful study or investigation of
a perceived problem or phenomenon
leading to the discovery of new facts or
information as well as an improved
understanding of known facts or
phenomenon.
means a concise statement that
describes the subject and topic of the
research to be carried out and then
reported in a thesis.
means an examination conducted orally
or in an interview format by the Faculty
Board of Examiners in line with the
relevant provision of the General
35
Academic Regulations, to evaluate the skill or

knowledge of a candidate on his/her thesis
through a set of questions or exercises.
3.
4.
PROGRAMMES
3.1
The University offers the following postgraduate degrees,
carried out primarily through supervised research work:
3.1.1 the Master of Philosophy (M Phil) and
3.1.2 the Doctor of Philosophy (D Phil).
These degrees are offered in all Faculties and
Departments of the University.
3.2
The degrees may include an element of coursework not
exceeding 25% of the total Programme.
3.3
Fields of study or research are determined by Senate on the
recommendation of the Department and the Faculty Higher
Degrees Committee concerned.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
4.1
36
Eligibility to Apply for Admission

4.1.1 An applicant must have passed English Language at
Ordinary Level or approved equivalent.
4.1.2 Master of Philosophy Degree
a)
Normally, an applicant must have obtained an
appropriate Honours Degree in the Upper
Second or higher Division.
b)
An applicant who has obtained an appropriate
Honours Degree in the Lower Second or Third
Divisions may be considered provided that
he/she has achieved First or Upper Second Class
performance in their intended field of study.
c)
An applicant who has obtained a non-honours
degree or approved equivalent qualification and
has relevant experience may be considered by
Senate on the recommendation of the
Department and the Dean concerned. Such an
applicant may be required to pass a qualifying
examination set and organised by the
Department concerned who shall inform Senate,
through the Faculty Higher Degrees Committee
of the results of the examination. The candidate
must satisfy the examiners in the qualifying
examination prior to Senate's deciding on their
acceptability for admission.
4.1.3
Doctor of Philosophy Degree

An applicant must have obtained an appropriate Masters
Degree or have satisfied the requirements for transfer of
registration from the MPhil Degree to the DPhil degree.
4.2 Submission of Application for Admission

4.2.1 An intending applicant should first discuss his/her proposed
Programme with the Chairperson of the Department
concerned, to establish in general terms, whether this is
viable.
4.2.2 An application must be submitted on the official forms
provided through the Deputy Registrar (Academic). The
applicant must also submit, with these forms, a research
project proposal, of between 300 and 1200 words in length,
outlining the proposed study.
4.2.3 There are no deadlines for the submission of applications.
4.2.4 Acceptance/Rejection will be determined by Senate on the
recommendations of the Departmental Board through the
appropriate Faculty Higher Degrees Committee.
4.2.5 An applicant will be notified of the result of his/her
application by the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
4.2.6 A successful applicant should then proceed to registration.
4.3 Registration
4.3.1 Once the application has been accepted, the applicant must
complete the necessary registration formalities, which
include completion of the appropriate registration form
obtainable from the office of the Deputy Registrar
(Academic), payment to the Bursar's office of the required
fees, submission to the Deputy Registrar (Academic) of proof
of qualifications claimed in application and submission of a
Research proposal within six months of initial registration on
the programme.
4.3.2 If after six months of initial registration the student does not
submit a Research Proposal of an acceptable standard,
his/her registration on the Programme shall be cancelled
forthwith. Registration will not be effective until the above
formalities have been completed. In appropriate
circumstances, retrospective registration may be allowed.
4.3.3 Except with the special permission of Senate, a student may
not register concurrently for more than one programme of
study.
4.3.4 A student may be in receipt of a grant, scholarship or

fellowship from an restriction is placed by that body or person
upon presentation of a thesis resulting from the student's
work, or upon its deposit in the University Library for public
reference.
4.3.5 An applicant for the M Phil or D Phil degree of the University
of Zimbabwe who intends to carry out the major part or the
whole of the research at an approved Institution outside the
University shall be eligible to apply for registration provided
that:
a)
the institution at which the research is conducted is
so located as to make practicable a genuine contact
with the University and the facilities are suitable for
the work proposed; and,
b)
except with the agreement of Senate, no restriction is
placed by the authorities of the institution or
laboratory concerned upon presentation of thesis
resulting from the candidate's work, or upon its
deposit in the University Library for public reference.
4.3.6 Each student must renew his/her registration annually and
pay the fees as prescribed in the University's Fees
Ordinance.
Failure to do so may lead to deregistration from the
programme.
5. STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMMES
5.1 Studies for the M Phil and D Phil degrees may be pursued on a fulltime or on a part-time basis.
5.2 Duration of Programmes
5.2.1 Master of Philosophy
The normal duration of the M Phil Degree Programme shall
be as follows:
a)
On a full-time basis - minimum: 2 years and
maximum: 4 years;
b)
On a part-time basis - minimum: 3years and
maximum 6 years.
5.2.2 Doctor of Philosophy Degree
The normal duration of the D Phil Degree Programme shall
be as follows:
a)
b)
5.3
5.4
On a full-time basis - minimum: 3 years and

maximum: 5 years;
On a part-time basis - minimum: 4 years and
maximum 8 years.
Extension of Registration
5.3.1 If an extension of registration beyond the prescribed
maximum period is required, the student must submit
a written application through his/her Supervisor in
the first instance at least 3 months prior to the expiry
of the maximum period prescribed for the study.
5.3.2
The Dean of the Faculty concerned may grant an

extension of up to 6 months if the Supervisor and the
Faculty Higher Degrees Committee so recommend.
5.3.3
Any further extension may be approved only with the

authority of Senate on the recommendation of the
Faculty Higher Degrees Committee.
5.3.4
A student granted such an extension may be required

to transfer to Regulations current at the time of
granting of the extension.
Programme of Study
5.4.1 Each student is required to pursue a prescribed
programme of study under the direction of a
Supervisor, who shall be a member of the academic
staff of the University in the appropriate discipline.
Normally, one or more Associate Supervisors, either
from within or from outside the University, will be
appointed. If the major part of the student's research
programme is being conducted at an institution
outside the University, an Associate Supervisor at the
institution shall, where possible, be appointed.
5.4.2
The appointment of Supervisors shall be made by

Senate on the recommendations of the appropriate
Faculty Higher Degrees Committee.
5.4.3
A student may be required, as part of their

Programme, to complete elements of coursework to
enhance his/her research studies, provided that such
coursework shall amount to not more than 25% of the
minimum period allowed for the full Programme. The
prescription of any coursework element shall require
the approval of the Academic Committee on the
37
recommendation of the Departmental Board through

the Higher Degrees Committee concerned. Where
such coursework is prescribed, the Department
concerned must ensure that the student is informed
in writing of the precise requirements for satisfactory
completion of the coursework and it shall maintain
written records of each student's performance in such
coursework for report in due course to the Board of
Examiners.
5.4.4
If a student who is doing coursework as a component

of the degree is unable to attend scheduled
coursework sessions for health reasons or other
reasons for longer than 72 hours, he/she must notify
the appropriate Department through his/her
Supervisor as soon as possible and where the
absence is due to health reasons, submit a
certification in support thereof by a medical
practitioner registered in accordance with the Health
Professions Act.
5.4.5
The Supervisor(s) shall submit a written report on

each student's progress every 6 months to the
appropriate Departmental Board and to the Faculty
Higher Degrees Committee.
5.4.6
The Department Chairperson shall submit the

student's progress together with comments of the
Supervisor(s) and the Departmental Board to the
Faculty Higher Degrees Committee, at least twice a
year.
5.4.7
A student must maintain regular contact with the

supervising Department and may be required to
attend meeting sessions for certain periods at the
University as directed by the Supervisor(s), and is
required to present at least one seminar per
academic year of his/her findings to a relevant
academic audience approved by the Department.
5.4.8
No break in the normal continuity of study will be

permitted, except by permission of Senate on the
recommendation of the Faculty Higher Degrees
Committee.
38
5.5
5.4.9
A full-time student may be engaged in teaching at the

University, provided that the total demand made by
teaching duties does not exceed six hours of work, in any
week, including preparation and marking.
5.4.10
A student who is employed outside University, or a

staff member employed in the University for more than 6
hours in any week, other than on the research programme
for which he/she proposes to be registered, may normally
be accepted for registration only on a part time basis.
5.4.11
If a student does not begin his/her studies for M Phil or D

Phil within one calendar year from the date of approval of
his/her application for registration, such approval shall
lapse, and he/she must re-apply to the University if
he/she still desires to proceed.
Transfer from M Phil to D Phil

5.5.1
A student registered for the M Phil degree may
apply, after completion of not less than nine months, if
his/her Supervisor so recommends, for endorsement by
the Department and Faculty Higher Degrees
Committee for permission to transfer his/her registration
and to proceed to the DPhil.
5.5.2
The application must be accompanied by a written

recommendation from the Supervisor and must be
submitted through the Department and the Faculty
Higher Degrees Committee
for approval by the
Academic Committee.
5.5.3
The length of further study, if any, which he/she will be

required to pursue for the D Phil shall be prescribed by
the Department and approved by the Faculty Higher
Degrees Committee.
5.6 Title of Thesis

5.6.1
A student must submit, through his/her Supervisor to the
Departmental Board and the Faculty Higher Degrees
Committee, the working title for his/her thesis for
approval by Senate before final submission of the thesis
for examination.
5.6.2
After the final title has been approved, it may not be

changed except with the approval of the Senate.
with the candidate's Supervisor(s), and include

materials obtained or candidate's Supervisor(s),
and include materials obtained or produced with
technical or other assistance provided that the
candidate states clearly his/her personal share in
the investigation and specifically acknowledges all
such assistance. This statement is to be certified by
his/her Supervisor and bound as part of the preface
of the thesis. Work done jointly with persons other
than the candidate's Supervisor(s) may be accepted
as a thesis, or part of a thesis, in certain
circumstances, provided the candidate's share is
clearly certified.
6. PRESENTATION OF THESIS FOR EXAMINATION

6.1 Thesis
6.1.1 After completing the study, a student must submit a thesis
which must comply with the following conditions:
6.1.1.1
The greater portion of the work submitted must

have been done by the student after registration for
the degree.
6.1.1.2
The presentation of the thesis must be of an

acceptably high standard.
6.1.1.9
6.1.1.3
An acceptable MPhil thesis need not constitute an

original contribution to knowledge, but it must
provide evidence that the candidate has mastered
relevant research techniques, has shown
scholarship, has developed a capacity for criticism
of his/her own and other work, and has widened
his/her knowledge and understanding of literature
of his/her field of study.
6.1.1.10 An abstract of the thesis, in single spacing form, not

exceeding one page, is to be incorporated as part of
the preface to this thesis.
6.1.1.4
The length of the thesis will normally be established

in consultation with the Supervisor and the Faculty
6.1.1.5
The thesis must be written in English, except in the

case of students in a particular language discipline
taught at the University, where such students may
apply for permission to write a thesis in the medium
of the particular language studied. In all
cases where this procedure is followed, it shall be a
requirement that the candidates give a summary of
the thesis in English. Such summary must be
between 300 and 500 words in length. In each case,
a pre-requisite will be that a suitable External
Examiner in that language can be found.
6.1.1.6
The literary form of the thesis must be satisfactory.
6.1.1.7
The thesis must consist of the candidate's own

account of his/her research.
6.1.1.8
The thesis may describe work done in conjunction
Work already published including that published in

joint names may be included only if it forms an
integral part of the thesis. A series of publications
alone is not acceptable as a thesis.
6.1.2 A student will not be permitted to submit as his/her thesis, a

thesis which has been submitted to another university.
However a candidate shall not be precluded from
incorporating work which he/she has already submitted for
a degree in this or any other university, provided that he/she
shall indicate on his/her form of entry to the examination
and also in his/her thesis, any work which has been so
incorporated.
6.1.3 The format of the thesis to be submitted for examination
shall be as The body of the thesis to be printed in doublespacing form or reproduced there from;
6.1.3.1 Size of paper: International A4 (210mm x 297mm).
6.1.3.2 There must be a margin of 40mm on the left-hand
side of the page (to allow for binding), a margin of
10mm on the right-hand side and a margin of
20mm at the top and at the bottom of the page.
6.1.3.3 There is no restriction placed on the drawing of
maps.
6.1.4 A student may submit as subsidiary matter in support of
his/her candidature, any publications or contributions to the
advancement of his/her subject which he/she may have
published independently or conjointly. In the event of a
candidate submitting such subsidiary matter he/she will be
39
required to state fully his/her own share in any conjoint

work. Where there is a substantial computing content in the
thesis, a machine-readable copy of the source program shall
be submitted together with the copies of the thesis.
6.2 Entry to examination and submission of thesis
6.2.1 A student must apply for entry to the examination on the
appropriate form obtainable from the office of the Deputy
6.2.2 The examination entry form must be endorsed
a)
by the Supervisor(s), who shall confirm in writing to the
Chairperson of the Department and the Dean that the
thesis is in a form suitable for submission for
examination, and
b)
by the Chairman of the Faculty Higher Degrees
Committee who shall satisfy him/herself that, where
items of coursework have been set, the candidate has
satisfactorily completed these items.
6.2.3 The form must be returned to the Deputy Registrar
(Academic), with the prescribed fee, upon submission of four
copies of his/her dissertation in loose bound form within a
suitable cover, in the format prescribed in Regulation 6.1.3.
6.2.4 A student must submit evidence of at least one article
published in a refereed journal or book chapter from his/her
MPhil research or at least two articles from his/her DPhil
research, together with copies of the thesis to the Deputy
6.2.5 Departmental Boards shall administer anti-plagiarism
screening to all submitted theses using an anti-plagiarism
software approved by Senate. Normally, only theses exhibiting
no evidence of plagiarism shall be marked.
40
7.
ASSESSMENT OF A CANDIDATE
7.1 A student will be assessed principally on the merits of his/her
thesis but, where elements of coursework have been
prescribed, he/she must also satisfy the examiners that this
has been satisfactorily completed.
7.2 Exclusion from such formal examination shall require the
7.3 When a candidate is ready to submit his/her dissertation for
examination, the Departmental Board shall recommend to
Senate through the Faculty Higher Degrees Committee, the
appointment of Examiners, at least one being an External
Examiner and one or two being members of staff of the
University who are specialists in the field of study concerned.
7.4 A member of staff who has been appointed as Supervisor for
the thesis may not be appointed as one of these Examiners.
7.5
7.6
7.7
The Examiners shall assess the dissertation in detail and shall

each submit a written report with his/her comments and
recommendations to the Dean of the Faculty concerned.
A copy of detailed guidelines for the examination of theses
shall be made available to both internal and external
examiners.
On receipt of the reports of the Examiners, the Dean of the
Faculty concerned shall refer these reports to the Board of
Examiners.
8. PROCESSING OF EXAMINATION RESULTS

8.1 The Board of Examiners
8.1.1
The Board of Examiners for an M Phil/D Phil degree
shall be constituted as follows:
8.1.1.1 The Dean (Presiding) Deputy Dean of
the Faculty (Presiding in the absence of
the Dean)
8.1.1.2 The Chairman of the Faculty Higher
Degrees Committee (if different from t h e
Dean or Deputy Dean)
8.1.1.3 T h e C h a i r m a n o f t h e D e pa r t m e n t
concerned
8.1.1.4 The Internal and External Examiners
appointed in terms of Regulation 7.3.
8.1.1.5 Where appropriate, as determined by the
D e a n af t e r c o n s u l t a t i o n w i t h t h e
Chairman of the Department concerned,
other suitably qualified members of the
academic staff may also be assigned as
members of the Board of Examiners.
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
Normally, the External Examiner(s) will not be

required to attend the meeting of the Board of
Examiners.
The quorum of the Board shall be the Chairperson
of the Board plus three other members, one of
whom must be one of the Examiners of the thesis.
Normally, at least one of the Supervisors of the
dissertation shall attend the Board of Examiners
meeting but shall have no vote in the final decision
of the Board.
8.2 The Board of Examiners shall consider the written

reports of the Examiners appointed in terms of section 7.3.
8.3
8.4
9.
The Board shall normally examine the candidate orally and

may require further examination through written papers, or
practical examination, or both, on the Subject of the
thesis, and if they see fit, on topics relevant thereto.
For the purpose of the oral, practical or written examination
held in connection with the thesis, the candidate will be
required to present himself/herself at such place as the
University may direct and upon such day or days as shall be
notified to him/her, in writing, by the Faculty Administrator
on behalf of the Deputy Registrar (Academic).

9.1 The Board of Examiners shall meet to deliberate on the
written reports of the Examiners
and subject the student to an oral examination.
9.2 After the Board of Examiners has considered the written
reports of the Examiners, the oral examination and any other
examinations it deemed necessary, it shall recommend one of
the following overall decisions:
9.4.2 Such a student shall be permitted to resubmit the same thesis within a period of 12
months after publication of the result and
shall be subjected to further oral or other
examination.
9.4.3 A student who fails to re-submit his/her
thesis within the stipulated 12 months shall
be deemed to have failed.
9.5
Pass
Fail: Re-submit thesis
Fail D Phil: Re-submit thesis for the M Phil degree
Fail
9.3
Pass
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.4
9.5.2 Such a student shall be allowed to rewrite the

thesis in the usual format for the MPhil
degree, incorporating all the corrections and
a m e n d m e n t s re c o m m e n d e d by t h e
Examiners and the Board of Examiners within
a period of 12 months or less after
publication of the result.
The overall decision Pass shall apply to a student

who has satisfied the examiners and therefore
merits the award of the D Phil or M Phil degree.
9.5.3 The Board of Examiners may, or may not,

recommend that the student be
subjected to another oral examination.
Such a student may be required to make editorial

amendments to his/her thesis to the satisfaction of
the Chairman of the Board of Examiners, after
consultation with the Chairman of the Department
concerned before lodgement of the final bound
copies of dissertation.
Normally the student shall be expected to submit
the final corrected thesis within a period less than 6
months from the date of the examination.
Fail: Re-submit thesis

9.4.1 The overall decision Fail: Re-submit thesis shall
apply to a student whose thesis, though adequate,
requires some major revision.
Fail: D Phil Re-submit thesis for the M Phil degree

9.5.1 The overall decision Fail D Phil: Re-submit
thesis for the M Phil degree shall apply to a D
Phil student whose thesis, in the opinion of
the Examiners and the Board of Examiners,
does not justify a recommendation for the
award of a D Phil Degree, nor for the resubmission of the thesis in a revised form for
that degree but, at their discretion,
recommend that the candidate be awarded
an M Phil Degree.
9.5.4 The resubmitted thesis must be to the

satisfaction of Chairman of the Board of
Examiners, after consultation with the
Chairman of the Department concerned,
before lodgement of the final bound copies
of dissertation.
9.6
Fail
9.6.1 The overall decision Fail shall apply to a
student whose thesis fails to meet the
required standard for the award of the degree
and is in such a state that no amount of
improvement to the thesis is deemed to be
possible by the Board of Examiners.
41
9.6.2 Such a student may be allowed by Senate to reapply for

re-registration, but on a completely new and different
thesis topic.
9.7
42
Submission of Examination Reports to the Academic

Committee
9.7.1 The Faculty Office shall submit to Academic
Committee the following documents:
9.7.1.1 Minutes of the Faculty Board of Examiners
meeting(s);
9.7.1.2 Reports of the Internal and External
Examiners;
9.7.1.3 Correspondence from the Dean and
Chairperson of Department, confirming
that all the recommended corrections to
the thesis have been done; and
9.7.1.4 Any other documents relevant to the
examination concerned.
9.7.2 The Dean shall present to the Academic Committee the
recommendations of the Board of Examiners.
10. LODGEMENT AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE THESIS/DISSERTATION

10.1
After his/her thesis has been examined and amended in
accordance with the direction of the Board of Examiners, the
student shall have three copies bound in accordance with the
following specifications:
Art vellum or cloth; overcast; edges uncut; lettered boldly up
the back in gold letters indicating DEGREE, DATE, NAME
(letters should be between 5 mm and 10mm in size).
10.2
The student shall lodge with the Deputy Registrar (Academic)

three bound copies of the approved thesis together with an
electronic copy of the thesis.
10.3
The Deputy Registrar (Academic) will return one copy of the

thesis to the Department and deposit two copies and the
electronic soft copy in the University Library.
10.4
Unless Senate has agreed to the contrary, the Library copies

shall be open to the public for reference.
10.5
The official publication of the examination result of a student

shall only take place after the student has complied with
Regulations 10.1 and 10.2 above.

The M Phil and D Phil degrees shall be awarded without classification.
However, outstanding work shall be recognised.
12. ACADEMIC OFFENCES AND PENALTIES
Academic offences and penalties, as specified in the General Academic
Regulations for Undergraduate Programmes (Schedule B), shall equally
apply to these Regulations.
13.1.1
If an M Phil or D Phil student dies having completed a

draft of the thesis to be presented for examination, the
Department may request the Senate, through the
Faculty Higher Degrees Committee, to set up a Panel of
Assessors to examine the draft thesis.
13.1.1
If the request is acceded to, the Assessors' reports shall

be considered by a relevant Faculty Board of Examiners
which may recommend to the Senate the award of the
degree posthumously.
13.1.1
The overall result for a deceased student awarded a

degree posthumously shall be POSTHUMOUS AWARD.

13.2.1 If an M Phil or D Phil student in the final year of study and
having completed a draft of the thesis to be presented
for examination, is prevented by serious illness from
completing the rest of the examination process for the
award of the degree, the Department may request the
Senate through the Faculty Higher Degrees Committee
to set up a Panel of Assessors to examine the draft thesis,
provided that it is established by a medical certificate
that the incapacitation is permanent or that the illness is
terminal.
13.2.2 If the request is acceded to, the Assessors' reports shall
be considered by an appropriate Faculty Board of
Examiners, established for the purpose, with the
approval of the Senate, which Board may recommend to
the Senate the award of the degree, provided that the
draft thesis meets the minimum standard required for
the award of the degree.
13.2.3 The overall result for a student who qualifies for the
aegrotat award of the degree shall be PASS: AEGROTAT
AWARD.
14. PUBLICATION OF EXAMINATION RESULT
publication of examination result as approved by the Academic
Committee.
14.2 The Deputy Registrar (Academic) shall post to the student, at
his/her registered address, a copy of the individual student's
result.
14.3 The examination result of a student who owes any outstanding
monies to the University shall be withheld from publication.
17.
AWARD OF A DEGREE CERTIFICATE OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE

17.1
The award of a degree Certificate of the University of Zimbabwe

shall be subject to approval by the University Council.
17.2
A student completing the requirements for such an award will be

entitled to receive a formal certificate of the University, bearing
the seal of the University and signed by the Vice-Chancellor and
the Registrar, confirming the award.
17.3
If, subsequent to the award of a degree to a student, it is

discovered that there were gross irregularities and impropriety
involved in the award, the University Council, on the
recommendation of the Senate, reserves the right to withdraw
the award and cancel the certificate.
14.4 The notice of the result released by the Deputy Registrar

(Academic) shall be endorsed with the proviso SUBJECT TO
RATIFICATION BY THE SENATE.
Student Appeals against Published Results as specified in the General
Academic Regulations for Postgraduate Degree Programmes by
Coursework shall equally apply to these Regulations.
16.1 Each graduate of the University shall receive ONE copy of an
official transcript of his/her complete academic record at the
University.
16.2 The postgraduate transcript shall include the following
information:
16.2.1The examination results of taught courses taken by the
student under Regulation 3.2; and the biannual status of
the student's progress as reported under Regulation 5.4.5.
16.3 A prescribed fee shall be charged for a duplicate transcript
(subsequent to the issue of the original) or for a transcript
requested before completion of studies.
16.4 An Academic Transcript of the University of Zimbabwe is issued
without any alterations and carries a signed official stamp of the
43

HIGHER DOCTORAL DEGREES
1.
2.

The Senate shall be the final authority for the interpretation of these
regulations.
The Senate reserves the right to alter, amend, cancel, suspend or replace
any of these regulations.
The Senate has the power to exempt any candidate from any of the
regulations.
Eligibility for the specific degrees:

The following are intended as a general guide as to the appropriate
degree for which the application should be submitted. However Senate
shall have the right to determine the appropriate degree to be awarded to
a candidate:
DEFINITION OF TERMS
In these regulations, the following terms shall be used as described:
graduate of this University:
means a person who has been awarded

a Bachelors or Masters or Doctoral
degree of the University.
published:
means printed in a refereed periodical

or journal, or as a pamphlet or as a
book.
this University:
means the University of Zimbabwe and

its predecessors and shall include an
associated or affiliated institution to
this University.
44
3.
An applicant must have published work of an exceptionally high standard

such as would confer authoritative standing in the discipline in which the
application is located and the particular field or fields of research on
which the application is based. An applicant must be a graduate of this
University or another university in the tenth or a subsequent year after the
date of the award of the applicant's first degree or its equivalent. An
applicant who is not a graduate of this University shall, in addition to
being a graduate of another university, have been employed by this
University for a period of not less than five years and have been engaged in
research, relevant to the application, in association with this University.
HIGHER DOCTORAL DEGREES OFFERED BY THE UNIVERSITY

The University of Zimbabwe awards the following higher doctorate
degrees:
Doctor of Laws (LLD)
Doctor of Literature/Letters (D Litt)
Doctor of Science (D Sc)
These degrees are the highest academic awards of the University of
Zimbabwe and are only awarded to persons who have published work of
an exceptionally high standard, which would earn them authoritative
standing in the field of research that forms the basis of the application
for consideration.
4. ELIGIBILITY OF APPLICANT
To be eligible an applicant must satisfy the following:
An applicant for the LLD degree would normally have conducted research
and published in the field of Law or closely related disciplines.
An applicant for the D Litt degree would normally have conducted
research and published in the Humanities other than Law. Without
derogating from the generality of the term Humanities, the D Litt degree
would normally be awarded to successful applicants from disciplines such
as Arts, Education, Social Studies and Commerce.
An applicant for the D Sc degree would normally have conducted and
published in the Sciences. Without derogating from the generality of the
term Sciences, the D Sc degree would normally be awarded to successful
applicants from the disciplines in Science, Agricultural Science,
Engineering, Health Sciences and Veterinary Science.
5.
APPLICATION FOR CONSIDERATION

An eligible applicant may make an application at any time for the
appropriate Degree. Such an applicant shall submit with the application
the following:
A comprehensive curriculum vitae;
An academic justification of the basis of their application; and
The academic evidence substantiating their application for the
appropriate degree. Such evidence shall consist of published works,
containing original contributions to the advancement of knowledge in
the appropriate field or discipline.
Where work is submitted that is not in the applicant's sole name, the
applicant shall indicate the extent of his/her contribution in terms of
initiation, direction and conduct of the work.
An applicant shall indicate what part, if any, of the work including joint
work submitted in support of the application has been submitted for the
award of a degree in this or another university by the applicant or by a
co-author.
The application shall be submitted to the office of the Deputy Registrar

(Academic).
A prescribed application fee shall be levied and must be paid on or
before submission of the application.
6.
PROCESSING OF THE APPLICATION

Upon submitting the application the applicant shall be registered as a
candidate for the award of the designated degree .
Upon receipt of an application for the award of the degree, the
application including all the supporting evidence shall be submitted to
the Faculty Higher Degrees Committee responsible for the discipline in
which the application is based. Such Faculty Higher Degrees Committee
shall, having made a preliminary consideration of the application,
transmit it for consideration to an appropriate Department of the
Faculty.
evidence with their reasons for declining to consider the application to

the Deputy Registrar (Academic) for re-assignment to an appropriate
Faculty and Department, provided that Senate may determine that the
matter shall be considered by a particular Faculty and/or Department.
7.
REGISTRATION
If the application is approved by Senate, the candidate shall be informed
of the acceptance of the application for consideration for the
appropriate degree and shall be registered.
8.
After registration, as prescribed in Section 7, as a candidate for the
appropriate degree, the assessment of the evidence submitted by the
candidate shall be made by six assessors at full Professor grade,
appointed in accordance with Section 6 of these regulations, provided
that at least four of the assessors shall be external assessors and,
normally, at least one shall be an internal assessor.
The assessors shall each submit a formal written report on the
application and its merits to the Deputy Registrar (Academic). Such
report shall contain a recommendation as to whether or not the
candidate should be awarded the appropriate degree.
The Departmental Board of the Department charged by the Faculty

Higher Degrees Committee to consider the application shall make
recommendations as to the merits of the application to the Faculty
Higher Degrees Committee. The Departmental Board concerned shall
submit with its recommendations, a list of persons it recommends as
external and internal assessors.
Upon receipt of the resolution of the Departmental Board the Faculty
Higher Degrees Committee shall consider the application and
recommendations of the Departmental Board and shall make
recommendations on the merits of the application and on the list of
persons recommended as assessors. The Faculty Higher Degrees
Committee may, at its discretion, make further recommendations on
the list of assessors.
The resolution of the Department, the Department's list of persons
recommended as assessors, the recommendations of the Faculty
Higher Degrees Committee on the application and that Committee's
recommendations on the list of assessors shall be transmitted via the
Deputy Registrar (Academic) to the Senate.
The Senate shall determine whether the application merits submission
to assessors.
Having determined that an application merits submission to assessors
Senate shall appoint the assessors.
In the event that the Faculty Higher Degrees Committee or the
Departmental Board to which the matter is assigned do not consider
that the application has been made to the appropriate Faculty or
Department, they shall transmit the application and the supporting
9.
DETERMINATION OF THE RESULT

The Senate shall appoint a Board of Examiners, or delegate the
responsibility to the Academic Committee, to consider the application in
conjunction with the assessors' report.
The Board of Examiners shall report to the Academic Committee its
recommendations together with all the relevant documents availed to it.
The Senate shall determine whether or not the candidate should be
awarded a higher doctorate degree.

A higher doctoral degree of the University of Zimbabwe shall be awarded
without classification.
11. NOTIFICATION OF THE RESULT
The Deputy Registrar (Academic) shall notify the candidate of the result
of the application as decided by Senate.
12. APPEAL AGAINST PUBLISHED RESULT
The decision of the Senate shall be final and no appeal against the
published result shall be considered.
45
13.

The award of a degree Certificate of the University of Zimbabwe shall be
subject to approval by the University Council.
A successful applicant for such an award will be entitled to receive a
formal certificate of the University, bearing the seal of the University and
signed by the Vice-Chancellor and the Registrar, confirming the award.
If, subsequent to the award of a degree to a candidate, it is discovered
that there were gross irregularities and impropriety involved in the
award the University Council, on the recommendation of the Senate,
reserves the right to withdraw the award and cancel the certificate.
A duplicate certificate may be issued upon the payment of a prescribed
fee.
46
FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE
4.2 Additional Entry Requirements

4.2.1 Ordinary Level passes:
English Language
Mathematics
and one Science subject incorporating Biology and
Chemistry for all the eight subjects in the degree programme.
4.2.2 Advanced Level pass in Biology (except for Agricultural
Engineering where A Level pass in Mathematics is required)
in addition to the requirements noted below for the different
subjects:
Agricultural Economics Mathematics and one subject from
Economics, Geography, Chemistry or
Physics
Soil Science
Chemistry and one subject from
Mathematics, Economics,
Geography or Physics
Animal Science
Two subjects from Chemistry,
Mathematics, Geography, Physics or
Economics
Agricultural Extension Two subjects from Chemistry,
Mathematics, Education, Geography,
Physics or Economics
Crop Science
Economics
Applied Environmental Chemistry and one subject from
Science,Mathematics, Economics,
Geography or Physics
Horticulture
Economics
Agricultural Engineering Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry
or Geography or Agriculture
4.3 Diploma Holders
A candidate who holds a Diploma in Agriculture or Horticulture
recognized by the Senate for this purpose, may, on
recommendations of the Chairman of Department and subject to
the approval of the Senate, be admitted to the first year of the
Bachelor of Science Honours Degree in Agriculture programme
provided that he/she has attained an approved standard of
performance in his/her diploma course.
REGULATIONS FOR UNDERGRADUATE

DEGREE PROGRAMMES
1.

1.1 These regulations apply to Undergraduate Degree Programmes in
the Faculty of Agriculture and should be read in conjunction with
the General Academic Regulations for Undergraduate Degrees.
1.2 The General Academic Regulations shall take precedence over these
regulations.
2.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
In these regulations the following terms shall be used as described:
2.1 Farm Attachment: means a period of time during which a student is
assigned to an approved farming entity for the purpose of gaining
practical skills or experience.
2.2 Internship: means a job-type situation with an approved and
appropriate employer.
2.3 Weekend On-farm
Practicals: means practicals normally carried out on Saturday
mornings during Level 1 on farms or other approved agricultural
enterprises to enable a student to gain real appreciation of various
farming or production activities involved.
3.
PROGRAMMES
The Faculty of Agriculture offers the following undergraduate degree
programmes:
?
Bachelor of Science Honours Degree in Agriculture
?
Bachelor of Science Honours Degree in Agricultural Engineering
?
Bachelor of Science Honours Degree in Applied Environmental
Science.
4.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Normal Entry Requirements
For normal entry requirements into the Undergraduate Honours
programme, the applicant must satisfy the entry requirements as
prescribed in the General Academic Regulations, including passes in
THREE subjects chosen from the following list of which at least TWO
must be at Advanced Level or approved equivalent:
Biology
Mathematics (Pure or Applied or Both)
Chemistry
Economics
Physics
Geography
5.
STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMMES

5.1 The duration of the Bachelor of Science Honours Degree in
Agriculture and Bachelor of Science Honours Degree in Applied
Environmental Science programmes shall be a minimum of 6
semesters and a minimum of 8 semesters for the Bachelor of Science
Honours Degree in Agricultural Engineering.
47
5.2 The Bachelor of Science Honours Degree in Agriculture and

Bachelor of Science Degree in Applied Environmental Science
programmes shall normally consist of a minimum of 360 course
units each, excluding the 12 course units of the Communication and
Computer Writing Skills for Agriculture course. The Bachelor of
Science Honours Degree in Agricultural Engineering programme
shall normally consist of a minimum of 480 course units, excluding
the 12 course units of the Communication and Computer Writing
Skills for Agriculture course.
5.3 A student may, on recommendation of the Departmental Board and
with the approval of the Dean of Faculty, be permitted to register for
not more than 24 additional course units. The examination results
of such courses should not be taken into account in classifying the
degree.
5.4 A course worth 12 course units shall be taught in 6 hours a week, not
more than 3 hours of which will be lectures.
5.5 One of the courses in each of the three undergraduate honours
degree programmes is a project which is normally taken in the two
semesters of the final level of study and is worth 24 course units.
5.6 The course combination selected by a student in any academic year
shall be subject to: timetable feasibility; approval of the
Departmental Board and the Dean of Agriculture.
5.7 A failed core course shall be repeated. For a failed optional course, a
repeating candidate may take an equivalent course if it is specified
in the programme regulations or provided it is approved by the
Departmental Board.
48
6.
EXAMINATIONS
6.1 The end of course examination shall normally take place at the end
of the semester in which the course was taught.
6.2 To be admitted to an end of course examination, a candidate must
have registered as a student of the University of Zimbabwe, in
accordance with the General Academic Regulations.
6.3 Where a course project constitutes part of the examination, the
student must complete and submit the project by a specified date
set by the Faculty. A student who fails to meet this deadline shall
normally fail the project.
6.4 Each course will be examined by one three-hour written
examination plus continuous assessment unless otherwise stated.
7.
7.1 Evaluation shall be based on continuous assessment and formal
examinations.
7.2 Unless otherwise stipulated in the specific subject regulations,
continuous assessment shall contribute between 20% and 33% of
the overall mark as determined at the beginning of the course by the
Departmental Board.
7.3 A student who attains a mark of less than 40% in the continuous
assessment component of a course shall fail that course. The mark
shall be the final raw mark or 48%, whichever is the lesser.
7.4 Assessment of Attachment and Internship Programmes shall be
either satisfactory (P) or unsatisfactory (F). "If unsatisfactory, the
student shall repeat either the unsatisfactory Attachment or the
unsatisfactory Internship Programmes".
7.5 The examiners may, at their discretion, require any candidate to
present himself/ herself for an oral examination or written test.
7.6 The Research Project assessment will include seminars, the written
dissertation and an oral examination.
8.
PROCESSING OF EXAMINATIONS
The processing of examination results shall be carried out as prescribed
in the General Academic Regulations.
9.
DETERMINATION OF EXAMINATION RESULTS

9.1 Unless approved otherwise by the Senate, a single overall mark shall
be submitted for each course on a student's profile of marks as
stipulated in the General Academic Regulations.
9.2 A student shall not graduate unless he/she has satisfactorily
completed the Attachment and the Internship components of the
programme.
9.3 In determining the degree classification, the aggregate marks from
Levels 2 and 3 will be weighted 33% and 67% respectively to arrive
at a mark upon which the degree classification in the Bachelor of
Science Honours Degree in Agriculture and Bachelor of Science
Honours Degree in Environmental Science programmes will be
based.
9.4 The overall result PASS: PROCEED shall apply to a student who has
passed all Level 1 or Level 2 or Level 3 (as the case may be) courses as
prescribed in Regulations 11.
9.5 The overall result INCOMPLETE: PROCEED shall apply to a student
who fails by less than 24 credits to fulfill the prescribed
requirements for Level 1 or Level 2 or Level 3 course.
9.6 The overall result INCOMPLETE:REPEAT FAILED COURSE(S) shall
apply to a student who:
?
fails by more than 24 course credits to fulfill the prescribed
requirements for level 1 or Level 2 or Level 3 courses; or
?
fails to graduate in his/her final year of study; or
?
still has an outstanding Level 1 course before embarking on final
year level course.
9.7 The overall results WITHDRAWN shall apply in accordance with the
General Academic Regulations.
9.8 A student who is a holder of a National Diploma in Agriculture or its
approved equivalent will be exempted from week-end morning onfarm practicals.

Results shall be published and degrees awarded in accordance with the
provisions of the University of Zimbabwe General Regulations.
Agricultural Trade Theory
11. SPECIAL REGULATIONS FOR EACH SUBJECT

11.1 Agricultural Economics
A student must take all the prescribed core courses and the
prescribed minimal optional courses.
11.1.3 Level 3 Courses
11.1.1
Course
Level 1 Courses
Core Courses
Agricultural Practice I
Introduction to Agricultural
Economics
Introduction to Rural Sociology
An Introduction to Soil and
Environmental Science
Plant Biology
Communication and Computer
Writing Skills for Agriculture
Micro Economics for Agriculture I
Agricultural Practice II
Macro Economics for Agriculture I
Mathematics for Agricultural
Economics
Principles of Animal Science
Introduction to Statistics for
Agriculture
Course
Code
AGPR 102
Units
6
AGEC 111
AGEC112
12
12
SL103
CR102
12
12
CSAG101
AGEC121
AGPR103
AGEC122
AGEC111
AGEC111
12
12
6
12
AGEC123
AS103
12
12
AGEC/AS/CR110
12
11.1.2
Level 2 Courses
Course
Course
Core Courses
Code
Micro Economics for Agriculture II AGEC211
Macro Economics for Agriculture II AGEC212
Farm Business Planning and
Management
AGEC220
Principles of Crop Production
CR203
Principles of Agricultural MarketingAGEC214
Research Methods
AGEC216
Econometrics I
Pre-requisite
AGEC217
Optional Courses (at least THREE)

Cost Benefit Analysis
AGEC219
Sustainable Use of Natural Resources SL203
Agribusiness Management 1
AGEC215
AGEC218
AGEC121,
AGEC122
12
OR any other approved courses
Course
Core Courses
Code
Principles of Animal Production
AS208
Research Project
AGEC360
Agricultural Production
Economics I
AGEC311
Agricultural Policy I
AGEC312
Optional Courses (at least FIVE)
Natural Resource Economics I
AGEC313
Agricultural Finance
AGEC314
Econometrics II
AGEC315
Food and Commodity Marketing AGEC316
Agricultural Development
AGEC317
Entrepreneurial Skills Development I
Farm Business Analysis
AGEC328
Agricultural Policy II
AGEC322
Natural Resource Economics II
AGEC323
Agribusiness Management II
AGEC324
Rural Finance
AGEC325
Agricultural Extension
AGEC326
Agricultural Development II
AGEC327
Soil and Water Management
AGEN301
Course
Pre-requisite
Units
12
AGEC21624
AGEC111 12
AGEC211
12
AGEC111
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
AGEC217
AGEC214
AGEC111
AS/BS315
AGEC220
AGEC312
AGEC313
AGEC215
AGEC317
SL103/CR203
11.2
Agricultural Education and Extension
A student must take all the prescribed core courses and the prescribed minimal optional courses.
Pre-requisite
AGEC121
AGEC122
Units
12
12
AGEC111
CR102
AGEC111
AGEC/AS/
Cr110
AGEC121,AGEC/
AS/CR110
12
12
12
AGEC111
SL103
AGEC111
12
12
12
12
12
Core Courses
Education and
Extension
Introductory Rural Sociology
Economics
Crop Science and Genetics
Course
Code
Course
Pre-requisite
Units
AEE101
AEE102
20
20
AGEC111
AS103
CR101
12
12
12
SL103
AGPR102
12
10
49

11.2. 2 Level 2 Courses
Core Courses
Curriculum Development in
Agricultural Education and
Extension
Education Communication in
Extension
Teaching Practice
Farm Business Planning and
Management
Introduction to Horticulture
Land Use and Natural Resource
Evaluation
50
CSAG101
AGPR103
10
Course
Code
Course
Pre-requisite
Units
AEE201
AEE101
20
AEE202
AEE101/
AEE102
AEE204
20
20
AGEC220
CR203
CR212
AS208
12
12
12
12
SL204
12

Course
Code
Core Courses
Principles and Practices of
Environmental Education
AEE301
Management and Administration of
Extension
AEE302
Research Methods for Agricultural
Education and Extension
AEE303
Research Project
Crop Production
Horticulture (Fruit and Vegetable
Production)
Agricultural Mechanization and
Crop Storage
11.3
Animal Science
Course
Course
Core Course
Code
Pre-requisite
Units
Agricultural Biochemistry I
AS102
12
Writing skills for Agriculture
CSAG101
Economics
AGEC111
12
SL103
12
Plant Biology
CR102
12
AGPR102
6
Agricultural Biochemistry II
AS104
AS102
12
AS103
12
Introduction to Microbiology
AS/CR105
12
Principles of Genetics
CR108
12
Agriculture
AGEC/AS/CR110
12
AGPR103
6
Course
Pre-requisite
20
AEE101
AEE101/
AEE102
AEE360
AGEN301
CR303
Units
SL103/CR203
CR203
20
20
24
12
12
CR307
12
AGEN308
12
Core Courses
Range Animal Management and
Ecology
Farm Business Planning &
Management
Statistical Methods and Experiment
Designs I
Course
Code
AS222
Units
12
AGEC220
CR203
AGEC111
CR102
12
12
AS210
AGEC/AS/
CR110
12
Forage, Fodder and Soil Improving

Crops
Animal Physiology I
Animal Health
Livestock Improvement I
CR216
AS211
AS212
AS213
Nutritional Biochemistry I
AS223
Optional Courses (at least ONE)

Agribusiness Management
Cell Biology and Biotechnology
Course
Pre-requisite
AGEC215
AS218
Sustainable Use of Natural ResourcesSL203 SL103
CR102
AS103/AS104
AS103
AS/CR105/
AGEC/AS/
CR110
AS102/
AS103/
AS104
AGEC111
AS102/
AS104/
CR102
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

Core Courses
Animal Physiology II
Livestock Improvement II
Research Project
Beef and Small Ruminants ProductionAS321
Pig, Poultry and Ostrich Production
Dairy Production
Nutritional Biochemistry II
Optional Courses (at least TWO)
Animal Products Processing
Farming Systems Approach to
Course
Code
AS310
AS311
AS360
AS103/AS223
AS328
AS323
AS326
AS327
AS325
Course
Pre-requisite
AS211
AS210/AS213
AGEC/AS/
CR110
Units
12
12
AS212/AS223
AS310/AS311
AS223
24
12
12
12
12
AS103/AS/
CR105
12
CR210/
AGEC111/
AGEC213

12
12
Core Courses
Statistical Methods and
Experimental Design I
Entrepreneurial Skills Development I BS315 AGEC111

Animal Experimentation
Principles of Agricultural Marketing

Ecology and Management of Wildlife
Non-Conventional Small Stock
Production for Smallholder Sector
Applied Animal and Human Nutrition
Entrepreneurial Skills Development II
Agroforestry
AS306
AGEC214
AS317
AS324
AS318
BS316
AGEC328
AGEC219
SL205
AGEC220
AGEC/AS/
CR110/
CR210
AGEC111
AS222
AS223
AS/BS315
AGEC220
AGEC111
SL103/CR102
AGEC111
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
11.4 Crop Science
A student must take all the prescribed core courses and the prescribed required number of
optional courses.
The choice of course clusters should be made under the guidance of staff in the Department to
enable majoring in Agronomy, Crop Protection, Horticulture or in Plant Breeding.
11.4 Level 1 Courses
Core Courses
Plant Biology
Agricultural Biochemistry I
Course
Code
CR102
AS102
Course
Pre-requisite
Economics
Introduction to Entomology
Agriculture
Agricultural Biochemistry II
Units
12
12
Crop Ecology and Physiology

Introduction to Weed Science
Introduction to Plant Diseases
Optional Courses (at least FIVE)
Agribusiness Management I
Crops
Olericulture
Principles of Genetics and Plant
Breeding
Sustainable Use of Natural Resources
Farm Business Planning
& Management
Principles of Insect Pest Management
AGEC111
12
SL103
AGPR102
12
6
CSAG101
CR105
CR107
CR108
12
12
12
12
AGEC/AS/CR110
AGPR103
12
6
As104
AS102
AS103
12
12
Course
Code
CR203
Course
Pre-requisite
CR102
Units
12
CR210
AGEC/AS/
CR110
CR102
CR102
AS/CR105
12
12
12
12
CR215
CR218
CR223
CR212
AS208
AGEC215
CR102
AGEC111
12
12
12
CR216
CR217
AGEC214
CR102
CR212
AGEC111
12
12
12
CR222
SL203
CR108
SL103
12
12
AGEC220
CR224
AGEC111
CR107
12
12
51

Core Courses
Research Project
Crop Production
Optional Courses (at least SEVEN)
Crop Physiology
Weed Management
Plant Breeding Methods
Fruit and Plantation Crop Production
Statistical Methods and Experimental
Design II
Soil Fertility
Agricultural Production Economics
Crop Storage
52
Farming Systems Approach to

Molecular Physiology of Plants
Floriculture
Post-harvest Physiology and Processing
of Horticultural Crops
Course
Code
CR360
CR303
Course
Pre-requisite
AGEC/AS/
CR110
CR221
24
12
CR311
CR312
CR322
Cr314
CR215
CR218
CR222
CR212
12
12
12
12
CR315
SL313
AS/CR210
SL103/
CR203
AGEC111
12
AGEC311
AGEN308
AS325
CR337
CR338
CR339
CR203/
SL103
AGEC111
CR215
CR212/
CR215
Units
12
12
12
12
12
12
CR212/
CR215
12
Biology and Management of Crop

Insect Pest
Biology and Management of Plant
Pathogens
CR340
CR107
12
CR341
AGEN301
12

Agricultural Extension
AGEC328
AGEC326
CR105
SL103/
CR221
AGEC220
12
12
12
11.5 Horticulture
Core Courses
Introduction to Plant Diseases
Principles of Insect Pest
Management
Olericulture I
Tropical and Subtropical Fruit
Production
Plant Production in Protected
Environments
& Management
Principles of Genetics and Plant
Breeding
Statistical Methods & Experimental
Design I
Forage Fodder and Soil Improving
Crops
HR101
12
SL103
12
CSAG101
CR107
CR108
12
12
12
AGEC/AS/CR110
AGPR103
12
6
Course
Code
CR223
Course
Pre-requisite
AS/CR105
Units
12
CR224
CR217
CR107
CR212
12
12
HR203
CR102/
HR101
12
HR204
CR203
CR218
CR215
CR102
CR102
12
12
12
12
AGEC220
AGEC111
12
CR222
CR108
12
CR210
AGEC214
CR110
AGEC111
12
12
CR216
SL203
CR102
SL103
12
12
Course
Pre-requisite
HR201
CR217
HR201
HR360
Units
12
12
12
24

Core Courses
Economics
Agricultural Biochemistry
Plant Biology
Plant Propagation and Nursery

Management
Agriculture
Course
Code
AGEC111
AGPR102
AS102
CR102
AS/CR105
Course
Pre-requisite
Units
12
6
12
12
12
Course
Core Courses
Code
Post-harvest Physiology and Handling HR301
Olericulture II
HR302
Floriculture
HR304
Research Project
Temperate Fruit and Plantation Crop
Production
HR303
HR101/HR201 12
Optional Courses (at least FOUR)

Crop Production
Biology and Management of Crop
Insect Pest
Biology and Management of Plant
Pathogens
Plant Breeding Methods
Design II
Soil Fertility
Marketing of Horticultural Crops
HR305
Weed Management

CR303
CR221
12
CR340
CR107
12
Core Courses
Soil Chemistry
CR341
CR322
CR105
CR222
12
12
Environmental Soil Biology and

Biochemistry
CR315
SL313
AS/CR210
SL103/
Cr102
HR101/
HR201
CR218
12
12

Soil Physics
Pedology
12
12

Designs
CR312
11.6 Soil Science
A student must take all the prescribed core courses and the prescribed
minimal optional courses.
Core Courses
Plant Biology
Inorganic Chemistry
Organic Chemistry
Economics
Agriculture
Ecology and Environment
Course
Code
Course
Pre-requisite
Units
SL103
CR102
HCH102
HCH103
HCH104
12
12
10
10
10
AGEC111
AGPR102
12
6
CSAG101
AGEC/AS/CR110
AGPR103
AS/CR105
12
6
12
AS103
CR107
CR108
AES101
12
12
12
12

Forage, Fodder and Soil improving
Crops
& Management
Agribusiness Management I
Olericulture
Geology
Environmental Monitoring: Principles
and Methods
Course
Code
SL211
Course
Pre-requisite Units
SL103/HCH102/
HCH103
12
AES203
SL103/AS/CR105
CR203
CR102
SL213
SL103
SL214
SL103/
SL211
12
AGEC/AS/
CR210
CR110
12
CR212
CR102
12
CR216
CR102
12
AGEC220
AGEC215
SL203
CR215
CR217
GL206
AGEC111
AGEC111
SL103
CR102
CR212
12
12
12
12
12
12
AES201
SL211/
AES203
12
12
12
12

Core Courses
Research Project
Course
Code
SL360
Soil Fertility
SL313
AGEN301
Special Topics in Soil Science
SL316
Land Resources Inventory and

Evaluation
Crop Storage
SL314
AGEN308
Course
Pre-requisite
AGEC/AS/
CR110
SL103/
CR203
SL103/
CR203
SL211/213/
214/313
12
SL214/
SL203
12
SL103/
CR203
12
Units
24
12
12
53
Natural Resource Economics I

Crop Production
Fruit and Plantation Crop Production
Floriculture
Post Harvest Physiology and
Processing of Horticultural
Crops
Natural Resource Economics II
AGEC313
CR303
Cr314
AGEC219
CR338
CR339
CR218
AGEC323
AGEC111
CR221
CR211
AGEC111
CR212/
CR215
12
12
12
12
12
CR212/CR215 12
CR102
12
AGEC313
12
11.7 Applied Environmental Science

Course
Code
54
Course
Pre-requisite
Core Courses
Units
An introduction to Soil and
SL103
12
Plant Biology
CR102
12
Inorganic Chemistry
HCH102
10
HCH104
10
Communication and Computing
Skills
CSAG101
12
Applied Environmental Science
Practice 1
AEPR101
6
Economics
AGEC111
12
Organic Chemistry
HCH103
10
Introduction to statistics
AGEC/AS/CR110
12
AS/CR105
12
CR108
12
Applied Environmental Science
Practice II
AEPR102
6
Ecology and Environment
AES101
12
CR107
12
AS103
12
AEPR101 and AEPR102 are independent studies, under supervision of a staff member, carried out
during the first and second vacations of Level 1. Candidates are required to make an oral
presentation and submit a written report on their study during the course of the subsequent
semester following the vacation.

Core Courses
Soil Chemistry
Environmental Soil Biology and

Biochemistry
Environmental Monitoring:
Principles and Methods
Design
Environmental Management
Soil Physics
Environmental Impact Assessment
Pesticides in the Environment
Crops
Geology
Core Courses
Research Project
Geographical Information
Systems
Land Resource, Inventory &
Evaluation
Special Topics in Environmental
Sciences
Waste Management and Pollution
Control
Environmental Monitoring:
Applications
Natural Resources Economics I
Range Animal Management &
Ecology
Environmental Policy and Legislation
Ecology and Management of Wildlife
Natural Resources Economics II
Course
Code
SL211
AES203
Course
Pre-requisite
Sl103/
HCH102/
HCH103
12
SL103/
AS/CR105
12
Units
AES201
12
CR210 AGEC/
AS/CR110
AES205
SL213
SL203
AES206
AES204
12
12
12
12
12
12
SL103
SL103
SL103
CR216
GL206
CR102
Course
Code
AES360
Course
Pre-requisite
AES208
SL314
12
12
Units
24
12
SL203/SL214
AES301
12
12
AES302
SL103
12
AES303
AGEN301
AES201
SL103/CR102
12
12
AGEC313
AGEC111
12
AS222
AES305
As317
AGEC323
SL203
AGEC313
12
12
12
12
11.8 Agricultural Engineering

11.8.1
Additional Regulations
In addition to the General Faculty of Agriculture Regulations, the following
specific regulations apply to the Agricultural Engineering Subject.
11.8.1.1 Special Entry Requirements
Passes in Technical Drawing or in Engineering Drawing or in
Agricultural Sciences at either Ordinary or Advanced Levels or their
equivalent will be an added advantage.
Holders of a Diploma or its equivalent in Agricultural Engineering or
any branch of engineering from recognized agricultural or
engineering colleges shall also be considered for admission.
11.8.1.2 Structure of the Programme
The first, second and third Levels of study consist of not less than
twenty-four (24) weeks of Practical Training in industry spread over 3
long vacations.
A student who has successfully completed the four Levels of study
shall be awarded the degree of Bachelor of Science Agricultural
Engineering (Honours) on condition that he/ she has obtained an
approved first aid certificate.
All courses at each Level are compulsory.
11.8.1.3 Examinations
To be admitted to the examination for any Level, a candidate must
have completed the approved courses of study for that Level to the
satisfaction of the Departmental Board.
11.8.2
Level 1 Courses
Core Courses
Engineering Drawing and Design
Engineering Mathematics I Paper 1
Computer Science for Engineers
Communication Skills for Engineers
Engineering Mechanics
Electrical Principles
Engineering Materials
Engineering Mathematics 2 Paper 2
Workshop Practice
Course
Code
ME101
MT104
EE102
CGEN103
Me103
EE101
MG103
MT105
WSP180
Course
Pre-requisite
Course
Code
EE202
MT204
CE203
CE201
CE205
Course
Pre-requisite
EE101
MT104
Units
20
10
15
10
15
15
15
10
10

Core Courses
Electrical Machines II
Engineering Mathematics II Paper 1
Engineering Survey
Theory of Structures
Strength of Materials
ME101
Units
15
10
15
15
15
Thermofluids II
Engineering Mathematics II Paper 2
Engineering
Fluid Mechanics
ME204
MT205
ME103
MT105
AGEN201
CE202
15
10
12
15

Core Courses
Food Engineering
Soil Mechanics and Cultivations
Economics
Quantitative Methods
Hydrology and Hydraulics
Thermodynamics and Heat Transfer
Soil Science for Engineers
Crop Processing and Storage
Machinery and Implement Design
Course
Code
AGEN302
CE205
AGEN304
AGEC111
AGEN306
AGEN310
ME309
SL300
AGEN303
AGEN311
AS208
CR203
Course
Pre-requisite
ME204/
CE205
ME204
CE205
Units
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
55

Core Courses
Agricultural Mechanisation
Course
Code
AGEN404
Farm Structures Design
AGEN406
Agribusiness Management 1
Special Project
Irrigation and Drainage Engineering
Process Engineering
Soil and Water Conservation
Engineering
AGEC215
AGEN460
AGEN411
AGEN405
AGEN410
Farm Power
Agricultural Systems Engineering
AGEN408
AGEN407
Course
Pre-requisite
AGEN310/
SL300
AGEN201/
ME101
Units
12
AGEN310
AGEN302
12
12
24
12
12
AGEN310/
SL300
ME309
AGEN306
12
12
12
REGULATIONS FOR THE POSTGRADUATE

DEGREE PROGRAMMES
MASTER OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN AGRICULTURAL
ECONOMICS (MAAE);
MASTER OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN ANIMAL SCIENCE (MAS);
MASTER OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN CROP PROTECTION (MCP);
MASTER OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN CROP SCIENCE WITH
OPTIONS IN PLANT BREEDING AND AGRONOMY;
MASTER OF SCIENCE DEGREE BY COURSEWORK (MSC)
3.
DURATION OF PROGRAMME
3.1 The programme is offered on a full-time basis and will run for two
years. Intake shall normally be every other year.
3.2 The programme shall normally commence with registration in
February.
4.
PLACE OF STUDY
4.1 Lectures will be normally taught at premises of the University of
Zimbabwe.
4.2 Students will be allowed to conduct part or all of their research
projects at other institutions in and outside Zimbabwe.
5.
STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMME
5.1 The programme shall consist of TWO Parts. Part I shall be
coursework and Part II a research thesis.
5.2 Part I will consist of 2 semesters, of fifteen (15) weeks each.
Semesters I and II will normally run from February to May and July to
December respectively.
5.3 Examinations shall be held at the end of each semester, normally
after the completion of lectures for courses of each semester.
5.4 Part II shall normally commence immediately after Part I.
5.5 The dissertation should normally be submitted by the end of
September of the second year.
6.
RESEARCH PROJECT
Each student shall conduct a research project as approved by the
Postgraduate Committee of the Department of Agricultural Economics
and Extension. Where a student is permitted to work in another
institution or country, an Associate Supervisor in that institution or
country will normally be required.
7.
FORMAT, LODGEMENT AND DISTRIBUTION OF DISSERTATION

7.1 A candidate shall submit, for examination, four copies of his/her
dissertation in loose bound form within a suitable cover.
7.2 After this has been examined and amended in accordance with the
discretion of the Panel of Examiners, the candidate shall have at least
3 copies bound and submitted in accordance with the provisions of
the General Academic Regulations.
7.3 The specification for binding all research theses shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the General Academic
Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework.
8.
EXAMINATIONS
8.1 There shall be a Board of Examiners composed of the Dean of the
Faculty of Agriculture (Chairman), Chairman of Agricultural
Economics and Extension Department, all internal examiners and
the External Examiner(s).
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN

AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS (MAGEC)
1.
56
2.
PREAMBLE
These regulations should be read in conjunction with the General
Academic Regulations for the Master of Science Degree by Coursework
and the Faculty of Agriculture Regulations for Master of Science
Degrees.
ENTRY REGULATIONS
2.1 An appropriate good honours degree from a recognised university
in one of the following areas:
a) Agriculture (with appropriate and approved agricultural
economics courses)
b) Agricultural Economics
c) Economics
d) Appropriate and relevant Social Science degree as approved by
the Department of Agricultural Economics
2.2 Where the degree was awarded without classification, then
evidence is required that performance was equivalent to a good
honours degree.
2.3 Normally, evidence is required to show that applicants performed
satisfactorily in courses in Economic theory, Mathematics and
Statistics.
2.4 Applicants seeking admission under 2.1(c) and (d) whose academic
background is not in agriculture or agricultural economics may be
admitted on the basis of relevant work experience in these fields.
2.5 Applicants whose previous experience is inadequate may be
required to attend selected courses as Occasional Students as a way
of qualifying for admission to the programme.
8.2 The examination shall comprise Part I and Part II consisting of a

dissertation and an Oral Examination.
8.3 Parts I and II shall carry equal weight in the final assessment.
8.4 Part I Examinations
8.4.1 Semester I
There shall be 4 papers, each of 3 hours, as follows:
MAGEC501 Advanced Micro-economic Theory for
Agriculture
MAGEC502 Advanced Macro-economic Theory for
Agriculture
MAGEC503 Quantitative and Research Methods
MAGEC504 Agricultural and Economic Development
8.4.2 Semester II
There shall be 4 papers, each of 3 hours, as follows:
ONE required Course:
MAGEC505 Applied Econometrics
MAGEC506 Advanced Agricultural Policy Analysis
Plus TWO collective courses to be chosen
from:
MAGEC507 Natural Resource and Environmental
Economics
MAGEC508 Economic Analysis of Agricultural Projects
MAGEC509 Agricultural Marketing and Agribusiness
Development
8.4.3 Other appropriate and relevant elective courses may be taken
from other Departments with the approval of the
Departmental Board.
8.4.4 To pass at Part I, candidates must meet either of the following
conditions:
a) pass all courses at Part I
b) pass a minimum of five courses and have an average
overall Part I mark of 60% or better, provided no course
mark is below 40%.
8.4.5 Candidates are allowed a maximum of four supplementary
examinations during the programme.
8.4.6 Supplementary examinations shall normally be held within
two months after examinations at end of Semester II.
8.4.7 Normally, candidates must pass at Part I before proceeding to
Part II.
8.4.8 Continuous assessment shall count for 30% of final marks in
each course.
8.5 Part II Examinations
8.5.1 The dissertation shall be examined by the Panel of Examiners.
The dissertation will be in the order of 15 000 to 20 000
words.
8.5.2 Oral Examination

Candidates shall be required to attend a viva voce on the
dissertation and this may include material from Part I.
8.5.3 To pass at Part II, candidates must pass the dissertation.
9.
SYLLABUS
Syllabuses for courses do not form part of the regulations but shall be
submitted to the Faculty Board for approval. Copies of the detailed
syllabuses shall be maintained in the Department and Faculty Offices
for reference.
10. PUBLICATION OF RESULTS AND AWARD OF DEGREE

Results shall be published and degrees awarded in accordance with
the provisions of the General Academic Regulations.
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF SCIENCE

DEGREE IN ANIMAL SCIENCE (MAS)
1.
PREAMBLE
Academic Regulations for the Master of Science Degrees by Coursework
and the Faculty of Agriculture Regulations for Master of Science Degrees.
2.
QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMISSION

Appropriate good honours degree from recognised universities in one of
the following:
a) Agriculture including approved animal science courses;
b) Veterinary Science
(Note: where this degree has been awarded without classification,
then evidence will be required that performance has been
equivalent to a good honours degree)
c) Biological Sciences
Normally, evidence will be required to show that candidates have
performed satisfactorily in courses in Chemistry, Biochemistry and
Statistics.
Applicants whose previous experience is inadequate may be required to
attend selected undergraduate courses as occasional students towards
qualifying for admission to the MSC programme.
57
3. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

The programme is offered on a full-time basis and will run for two years.
4.
5.
58
6.
PLACE OF STUDY
Lectures and taught classes shall be held under the aegis of the University
of Zimbabwe. Where appropriate, the venue may be changed from
University premises to places in which it is more convenient to
demonstrate animal production. Students will be allowed to conduct
part or all of their research projects at other institutions, such as the
stations of the Department of Research and Specialist Services, provided
always that a competent Honorary Associate supervisor is available to
oversee the work on a day-to-day basis.
STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME
5.1 The programme shall consist of two parts. Part I shall be the
coursework component and Part II shall be the research component.
5.2 Part I of the programme shall normally commence in January.
5.3 The formal examinations in Part I shall be held after the completion
of all formal lectures, normally in October.
5.5 Students will carry out a research project as approved by the
Postgraduate Committee of the Department of Animal Science. The
Committee shall ensure that adequate supervision is available for
each student. Where any student is permitted to work at another
institution, there shall be at least two supervisors one of whom shall
be a member of staff within the Department of Animal Science, and
the other attached to the institution.
EXAMINATIONS
There shall be a Board of Examiners composed of the Dean of the Faculty
of Agriculture (Chairman). Chairman of the Department of Animal
Science, all Internal Examiners and the External Examiner. The
examination for the degree shall comprise of Part I, Part II and an oral
examination. Parts I and II shall carry equal weight in the final
assessment.
6.1 Examinations in Part I
6.1.1 There shall be six written papers of three hours for six
courses.
Four of the courses will be compulsory, with two electives
chosen from six courses, depending on the option of
specialisation. Three courses will be taken in each semester.
Semester I
Compulstory Courses
Advanced Nutritional Biochemistry
Advanced Animal Physiology
Advanced Animal Breeding and Genetics
Semester II
Compulsory Courses
Advanced Biometry for Animal Science
plus TWO electives from the following
Advanced Ruminant Nutrition
Rangeland Ecology and Management
Advanced Monogstric Nutrition
Applied Animal Breeding
Conservation of Animal Genetic Resources
Endocrine and Reproductive Physiology
MAS511
MAS512
MAS513
MAS514
MAS515
MAS520
MAS516
MAS517
MAS518
MAS519
Students who fail any course will be allowed to repeat the

failed course when next offered. Students who get less than
40% in any exam shall be allowed to repeat the failed
course. Supplementary examination may be offered for a
student who obtains a mark of less then 50% but above
39%.
6.1.2 Within each area of study there will be a continuous
assessment component which will take into consideration
marks obtained in essays, seminars and laboratory reports.
This shall count, depending on the course, as 30-40% of
the final assessment.
6.1.3 All students normally must have been deemed by the internal
examiners to have passed all the papers in Part I before
proceeding to Part II. A list of results for Part I will be
published by the University.
6.2 Examinations in Part II
The dissertation (MAS570) describing the results of the project shall
be examined by the Board of Examiners. The form of presentation of
the written dissertation shall be as prescribed in the General
Academic Regulations.
6.3 Oral Examination (MAS590)
Normally, not more than one oral examination shall be held at the
end of the programme. The examinations shall not be confined to
Part II but shall cover all the material of the course.

DEGREE IN CROP PROTECTION (MCP)
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1 These regulations should be read in conjunction with the General
Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework and the
Faculty of Agriculture Regulations for Master of Science Degrees.
2.
QUALIFICATION FOR ADMISSION

Appropriate good honours degree from recognised universities in one of
the following:
2.1 Agriculture including approved Crop Science courses;
2.2 Biological Sciences in appropriate subjects.
2.3 Qualified candidates may be required to attend selected
undergraduate agricultural courses where this is deemed necessary.
3.
4.
PLACE OF STUDY
4.1 Lectures and taught classes will be under the aegis of the University
of Zimbabwe. Practical classes and field trips will be at the most
suitable venue.
4.2 Students will be allowed to do part or all of their research projects at
other agricultural institutes or agrochemical companies approved
by the Crop Science Department Board, provided that a competent
Honorary Associate supervisor is available to oversee the work on a
regular basis.
5.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The course consists of two Parts. Part I consists of lectures, practical
classes and seminars. Part II of the programme consists of a research
project and an oral examination. The programme will normally
commence in February.
6.
EXAMINATIONS
6.1 Examinations will be composed of Parts I, II and an oral. Part I will
count 60% (70% of which will be for written examinations, and 30%
continuous assessment for each course) and Part II will comprise
40% (70% for the thesis and 30% continuous assessment) of the
final assessment.
6.2 Examinations in Part I
6.2.1 Semester I: There shall be four papers, each of 3 hours as
follows:
MCP501
Biology and Ecology of Weeds
MCP502
Mycology and Epidemiology of Plant
Pathogens
MCP503
Insect Systematics and Vertebrate Pests
MCP504
Biometry
6.2.2 Semester II: There shall be four papers, each of 3 hours as
follows:
MCP505
We e d M a n a g e m e n t a n d H e r b i c i d e
Physiology
MCP506
Virology, Bacteriology and Nematology
MCP507
Integrated Pest Management and Decision
Tools
MCP508
Pe s t i c i d e S c i e n c e a n d A p p l i c a t i o n
Technology
6.3 Examinations in Part II
Part II will commence immediately after the results of the written
examinations are published. Any student who fails one or more
courses in Part I will not be allowed to proceed to Part II. Students will
be allowed to apply to repeat failed courses. Supplementary
examinations may be granted in accordance with Faculty
Regulations for MSc programmes and General University
Regulations.
6.3.1 A research project (MCP570) from one of the following areas
will be chosen:
Plant Pathology
Nematology
Entomology
Weed Science
Pesticide Science and Application Technology.
6.3.2 Examinations at Part II will be in the form of a submitted
dissertation which will be examined by the Board of
Examiners. The form of presentation is that described in the
General Academic Regulations. The dissertation would be
submitted before the end of Semester II, Part II. Continuous
assessment in Part II will be in the form of a minimum of three
seminars presented by each student, each contributing 33%
to the final continuous assessment mark.
6.3.3 Students will be required to undergo an oral examination
based on the research project at the end of Part II.
7.
COURSE CONTENT
MCP501: Biology and Ecology of Weeds Ecological and
physiological characteristics of weeds; biology of weed seeds in the soil;
genetics and evolution of weeds; competition in crop-weed mixtures;
allelopathy; parasitic weeds in the tropics; weed management
programmes for smallholder farmers; weed management in
agroforestry; intercropping, organic farming and aquatic
environments
59
MCP502: Mycology and Epidemiology of Plant Pathogens Important

general of fungi causing plant disease; isolation techniques; hostpathogen interactions; mycotoxins; plant disease epidemiology;
methods of disease control.
MCP503: Insect Systematics and Vertebrate Pests Insects and mites
as pests; systematics and biology of insects and mites; case studies of
insect pests and their management; biology, ecology and behaviour of
rodents and birds; crop damage and control measures of rodents and
birds.
MCP504: Biometry Advanced biometry and experimental design;
simple and multiple regression; curve-fitting; co-variance analysis;
introduction to statistical packages; experimental designs and their use in
planning; statistically valid sampling methods; analysis and interpretation
of experiments; survey analysis.
60
MCP505: Weed Management and Herbicide Physiology Weed

management strategies in integrated weed management; problem weeds
in arable, aquatic and forestry plantation situations; herbicide physiology;
chemistry and mode action of herbicides; herbicide evaluation and
registration; resistance to herbicides; biotechnological methods to
introduce resistance to crops.
MCP508: Pesticide Science and Application Technology Range of

pesticides; pesticide chemistry; mode of action; absorption and
movement of pesticides; pesticide formulation; carriers and additives;
pesticide management; pesticide application; pesticide resistance;
bioassays; pesticide registration and regulations.
8.

DEGREE IN CROP SCIENCE WITH OPTIONS IN PLANT
BREEDING AND AGRONOMY (MCR)
1.
INTRODUCTION
These regulations shall be read in conjunction with the General
Academic Regulations for Master of Science Degrees by Coursework and
the Faculty of Agriculture Regulations for Master of Science Degrees in
Agriculture.
2.

2.1 An appropriate good honours degree from a recognised University
in one of the following areas:
a) Agriculture with appropriate and approved Crop Science
courses;
b) Biological Sciences in appropriate subjects approved by the
Department of Crop Science.
2.2 Where the degree was awarded without classification, evidence will
be required that performance was equivalent to a good honours
degree.
2.3 Applicants whose previous experience is inadequate may be
required to attend selected undergraduate agricultural courses
where this is deemed necessary.
3.
DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

4.
PLACE OF STUDY
4.1 Lectures shall normally be taught at premises of the University of
Zimbabwe.
4.2 Students will conduct their research projects at the Institutions
approved by the University of Zimbabwe or at any other appropriate
Institutions approved by the Senate of the University of Zimbabwe.
MCP506: Virology Bacteriology and Nematology Biology of viruses

and bacteria; important diseases caused by viruses and bacteria;
detection techniques for viruses and bacteria; biotechnology; nematode
identification; biology and ecology of nematodes; host-parasite
relationships; extraction of nematodes from soil and plant material;
control methods.
MCP507: Integrated Pest Management and Decision Tools Problem
identification; strategies of integrated pest and disease management;
ecological basis of pest and disease management; biological control; crop
yield and pest and disease damage relationships; crop loss assessment;
pest and disease forecasting and predictive monitoring; decision theory
models; modelling crops and pest, disease and weed populations;
evaluation and decision support
SEMINARS
Students are expected to present one seminar in each subject area as
listed under Part II research project and one on their research project
topic (total of 6 seminars).
5.
6.

5.1 The programme shall consist of two options, Plant Breeding and
Agronomy, which shall run concurrently.
5.2 The programme shall consist of TWO Parts, Part I shall consist of
taught coursework and Part II, a research thesis.
5.3 Part I will consist of 2 semesters of 15 weeks each run over one year.
5.4 Examinations shall be held at the end of each semester for taught
courses.
5.5 Part II shall normally commence immediately after successful
completion of Part I and shall run for one year.
5.6 The dissertation shall normally be submitted at least two months
before the end of the second year (Part II).
5.7 There are four compulsory courses in Semester I and four optional
courses in Semester II, each of which will be examined separately.
5.8 All courses shall consist of 60 contact hours, 60 for lectures and 60
for practicals.
RESEARCH PROJECT
Each candidate shall conduct a research project as approved by the
Postgraduate Committee of the Department of Crop Science. Where a
student is permitted to conduct this research in another institution, an
associate supervisor in that institution will normally be required to
supervise the research activities of the student.
7.
FORMAT, LODGEMENT AND DISTRIBUTION OF THE DISSERTATION

7.1 A candidate shall submit, for examination, four copies of his/her
7.2 After this has been examined and amended, the candidate shall
submit at least three copies bound and submitted in accordance
with the provisions of the General Academic Regulations.
7.3 The specification for binding of all research thesis shall be in
8.
EXAMINATIONS
8.1 There shall be a Panel of Examiners, normally composed of the Dean
of the Faculty of Agriculture (Chairman), the Chairman of Crop
Science Department, all Internal Examiners and the External
Examiner(s).
8.2 The examination shall comprise Part I and Part II. Part I
examinations will consist of four written papers at the end of
Semester I PLUS four written papers at the end of Semester II. Part II
shall consist of a dissertation and an oral examination.
8.3 Part I shall comprise 60% (70% of which shall be for written
examinations and 30% continuous assessment for each course) and
Part II shall comprise 40% (70% for the thesis and 30% continuous
assessment) of the final assessment.
8.4 Examinations in Part I:

8.4.1 Candidates in both Plant Breeding and Agronomy Options
are required to take a total of eight courses comprising four
compulsory common courses and four other courses from
their chosen option as follows:
Semester I: Common compulsory courses
There shall be four papers each of three hours as follows:
MCR501
Biometry and Experimental Designs
MCR502
Crop Protection
MCR513
Business Management for Agriculture
MCR504
Field Crop Physiology
After Semester 1, students can proceed to specialize either in
Plant Breeding or Agronomy.
Semester II: Plant Breeding Option
MCR505
Genetic Principles and Techniques in Plant
Breeding
MCR506
Population and Quantitative Genetics
MCR507
Biotechnology for Plant Breeding
plus ONE of the following:
MCR508
Plant Genetic Resources
MCR515
Agronomy of Tropical Crops
MCR516
Seed Science and Technology
MCR511
Farming Systems and Agricultural
Development
Any other appropriate course on offer in the University of
Zimbabwe and acceptable to the Department of Crop
Science.
Agronomy Option
THREE compulsory courses from:
MCR515
Agronomy of Tropical Crops
MCR516
Seed Science and Technology
MCR517
Irrigation and Water Management
plus ONE of the following:
MCR508
Plant Genetic Resources
MCR511
Farming Systems and Agricultural
Development
MCR514
Crop Ecology
Students may also take any other appropriate course on offer
in the University and acceptable to the Department of Crop
Science.
61
8.4.2 Supplementary examinations may be granted in accordance

with Faculty Regulations for MSc programmes and General
University Regulations.
8.4.3 To pass at Part I, candidates must pass all courses. Before
proceeding to Part II, candidates are required to pass all Part I
courses to the satisfaction of the Panel of Examiners.
8.5 Examinations in Part II:
8.5.1 Part II will commence immediately after the results of the
written examination have been published.
Satisfactory performance in all the papers in Part I
examinations is required to proceed to Part II.
8.5.1 The dissertation (MCR570) shall be examined by the Panel of
Examiners.
8.5.2 Candidates are required to attend a viva voce on the
dissertation and the coursework at the end of Part II.
8.5.3 To pass at Part II, candidates must pass the dissertation and
continuous assessment.
9.
62
SYLLABUS
Syllabuses for courses do not form part of these Regulations but shall be
submitted to the Faculty Board of the Faculty of Agriculture for approval.
Copies of detailed syllabuses shall be maintained in the Department of
Crop Science for reference.
FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE AND FACULTY

OF VETERINARY SCIENCE
Part 1 will consist of 2 semesters of fifteen (15) weeks each. Semesters

1 and 2 shall normally run from August to December and February to
June, respectively.
REGULATIONS FOR THE REGIONAL MASTER

OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN DAIRY SCIENCE AND
TECHNOLOGY
For Part 1, a student shall register for 10 courses, nine (9) of which are
core courses and one (1) an optional course.

These regulations shall apply to a student who registers for the Master
of Science degree in Dairy Science and Technology.
These regulations should be read in conjunction with the University of
Zimbabwe General Academic Regulations for taught Masters Degrees.
The General Academic Regulations take precedence over these
regulations.
Terms used in these regulations are as defined in the General Academic
Regulations.
3. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
To be admitted into the programme, an applicant should have a
recognized BSc honours degree in one of the following areas:
a) Veterinary Science
b) Animal Science
c) Dairy Science Technology
d) Food Science and Technology
An applicant with an appropriate degree, other than as stipulated in 3.1
above, may be admitted to the programme at the recommendation of
the Higher Degrees Committee and the approval of Senate. In such a
case the applicant may be required to write a qualifying examination
before being considered for admission.
An application for admission, with the necessary supporting
documents, should be made to the Deputy Registrar (Academic) at the
University of Zimbabwe on the prescribed forms.
4. STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMMES
The programme shall have two Parts: Part 1 shall consist of taught
coursework and Part 2 a research project.
The programme shall be offered on a full-time basis for two academic
years.
A taught course shall consist of at least 40 contact hours of which

about 60% are formal lecturers and the remainder shall comprise
practicals and tutorials.
The coursework will normally be taught at the premises of the
University of Zimbabwe.
A student may conduct part or all of his/her research project at a
recognized and approved institution in or outside Zimbabwe.
Where a candidate is permitted to undertake research work in another
place, an Associate Supervisor in that place will normally be required.
Before conducting the research work, approval of the research
proposal by the candidates supervisor and Higher Degrees Committee
shall be required.
5. EXAMINATIONS
The examination of courses in the programme shall be carried out in
Formal examination of a taught course shall take place at the end of the
semester in which teaching is completed.
The deadline for submission of the theses for examination shall
normally be two months before the end of Part 2, semester ll.
6. ASSESSMENT OF COURSES
Each course will be assessed on the basis of one 3-hour examination
paper.
To pass a course a student must have passes in both the formal written
examination and the continuous assessment for that course.
The distribution of marks for all courses except for the course
Research Methods and Biostatistics (MAV501) shall be as follows:
Formal examination
70%
Continuous assessment
30%
For the courses Research Methods and Biostatistics (MAV501) and
63
(MAV510) Dairy Cattle Genetics and Breeding the distribution of marks

shall be as follows:
Formal examination
60%
40%
The pass mark of 50%, as prescribed in the General Regulations, shall
apply for all taught courses of the programme and the research project.
Examination of Part 2 shall be in the form of a submitted dissertation
and an oral presentation of research findings assessed by a Panel of
Examiners.
For examination purposes, a student shall submit four copies of his/her
dissertation in loosely bound form within a suitable cover and a soft
copy.
The overall mark for the research project (MAV560) and (MAV510)
Dairy Cattle Genetics and Breeding shall be derived as follows:
7.
64
8.
Written dissertation
80%
Oral presentation
20%
The examination results shall be processed in accordance with the
To be allowed to proceed from Part 1 to Part 2, a student must have
passed at least eight (8) courses.
A student may be allowed to write a supplementary examination for a
failed course in accordance with the General Regulations.
The overall result for a Part 1 student who:
?passes all the ten (10) prescribed courses shall be PASS:
PROCEED;
?passes at least eight (8) courses shall be INCOMPLETE:
PROCEED;
?passes less than eight (8) courses shall be FAIL: APPLY TO
REPEAT FAILED COURSES
?has been awarded a supplementary examination in a failed
course shall be INCOMPLETE: ALLOWED TO WRITE A
SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION IN THE INDICATED
COURSE(S).
To qualify for the award of the MSc degree, a student must pass each of
the prescribed courses at Part 1 and Part 2.
The overall mark for degree classification shall be derived as follows:
Part 1 overall average

50%
Research project mark 50%
The MSc degree will be awarded and classified as one of the following:
?PASS, or
?PASS WITH MERIT, or
?PASS WITH DISTINCTION,
in accordance with the General Academic Regulations.
A student who fails the dissertation within the supplementable range
may be allowed to re-submit the dissertation on such conditions and
within such a period of time as specified by the Academic Committee.
9.
10.
AWARD OF THE DEGREE

The degree shall be awarded in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
The provisions in the General Academic Regulations pertaining to
academic offences and penalties shall apply.
11.

The posthumous and aegrotat provisions of the General Academic
Regulations shall apply to these regulations.
12.

The examination results of a student shall be published as prescribed
by the General Academic Regulations.
The results of a graduating student shall only be published after
confirmation by the Dean(s) that the student has submitted at least 3
bound copies and a corrected soft copy in accordance with the
provisions of the General Academic Regulations.
The specifications for binding of the dissertation shall be in accordance
with the provisions of the General Academic Regulations for Masters
Degree by Coursework.
13.
STUDENT APPEALS AGAINST PUBLISHED RESULTS

The provisions of the General Academic Regulations on student
appeals against published results shall apply.
14.
15.
2.
ACADEMIC TRANSCRIPT
A student shall be entitled to an academic transcript in accordance
with the General Academic Regulations.
AWARD OF A DEGREE CERTIFICATE OF THE UNIVERSITY OF
ZIMBABWE
A degree certificate of the University of Zimbabwe shall be awarded
3.
REGULATIONS FOR THE COLLABORATIVE

MASTERS IN AGRICULTURAL AND APPLIED
ECONOMICS (CMAAE)
4.
Preamble
These regulations should be read in conjunction with the general
University of Zimbabwe Academic Regulations for the Master of
Science Degree by Coursework and the Faculty of Agriculture
Regulations for Master of Science Degrees.
Entry Requirements:
2.1
An appropriate and relevant good honours degree in a Science
field, Social Sciences from a recognized University with
appropriate prerequisite courses in economics as approved by
the Department of Agricultural Economics and Extension.
2.2
Where the degree was awarded without classification, then

evidence is required that performance was equivalent to a good
honours degree.
2.3
Normally, evidence is required to show that applicants

performed satisfactorily in courses in Economic Theory,
Mathematics and Statistics.
2.4
Applicants seeking admissions whose academic background is

not in agriculture or agricultural economics may be admitted on
the basis of relevant work experience in an appropriate field.
Provided they successfully complete a pre registration program
of courses.
2.5
Applicants whose degree or experience is inadequate may be
5.
Programme Duration
3.1 The programme is offered on a full-time basis and will run for
two years.
3.2
The intake shall normally be every year.
3.3
The programme shall normally commence with registration in

February.
Place of Study
4.1 The Core courses will be offered at premises of the University of
Zimbabwe.
4.2
The Foundation and Elective courses will be taken at a Joint

Regional Facility.
4.3
Students will be allowed to conduct their part or all of their

research projects at other institutions in and outside Zimbabwe.
Prior approval will have to be obtained to conduct the research
outside Zimbabwe. One consideration for the approval will be
availability and appropriate arrangements for supervision
capacity at the external institutions.
Programme Structure
5.1 The programme shall consist of Two Parts. Part I shall be
coursework and Part II a research thesis.
5.2 Part I shall consists of three semesters, Semester I, II and III, of 15
weeks each:
5.2.1 Semesters I and II shall consists of Core courses taken at
University of Zimbabwe
5.2.2 Semester III: Foundation and Elective courses for
specialization to be taken at the Joint Facility
5.2.3 Semester IV: shall be the thesis research at University of
Zimbabwe or approved external institution and
submission at University of Zimbabwe.
5.3 Examinations shall be held at the end of each semester, normally
after the completion of course lectures.
65
5.3.1 Students must pass all core courses offered on a semester

to proceed to the next semester. Department examination
board reserves the right to offer supplementary
examinations to students who fail within a borderline
supplementable range of 40 - 49 %.
The supplementary examination shall be a written
form or viva format.
5.3.2 All other students who fail core courses of semester 1 shall
not proceed to Semester 2 until they have cleared the
failed courses.
6.
66
7.
Research Project
Each student shall conduct a research project as approved by the
Postgraduate Committee of the Department of Agricultural
Economics and Extension. Where a student is permitted to work in
another institution or country, an Associate Supervisor in that
institution or country will normally be required.
8.
Examinations
8.1 There shall be a Board of Examiners composed of the Dean of the
Faculty of Agriculture (Chairman), Chairman of the Department
of Agricultural Economics and Extension, all internal examiners
and the external examiner(s).
8.2
The examination shall comprise Part I and Part II consisting of a
dissertation and an Oral Examination.
8.3
Parts I and II shall carry equal weight in the final assessment.
8.4
Examinations in Part I
The candidate shall need to take 12 courses as follows:
8.4.1
Semester I : Core Courses

There shall be 4 papers all required each of 3 hours
MAAE 501: Microeconomics
MAAE 502: Mathematics for Economics
MAAE 503: Statistics for Economics
MAAE 504: Issues in Agriculture and Applied Economics
8.4.2
Semester II Core Courses

There shall be 4 papers all required each of 3 hours
Format, Lodgement and Distribution of Dissertation

7.1
A candidate shall submit, for examination, four copies of his/her
7.2
7.3
After this has been examined and amended in accordance with

the discretion of the Panel of Examiners, the candidate shall have
at least three copies bound and submitted in accordance with
the provisions of the University of Zimbabwe General Academic
Regulations.
The specifications for binding all research theses shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the University of Zimbabwe
General Academic Regulations for Masters Degree by
Coursework.
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
505:
506:
507:
508:
Production Economics
Macroeconomics
Econometrics
Research Methods and management
8.4.3 Semester III:

Foundation Courses: Two courses to be chosen from the following
according to the candidates chosen area of specialisation:
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
509:
510:
511:
512:
513:
5141:
5142:
Institutional and Behavioral Economics

Environment and Natural Resource Management
Agricultural Policy Analysis
Agricultural and Rural Development
Agribusiness Management
Finance and Risk Management
Agribusiness Supply Chain Management
Elective Courses: At least two courses to be chosen from the

following according to the candidate's chosen area of
specialisation:
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
MAAE
5101:
5102:
5103:
5111:
5112:
5113:
5121:
5122:
5123:
5124:
5131:
5132:
5133:
5134:
MAAE 5135:
MAAE 5143:
MAAE 5144:
Social Organization in Agriculture

Gender and Economic Development
Project Planning & Management
Environmental Valuation and Policy
Quantitative Methods in Environment Economics
Natural Resource Economics & Management
Consumer Demand Analysis
Quantitative Analysis of Agricultural Policy
Food Policy Analysis
International Trade and Policy
Agricultural Marketing and Price Analysis
Factor Market Analysis
Farm Management and Production
Farming Systems and Sustainable Livelihood
Analysis
Science and Technology Policy Analysis
Quantitative Methods in Agribusiness
Management
Microfinance
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.4.6
Semester IV & V: CMAAE 515 Research and Thesis

To pass at Part I, candidates must pass all courses.
Candidates are allowed a maximum of two supplementary
examinations.
8.4.7
Supplementary examinations shall normally be held within

two months after examinations at the end of each semester.
8.4.8
Normally, candidates must pass at Part I before proceeding

to Part II.
Continuous assessment shall count for up to 50% of final
marks in each course.
8.4.9
8.5 Examination in Part II

8.5.1
The dissertation shall be examined by the Panel of
Examiners. The dissertation will be in order of 15 000 to
20 000 words.
8.5.2 Oral Examination:
Candidates may be required to attend a viva voce on the
dissertation and this may include material from Part I.
8.5.3 To pass at Part II, a candidate must pass the dissertation.
9.
Syllabus
Syllabi for courses do not form part of the regulations but shall be
submitted to the Faculty Board for approval. Copies of the detailed
syllabi shall be maintained in the Department and Faculty offices for
reference.
10.
Publications of Results and Award of Degree

the provisions of the University of Zimbabwe General Academic
Regulations.
67
FACULTY OF ARTS
DEGREE PROGRAMMES
1
2.

1.1
These Regulations apply only to students registered for
undergraduate Degree Programmes in the Faculty of Arts.
1.2
They should be read in conjunction with the General Academic
Regulations for Undergraduate Degree Programmes, hereinafter
referred to as the General Academic Regulations which have
precedence over these Faculty Regulations.
Course unit:
Continuous Assessment shall include assignments, fieldwork, oral

examinations, practicals and special projects
Credit:
means the sum of the course units of the courses a
student has passed in a specified programme.
Dissertation:
describing the research process, findings and
analysis of the findings of a project.
Level of Study:
means a designated part within a programme

which demarcates the depth of study within a
specific subject whereby courses are also assigned
levels to depict the depth of that course within a
subject.
Major Subject
means a subject that a student formally commits

and specializes from start to the end of the
programme
Minor Subject:
means a subject that a student formally commits

from start but elect to drop after level 2
Module:
means a component of a course that may be

assigned a weighting in course units but is not
separately examinable.
Optional Course:
means a course that majors in a subject may elect to

take.
Plagiarism:
means, the submission by a student of the work of

another person as his/her own, or the unattributed
incorporation of all or part of the work of another
person, either deliberately of negligently, into a
work being produced for a academic assessment
and/or examination.
Practical course
means a course in which a student is required to

carry out practical exercises under supervision.
Pre-requisite Course:
means a course which must be taken before a

DEFINITION OF TERMS
Academic year:
68
means two complete semesters, as defined by the

General Academic Regulations, and the intervening
vacation period. Such year to commence on the date set
by the Senate for the commencement of the academic
year for undergraduate degree programmes. The Senate
may however, vary the date of commencement for an
academic year in any programme of study
Assignment:
means a written or practical exercise to be submitted by a

student for assessment as a component of the continuous
assessment requirements for a course as prescribed in the
relevant programme regulations
Attachment:
means a period of time during which a student is assigned

to a suitable government, non-government, professional
or other organization, firm, other approved entity or to
an individual for the purpose of gaining practical skill or
experience.
Core Course:
means a compulsory course that must be passed in a

given programme
Co-requisite course:
Course:
means a course which must be taken at the same

time as a specified course
means a separately examinable component of a Subject

weighting given to a course in a specified
programme in such a manner that the total of the
weights of the courses in each semester shall be 60
course units
Programme:
Project:
3.3 Bachelor of Arts Honours Degree Programme
means a plan of study which, on successful

completion, leads to the award of an
undergraduate degree of the University.
means research, clinical investigation, design,
artistic or practical work undertaken by a student,
either as a course or part of a course which may,
depending on the academic regulations for a
programme for which she or he is registered, be
presented in the form of a dissertation or report, a
script, musical or artistic composition or work, a
model, a design, a visual or oral recording, in an
appropriate digital or other electronic format, or in
such form as may be designated in the regulation
for a specific programme of study
Archaeology
Classical and Religious Studies
Classical Studies
Classics
Economic History
English
French
French and Portuguese
Geography
History
Linguistics
Mathematics
Ndebele
Philosophy
Portuguese
Philosophy and Religious Studies
Religious Studies
Shona
Theatre Arts
An African Language and History
An African Language and Religious Studies
An African Language and Linguistics
Semester:
means a specified period of time normally

consisting of fifteen (15) weeks
To qualify for admission to an undergraduate degree Programme in the
Faculty of Arts an applicant must satisfy the Entry Requirements as
specified in the General Academic Regulations.
Subject:
means a field of study within a programme
5.
Subsidiary Subject:
means a subject taken by an Honours student in

addition to his/her major subject and studied up to
Level 2 of the subject.
3.
PROGRAMMES
3.1 The Faculty of Arts offers undergraduate programmes for the
Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Arts Honours degrees.
3.2 Bachelor of Arts Degree Programme
The Faculty of Arts offers Bachelor of Arts Degree in the following
major subjects:-
Afrikaans Language and Cultural Studies
Archaeology
Classical Studies
English
Economics
Economic History
French Language and Cultural Studies
Geography
History
German Language and Cultural Studies
Greek Language and Culture
Linguistics
Latin Language and Culture
Mathematics
Ndebele
Philosophy
Politics and Administration
Shona
Portuguese Language and Cultural Studies Psychology
Sociology
Chinese Language and Cultural Studies
War and
Theatre Arts
Strategic Studies
5.1 The undergraduate programmes in the Faculty of Arts are taught at
three levels of study,1, 2 and 3 OR, in the case of Special Honours, at
one level. There are prescribed courses that a student must take and
pass at each level and for each chosen subject.
5.2 For a given subject, there are courses designated as core or optional
courses.
5.3 A course worth 10 or 15 course units shall normally consist of at
least three hours of formal instruction per week for a semester. A
course worth 20 course units shall normally consist of either at least
four hours of formal instruction per week for a semester or at least
three hours of formal instruction per week over two consecutive
semesters in a single academic year.
5.4 Bachelor of Arts Degree Programme
5.4.1 To obtain a Bachelor of Arts degree a student must pass two
distinct major subjects AND
either pass the prescribed courses in two other subjects at
level 1
or
pass the prescribed courses in one other subject at levels 1
and 2.
The combination of subjects for a student is subject to
approval by the respective Departmental Boards and the
Dean of Arts.
69
5.4.2 An undergraduate student registered for an Arts degree

must take a minimum of TWO subjects taught in the Faculty
of Arts up to Level 2 of study.
5.6 A student registered in the Faculty of Arts must pass the two
Communication Skills courses designed for Arts students, unless
exempted by the Senate.
5.4.3 A major subject for the Bachelor of Arts degree comprises

passes in prescribed courses worth 40 course units at each of
levels 1 and 2 and prescribed courses worth 60 course units
at level 3 in that subject.
5.4.4 A student repeating a failed level 1 course may be allowed to
register for level 2 courses for which the prerequisites have
been passed. This shall also apply for a student repeating a
level 2 course. The courses being repeated take precedence
over all other courses if timetable does not allow for the
combination of courses.
5.7 A failed core course shall be repeated. A student who fails a required
optional course shall repeat the course or take another prescribed
course.
5.8 Normally, a student shall not register for courses worth more than
160 course units in an academic year.
6.
6.1 End of course examinations for the Bachelor of Arts and the
Bachelor of Arts Honours Degrees will normally take place at the end
of the semester in which the teaching of the course is completed.
6.2 The examination for a Course worth 10 or 15 course units, shall
normally be of two hours duration, and the examination for a Course
worth 20 course units shall normally be of three hours duration.
5.4.5 A student is not allowed to proceed carrying a level 1 course

into level 3.
5.5 Bachelor of Arts Honours Degree Programme
70
EXAMINATIONS
5.5.1 To obtain a Bachelor of Arts Honours degree a student must

complete requirements for level 1 of the Bachelor of Arts
degree and subsequently specialize in one subject by taking
the prescribed courses in that subject at levels 2 and 3.
6.3 The examiners may require any candidate to attend a viva voce in
any level of the Degree Programme.
5.5.2 A student registered for the Bachelor of Arts Honours degree

may, with the approval of the Departmental Board and the
Dean of Arts, take courses from other Programmes.
6.4 Departments shall set and inform students of the deadlines for the
submission of dissertations and/or project reports at the beginning
of the semester in which they are to be submitted.
5.5.3 A student registered for a BA (Special Honours Degree

Programme) shall complete the requirements for the BA
Honours Degree over one academic year of full-time study or
two academic years of part-time study. A student in this
programme will be required to take at least 80 course units
from the BA Honours programme and a Dissertation. The
student is not permitted to take courses that he/she studied
and passed at Levels 2 and 3 of the BA Programme.
5.5.4 A major subject for the Bachelor of Arts Honours degree
comprises passes in prescribed level 2 courses worth 120
course units and prescribed level 3 courses worth 120 course
units inclusive of the dissertation.
5.5.5 The Honours dissertation on an approved topic shall
normally be undertaken in the final year of study and must be
between 6 000 and 10 000 words in length.
7.
7.1 Examination assessment shall normally be based on continuous
assessment and end of course written examinations. The
continuous assessment for the Bachelor of Arts Degree and the
Bachelor of Arts Honours Degree shall normally count for 25% of
the total possible marks, except in Archaeology, Geography and
Theatre Arts where, with approval of the Senate, may count for up to
40% of the total possible marks.
7.2 In the case of Afrikaans, Chinese, French, German, Portuguese and
Spanish, there shall be an oral examination and, in the case of
Archaeology, Geography and Theatre Arts, there shall be an
assessment of practical work including exercises on fieldwork.
7.3 In order to pass a course in a Bachelor of Arts Degree Programme

and Bachelor of Arts Honours Degree Programme a student shall be
required to pass the continuous assessment and written
examination separately. If the student is unsuccessful in one of these
components, the overall mark for the student for that course shall
be 48% or the mark obtained, whichever is the lesser.
7.4 The relative weighting for continuous coursework assessment shall
be as indicated in Departmental subject syllabuses under section 11
below. In assessing course marks the Departmental Panel of
Examiners and the Faculty Board of Examiners shall take cognisance
of these Departmental special provisions /requirements.
7.5 The submission of reports for team projects in Archaeology,
Geography and Theatre Arts shall be in accordance with the
8.
?
still has an outstanding Level 1 course before embarking on
9.5
9.6 PRESUMED WITHDRAWN means that a student was registered for a

given programme but has not attended any class sessions nor
submitted any written work for assessment and has not presented
himself/herself for the end of course examinations for the semester
under consideration.
10. AWARD OF THE BAA DEGREE AND THE BA HONOURS DEGREE
10.1
The Bachelor of Arts Degree will be awarded to a student who

has passed two major subjects and has in addition 80 credits in
courses in another subject or in two other subjects, as
prescribed in Section 5.4 of these regulations.
10.2
The Bachelor of Arts Honours Degree shall be awarded to a

student who has passed a major subject in accordance with
Section 5.5 of these regulations. The student must have
acquired credits from at least 360 course units, at least 216 of
which shall be derived from the prescribed Honours courses,
inclusive of the dissertation.
8.1 The compositions and functions of Departmental Panel of

Examiners shall be in accordance with the provisions of the General
8.2 The processing of marks by Departments shall be in line with the
10.3
The classification of the Bachelor of Arts Degree and the

Bachelor of Arts Honours Degree shall be based on the average
of the best of Level 2 courses worth 120 course units and the best
of Level 3 courses worth 120 course units, inclusive of all the core
courses.
10.4
To be awarded a degree in the Faculty of Arts, a student must

have passed the Communication Skills courses.
8.3 The composition and responsibilities of Faculty Board of Examiners

shall be in accordance with the provisions and requirements of the
9.

9.1 The overall results PASS: PROCEED shall apply to a student who has
passed all level 1 or level 2 courses as prescribed in regulation 13.
9.2 The overall results INCOMPLETE: PROCEED shall apply to a student
who obtains 60 or more credits in his/her level 1 or Level 2 courses.
9.3 The overall result INCOMPLETE; ALLOWED TO APPLY TO REPEAT
FAILED COURSES shall apply to a student who:
fails by more than 60 credits to fulfill the prescribed requirements
for Level 1 or 2; fails to graduate in his or her final year of study; or
9.4 INCOMPLETE; REPEAT FAILED COURSES shall apply to a student
who:
?
fails by at least 30 credits to fulfill the prescribed requirements
for Level 1 or 2
Level 3 courses.
The overall result WITHDRAW shall apply in accordance with the
11. BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE (BAA)

Additional Entry Requirements
In addition, to qualify to register for a particular Subject, a student must
normally satisfy the conditions which are stipulated under each subject of
the BAA Degree Programme below:
71
DEPARTMENT
SUBJECT
ADDITIONAL ENTRY REQUIRMENTS
African Languages
and Literature
Kiswahili
no special requirements
Ndebele
A Level pass in Ndebele
Shona
A Level pass in Shona
Tonga
no special requirements
Economics
Economic History
O Level pass in Mathematics

An 'A' Level pass in History and/or 'A' level pass
in Economic History or Economics (plus either
O' Level History or 'O' Level Economic History).
Economics
Economic History
English
Geography and
Environmental
Science
History
English
Geography
A Level pass in English

An O level pass in Mathematics and A level
pass in Geography.
Archaeology
An O Level pass in Mathematics and A Level

pass in History or Geography.
History
An A level pass in History
An A level pass in a subject acceptable to the

Department of History.
Linguistics
Linguistics
Mathematics
Modern Languages
Mathematics
Afrikaans/Nederlands
A student should be register ed for at least one

language subject at Level I.
An A level Pass in Mathematics
An A level Pass in Afrikaans
Chinese and Cultural Studies
No special qualifications
Afrikaans and
Cultural Studies
French Language and

Cultural Studies
German Language and Cultural
Studies
Spanish Language and Cultural

Studies
No special qualification
Portuguese Language
and Cultural Studies
No special qualification
Psychology
Psychology
Religious Studies,
Classics and
Philosophy
Classical Studies
An O level pass in Mathematics and a Science

subject
No additional qualifications
Latin Language and Culture
Philosophy
Religious Studies
A level pass in Religious Studies/Divinity
Theatre Arts
72
Theatre Arts
12.
Religious Studies
History
Philosophy
Archaeology
History
Shona
English
Geography
Religious Studies
History
Philosophy
Religious Studies
History
Shona
Religious Studies
Linguistics
Shona
Religious Studies
English
Shona
Linguistics
Economic History
English
French
History
Philosophy
Religious Studies
History
Religious Studies
Theatre Arts
English
Economic History
English
Linguistics
Portuguese
German
English
Shona
Chinese
Linguistics
Theatre Arts
Archaeology
Geography
Shona
Economic History
History
War and Strategic
Studies
Economic History
History
Political Administration
Archaeology
Economic History
History
Religious Studies
Shona
Theatre Arts
Economic History
Economics
Philosophy
Ndebele
Linguistics
Theatre Arts
English
Geography
Shona
Classics
Philosophy
Religious Studies
Archaeology
Geography
History
Linguistics
Shona
Theatre Arts
Archaeology
History
Philosophy
Classical Studies
Linguistics
Portuguese
English
Psychology
Linguistics
Archaeology
Economic History
Philosophy
English
Chinese
Linguistics
Classical Studies
English
French
Geography
Mathematics
Archaeology
English
French
Linguistics
Archaeology
Geography
Philosophy
Economic History
English
French
English
Philosophy
Sociology
POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS
The BAA programme is a 3 3 2 formation ie three subjects at level 1,
three subjects at level 2 and two subjects at level 3. Some of the
possible combinations are as follows:
13.1 Bachelor of Arts Degree

The Bachelor of Arts Degree programme shall cover the courses listed
under the following subjects, but not all optional courses will be on offer
every semester:
13.1.1
Level
Course
Code
Afrikaans Language and Cultural Studies

Description
Prerequisite
Course
Units
AKB1010
Language 1
10
AKB1050
AKB1060
AKB1070
AKB2050
Language and Oral 1

Introduction to Culture and Civilisation
Introduction to Communication
Language 2
10
10
10
10
AKB2060
AKB2070
AKB2080
Language and Oral 2

Topics in Culture a nd Civilisation
Topics in Communication
10
10
10
AKB3000
Language 3
15
AKB3050
Language and Oral 3
15
AKB3060
Advanced Topics in Culture and Civilisation
15
AKB3070
Advanced Topics in Communication
15
Status
Core
Core
Core
13.1.2
Level
Archaeology
Level 1:
A student shall take and pass 3 core courses and
1 optional course
Level 2:
A student shall take and pass 4 courses from the
list of optional courses
Level 3:
A student shall take and pass 4 courses from the
list of optional courses
Course
Description
Prerequisite
Code
1
Course
Units
ARC1010
Introduction to Archaeological Methods
10
ARC1020
Interpretation of Archaeological Data
10
ARC1030
Introduction to Archaeological Theory
10
ARC1040
PreHistory of Africa
10
ARC1050
PreHistory of Near East, Europe and

America
10
ARC2010
Early Prehistory of Southern Africa
10
ARC2020
Later Prehistory of Southern Africa
10
ARC2030
Archaeological Theory 2
ARC2050
Ethno Archaeology
10
ARC2160
Heritage Management
10
ARC2080
Heritage Interpretation
ARC2100
Environmental Archaeology
10
ARC3000
15
ARC3100
15
ARC3160
Archaeological Theory 2
ARC3170
Prehistory of Eastern and Central Africa
15
ARC3180
Ethnoarchaeology
15
ARC3070
Archaeological Site Management and

Conservation
ARC2060
15
ARC3090
Heritage, To urism and Development
ARC2060
15
ARC3110
Archaeological Survey
15
ARC3130
Bioarchaeology
15
ARC3140
Analytical Methods
15
ARC3150
Analysis of Lithics and Ceramics
15
ARC1030
ARC2060
ARC1030
10
Status
Core
13.1.3
Chinese Language and Cultural Studies
LEVEL 1 : A Student shall take and pass 4 core courses from the list below:
Level
Course
Code
Description
CHB1000
CHB1001
CHB1002
CHB1003
Introduction to Chinese Language

Introduction to Spoken Chinese
Introduction to Chinese Culture and Civilization
CHB2000
CHB2001
CHB2002
CHB2003
CHB3000
CHB3001
CHB3002
CHB3003
13.1.4
Optional
Level 1:
Level 2:
Level 3:
10
Level
15
Prerequisite
Course
Units
10
10
10
10
Introduction to History and Geography of China

Introduction to Chinese Structure
Intermediate Spoken Chinese
Introduction to Literary and Socio-cultural aspects
Advanced Chinese culture and civilization
10
10
10
10
15
15
15
15
Written and Oral Expression

Advanced Language and Chinese for Commerce
Advanced topics in Chinese History and Literature
Aspects of Chinese politics, economy and technology
Core
Core
A student shall take and pass 2 core courses

A student shall take and pass 4 courses on offer from the list of optional
courses
A student shall take and pass 4 courses on offer from the list of optional
courses
Description
CLS1010
CLS1020
Introduction to Ancient Greece

Introduction to Ancient Rome
20
20
CLS2000
CLS2140
CLS2150
CLS2160
CLS2170
CLS2180
CLS2190
CLS2090
CLS2100
CLS2110
CLS2120
CLS2130
CLS3000
CLS3090
CLS3150
CLS3130
CLS3050
CLS3060
CLS3080
CLS3100
Greek History
Greek Art
Classical Poetry
Classical Drama
Mythology
Religion
Classical Philosophy
English Etymology of Classical Origin
Roman History
Roman Art
Christianity in the Ancient World
Classical Prose
Advanced Topics in History
Advanced Topics in Art
Advanced Topics in Poetry
Advanced Topics in Prose
Advanced Topics in Mythology
Advanced Topics in Religion
Advanced Topics in Philosophy
Classical Archaeology
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
Core
Classical Studies
Course
Code
Optional
Status
Prerequisite
Course
Units
Status
Core
Optional
Optional
73
13.1.5 Economics (See Faculty of Social Studies)

13.1.6 Economic History
Level 1: A student shall take and pass 4 core courses on offer
Level 2: A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 2 optional courses on offer
Level 3: A student shall take and pass 2 core and 2 optional courses on offer
Level
74
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisite
EH1010
First World Industrialisation and Urbanisation
10
EH1020
Non Western Industrialisation and urbanization
10
EH1030
History of Research Methods in Economic History
10
EH1040
Development of Economic Thought
10
EH1050
Economic History of Pre-Colonial Africa
10
EH1060
Historiography of African Economic Thought
10
EH1070
Economic History of the Developing World
10
EH2010
Economic History of Zimbabwe: 1890-1939
10
EH2020
The Zimbabwean Economy since 1939
10
EH2030
Economic History of Southern Africa & BLS

Countries Since 1800
EH2040
Economic History of Sout hern Africa North of the

Limpopo Since 1800
EH2060
Rise of Mod. Europe: Theory and Debates on

Development
Course
Units
Status
Core
Core
Optional
10
Economy and S ociety in Eastern Europe 1914 to

1945
10
EH2360
Economy and Society in Eastern Europe Since

1945
10
EH3030
Defence Industries, Arms Trade and Military

Economics
15
EH3060
Economic History of Pre-Colonial West Africa
15
EH3050
Economic History of Colonial West Africa
15
EH3060
The Post -Colonial State and Economy in West

Africa
15
EH3070
Economic History of North Africa, 1800-1939
EH3080
Economic History of North Africa since 1939
15
EH3090
Economic History of the Third World
15
EH3100
Economic Co-operation in Africa
15
EH3110
Economics of Post-Independent Africa
15
EH3120
Economic History of Asia from Colonial

Occupation to 1945
15
EH3130
Asian Economy from 1945 to the Rise of

Tigers
Asian
15
EH3140
N. American Social and Economic History to 1865
15
EH3150
N. American Social and Economic History since

1865
15
Optional
10
13.1.7
10
EH2070
Economy & Rise in Western Europe Pre-1914
EH2080
Economic History of Western Europe 1914-1945
10
EH2090
Western Europe: Government in the Period Since

1945
10
EH2100
Economy & Society in Eastern Europe Since 1914
10
EH2160
Economic History of Pre-Colonial East Africa
10
EH2170
Economic History of Colonial East Africa
10
EH2180
The State & Economy i

Africa
10
EH2370
Economic History of the Middle East Since 1914
10
EH2380
Economic History of the Ottoman Empire, 1300

1914
10
n Post - Colonial East
EH2250
English
LEVEL 1: A student shall take and pass all 4 core courses from the following list
LEVEL 2 : A student shall take and pass 3 core courses and one optional course from
the list below:
LEVEL 3: A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 2 options from the list
below:
Level
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisite
Course
Units
EL1050
Introduction to Literary Modes and critical

appreciation
10
EL1000
Introduction to literature and communication

theories
10
EL1000
Introduction to Zimbabwean literature: prose,

poetry & drama
10
EL1070
Introduction to European literature and African

literature in the diaspora
10
Status
Core
13.1.8
EL2070
West African literature: prose, poetry, drama

including Franco-phone literature
10
EL2000
African-American and Caribbean literature
10
EL2080
Theories of literature
10
EL2100
Literature and socialist thought
10
EL2050
Popular culture and literature
10
EL2060
Language and literature
10
EL3360
Southern African Literature: including Zimbabwe

and SADC countries
15
EL3000
East African Literature: prose, poetry, drama
15
EL3370
Language & Contrasting Images in African

Literature: prose, poetry, drama
15
El3380
Social movements and literary

study of African literature
theories in the
15
EL3390
Latin American literature: prose, poetry & drama
15
El3400
Asian and Pacific literatures: prose, poetry &

drama
15
El3410
Biographical & non -fiction writings in Africa &

Abroad
15
EL3420
English literature: prose, poetry and drama
15
EL3430
European literature: fiction
15
Course
Code
Description
FRB1010
FRB1000
FRB1050
FRB1060
Language I
Language and Oral I
Introduction to Culture and Literature
Topics in Culture and Literature
10
10
10
10
FRB2000
FRB2050
FRB2060
FRB2070
Language II
Language and Oral II
Introduction to Literary and Socio-cultural Aspects
Survey of Literary and Sociocultural
Aspects
Written & Oral Expression
Advanced Language, Essay and French for
Commerce
Literature in French & Civilisation Studies,17th &
18th Centuries
Literature in French & Civilisation Studies, 19th &
20th Centuries
10
10
10
10
Core
Optional
FRB3070
Optional
European literature: drama and poetry
15
EL3450
American Literature: fiction
15
EL3460
American literature: drama & poetry
15
EL3470
Shakespeare
15
EL3480
Russian Literature: fiction
15
EL3490
Russian literature: drama and poetry
15
EL3170
Literature and mass media
15
EL3500
Advanced study in popular culture and literature
15
EL3510
Creative writing
15
EL3520
Advanced creative writing
15
FRB3000
FRB3050
FRB3060
Core
EL3440
French Language and Cultural Studies

A student shall take and pass all 4 core courses from the list
below:
LEVEL 2 : A student shall take and pass all 4 core courses from the list
below:
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass all 4 core courses from the list below:
LEVEL 1 :
Level
13.1.9
Prerequisit
e
Course
Units
15
15
15
Status
Core
Core
Core
15
Geography
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and at least 4 options from
the list below:
Level
Course
Code
Description
GG1000
Fundamentals of Soils and Climatic Systems
10
GG1070
Fundamentals of Ecosystems and Hydrology
10
GG1080
Cultural and Economic Geography of the

Developed World
10
GG1090
Cultural and Economic Geography of the

Developing World
10
GG2000
Aspects of Geomorphological Systems
10
GG2080
Aspects of Environmental Systems
10
GG2030
Aspects of Economic Geography
10
GG2040
Aspects of Social Geography
10
GG3400
Techniques in Geography
10
GG3500
Projects
10
GG3010
Hydrology
10
GG3020
Applied Hydrology
GG3030
Ecosystems
10
GG3040
Biogeography
10
GG3050
Geomorphology
10
GG3060
Fluvial Geomorphology
19
GG3070
Fundamentals of Transport Studies
10
Corequisite
GG3010
Course
Units
10
Status
75
Core
Core
Core
76
GG3080
Applied Transport Studies
GG3070
GG3090
Urban Geography
10
GG3100
Social Geography of the City
10
GG3110
Geography of Sub-Saharan Africa
10
GG3120
Geography of Central and Southern Africa
10
GG3130
Spatial Population Analysis
10
GG3140
Contemporary Population Issues in Development
GG3150
Geography of Tourism and Recreation
GG3160
Applied Geography of Tourism and Recreation
GG3460
Methods of Spatial Analysis
GG3470
Models of Spatial Analysis
GG3190
Principles of Agricultural Geography
10
GG3200
Agricultural Geography of Africa
10
GG3210
Third World Development
10
GG3220
Regional Development Planning
19
GG3230
Geographic Information Systems
10
GG3240
Advanced GIS and Remote Sensing
GG3250
GG3260
GG3130
10
10
Level
Course
Code
Description
GMB1010
GMB1000
GMB1050
GMB1060
Language I
Language and Oral I
Introduction to Culture and Civilisation
Introduction to Communication
10
10
10
10
GMB2000
GMB2050
GMB2060
GMB2070
GMB3010
GMB3020
GMB3030
GMB3040
Language II
Topics in Culture and Civilisation
Topics in Communication
10
10
10
10
15
15
15
15
10
GG3150
10
10
GG3460
10
Optional
2.
Description
Industrial Geography
10
Political Geography
10
GKA1000
GKA1050
GKA1060
GKA1070
Language & Prescribed Texts

Further Elementary Studies in Greek
Introduction to History & Literature
Additional Themes in History & Literature
10
10
10
10
GKA2000
GKA2050
Intermediate Language & Prescribed Texts

Intermediate Language & Prescribed Texts:
Additional Authors
Studies in History & Literature
Further Studies in History &
Literature
10
Core
Core
A student shall take and pass all 4 core courses from the list
below:
A student shall take and pass all 4 core courses from the list below:
A student should take and pass 2 core courses and 2 optional
courses from the list below:
Course
Code
German Language and Culture
Core
LEVEL 1 :
Level
Status
10
GG3230
At both Level 2 and Level 3, instructions shall consist of theory, practicals and
fieldwork. The fieldwork is compulsory.
The written examination shall constitute 70% and the course work 30% of the
examination final mark in each course.
13.1.10
Language III
Language and Oral III
Advanced Topics in Culture & Civilisation
Advanced Topics in Commu nication
Course
Units
13.1.11
LEVEL 2 :
LEVEL3:
Notes
1.
Prerequisite
GKA2060
GKA2070
GKA3000
GKA3110
GKA3120
GKA3130
GKA3050
GKA3060
GKA3070
GKA3080
GKA3090
GKA3100

Advanced Language & Prescribed Texts
History or Selected Authors
Topi cs in History or Selected Authors
Introduction to Language, Culture & Literature
Language, Culture & Literature
Language, Culture & Prescribed Texts
Further Language, Culture & Prescribed Texts
Studies in Greek Culture & Literature
Advanced Studies in Greek Culture & Literature
Prerequisite
Course
Units
10
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
Status
Core
Core
Optional
13.1.12 History
LEVEL 1:
A student shall take and pass 1 core course and 3 courses from the list of
options below:
LEVEL 2 : A student shall take and pass 4 optional courses on offer from the list below:
LEVEL3: A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 2 optional courses on offer
from the list below:
History of Political Thought
15
HS3180
History of Ideas
15
HS3210
Latin America and Caribbean to Colonial Period
15
HS3220
Latin America and Caribbean, Independence to

Present
15
10
HS3230
East Africa to late 19th Century
15
10
HS3240
East Africa from late 19th Century to Present
15
HS3270
History of North America to late 19th Century
15
Course
Code
Description
HS1010
Introduction to the Study of History
10
HS1020
Aspects of African History
10
HS1030
Survey of African History to 1800
10
HS1040
Survey of African History from 1800 to present
HS1050
Historical Theories of Imperialism
Prerequisite
HS3170
Level
Course
Units
Status
Core
Optional
HS1060
Introduction to the Study of Women in History
10
HS1070
Women in Pre-colonial African History
10
HS3280
North America, late 19th Century to Present
15
HS1080
Introduction to Europe and Russia
10
HS3310
Prehistory of Africa
15
HS2050
African Women under Colonialism
10
HS3320
15
HS2060
Women in Independent Africa
10
HS2090
Middle East and North Africa in the 20th Century
10
HS2100
Pre-colonial History of Central Africa
10
HS2120
Colonial and Post-Colonial History of Central Africa
10
HS2150
Western Europe, mid-17th to mid-19th Century
10
HS2160
Western Europe, mid-19th Century to Present
10
HS2190
History of Asia to 1920
10
HS2200
History of Asia since 1920
10
HS2250
History of West Africa to Partition
10
HS2260
West Africa from Partition to Post-Independence
10
HS2290
Intro. to Russia & Eastern Europe, 1800-1939
10
HS2300
The Cold War and Communism, 1945-1990
10
HS2330
10
HS3010
History of Zimbabwe before 1890
15
HS3020
History of Zimbabwe 1890 to Present
15
HS3030
Theory and Method in History
15
HS3040
Historiographical Traditions
15
HS3080
History of Ottoman Empire to 1923
15
HS3130
Southern Africa, 15th to late 19th Century
15
HS3140
Southern Africa, Colonial Rule to Independence
HS1060
15
Optional
13.1.13 Kiswahili
LEVEL 1: A student shall take and pass 4 courses from the list
below:
below:
below:
Level
Course Code
Description
KIS101
Introduction to Kiswahili
Language
Introduction to spoken and
written Kiswahili
Introduction to culture and
civilisation
Introduction to History and
Geography of Kiswahili
Kiswahili Linguistic Structure
Varieties of written Kiswahili
Introduction to Kiswahili Oral
Literature Advanced spoken
and written Kiswahili
Kiswahili Lexicography
Kiswahili written Literature
Studies in Kiswahili Theatre
and Performance
Advanced Kiswahili Culture and
Civilisation
Project
KIS102
KIS103
KIS104
Core
Optional
KIS201
KIS202
KIS203
KIS204
KIS301
KIS302
KIS303
KIS304
Prerequisite
Course
Units
Status
10
core
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Core
10
10
10
Core
10
10
77
13.1.14 Latin Language and Culture

A student shall take and pass all 4 core courses
LEVEL 2: A student shall take and pass all 4 core courses
LEVEL 3: A student shall take and pass 4 optional courses on offer
LEVEL 1:
Course Code
Description
LTA1000
Language and Prescribed Texts
10
LTA1050
Language and Prescribed Texts: Further Authors
10
LTA1060
Introduction to History & Literature
10
LTA1070
History and Literature
10
LTA2050
Intermediate Language &Prescribed Texts
10
LTA2000
Intermediate Language and Prescribed Texts:

Further Authors
10
78
Course
Units
LTA2060
Studies in History and Literature
10
LTA2070
Further Studies in History and Literature
10
LTA3000
15
LTA3110
Advanced Language & Prescribed Texts
15
LTA3120
Topics in History or Selected Authors
15
LTA3130
Further Topi cs in History or Selected Authors
15
LTA3050
Introduction to Language, Culture & Literature
15
LTA3060
Language, Culture & Literature
15
LTA3070
Language, Culture & Prescribed Texts
15
LTA3080
Further Language, Culture & Prescribed Texts
15
LTA3090
Studies in Greek Culture & Literature
15
LTA3100
Advanced Studies in Greek Culture & Literature
15
13.1.15
Linguistics
LEVEL 1:
LEVEL 2 :
Course A:
Course B:
LEVEL 3 :
Course
Code
Description
LG1010
Introduction to the Study of the Structure of

Language
Introduction to Phonetics and Phonology
LG1020
Level
Prerequisite
Level
Status
LG2010
LG2020
2
Core
Core
20
20
20
20
Status
Core
Core
Course B
General Linguistic Theory
20
Core
LG2040
LG2050
Sociolinguistics
Psycholinguistics
20
Optional
LG3010
Advanced Linguistic Theory
LG3020
LG3030
LG3040
LG3050
Phonetics and Phonology

Instrumental Phonetics
Sociolinguistics
Psycholinguistics
13.1.17
A student shall take and pass 2 core courses (20

course units each)
A student shall take EITHER course A (English
Linguistics) OR Course B (General Linguistics)
English Linguistics: A student shall take and pass 2
core Courses (20
course units each) from the list below:
General Linguistics: A student shall take and pass 1
core course(20 course unit) and 1 optional course
(20 course units) from the list below
A student shall take and pass 1 core course (30
course units) and 1 optional course (30 course
units) from the list below provided it was not taken
at Level 2
Course
Units
LG2030
13.1.16
Optional
Course A
English Linguistics: Modern English Structure
English Linguistics: English Phonetics and
Phonology
Prerequisite
30
30
30
30
30
Core
Optional
Mathematics
(See Faculty of Science)
Ndebele
LEVEL 1 :
A student shall take and pass all 4 core courses from the
list below:
LEVEL 2: A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 2
optional courses
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 4 core courses and 2
optional courses
Level
Course
Code
Description
ND1100
ND1110
ND1120
ND1130
Introduction to the Ndebele Novel

Introduction to Ndebele Poetry and Drama
Introduction to Ndebele Phonology
Introduction to Ndebele Morphosyntax
10
10
10
10
ND2000
ND2110
ND2120
ND2130
ND2140
ND2150
ND2160
ND2170
ND2180
ND2190
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
ND3200
ND3110
ND3120
ND3130
Ndebele Poetry
Ndebele Drama
Elements of Ndebele Linguistic Structure
Theoretical Aspects of Ndebele Linguistic
Structure
Translation
Lexicography
Introduction to Ethnomusicology
Ethnography and Organology
Introduction to Acting and Performance
Playmaking Workshop
The Development of the Ndebele Novel
Themes and Perspectives in the Ndebele Novel
Nguni Dialects
Language Planning and Orthography
ND3300
ND3310
ND3320
ND3330
ND3340
ND3350
Ndebele Oral Literature

Aspects of Ndebele Thought
Theories and Methods in Ethnomusicology
Trends in Ethnomusicology
Introduction to Uses of Theatre
Project in Uses of Theatre
10
10
10
10
10
10
ZW2010
ND1140
Courses offered to international students

Zimbabwean Cultures
Ndebele Language for Beginners
10
10
13.1.18
Prerequisite
Course
Units
10
10
10
10
Status
Level
Course
Code
Description
Core
PL1010
Basic Logic
10
PL1020
Intermediate Logic
10
PL1030
Introduction to Philosophy
10
PL1040
Knowledge & Reality
10
PL2010
Formal Logic
10
PL2020
Advanced Logic
10
PL2030
Moral Philosophy
10
PL2040
Contemporary Ethics
10
PL2050
History of African Philosophy
10
PL2060
Contemporary African Philosophy
10
PL2090
Classical Metaphysics
10
PL2100
Contemporary Metaphysics
10
PL2110
Classical Philosophy of Religion
10
PL2120
Contemporary Philosophy of Religion
10
PL2200
Marxist Philosophy
10
PL2210
Contemporary Marxism
10
PL2220
Ethical Theories in Business
10
PL2230
Ethics in the Business Environment
10
PL2240
History of Epistemology
10
PL2250
Contemporary Epistemology
10
PL3030
The Pre-Socratics
15
PL3040
Socrates to Epicurus
15
PL3050
17th & 18th Century Rationalism
15
PL3060
17th & 18th Century Empiricism
15
PL3000
Introduction to Science and Religion
15
PL3450
Issues in Science and Religion
15
PL3100
Philosophy of the Action
15
PL3130
History of the Philosophy of Science
15
PL3140
Contemporary Philosophy of Science
15
PL3230
History of the Philosophy of Education
15
PL3240
Contemporary Philosophy of Education
15
PL3250
History of Medical Ethics
15
Core
Optional
2
Core
Optional
Philosophy
LEVEL 1 : A student shall take and pass all 4 core courses from
the list below:
LEVEL 2: A student shall take and pass 2 core courses on offer
and 2 optional courses on offer from the list below:
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 2 core courses on offer
and 2 optional courses or 1 double course on offer from
the list below:
Prerequisite
Course
Units
Status
Core
Core
Optional
79
Core
80
13.1.19
13.1.20
PL3260
Issues in Medical Ethics
15
PL3310
Aristotles Ethics and Politics
30
PL3340
Language and Meaning
30
PL3350
Special Subject
15
PL3370
Social and Political Philosophy
15
PL3380
Contemporary Social and Political Philosophy
15
PL3390
Philosophy and the Problem of Death
30
PL3400
Philosophical Investigations into the Social

Teachings of the Church
30
Level
Course
Code
Description
PL3410
Philosophy and the Problem of AIDS in

Contemporary Zimbabwe Aristotles Metaphysics
30
RS1010
Introduction to the Phenomenology of

Religion
10
PL3420
Aristotles Metaphysics
15
RS1020
Introduction to the World Religions
10
PL3430
Theories of Language
15
RS1030
Introduction to the Old Testament
10
PL3090
Philosophy of the Mind
15
RS1040
Introduction to the New Testament
10
PL3460
Introduction to Applied Ethics
15
RS2000
Origins of Prophecy and Israelite Pre

canonical Prophets
PL3470
Applied Ethics
15
PL3520
Skepticism and Theories of Knowledge
15
PL3530
Scope of Knowledge
15
13.1.21
Optional
Portuguese Language and Cultural Studies
LEVEL 1: A student shall take and pass 4 core courses from the list below:
LEVEL 2 : A student shall take and pass 4 core courses from the list below:
Level
Course
Code
Description
POB1000
POB1050
POB1060
POB1070
Language I
Language and Oral I
Introduction to Topics from Portuguese
History
Introduction to Portuguese Civilisation
Language II
Topics from History, Brazil & Africa
Topics from Civilisation,Brazil & Africa
POB2000
POB2020
POB2050
POB2040
POB3000
POB3050
POB3060
POB3070
Language III
Topics in Portuguese Literature
Topics in Lusophone Literature
Prerequisite
Course
Units
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
15
15
13.1.22 Religious Studies

LEVEL 2: A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 2 optional courses
LEVEL 3: A student shall take and pass 2 core courses on offer and 2 optional
courses or 1 double course on offer from the list below:
Politics and Administration

(See Faculty of Social Studies)
Status
Core
Core
Core
Psychology
(See Faculty of Social Studies)
Prerequisite
Course
Units
Status
Core
10
Core
RS2050
Israelite Canonical Prophets
10
RS2060
Introduction to Philosophy of Religion
10
RS2070
Philosophy of Religion
10
RS2080
Introduction to Political Theology
10
RS2090
Political Theology
10
RS2120
Introduction to Christianity in the Roman

Empire
10
RS2130
Christianity in the Roman Empire
10
RS2140
Christian History and Thought Pre 500

AD
10
RS2150
Christian History and Thought 500

1500 AD
RS2160
Early History of Islam
10
RS2170
Doctrine of Islam
10
RS2220
Introduction to Christian Theology
10
RS2230
Christian Theology
10
RS2260
Introduction to Issues in Moral Theology
10
RS2270
Issues in Moral Theology
RS2300
Methods and Theories in the Studies of

Religions
Optional
10
10
RS2310
Themes in the Religions of the World
10
RS3650
Introduction to African Theology
RS3370
Life and Ministry of Jesus and Palestinian

Christianity
15
RS3660
African Theology
15
RS3670
Introduction to Religion and Ethics
15
RS3380
Hellenistic Christianity up to Early

Catholicism
15
RS3680
Religion and Ethics
15
RS3430
Christian History and Thought 1500

1879AD
15
RS3690
Introduction to Issues in Science and

Religion
15
RS3440
Christian History and Thought 1879AD to

the present
15
RS3700
15
RS3710
15
RS3450
Islam and Eastern and Southern Africa
15
Methods and Theories in the Study of African

Traditional Religion
RS3460
Islam in Africa: Inter-regional Themes
15
RS3720
Selected Themes in African Traditional

Religion
15
RS3470
Christianity in Africa from Antiquity to

1500AD
15
RS3480
Christianity in Africa from1500AD to

present
15
RS3490
Introduction to the study of Women in

Religion
15
RS3500
Women in Religion
15
RS3510
Methods in the study of Old Testament
15
RS3520
Selected themes in Old Testament

Studies
15
RS3530
Methods in the study of the New

Testament
15
RS3540
Development of Christian Faith and

Doctrine in New Testament Writings
15
RS3550
Introduction to Sociology of Religion
15
RS3560
Sociology of Religion
15
RS3570
Special Subject
15
RS3520
Selected Themes in Old Testament

Studies
15
Core
13.1.23 Shona
RS3580
Deaths Impact on Philosophy and

Theology
15
RS3590

contemporary Zimbabwe
15
Theological Teachings of the Church in
30
RS3600
Optional
15
LEVEL 1: A student shall take and pass all 4 core courses from the list
below:
LEVEL 2: A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 2 optional
LEVEL 3: A student shall take and pass 4 core courses and 2 options from
the list below:
Level
Course
Code
Description
SH1100
Introduction to the Shona Novel
10
SH1110
Introduction to Shona Poetry and Drama
10
SH1120
Introduction to Shona Phonology
10
SH1130
Introduction to Shona Morphosyntax
10
SH2000
Shona Poetry
10
SH2110
Shona Drama
10
SH2120
Prerequisite
Course
Units
Core
Core
Elements of Shona Linguistic Structure
SH2130
Theoretical Aspects of Shona Linguistic

Structure
10
SH2140
Translation
10
Lexicography
10
SH2160
10
SH2170
10
SH2180
10
SH2190
Playmaking Workshop
10
SH2150
Status
Optional
81
SH3200
The Development of the Shona Novel
10
Core
SH3110
Themes and Perspectives in the Shona

Novel
10
SH3120
Shona Dialects
10
SH3130
10
SH3300
Shona Oral Literature
10
SH3310
Aspects of Shona Thought
10
SH3320
10
SH3330
10
SH3340
10
SH3350
10
Optional
13.1.26 Theatre Arts

LEVEL 1: A Student shall take and pass 4 core courses from the list below:
LEVEL 2 : A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 2 optional
Level 3 : A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 2 options from
the list below:
Level
Course
Code
Description
THA1050
THA1060
Introduction to Theatre Studies

Theatre Studies: History, Text Performance
& Communication
Introduction to Dance & Dance Forms
Introduction to Acting & Performance
10
10
10
10
Introduction to Theatre in Africa &

Concepts in Stagecraft
Theatre in Africa and Concepts
in Stagecraft
Acting Theory and Techniques
Applied Acting
Dance Composition
Design for Dance
10
THA1070
THA1080
2
THA2120
COURSES OFFERED TO INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS

ZW2010
82
13.1.24
13.1.25
Zimbabwean Cultures
Shona Language for Beginners
10
SH1150
Shona Culture
10
Course
Code
Description
SPB1010
SPB1000
SPB1050
SPB1060
Language I
Language and Oral I
Introduction to Culture and Literature
Introduction to History and Civilization
10
10
10
10
SPB2010
SPB2000
SPB2050
SPB2060
SPB3010
SPB3020
SPB3030
SPB3040
Language II
Topics in Culture and Literature
Topics in History and Civilisation
10
10
10
10
15
15
15
15
Language III
Advanced Topics in Culture and Civilisation
Advanced Topics in History and Civilisation
Prerequisite
Course
Units
THA2050
THA2060
THA2090
THA2100
THA2070
THA2080
THA3130
THA3140
THA3150
THA3160
THA3170
THA3180
Sociology and Social Anthropology

(See Faculty of Social Studies
Spanish
LEVEL 1 : A student shall take and pass 4 core courses from the list
below:
below:
below:
Level
10
SH1140
THA2110
Status
Core
Core
Core
Introduction to Directing, Theatre and

Society
Directing Workshop and Topics in Theatre
and Society
Film and Media Theory
Techniques in Film and Media
Scriptwriting for the Stage
Scriptwriting for Film and Television
Prerequisite
Course
Units
Status
Core
10
Core
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Optional
10
Core
15
15
15
15
Optional
Notes:
1. Overall assessment of practical courses shall be done through written
examination (35%), assignments (25%) and practical examination
(40%), with the approval of the Senate.
2. At the end of Level II, a student shall have to satisfy the Departmental
Board that he/she has participated in at least one production or any
production undertaken as part of the coursework.
13.1.27 Tonga Language and Cultural Studies
Level 1: A Student shall take all 4 core courses listed below:
Level 2: A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 2 optional courses
Level 3: A student shall take and pass 4 core courses and 2 options from the
list below:
Level 1 Courses
Course
Description
Code
All Core Courses
TON 101 Introduction to Tonga Literature
and Theory
TON 102 Introduction to Tonga Oral Literature
TON 103 Introduction to Tonga Morphology
and Syntax
TON 104 Introduction to Tonga Phonology
and Phonetics
Level 2 Courses:
Course Code
Course units
10
10
13.1.28 War and strategic Studies

below:
below:
options from the list below:
Level
10
10
Course Units
Core courses
TON 201 Tonga Poetry and Drama
TON 202 Theoretical Aspects of Tonga
Linguistic Structure
10
Optional Courses
TON 203 Lexicography
TON 204 Terminology Development
TON 205 TongaOnomastics
TON 206 Translation and Interpretation
10
10
10
10
10
Level 3 Courses:
Course Code
Core courses
TON 301 Tonga Indigenous Knowledge and
Civilisation
TON 302 Tonga Material Culture
TON 303 Tonga Varieties and Harmonisation
TON 304 Language Planning and Tonga
Orthography
10
Optional Courses
TON 305Tonga Syntax
TON 306Tonga Semantics
TON 307Theories of Literature
10
10
10
Course Units
10
10
10
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisite
Course Units
WAR1010
Introduction to History of Warfare with

reference to Africa I
10
WAR1020
Introduction to History of Warfare with

reference to Africa II
10
WAR1030
Rise of Modern Warfare, 15th to late 18th

Centuries I
10
WAR1040
Modern Warfare, 15th to late 18th

Centuries II
10
WAR2010
Further Developments in Modern Warfare,

th
th
Late 18 to 29 Centuries I
10
WAR2020
Modern Warfare, late 18th to 20th

Centuries II
10
WAR2030
Strategic Doctrine, Mechanisation and Air

Power I
10
WAR2040
Strategic Doctrine, Mechanisation and Air

Power II
10
WAR3010
Contemporary Strategy I
15
WAR3030
War & Society in Contemporary Africa I
15
WAR3020
Advanced Contemporary Strategy
15
WAR3040
War & Society in Contemporary Africa II
15
WAR3050
Guerilla Warfare
15
WAR3060
Gender and Conflict
15
WAR3080
International Security
15
Status
Core
Core
83
Core
Optional
13.2 BA HONOURS DEGREES

Additional entry requirements
Eligibility
DEPARTMENT
PROGRAMMES
ADDITIONAL ENTRY REQUIRMENTS
African Languages
and Literature
BA Honours in Ndebele (HND)
A pass in the BAA Level I examination with good

marks in Ndebele
A pass in the BAA Level I examinatio n with good
marks in Shona
marks in Economic History
BA Honours in Shona (HSH)

Economic History
English
Geography and
Environmental
Science
History
BA Honours in Economic
History (HEH)
BA Honous in English (HEL)
BA Honours in Geography
(HGGA)

marks in English
A pass in the BA Level I examination with good
marks in Geography
BA Honours in Archaeology
(HARC)
A pass in all BAA Level I examination with good

marks in Archaeology
BA Honours in History (HHS)

marks in History
marks in War and Strategic Studies
marks in Linguistics
BA Honours in War and

Strategic Studies (HWAR)
Linguistics
BA in Honours in Linguistics
(HLG)
Mathematics
BA Honours in Mathematics
(HMTA)
French BA Honours in French (HFR)
Modern Languages
84
Religious Studies,
Classics and
Philosophy
Theatre Arts
13.3

marks in Mathematics
An A Leve
Eligibility for admission does not guarantee admission, particularly to the

Honours Degree programme.
13.5
13.5.1 BA Honours in Archaeology (HARC)

options from the list below:
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 8 courses from the list
below, not taken at Level 2, and a Dissertation
Level
Course
Code
Description
HARC0020
5
6
13.4
Course
Units
10
Status
Core
BA Honours in Classical
Studies
(HCLS)
BA Honours in Philosophy
(HPL)

marks in Classical Studies
HARC0030
Archaeological Theory II
HARC0010
10
A pass in the BAA Level I examination wi

marks in Philosophy
HARC0040
Prehistory of East, Central Africa
10
BA Honours in Religious
Studies (HRS)
BA Honours in Theatre Arts
(HTHA)

marks in Religious Studies
marks in Theatre Arts
HARC0050
Ethnoarchaeology
10
HARC0060
Heritage Management
10
HARC0070
Arch. Site Management & Conservation
10
HARC0080
Heritage Interpretation
10
HARC0090
Heritage, Tourism & Development
HARC0100
Archaeological Surveying*
10
HARC0110
Environmental Archaeology
10
HARC0120
Bioarchaeology*
10
HARC0130
Analytical Methods
10
HARC0140
Analysis of Lithics*
10
HARC0150
Museum Practice
10
HARC0160
Archaeology of a Special Area
10
HARC0170
Field Archaeology*
10
HARC0180
Historical Archaeology
10
HARC0190
Computer Applications in Archaeology
10
HARC0200
Analysis of Ceramics*
10
HARC3370
Dissertation
40
Core
8 Courses from the above list
15
Optional
th good
BA DUAL HONOURS DEGREES
PROGRAMME
2
3
4
Prerequisite
l pass in French or
An eligible student should have passed BAA level I examination with good
marks in the two subjects chosen for the Dual Honours
1
Bachelor of Arts Honours Degree Programmes

The Bachelor of Arts Honours Degree programmes shall cover the courses
listed under the following subjects, but not all optional courses will be on
offer every semester. A student registered for a BA Honours Degree may
take up to 40% of some approved courses from other programmes, in
accordance with paragraph 5.5.2 above.
BA Honours in Classical and Religious

Studies
BA Honours in French and Portuguese
BA Honours in History and Shona/Ndebele
BA Honours in Philosophy and Religious
Studies
BA Honours Linguistics and Language
BA Honours in Religious Studies and
Shona/Ndebele
DEPARTMENTS
Religious Studies, Classics and Philosophy
Modern Languages
History and Shona
Religious Studies, Classics and Philosophy
Linguistics and African languages and Literature
African Languages and Literature and Religious Studies,
Classics and Philosophy
BA SPECIAL HONOURS (4TH YEAR HONOURS)

To qualify for admission to Level 4 Bachelor of Arts Special Honours Degree
Programme an applicant must have passed an appropriate first degree with
high standard acceptable to the Department and endorsed by the Dean of the
Faculty of Arts.
ARC1030
HARC0060
10
Optional
10
13.5.2
BA Special Honours in Archaeology (SARC)

LEVEL 1: A student shall take and pass 8 courses from the courses
listed under BA Honours in Archaeology Levels 2 and 3,
whose equivalents have not been taken for the BA Degree,
and a Dissertation
13.5.3
BA Honours in Classical Studies

LEVEL 2 : A student shall take and pass 12 core courses listed below:
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 8 core courses on offer from the
list below, and a Dissertation
Level
Course Code
Description
HCLS0260
Introduction to Themes in Literature
10
HCLS0270
Themes in Literature
10
HCLS0280
Introduction to Themes in Philosophy
10
HCLS0290
Themes in Philosophy
10
HCLS0300
Introduction to Themes in History
10
HCLS0310
Themes in History
10
HCLS0320
Introduction to Themes in Art &

Archaeology
10
HCLS0330
Themes in Art & Archaeology
10
HCLS0090
Introduction to Greek Language,

Culture & Literature
10
HCLS0100
Greek Language, Culture & Literature
10
HCLS0110
Introduction to Latin Language,

Culture & Literature
10
HCLS0120
Latin Language, Culture & Literature
10
Prerequisite
Course Units
Status
Core
13.5.4
HCLS0130
Advanced Themes in Literature
10
HCLS0140
Further Advanced Themes in Literature
10
HCLS0150
Advanced Themes in Philosophy
10
HCLS0160
Further Advanced Themes in

Philosophy
10
HCLS0170
Advanced Themes in History
10
HCLS0180
Further Advanced Themes in History
10
HCLS0190
Advanced Themes in Art &

Archaeology
10
HCLS0200
Further Advanced Themes in Art &

Archaeology
10
HCLS0210
Greek or Latin Composition & Unseen

Texts
10
HCLS0220
Further Greek or Latin Composition &

Unseen Texts
10
HCLS0230
Prescribed Texts & Literary Topics
10
HCLS0240
Advanced Prescribed T exts & Literary

Topics
10
HCLS0250
Special Study
10
HCLS3370
Dissertation
40
Core
BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN CLASSICAL STUDIES (SCLS)

LEVEL 1: A student shall take and pass 8 core courses on offer from the
list of core courses under Honours in Classical Studies Levels 2
and 3, which will not have been taken at BA Level, and a
Dissertation
13.5.5
BA HONOURS IN CLASSICS (HCL)

LEVEL 2 : A student shall take and pass 8 core courses, and 2 double
core courses (20 course units each) from the list below:
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 8 core courses on offer from the
list below, and a Dissertation
85
Level
Course
Code
Description
HCL0000
Greek: Grammar & Syntax
10
HCL0140
Further Greek: Grammar & Syntax
10
HCL0150
Latin: Grammar & Syntax
10
HCL0160
Further Latin: Grammar & Syntax
10
HCL0170
Latin: Prescribed Texts, Roman History

& Literature
10
HCL0180
Further Latin: Prescribed Texts, Roman

History & Literature
10
HCL0070
Greek: Prescribed Texts, History &

Literature
10
HCL0190
Further Greek: Prescribed Texts, History

& Literature
10
HCL0200
Special Subject in Roman Studies
20
HCL0210
Special Subject in Greek Studies
20
HCL0220
Latin: P rescribed Texts, Roman History

& Literature
86
Prerequisite
Course Units
Status
13.5.6
Core
BA HONOURS CLASSICAL AND RELIGIOUS STUDIES (HCL&RS)

LEVEL 2 : A student shall take and pass 6 core courses (or equivalent of 60 course
units) on offer in any semester, from the list of courses under
Honours in Classical studies Level 2, and take and pass 4 core courses
(or equivalent of 40 course units) from the list of core courses under
Honours in Religious Studies Level 2 and 2 optional courses (or
equivalent of 20 course units) from the list of optional courses under
Honours Religious Studies Level 2.
LEVEL 3:
10
HCL0230
Advanced Latin: Prescribed Texts,

Roman History & Literature
10
HCL0240
Greek: Prescribed Texts, History &

Literature
10
HCL0250
Advanced Greek: Prescribed Texts,

History & Literature
10
HCL0260
Introduction to Latin Prose authors
10
HCL0270
Latin Prose Authors
10
HCL0280
Introduction to Latin Verse Authors
10
HCL0290
Latin Verse Authors
10
HCL0300
Introduction to Greek Prose Authors
10
HCL0310
Greek Prose Authors
10
HCL0320
Introduction to Greek Verse Authors
10
HCL0330
Greek Verse Authors
HLC3370
Dissertation
A student shall take and pass 4 core courses on offer from the list of
core courses under Honours in Classical Studies level 3 and shall take
and pass 2 core courses from the list of courses under Honours in
Religious Studies level 3, and 2 optional courses or the equivalent of
20 course units from the list of options under Honours in Religious
Studies level 3 but not taken at level 2 and a Dissertation.
13.5.7
BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN CLASSICS (SCL)

LEVEL 1: A student shall take and pass 8 core courses (or equivalent of 80 course
units) on offer from the list under Honours in Classics Levels and 3,
which will not have been taken at BA level, and a Dissertation.
13.5.8
BA HONOURS IN ECONOMIC HISTORY (HEH)

LEVEL 2 :
A student shall take and pass 12 courses, of which 2 may be core and
10 optional, or 12 optional courses from the list under Level 3, with
however, appropriate Level 2 codes
.
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 8 courses of which 2 may be core if
these were not taken at Level 2, and 6 or 8 optional courses from the
list below provided they have not been taken at Level 2, and a
Dissertation.
Core
Level
Course
Code
Description
HEH0010
Economic History of Zimbabwe 1890-1939
10
HEH0020
The Zimbabwean Economy Since 1939
10
HEH0030
Economic History of Southern Africa & BNLS

Countries Since 1800
10
HEH0040
Economic History of Southern Africa North of the

Limpopo Since 1800
10
10
HEH0050
Defence Industries, Arms Trade & Military Economies
10
40
HEH0060
Rise of Mod. Europe: Theory & Debates on

Development
10
HEH0070
Economy & Rise in Western Europe pre-1914
10
HEH0080
Economic History of Western Europe 1914 1945
10
HEH0090
Western Europe: Government in the Period Since 1945
10
HEH0100
Economy and Society in Eastern Europe 1914 -1945
10
Prerequisite
Course
Units
Status
Core
Optional
HEH0110
Economic History of Pre-Colonial West Africa
10
HEH0120
Economic History of colonial West Africa
10
HEH0130
The Post-Colonial State & Economy in West Africa
10
HEH0140
Economic History of Equatorial Africa
10
HEH0150
Economic History of Pre-Colonial East Africa
10
HEH0160
Economic History of Colonial East Africa
10
HEH0170
The State & Economy in Post-Colonial East Africa
10
HEH0180
Economic History of North Africa, 1800-1939
10
HEH0182
Economic History of North Africa Since 1939
10
HEH0190
Economic History of the Middle East Since 1914
10
HEH0300
Economic History of the Ottoman Empire, 1300-1914
10
HEH0200
Natural Resource Development in Middle & N. Africa
10
HEH0310
Advanced Seminar: The Political Ec onomy of Religion in the

Middle East and North Africa
10
HEH0220
Econ. & Soc. History of Latin America & Caribbean: The

Colonial Period
10
HEH0230
Econ. & Soc. History of Modern Latin America & Caribbean
10
HEH0240
N. American Social and Economic History to 1865
10
HEH0250
N. American Social and Economic History Since 1865
10
HEH0260
Economic History of Asia
10
HEH0270
Economic History of the Third World
10
HEH0280
Economic Co-operation in Africa
10
HEH0290
Economics of Post-Independent Africa
10
3.5.8
BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN ECONOMIC HISTORY (SEH)

LEVEL 1 :
13.5.9
A student shall take and pass 8 optional courses from the list
under Level 3 of the BA Honours Degree provided they were not
taken at BA Levels 2 and 3, and a dissertation.
BA HONOURS IN ENGLISH (HEL)

LEVEL 2 :
LEVEL 3 :
A student shall take and pass 10 core courses and 2 options from
the list below:
A student shall take and pass 6 core courses and 2 options from
the list below, and a Dissertation
Level
Course
Code
Description
HEL0800
Language: An Introduction
10
HEL0400
Language: Advanced Study
10
HEL0810
African Literature: Fiction
10
HEL0410
African Literature: Poetry, Drama & Orature
10
HEL0420
Literature & Socialism: Theory and practice outside

Africa
10
HEL0430
European Literary Genres: Comic & Satiric Modes
10
HEL0440
European Literary Genres: Heroic poetry and Tragedy
10
Prerequisite
Course
Units
HEL0820
Theories of Literature inAfrica and African Diaspora
10
HEL2210
Introduction to Creative Writing
10
HEL0460
Advanced Creative Writing
10
HEL2230
English Literature: Poetry and Drama
10
HEL0850
European Literature: Fiction
10
HEL0470
Latin American Literature
10
HEH0320
Advanced Seminar: Selected Topics in the Economic History

of the Middle East and North Africa
10
HEH0330
Advanced Seminar Series on Land and Environment
10
HEH0340
Advanced Seminar on Gender
10
HEH0350
Advanced Seminar Series: Development of Industry & Mining
10
HEH0360
Advanced Seminar Series: Urbanisation
10
HEH0420
Advanced Seminar Series: Comparative Religion
10
HEL0480
American Literature: Fiction
10
Childrens Literature and Orature
10
HEH0430
Advanced Seminar Series: Gobbet Papers
10
HEL0490
HEH0370
Economic History of Asia from Colonial Occupation to 1945
10
HEL0500
Literature and the Media: An Introduction
10
HEH0380
Asian Economy from 1945 to the Rise of Asian Tigers
10
HEL0510
English Literature: Fiction
10
HEH0390
Economic History of Eastern Europe before 1914
10
HEL0860
European Literature: Poetry and Drama
10
HEH0400
Economy and Society in Eastern Europe 1914 to 1945
10
HEL0530
Asian and Pacific Literatures
10
HEH0410
Economy and Society in Eastern Europe Since 1945
10
HEL0540
American Literature: Poetry and Drama
10
HEH3370
Dissertation
40
Core
HEL0550
Childrens Literature in Zimbabwe and Africa
10
8 Courses from the above list
10
Optional
HEL0560
Literature and the Media in Africa
10
Status
Core
87
Optional
88
HEL0570
Literature & Socialism in Africa
10
HEL0580
Theories of Literature outside Africa
10
HEL0760
Zimbabwean Literature: Fiction
10
HEL0590
Zimbabwean Literature: Poetry, Drama & Orature
10
HEL0840
African American Literature
10
HEL0600
Caribbean Literature
10
HEL3370
Dissertation
40
HEL0610
Film & Literature: An Introduction
10
HEL0620
Popular Literature: Theory
10
HEL0630
Biographical and non-fiction writings in Africa
10
HEL0640
Russian Literature: Fiction
10
HEL0650
Film and Literature in Africa
10
HEL0660
Popular Literature: Practice
10
HEL0670
Biographical and non-fiction writings outside Africa
10
HEL0390
Russian Literature: Poetry and Drama
10
HEL0680
Literature & Gender Related Issues
10
HEL0690
Literature & Social Movements
10
13.5.11 BA HONOURS IN FRENCH (HFR)

LEVEL 1 :
Core
Notes:
Optional
A student shall take and pass 8 core courses from the list below
and 4 courses from a subsidiary subject which will be either
Portuguese or German or Spanish
Instead of POB (Portuguese) 1000 / 1090 / 1060 / 1080, a
student may take GMB (German) or SPB (Spanish) 1000 / 1090 /
1060 / 1080, as a subsidiary subject on offer
LEVEL 2: A student shall take and pass 10 core courses and 1 core course
(20 course units) as listed below
Note:
Upon successful completion of Level II, a student may opt for

either Honours in French or Dual Honours in French and
Portuguese at Level III as stipulated under 11.2.8 below.
LEVEL 3: A student shall take and pass 9 core courses and a Dissertation
Level
Course
Code
Description
HFR1010
Introduction to Translation from and into

French
10
HFR1000
Translation from and into French
10
13.5.10 BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN ENGLISH (SEL)
HFR1030
Survey of French Literature, 17th & 18th

Centuries
10
LEVEL 1: A student shall take and pass 10 core courses listed below and a
Dissertation
HFR1040
Survey of French literature, 19th & 20th

centuries
10
HFR1090
Introduction to selected texts of African

Literature
10
HFR1060
Selected texts of African literature
10
HFR1070
Introduction to letter and essay-writing in

French
10
HFR1080*
Letter, essay and report-writing in French &

oral
10
Level
Course
Code
Description
HEL0700
African Literature; Fiction
10
HEL0710
African Literature; Poetry, Drama & Orature
10
HEL0720
Theories of Literature in Africa & African Diaspora
10
HEL0730
Introduction to Creative Writing
10
HEL0740
Advanced Creative Writing
10
HEL0750
Theories of Literature outside Africa
10
HEL0760
Zimbabwean Literature; Fiction
10
HEL0770
Zimbabwean Literature; Poetry, Drama & Orature
10
HEL0780
African American Literature
10
HEL0790
Caribbean Literature
10
HEL3370
Dissertation
40
Prerequisite
Course
Units
Status
Prerequisite
Course
Units
CORE COURSES FOR A SUBSIDIARY SUBJECT
Core
POB1000
Portuguese Language
10
POB1090
Portuguese Language and Oral
10
POB1060
Introduction to topics from Portuguese History

and Civilisation
Core
POB1080
Topics from Portuguese History and

Civilisation
10
10
Status
Core
HFR0180*
Introduction to Commentary
10
HFR0190
Commentary
10
HFR0200
Non-Literary Translation into English
10
HFR0210
General Essay
10
th
Level
Course
Code
Description
HFR0400
Commentary
10
HFR0410
HFR0420
HFR0430
HFR0440
HFR0450
Literary Translation into English

Non-Literary Translation into French
Literary Translation into French
General Essay
10
10
10
10
10
Specialised Essay
10
10
HFR0220
Topics from 17 and 18 Century Literature
10
HFR0150
Topics fro m 19th and 20th Century Literature
10
HFR0460
HFR0470
HFR0160
African Literature
10
HFR0480
HFR0170
African and Caribbean Literature
10
POA2000
Portuguese Language: Unseen, Translation

and Composition
10
10
HFR0390
HPO0030/
HPO0040
HPO0070/
HPO0080
HPO0130
HPO0140
Aspects of Portuguese Literature, 1700 to

Present
10
HPO0150
HFR0230
10
HFR0240
Non-Literary Translation into French
10
HFR0250
Literary Translation into French
10
0
HFR026
Specialised Essay
10
HFR0270
French Literature 17th & 18th Centuries
10
1.
HFR0280
French Literature 19th & 20th Centuries &

French for Commerce
10
2.
HFR0290
Special Subject: Colonial Francophone

Literature/French Literature
10
3.
HFR0300
Special Subject: Post-Colonial Francophone

Literature/French Literature
10
HFR0390
Oral French
10
HFR0370
Dissertation
40
POA2050
POA2060/40
th
Core
Portuguese Language: Translation,

Composition and Oral Skills
HPO0160
HPO0390
HFR0370/
HPO0370
French Literature 17th and 18th Centuries

French Literature 19th and 20th Centuries and
French for Commerce
Oral French
Aspects of Portuguese Literature and History
before 1700
History and Literature of Brazil and Portuguese
Africa Portuguese Language:
Introduction to Essay and Prose Translation
Portuguese Language: Essay and Prose
Translation
Translation of Non-Literary Passage into English
Translation of Literary Passage into English
Oral Portuguese
Dissertation
Prerequisite
Course
Units
Status
Core
10
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
40
Core
Notes:
A student may choose either a French or a Portuguese dissertation topic with
the approval of the Department.
French papers (including the dissertation) shall be answered in French, except
where specified in the rubric.
A candidate taking the BA Honours Degree programme in French and
Portuguese may be permitted to spend an intercalated period of twelve
months prior to the final year as a language assistant in a French school or
University, or in a Portuguese school or university. In such cases, the Final
(Level 3) Examination shall be taken during the fourth year of study.
13.5.13 BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN FRENCH (SFR)

LEVEL 1 :
13.5.12 French and Portuguese (Dual Honours)

LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 10 core courses on offer and 2 core
courses (20 course units) listed below; shall also take and pass a
French oral course and a Portuguese oral course, and a
Dissertation. A student must also have taken and passed 8
courses in Portuguese as a subsidiary subject at Levels 2 and 3.
A STUDENT SHALL take and pass 8 core courses selected from

the course list for Levels 2 and 3 in BA Honours in French, and a
Dissertation.
13.5.14 BA HONOURS IN GEOGRAPHY (HGGA)

In order to graduate with a BA Honours Degree in Geography, a student must
have passed a total of 38 Courses that amount to 380 course units.
LEVEL 2:
LEVEL 3:
A student shall take and pass all 12 core courses.

A student shall take and pass 2 core courses (20 course units
each) and 6 options from the list below, and a Dissertation.
89
90
Course
Code
Description
HGG0630
Aspects of Geomorphological Systems
Co-requisite
Course
Units
Status
10
HGG0640
Aspects of Environmental Systems
10
HGG0030
10
HGG0040
Aspects of Social Geography
10
HGG0050
10
HGG0060
10
Core
HGG0620
Models of Spatial Analysis
HGG0310
Principles of Agricultural Geography
HGG0610
10
10
HGG0320
Agricultural Geography of Africa
10
HGG0330
Third World Development
10
HGG0340
Regional Development Planning
10
HGG0350
HGG0360
Advanced GIS and Remote Sensing
HGG0370
10
HGG0470
Political Geography
10
HGG0390
Soil Geography
10
HGG0380
Natural Hazards
10
10
HGG0350
10
HGG0070
Regional Geography of the Industrialised World
10
HGG0080
Regional Geography of the Developing World
10
HGG0090
Geography of Zimbabwe
10
HGG0410
Urban Geography of the Third World
10
HGG0100
Air Photo Interpretation and Computing
10
HGG0400
Tropical Environments
10
HGG0110
Quantitative Methods for Geographers
10
HGG0430
Microclimatology
10
HGG0120
Research Essay
10
HGG0460
Quaternary Environments
10
HGG0470
Techniques in Geography including Geographic

Information Systems and Remote Sensing
20
HGG0450
Global Climate Change
10
HGG0420
Resource Evaluation
HGG0480
Geographic Thought
20
HGG0490
Resource Management
HGG3370
Dissertation
40
HGG0580
Rural Geography
10
HGG0130
Hydrology
10
HGG0440
Medical Geography
10
HGG0140
Applied Hydrology
10
HGG0520
Climatology
10
HGG0500
Commercial Geography
10
HGG0570
Geography of Rangelands
Management
10
HGG0130
HGG0150
Ecosystems
10
HGG0160
Biogeography
10
HGG0170
Geomorphology
10
HGG0180
Fluvial Geomorphology
10
HGG0190
10
HGG0200
Applied Transport Studies
HGG0590
Economic Geography
10
HGG0600
Historical Geography
10
HGG0250
Spatial Population Analysis
10
HGG0260
Contemporary Population Issues in Development
HGG0270
Geography of Tourism and Recreation
HGG0280
Applied Geography of Tourism and Recreation
HGG0610
Methods of Spatial Analysis
HGG0190
HGG0250
10
10
10
HGG070
10
10
Core
Optional
10
HGG0420
10
13.5.15
BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN GEOGRAPHY (SGGA)
LEVEL 1:
A student shall take and pass 5 core courses and 1 core course (20 course
units) and 3 options from the list under Level 3 above, provided they were
not taken during the BA Degree Programme, plus a Dissertation. A student
who will have done the Geography of sub-Saharan Africa and the
Geography of Central and Southern Africa at the BA Degree Level 3 shall
be required to take and pass 2 more courses from the list of Options under
BA Honours Level 3 above.
Level
Course
Code
Description
HGG0050
HGG0060
HGG0070
HGG0080
HGG0090
HGG0480

Regional Geography of the Industrialized World
Regional Geography of the Developing World
Geography of Zimbabwe
Geographic Thought
10
10
10
10
10
20
HGG0470
Dissertation
40
Co-requisite
Course
Units
Status
HHS0210
Core
HHS0220
Notes
1.
At both Level 2 and Level 3, instructions shall consist of theory, practicals and
fieldwork. The fieldwork is compulsory.
2.
The written examination shall constitute 70% and the course work 30% of the
examination final mark in each course.
3.
The Research Essay at Level 2 shall have a maximum length of 2,500 words.
13.5.16 BA HONOURS IN HISTORY (HHS)
LEVEL 2
LEVEL 3
Level
2
A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 10 courses from
the list of options below:
A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 6 optional
courses from the list of Level 2 courses above, provided they were
not taken at Level 2, and a Dissertation.
Course
Code
HHS0030
HHS0360
HHS0050
Description
HHS0060
Women in Independent Africa
10
HHS0070
Early History of Middle East and North Africa
10
Theory and Method in History

Historiographical Traditions
African Women under Colonialism
HHS0080
History of Ottoman Empire to 1923
HHS0090
Middle East and North Africa in the 20 th

Century
Pre-colonial History of Central Africa
HHS0100
HHS0110
Prerequisite
HS1060
Course
Units
10
10
10
Status
Core
10
HHS0080
10
Optional
Latin America and Caribbean,

Independence to Present
East Africa to late 19 th Century
10
10
HHS0230
East Africa from late 19 th Century to Present
10
HHS0240
History of West Africa to Partition
10
HHS0250
West Africa from Partition to PostIndependence
10
HHS0260
History of North America to late 19 th Century
10
HHS0270
North America, late 19 th Century to Present
10
HHS0280
Intro. to Russia & Eastern Europe, 1800-1939
10
HHS0290
The Cold War and Communism, 1945-1990
10
HHS0300
HHS0310
Prehistory of Africa
10
10
HHS0320
10
HHS0330
HHS2340
HHS0010
HHS0020
Directed Reading
Archival and Library Skills
10
10
10
10
HHS3370
Dissertation
40
Core
13.5.17 BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN HISTORY (SHS)

LEVEL 1 : A student shall take and pass 2 core courses listed below and 6 optional
courses listed under History BA Honours Level 2 and Level 3 whose
equivalents have not been taken in the BA Degree, and a Dissertation.
Level
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisite
HHS0010
Cours
e
Units
10
HHS0020
10
Status
Core
13.5.18 BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN LINGUISTICS (SLI)
10
10
HHS0120
Colonial and Post-Colonial History of Central

Africa
Southern Africa, 15 th to late 19th Century
HHS0130
Southern Africa, Colonial Rule to Independence
10
HHS0140
Western Europe, mid-17th to mid-19th Century
10
HHS0350
Western Europe, mid-19th Century to Present
10
HHS0160
HHS0170
HHS0180
HHS0190
HHS0200
History of Political Thought

History of Ideas
History of Asia to 1920
History of Asia since 1920
Latin America and Caribbean to Colonial Period
10
10
10
10
10
LEVEL1 :
10
A student shall take and pass 4 core courses (20 course units
each) under Levels 2 and 3 of the BA Honours Linguistics
provided they were not taken in the BA Degree Programme,
and a dissertation.
13.5.19 BA HONOURS IN NDEBELE (HND)

LEVEL 2 :
A student shall register for 2 core courses and 10 options from

the list below
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 4 core courses and 4 options
from the list under Level 2 provided they were not taken at
Level 2, plus a dissertation.
91
Level
2
92
Course
Code
HND0400
HND0450
HND0500
HND0510
HND0520
Description
HND0530
10
HND0540
HND0550
HND0560
HND0570
HND0580
Theoretical Aspects of Ndebele Linguistic

Structure
Translation
Lexicography
HND0590
HND0600
HND0610
HND0620
HND0630
HND0640
HND0650
HND0170
HND0180
Playmaking Workshop
Ndebele Oral Literature
Aspects of Ndebele Thought
Trends in Zimbabwean Literature
Speech Styles and their Social Context
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
20
HND0150
HND0160
HND0700
HND0710

Sociolinguistics
Themes and Perspectives in the Ndebele
Novel
Nguni Dialects
Dissertation
20
20
10
10
HND0720
HND0730
HND3370
Note:
13.5.20
Prerequisite
Ndebele Poetry
Ndebele Drama
Theoretical Aspects of African Literature
Theories of Literature and Criticism
Elements of Ndebele Linguistic Structure
Course
Units
10
10
10
10
10
Status
Level
Core
Optional
10
10
10
10
10
Core
10
10
40
The overall assessment of the Course, Practical Drama, will be done

through the written examination (35%), assignments (25%) and Drama
(40%).
BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN NDEBELE (SND)
Course
Code
HND0700
HND0710
HND3370
13.5.21
Description
Themes and Perspectives in the Ndebele
Novel
Dissertation
Prerequisite
Course
Units
10
10
Description
Formal Logic
Advanced Logic
Moral Philosophy
Contemporary Ethics
The Pre-Socratics
17th and 18th Century Rationalism
17th and 18th Century Empiricism
Course
Units
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
HPL0180
10
HPL0130
HPL0140
HPL0290
HPL0300
HPL0250
HPL0260

Philosophy of Action
10
10
10
10
10
10
HPL0230
HPL0240
HPL0450

Scope of Knowledge
The Nature of Political Philosophy
10
10
10
HPL0400
Issues in Contemporary Social and Political

Philosophy
10
20
HPL0490
HPL0500
HPL0510
HPL0520
HPL0530
HPL0080
HPL0090
HPL0540

Teachings of the Church
Contemporary Zimbabwe
Formal Logic
Advanced Logic
Moral Philosophy
Contemporary Ethics
The Pre-Socratics
17th and 18th Century Rationalism
17th and 18th Century Empiricism
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
HPL0550
HPL0560
HPL0570
HPL0580
HPL3370
HPL0600
HPL0610
HPL0620
HPL0630
HPL0640
HPL0650
Dissertation
Marxist Philosophy
Contemporary Marxism
10
10
10
10
40
10
10
10
10
10
10
HPL0660
HPL0670
HPL0680
HPL0300
HPL0690

Philosophy of Action
History of the Philosophy of Education
10
10
10
10
10
HPL0700
Contemporary Philosophy of Education
10
HPL0710
HPL0720
HPL0730

10
10
10
HPL0460
LEVEL 1: A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 6 options selected from a
list of options under Level 2 of the BA Honours in Ndebele above, provided
they were not taken at BA Levels 2 and 3, plus a dissertation.
Level
Course
Code
HPL0010
HPL0020
HPL0030
HPL0040
HPL0070
HPL0080
HPL0090
HPL0100
HPL0410
HPL0420
HPL0430
HPL0440
HPL0110
HPL0120
HPL0170
Status
Core
40
BA HONOURS IN PHILOSOPHY (HPL)
LEVEL 2 : A student shall register for 6 core courses on offer and 6 optional courses
(or the equivalent of 60 course units) from the list below.
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 4 core courses on offer, provided they were
not taken at Level 2, and 4 optional courses from the list below or the
equivalent of 40 course units, provided they were not taken at Level 2, and a
Dissertation.
HPL0470
HPL0480
3
Prerequisite
Status
Core
Optional
20
20
Core
Optional
HPL0740
HPL0750
Scope of Knowledge
The Nature of Political Philosophy
10
10
HPL0760
Issues in Contemporary Social and Political

Philosophy
10
Death's Impact on Philosophy &Theology
20
20
HPL0770
HPL0780
HPL0790
HPL0800
HPL0310
HPL0320
HPL0330
HPL0340
HPL0350
HPL0360
HPL0810
HPL0820
HPL0830
13.5.22
Philosophical Investigations into the

Problems of War and Ideals of Peace
The Meaning of Life and Philosophy
20

Teachings of the Churches
Ethical Theories in Business
Ethics in the Business Environment
Aristotles Ethics and Politics
Aristotles Metaphysics
Theories of Language
Language and Meaning
Special Subject
20

20
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
20
BA HONOURS IN PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGIOUS STUDIES (HPL&RS)
LEVEL 2 : A student shall take and pass 4 core courses on offer from the list of courses
under Honours in Philosophy Level 2, and 2 options from the list of courses
for Honours in Philosophy Level 2 and shall take and pass 4 core courses
from the list of core courses under Honours in Religious Studies Level 2, and
4 options or the equivalent of 40 course units from the list of options under
Honours Religious Studies Level 2
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 4 core courses on offer from the list of core
courses under Honours in Philosophy Level 3, but not taken at Level 2 and
shall take and pass 2 core courses from the list of core courses under
Honours in Religious Studies Level 3, and 2 options or the equivalent of 20
course units from the list of courses under Honours in Religious Studies
Level 3, but not taken at Level 2, and a Dissertation.
13.5.24
BA HONOURS IN PORTUGUESE (HPO)
LEVEL 1: `A student shall take and pass 8 core courses below and 4 courses in a
subsidiary subject which shall normally be either French or German or
Spanish.
A student shall take and pass 8 core courses from the majorsubject and 4
core courses from the Subsidiary subject. The subsidiary
subject shall normally be either French or Spanish or German.
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 8 core courses one of which should be an oral,
and a Dissertation.
Level
1
Course
Code
HPO1010
Description
HPO1020
Translation from and into Portuguese
10
HPO1030
10
HPO1080
Intro. to Aspects of Portuguese History

and Civilization
Aspects of Portuguese History and
Civilization
Intro to Topics from African Literature
(Prose)
Topics from African Literature (Poetry)
Intro to Topics from Brazilian Literature
(Prose)
Topics from Brazilian Literature (Poetry)
HPO0190
HPO0200
HPO0210
Introduction to Commentary
Commentary
10
10
10
HPO0220
HPO0230
10
10
HPO0250
HPO0260
HPO0270
Essay in Portuguese
Aspects of Portuguese Literature of the
19th Century
Topics from Portuguese Literature of the
20th Century
African Literature
Brazilian Literature
Non-Literary Translation into Portuguese
HPO0280
Literary Translation into Portuguese
10
HPO0290
10
HPO0300
Factual Report Writing in Portuguese
10
HPO0310
Aspects of Portuguese Literature Before

1700 (Drama)
Aspects of Portuguese Literature Before
1700
(Poetry/Prose)
A Special Topic
Portuguese Oral
Dissertation
10
HPO1040
HPO1050
HPO1060
HPO1070
BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN PHILOSOPHY (SPL)
LEVEL 1: A student shall take and pass 4 core courses among the 8 core courses from
the lists for Levels 2 and 3 Honours in Philosophy, provided they were not
taken at BA Degree level, and 4 (or the equivalent of 40 course units)
optional courses from the lists of optional courses for Levels 2 and 3 under
Honours in Philosophy, provided they were not taken at BA Level, and a
Dissertation.
13.5.23
LEVEL 2:
HPO0240
HPO0320
HPO0330
HPO0340
HPO0370
Introduction to Translation from and into

Portuguese
Prerequisite
Course
Units
10
10
Status
Core
10
10
10
10
Core
10
10
10
10
Core
10
10
10
40
Note:
A student taking the BA Single Honours degree programme in Portuguese may be
permitted to spend an intercalated period of twelve months prior to the final year as a
language assistant in a school or university in a Portuguese-speaking country after
which the student will take final examinations in the following year.
93
10
HRS0110
HRS0610
HRS0620
Origins of Prophecy and Israelite Precanonical Prophets

Israelite Canonical Prophets
Life and Ministry of Jesus and Palestinian
Christianity
Hellenistic Christianity up to Early
Catholicism
Introduction to Philosophy of Religion
Introduction to Political Theology
HRS0630
Political Theology
10
HRS0640
Introduction to Religion and Ethics
10
HRS0650
HRS0660
10
10
HRS0710
HRS0720
HRS0770
Religion and Ethics

Introduction to Christianity in the Roman
Empire
Christianity in the Roman Empire
Christian History and Thought Pre-500AD
Christian History and Thought 500-1500
AD
Early History of Islam
Doctrine of Islam
Introduction to Christian Theology
Status
HRS0780
Christian Theology
10
Core
HRS0810
HRS0820
HRS0590
Introduction to Moral Theology

Issues in Moral Theology
Methods and Theories in the Study of
Religions
Selected Themes in the Religions of the
World
Introduction to the Study of Women in
Religion
Women in Religion
Methods and Theories in the Study of
African Traditional Religion
Selected Themes in African Traditional
Religion
Dissertation
10
10
10
Further Greek: Grammar and Syntax

Further Greek: Reading and Translation
Further Hebrew: Grammar and Syntax
Further Hebrew: Reading and Translation
Islam in Eastern and Southern Africa
Islam in Africa: Inter-regional Themes
Christianity in Africa from Antiquity to
1500
Christianity in Africa from 1500 to Present
Introduction to Issues in Science and
Religion
Selected Religious Texts
Introduction to African Theology
African Theology
Studies in Selected Religions of the
World
Further Studies in Selected Religions of
the World
Methods in the Study of the Old
Testament
Selected Themes in the Study of the Old
Testament
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
13.5.25 BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN PORTUGUESE (SPO)

LEVEL 1 :
HRS0020
HRS0030
A student shall take and pass 8 core courses selected from the
course list of Levels 2 and 3 in BA Honours in Portuguese, and a
Dissertation.
HRS0040
13.5.26 BA HONOURS IN RELIGIOUS STUDIES (HRS)

LEVEL 1:
LEVEL 2:
LEVEL 3:
Level
1
Course
Code
HRS1010
HRS1020
94
HRS1030
HRS1040
HRS1050
HRS1000
HRS1070
HRS1080
HRS1300
A student shall take and pass 4 core courses and 8 optional

courses from the list below
A student shall take and pass 4 core courses and 8 options or
the equivalent of 80 course units from the list below
A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 6 options or
the equivalent of 60 course units from the list under Level 2
above, which were not done at Level 2, and a dissertation.
Description
Introduction to the Phenomenology of
Religion
Introduction to World Religions
Prerequisite
Course
Units
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
HRS1250
Introduction to Sociology of Religion
10
HRS1260
Sociology of Religion
10
HRS1100
HRS1310
HRS1320
HRS1330
HRS1340
HRS1350
HRS1360
HRS1370
HRS1380
HRS1190
HRS1200
HRS1210
HRS1270
HRS1230
HRS1390
HRS0200
HRS0670
HRS0680
10
Introduction to Old Testament Studies

Introduction to New Testament Studies
Introduction to Problems of Philosophy
Problems of Philosophy
Introduction to Sociology
Issues in Sociology
Elementary Biblical Greek: Grammar and
Syntax
Elementary Biblical Greek: Reading and
Translation
Elementary Latin: Grammar
Elementary Latin: Reading and
Translation
Elementary Biblical Hebrew: Grammar
and Syntax
Elementary Biblical Hebrew: Reading and
Translation
The History of Christian Worship
The Practice of the Christian Worship
Aspects of Christian Thought: Northern
Hemisphere
Aspects of Christian Thought: Southern
Hemisphere
Basic Logic
Intermediate Logic
Introduction to Psychology
Issues in Psychology
Psychology and Spirituality
Psychological Perspectives on Religious
Experience and Development
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
HRS0010
HRS0580
HRS0450
Optional
HRS0460
HRS0550
HRS0560
HRS3370
Core
10
10
10
10
10
10
Optional
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Core
10
40
OPTIONAL
HRS0070
HRS0080
HRS0090
HRS0600
HRS0730
HRS0740
HRS0750
HRS0760
HRS0790
HRS0800
HRS0830
HRS0840
HRS0850
HRS0570
HRS0540
HRS0470
HRS0480
10
10
10
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
HRS0490
HRS0500
HRS0510
HRS0520
HRS0530
HRS0700
HRS0690
Methods in the Study of the New

Testament
Development of Christian Faith and
Doctrine in New Testament Writings
Special Subject
Theological Teachings of the Church in
Christian History and Thought 1879 AD present
Christian History and Thought 15001879AD
10
Note:
The overall assessment of the Course, Practical Drama, will be done through the
written examination (35%), assignments (25%) and Drama (40%).
10
20
20
13.5.29 BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN SHONA (SSH)
20
10
Level 1:
10
13.5.27 BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN RELIGIOUS STUDIES (SRS)

LEVEL 1: A student shall take and pass 8 courses or the equivalent of 80
course units from the list of courses under Honours in Religious
Studies Levels 2 and 3, which will not have been taken under
the BA Degree Programme, and a Dissertation.
13.5.28 BA HONOURS IN SHONA (SSH)
LEVEL 2: A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 10 options
from the list below
LEVEL 3: A student shall take and pass 4 core courses and 4 options
under Level 2 above, provided they were not taken at Level 2,
plus a dissertation
Level
2
Course
Code
HSH0440
HSH0450
HSH0500
HSH0510
Description
Shona Poetry
Shona Drama
Theoretical Aspects of African Literature
Theories of Literature and Criticism
Course
Units
10
10
10
10
HSH0520
Elements of Shona Linguistic Structure
10
HSH0530
10
HSH0630
HSH0640
HSH0650
HSH0170
Theoretical Aspects of Shona Linguistic

Structure
Translation
Lexicography
Playmaking Workshop
Shona Oral Literature
Aspects of Shona Thought
Theories and Methods in
Ethnomusicology
Projects in Uses of Theatre
Trends in Zimbabwean Literature
HSH0180
Speech Styles and their Social Context
20
HSH0150
HSH0160
HSH0700
HSH0710
20
20
10
10
HSH0720
HSH0730

Sociolinguistics
Novel
Shona Dialects
HSH3370
Dissertation
40
HSH0540
HSH0550
HSH0560
HSH0570
HSH0580
HSH0590
HSH0600
HSH0610
HSH0620
Prerequisite
Prerequisite

Novel
Dissertation
Course
Units
10
10
Status
Core
40
LEVEL 2 : A student shall take and pass 12 core courses listed below:
LEVEL 3: A student shall take and pass 6 core courses and at least 2
options from the list below, plus a Dissertation.
Core
Optional
Core
Description
13.5.30 BA HONOURS IN THEATRE ARTS (HTHA)
Level
10
10
10
20
Course
Code
HSH0700
HSH0710
HSH3370
Status
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Level
A student shall take and pass 2 core courses and 6 options

selected from the list under Level 2 BA Honours in Shona,
provided they were not taken at BA Levels 2 and 3, plus a
Dissertation.
Course
Code
HTHA0270
HTHA0280
HTHA0290
HTHA0300
HTHA0310
HTHA0320
HTHA0330
Description
HTHA0340
HTHA0350
HTHA0360
HTHA0370
HTHA0380
Design for Dance

Acting for the Stage
Acting for the Camera
Theatre and Education
Theatre and Development
Communication
Fundamentals of Directing
Directing Workshop
Production Practicum
Advanced Production
Theatre Criticism: Textual Analysis
Theatre Criticism: Performance Analysis
10
10
10
10
10
Dissertation
Scriptwriting for Film & Television
Principles of Choreography
Applied Choreography
20th Century Theatre Innovators: 19001950
20th Century Theatre Innovators: 1950-
40
10
10
10
10
10
HTHA0390
HTHA0400
HTHA0410
HTHA0420
HTHA0430
HTHA0440
HTHA3370
HTHA0450
HTHA0460
HTHA0470
HTHA0480
HTHA0490
HTHA0500
HTHA0510
HTHA0520
Traditions of African Theatre

Trends in African Theatre
Introduction to Stagecraft
Advanced Stagecraft
Theatre Management
Arts Administration
Principles of Dance Composition
2000
Theories of Film & Media
Techniques in Film & Media
Prerequisite
Course
units
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Status
Core
Core
Optional
95
Notes:
1.
Overall assessment of practical courses shall be done through written
examination (35%), assignments (25%) and practical examination (40%),
with the approval of the Senate.
2.
Level
2
HWAR0230
At the end of Level 2, a student shall have to satisfy the Departmental

Board
that he/she has participated in at least one production or any
production undertaken as part of coursework.
13.5.31
HWAR0240
HWAR0250
A SPECIAL HONOURS IN THEATRE ARTS (STA)
96
Course
Code
HTHA0530
HTHA0540
HTHA0550
HTHA0560
HTHA0570
HTHA0580
HTHA3370
HTHA0590
HTHA0600
HTHA0610
HTHA0620
HTHA0630
HTHA0640
HTHA0650
HTHA0660
HTHA0670
HTHA0680
Description
Theatre and Education
Theatre & Development Communication
Production Practicum
Advanced Production
Dissertation
Fundamentals of Directing
Directing Workshop
Theories of Film & Media
Techniques in Film & Media
Principles of Choreography
Applied Choreography
Scriptwriting for Film & Tel evision
Acting for the Stage
Acting for the Camera
Prerequisite
Course
Units
10
10
10
Status
Core
3
Description
Prerequisite
Developments in Modern Warfare

Modern Warfare, late 18 th to 20th
Centuries
Introduction to Strategic Doctrine,
Mechanisation and Air Power
Strategic Doctrine, Mechanisation & Air
Power in the Era of Two World Wars
Military History of the 1st World War
HWAR0270
HWAR0280
HWAR0290
HWAR0100
Battles and Tactics in the 1 st World War

Third World Conflicts
International Security
The Role of Media in Warfare
Media and Literature in Warfare
HWAR0110
HWAR0120
HWAR0130
HWAR0140
Contemporary Strategy
Advanced Contemporary Strategy
War and Society
War and Society in Contemporary Africa
HWAR0150
HWAR0160
HWAR0170
HWAR0180
HWAR0190
HWAR0200
HWAR3370
Military Technology
Arms Control
History of Warfare in Asia
Modern Warfare in Asia
Guerilla Warfare
Gender and Conflict
Dissertation
HWAR0260
LEVEL1 : A student shall take and pass 6 core courses and at least 2
options from the list below, plus a Dissertation.
Level
Course
Code
HWAR0210
HWAR0220
Course
Units
10
10
Status
Core
10
10
10
HWAR0050
10
HWAR0090
10
10
10
10
HWAR0110
HWAR0130
HWAR0150
HWAR0170
Optional
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
40
Core
10
10
10
40
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
13.5.33 BA SPECIAL HONOURS IN WAR AND STRATEGIC STUDIES (SWAR)

LEVEL 1:
Optional
13.5.32 BA HONOURS IN WAR AND STRATEGIC STUDIES (HWAR)

LEVEL 2: A student shall take and pass 4 core courses and 8 options from
the list below:
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 8 courses from the above listed
options, and a Dissertation.
13.6
A student shall take and pass 8 courses from the list of options
under BA Honours in War and Strategic Studies Levels 2 and 3,
whose equivalents have not been taken for the BA Degree
Programme, and a Dissertation.
ADDITIONAL DUAL HONOURS PROGRAMMES

13.6.1
An African Language and History
LEVEL 2 :
A student shall take and pass 2 core courses below, and 4 options
from the list under Level 3 of the BA Honours in an African
Language; shall take and pass 2 core courses and 4 options
selected from those under Level 2 BA Honours in History
A student shall take and pass 4 core courses in an African
Language below and 2 core courses in History as indicated
below and 2 options chosen from the list under BA Honours in
History not taken at Level 2. He/she shall also take and pass a
dissertation which shall be written in the subject of the student's
choice.
LEVEL 3:
Level
Course Code
HSH0440/ HND0440
HSH0450/ HND0450
HSH0700/ HND0700
Poetry
Drama
The Development of the
Shona/Ndebele Novel
HSH0710/ HND0710
Themes and Perspectives in

the
Shona/Ndebele Novel
Shona/Nguni Dialects
Language Planning and
Orthography
History of Zimbabwe to 1890
10
History of Zimbabwe Since

1890 to the Present
Dissertation
10
HSH0720/ HND0720
HSH0730/ HND0730
HHS0010
HHS0020
HSH3370/ HND3370/
HHS3370
Description
Prerequisite
Course
Units
10
10
10
Status
CORE
Core
10
10
Description
HSH0440/ HND0440
HSH0450/ HND0450
HSH0700/ HND0700
Course
Units
Status
Poetry
Drama
Shona/Ndebele Novel
10
10
10
Core
HSH0710/ HND0710
Themes and Perspectives in

the Shona/Ndebele Novel
10
HSH0600/ HND0600
Shona/Ndebele Oral Literature
10
HSH0610/ HND0610
Aspects of Shona/ Ndebele

Thought
Dissertation
10
HSH3370/ HND3370
13.6.3
Course Code
Description
HSH0440/
HND0440
HSH0450/
HND0450
HSH0520/
HND0520
HSH0530/
HND0530
HSH0700/
HND0700
HSH0710/
HND0710
HSH0720
HND0720
HSH0730
40
LEVEL 3: A student shall take and pass 4 core courses below in an African Language
and 2 core courses and 2 options or the equivalent of 20 course units
selected from the list under the BA Honours in Religious Studies Level 3
without taking courses that were done at level 2. A student shall also take
and pass a dissertation in an African Language.
Course Code
Level
10
13.6.2
An African Language and Religious Studies
LEVEL 2 : A student shall take 2 core courses in an African Language below, and 4
options from the list under Level 2 of the BA Honours in an African
Language; take and pass 4 core courses and 2 options selected from those
under Level 2 BA Honours in Religious Studies.
Level
LEVEL 3 : A student shall take and pass 4 core courses in an African Language from the
list below; shall take and pass 2 core courses (20 course units each) in
Linguistics as indicated below, and a dissertation in either an African
Language or in Linguistics
Prerequisite
Core
40
An African Language and Linguistics
LEVEL 2 : A student shall take and pass 4 core courses as listed below and 2
options selected from the list under Level 2 of the BA Honours in
Ndebele/Shona; shall take and pass 3 core courses (20 course units
each) on offer from the list under Level 2 of the BA Honours in
Linguistics
Course
Units
Status
Poetry
10
Core
Drama
10
Elements of Shona/Ndebele
Linguistic Structure
Theoretical Aspects of
Shona/Ndebele Linguistic Structure
10
10
HLG0260

Shona/Ndebele Novel
Themes and Perspectives in the
Shona/Ndebele Novel
Shona Dialects
Nguni Dialects
Orthography
Orthography
Advanced Linguistic Theory
HLG0090
Schools of Linguistic Thought
20
HSH3370/
HND3370/HLG3370
Dissertation
40
HND0730
Prerequisite
10
Core
10
10
10
10
10
20
97
DEPARTMENT OF AFRICAN LANGUAGES AND

LITERATURE
4.4
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF ARTS DEGREE

IN AFRICAN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE (MAFL)
1.
Introduction
Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by coursework hereinafter
referred to as the General Regulations and the Faculty of Arts
Regulations for Master of Arts Degrees.
2.
Entry Qualifications
A good honours degree with a 2.1 or better in Shona, Ndebele or their
equivalents.
3.
Duration of the Programme

3.1
The programme will run for three semesters on a full time
basis or six semesters, on a part-time basis.
3.2
Part 1 of the programme will be offered on a full time basis
for two semesters and on a part-time basis for four
semesters.
3.3
Part 2 will be offered full-time for a period of one semester
and part-time for a period two semesters.
98
4.
Structure of the Programme

4.1
The programme will consist of two parts; Part 1 will be the
course work component and Part 2, the dissertation.
4.2
Part 1: Course work lasting for two semesters in the first year
for full-time students and at most four semesters within the
two years for part-time students. Part 2: A dissertation
lasting one semester full-time or two semesters part-time.
4.3
Each semester shall normally involve at least 12 weeks of
teaching and 1 week of private study, followed by 2 weeks of
formal examinations.
4.5
4.6
Each student shall register for eight (8) courses for part 1,
four of which will be core and four options. Not all options
will necessarily be available in any one year. All courses must
be passed for a student to be allowed to proceed to Part 2 of
the programme. Each course consists of 60 hours of
teaching, 48 hours of lectures and 12 hours of seminars. All
courses are single weighted.
The dissertation shall normally start after the end of the
second semester in the case of full-time students and after
the end of the semester in which Part 1 is completed in the
case of part-time students. All students must pass the
dissertation.
The dissertation shall be 20 000-25 000 words on an
approved topic. The dissertation shall normally be
submitted on or before 30 June of the second year in the case
of full-time students and by the last month of the sixth
semester, in the case of part-time students.
5.
Examinations
Part 1
5.1
Examinations shall be conducted in accordance with
5.2
Courses will be examined at the end of each semester in
which they are taught, each course comprising one threehour paper.
6.
Assessment of courses
6.1
The mark for each course will comprise the marks for
continuous assessment and the formal examination in the
ratio 40: 60.
6.2
Continuous assessment will include assignments, tests and
or a small scale project and students will be notified of their
relative weightings at the commencement of the course.
The minimum number of assignments shall be 2.
6.3
A student shall pass Part 1 before proceeding to Part 2.
Those failing to do so may be allowed to supplement or
repeat a course in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
7.
COURSES
7.1
Part 1:
The Department will offer courses of a comparative kind, covering all the
main groups of languages taught, in the wider context of the study of the
Southern Bantu Languages and African Languages and Literature Studies as
a whole. The treatment will be either linguistic or literary or a combination of
both.
DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
IN ENGLISH (MEL)
1.
Application of These Regulations

1.1
These regulations should be read in conjunction with the
University of Zimbabwe General Academic Regulations for
Masters Degrees by coursework, hereinafter referred to as
the General Regulations, and the Faculty of Arts Regulations
for Master of Arts Degrees by coursework.
1.2
General Academic Regulations take precedence over these
regulations.
2.
Definition of Terms
Terms used in these Regulations are as described in the General
Academic Regulations
3.
Entry Requirements
3.1
Eligibility for admission
To be eligible for admission to the Masters in English, a
student will normally need to have passed the Honours
degree in English with a 2.1 or approved equivalent.
Core Courses
Code
MAFL512
MAFL513
MAFL511
MAFL506
Description
Examination
Duration
Comparative Bantu Linguistics 3 hours
Zimbabwean Literature in the
Context of African and Related
Literatures
3 hours
Language Change
3 hours
History and Theory of Criticism 3 hours
Optional Courses
MAFL505 Oral Literature in Africa
MAFL507 Shona Syntax or
MAFL510 Ndebele Syntax
MAFL514 Onomastics
MAFL515 African Cultural and Literary
Perspectives On Gender
7.2
Part 2
MAFL570 Dissertation
Weighting Course
1
Units
15
1
1
1
15
15
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
3 hours
1
1
15
15
3 hours
15
60
4.
3.2
Submission of application for admission

A student must submit his/her application in accordance
3.3
General Provisions
A student who is admitted must satisfy the provisions of the
4.1
4.2
Structure of Programme
The programme shall run for three semesters on a full-time
basis or six semesters on a part time basis.
Part 1 of the programme shall be offered on a full-time basis
for two semesters and for four semesters on a part time basis.
99
4.3.
Part 2 shall constitute a dissertation and shall be offered on a

full-time basis for a period of one semester and for a period
of two semesters on a part time basis.
4.4
A student shall register for 4 core courses and 4 optional

courses for Part I as follows: 2 core courses and 2 optional in
Semester 1 and another 2 core courses and 2 optional in
Semester 2. Not all optional courses will be available in a
given academic year. Each semester will normally involve at
least 12 weeks of teaching and 1 week of private study,
followed by 2 weeks of formal examinations. Each course
shall constitute 60 contact hours, 48 of which shall be
lecture time and 12 hours seminars.
Each course shall be taught within a semester on a full-time
basis
4.5
4.6
100
6.
Assessment of Courses
6.1
Assessment of first semester courses is as follows:
Written Examination
70%
Course work
30%
6.2
Coursework is made up of seminar presentations and
written assignments.
7.
Weighting
7.1
Each course shall have a weighting of 15 units.
7.2
A dissertation shall have the weight of 4 courses (60 units).
8.
Processing of Results
Examinations shall be processed in accordance with the General
9.
Determination of Results
9.1
A student's results shall be determined in accordance with
the Faculty Regulations and the General Academic
Regulations.
Dissertation
4.6.1
There shall be a dissertation of approximately
20 000 30 000 words.
4.6.2
The dissertation will normally start after the end of

the second semester in the case of full-time
students and after the end of the semester in which
9.2
A student must pass Part I before proceeding to Part II.
9.3
A student who fails a course may be allowed to repeat that

course or an approved substitute or supplement in
accordance with the Faculty and General Academic
Regulations.
9.4
A dissertation failed within the supplementary range may be

improved and re-presented within three months as
determined by Senate.
Part I is completed in the case of part-time

students. The dissertation shall normally be
submitted on or before 30 June of the second year
in the case of full-time students and by the last
month of the sixth semester, in the case of parttime students.
5.
Examinations
5.1
Examinations shall be conducted in accordance with the
5.2
Examination of a taught course shall take place at the end
of the semester in which it is completed.
5.3
Each single-weighed course shall be examined in a 3 hour
paper.
10.
Award of Masters Degree

10.1
A candidate must accrue a minimum of 180 units in order to
be awarded a degree.
11.
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY
Courses
11.1
Part I
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF ARTS

DEGREE IN HERITAGE STUDIES (MAHS)
Core Courses
Code
Description
Duration
Weighting Units
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
15
MEL509
African Literature and
MEL510
African American Literature and
MEL514
Issues in Zimbabwean
MEL515
Caribbean Literature and
Ideological Thought
Thought
Literature
Thought
Course
Examination
1.
Introduction
The MA in Heritage Studies regulations should be read in
conjunction with the General Academic Regulations for the Masters
Degree by Coursework, and Regulations for the Degree of Master of
Arts.
2.
2.1
Entry to the MA in Heritage Studies programme requires
normally, a good Honours degree in a relevant discipline
such as Archaeology, Anthropology, History, Geology,
Palaeontology, Architecture, Art, Archiving or Culture
studies from any recognized university.
2.2
At the recommendation of the department, equivalent
relevant experience of not less than three years in a heritage
organisation may be considered.
2.3
Foreign students are admitted when considered proficient
in the use of the English language.
Optional Courses
MEL513
Literature and Social Change in

Africa
3 hours
MEL516
Literature and Social Change

3 hours
15
MEL508
English as a Second Language 3 hours
15
outside Africa
MEL517
Second Language Acquisition 3 hours
15
MEL511
Non Western Literature
3 hours
15
MEL518
A Special Writer
3 hours
15
MEL 512
Critical and Creative Trends in

3 hours
15
African
3.
Duration of Study
The duration of the degree programme is 3 semesters for full-time
study or six semesters for part-time study.
4.
4.1
The programme consists of two parts. Part I is coursework
and Part 2 is dissertation. Part I lasts for two semesters on
full-time study and four semesters on part-time basis. Part 2
lasts for one semester on full-time study or two semesters
on part-time.
4.2
For Part I each semester shall normally involve at least 12
weeks of teaching and 1 week of private study, followed by 2
weeks of formal examinations.
4.3
Part I consists of 8 taught courses, 4 of which are core
courses and 4 are selected from the range of options
available. Not all optional courses will necessarily be
available in any one year.
Literature and Arts: Classical and Present

MEL519
Critical and Creative Trends in

European Literature and Arts 3 hours
11.2
Part 2
MEL570
Dissertation
15
60
101
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
102
5.
6.
A course shall last one semester and a candidate must pass

all eight taught courses before proceeding to Part 2. Each
course consists of 48 hours of teaching, of which 36 hours
shall be lectures and 12 hours seminars.
In accordance with the General Academic Regulations, a
student who fails any part of the taught courses may be
allowed to write supplementary examinations or to repeat
the course. Where the course failed is optional a student may
be allowed to take a different optional course to replace the
failed one.
the end of the semester in which Part I is completed in the
case of part-time students. The dissertation has a weighting
equivalence of four courses and shall be between 15000 and
25000 words.
The dissertation shall be on an approved topic and shall
normally be submitted at the end of the third semester of the
programme for full-time students or at the end of the sixth
semester of the programme for part-time students.
Examinations
5.1
5.2
Taught courses are examined at the end of the semester in
which they would have been taught.
5.3
Each examination paper shall have the duration of 3 hours.
5.4
A student who fails coursework cannot proceed to write the
examination for that course.
6.1
In each course, the written examination shall count for 50%
and continuous assessment 50%.
6.2
Continuous assessment for each course will include research
projects, seminars, fieldwork and/or practical laboratory
work.
6.3
The final course mark will be the aggregate of the
coursework and examination marks. To be awarded the
Master of Arts degree in Heritage Studies, a candidate must
have fulfilled the passing requirements for both the taught
component and the dissertation of the programme.
7.
COURSES
7.1 Part I
Core Courses
Code
MHS 501
MHS 503
MHS 508
MHS 509
Description
Examination
Duration
Cultural Heritage
3 hours
Managing Heritage Places 3 hours
Heritage and Information
Technology
3 hours
Heritage Conservation
3 hours
Weighting
1
1
Course
Units
15
15
1
1
15
15
1
1
15
15
15
1
1
15
15
15
15
1
1
15
15
15
Optional Courses
MHS 512
Issues in Southern African
Archaeology
3 hours
MHS 513
Heritage and Landscapes 3 hours
MHS 514
The Rock Art of Southern
Africa
3 hours
MHS 515
The Dry Stone Heritage of
Southern Africa
3 hours
MHS 516
Heritage Site Conservation 3 hours
MHS 517
Collecting and Exhibiting of
Material Culture
3 hours
MHS 518
Heritage, Multimedia and
the Internet
3 hours
MHS 519
Archaeology and Geographic
Information Systems
3 hours
MHS 510
Museum Management
3 hours
MHS 521
Conservation of Artistic
Expressions
3 hours
MHS 522
Heritage Impact Assessments
3 hours
MHS 523
Management of Intangible
Heritage
3 hours
15
15
7.2
Part 2
MHS 570
Dissertation
60
DEPARTMENT OF LINGUISTICS
DEGREE IN GENERAL LINGUISTICS (MLG)
1.
Introduction
Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by coursework
hereinafter referred to as the General Regulations and the Faculty of
Arts Regulations for Master of Arts Degrees.
2.
A good honours degree with a 2.1 or better in General Linguistics.
3.
Duration of Programme
3.1
The programme shall run for three semesters on a full time
4.
4.5
3.2.
Part 1 of the programme shall be offered on a full time basis

for two semesters and on a part- time basis for four
semesters.
3.3.
Part 2 shall be offered full-time for a period of one semester

and part-time for a period of two semesters.
4.1
The programme shall consist of two parts; Part 1 shall be the
4.2
4.3
4.4
Each student shall register for eight (8) courses for Part 1,
four of which shall be core and four optional. Optional
courses shall be chosen from a range of options available,
but not all options shall necessarily be available in any one
year. All eight courses must be passed for a student to be
4.6
4.7
5.
6.
allowed to proceed to Part 2 of the programme. Each course

consists of 60 hours of teaching, of which 48 hours shall be
lectures and 12 hours seminars. All courses are single
weighted.
second semester in the case of full- time students and after
dissertation.
submitted on or before 30 June of the second year in the case
of full-time students and by the last month of the sixth
semester, in the case of part-time students.
A student may be required to attend a viva voce examination
for the dissertation.
Examinations
Part 1
5.1
5.2
6.1
ratio 40:60.
6.2
or a small scale project and students will be notified of their
The minimum number of assignments shall be two (2) per
course.
6.3
A student must pass Part 1 before proceeding to Part 11.
Regulations.
103
7.
Core Courses
Code
Description
MLG 501
MLG 502
MLG 503
MLG 509
COURSES
7.1
Part 1
Advanced Syntax
Advanced Semantics
Theoretical Phonetics
and Phonology
Cognitive Linguistics
Exam
Duration
3 hours
3 hours
3 hours
3 hours
Weighting
1
1
Course
units
15
15
1
1
15
15

DEGREE IN APPLIED LINGUISTICS (MAL)
Optional Courses
Code
Description
MLG 504
MLG505
MLG506
MLG507
104
MLG 508
MLG 510
MLG 511
MLG512
MLG 513
7.2
MLG570
Exam
Weighting Course
Duration
units
Applications to Descriptive and
Theoretical Linguistics 3 hours
1
15
Advanced Morphology 3 hours
1
15
Language Acquisition
3 hours
1
15
Advanced Comparative Historical
Linguistics
3 hours
1
Sociolinguistics Studies
3 hours
1
Computational
Linguistics
3 hours
1
Pragmatics
3 hours
1
Advanced Psycholinguistics
Studies
3 hours
1
Indigenous Language
Studies
3 hours
1
Part 2
Dissertation
15
15
1.
Introduction
hereinafter referred to as the General Regulations and the Faculty of
Arts Regulations for Master of Arts Degrees.
2.
Either
A good honours degree with 2.1 or better in Linguistics;
Or
Practical experience of not less than three years as a language
professional since taking a first degree obtained with a 2.1 or
better.
3.
3.1
The programme shall run for three semesters on a full-time
basis or six semesters on a part-time basis.
3.2
Part 1 of the programme shall be offered on a full-time basis
semesters.
3.3
4.
4.1
The programme shall consist of two parts; Part 1 will be the
coursework component and Part 2, the dissertation.
4.2
The programme shall normally commence in February.
4.3
Part 1 Coursework lasting for two semesters in the first year
two years for part-time students.
Part 2: A dissertation lasting one semester full-time or two
semesters part-time
4.4
15
15
15
15
60
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
5.
four of which shall be core and four optional. Optional
courses shall be chosen from a range of options available,
but not all options shall necessarily be available in any one
year. All eight courses must be passed for a student to be
lectures and 12 hours seminars. All courses are single
weighted.
second semester in the case of full- time students and after
dissertation.
The dissertation shall be 20000-25000 words on an
approved topic.
The dissertation shall normally be submitted at the end of
the third semester in the case of full-time students and at the
end of the sixth semester, in the case of part-time students.
Examinations
Part 1
5.1
5.2
6.1
continuous assessment and for the formal examination in
the ratio 40:60.
6.2
or a small scale project, and students will be notified of their
The minimum number of assignments shall be two (2) per
course.
6.3
7.

Regulations.
Courses
7.1 Part 1
Core Courses
Code
MAL 501
MAL 503
MAL 504
MAL 507
Description
Examination
Duration
3 hours
Language Structure
Issues in Applied
Linguistics
3 hours
Research Methods in Applied
Linguistics
3 hours
Discourse Studies
3 hours
Optional courses
MAL 502
Second Language
Acquisition
3 hours
MAL 505
Applied Sociolinguistics 3 hours
MAL 506
Languages and Culture in Multilingual
Settings
3 hours
MAL 508
Psychology of Language
Learning
3 hours
MAL 509
Context based Language
Research
3 hours
MAL 510
Computer Assisted Language
Learning
3 hours
MAL 511
Language Planning
and Policy
3 hours
MAL 512
Language Programme
and Design
3 hours
MAL 513
Linguistics, Stylistics and The teaching
of Literature
3 hours
Weighting
1
Course
Units
15
15
1
1
15
15
1
1
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
105
MAL 514
4.
MAL515
Context, Use and Analysis of the English

Language: A Global
Perspective
3 hours
Language and Gender 3 hours
1
1
15
15
7.2 Part 2
MAL570
Dissertation
60
DEGREE IN LANGUAGE FOR SPECIFIC
PURPOSES (MLSP)
1.
Introduction
Academic Regulations for Masters Degree by Coursework and the
Regulations for the degree of Master of Arts.
2.
Entry qualifications
A candidate must normally possess a good honours degree with a 2.1
or better in Linguistics or a relevant language discipline.
While it is recognized that candidates with language and linguistics
background will be at an advantage, well-qualified candidates from
Curriculum Arts and Education will also be considered.
3.
3.1
The programme shall run for three semesters on a full time
106
3.2
Part 1 of the programme shall be offered on a full time basis

semesters.
3.3

5.
4.1
The programme shall consist of two parts; Part 1 will be the
4.2
for full- time students and at most four semesters within the
4.3
Each semester shall normally involve at least 12
weeks of teaching and 1 week of private study, followed by
2 weeks of formal examinations.
4.4
Each student will register for eight (8) courses for
Part 1, four of which shall be core and four optional.
Optional courses shall be chosen from a range of options
available, but not all options shall necessarily be available
in any one year. All eight courses must be passed for a
student to be allowed to proceed to Part 2 of the
programme. Each course consists of 60 hours of teaching,
of which 48 hours shall be lectures and 12 hours seminars.
All courses are single weighted.
4.5
dissertation.
4.6
submitted at the end of the third semester, in the case of fulltime students and at the end of the sixth semester, in the
case of part-time students.
4.7
Examinations
Part 1
5.1
Examinations shall be conducted in accordance with General
5.2
Courses shall be examined at the end of each semester in
6.
6.1
The mark for each course shall comprise the marks for
ratio 40:60, with the exception of MLSP508 (Corpus
Linguistics), where the ratio is 50:50 because of the practical
nature of the course.
6.2
Continuous assessment shall include assignments, tests and
or a small; scale project and students shall be notified of
their relative weightings at the commencement of the
course. The minimum number of assignments shall be two
(2) per course.
6.3
Regulations.
7. COURSES
7.1
Part 1
Description
Examination
Duration
MLSP501
Course
Weighting
Units
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
MLSP504
Text and Discourse

Analysis
3 hours
15
MLSP512
Research Methods
3 hours
15
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
60
Corpus Linguistics
MLSP 510
Language in the Media
Education
and Advertising
MLSP 511
Translation of Special
Purpose Texts
7.2
Part 2
MLSP 570
Dissertation
DEPARTMENT OF RELIGIOUS STUDIES,

CLASSICS AND PHILOSOPHY
1.
Application of these Regulations

1.1
Masters Degrees by Coursework, hereinafter referred to as
the General Academic Regulations, and the Faculty of Arts
1.2
The General Academic Regulations take precedence over
these regulations.
2.
A good Honours Degree in Philosophy of 2.1 or better, the BAA 4th
Year Honours Degree in Philosophy, or the equivalent.
Multi-lingual Societies 3 hours
15
3.
3.1
The programme shall be completed in 3 semesters of fulltime study or 6 semesters of part-time study.
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
Optional Courses
Language in
Developing LSP
Programmes
MLSP 506
Language in Informal
Language and
Communication
MLSP 505
3 hours
MLSP 508
Language for Specific
MLSP502
Discourses
MLSP 509
Approaches to
Purposes
MLSP503
Occupational

IN PHILOSOPHY (MPL)
Core Courses
Code
MLSP 507
Language for Academic

Purposes
107
3.2
3.3
4.
108
5.
Part 1 of the Programme shall be offered on a full-time basis

for 2 semesters and on a part-time basis for 4 semesters.
Part 2 shall be offered on a full-time basis for a period of 1
semester and on a part-time basis for a period of 2
semesters.
4.1
The programme shall consist of eight courses (Part 1) and a
Dissertation (Part 2). Eight courses or the equivalent of 120
course units shall be taken in a year by full-time students and
three courses or the equivalent of 60 course units a year by
part time students.
4.2
4.3
Each single-weighted course shall consist of 60 contact
hours, of which 48 hours shall be for teaching and 12 hours
for seminars.
4.4
and shall take five (5) core courses and three (3) optional
courses from those available in a given year.
4.5
A Dissertation shall in the case of full-time students be
submitted at the end of 3 semesters, and in the case of parttime students shall be submitted at the end of 6 semesters.
4.6
The length of the Dissertation should be from 15 000 to
20 000 words.
Examinations
5.1
General Academic regulations.
5.2
Formal examination of a taught course shall take place at the
end of the semester in which it is completed.
5.3
A candidate may be required to sit a viva voce examination
for any taught course or the Dissertation.
6.
6.1
The mark for each single course shall comprise the marks for
coursework and the formal examination in the ratio 40: 60.
6.2
There will be a minimum of two assignments per singleweighted course.

A candidate shall have to pass all courses in Part 1 before
proceeding to Part 2. Those failing to do so may be allowed
to supplement, repeat or replace a course in accordance
7.
Weighting
7.1
Each course other than the Dissertation shall have a
weighting of 15 course units.
7.2
The Dissertation shall have a weighting of 60 course
units.
7.3
Award of the Degree shall require accrual of a minimum of
180 course units.
8.
8.1
Courses
Part 1
Core Courses
Code
Description
Examination
MPL501
Advanced Logic
3 hours
Duration
Course
Weighting
Units
15
MPL502
Ethics
3 hours
15
MPL503
Metaphysics
3 hours
15
MPL513
Epistemology
3 hours
15
MPL521
Philosophy of Language
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
Optional Courses
MPL504
One Major Philosopher
MPL505
Marxism
3 hours
15
MPL510
Philosophy of Science
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
MPL511
Applied Ethics
MPL514
Issues in Science
& Religion
3 hours
15
MPL515
Philosophy of Education
3 hours
15
MPL516
Medical Ethics
3 hours
15
MPL517
Business Ethics
3 hours
15
MPL519
3 hours
15
MPL520
& Action
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
Philosophy
3 hours
15
African Philosophy
3 hours
15
60
MPL522
Classical Philosophy
MPL524
Aristotle's Ethics and
MPL525
Social & Political
Metaphysics
MPL526
8.2
3.3
Philosophy of Mind
4.
Part 2
MPL570
Dissertation
4.1
The programme shall consist of eight courses (Part 1) and a
Dissertation (Part 2). eight courses or the equivalent of 120
course units shall be taken in a year by full-time students,
and four courses or the equivalent of 60 course units a year
by part time students.
4.2
DEPARTMENT OF RELIGIOUS STUDIES, CLASSICS

AND PHILOSOPHY
4.3

IN CLASSICS (MCL)
4.4
1.
Application of these Regulations

1.1
the General Academic Regulations, and the Faculty of Arts
1.2
these regulations.
2.
A good Honours Degree in Classical Studies of 2.1 or better, the BAA
4th Year Honours Degree in Classical Studies, or the equivalent.
3.
3.1
The programme shall be completed in 3 semesters of fulltime study or 6 semesters of part-time study.
3.2
Part 1 of the Programme shall be offered on a full-time basis
for 2 semesters and on a part-time basis for 4 semesters.
Part 2 shall be offered on a full-time basis for a period of 1

semester and on a part-time basis for a period of 2
semesters.
4.5
4.7

Each single-weighted course shall consist of 60 contact
hours, of which 48 hours shall be for teaching and 12 hours
for seminars.
Each student shall register for eight courses or the
equivalent of 120 course units for Part 1, and shall take four
core courses and four optional courses from among those
available in a given year.
A Dissertation shall in the case of full-time students be
submitted at the end of 3 semesters, and in the case of parttime students shall be submitted at the end of 6 semesters.
The length of the Dissertation should be from 15 000 to
20 000 words.
5.
Examinations
5.1
General Academic regulations.
5.2
Formal examination of a taught course shall take place at
the end of the semester in which it is completed.
5.3
A candidate may be required to sit a viva voce examination
for any taught course or the dissertation.
6.
6.1
coursework and the formal examination in the ratio 40: 60.
109
6.2
7.
8.
110
There will be a minimum of two assignments per singleweighted course.

A candidate shall have to pass all courses in Part 1 before
proceeding to Part 2. Those failing to do so may be allowed to
supplement, repeat or replace a course in accordance with
Duration
Course
Weighting Units
MCL523
Primary Epic
3 hours
15
MCL524
Secondary Epic
3 hours
15
MCL525
Greek Lyric
3 hours
15
MCL526
Latin Lyric
3 hours
15
Greek Comedy
3 hours
15
Latin Comedy
3 hours
15
MCL531
Greek Pastoral Poetry
3 hours
15
7.3
MCL532
Latin Pastoral Poetry
3 hours
15
MCL533
Augustan Literature: Prose
3 hours
15
MCL534
Augustan Literature: Poetry
3 hours
15
MCL535
Earlier History of North Africa 3 hours
15
15
15
Award of the Degree shall require accrual of a minimum of

180 course units.
Courses
The courses which may be offered for the degree are as follows:
MCL527
Greek Tragedy
3 hours
15
MCL528
Latin Tragedy
3 hours
15
MCL536
Later History of North Africa 3 hours
MCL537
Earlier Literature of
MCL538
Later Literature of
3 hours
15
MCL539
Archaeology of North Africa 3 hours
15
MCL540
Art of North Africa
15
Part 1
Description
North Africa
Examination
North Africa
Course
Weighting
Units
Methods and Theories in
3 hours
3 hours
the Studyof Ancient
MCL541
Greek Pictorial Art
3 hours
15
Societies
MCL542
Roman Pictorial Art
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
Textual Analysis and
MCL543
Greek Sculpture
3 hours
15
Historical Approaches
MCL544
Roman Sculpture
3 hours
15
MCL545
Greek Architecture
3 hours
15
MCL546
Roman Architecture and Town

1
15
60
to Classics
MCL521
Examination
MCL529
Duration
MCL520
Description
MCL530
8.1
MCL519
Code
Weighting
7.1
Each course other than the Dissertation shall have a
weighting of 15 course units.
7.2
The Dissertation shall have a weighting of 60 course units.
Core Courses
Code
Optional Courses
3 hours
15
A Specific Author:
Key Texts
3 hours
15
15
Planning
3 hours
(Pre-Requisite for MCL.*)

MCL522
8.2
A Specific Author: History, Context

and/or Additional Texts
3 hours
MCL570
Part 2
Dissertation
DEPARTMENT OF THEATRE ARTS
4. Structure of Programme
4.1
The programme consists of two parts: Part 1 will be the
course work component and Part 2 the research component.
4.2
The programme shall run for three (3) semesters on a fulltime basis, or six semesters on a part-time basis. Each
semester will normally consist of fifteen (15) weeks. Each
semester shall normally involve at least 12 weeks of teaching
and one week of private study and two weeks of formal
examinations.
4.3
Part 1 of the programme shall be offered on full-time basis
for two (2) semesters and on part-time basis for four (4)
semesters.
4.4
Part 2 shall be offered on a full-time for a period of one (1)
semester, and part-time for a period of two (2) semesters.
4.5
A student shall register for eight (8) courses for Part 1, four
(4) of which shall be core courses and two (4) optional.
Optional courses will be chosen from a range of options
4.6
Each course shall have 6 contact hours per week including
tutorials and practicals.
4.7
For a full-time student, the dissertation shall normally be
submitted on or before 30 June or 30 November of the third
semester and part-time student shall normally submit
his/her dissertation by the last month of the sixth semester.
REGULATIONS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF

ARTS IN THEATRE AND PERFORMANCE (MATP)
1. Application of these Regulations
1.1
the General regulations and the Faculty of Arts Regulations
for Masters of Arts Degrees.
1.2
the Faculty Regulations and these regulations.
1.3
The Master of Arts in Theatre and Performance programme
consists of two areas of specialisation: Theatre Making and
Performance and Applied Drama and Theatre. These
regulations shall apply to both areas of specialisation.
2. Definition of Terms
3.
Entry Requirements
3.1 Eligibility for admission
3.1.1
To be eligible for admission to the Masters in
Theatre and Performance, a student must have a
good Honours degree (2.1 or better) in Theatre Arts
or an approved equivalent.
3.1.2
At the recommendation of the Department and the
Dean, Senate may admit to the programme a
student with a good BA degree in Drama/Theatre
Arts and sufficient work experience.
3.2
A student must submit his/her application in accordance
3.3
General Provisions
5. Examination
5.1
5.2
Formal examination of a taught course shall take place at the
end of the period in which it was completed and each course
shall be examined over a three hour paper.
5.3
The dissertation shall be examined through a written project
report only or a practical presentation supported by a
written report explicating the presentations.
6.
Assessment Of Course
6.1
Continuous assessment shall be in the form of tests,
assignments, seminars, workshop and essays. Minimum
number of assignments per semester shall be two.
111
6.2
6.3
6.4
7.
For a theory course, the formal examination shall constitute

75% and continuous assessment 25% of the overall mark.
For a practical course, the formal examination shall
constitute 30%, practical presentation 45% and continuous
assessment 25% of the overall mark.
The research component shall be assessed either through a
dissertation or a practical presentation supported by a
dissertation or report explicating the practical presentation.
A wholly written dissertation shall normally be 20,000 to
25,000 words and a dissertation explaining a practical
presentation; 15,000 to 20,000 words in length.
Processing of Examination Results

Examination results shall be processed in accordance with the
11.
Publication of Results
Results shall be published in accordance with the general Academic
Regulations
12.
Academic Transcript
The transcript shall be issued in accordance with the General
13.
Award of Degree Certificates of The University of Zimbabwe

The degree certificate shall be awarded in accordance with the
14.
COURSES: OPTION 1. THEATRE MAKING AND PERFORMANCE

14.1
Part I
Core courses
7.1
7.2
112
7.3
7.4
7.5
8.
9.
10.
Examinations shall be processed in accordance with the
General academic Regulations.
To be eligible to proceed to Part 2, a student must pass all
eight (8) courses studied.
A student who fails a course may be allowed to repeat that
course or an approved substitute, in accordance with the
General and Faculty Regulations
Supplementary examinations may be permitted in
accordance with the General Regulations.
Award of The Degree

The degree shall be classified in accordance with the provision of the
Academic Offences and Penalties
The provision of the General Academic Regulations on offences and
penalties shall apply.
Posthumous and Aegrotat Provisions
These shall apply as provided for in the General Academic
Regulations.
Code
Description
Examination
Duration
Course
Weighting
Units
MTMP515
Post-Dramatic Directing
3 hours
15
MTMP502
Directing Practicum
3 hours
15
MTMP503
Research Methods
3 hours
15
MTMP516
Theatre & Performance

3 hours
15
Theory
Optional Courses
A student shall choose FOUR courses on offer from the following list:
Code
Description
Examination
MTMP517
Solo Performance
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
Duration
Course
Weighting
Units
MTMP518
Ensemble Performance
MTMP507
Theatre Design: Lighting
MTMP508
Theatre Design: Scene and

Costume
3 hours
15
MTMP519
Strategies of Story
3 hours
15
MTMP520
Strategies of Structure
3 hours
15
and Sound
and Form
MTMP511
MTMP512
16.
Arts and Heritage

Administration
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
Theatre and Production

Management
MTMP521
Text and Performance

Analysis
3 hours
15
MTMP514
Production Dramaturgy
3 hours
15
60
14.2
MTMP570
15.
COURSES: OPTION 2. APPLIED DRAMA AND THEATRE

15.1
HISTORY DEPARTMENT
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF ARTS IN
AFRICAN HISTORY (MAFH)
Part 2
Dissertation
1.
Part I
Core courses
Code
Description
Examination
MADT511
Transformative Theatre
3 hours
15
MADT512
Practical Project
3 hours
15
MADT503
Research Methods
3 hours
15
MADT513
Theories of Applied Theatre
3 hours
15
Duration
Course
Weighting
2.
A student shall choose FOUR courses on offer from the following list:
Code
Description
Examination
MADT514
Text & Performance Analysis
3 hours
15
MADT506
Production Dramaturgy
3 hours
15
MADT515
Strategies of Story
3 hours
15
MADT516
Strategies of Structure
MADT509
Arts and Heritage
MADT517
Workshops in Applied
and Form
Administration
Theatre
MADT518
15.2
MADT570
Units
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
60
Part 2
Dissertation
These Regulations should be read in conjunction with the

University of Zimbabwe General Academic Regulations for the
Masters Degrees by Coursework, hereinafter referred to as the
General Regulations, and the Faculty of Arts Regulations for
Master of Arts Degrees by coursework.
1.2
General Academic Regulations shall take precedence over

these regulations.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
3.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
3.1
Film and Media for

Development
1.1

Course
Weighting
Units
Optional Courses
Duration
SYLLABUSES
In accordance with the provisions of the General Regulation,
detailed syllabus for the Course do not form part of the General or
Faculty Regulations but shall be maintained in the Faculty Office for
reference.

Entry to the MAFH programme requires normally, a good
honours degree class in History from a recognised university.
3.2
Submission of applications for admission

A student must submit his/her application in accordance with
113
3.3
4.
5.6

A student who fails any of the taught courses has to repeat the
course.
5.7
A student cannot proceed to the research component of their

study if they have not successfully completed the taught
component of the programme.

4.1
The duration of the programme is 18 months full time study,

comprising two taught semesters and one semester work on
research dissertation.
4.2
The programme may be run on part time basis, over a period of

three years comprising four semesters of taught courses and two
semester work on research dissertation.
4.3
The degree programme consists of four taught courses plus a

dissertation.
4.4
A course will last two semesters and a candidate must pass all
the four courses to proceed to the dissertation.
4.5
The core course on Research Methodology can be offered to a

joint class of students enrolled for the MAFH and MWAR
programmes.
4.6
Not all options on the course list will necessarily be available in

any one year.
114
5.
General Provisions
6.
DISSERTATION
6.1
The dissertation is normally submitted six months after the

taught courses have been completed.
6.2
The dissertation has a weighting equivalence of two courses

and should be on any approved topic relevant to the degree and
the taught components. It must be based on original work.
6.3
The dissertation is submitted to the department on the approval

of the supervisor. It is then forwarded for marking to two
examiners.
6.4
Students are prescribed a submission deadline and normally a

student who fails to meet the prescribed deadline is deemed to
have failed the dissertation.
However, on the recommendation of the supervisor and the
departmental board, a candidate may be granted an extension
of the submission deadline, normally by a period not exceeding
3 months of the original deadline. This is so, provided the
student has made a justifiable request for the extension and in
good time.
6.5
EXAMINATION
5.1 Courses are examined at the end of the year in which they would
have been taught.
5.2
The written examination comprises four papers, each written in

3 hours. In each course, the examination will account for 75%
and coursework 25%.
5.3
Continuous assessment for each course will include research

assignments and seminars.
5.4
Students are assessed on the basis of their performance in both

assignments and seminar presentations.
5.5
Each component of the programme has to be passed separately.

A student who fails coursework cannot proceed to write the
examination for the failed course.
7.
6.6
On the recommendation of the board of examiners, a student

who would have failed the dissertation within supplementary
range can be allowed to resubmit within 3 months after
attending to editorial amendments to the dissertation.
6.7
Where a dissertation is deemed irredeemable, the student may

be allowed to repeat the dissertation provided he or she pursues
a different topic.
PROVISION FOR PROCEEDING TO THE DISSERTATION

A student cannot proceed to the research component of their study if
they have not successfully completed the taught component of the
programme.
8.
9.
10.
ASSESSMENT OF TAUGHT COURSES
1. Oral Tradition in African History
MAFH501
In each of the taught courses, the examination will account for 75%
and coursework 25%.
2. Colonialism and African Response
MAFH502
3. Religion and Culture in Africa
MAFH503
4. History of Race, Class and Ethnicity in Africa
MAFH505
5. History of Independent Africa
MAFH506
6. Military History of Africa
MAFH507
7.
MAFH570
WEIGHTING
9.1
Each of the taught courses has a weighing of 30 units.
9.2
The dissertation is equivalent to two taught courses in terms

of weighting which translates to 60 units. The whole
programme thus has 180 units.
11.
DETERMINATION OF RESULTS
A student's results shall be determined in accordance with the
Faculty Arts Regulations for Master of Arts Degrees and the
12.
HISTORY DEPARTMENT
PROCESSING OF RESULTS
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF ARTS IN WAR

AND STRATEGIC STUDIES (MWAR)
1.
12.1 To be awarded the Master of Arts degree in African History, a

candidate must have fulfilled the passing requirements for
both the taught component and the dissertation of the
programme.
13.
COURSES IN THE MASTER OF ARTS IN AFRICAN HISTORY

Students will then register for any three optional courses which
would be on offer during any given academic year chosen from the
courses listed below.
2.
115

1.1
These Regulations should be read in conjunction with

General Regulations, and the Faculty of Arts Regulations
Master of Arts Degrees by coursework.
1.2
General Academic Regulations shall take precedence over these

regulations.
AWARD OF MASTER OF ARTS DEGREE
12.2 However, Faculty Arts Regulations for Master of Arts Degrees

and the General Academic Regulations shall take
precedence.
Dissertation
the
the
the
for
DEFINITION OF TERMS
3.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
3.1

Entry to the MWAR programme requires normally, a good
honours degree class in War and Strategic Studies or History
from a recognised university.
3.2
Submission of applications for admission

A student must submit his/her application in accordance with the
3.3
General Provisions
A student who is admitted must satisfy the provisions of the General
4.
5.5 Each component of the programme has to be passed separately. A

student who fails coursework cannot proceed to write the
examination for the failed course.
5.6 A student who fails any of the taught courses has to repeat the
course.
5.7

4.1 The duration of the programme is 18 months full time study,
comprising two taught semesters and one semester work on
4.2 The programme may be run on part time basis, over a period of
three years comprising four semesters of taught courses and two
semester work on research dissertation.
116
5.4 Students are assessed on the basis of their performance in both

assignments and seminar presentations.
4.3 The degree programme consists of three taught courses plus a

dissertation.
4.4 A course will last two semesters and a candidate must pass all the
four courses to proceed to the dissertation.
4.5 The core course on Research Methodology can be offered to a
joint class of students enrolled for the MWAR and MAFH
programmes.
6. DISSERTATION
6.1
The dissertation is normally submitted six months after the taught

courses have been completed.
6.2
The dissertation has a weighting equivalence of two courses and

should be on any approved topic relevant to the degree and the
taught components. It must be based on original work.
6.3
The dissertation is submitted to the department on the approval of

the supervisor. It is then forwarded for marking to two examiners.
6.4
Students are prescribed a submission deadline and normally a

student who fails to meet the prescribed deadline is deemed to
have failed the dissertation.
However, on the recommendation of the supervisor and the
departmental board, a candidate may be granted an extension of
the submission deadline, normally by a period not exceeding 3
months of the original deadline. This is so, provided the student
has made a justifiable request for the extension and in good time.
6.5
4.6 Not all options on the course list will necessarily be available in
any one year.
5. EXAMINATION
6.6
On the recommendation of the board of examiners, a student who

would have failed the dissertation within supplementary range can
be allowed to resubmit within 3 months after attending to editorial
amendments to the dissertation.
6.7
Where a dissertation is deemed irredeemable, the student may be

allowed to repeat the dissertation provided he or she pursues a
different topic.
5.1 Courses are examined at the end of the year in which they would
have been taught.
5.2 The written examination comprises four papers, each written in 3
hours. In each course, the examination will account for 75% and
coursework 25%.
5.3 Continuous assessment for each course will include research
assignments and seminars.
A student cannot proceed to the research component of their

study if they have not successfully completed the taught
component of the programme.
7.
PROVISION FOR PROCEEDING TO THE DISSERTATION
3.
DURATION OF STUDY
The duration of the degree programme is 3 semesters for full-time
study or six semesters for part-time study.
4.
4.1 The degree programme consists of two parts. Part 1 is the
coursework component and Part 2, the dissertation. Part 1 lasts
for two semesters on a full-time basis and four semesters on a
part-time basis. Part 2 lasts for one semester on full-time study or
two semesters part-time.
A student cannot proceed to the research component of their study if

they have not successfully completed the taught component of the
programme.
8.

In each of the taught courses, the examination will account for 75% and
coursework 25%.
9.
4.2
WEIGHTING
9.1
Each of the taught courses has a weighing of 30 units.
9.2
MWAR501 History of warfare from the late Eighteenth Century to

the Second World War
9.3
MWAR503 Contemporary Problems in African Security
9.4.
MWAR570 Dissertation (of 10000 words on) on relevant subjects

approved by the chairman of the departmentAMENDED
4.3
Part 1 consists of 8 taught courses, of which 4 are core courses,

and 4 are selected from the range of options available.
4.4 Each course consists of 60 hours of teaching, of which 48 hours
shall be lectures and 12 hours of seminars.
4.5 A student must pass all 8 taught courses before proceeding to
Part 2.
5.
DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMIC HISTORY

IN AFRICAN ECONOMIC HISTORY (MEH)
1.
INTRODUCTION
These regulations should be read in conjunction with the University of
Zimbabwe General Academic Regulations for the Masters Degree by
Coursework, hereinafter referred to as the General Regulations, and the
Faculty of Arts Regulations for Master of Arts Degrees by Coursework.
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Entry to the MEH programme requires normally, a good Honours degree
at 2.1 or better in Economic History or any approved equivalent from
this or other recognised university.
For Part 1 each semester shall normally involve at least 12 weeks of

EXAMINATIONS
5.1 Examinations shall be conducted in accordance with the General
5.2 Taught courses shall be examined at the end of the semester in
which they would have been taught.
5.3 Each examination paper shall have the duration of 3 hours. In each
course, the examination shall count for 70% and continuous
assessment 30%.
5.4 For the taught component of the degree programme, students are
assessed on the basis of their performance in both coursework and
examinations and each component has to be passed separately.
5.5 A student who fails coursework cannot proceed to write the
examination for that course.
5.6 A student who fails any of the taught courses may be allowed to
supplement or repeat the course in accordance with the General
Academic Regulations. Where the failed course is optional a
student may be allowed to register for another optional course in
its place.
117
6.
7.
118
8.
DISSERTATION
6.1 The dissertation shall normally beginafter the completion of Part
1. The dissertation has a weighting equivalence of four courses
and shall be between 15 000 and 25 000 words.
6.2 The dissertation shall be on an approved topic by the
departmental board and shall be based on original research work.
It shall normally be submitted at the end of the third semester of
the programme for full-time students or at the end of the sixth
semester of the programme for part-time students.
6.3 On the recommendation of the board of examiners, a student who
would have failed the dissertationwithin supplementary range can
be allowed to resubmitwithin 3 months after attending to
amendments to the dissertation.
6.4 A student who fails the dissertation may apply to repeat the
dissertation but on a different topic.
Assessment of the taught component is as follows:
Coursework
30%
Examination
70%
COURSES FOR THE MA DEGREE IN AFRICAN ECONOMIC HISTORY
8.1.1 Core Courses

Description
MEH511
Research Methodology
MEH501
Medical History of Africa
3hrs
15
3hrs
15
MEH512
Agrarian History in Colonial Africa
MEH504
Industrialization and Urbanization

in Africa
3hrs
15
MEH505
Education and Development in Africa
3hrs
15
MEH506
The Economic
History of Slavery in the
New World: A Comparative Study
3hrs
15
MEH507
The Political Economy of Development:

Theories of Change in the Third World
3hrs
15
MEH513
MEH514
Slavery in Africa
Agribusiness and Peasant Agriculture
in Africa
3hrs
15
3hrs
15
MEH515
Trade and Tariff Policy in Africa
3hrs
15
MEH516
Environment, Society and Economy

in Africa
3hrs
15
MEH517
Labour Migration in Africa
3hrs
15
Not all optional courses listed above shall be on offer every academic year.
8.1 Part I Courses

Code
8.1.2 Optional Courses
Examination
Duration
Courses
Weighting Units
3hrs
15
8.2 Part II
MEH 570 Dissertation
8.3 Course description
Core Courses
in Economic History
MEH508
MEH509
Labour History in Colonial Africa

Agrarian Developments
in Independent Africa
3hrs
3hrs
1
1
15
15
MEH510
Labour History in Post Colonial Africa
3hrs
15
15
60
Research Methodology in Economic History

The course examines the origins of Economic History, its development and
relevance to society. It also looks at the evolution of various methodological
approaches to the study of Economic History. It equips Economic History
Students with relevant skills in researching different subject matters in this
discipline. Comparison will also be drawn with other methodological
approaches. The course also examines the strengths and limitations of some
of the methodological approaches that have been used to analyse socioeconomic experiences.
Labour History in Colonial Africa
The course covers the main labour dynamics during colonial Africa. It
examines issues such as labour demand, mobilization, utilization and
migration. Worker reaction and how this shaped and/or was shaped by state
labour policies is also examined.
Labour in Post Colonial Africa
This course focuses on the labour policies in independent Africa, examining
issues such as government as a major employer and overseer of labour
matters, interaction between state and trade unions, worker participation in
labour issues, labour conditions in agriculture, mines, domestic services and
industry.
Agrarian Developments in Independent Africa
The course begins by looking at the state of agriculture at the time of
independence. It then examines agricultural policies of selected African
states with regards to, among other things, land, food security, small and
large scale agricultural production, marketing and research.
Optional Courses.
Agrarian History in Colonial Africa
The course begins by examining the state of Agriculture in Africa at the time
of colonial occupation. It then looks at the setting up and development of
white settler agriculture, focusing on the roles of both the imperial and
colonial state. African (Peasant) agriculture is also an important theme the
course examines in detail, again taking into account the colonial situation
whether it was in white settler colonies or not. In this case, the course
examines the question of agency (of African peasants or white settlers) in
detail. The issues of famine and food security are also examined.
Agribusiness and Peasant Agriculture in Africa
The major concern of the course is the relationship between corporation
(processing and marketing firms) and smallholder farmers in the production
of agricultural commodities in Africa in both colonial and post-colonial
periods. The role of the state in that relationship is also examined. The course
commences with the general history of agribusiness the world over and then
focuses on Africa.
Environment, Society and Economy in Africa

The course focuses on the relationship between human practices, social
institutions and environment in the history of African societies with particular
emphasis on the period since the nineteenth century. At the core of this
course is a deliberation of how people use, manage or interact with natural
resources and the natural environment, in specific circumstances at given
times and places.
Labour Migrations in Africa
The course examines the evolution of labour migration from the pre-colonial
to post-colonial society. It seeks to clarify conceptual and theoretical
frameworks on labour migration looking at the causes, nature and impact of
labour migration. The role of the state and non-state actors in shaping trends
in migration will also be examined. Comparative analysis will be made
between and amongst regional blocks and different nations.
Trade and Tariff Policies in Africa
The course examines the African continent's policies on trade and tariffs in
the colonial and postcolonial periods. It makes an enquiry into the global
trade and tariff policies in order to lay a theoretical framework within which to
situate the African study. Examples from organizations like the United
Conference on Trade and Development (GATT), the World Trade Organisation
(WTO) and the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development
(OECD) will be provided.
Slavery in Africa
The course examines the changing nature of African slavery in the 19th and
20th centuries and analyse the consequences of the Atlantic Slave trade, the
colonial conquest and abolitionism. It also examines the end of slavery and its
legacy in post-abolitionist Africa as well as contemporary forms of slavery.
119
COLLEGE OF HEALTH SCIENCES
REGULATIONS FOR THE UNDERGRADUATE

PROGRAMMES
3.
DATES OF EXAMINATIONS
3.1 The Professional Examinations for the Bachelor of Dental Surgery
will normally take place at the following times:
First year, BDS Part I in or about the middle of second year.
(Biochemistry)
Second year, BDS Part II in or about the middle of the second
year (Anatomy, Physiology, Behavioural Sciences and Community
Health)
Third year, BDS Part IIIin the middle of the third year
(General Pathology, General Medicine, General Surgery)
Fourth year, BDS Part IVin November(Clinical Pharmacology)
Fifth year, BDS Part Vend of 5th year(I)
(i)
Restorative Dentistry
(ii)
Community and Preventive Dentistry
(iii) Oral Surgery/Oral Medicine/Oral Pathology
3.2 Supplementary Examinations insert in about 6 weeks after
publication of results.
Normally Supplementary Examinations are taken in accordance with
General Regulations except where specified.
First Yearin February following the University
Examinations;
Second Yearin August;
Third Yearin August;
Fourth Yearin January following the University
Examinations;
Fifth Yearin April following the University Examinations.
4.
ADMISSION TO EXAMINATIONS
To be admitted to the examinations for the BDS Degree, a candidate
must:
4.1 have registered as a student of the University of Zimbabwe in
accordance with the General Regulations for students;
4.2 have completed approved courses of study at the University of
Zimbabwe to the satisfaction of the appropriate Chairmen of
Departments.
5.
PROGRAMME
5.1 Field Attachment
The Undergraduate Dental students are required to undertake 3
weeks of field attachment activities in the rural areas in each of the
second, fourth, and final year.
5.1.1 A Behavioural Sciences and Community Health Examination
incorporating experiences gained in the field attachments
and knowledge forthcoming from clinical input shall be taken
as part of Part II of the course, coinciding with the
examinations in Anatomy and Physiology.
REGULATIONS FOR THE BACHELOR OF DENTAL

SURGERY DEGREE (BDS)
120
1.
INTRODUCTION
These Regulations apply only to students who are in full-time
attendance at the University of Zimbabwe and should be read in
conjunction with the University's General Regulations for undergraduate
Degrees, hereinafter referred to as the General Regulations and
Departmental course guide.
The Bachelor of Dental Surgery Degree will be awarded to candidates
who have successfully completed approved courses and examinations in
accordance with the Regulations set out below. The Degree is awarded in
two categories -the Bachelor of Dental Surgery with honours and the
Bachelor of Dental Surgery Degree.
2.
QUALIFICATIONS FOR REGISTRATION

2.1 Entry to the University
All prospective entrants must satisfy the entry requirements of the
University.
2.2 Programme requirements
2.2.1 To qualify for consideration for admission, a prospective
student must normally have: passes at Ordinary Level (or
approved equivalent) in English Language and Mathematics;
passes at Advanced Level (or approved equivalent) in
Chemistry and any two of the following three subjects:
Biology (or Zoology)
Mathematics
Physics.
The subject not offered at A Level must normally have been
passed at O Level.
2.2.2 A prospective candidate from the SADC region who has no A
Levels must have passed preferably Biology/Chemistry,
Physics, Mathematics and Zoology at Part II (second year) of
the Bachelor of Science degree programme at their
University (Ref.GAR3.2.1.4)
2.2.3 Prospective candidates with a Diploma/Certificate in Dental
Therapy/Dental Hygiene, Dental Technology with Merit may
be considered.
5.2 Pre-Clinical Division

5.2.1 The Pre-Clinical courses begin at the same time as all other
University courses in the first year and much earlier (i.e. in
February) in the second year.
5.2.2 Department of Anatomy
Gross Anatomy
Microscopic Anatomy
Embryology
5.2.3 Department of Physiology
The course includes the study of:
Cell Physiology
The cardiovascular System
The Respiratory System
The Blood
The Alimentary System
Metabolism
The Kidney
The Hormones
Reproduction
The Nervous System
Genetics
Environmental Physiology
5.2.4 Department of Biochemistry
The Course covers all aspects of a basic introduction to
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology.
5.2.5 Department of Clinical Pharmacology
An introduction to General Pharmacology is followed by a
Course on drugs acting on the various systems of the body.
5.2.6 Department of Community Medicine
An introduction to Community Health will include
Epidemiology and Biostatistics and an Orientation for the
field attachment project.
5.2.7 Department of Psychiatry
A General introduction to Behavioural Sciences.
5.2.8 Department of Linguistics
Communications Skills for Academic Purposes (CSHS101)
The course covers the Process of human communication,
Models of learning, Reading, Academic writing, and Research
skills.
Communication Skills for Professional Purposes (CSHS102)
The course covers Models of communication, Consultation
techniques and establishing collaborative relationships, the
Health professional as educator and counselor, conflict
management, oral and written messages, Non-verbal
communication, Research and Report Writing.
5.3 Clinical Division

5.3.1 The overall clinical training commences in the first year of the
programme, continues throughout to the fifth year with
introductory courses in Clinical Dentistry, General Surgery,
General Medicine, Community Medicine, Clinical
Pharmacology and General Pathology.
5.3.2 Behavioural Sciences and Community Health examination
incorporating subject matter provided as part of the Clinical
Input as well as that exercise gained in Rural Attachment shall
be given at the end of Part II (see 5.1).
5.3.3 The formal Pathology course (Chemical Pathology,
Haematology, Histopathology, Medical Microbiology and
Immunology) begins in the third term of the second year. Oral
Pathology shall continue to be taught in the fourth and fifth
years and examined together with the major clinical subjects
(see 3.1).
5.3.4 The formal Clinical Courses begin in the third year. The
emphasis throughout is on the importance of the patient and
not merely his presenting disease, and the major portion of
this training is in the oral health clinics, lectures, tutorials,
discussions and topic teaching. A multi-disciplinary
approach is encouraged by the close integration of the
Systemic Pathology and Oral Pathology lectures with those of
the clinical subjects. The attitude is further enhanced by topic
teaching, where discussion may include any department
within the Faculty.
5.3.5 During the 3rd and 4th years, oral health clinics training and
teaching is based on the tutorial system. In addition, there is a
four week elective period in the fourth year, when students
undertake a study of their own choice.
6.
SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
6.1 General Regulations
6.1.1 Examinations for the Bachelor of Dental Surgery will be run in
accordance with the provisions in the General Academic
Regulations.
6.1.2 Faculty Board of Examiners
The Board of Examiners shall comprise of the Dean of the
College as Chairman, the Deputy Dean, the Chairman of each
Department and the External Examiner for the Department,
plus normally, one other member of the Department
nominated by the Departmental Panel of Examiners from
each Department involved in the subjects for examination.
6.2 Bachelor of Dental Surgery Part I and Part II
Anatomy and Oral Anatomy
AT2DM
Biochemistr
BC1DM
Physiology and Oral Physiology
PY2DM
Behavioural Sciences and
121
Community Health
BS2DM
Communication Skills for Academic
Purpose
CSHS101
Communication Skills for Professional
Purposes
CSHS102
6.2.1
6.2.2
122
Examiners
There shall be at least one External Examiner for each of the
subjects. Departmental Panels of Examiners shall be
constituted in conformity with the General Regulations of the
University.
Examinations
The examinations which shall be held in the University, shall
be divided into two parts, Part I being held at the end of the
first year and Part II, Anatomy, Physiology and Behavioral
Sciences and Community Health in or about the middle of the
second year of the programme.
6.2.2.1
Anatomy (AT2DM)
6.2.2.1.1 Anatomy Examinations
The examinations shall comprise:
6.2.2.1.2 Written Examination
One x 2 hour essay/short questions
papers (Paper I) (AT2DM/01)
One 2x1/2 hour multiple choice paper 75
questions(Paper II) (AT2DM/02
6.2.2.1.3 Oral Examination (AT2DM/90)
6.2.2.1.4 Practical Examination (AT2DM/50)
6.2.2.1.5 Continuous Assessment of the year's work
covering class tests in all terms and tutorials
(AT2DM/80)
6.2.2.1.6 Marking
Paper I
100
Paper II
100
Continuous Assessment
100
Total
300
6.2.2.2
Biochemistry (BC1DM)
6.2.2.2.1 B i o c h e m i s t r y E x a m i n a t i o n s ( S p e c i a l
requirements)
One three-hour paper consisting of essays and
short answer questions (BC1DM)
6.2.2.2.3 Oral Examinations (BC1DM/90)
covering practical laboratory work throughout the
year class tests in the first and second terms, and
tutorials (BC1DM/80)
6.2.2.2.5 Marking
Paper I Essays/Short answer questions 500
PaperII Oral Examination
100
300
Total
900
Pass mark is 50% i.e.
450 marks
6.2.2.3
Physiology (PY2DM)
6.2.2.3.1 Physiology Examinations
6.2.2.3.2 True or False (or Multiple Choice) Examinations
Two, two and half hour papers (PY2DM/01 and
PY2DM/02) PY2DM/01 contains questions on Cell
Physiology, Blood and Immune System,Endocrine
Physiology, Reproductive Physiology, Genetics,
Gastrointestinal Physiology PY2DM/02 contains
questions on Renal Physiology, Cardiovascular
Physiology, Respiratory Physiology, Neurophysiology,
Excitable Cells
6.2.2.3.3 Continuous Assessment (including Practicals)
(PY2DM/03)
6.2.2.3.4 Marking
Paper I (PY2DM/01) 100
Paper II (PY2DM/02) 100
Paper III (PY2DM/03) 100
TOTAL
300
Pass Mark is 50% i.e. 150 marks
6.2.2.4 Behavioural Sciences and Community Health (BS2DM)
taken at Part II only.
6.2.2.4.1 Written Examinations (BS2DM)
One three-hour essay paper consisting of Section A
and Section B Section A will contain three
compulsory questions (60% of the marks) One
question will be on Rural Attachment (20%) and the
second will be on Behavioural Sciences (20%) and
he third will be on Biostatistics (20%).
Section B will consist of three questions
1. Community Health
2. Behavioural Sciences
3. Rural Attachment
Candidates will be required to answer any two
questions (maximum 40%)
One two-hour multiple choice Behavioural Sciences
and Community Health paper (BS2DM/02)

contributed by all interested parties.
6.2.2.4.2
Marking
Paper I
400
Paper II
300
Paper III
300
TOTAL
1000
6.2.2.5 Communication Skills for Academic Purposes (CSHS101)

6.2.2.5.1 The examination shall comprise:
One two-hour paper consisting of short
essay/answer questions, and
6.2.2.5.3 Continuous Assessment covering class
tests/assignments and presentations.
6.2.2.5.4 Marking
Written Examination
70%
Continuous Assessment 30%
TOTAL
100%
6.2.2.6
6.2.2.6.1
6.2.2.6.2
6.2.2.6.3
6.2.2.6.4
6.2.3
6.2.3.1
6.2.3.2
Communication Skills for Professional Purposes

(CSHS102)
The Examination shall comprise:
Written Examination
One three-hour paper consisting of short
essay/answer questions, and
Continuous Assessment covering class
tests/assignments and presentations
Marking
Written Examination
70%
TOTAL
100%
Examination Procedures
Setting of Question Papers
The setting of question papers shall be the
responsibility of the Departmental Panel of
Examiners.
Conduct
The examinations shall be conducted in conformity
with the Regulations prescribed by the University.
6.2.3.3
Failure
Candidates must normally satisfy the examiners in
Biochemistry at Part I before proceeding to Part II; and in
all subjects at Part II Anatomy and Oral Anatomy,
Physiology and Oral Physiology, Behavioural Sciences and
Community Health) before proceeding to Part III.
Candidates obtaining between 40% and 49% shall
normally be required to write supplementary
examinations in the subject in which they have failed. The
General Academic Regulations shall apply for candidates
who fail more than half the subjects at Part II. In the case
of the students who obtain less than 40%, in any of the
subjects, the General Regulations of the University shall
apply. Candidates who fail the supplementary
examinations shall normally be required to discontinue
from the Bachelor of Dental Surgery Programme.
6.2.3.4
Supplementary Examinations : Marking
The marking scheme for Biochemistry at Part I,
Anatomy and Oral Anatomy, Physiology and Oral
Physiology at Part II shall be as follows:Theory Paper
500
Oral
100
TOTAL
600
Pass Mark is 50% i.e.300 marks
The Marking scheme for the Behavioural Sciences
and Community Health examination shall be as for
the Part II Examination.
6.2.3.5
Results
Results shall be determined in accordance with the
6.3 Third Year (BDS Part III)
General Pathology
General Surgery
General Medicine
6.3.1 General Pathology (PG3DM)
6.3.1.1
Examiners
There shall be five External Examiners, one each for
Chemical Pathology, Haematology, Histopathology,
Forensic Pathology, Immunology and Medical
Microbiology.
6.3.1.2
Examination
The examination, which shall be held in the University
shall comprise:
123
1.Histopathology/Haematology 1 hour
2. Medical Microbiology 1 hour
3. Chemical Pathology 1 hour
6.3.1.2.1 Continuous Assessment (PG3DM/50)
including the performance in class
examination and during the oral health
clinics.
6.3.1.2.2 Oral Examination (PG3DM/90) at
which not less than 2 examiners shall
be present.
6.3.1.3
Marking
The following are the marks which shall be allotted
to each section of the examination:
Written Paper
200
Practical
50
Continuous Assessment 100
Oral
50
TOTAL
400
Pass Mark is 50% i.e.
200 marks
6.3.2
124
General Surgery
(SG3DM)
6.3.2.1 Examiners
There shall be one External Examiner.
6.3.2.2.1 Written Examinations comprising of
multiple choice paper of 2 hours
(SG3DM/01).
6.3.2.2.2 A Clinical examination (SG3DM/80)
during which long and short cases will be
presented.
6.3.2.2.3 An Oral examination (SG3DM/90)
Candidates attend an oral examination at
which no less than two examiners shall be
present.
6.3.2.2.4 Continuous Assessment including marks
obtained in classwork and examinations
held throughout the course.
6.3.2.3.5 The setting of question papers shall be the
Examiners.
6.3.2.3.6 The examination shall be conducted in
conformity with the regulations prescribed
by the University for this purpose.
6.3.2.3.7 Pass Mark
The pass markshall be 50%. Candidates
must satisfy the Examiners in both theory

and clinical, but candidates whose total
mark is 150 or more out of 300, are not
permitted to pass unless they achieve at
least 50% in the clinical part of the
examination in each subject.
6.3.2.3.8 Supplementary Examination
Any candidate who fails the examination
with a mark of between 40% and 49% may
be permitted to write supplementary
examinations in those subjects they have
failed, provided that where a candidate
fails more than half the subjects being
offered, the General Academic Regulations
shall apply. A candidate shall not be
admitted into Part IV of the Bachelor of
Dental Surgery until the Supplementary
Examinations.
6.3.3.2.9 Marking
The marking scheme for, General Surgery
shall be as follows:Theorypape
100
Clinical Examination
150
Oral Examination
50
100
TOTAL
400
200 marks
6.3.3 General Medicine (MD3DM)
6.3.3.1 External Examiners
There shall be one examiner.
6.3.3.2.1 Written examinations comprising of
multiple choice paper of 1 hours
(MD3DM/01)
6.3.3.2.2 Clinical Examinations during which OSCE
or the traditional long and short case
(MD3DM/80)
6.3.3.2.3 Oral Examination (MD3DM/90)
Candidates attend an oral examination at
which no less than two examiners shall be
present.
6.3.3.2.4 Continuous Assessment including marks
obtained in classwork and examinations
held throughout the course.
6.3.3.2.5 The setting of question papers shall be the
Examiners.
6.3.3.2.6 The examination shall be conducted in

c o n fo r m i t y w i t h t h e Re g u l a t i o n s
prescribed by the University for this
purpose.
6.3.3.3.7 Pass Mark
The pass markshall be 50%. Candidates
must satisfy the Examiners in both theory
and clinical, but candidates whose total
mark is 150 or more out of 300, are not
permitted to pass unless they achieve at
least 50% in the clinical part of the
examination in each subject.
6.3.3.3.8 Supplementary Examination
Any candidate who fails the examination
with a mark of between 40% and 49% may
be permitted to write supplementary
examinations in those subjects they have
failed, provided that where a candidate
fails more than half the subjects being
offered, the General Academic Regulations
shall apply. A candidate shall not be
admitted into Part IV of the Bachelor of
Dental Surgery until the Supplementary
Examinations.
6.3.3.3.9 Marking
The marking scheme for, General Medicine
shall be as follows:Theory Paper
200
150
Oral Examination
50
TOTAL
500
250 marks
6.4
BDS Part IV
Clinical Pharmacology (CP4DM)
6.4.1 Examiners
There shall be one External Examiner for Clinical
Pharmacology.
6.4.2 Examinations
6.4.2.1 Clinical Pharmacology (CP4DM)
The examination, which shall be held in the University
shall comprise:
6.4.2.1.1 A written examination (three hours)
(CP4DM/01) which shall contain seven
questions, the candidate to answer five.
6.4.2.1.2 An Oral examination (CP4DM/90)
Candidates selected by the Examiners may
be required to attend an oral examination.
6.4.2.1.3 Marks obtained from Continuous

Assessment and examinations held
throughout the course, shall be available to
the Examiners and shall be taken into
consideration in the final pass mark
(CP4DM/50).
6.4.2.1.4 Marking
Written Examination
200
Oral Examination
50
50
TOTAL
300
150 marks
The examination shall be conducted in
c o n fo r m i t y w i t h t h e Re g u l a t i o n s
prescribed by the University for this
purpose.
6.4.2.1.5 Any candidate who fails the examination
may be permitted to write supplementary
examinations. A candidate shall not be
admitted to Part V until Part IV has been
completed.
6.4.3 Supplementary Examinations
(i)
There shall be a three-hour written examination.
(ii)
There shall be an oral examination at which no less
than two examiners shall be present.
6.4.4
Marking
Written Examination 200
Oral Examination
100
TOTAL
300
6.4.5 Results
Results shall be determined in accordance with the provisions
of the General Academic Regulations.
6.5 BDS Part V
Restorative Dentistry, Community and Preventive Dentistry, Oral
Surgery, Oral Medicine and Oral Pathology.
6.5.1 Examiners
There shall be three External Examiners, one in each of
Restorative Dentistry, Community and Preventive Dentistry
and Oral Surgery/Oral Medicine/Oral Pathology.
6.5.2 Examinations
6.5.2.1 There shall be written examinations in Restorative
Dentistry, Community and Preventive Dentistry and
Oral Surgery, Oral Medicine and Oral Pathology.
125
6.5.2.2 Clinical and oral examinations shall be conducted in

each of the subjects Restorative Dentistry,
Community and
Preventive Dentistry and Oral
Surgery, Oral Medicine and Oral Pathology.
6.5.3Restorative Dentistry (RD5DM)
6.5.3.1 There shall be two written papers of three hours each
one in Operative Dentistry and Cariology and the
second paper in Prosthodontics.
6.5.3.2 A multiple choice question paper of one and half
hours (RD5DM/01).
6.5.3.3 A clinical examination (RD5DM/80)
6.5.3.4 An oral examination.
6.5.3.5 Marking
Written Paper (Essays)
400
Multiple Choice Paper
100
150
Oral Examination
100
150
TOTAL
900
450 marks
126
6.5.4
Community and Preventive

Dentistry
(C5DM)
6.5.4.1 There shall be a three hour written examination
paper (C5DM/01) comprising Paedodontics,
Orthodontics, Community and Preventive Dentistry
and a Community Project.
6.5.4.2 Marking
Written Examination
200
Community Project
100
100
TOTAL
400
200 marks
6.5.5Oral Surgery, Oral Pathology and Oral Medicine (OSMP5DM)
6.5.5.1
Written examination : There shall be two papers of two
hours each.
Paper I:A two hour essay paper (OSMP5DM/01)
Paper II: A two hour Multiple Choice Question paper.
6.5.5.2 A clinical examination (OSMP5DM/80) during which long
and short cases shall be presented or OSCE.
6.5.5.3 Oral Examination (OSMP5DM/90)
Candidates to attend an oral examination for which no less
than 2 examiners shall be present.
6.5.5.4
Marking
Essays
100
Multiple Choice Paper
100
Clinical and Practical Examination
100
100
TOTAL
500
250 marks
6.5.6
Setting of Papers
The setting of question papers shall be the responsibility of the
Departmental Panel of Examiners.
6.5.7 Pass Mark
The pass mark in each subject shall be 50%. Candidates must satisfy
the examiners in both theory, practical and clinical, but candidates
whose total mark is 50% or more of the total marks in each subject,
are not permitted to pass unless they achieve at least 50% in the
clinical part of the examination in each subject. Candidates are
required to present themselves in all subjects.
6.5.8 Failure
Any candidate who is attempting the examination for the first time
and who fails one of the three subjects with a mark of between 40%
and 49% shall normally be permitted to sit a supplementary
examination in that subject or subjects. A candidate who fails two or
more subjects shall normally be allowed to apply to repeat.
6.5.9 Supplementary Examination
Supplementary examination for all the Bachelor of Dental Surgery
Part V subjects shall be conducted as at the first sitting.
6.5.10 Results
Results shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of the
7.
CLASSIFICATION OF DEGREE
7.1 Aims
7.1.1 To group the ten subjects in the Programme under two main
headings and so give due weight to their clinical importance
in the professional sense.
7.2 Marking System
75% +
=
Distinction
65%-74%
=
Honours
50%-64%
=
Pass
0%-49%
=
Fail
7.3 Conditions of the Award of Honours and Distinctions
A candidate in the Examinations for the Bachelor of Dental Surgery
Degree may be awarded Honours or Distinction in any one subject
according to the regulations outlined in 7.2 above, provided that:7.3.1 he/she is presenting the subject for the first time;
7.4.2.1 either
a total of six subject passes at Honours and/or
Distinction standard out of the ELEVEN separate
subjects examined in the pre-clinical
and clinical sections of the programme provided
that:(i) at least ONE of these SIX passes at Honours
and/or Distinction standard is gained in the
pre-clinical examinations (i.e. Parts I and
II); AND
(ii) at least FIVE of these SIX passes at Honours
and/or Distinction standard are gained in the
clinical examination (i.e. Parts III, IV and
V) one of which must be from among the three
subjects comprising the Part V Examinations.
7.3.2 at the same time he/she obtains passes in all subjects which
may be linked in any part of the examinations in which he/she
is a candidate.
7.3.2.1 Pre-Clinical Courses:
Biochemistry
Anatomy and Oral Anatomy
Physiology and Oral Physiology
Behavioural Sciences and Community Health
7.3.2.2 Clinical Courses:
Periodontics
General Surgery
General Pathology
General Medicine
Community and Preventive Dentistry
Oral Surgery, Oral Medicine and Oral Pathology
Restorative Dentistry
7.4 Award of the Degree 'With Honours'
Successful candidates for the Degree of BDS may be awarded the
degree 'With Honours' providing that they meet the following
requirements:7.4.1 Subject Distribution
7.4.1.1 Pre-Clinical Course
(i)
Biochemistry Professional Part I
(ii)
Anatomy and Oral Anatomy Examination
Part II
(iii) Physiology and Oral Professional Part II
Physiology Examination
(iv) Behavioural Sciences Examination Part II only
7.4.1.2 Clinical Course
General Pathology
General Surgery Professional
General Medicine Examination Part III
Clinical Pharmacology Professional Examination
Part IV
(I) Restorative Dentistry
(ii) Community & Preventive Dentistry
Professional Examinations
(iii) Oral Surgery Part V Oral Pathology
Oral Medicine and Periodontics
7.4.2 Regulation
In order to graduate with Honours, a student must obtain:-
REGULATIONS FOR THE BACHELOR OF MEDICAL

LABORATORY SCIENCES HONOURS DEGREE
(B.MLS HONS)
(These regulations should be read in conjunction with the University's

General Academic Regulations for undergraduate degrees, hereinafter
referred to as GAR.)
1.
PREAMBLE (REF GAR 2)

1.1 This interdisciplinary degree programme broadly covers the medical
laboratory science subjects and is designed to:
a)
give extensive theoretical knowledge of medical laboratory
sciences;
b)
endow sound practical application of these sciences;
c)
enable the student to understand the disease state and to
interpret medical laboratory data;
d)
enable the candidate to carry out independent research.
2.
ENTRY QUALIFICATIONS (REF GAR 3)

2.1 Normally the prospective student must satisfy the general entry
requirements for undergraduate degrees as prescribed in GAR, and
the following specific requirements:
2.2 To qualify for consideration for admission, a prospective student
must normally have:
2.2.1 Passes at Ordinary Level (or approved equivalent) in English
Language and Mathematics.
2.2.2 Passes at Advanced Level (or approved equivalent) in
Mathematics
127
Biostatistics and Research MethodologyHMLS 209

Laboratory Management Systems
HMLS 210
Purposes
CSHS 102
Physics
passed at O Level.
3.
4.
128
DURATION OF THE DEGREE PROGRAMME

3.1 The Bachelor of Medical Laboratory Sciences Honours degree
programme requires full-time attendance over a minimum period
of four years.
STRUCTURE OF THE DEGREE PROGRAMME (REF GAR 4)
4.1 The Bachelor of Medical Laboratory Sciences honours degree
programme will be divided into 4 parts. Parts I, II, III and IV will take
place in the first, second, third and fourth years respectively. Each
part will commence at the beginning of the normal academic year.
4.2 The Bachelor of Medical Laboratory Sciences Honours degree will
be awarded to a student after having successfully completed the
approved courses and passed the examinations in accordance with
regulations set out below.
4.3 Part I (First Year)
The following courses will be taught:
Course Narration
Course Code
Cell Biology
Genetics and Molecular Biology
Laboratory Principles
Biochemistry
Microbiology
Histology
Blood Transfusion Science and
Immunology
Purposes
4.4 Part II (Second Year)

The following courses will be taught:
Course Narration
Course Code
Biochemical Techniques
Microbiological Techniques
Histological Techniques
Blood Transfusion Science and
Immunological Techniques
Haematological Techniques
HMLS 101
HMLS 102
HMLS 103
HMLS 104
HMLS 105
HMLS 106
4.5 Part III (Third Year)

4.5.1A student shall be seconded to a clinical laboratory. The laboratory
experience will be in all the clinical disciplines.
Course Narration
Laboratory Attachment
4.6 Part IV (Fourth Year)

The following clinical courses will be taught:
Course Narration
Course Code
Biochemistry
HMLS 404
Microbiology
HMLS 405
Histology
HMLS 406
lood Transfusion Science
and Immunology
HMLS 407
Haematology
HMLS 408
Research Project
HMLS 460
An extensive research project that is laboratory oriented shall be
undertaken by each student. The project write up shall be submitted by the
end of April of the fourth year.
4.7 Attachment to Clinical Laboratories
The student shall be seconded sequentially to the clinical
laboratories. A student in the second and fourth year may be
seconded to the laboratories at an appropriate time. The third year
student shall be seconded to the laboratories for the period of a
normal academic year.
HMLS 107
CSHS 101
5.
HMLS 204
HMLS 205
HMLS 206
HMLS 207
HMLS 208
Course Code
HMLS 390
MARKING SCHEME AND DEGREE CLASSIFICATION

5.1 This will be in accordance with the University's General Academic
Regulations.
5.2 The final classification of the degree shall be obtained from all the
courses of the Programme.
5.3 The overall mark for the Bachelor of Medical Laboratory Sciences
Honours degree shall be derived from the marks obtained in all parts
of the programme as follows:
Part I
15%
Part II
25%
Part III 20%
Part IV
6.
40%
ASSESSMENT OF CANDIDATES (REF GAR 6)

Upon satisfactorily completing the third year laboratory attachment
there will be a practical examination (HMLS390) in all the medical
laboratory disciplines. These 2 components are a pre-requisite for
admission into the fourth year courses.
6.1 Continuous assessment will consist of assignments, tests, essays and
laboratory work in the first, second and fourth years. This shall
account for 25% of the overall evaluation. In the third year a student
shall be assessed by his/her tutor and senior medical laboratory
personnel by use of log books designed by the department with the
help of the approved medical laboratories. This shall account for
25% of the overall evaluation.
6.2 The written papers shall test the principles of medical laboratory
sciences (first year), the methods utilized in these medical sciences
(second year) and pathology and interpretation of laboratory
results (fourth year). The practical examinations shall be in all
medical laboratory disciplines and shall test the competence of the
student in applying the laboratory techniques used in a clinical
laboratory.
6.3 Part I shall consist of:
Code
HMLS 101
HMLS 102
HMLS 103
HMLS 104
HMLS 105
HMLS 106
HMLS 107
HMLS 180
HMLS 190
Description
Duration
Theory Paper
2 hours
Theory Paper
2 hours
Theory Paper
2 hours
Theory Paper
2 hours
Theory Paper
2 hours
Theory Paper
2 hours
Theory Paper
2 hours
Practical Examination (All Courses)
5 hours
TOTAL MARKS
CSHS 101 Theory Paper
2 hours
TOTAL
6.3
Marks
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
350
350
1400
70
30
100
Part II shall consist of:
CodeDescription
HMLS 204 Theory Paper
Duration
2 hours
2 hours
2 hours
Marks
100
100
100
HMLS 207
HMLS 208
HMLS 209
HMLS 210
HMLS 280
HMLS 290
Theory Paper
2 hours
Theory Paper
2 hours
Theory Paper
2 hours
Theory Paper
2 hours
Practical Examination (All Courses)
10 hours
TOTAL MARKS
CSHS 102 Theory Paper
TOTAL
6.4 Part III shall consist of:

Code
Description
HMLS 380 Continuous Assessment
HMLS 390 Practical Examination
(All Courses)
TOTAL MARKS
6.6 Part IV shall consist of:
Code
Description
HMLS 480 Continuous Assessment
HMLS460 Project
TOTAL MARKS
3 hours
100
100
100
100
350
350
1400
70
30
100
Duration
Marks
50
10 hours
350
400
Duration
3 hours
3 hours
3 hours
3 hours
3 hours
Marks
100
100
100
100
100
250
250
1000
6.7 The examiners may at their discretion require any candidate to a

attend an oral examination.
7.
PROVISIONS FOR PASSING AND/OR PROCEEDING IN A PROGRAMME

(REF GAR 8)
7.1 For a candidate to pass the programme, he/she must pass each
course and pass the practical examination as well as the fourth year
project.
8.
FAILURE TO SATISFY THE EXAMINERS (REF GAR 10)

8.1 A student who fails supplementary examinations in any courses in
Part I, II, III and IV shall be required to repeat those courses that
he/she has failed with the exception that in Part IV if a student fails a
project, he/she shall be required to resubmit it.
129
Second year, MBChB Part II
in or about the 16th week of the

Part II
Second Year (Anatomy,
Behavioural Sciences and Community
Health and Physiology.)
Third year, MBChB Part III
in March of the third semester,
Third Year (Chemical Pathology,
Haematology,
Histopathology,
Medical Microbiology, Forensic
Pathology, Immunology) Fourth year,
MBChB Part IV in May (Clinical
Pharmacology, Community Medicine
and Psychiatry) Clinical Pathology
Examinations to be incorporated into
the major clinical subjects being
examined. Fifth year, MBChB Part
V in July (Obstetrics & Gynaecology
Medicine, Paediatrics and Surgery)
Clinical Pathology Examinations to be
incorporated into major clinical
subjects being examined.
3.2 University Supplementary Examinations
Normally Supplementary Examinations are taken in accordance
with General Regulations except where specified.
8.2 Supplementary examinations shall be held in accordance with the

GAR.
8.3 Resubmission of a project may be permitted by the Senate. This shall
be within 6 months of the Senate's decision.
REGULATIONS FOR THE BACHELOR OF MEDICINE

AND BACHELOR OF SURGERY (MBCHB)DEGREES
1.
130
2.
INTRODUCTION
These Regulations apply only to students who are in full-time
attendance at the University of Zimbabwe and should be read in
conjunction with the University's General Regulations for
Undergraduate Degrees, hereinafter referred to as the General
Regulations. The MBChB Degrees will be awarded to candidates who
have successfully completed approved courses and examinations in
accordance with the Regulations set out below. The Degrees are
awarded in two categories - the MBChB Degrees with Honours and the
MBChB Degrees.
QUALIFICATIONS FOR REGISTRATION

2.1 Entry to the University:
All prospective entrants must satisfy the entry requirements of the
University.
2.2 Course Requirements:
2.2.1 To qualify for consideration for admission, a prospective
student must normally have:
Passes at Ordinary Level (or approved equivalent) in English
Language and Mathematics;
Passes at Advanced Level (or approved equivalent) in
Mathematics
Physics
passed at 'O' Level.
3. DATES OF EXAMINATIONS
3.1 University Examinations:
The professional Examinations for the Degrees of MBChB will
normally take place at the following times:
First year, MBChB Part I
in or about the 14th week of the
second semester. (Biochemistry)
4.
ADMISSION TO EXAMINATION
To be admitted to the examination for the MBChB Degrees, a candidate
must:
4.1 have registered as a student of the University of Zimbabwe in
accordance with the General Regulations for students;
4.2 have completed approved Courses of study at the University of
Zimbabwe to the satisfaction of the appropriate Chairmen of
Departments.
5.
PROGRAMME
5.1 Field Attachments
The Undergraduate medical students are required to undertake field
attachment activities in the rural areas of four weeks duration in
each of the second, third and final year.
incorporating experiences gained in the field attachments
and knowledge forthcoming from Clinical input shall be taken
as part of Part II of the course, coinciding with the
examinations in Anatomy and Physiology.
5.2 Pre-Clinical Division
5.2.1 The Pre-clinical Courses begin at the same time as all other
University courses in the first year and much earlier in the
Second Year.
5.2.2 Department of Anatomy

Gross Anatomy
Microscopic anatomy
Embryology
5.2.3 Department of Physiology
The course includes the study of
Cell Physiology
The Cardiovascular System
The Respiratory System
The Blood
The Alimentary System
Metabolism
The Kidney
The Hormones
Reproduction
The Nervous System
Genetics
Environmental Physiology
5.2.4 Department of Biochemistry
The Course covers all aspects of a basic introduction to
Biochemistry and Molecular Biology.
5.2.5 Department of Linguistics
Communications Skills for Academic Purposes (CSHS101)
The course covers the Process of human communication,
Models of learning, Reading, Academic writing, and Research
skills.
Communication Skills for Professional Purposes (CSHS102)
The course covers Models of communication, Consultation
techniques and establishing collaborative relationships, the
Health professional as educator and counselor, conflict
management, oral and written messages, Non-verbal
communication, Research and Report Writing.
5.2 Clinical Division
5.3.1 The clinical training commences in the first year of the
programme, continues throughout the second year with
introductory courses in Clinical Medicine, Community
Medicine, Clinical Pharmacology, Chemical Pathology,
Haematology, Histopathology, Medical Microbiology,
Psychiatry and Behavioural Sciences being co-ordinated with
the pre-clinical disciplines.
incorporating subject matter provided as part of the Clinical
Input as well as that exercise gained in rural attachments shall
be given at the end of Part II (See 5.1).
5.3.3 The formal Pathology Course (Chemical Pathology,
Haematology, Histopathology, Medical Microbiology and
Immunology) begins in the third term of the second year.
Clinical Pathology shall continue to be taught in the fourth
and fifth years and examined together with the major clinical
subjects.
5.3.4 The formal Clinical Course begins in the 3rd year. The
emphasis throughout is on the importance of the patient and
not merely his presenting disease, and the major portion of
this training is on the wards, supplemented by formal
lectures, tutorials, discussions and topic teaching. A multidisciplinary approach is encouraged by the close integration
of the systematic pathology lectures with those of the clinical
subjects. This attitude is further enhanced by topic teaching,
where discussion may include any department within the
Faculty.
5.3.5 During the 3rd and 4th years, ward clerking and teaching is
based on the tutorial system, emphasising the elicitation of
signs and symptoms and differential diagnosis. In the final
year, the students act as assistant House Staff and present the
cases they have admitted both on the ward rounds and in
demonstrations to the whole class. In addition, there is a 5week elective period in the final year, when students
undertake a study of their own choice.
6.
6.1 General Regulations:
6.1.1 Examinations for degrees of MBChB will be run in accordance
with the provisions in the General Regulations.
6.1.2 Faculty Board of Examiners
The Chairman of the Board of Examiners shall comprise the
Dean and Deputy Dean of the Faculty, the Chairman of each
Department and the External Examiner for the Department,
plus normally, one other member of the Department
nominated by the Departmental panel from each Department
involved in the subjects for examination.
6.2 First and Second Years MBChB Part I
Part I:
Biochemistry
BC1M
Communication Skills for Academic Purposes
CSHS101
Part II:
Anatomy
AT2M
Physiology
PY2M
BS2M
CSHS102
6.2.1 Examiners
There shall be at least one External Examiner for each of the three
subjects. Departmental Panels of Examiners shall be constituted in
conformity with the General Regulations of the University.
131
132
6.2.2 Examinations
The examination, which shall be held in the University, shall be
divided into two parts, Part I (Biochemistry (BC1M) and
Communication Skills for Academic Purposes (CSHS101). Part II
Anatomy (AT2M), Physiology (PY2M) and Behavioural Sciences
and Community Health (BS2M) and Communication Skills for
Professional Purposes (CSHS102) being examined in the middle of
the second year.
6.2.2.1
Anatomy (AT2M)
6.2.2.1.1 A n a t o m y E x a m i n a t i o n s ( S p e c i a l
requirements)
6.2.2.1.2 Written Examinations
Two two-hour essay papers (AT2M/01 and
AT2M/02) and one two-hour multiple
choice question paper
(AT2M/03)
6.2.2.1.3 Oral Examinations (AT2M/90)
6.2.2.1.4 Practical Examinations (AT2M/50)
6.2.2.1.5 Continuous Assessment
Marking
Paper I and Paper II (Essays)
300
Paper III (Multiple Choice Questions 200
Orals and Practicals
100
300
TOTAL
900
450 marks
6.2.2.2
Biochemistry
6.2.2.2.1 Biochemistry Examinations (Special
Requirements) The examinations shall
comprise:
6.2.2.2.2 Written Examinations One three hour
paper consisting of essays and short
answer questions (BC1M/01).
6.2.2.2.3 Oral Examinations (BC1M/90)
covering: practical laboratory work
throughout the year, class tests in the first
and second terms, and tutorials. BC1M/50
and BC2M/50) BC1M/80 and BC2M/80)
6.2.2.2.5 Marking Paper I
500
Paper II
100
300
TOTAL
900
450 marks
6.2.2.3
Physiology (PY2M)
6.2.2.3.1 Physiology Examinations The
examinations shall comprise:
6.2.2.3.2 True or False (or Multiple Choice)
Examinations Two, two and half hour
papers (PY2M/01and PY2M/02) PY2M/01
contains questions on Cell Physiology,
Blood and Immune System, Endocrine
Physiology, Reproductive Physiology,
Genetics, Gastrointestinal Physiology
PY2M/02 contains questions on Renal
Physiology, Cardiovascular Physiology,
Respiratory Physiology, Neurophysiology,
Excitable Cells
6.2.2.3.3 Continuous Assessment (including
Practicals) (PY2M/03)
6.2.2.3.4 Marking
Paper I (PY2M/01)
100
Paper II (PY2M/02
100
Paper III (PY2M/03)
100
TOTAL
300
150 marks
6.2.2.4
Physiology (PY2M)
6.2.2.4.1 Physiology Examinations
6.2.2.4.2 True or False (or Multiple Choice)
Examinations Two, two and half hour
papers (PY2M/01and PY2M/02)
PY2M/01 contains questions on Cell
Physiology, Blood and Immune System,
Endocrine Physiology, Reproductive
Physiology, Genetics, Gastrointestinal
Physiology
PY2M/02 contains questions on Renal
Physiology, Cardiovascular Physiology,
Respiratory Physiology, Neurophysiology,
Excitable Cells
6.2.2.4.3 Continuous Assessment (including
Practicals) (PY2M/03)
6.2.2.4.4 Marking
Paper I (PY2M/01)
100
Paper II (PY2M/02
100
Paper III (PY2M/03)
100
TOTAL
300
150 marks
6.2.2.5

Examination (BS2M) taken at Part Two only.
6.2.2.5.1 Written Examinations (BS2M/01)
Paper I
6.2.2.5.1.1 One three-hour essay paper
consisting of Section A and
Section B.
Section A will contain three
compulsory questions (60% of
the marks). One question will
be on Rural Attachment (20%)
and the second will be on
Behavioural Sciences (20%),
and the third will be on
Biostatistics (20%).
Section B will consist of three
questions:
1. Community Health
2. Behavioural Sciences
3. Rural Attachment
Candidates will be required to
answer any two questions
(maximum 40%).
6.2.2.5.1.2 Paper II
One two-hour Multiple Choice Question
paper consisting of 60 questions. The
questions will be selected from the
following topics:
Paper I
400
Paper II
300
TOTAL
1000
500marks
6.2.2.6 Part I: Communication Skills for Academic Purposes

(CSHS101). The examination shall comprise:
One two-hour paper of short essay/answer
questions; and
6.2.2.6.2 Continuous Assessment consisting of
tests, assignments and presentations
6.2.2.6.3 Marking
Written Paper
70%
TOTAL
100%
6.2.2.7 Part II: Communication Skills for Professional

Purposes (CSHS102). The examination shall
comprise:
6.2.2.6.1 Written Examinations
One three-hour paper of short
essay/answer questions; and
6.2.2.6.2 Continuous Assessment consisting of tests,
assignments and presentations.
6.2.2.6.3 Marking
Written Paper
70%
TOTAL
100%
6.2.3
Examination Procedures
6.2.3.1 Setting of Question Papers
The setting of question papers shall be the
Examiners.
6.2.3.2 Conduct:
with the Regulations prescribed by the University.
6.2.3.3 Failure
Candidates must normally satisfy the examiners in
all subjects of the examination, namely;
(I)
Anatomy
(ii) Biochemistry
(iii) Physiology
(iv) Behavioural Sciences and Community Health
Examination
(v) Communication Skills for Academic Purposes
Candidates obtaining between 40% and 49%
shall normally be required to write
supplementary examinations in the subject in
which they have failed. In the case of students
who obtain less than 40%, in any of the
subjects, the General Regulations of the
University shall apply. Candidates who fail the
supplementary examinations shall normally
be required to discontinue from the
programme of studies in the College of Health
Sciences. A candidate may not proceed to the
second year of the programme until he has
passed all four subjects at Parts I and II
6.2.3.4 Supplementary Examinations :
Marking
The marking scheme for Biochemistry (Part I)
133
Anatomy and Physiology (Part II) shall be as follows:

Theory Papers
500
100
TOTAL
600
Pass Mark 50% i.e.
300 marks
The marking scheme for the Behavioural Sciences
and Community Health, and Communication Skills
examination shall be as for the June Examination.
6.2.3.5 Results
provisions of the General Regulations.
134
6.3 Third Year MBChB Part III

(Chemical Pathology, Forensic Pathology, Haematology,
Histopathology, Immunology and Medical Microbiology).
6.3.1 Pathology
(Code PG3M)
6.3.1.1 Examiners:
There shall be five External Examiners, one each for
Chemical Pathology, Haematology, Histopathology,
Forensic Pathology, Immunology and Medical
Microbiology.
6.3.1.2 Examination
The examination, which shall be held in the
University, shall comprise:
6.3.1.2.1 Written Examinations: 3 papers
Paper I
75
Paper II
75
Paper III
75
Practical
75
Classwork (Continuous
Assessment)
100
TOTAL
400
Pass Mark 50% i.e.
200 marks
6.3.1.3 The Pathology Examination is a composite
examination. The overall mark determines whether
a candidate passes or fails.
6.3.1.4 Setting of Papers:
The setting of papers shall be the responsibility of the
Departmental Panel of Examiners.
6.3.1.5 Conduct
with the Regulations prescribed by the University for
this purpose.
6.3.1.6 Failure
Any candidate who fails the examination with an
overall mark of between 40% and 49% may be
permitted to write a Supplementary Examination.
The marking schedule for this examination shall be:Marks
Paper I
50
Paper II
50
Paper III
50
Practical
50
TOTAL
200
Pass Mark 50% i.e. 100 marks
A candidate shall not be admitted to Fourth Year
(MBChB Part IV) until Part III has been completed.
6.3.1.7 Results
6.4 Fourth Year MBChB Part IV
Clinical Pharmacology, Community Medicine, Psychiatry)
6.4.1 Examiners:
There shall be three External Examiners, one each for Clinical
Pharmacology, Community Medicine and Psychiatry.
6.4.2 Examinations
6.4.2.1 Clinical Pharmacology: (CP4M)
The examination, which shall be held in the
University, shall comprise:
6.4.2.1.1 A written examination (three hours):
CP4M/01
6.4.2.1.2 An oral examination: (CP4M/90)
Candidates selected by the Examiners may
be required to attend an oral examination.
6.4.2.1.3 Marks obtained in classwork and
examinations held throughout the course,
shall be available to the Examiners and
shall be taken into consideration in the
final pass mark (CP4M/50). The final pass
mark will be 50%.
6.4.2.2 Community Medicine: (CM4M)
The examination, which shall be held in the University,
shall comprise:
6.4.2.2.1 A written examination (Three hours):
(CM4M/01) which shall consist of one
compulsory question and five other
questions, of which the candidate is to
answer four questions.
6.4.2.2.2 An oral examination: (CM4M/90)

At which not less than two Examiners shall
be present.
examinations held throughout the course,
including marks in Biometrics, shall be
available to the Examiners and shall be
taken into consideration in the final
assessment (CM4M/50).
Marking: A maximum of 20 marks shall be
awarded for each question in the written
paper and 50 marks shall be the maximum
attainable in the oral examination.
Pass mark: 50% i.e. 75 marks.
6.4.2.3 Psychiatry:(PZ4M)
6.4.2.3.1 A written examination (three hours) :
(PZ4M/01) which shall contain 100
multiple choice questions, one essay or
long Clinical Case History. Candidates to
attempt all questions.
6.4.2.3.2 An oral examination : (PZ4M/90)
At which not less than two Examiners shall
be present.
examinations held throughout the Course,
shall be available to the Examiners and shall
be taken into consideration in the final
assessment (PZ4M/50).
Marking: The multiple choice questions
shall be allocated 100 marks. The essay
question or long Clinical Case History shall
be allocated 50 marks. The oral
examination shall be allocated 50 marks
and the continuous assessment shall be
allocated 100 marks.
Pass mark : 50% i.e. 150
6.4.3 Setting of Papers
The setting of question papers shall be the responsibility of
the Departmental Panel of Examiners.
6.4.4 Conduct
The examination shall be conducted in conformity with the
Regulations prescribed by the University for this purpose.
6.4.5 Failure
Any candidate who fails the examination may be permitted to
write Supplementary Examinations. Candidates who fail in
one or more subjects may sit Supplementary Examinations in
those subjects which they have failed. A candidate shall not
be admitted to the 5th year MBChB Part V until the whole of
Part IV has been completed.
6.4.6 Results
of the General Regulations.
6.5 Fifth Year MBChB Part V
(Medicine, Obstetrics & Gynaecology, Paediatrics & Child Health and
Surgery)
6.5.1 Examiners
There shall be four External Examiners, one in each of
Surgery, Obstetrics & Gynaecology, Medicine and Paediatrics
and Child Health.
6.5.2 Examinations
6.5.2.1 There shall be a written examination in Surgery,
including surgical specialities, elementary
anaesthetics and dentistry, and in Obstetrics and
Gynaecology, and there shall be a written
examination in Medicine, including therapeutics and
medical specialities not otherwise designated, and in
Paediatrics and Child Health.
6.5.2.2 Clinical and oral examinations shall be conducted in
each of the subjects Surgery, Obstetrics and
Gynaecology, Medicine and Paediatrics and Child
Health.
6.5.3 Medicine (MD5M)
6.5.3.1 One case history paper with 6 case histories and 20
questions on each. Candidates are expected to
answer all questions. The paper is marked out of 60
with 10 marks given to each case history. (MD5M/01)
6.5.3.2 A multiple choice question paper of one and a half
hours: a maximum of 60 marks shall be allotted for
this paper. (MD5M/02)
6.5.3.3 A clinical examination : a maximum of 150 marks
shall be allotted for this section. (MD5M/80)
6.5.3.4 An oral examination : a maximum of 30 marks shall
be
allotted for this section.
(MD5M//90)
6.5.4 Obstetrics & Gynaecology (OG5M)
6.5.4.1 One case history paper with 6 case histories and 20
questions on each. Candidates are expected to
answer all questions. The paper is marked out of 60
with 10 marks given to each case history. (OG5M/01)
6.5.4.2 A multiple choice question paper of one and a half
hours: a maximum of 60 marks shall be allotted for
this paper. (OG5M/02)
shall be allotted for this section. (OG5M/80)
135
6.5.4.4 An oral examination : a maximum of 30 marks shall

be allotted for this section. (OG5M/90)
6.5.5 Paediatrics and Child Health (PD5M)
6.5.5.1 A written examination comprising two papers
(PD5M/01 and 02); of which (PD5M/02) shall be a
Multiple Choice paper.
6.5.5.2 A clinical examination, during which long and short
cases shall be presented (PD5M/80)
6.5.5.3 The examiners may require any candidate to attend
an oral examination. (PD5M/90)
An assessment of studies undertaken during the
student's attachment to the Department may be
taken into account. (PD5M/50)
6.5.6 Surgery: (SG5M)
6.5.6.1 A multiple choice question paper of two hours : a
maximum of 50 marks shall be allotted (SG5M/01).
The Department and College records
of the work and assessment of each candidate shall
be available to the Examiners at the Examiners'
Meeting in each subject and at the combined
Examiners' Meeting. (SG5M/50)
shall be allotted for this section. (SG5M/80)
6.5.6.3 The examiners may require any candidate to attend
an oral examination. (SG5M/90)
6.5.7 Setting of Papers:
The setting of question papers shall be the responsibility of
the Departmental Panel of Examiners.
6.5.8 Pass Marks:
The pass mark in each Subject shall be 50%. Candidates must
satisfy the Examiners in both theory and clinical, but
candidates whose total mark is 150 or more out of 300 in
each Subject, are not permitted to pass unless they achieve at
least 50% in the clinical part of the examination in each
subject. Candidates are required to present themselves in all
Subjects.
6.5.9 Failure:
Any candidate who is attempting the examination for the first
time and who fails one or more of the four Subjects shall
normally be permitted to sit a Supplementary Examination in
that subject or subjects.
6.5.10 Results:
136
7.
CLASSIFICATION OF DEGREES
7.1 Aims
7.1.1 To group the twelve subjects in the Programme under two
main headings and so give due weight to their clinical
importance in the professional sense;
7.1.2 To maintain the present marking system.

7.2 Marking System:
75% +
=
65%-74%
=
50%- 64% =
0-49%
=
Distinction
Honours
Pass
Fail
7.3 Conditions of the Award of Honours and Distinctions:

A candidate in the Examinations for the Degrees of MBChB may be
awarded Honours or Distinctions in any one subject according to the
regulations outlined in 7.2 above, provided that:
7.3.1 he/she is presenting the subject for the first time;
7.3.2 at the same time he/she obtains passes in all subjects which
may be linked in any part of the examinations in which he/she
is a candidate.
7.3.2.1 Pre-Clinical Course:
Biochemistry
Anatomy
Physiology
Examination
7.3.3 Clinical Course:
Pathology
Community Medicine
Psychiatry
Medicine
Paediatrics and Child Health
Surgery
7.4 Award of the Degrees 'With Honours'
Successful candidates for the Degrees of MBChB may be awarded
degrees 'With Honours' providing that they meet the following
requirements:
7.4.1
Subject Distribution
7.4.1.1
Pre-Clinical Course:
Biochemistry]Professional Examination Part I
Anatomy]
Physiology]
Behavioural Sciences and Community Health]
Professional Examination Part II
7.4.1.2
Clinical Course:
Pathology] Professional Examinations Part III
Clinical Pharmacology]
Community Medicine] Professional Examinations

Part IV Psychiatry]
Medicine]Obstetrics and Gynaecology ] Professional
Examinations Part Vpaediatrics and Child Health]
Surgery
7.4.2
Regulation
In order to graduate 'With Honours' a student must obtain:7.4.2.1
either a total of SIX subject passes at Honours and/or
Distinction standard out of the TWELVE separate
subjects examined in the pre-clinical and clinical
sections of the Programme providing that:
(i)
at least ONE of these SIX passes at Honours and/or
Distinction standard is gained in the pre-clinical
examinations (i.e. Parts I and II ) and;
(ii)
at least FIVE of these SIX passes at Honours and/or
Distinction standard are gained in the clinical
examination (i.e. Parts III, IV, and V) ONE of which
m u s t b e f ro m a m o n g t h e fo u r s u b j e c t s
comprising the Part V Examinations.
REGULATIONS FOR THE BACHELOR OF NURSING

SCIENCE DEGREE (BNS)
1.
PROGRAMME OF STUDY
1.1 The Bachelor of Nursing Science degree shall be awarded to
candidates who have successfully completed the approved
programme of study and examinations in accordance with the
regulations set out below as read together with the General
1.2 The General Academic Regulations for Undergraduate degrees shall
take precedence whenever there arises a conflict between them and
these Regulations.
1.3 The programme for the Bachelor of Nursing Science degree shall
extend over three years of full-time study. For Parts II and III each
academic year normally commences on or about the third week of
July terminating in May and terminating during November of each
year with two vacations during the year. For Part I, the academic
year will normally commence in August at the same period as all
undergraduate first year admissions.
1.4 All candidates shall have an option to specialise in any one of the
following fields:
(i)
Nursing Administration
(ii) Nursing Education
(iii) Community Nursing
1.5 In the Nursing Education field, a candidate may specialise as either:

(i)
a General Nurse Educator
or
(ii) a Midwifery Nurse Educator
The degree programme shall be divided into three parts
namely Part I, Part II and Part III. All specialisation shall begin
in Part II of the degree programme.
2.
3.
MINIMUM ENTRY QUALIFICATIONS (REF GAR)

To be eligible for admission to the programme for the Bachelor of
Nursing Science degree, applicants must have satisfied the following
requirements:
2.1 Registration with the Nurses Council of Zimbabwe as a General
Nurse along with at least 2 years relevant experience and a
minimum of 5 O Level passes at Grade C or better or their
equivalents including English Language and an approved science
subject and,
2.2 Two "A" Level passes or their equivalents, one of which shall be a
science subject (either Biology, Chemistry, Mathematics or
Physics): OR
a good Diploma in Nursing Education or equivalent: OR
satisfactory completion of the special one year Bachelor of Nursing
Science Preparatory Course offered by the University of Zimbabwe
or equivalent.
COURSES
3.1 First Year (Part I) will consist of studies in the following subject
areas:
3.1.1
Applied Biochemistry (half course)
NSC101
3.1.2
Applied Biophysics (half course)
NSC102
3.1.3
Anatomy
NS103
3.1.4
Physiology
NS104
3.1.5
Sociology
NS105
3.1.6
Psychology
NS106
3.1.7
Nursing Theory and Process I
NS107
3.1.8
Practical/Clinical work relating to above subjects will be
undertaken as applicable.
3.1.9
Purposes
CSHS101
3.1.10 Communication Skills for Professional
Purposes
CSHS102
3.2 Second Year (Part II) shall consist of studies in the following subject
areas:
3.2.1
Pharmacology (half course)
NS201
3.2.2
Microbiology and Parasitology
(half course)
NS202
137
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
Community Health Nursing I

NS203
Nursing Education I
NS204
Nursing Administration I
NS205
Research Methods I
NS206
Nursing Theory and Process II
NS207
Optional Majors
(i) NS208 Community Health Nursing II or
(ii) NS209 Nursing Education II or
(iii) NS210 Nursing Administration II.
3.2.9
Practical/clinical work relating to above subjects shall be
3.3 Third Year (Part III) shall consist of studies in the following subject
areas:
3.3.1
Health Planning and Nursing Ethics
NS301
3.3.2
Research Methods II
NS302
3.3.3
Nursing Theory and Process III
NS303
3.3.4
Nursing Theory and Process IV (Elective) NS304
3.3.5
Optional Majors
NS305 Nursing Education III or
NS306 Nursing Administration or
Ns307
Community Health Nursing III
including Major Research Project in
Speciality Area
NS360
3.3.6 Practical/clinical work relating to above subjects shall be
138
4.
4.1 Continuous Assessment:
Marks shall be obtained from theory tests, class assignment of
practical and clinical work, as well as written papers and such
continuous assessment shall constitute 25% of the overall mark.
4.2 Assessment of Candidates:
4.2.1 Candidates must normally pass at Part I before proceeding to
Part II and at Part II before proceeding to Part III.
4.2.2 The Part I Examinations in Applied Biochemistry (NS101) and
Applied Biophysics (NS102) Communication Skills for
Academic Purposes (CSHS 101) shall normally be held during
the third week of July of the first year and these will consist of
one two-hour written paper in each subject consisting of
short essay questions, with the exception of Communication
skills for Academic Purposes (CSHS101) which is a three hour paper.
4.2.3 Examinations in all other subjects of Part I shall be held in
November of the Part I year. They will consist of one threehour paper in each subject except for Communication Skills
for Professional Purposes (CSHS 102) which is a two-hour
paper.
4.2.4 Part II:

Examinations in the following subjects:
Pharmacology
Nursing Education I
4.2.5
4.2.6
NS201
NS202
NS203
NS204
NS205
shall normally be held in the third week of July of the second

year. For Pharmacology (NS201) and Microbiology and
Parasitology (NS202) the examinations shall consist
of a two-hour written paper in each subject consisting of short
essay questions while for Nursing Education I (NS204) and
Nursing Administration I (NS205) there shall be
a three-hour written paper consisting of short essay/answer
questions. For Community Health Nursing I (NS203) there
shall be one three-hour paper.
Examinations in all other subjects of Part II shall be held in
November of the Part II year. They shall consist of the following:
Code
Description
Duration
NS 206 Nursing Research Methods I
3 hours
NS 207 Nursing Theory and Process II AND 2 hours
NS 208 Community Health Nursing II OR
2 hours
NS 209 Nursing Education OR
2 hours
NS 210 Nursing Administration II
2 hours
Part III
4.2.6.1
Code
NS 301
NS 302
NS 303
NS 304
NS 305
NS 306
NS 307
4.2.6.2
Examinations shall be held in November of the Part

III year. These shall consist of the following:
Description
Duration
Health Planning and Nursing Ethics 3 hours
Nursing Research Methods II
3 hours
3 hours
Nursing Theory and Process IV AND 3 hours
Nursing Education III OR
2 hours
Nursing Administration III OR
2 hours
Community Health Nursing III
2 hours
A research project (NS360) of approximately 10000
words in the Specialty Area (3.3.5) shall be required to
be undertaken by each student during the third year
and constitute 50% of the overall markin:
Nursing Education III or
4.2.7
5.
I
Nursing Administration III or

Community Health Nursing III.
4.2.6.3 Each research project must be submitted not later
than the 7th of October of the Part III year.
Oral Examination
In each year there shall be an oral examination in Nursing Theory
and Process I, II, III and IV which shall constitute 25% of the
overall mark in that subject. This shall be designed to test the
practical and clinical knowledge gained during
attachments. The Examiners may, at their discretion, require any
candidate to attend oral examinations in other subjects in Part I,
II and III to assess whether such a candidate passes or not.
DISTRIBUTION OF MARKS
5.1
The marks for the Degree Programme shall be distributed as Part
Examination
Description
Anatomy
Physiology
Sociology
Psychology
Nursing Theory and Process I
TOTAL
Communication Skills of Academic Purposes
TOTAL
5.2 Part II Examination

Description
Microbiology & Parasitology (half course)
Research Methods I
Nursing Theory and Process II
Optional Majors:
(i) Nursing Education II or
(ii) Nursing Administration II or
(iii) Community Health Nursing
TOTAL
Marks
50
50
100
100
100
100
100
600
100
100
200
Marks
50
50
100
100
100
100
100
100
700
5.4 Part III Examination

Description
Marks
Health Planning and Nursing Ethics
100
Research Methods II
100
100
Nursing Theory and Process IV (Elective)
100
Optional Majors:
(i) Nursing Education III or
(ii) Nursing Administration or
(iii) Health Nursing III
100
including Major Research Project in Specialty
Area
100
100
TOTAL
700
5.4 Supplementary Examination (Ref GAR)
A candidate who fails to pass the examinations in July may on the
recommendation of the Examiners and at the discretion of the
Senate be allowed to sit a supplementary examination in
September of that year. Supplementary examinations may be
taken in accordance with the General Academic Regulations.
6.
CLASSIFICATION OF DEGREE
The degree shall be classified on the results for Parts II and III
examinations the weighting being in the ratio of one combined Part II
marks and two for the combined Part III marks.
7.
PUBLICATION OF RESULTS AND AWARDING OF DEGREES

The results shall be published in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE HONOURS DEGREE IN

NURSING SCIENCE (BSC{HONS}NS)
1.
PREAMBLE (REF. GAR)

1.1 The Bachelor of Science Honours Degree in Nursing Science (BSc
{Hons} NS) shall be awarded to candidates who have successfully
completed the approved programme of study and examination set
out below as read together with the General Academic Regulations.
1.2 The General Academic Regulations for undergraduate degrees shall
take precedence whenever there arise a conflict between them and
these regulations.
1.3 The programme for the Bachelor of Science Honours in Nursing
Honours Degree shall extend over four years of full - time study.
139
The degree programme shall be divided into four Parts, namely Parts
I, II, III, and IV. The programme will consist of Part I (Pre-clinical Year),
Part II (First Professional Year), Part III (Second Professional Year)
and Part IV (Third Professional Year).
1.4 Each academic year for Part I shall normally commence in August at
the same period as all undergraduate first year admissions. For Parts
II, III and IV, the academic year shall normally commence in July and
terminating in June of each year with two vacations during the year.
1.5 Part I (Pre-clinical Year) will cover biological, social and natural
sciences.
1.6 Part II (First Professional Year), Part III (Second Professional Year)
and Part IV (Third Professional Year) will cover clinical nursing
subjects and other applied science subjects.
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS (REF. GAR)

2.1 To be eligible for admission to the (BSc{Hons} NS) applicants must
have satisfied the following specific requirements;
2.1.1 Minimum of 5 'O' Level passes with grade C or better or their
equivalent including English and Biology and one of the
following:
Mathematics, Chemistry or Physics
AND
2.1.2 Minimum of 2 'A' Level passes of any two of the following:
Biology, Chemistry, Mathematics or Physics. The subject not
passed at 'A' Level must normally have been passed at 'O'
Level
3.
STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME (REF. GAR)

3.1 Part I shall consist of studies in the following subject areas:
3.1.1 Applied Biochemistry (half course)
NS101
3.1.2 Applied Biophysics (half course)
NS102
3.1.3 Anatom
NS103
3.1.4 Physiology
Ns104
3.1.5 Sociology
SO101
3.1.6 Psychology
PS101
3.1.7 Communication Skills for Academic
Purposes
CSHS101
3.1.8 Communication Skills for Professional
purposes
CSHS102
140
3.2 Part II shall consist of studies in the following subject areas:

3.2.1 Nursing Foundations
NSC201
3.2.2 Introduction to Microbiology and Parasitology
in Nursing
NSC202
3.2.3 Medical-Surgical Nursing I
NSC203
3.2.4 Introduction to Pharmacology in Nursing
NSC204
3.2.5 Health Assessment Theory and Practice I
NSC205
3.2.6 Clinical Practice and Assessments in

Medical-Surgical Nursing I
NSC280
Clinical practice assessments relating to Medical-Surgical
Nursing I shall be under-taken in central hospitals and shall
include:
3.2.6.1 Utilization of the Nursing Process to formulate a
Nursing Care Plan
3.2.6.2 Aseptic Technique
3.2.6.3 Drug Administration
3.3 Part III shall consist of studies in the following subject areas:
3.3.1 Nursing Research I
NSC301
3.3.2 Maternal Child Health and Midwifery
Theory and Practice
NSC302
3.3.3 Medical Surgical Nursing II
NSC303
3.3.4 Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing
Theory and Practice
NSC304
3.3.5 Health Assessment Theory
and Practice II
NSC305
3.3.6 Community Health Nursing
Theory and Practice
NSC306
3.3.7 Pharmacology (half course)
NSC307
3.3.8 Microbiology and Parasitology
(half course)
NSC308
Medical Surgical Nursing II
NSC380
Clinical Practice Assessments relating to Medical-Surgical
Nursing II shall include total patient/client care and teaching
for intermediate care. The Nursing Process, Nursing
Theories, Nursing Models and the Primary Health Care
Philosophy will be utilized.
3.4 Part IV shall consist of studies in the following subject areas:
3.4.1 Nursing Education
NSC401
3.4.2 Nursing Administration/Management
NSC402
3.4.3 Medical-Surgical Nursing III
NSC403
3.4.4 Nursing Research II (Project)
NSC460
The Research Project shall focus on Medical - Surgical
Nursing.
Medical - Surgical Nursing III
NSC480
Clinical Practice assessments in Medical-Surgical Nursing III
shall be undertaken in the relevant settings and shall focus on
total patient/client care on high dependency clients utilizing
the Nursing Process, Nursing Theories and Nursing Models.
3.4.6 Clinical Practice Assessments relating to Nursing
Administration/Management shall be undertaken in Medical
Surgical Nursing Units and shall include Unit Management
and Clinical Teaching.
4.7.3

(Written Paper)
NSC303 2 hrs
4.7.4
Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing
Theory and Practice (Written Paper)
NSC304 2 hrs
4.7.5
Health Assessment Theory and Practice II
(Clinical and Oral)
N S C 3 0 5
40mins
4.7.6
Community Health Nursing Theory and
Practice (Written Paper)
NSC306 2 hrs
4.7.7
(Written Paper)
NSC307 2 hrs
4.7.8
Microbiology and Parasitology (half course)
(Written Paper)
NSC308 2 hrs
4.7.9
Clinical Practice and Assessments in
(Clinical and Oral)
NSC380
4.8 Part IV Examinations
4.8.1
Nursing Education (Written Paper)
NSC401 2hrs
4.8.2
Nursing Administration/Management
(Written Paper)
NSC402 2hrs
4.8.3
Medical -Surgical Nursing III
(Written Paper)
NSC403 2 hrs
4.8.4
Nursing Research II (Project)
NSC460
4.8.5
Medical Surgical Nursing III
(Clinical and Oral)
NSC480
4.9 Oral Examinations
In addition to the clinical and oral examination components
indicated in each Part, the Examiners may, at their discretion,
require any candidate to attend oral examinations in any subjects in
Parts I, II, III, and IV to assess whether such a candidate passes or not,
or attains merit or distinction.
4.10Proceeding in the Programme
Candidates should pass Part I before proceeding to Part II, Part II
before proceeding to Part III and Part III before proceeding to Part IV.
The courses offered on this programme depend on incremental
knowledge. Students are required to pass each subject in a part
before they can proceed to the next part. Parts II to IV are the
professional parts of the programme and each student shall be
required to pass each course therein before proceeding to the next
part.
3.4.7 Clinical Practice Assessments relating to Nursing Education

shall include Classroom Teaching in the relevant settings.
4.
ASSESSMENT OF CANDIDATES (REF. GAR)

4.1 Parts I, II, III and IV shall have final examinations in the form of
written papers and/or practicals/clinicals.
4.2 Continuous Assessments
Candidates must achieve a score of 50% or better for clinical
practice assessments to qualify for admission to the examination
each year in all nursing subjects with a clinical component. Theory
tests, class assignments and clinical assignments shall constitute
25% of the overall mark for each subject.
4.3 The Research Project (3.4.4) shall be submitted not later than the
last day of Part IV course work preceding the revision period for final
examinations.
4.4 Timing of examinations
All examinations for full courses in Parts I, II, III and IV shall normally
be held in June of each year (at the end of each academic year). Half
courses are normally examined at the end of the semester / term
(half year in which they are taken).
4.5 Part I Examinations (all Written Papers)
4.5.1
NS101
2 hrs
4.5.2
NS102
2 hrs
4.5.3
Anatomy
NS103
3 hrs
4.5.4
Physiology
NS104
3 hrs
4.5.5
Sociology
SO101
2 hrs
4.5.6
Psychology
Ps101
3 hrs
4.5.7
Purposes
CSHS101 3 hrs
4.5.8
Purposes
CSHS1022 hrs
4.6.1
Nursing Foundations (Written Paper)
NSC201 2 hrs
4.6.2
Introduction to Microbiology and
Parasitology in Nursing(Written Paper) NSC202 2 hrs
4.6.3
Medical Surgical Nursing I
(Written Paper)
NSC203 2 hrs
4.6.4
Introduction to Pharmacology in Nursing
(Written Paper)
NSC204 2 hrs
4.6.5
Health Assessment Theory and Practice I
(Clinical and Oral)
NSC205 30mins
4.6.6
Medical Surgical Nursing I
(Clinical and Oral)
NSC280
4.7 Part III Examinations
4.7.1
Nursing Research I (Written Paper)
NSC301 2 hrs
4.7.2
Maternal Child Health and Midwifery
Theory and Practice (Written Paper)
NSC302 2 hrs
5.
The marks of the Degree Programme shall be distributed as follows: 5.1 Part I Examinations
Code
Description
Marks
NS101
50
141
NS102
NS103
NS104
SO101
PS101
TOTAL
CSHS101
CSHS102
TOTAL
142

Anatomy
Physiology
Sociology
Psychology
Purposes
Purposes

Code
Description
NSC201
Nursing Foundations
NSC202
Introduction to Microbiology and
Parasitology in Nursing
NSC203
Medical - Surgical Nursing I
NSC204
Introduction to Pharmacology in
Nursing
NSC205
Health Assessment Theory and
Practice I
NSC280
Medical - Surgical Nursing I
TOTAL
5.3 Part III Examinations
Code
Description
Marks
NSC301
Nursing Research I
NSC302
Maternal Child Health and Midwifery
Theory and Practice
NSC303
Medical - Surgical Nursing II
NSC304
Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing
Theory and Practice
NSC305
Health Assessment Theory and
Practice II
NSC306
Community Health Nursing Theory
and Practice
NSC307
NSC308
(half course)
50
100
100
100
100
500
100
100
200
Marks
100
NSC380
TOTAL

Medical -Surgical Nursing II
5.4 Part IV Examinations

Code
Description
NSC401
Nursing Education
NSC402
Nursing Administration/Management
NSC403
Medical-Surgical Nursing III
NSC460 Nursing Research II (Project)
NSC480 Clinical Practice and Assessments in
Medical - Surgical Nursing III
TOTAL
300
1200
Marks
100
300
400
400
400
1600
100
300
5.5 Supplementary Examinations (Ref. GAR)

Normally, Supplementary Examinations shall be held in accordance
with the General Academic Regulations approximately two months
after the results have been released.
100
6.
CLASSIFICATION OF DEGREES (REF. GAR)

The BSc {Hons} NS shall be awarded in the following categories:
First Class
75% - 100%
Upper Second Class
65% - 74%
Lower Second Class
60% - 64%
Third Class
50% - 59%
These classifications will be based on the candidate's overall
performance in the Parts I, II, III, and IV examinations and weighted in
the ratio 1:2:3:4.
7.
PUBLICATION OF RESULTS AND AWARDING OF DEGREES

The results shall be published in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
100
300
1000
100
100
300
100
100
50
50
REGULATIONS FOR THE BACHELOR OF PHARMACY

HONOURS DEGREE (BPHARM HONS)
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1 These regulations should be read in conjunction with the University's
General Academic Regulations for Undergraduate Degrees
hereinafter referred to as the General Regulations.
1.2 The BPharm Hons Degree will be awarded to candidates who have
successfully completed approved Courses and examinations in
accordance with the Regulations below.
1.3 The BPharm Hons Degree shall be awarded in the following divisions:
First, Upper Second, Lower Second and Third.
1.4 In these Regulations, 'University' means the University of Zimbabwe.
2.

To be eligible for admission to the Course for the BPharm Hons Degree,
applicants must satisfy the General Entry requirements of the University
and the following requirements:2.1 Passes at Ordinary Level (or approved equivalent) in English
Language and Mathematics;
2.2 Passes at Advanced Level (or approved equivalent) in Chemistry
and any two of the following three Subjects:Biology (or Zoology)
Mathematics
Physics (The Subject not offered at Advanced Level must, normally,
have been passed at Ordinary Level).
3. PROGRAMME OF STUDY
The Programme for the BPharm Hons Degree shall extend over not less
than four years of full-time study, as follows:3.1 First Year: (Part I)
Approved Courses in Pharmaceutics, Chemistry, Physiology
Communication Skills for Academic Purposes and Pharmacy
Practice.
3.2 Second Year: (Part II)
Approved Courses in Pharmaceutics, Business Administration,
Pharmaceutical Chemistry, Pharmacology, Clinical Pharmacy and
Pharmacy Practice.
3.3 Third Year: (Part III)
Approved Courses in Pharmaceutics, Pharmaceutical Chemistry,
Clinical Pharmacy, Clinical Pharmacology, Pharmacy Practice,
Communication Skills for Professional Purposes and Community
Medicine.
3.4 Fourth Year: (Part IV)
3.4.1 Approved courses in Pharmaceutics,
Pharmaceutical Chemistry, Clinical Pharmacy and Pharmacy
Practice.
3.4.2 Research Project
A research project will be undertaken by each student in an
approved field, occupying not more than ten to twelve hours
per week during the final year.
4.
EXAMINERS
Examiners shall be appointed by the University Senate. The Chief
Examiner shall be the Director of the School of Pharmacy.
5.
To be admitted to examinations for the BPharm Hons Degree, a
candidate must have:5.1 registered as a student of the University in accordance with the
General Regulations;
5.2 fulfilled all obligations with regard to the payment of fees, in
accordance with the General (Fees) Regulations;
5.3 completed the approved Courses of study at the University to the
satisfaction of the Chairmen of the appropriate Departments.
6.1 The examination shall be divided into four Parts, and candidates
must satisfy the Examiners at Part I before proceeding to Part II, at
Part II before proceeding to Part III and at Part III before proceeding
to Part IV.
6.2 The examinations for the BPharm Degree will normally be held at
the end of the first Semester and at the end of the academic year for
all the parts.
6.3 Parts I, II, III and IV form the final examination. The Degree will be
classified on the results of the Part I, II, III and IV examinations,
weighted equally.
6.4 The Examiners may, at their discretion, require any candidate to
6.5 Where a practical examination is included in any Subject:
6.5.1 the mark for the practical examination may include an
assessment of practical Coursework not exceeding 25% of
the final mark for the examination as a whole;
6.5.2 a candidate must satisfy the Examiners in both the theory and
practical examinations
6.6 A Research project will form the practical work for the first and
second semesters of the final year of the programme. An
assessment of the project not exceeding 20% of the final year total
mark will be included as part of the composite mark for the Part IV
examination.
6.
7.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS
7.1 A candidate who fails to satisfy the Examiners may, on the
recommendation of the Examiners and at the discretion of the
University, be allowed to sit a Supplementary Examination.
7.2 A candidate who fails the Supplementary Examination shall
normally be required to withdraw from the Degree Course but, on
the recommendation of the Examiners and at the discretion of the
University, may be allowed to repeat the year of study.
143
7.3 A candidate repeating any Part of the BPharm Hons Degree is not
required to repeat passed subjects.
7.4 If one of the Courses (Forensic Pharmacy, Community Medicine and
Business Administration) is failed at Supplementary level, that
Course may be carried forward to the subsequent year, and be
written at the same time as the regular examinations in these
Courses.
8.
144
PART I EXAMINATION
8.1 Examiners:
There shall be a minimum of four External Examiners, one in each of
Chemistry, Pharmaceutics, Physiology, Communication Skills for
Academic Purposes and Pharmacy Practice.
8.2 Examination:
The examination shall comprise the following five sections:8.2.1 Chemistry: (HCH 101, HCH 102, HCH 103, HCH 104)
Four two-hour written papers and, at the discretion of the
University Examiners, a practical examination (HCH180) as
per current BSc Degree Regulations.
8.2.2 Pharmaceutics: (PCU101 and PCU102)
Two, two and half hour theory papers. The practical mark in
Pharmaceutics will normally consist of marks given for
Coursework (PCU105). However, it is within the discretion of
the University Examiners to require candidates to sit a
practical examination (PCU180) in order to determine the
final practical mark.
8.2.3 Written Examinations (Physiology)
One three-hour mcq/essay paper (PY1P/01)
One three-hour practical paper (PY1P/80)
Continuous assessment (PY1P/50)
(including practicals)
8.2.4 Pharmacy Practice (PP101)
One two and half hour theory paper based on topics in Social
Pharmacy and Biostatistics.
8.2.5 Communication Skills for Academic Purposes (CSHS101)
One two-hour theory paper consisting short essay/answer
questions.Continuous Assessment consists of class tests,
assignments and presentations.
8.3 Pass Mark:
The pass mark shall be 50%.
8.4 Continuous Coursework Assessment
8.4.1 Chemistry:
The overall grade in Part I Chemistry is evaluated according
to:
Final Examination
67%
Practical
15%
Test
Assignment
TOTAL
12%
6%
100%
Tests are normally held at the end of the first semester for
paper HCH102 and HCH104 and at the end of second
semester for papers HCH101 and HCH103. The average mark
from papers HCH101, HCH102, HCH103 and HCH104 is used
to determine the overall pass mark. Normally Part I students
are exempted from the Chemistry practical examination by
passing the practical course on continuous assessment. The
chemistry mark will represent 30% of the total Part I marks.
8.4.2 Pharmaceutics:
Final Examination
Theory Tests
Practical
TOTAL
75%
12.5%
12.5%
100%
The average from two end of semester tests constitutes 12,5%

of the final mark. The average from weekly practicals
constitutes the practical continuous assessment mark, and
the average from 2 practical tests constitutes the remaining
50%. (A third practical test is set for students who do not
achieve 60% or better in the first two practical tests). Students
must achieve a minimum of 60% overall for the practical
continuous assessment. The Pharmaceutics marks will
represent 30% of the total Part I marks.
8.4.3 Physiology:
Paper I
Practical
(including Practicals)
TOTAL
300
100
200
600
The examiners may require any candidate to attend an oral

examination(Pass mark 50%).
The average from weekly practicals and the practical
examination constitutes the practical continuous
coursework assessment. The Physiology marks will represent
30% of the total Part I marks.
8.4.4 Pharmacy Practice

Final Examination
Theory Tests
TOTAL
75%
25%
100%
The marks for Pharmacy Practice will represent 10% of the

Part I marks.
8.4.5 Continuous Coursework Assessment (Marking)
Final Examination
70%
Semester Assessment
30%
TOTAL
100%
9.
PART II EXAMINATION
9.1 Examiners:
There shall be a minimum of four External Examiners, one in each of
Pharmaceutics, Pharmaceutical Chemistry, Clinical Pharmacy,
Pharmacology, Pharmacy Practice and Business Administration and
Communication Skills for Professional Purposes .
9.2 Examination:
The examination shall comprise the following sections:9.2.1 Pharmaceutical Chemistry:
Three two-hour theory papers (PCH201, PCH202 and
PCH203) (Paper PCH202 will be based on Biochemistry)
(Paper PCH203 will be based on Pharmacognosy) and at the
discretion of the Examiners a practical examination
(PCH280). The Pharmaceutical Chemistry marks will
represent 25% of the total Part II examination marks.
9.2.2 Pharmacology
One three hour theory paper in Pharmacology (PMY201) and
at the discretion of the Examiners, a practical examination
(PMY2P80). The practical mark for Pharmacology will
normally consist of marks given for Coursework (PMY2P50).
The Pharmacology marks will represent 20% of the total Part
II marks.
9.2.3 Clinical Pharmacy
One two and half hour paper which will be devoted to topics in
Pathophysiology (CPM201). The Clinical Pharmacy marks
will represent 10% of the total Part II examination marks.
9.2.4 Pharmaceutics
Two, two and half hour theory papers in Pharmaceutics
(PCU201 and PCU202). (Paper PCU202 will be devoted to
topics in Pharmaceutical Microbiology). The practical mark
in Pharmaceutics will normally consist of marks given for
Coursework (PCU250). However it is within the discretion of

the University Examiners to require candidates to sit a
practical examination (PCU280) in order to determine the
final practical mark. The Pharmaceutics mark will represent
25% of the total Part II examination marks.
One two and half hour paper (PP201) which will be devoted to
Pharmacoepidemiology. The marks for the Pharmacy
Practice paper will represent 10% of the Part II examination
marks.
9.2.6 Business Administration
Two one and half hour paper (BS101 and BS105). The marks
for the Business Administration paper will represent 10% of
the Part II marks.
9.3 Pass Mark:
The pass mark shall be 50% in each subject.
9.4.1 Pharmaceutics
(PCU201 and PCU202)
Final Examination
75%
Theory Tests
12.5%
Practicals
12.5%
TOTAL
100%
The average from two end of semester tests constitutes 12,5% of the
final mark. The average from weekly practicals constitutes 50% of
the practical continuous assessment mark and the average from 2
practical tests constitutes the remaining 50%. (A third practical test
is set for students who do not achieve 60% or better in the first two
practical tests). Students must achieve a minimum of 60% overall for
the practical continuous assessment.
9.4.2 Pharmacology
Final Examination
Theory Tests
Practicals
TOTAL
(PMY201)
75%
12.5%
12.5%
100%
9.4.3 Pharmaceutical Chemistry

9.4.3.1 Pharmaceutical Analysis (PCH201)
Final Examination
75%
Theory Tests
15%
Practicals
10%
TOTAL
100%
145
9.4.3.2 Biochemistry (PCH202)

Final Examination
75%
Theory Tests
15%
Practicals
10%
TOTAL
100%
9.4.3.3Pharmacognosy (PCH203)
Final Examination
75%
Theory Tests
15%
Practicals
10%
TOTAL
100%
10.2
Examination:
The examination shall comprise the following sections:10.2.1 Pharmaceutics:
One two and half hour paper in Pharmaceutics
(PCU301). The marks for the Pharmaceutics paper
will represent 15% of the Part III marks.
10.2.2 Pharmaceutical Chemistry:
One two and half hour paper in Pharmaceutical
C h e m i s t r y ( P C H 3 01 ) . T h e m a r k s fo r t h e
Pharmaceutical Chemistry paper will represent
15% of the Part III marks.
10.2.3 Clinical Pharmacology
Two t wo - h o u r t h e o r y pa p e r s i n C l i n i c a l
Pharmacology: (CP301 and CP302). The marks for
Clinical Pharmacology will represent 20% of
the Part III marks.
10.2.4 Clinical Pharmacy
One two and half hour theory paper (CPM301) in
Drug Information. The marks for the Clinical
Pharmacy paper will represent 10% of the
Part III marks.
10.2.5 Community Medicine:
One three hour paper (CM301). The marks for
Community Medicine will represent 10% of the Part III
marks.
10.2.6.1 Forensic Pharmacy:
One two and half hour paper (PP301)
written at the end of the first semester. The
marks for Forensic Pharmacy will represent
15% of the Part III marks.
10.2.6.2 Dispensing:
One three hour practical examination in
Dispensing (PP302). The coursework in
Dispensing Will consist of marks given for
weekly practicals as well as two practical
tests at the end of the first and second
semesters (PP305). The marks for
Dispensing will represent 15% of the Part III
marks.
10.2.7 Communication Skills for Professional Purposes
(CSHS102) One three-hour theory paper consisting
of short essay/answer questions; and continuous
Assessment consisting of class theory tests,
assignments, and presentations.
10.3
Pass mark:
The pass mark shall be 50% in each subject.
The final marks in Pharmaceutical Chemistry will be

allocated as follows:
PCH 201
30%
PCH 202
30%
PCH 203
3%
TOTAL
100%
9.4.4 Business Administration (BS101 and BS105)
Final Examination
75%
Semester Tests
25%
TOTAL
100%
146
Tests are normally held at the end of the first semester for
paper BS101 and the end of the second semester for paper
Bs105.
9.4.5 Pharmacy Practice (PP201)
Final Examination
75%
Semester Tests
25%
TOTAL
100%
9.4.6 Clinical Pharmacy (CPM201)
Final Examination
75%
Semester Tests
25%
TOTAL
100%
9.4.7 Continuous Coursework Assessment (Marking)
10.
PART III EXAMINATION

10.1 Examiners:
There shall be a minimum of three External Examiners one in
each of Pharmaceutics, Pharmaceutical Chemistry, Clinical
Pharmacology, Pharmacy Practice, Community Medicine and
Clinical Pharmacy.
10.4 Continuous Coursework Assessment:

10.4.1 Clinical Pharmacology: (CP301 and CP302)Continuous
Assessment to be 25% of the final mark.
This is to be made up as follows:
Case histories
10%
Tests
10%
Oral Examination
5%
10.4.2
Clinical Pharmacy (CPM301)

Final
75%
Semester Tests
25%
TOTAL
100%
10.4.3
Pharmaceutical Chemistry (PCH301)

Practicals
10%
Final Examination
75%
Semester Tests
15%
TOTAL
100%
10.4.4
Pharmaceutics: (PCU301)
Semester Tests
Practicals
Final Examination
TOTAL
12.5%
12.5%
75%
100%
10.4.5
Community Medicine (CM301)

25% of the marks in the professional examination will be
allocated to continuous assessment asfar as Community
Medicine is concerned. Thebreakdown of the 25% is as
follows:
Case examination
15%
Essay
10%
10.4.6
Pharmacy Practice
10.4.6.1
Forensic Pharmacy (PP301):
Tests
25%
Final examination
75%
Total
100%
10.4.6.2
Dispensing (PP302)
Practicals
Dispensing Tests
Final Examination
Total
12.5%
12.5%
75%
100%
Students must achieve a minimum of 60% overall in this subject.

10.4.7

(CSHS102)
Final Examination
70%
Semester Assessment
30%
Total
100%
11. PART IV EXAMINATION

11.1 Examiners:
There shall be a minimum of three External Examiners one in each
of Pharmaceutics, Clinical Pharmacy, Pharmaceutical Chemistry
and Pharmacy Practice.
11.2 Examination:
The examination shall comprise the following sections:11.2.1 Clinical Pharmacy:
Two two and half hour papers (CPM401 and CPM402)
( Pa p e r C P M 4 01 w i l l b e b a s e d o n C l i n i c a l
Pharmacokinetics and Toxicology) (Paper CPM402 will
be based on Therapeutics). This subject will represent
25% of the Part IV marks.
11.2.2 Pharmaceutics:
One two and half hour paper (PCU401). The marks
for the Pharmaceutics paper will represent 20% of the
Part IV marks.
11.2.3 Pharmacy Practice:
One two and half hour paper (PP401). The marks for the
Pharmacy Practice paper will represent 10% of the Part IV
marks.
11.2.4 Pharmaceutical Chemistry
One two and half hour paper (PCH401). The marks for the
Pharmaceutical Chemistry paper will represent 20% of
the Part IV marks.
11.2.5 Research Project (RP470)
A literature survey and experimental work on
a topic approved by the Chairman of the Department of
Pharmacy in consultation with the Chairman of the other
Department concerned. The research project will
represent 25% of the Part IV marks. If a candidate
chooses NOT to do a research project, then he/she is only
eligible for consideration for an award in the Pass (Third)
Division.
11.3 Pass Mark:
The pass mark shall be 50% in each section.
147
Clinical Pharmacy
Semester Tests
Clinical Attachments
Final Examination
Total
11.4.2
Pharmacy Practice:
Practice Attachments
Semester Tests
Final examination
Total
12.5%
12.5%
75%
100%
Pharmaceutics:
Drug Development
Workshop
Practical
Tests
Final examination
Total
10%
5%
10%
75%
100%
11.4.3
148
2.1
11.4.1
11.4.4
12.5%
12.5%
75%
100%
2.2
Pharmaceutical Chemistry:
Practical
10%
Semester Tests
15%
REGULATIONS FOR THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

HONOURS DEGREE IN RADIOGRAPHY
(DIAGNOSTIC)
These regulations should be read in conjunction with the University's General
Academic Regulation for undergraduate degrees, herein after referred to as
(GAR).
1.
2.
PREAMBLE (REF. GAR 2)

1.1 This degree programme is the basic qualification for the practice
of Diagnostic radiography.
1.2 This degree will be offered in the department of Radiology,
Normally the prospective student must satisfy the general entry
requirements for undergraduate degrees as prescribed in GAR, and the
following specific requirements.
To qualify for consideration for admission, a prospective student

must normally have:2.1.1
At least three passes in any three of the following,
Mathematics, Chemistry, Physics, Biology or Zoology, at
Advanced Level of the G.C.E. of an approved board or
equivalent.
Normally candidates may be required to attend an interview as
part of the selection process.
3.
The senate may exempt a student from part one of the programme.
4.
DURATION OF THE DEGREE PROGRAMME (REF GAR 4)

The BSc Radiography requires full time attendance over a period of 4
years.
5.

5.1 The Bachelor of Science in Radiography degree programme will be
divided into four parts. Part I, II, III and IV which will take place in the
first, second, third and fourth academic years respectively.
5.2 Part 1 shall consist of introduction to principles and practice of
diagnostic Radiography.
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
Course Code
Anatomy and Physiology and
Pathology
RD101
General Physics.
RD102
Radiation and Imaging Sciences.
RD103
Patient Management, Psychology
and Ethics.
Rd104
Radiographic Practice IA
RD105
Radiographic Practice 1B
RD106
Clinical Practice I
RD107
Purposes
CSHS101
Communication Skills for Professional Purposes CSHS102
5.3 Part II consists of the following courses

5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
Course Code
Radiographic Instrumentation and Imaging I RD201
Radiographic Practice IIA
RD202
Radiographic Practice IIB
RD203
Clinical Practice II
RD204
5.4 Part III shall consist of the following courses:

5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
5.5
Radiographic Instrumentation and

Imaging II
Radiographic Practice III
Applied Radiographic Practice
Information Technology and Introduction
to Research
Psychology and Sociology
Ultrasound Imaging I
Nuclear Medicine I
Clinical Practice III
5.8 Clinical Assessment

Students will fill in a record of clinical practice (log book), which will
be signed by supervising radiographers at the end of every week of
clinical attachment. Students will have formative practical
assessments in each clinical placement. Summative assessments
will be performed in prescribed clinical areas.
5.9 Continuous Assessment
A combination of course assignments, end of block tests, case
studies and oral presentations will be used in the continuous
assessment. A minimum of three assessments per part of the course
shall be used.
Course Code
RD301
RD302
RD303
RD304
RD305
RD306
RD307
RD308
Part IV consists of the following courses:
6.
MARKING SCHEME AND DEGREE CLASSIFICATION (GAR 5)

6.1 This will be in accordance with the University's GAR for
undergraduate programs.
6.2 The overall mark of the Bachelor of Science Radiography degree
shall be derived from marks obtained in the parts of programme as
follows:
Part 1
20%
Part 2
20%
Part 3
25%
Part 4
35%
7.
ASSESSMENT OF CANDIDATES (GAR 6)

Examinations shall comprise written papers and multiple choice of
varying length but not more than 3 hours each depending on the course.
Viva voces may be given at the discretion of departmental board panel of
examiners.
Course Code
5.5.1 Current trends in Imaging modalities
RD401
5.5.2 Ultrasound Imaging II (Option 1)
RD402
5.5.3 Nuclear Medicine II (Option II)
RD403
5.5.4 Management
RD404
5.5.5 Clinical Practice IV
RD405
Candidates have to complete either RD 402 or RD 403.
5.6 Research Project - (RD406) candidates shall be required to perform

and write up a research project of 10 000 to 15000 words in
Diagnostic imaging or related subjects. The topic of the research
shall be approved by the Department of Radiology by the end of Part
III. The final research project should be handed in for marking six
months before sitting for the final examinations.
5.7 Clinical Practice (Ref GAR 4)
5.7.1 The clinical practice component shall consist of a series of
attachments to Imaging Departments of selected and
approved centres. This commences in the first year of
the programme and continues throughout the second and
third years with attachment to general radiography,
accident and emergency, mobile radiography, fluoroscopy,
theatre radiography, mammography, specialised
procedures, darkroom, reception, nursing procedures,
paediatric radiography & radiotherapy.
Students will also have introductory clinical training in
computerised tomography, magnetic resonance imaging,
Digital subtraction angiography, ultrasound and radionuclide
imaging.
In the fourth year students will have in depth clinical training
in either radionuclide imaging or ultrasound imaging.
Student will also have c l i n i c a l t r a i n i n g i n d i g i t a l
subtraction angiography, computerised tomography and
magnetic resonance imaging.
7.1
7.2
Course work shall be examined as specified in paragraph 5.9.

Research work shall be examined by the research project as
specified in paragraph 5.6
7.3 Written Assessment
7.3.1 Two Hour Written Paper
The paper will have three divisions i.e. A to C. Division A will
comprise five, five mark compulsory questions. Division B
will comprise four, ten mark questions of which students
should answer three questions. Division C will comprise four,
fifteen mark questions of which students should answer
three questions.
7.3.2 Three Hour Written Paper
The paper will have four divisions i.e. A - D. Division A will
comprise five, five mark compulsory questions. Division B
will comprise four, ten mark questions of which students
should answer three questions. Division C will comprise four,
149
fifteen mark questions of which students should answer

three questions. Division D will comprise three twenty five
mark questions of which two must be answered.
150
7.4 PART I
7.4.1 Paper 1 (RD101)
There shall be a one, one hour multiple choice paper to cover
5.2.1., that is, Anatomy Physiology and Pathology. This will be
followed by a 2 hour short answer paper to cover the same
area. The style of the paper will be as specified in 7.3.1.
7.4.2 Paper II (RD102 & RD103)
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 i.e.,
General Physics, Radiation and Imaging Sciences. The style of
the paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
7.4.3 Paper III (RD104)
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.2.4 i.e., Patient
Management, Psychology and Medical Ethics. The style of
7.4.4 Paper IV (RD105 & 106)
Radiographic Practice 1A and 1B. The style of the paper will
be as described in 7.3.1.
7.4.5 CSHS101
The examination shall comprise:
Written Examinations one three hour paper of short
essay/answer questions and
Continuous Assessment consisting of tests, assignments and
presentations
7.4.6 CSHS102
Written Examinations One two-hour paper of short
essay/answer questions and
presentations.
7.5 PART II
7.5.1 Paper I (RD201)
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.3.1 i.e., Radiographic
Instrumentation & Imaging. The style of the paper will be as
described in 7.3.1.
7.5.2 Paper II (RD202)
Practice IIA. The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
Practice IIB. The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
7.6 PART III

7.6.1 Paper I (RD301)
Instrumentation & Imaging II. The style of the paper will be as
described in 7.3.1.
7.6.2 Paper II (RD302 & 303)
Radiographic Practice III and Applied Radiographic Practice.
The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.4.4 i.e., Information
Technology & Introduction to Research. The style of the
paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
7.6.4 Paper IV (RD305)
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.4.5 i.e., Psychology &
Sociology. The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
7.6.5 Paper V(RD306)
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.4.6 i.e., Ultrasound
Imaging I. The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
7.6.6 Paper VI (RD307)
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.4.7.i.e., Nuclear
Medicine I. The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
7.7 PART IV
7.7.1 Paper I (RD401)
There shall be a 3 hour paper to cover 5.5.1 i.e., Current Trends
in Imaging Modalities. The style of the paper will be as
described in 7.3.2.
7.7.2 Paper II (RD402)
Imaging II (Option I). The style of the paper will be as
described in 7.3.2.
7.7.3 Paper III(RD403)
There shall be a 3 hour paper to cover 5.5.3 i.e., Nuclear
Medicine (Option II). The style of the paper will be as
described in 7.3.2.
7.7.4 Paper IV (RD404)
There shall be a 3 hour paper to cover 5.5.1 i.e., Management
Studies. The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.2.
7.8 Distribution of Marks
7.8.1 Part I Examinations
Description
Paper I
Paper II
Paper III
Paper IV
Marks
100
100
100
100
200
Clinical Assessment
Total
200
800
CSHS101 Written Paper

Total
70%
30%
100%

Total
7.8.2 Part II Examinations
Description
Paper I
Paper II
Paper III
Clinical Assessment
Total
70%
30%
100%
7.8.3 Part III Examinations

Description
Paper I
Paper II
Paper III
Paper IV
Paper V
Paper VI
Clinical Assessment
Total
7.8.4 Part IV Examinations
Description
Paper I
Paper II (Option I)
Paper III (Option II)
Paper IV
Clinical Assessment
Total
Research Project
Grand Total
7.8.5 The examiners may require any candidate to attend an oral

examination.
8.
8.2
8.3
Marks
100
100
100
150
150
600
Marks
100
100
100
100
100
100
300
300
1200
Marks
100
100
100
100
300
300
900
500
1400
PROVISIONS FOR PASSING AND/OR PROCEEDING IN

PROGRAMME (REF GAR 8 AND GAR 10)
8.1 The general academic regulations will apply for the BSc radiography
(Diagnostic).
8.4
Candidates who fail in the clinical assessments of any part of the

course shall not sit the written examination of that part of the
course.
Supplementary Examinations
General academic regulations will apply for the BSc Radiography
(Diagnostic)
Resubmission of the research project shall be in accordance with
the GAR and may be permitted by the Senate. This shall be within 6
months of the senate's decision.

HONOURS DEGREE IN RADIOGRAPHY
(THERAPEUTIC)
These regulations should be read in conjunction with the University's
General Academic Regulation for undergraduate degrees, herein after
referred to as (GAR)
1.
PREAMBLE (REF. GAR 2)

1.1 This degree programme is the basic qualification for the practice
of therapeutic radiography.
1.2 This degree will be offered in the department of Radiology,
2.
ENTRY QUALIFICATIONS (REF. GAR 3)

Normally the prospective student must satisfy the general entry
requirements for undergraduate degrees as prescribed in GAR, and the
following specific requirements.
2.1 To qualify for consideration for admission, a prospective student
must normally have:At least three passes in any three of the following, Mathematics,
Chemistry, Physics, Biology or Zoology, at Advanced Level of the
G.C.E. of an approved board or equivalent.
2.2 Normally candidates may be required to attend an interview.
151
152
3.
The senate may exempt a student from part (a) one of the programme.
4.
DURATION OF THE DEGREE PROGRAMME (REF GAR4)

The BSc Radiography requires full-time attendance over a minimum of 4
years.
5.

5.1 The Bachelor of Science in Radiography degree programme will be
divided into four parts. Part I, II, III and IV which will take place in the
first, second, third and fourth years respectively.
5.2 Part 1 consists of introduction to principles of Therapeutic
radiography.
Course Code
5.2.1 Anatomy, Physiology and Pathology
RT101
5.2.2 General Physics.
RT102
5.2.3 Radiation and Imaging Sciences
RT103
5.2.4 Patient Management, Psychology and ethics. RT104
5.2.5 Radiotherapy Practice I
RT105
5.2.6 Oncology I
RT 106
5.2.7 Clinical Practice I
RT107
5.2.8 Communication Skills for Academic Purposes CSHS101
5.2.9 Communication Skills for Professional Purposes CSHS102
5.3
Part II consists of the following:
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
Therapeutic Radiography Instrumentation I

Radiotherapy Practice II
Oncology II
Clinical Practice II
5.4 Part III consists of the following.

5.4.1.
5.4.2.
5.4.3.
5.4.4.
Therapeutic Radiography Instrumentation II

Radiotherapy Practice III
Oncology III
Information Technology and Introduction
to Research
5.4.5. Ultrasound Imaging I
5.4.6. Nuclear Medicine I
5.4.7. Counselling
5.4.8. Clinical Practice III
5.5 Part IVshall consist of the following
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
Current trends in Imaging and Treatment

modalities
Ultrasound Imaging II
Nuclear Medicine II
Management
5.5.5
5.6 Research Project (RT 406)-Candidates shall be required to perform

and write up a research project of 10 000 words to 15 000 words in
Therapeutic Radiography and related subjects. The topic of the
research shall be approved by the Department of Radiography by
the end of Part III. The final research project should be handed in for
marking six months before writing for the final examinations.
5.7 Clinical Practice (REF GAR 4)
The clinical practice component shall consist of a series of
attachments to Radiotherapy Departments. The clinical training
commences in the first year and continues throughout the second
and third years with attachment to the following areas.
Pre-radiotherapy assessment clinics, Radiotherapy planning unit,
External beam treatment units - Cobalt 60, Mould room - linear
Accelerator, On treatment clinics + ward rounds, Follow-up clinics,
Chemotherapy, Intra-cavity treatment unity, Computerised
treatment planning and Wards (oncology).
Students will also have an introductory clinical training in
Computerised Tomography, Magnetic resonance imaging ,
Ultrasound & Radionuclide imaging.
In the fourth year students will have in-depth clinical training in
either RNI ultrasound techniques.
Course Code
RT201
RT202
RT203
RT204
5.8. Clinical Assessment

Students will fill in a record of clinical practice(log book) which will
be signed by supervising radiographers at the end of every week of
clinical attachment. Students will have formative practical
assessments in each clinical placement. Summative assessments
will be performed in prescribed clinical areas.
Course Code
RT301
RT302
RT303
RT304
RT305
RT306
RT307
RT308
Course Code
RT401
RT402
RT403
RT404
Clinical Practice IV
RT405
Candidates have to complete either RT 402 or RT 403.
5.9 Continuous Assessment

A combination of course assignments, end of block tests, case
studies and oral presentations will be used in the continuous
assessment. A minimum of three assessments per part of the course
shall be used.
6.

6.1 This will be in accordance with the University's GAR for
undergraduate programs.
6.2 The overall mark of the Bachelor of Science (Hons) Radiography
degree shall be derived from marks obtained in the parts of
programme as follows:
Part 1
20%
Part 2
20%
Part 3
25%
Part 4
35%
7.

Examinations shall comprise written papers and multiple choice of
varying length but not more than 3 hours each depending on the course.
Viva voces may be given at the discretion of the departmental (board)
panel of examiners.
7.1 Course work shall be examined as specified in paragraph 5.9.
7.2 Research work shall be examined by the research project as specified
in paragraph 5.6
7.3 Written Papers
7.3.1 Two Hour Written Paper
The paper will have three divisions i.e. A to C. Division A will
comprise five, five mark compulsory questions. Division B will
comprise four, ten mark questions of which students should
answer three questions. Division C will comprise four, fifteen
mark questions of which students should answer three
questions.
7.3.2 Three Hour Written Paper
The paper will have four divisions i.e. A - D. Division A will
comprise five, five mark compulsory questions. Division B will
comprise four, ten mark questions of which students should
answer three questions. Division C will comprise four, fifteen
mark questions of which students should answer three
questions. Division D will comprise three twenty five mark
questions of which two must be answered.
7.4 PART I
7.4.1 Paper 1 (RT101)
There shall be a one, one hour multiple choice paper to cover
5.2.1., that is, Anatomy Physiology and Pathology. This will be
followed by a 2 hour short answer paper to cover the same
area. The style of the paper will be as specified in 7.3.1.
7.4.2 Paper II (RT102 & RT103)
General Physics, Radiation and Imaging Sciences. The style of
7.4.3 Paper III (RT104)
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.2.4 i.e., Patient
Management, Psychology and Medical Ethics. The style of
7.4.4 Paper IV (RT 105 & 106)
Radiotherapy Practice and oncology. The style of the paper
will be as described in 7.3.1.
7.4.5 CSHS101
Written Examinations one three hour paper of short
essay/answer questions; and
presentations.
7.4.6 CSHS102
Written Examinations One two-hour paper of short
essay/answer questions and Continuous Assessment
consisting of tests, assignments and presentations.
7.5 PART II
7.5.1 Paper I (RT201)
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.3.1 i.e., Therapeutic
Radiography Instrumentation I. The style of the paper will be
as described in 7.3.1.
7.5.2 Paper II (RT202)
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.3.2 i.e., Radiotherapy
Practice II. The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.3.3 i.e., Oncology II.
The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
7.6 PART III
7.6.1 Paper I (RT301)
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.4.1 i.e., Therapeutic
Radiography Instrumentation II. The style of the paper will be
as described in 7.3.1.
7.6.2 Paper II (RT302 & 303)
Radiotherapy Practice III and Oncology III. The style of the
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.4.4 i.e., Information
Technology & Introduction to Research. The style of the
7.6.4 Paper IV (RT305)
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.4.5 i.e., Psychology &
Sociology. The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
7.6.5 Paper V(RT306)
Imaging I. The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
7.6.6 Paper VI (RT307)
There shall be a 2 hour paper to cover 5.4.7.i.e., Nuclear
Medicine I. The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.1.
153
7.7 PART IV
7.7.1 Paper I (RT401)
There shall be a 3 hour paper to cover 5.5.1 i.e., Current
Trends in Imaging and Treatment Modalities. The style of the
7.7.2 Paper II (RT402)
Imaging II (Option I). The style of the paper will be as
described in 7.3.2.
7.7.3 Paper III(RT403)
There shall be a 3 hour paper to cover 5.5.3 i.e., Nuclear
Medicine (Option II). The style of the paper will be as
described in 7.3.2.
7.7.4 Paper IV (RT404)
There shall be a 3 hour paper to cover 5.5.1 i.e., Management
Studies. The style of the paper will be as described in 7.3.2.
154

7.8.1 Part I Examinations
Description
Marks
Paper I
Paper II
Paper III
Paper IV
Clinical Assessment
Total
Total
Total
7.8.2 Part II Examinations
Description
Marks
Paper I
Paper II
Paper III
Clinical Assessment
Total
100
100
100
100
200
200
800
70%
30%
100%
70%
30%
100%
100
100
100
150
150
600
8.

Description
Marks
Paper I
Paper II
Paper III
Paper IV
Paper V
Paper VI
Clinical Assessment
Total
100
100
100
100
100
100
300
300
1200
7.8.4 Part IV Examinations

Description
Marks
Paper I
Paper II (Option I)
Paper III (Option II)
Paper IV
Clinical Assessment
Total
Research Project
Grand Total
100
100
100
100
300
300
900
500
1400
7.8.5 The examiners may require any candidate to attend an

oral examination.
PROVISIONS FOR PASSING AND/OR PROCEEDING IN
PROGRAMME (REF GAR 8 AND GAR 10)
The general academic regulations will apply for the BSc Radiography
(Therapeutic).
8.1 Candidates who fail in the clinical assessments of any part of the
course shall not sit the written examination of that part of the
course.
8.2 Supplementary Examinations
General academic regulations will apply for the BSc Radiography
(Therapeutic).
8.3 Resubmission of the research project shall be in accordance with the
GAR and may be permitted by the Senate. This shall be within 6
months of the senate's decision.
REGULATIONS FOR THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN

HEALTH EDUCATION HEALTH PROMOTION DEGREE
(BSC HEP)
Behavioural Science I & II

Epidemiology/Biostatistics /Research I & II
1.
Part II shall comprise the following subjects:

Intermediate Theory and Practice of HEP III and IV
Public Health III and IV
Behavioural Science III and IV
Epidemiology/Biostatistics /Research III and IV
2.
INTRODUCTION
1.1 The BSc HEP degree will be awarded to candidates who have
successfully completed approved subjects and examinations in
accordance with the regulations set out below.
Academic Regulations for Undergraduate Degrees, hereinafter
referred to as the General Academic Regulations.
ENTRY QUALIFICATIONS
To be admitted to the BSc HEP Programme, an applicant must satisfy the
General Entry Requirements of the University and the following specific
requirements:
2.1 Passes at Ordinary Level (or approved equivalents) in English
Language and Mathematics, and in an approved science subject,
AND
2.2 Passes in three Advanced Level subjects, one of which shall be in
one of the following: Biology, Chemistry, Mathematics, Physics,
OR
2.3 Completion of a University Diploma in Health and Adult
Education, Diploma in Health Promotion or approved equivalents
2.4 Exemption: An applicant who holds the Diploma in Health and Adult
Education of this University, may apply to be exempted from part 1
provided they pass an exemption test.
3.1 DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME
The programme for the BSc. HEP Degree is three years.
3.2 STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME
The programme shall comprise three (3) parts:
Part I shall comprise the following subjects:
Basic Theory and Practice of HEP I & II
Anatomy and Physiology 1
Medical Microbiology 1
Community Medicine/Public Health 1& 11
Part III shall comprise a Field Attachment under approved

supervision, during which a Research Project shall be carried
out and the following subject:
Advanced Theory and Practice of HEP; and
Public Health V
4.
4.1 Assessments of Candidates:
4.1.1 For a candidate to proceed to Part II, s/he must pass Basic
Theory and Practice of HEP I & II, and one other subject.
Normally if a student fails a subject at Part I that is not a
barrier subject the student may be allowed to carry the
subject into Part II.
4.1.2 For a candidate to proceed to Part III, s/he must pass
Intermediate Theory and Practice of HEP III & IV, and one
other subject. Normally if a student fails a subject at
Part II that is not a barrier subject, the student may be
allowed to carry the subject into Part III.
4.1.3 The assessment of subjects studied during Parts I and II
shall be by:
4.1.3.1 Three-hour written examinations
4.1.3.2 Continuous assessment obtained from class
tests, assignments, projects.
4.1.3.3 Continuous assessment shall constitute 30% of
the marks for each subject within Part I and
Part II.
4.1.3.4 The written examinations shall constitute 70%
of the marks for each subject within Part I and
PartII.
155
The assessment of subjects studied during Part

3 shall be by a three-hour written examination
which shall constitute 30%, continuous
assessment comprising of fieldwork and
assignments, which shall constitute 20%,
assessment of the research project comprising
8,000 to 10,000 words which shall constitute
40% and an oral examination which shall
constitute 10%. The research project for Part III
must be submitted for grading two months
before Part III final examinations.
5.
156

5.2.1 Semester 3
Intermediate Theory and Practice
of HEP 1
EHP 201
Behavioural Science 111
EHP 202
Epidemiology, Biostatistics and
Research Methods 111
EHP 203
Community Medicine and Public
Health 111
Examinations: 1 x 3 hour paper for each subject.
5.2.2 Semester 4
Intermediate Theory and Practice of
HEP 11
EHP 204
Behavioural Science IV
EHP 205
Research Methods IV
EHP 206
Public Health IV
Purposes
CSHS 102
The marks for the Degree Programme shall be distributed as follows:
5.1 Part I Examination
5.1.1 Semester 1
Codes
Mark
Basic Theory and Practice of HEP 1
EHP 101
100
Health 1
EHP 102 100
EHP 103 100
Research Methods 1
EHP 104 100
Anatomy and Physiology
100
100
Purposes
Examinations: 1 x 2 hour paper
SHS 101
5.1.2 Semester 2
Theory and Practice of HEP 11
EHP 105
Health 11
EHP 106
EHP 107
Research Methods 11
EHP 108
5.3
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
6.
NOTIFICATION OF RESULTS
Notification of the results and the award of the Degree shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the General Academic Regulations.
7.
DEGREE CLASSIFICATION
7.1 The degree will be classified according to a candidate's overall
performance in Part I, Part II and Part III assessments. The overall
contribution of each Part to the final grade shall be as follows:
Part I:
30%
Part II:
30%
Part III:
40%
100
100
100
Part III Examinations

Advanced Theory and Practice
of HEP
EHP 302
Research Project
EHP 360
Public Health V
Oral Examination
Examinations: 1 x 3 hour paper for EHP 302
100
100
7.2
8.
The BSc HEP Degree shall be awarded in the following

categories:
First Division
(1)
75% and above
Upper Second Division
(2.1) 65-74%
Lower Second Division
(2.2) 60-64%
Third Division
(3)
50-59%
SYLLABUSES
In accordance with the General Regulations, syllabus details shall not
form part of the regulations, but shall be submitted to the College Board
for approval and shall be maintained in the College Office for reference.

OCCUPATIONAL THERAPY HONOURS DEGREE
(BSC HOT)
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1 The BSc Occupational Therapy Honours Degree will be awarded to
candidates who have successfully completed approved courses and
examinations in accordance with the regulations set out below.
Academic Regulations for Undergraduate Degrees hereinafter
referred to as the General Regulations.
2.
ENTRY REGULATIONS(REF GAR 3)

All prospective students must satisfy the general entry requirements of
this University as prescribed in the General Regulations and the following
specific requirements:
2.1 Five passes at O Level (or approved equivalent) including Physics
with Chemistry (or Physics and Chemistry), Biology, Mathematics
and English Language.
2.2 Three A Levels (or approved equivalent) of which one must be
Biology and two must be from the following subjects: (Mathematics,
Physics or Chemistry).
3.
SELECTION OF STUDENTS
Students will be selected on the basis of their academic qualifications and
when required, their performance at interview. Medical proof of an
applicant's ability to cope with demands of the profession may be
required.
4.
PROGRAMME OF STUDY
4.1 The programme for the BSc Occupational Therapy Honours Degree
shall extend over four years of study on a full-time basis. All Parts will
commence in August and terminate in June in accordance with the
other undergraduate programmes of the University.
4.2 The programme will include:
4.2.1 Pre-clinical Studies
These are given by the pre-clinical departments of the
University of Zimbabwe in part I of study.
4.2.2 Clinical Studies
These are given at the College of Health Sciences of the
University of Zimbabwe, Parirenyatwa Hospital, Harare
Central Hospital, St Giles Medical Rehabilitation Centre and
other institutions as approved by the University.
4.2.3 Clinical Practice
4.2.3.1 Parts II, III and IV Clinical Practice
All candidates will be required to practice
Occupational therapy techniques on patients at
Parirenyatwa Hospital, Harare Central Hospital, St
Giles Medical Rehabilitation Centre and other
institutions as approved by the University. All clinical
practice will be supervised by Occupational
Therapists certified by the Medical Rehabilitation
Council of Zimbabwe (MRCZ).
4.2.3.2 Part IV Clinical Practice -Elective
Students will be required to complete a five week
clinical elective at an institution approved by the
Department.
4.2.4 Field Attachments
All candidates will be required to do Field Attachments
during the third and fourth years, as follows:
4.2.4.1 In Part III
The students will familiarise themselves with
Community structures, the living conditions and
routine of daily living, and services available to those
on Commercial Farms, in the Mines and the District
Industrial and Municipal areas.
4.2.4.2 In Part IV
The students will participate in the provision of
community based rehabilitation services, gain
experience in departmental administration and in the
administration of the Provincial Rehabilitation
services. The students will also investigate the most
common causes of morbidity and mortality and
ascertain what agencies are involved in the prevention
of these and in rehabilitation services.
157
4.2.5 Vacation Work

All candidates will be required to do clinical and field
attachment activities for a period during the vacation not
exceeding four weeks in each year.
4.3 Subjects/Courses
First Year (Part I)
Occupational Therapy Techniques I
Psychology I
Physiology
Anatomy
Physical Sciences
Sociology
Communication Skills (I) for Academic Purposes
Communication Skills (II) for Professional Purposes
Second Year (Part II)
Occupational Therapy Techniques II
Psychology II
Clinical Sciences I
Clinical Occupational Therapy I (Physical)
Clinical Occupational Therapy I (Psychosocial)
Research Methodology and Statistics I
Kinesiology/Biomechanics
Psychiatry I
Rehabilitation I
Third Year (Part III)
Occupational Therapy Techniques III
Clinical Sciences II
Clinical Occupational Therapy II (Physical)
Clinical Occupational Therapy II (Psychosocial)
Research Methodology and Statistics II
Psychiatry II
Rehabilitation II
Fourth Year (Part IV)
Occupational Therapy Techniques IV
Clinical Sciences III
Clinical Occupational Therapy III (Physical)
Clinical Occupational Therapy III (Psychosocial)
Research Project
Rehabilitation III
158
5.
EXAMINATIONS
5.1 Dates of Examinations
5.1.1 University Sessional Examinations:
The BSc Occupational Therapy Honours Degree
examinations Part I, Part II, Part III and Part IV will take place in
the last weeks of the University's second semester and during
the middle of the year for some subjects for Parts II, III and IV.

Supplementary examinations may be permitted in
accordance with the provisions of the General Regulations.
5.2 Admission to Examinations
To be admitted to the examinations for the BSc Occupational
Therapy Honours Degree, a candidate must:5.2.1 have registered as a student of the University of Zimbabwe in
accordance with the General Regulations;
5.2.2 have completed approved courses of study at the University
of Zimbabwe to the satisfaction of the Chairman of the
Department concerned.
5.3 Conduct of Examination
Examinations for the degree of BSc Occupational Therapy Honours
taken by students of the University of Zimbabwe shall be conducted
in accordance with the General Regulations.
5.4 Scheme of Examinations
5.4.1 The examinations shall comprise written/practical and oral
components. Written and/or practical papers of varying
length, but not exceeding 3 hours each depending on the
length of the course will be set for each course as detailed
below. Viva voces may be given at the discretion of the
Chairman of the Department.
5.4.2 Candidates will also be assessed throughout the year on
coursework performance in accordance with the provisions
5.4.3 Assessment of Fieldwork
Assessment of performance on the fieldwork of Parts III and
IV will be part of the continuous assessment mark of the
subject Rehabilitation II and Rehabilitation III respectively. A
mark of 50% or better is required for admission to the
examination in the subject Rehabilitation II and III.
5.4.4 Assessment of Clinical work
Assessment of performance on clinical attachment for Parts
II, III and IV will be part of the continuous assessment mark of
the subjects Clinical Occupational Therapy (Physical) I, II and
III and Clinical Occupational Therapy (Psycho-social) I, II and
III. A mark of 50% or better is required for admission to the
examination in the subjects Clinical Occupational Therapy
(Physical) I, II and III and Clinical Occupational Therapy
(Psycho-social) I, II and III.
5.4.5 Candidates must satisfy the Examiners at Part I before
proceeding to Part II and Part II before proceeding to Part III
and at Part III before proceeding to Part IV.
5.4.6 The documentation related to the Research Project is to be
submitted by 30 April of the Part IV year of study.
5.4.7 Examination Papers/Components
Subject/Course
and Code
Part I
Occupational Therapy
Techniques I (ROTT1)
Examination Code
and Component
Psychology II
(RPS2)
Duration Weighting
01 Written Paper
3 hrs
50 Continuous Assessment
01 Written Paper
2hrs
200
100
300
Clinical Sciences (IRCS01) 01 Written Paper

3 hrs
Psychology I (RPS1)
01 Written Paper
3 hrs
Physiology
01 Written Paper
3 hrs
80 Practical
1 hr
90 Viva voce
300
100
400
200
200
300
100
600
200
100
200
100
300
900
Clinical Occupational
Therapy I (Physical) (ROCP1)01 Written Paper
2 hrs
80 Clinical
1 hr
Anatomy
(RPY1)
(RAT1)
Physics for Health

Sciences
(RPH1)
Sociology
(RSO1)
01 Written Paper 1
2 hrs
02 Written Paper 2
1 hr
03 Written Paper 3
1 hr
90 Viva voce
01 Written Paper
2 hrs
01 Written Paper
3 hrs

Purposes
(CSHS101) 01 Written Paper
2 hrs
50 Continuous AssessmentTOTAL
Purposes
(CSHS102) 01 Written Paper
3 hrs
50 Continuous AssessmentTOTAL
Part II
Rehabilitation I (RR201) Written Paper
2 hrs
Occupational (ROTT2) 01 Written Paper
3 hrs
Therapy Techniques II
Therapy I
(Psychosocial)
(ROCS1)
and Statistics I
(RRM1)
200
100
300
200
100
300
200
200
200
600
01 Written Paper
80 Clinical
2 hrs 200
1 hr 200
200
600
01 Written Paper
2 hrs 200
100
300
2 hrs 200
100
300
1.5 hrs 200
100
300
200
100
300
300
100
400
Kinesiology/
Biomechanics
(RKB1)
01 Written Paper
Psychiatry I
(RPZ1)
01 Written Paper
70%
30%
100
Part III
Rehabilitation II
(RR2)
01 Written Paper
70%
30%
100
Techniques III
(ROTT3)
3 hrs 200
100
300
01 Written Paper
3 hrs 200
100
300
200
100
300
200
100
300
159
Clinical Sciences II (RCSO2)

Therapy (Physical)(ROCP2)
Research Methodology/
Statistics II
(RRM2)
Psychiatry II
(RPZ2)
Therapy II
(Psychosocial)
(ROCS2)
160
01 Written Paper
3 hrs
01 Written Paper
80 Clinical
3 hrs
1 hr
01 Written Paper
2 hrs
01 Written Paper
3 hrs
1 hr
01 Written Paper
3 hrs
01 Written Paper
2 hrs
Clinical Sciences III (RCSO3) 01 Written Paper

3 hrs
Techniques IV
(ROTT4)
Therapy III
(Psychosocial)
(ROCP3)
01 Written Paper
80 Clinical
Therapy III
(Psychosocial)
(ROCS2)
200
200
200
600
Project
200
100
300
1.5 hrs 200
100
300
01 Written Paper
80 Clinical
Part IV:
Rehabilitation III (RR3)
200
100
300
3 hrs
1 hr
(RPR470)
01 Written Paper
80 Clinical
3 hrs
1 hr
200
200
200
600
100
6.
200
200
200
600
The BSc Occupational Therapy Honours Degree shall be awarded in
the following categories:
First Division;
75% +
Upper Second Division;
65 - 74%
Lower Second Division;
60 - 64%
Third Division
50 - 59%
These classifications will be based on a candidate's overall performance
in the Part I, Part II, Part III and Part IV examinations weighted in the ratio
of 1: 2: 3: 4: respectively.
7.
200
100
300
PUBLICATION OF RESULTS AND AWARD OF DEGREE

The publication of results and award of the degree shall be in accordance
with the provisions of the General Regulations.
8.
SYLLABUS DETAILS
form part of the regulations but shall be submitted to the Faculty Board
for approval and shall be maintained in the Faculty Office for reference.
200
100
300
200
100
300
200
200
200
600

PHYSIOTHERAPY HONOURS DEGREE
(BSC PHYSIO HONS)
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1 The BSc Physiotherapy Honours Degree will be awarded to
candidates who have successfully completed approved courses and
examinations in accordance with the regulations set out below.
Academic Regulations hereinafter referred to as the General
Regulations.
2.
All prospective students must satisfy the General Entry requirements of
the University as prescribed in the General Regulations and the following
specific requirements:2.1 Five passes at O Level (or approved equivalent) including:
Physics-with-Chemistry (or Physics and Chemistry)
Biology
Mathematics
English Language
2.2 Three passes at A level (or approved equivalent), preferably one of
which should be Biology and any two of the following subjects:Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry and Physical Science.
3. SELECTION OF STUDENTS
Students will be selected on the basis of their academic qualifications and
their performance at interview. Medical proof of an applicant's ability to
cope with the physical demands of the profession may be required.
4.1 The programme for the BSc Physiotherapy Honours Degree shall
extend over four years of study on a full-time basis. All parts will
commence in August and terminate in June.
4.2 The programme will include:4.2.1 Pre-Clinical Studies
These are given by the pre-clinical departments of the
4.2.2 Clinical Studies
These are given at the College of Health Sciences and at
hospitals and other institutions as approved by the University.
4.2.3 Clinical Practice
4.2.3.1
Clinical Practice (II, III and IV)
All candidates will be required to practise
Physiotherapy techniques on patients at Hospitals
and institutions as approved by the University. All
clinical practice will be supervised by physiotherapists
certified by the Medical Rehabilitation Council of
Zimbabwe (MRCZ).
4.2.3.2 Clinical Elective Part IV
Students will be required to complete a five week
clinical elective at an institution approved by the
University.
4.2.4 Field Attachments
All candidates will be required to do Field Attachments
during the third and fourth years, as follows:
4.2.4.1 In Part III
The students will familiarise themselves with
community structures, the living conditions, routine
of daily living and services available to those living in

Communal lands, Commercial farms, in the Mines and
in the District and Municipal areas.
4.2.4.2 In Part IV
The students will participate in the provision of
community based rehabilitation services, gain
experience in departmental administration and in the
administration of the Provincial rehabilitation
services. The students will also investigate the most
common causes of morbidity and mortality and
ascertain what agencies are involved in the prevention
of these and in the provision of rehabilitation services.
4.2.5 Vacation Work
All candidates will be required to do clinical and field
attachment activities for a period during the vacation not
exceeding four weeks in each year.
4.3 Subjects/Courses
First Year (Part I)
Physiotherapy Techniques I
Psychology I
Physiology
Anatomy
Physics for Health Sciences
Sociology
Second Year (Part II)
Rehabilitation I
Physiotherapy Techniques II
Psychology II
Clinical Sciences I
Clinical Physiotherapy I
Research Methodology/Statistics I
Kinesiology/Biomechanics
Third Year (Part III)
Rehabilitation II
Physiotherapy Techniques III
Clinical Physiotherapy II
Research Methodology/Statistics II
Fourth Year (Part IV)
Rehabilitation III
Physiotherapy Techniques IV
Clinical Physiotherapy III
Research Project
161
5.
162
EXAMINATIONS
5.1 Dates of Examinations
5.1.1 University Sessional Examinations:
The BSc Physiotherapy Honours Degree examinations Part I,
Part II, Part III and Part IV will take place in the last weeks of the
University's second semester the First, Second, Third and
Fourth years respectively, and mid year in Clinical Sciences for
Parts II, III and IV.
Supplementary Examinations may be permitted in
5.2
Admission to Examinations
To be admitted to the examinations for the BSc Physiotherapy
Honours Degree, a candidate must:5.2.1 have registered as a student of the University of Zimbabwe in
5.2.2 have completed approved courses of study at the University
of Zimbabwe to the satisfaction of the Chairman of the
Department concerned.
5.3 Conduct of Examination
Examinations for the degree of BSc Physiotherapy Honours taken by
students of the University of Zimbabwe shall be conducted in
5.4 Scheme of Examinations
5.4.1 The examinations shall comprise written/practical and oral
components. Written and/or practical papers of varying
length, but not exceeding 3 hours each depending on the
length of the course will be set for each course as detailed
below. Viva voces may be given at the discretion of the
Chairman of the Department.
5.4.2 Candidates will also be assessed throughout the year on
coursework performance in accordance with the provisions
5.4.3 Assessment of Fieldwork
Assessment of fieldwork on the field attachment will be part
of the continuous assessment mark of the subject
Rehabilitation for Part III and Part IV. Candidates must achieve
a score of 50% or better for the assessment of performance
on Field Attachments to qualify for admission to the
examination in the subject Rehabilitation for Parts III and IV.
5.4.4 Assessment of Clinical work will form part of the Continuous
Assessment mark of the subject Clinical Physiotherapy.
Candidates must achieve a pass of 50% or better in Clinical
Practice examinations in order to pass the final examinations
in the subject Clinical Physiotherapy in each respective year.
5.4.5 Candidates must satisfy the Examiners at Part I before
proceeding to Part II and Part II before proceeding to III and at
Part III before proceeding to Part IV. In the case of Part I
candidates may be allowed to proceed carrying Sociology
(RS0101), Physics (RPHS101) or Psychology (RPS101).

5.4.6 The documentation related to the Research Project is to be
submitted by 30 April of the Part IV year of study.
5.4.7 Examination Papers/Components
Subject/Course
and Code
Part I
Physiotherapy
Techniques
Examination Code
and Component
Psychology I
RPS101 Written Paper

3 hrs
PhysiologyRPY1
01 Written Paper
3 hrs
80 Practical Paper
3 hrs
90 Viva voce
Anatomy RAT1
01 Multiple Choice Paper

3 hrs
Physics for Health

Sciences RPHS1
Sociology RSO1
Duration
RPT101 Written Paper

2 hrs
80 Practical
20mins
01 Written Paper
2 hrs
01 Written Paper
3 hrs
Communication Skills for

Academic Purposes CSHS101 01 Written Paper 2 hrs
50 Continuous AssessmentCommunication Skills for
Professional Purposes CSHS102 01 Written Paper 3 hrs
50 Continuous Assessment -
Weighting
100
100
100
300
300
100
400
300
200
300
100
900
200
100
300
200
100
300
300
100
400
70%
30%
100%
70%
30%
100%
Part II
Rehabilitation I
RR201 Written Paper

2 hrs
Techniques II

3 hrs
80 Practical
45 mins
Psychology II
RPS201 Written Paper

3 hrs
Clinical Sciences I
RCS101 Written Paper

3 hrs
Clinical Physio
therapy
RC101 Written Paper

3 hrs
80 Clinical
45 mins
Statistics I RRM1
01 Written Paper
Kinesiology/
Biomechanics
Part III:
Rehabilitation II
Physiotherapy
Techniques III
200
100
300
100
100
100
300
200
100
300
200
100
300
100
100
100
300
2 hrs
200
100
300
RKB101 Written Paper

3 hrs
200
100
300
RR301Written Paper
2 hrs
200
100
300

3 hrs
80 Practical
30 mins
100
100
100
300
200
100
300

3 hrs
Clinical Physio
Therapy III RC2
01 Written Paper
3 hrs
80 Clinical Exam
45 mins
Statistics II RRM2
01 Written Paper
2 hrs
Part IV
Rehabilitation III
Physiotherapy
Techniques IV
Clinical Physio
Therapy III RC3
Project
6.
RPTR470
100
100
100
300
200
100
300
RR301 Written Paper

2 hrs
200
100
300

2 hrs
200
100
300
200
100
300

3 hrs
01 Written Paper
2 hrs
80 Clinical Examination
45 mins
100
100
100
100
300
The BSc Physiotherapy Honours Degree shall be awarded in the
following categories:
First Division;
75% +
Upper Second Division;
65 - 74%
Lower Second Division;
60 - 64%
Third Division
50 - 59%
These classifications will be based on candidate's overall performance in
the Part I, Part II, Part III and Part IV examinations weighted in the
ratio of 1: 2: 3: 4: respectively.
163
7.

The publication of results and award of the degree shall be in accordance
8.
SYLLABUS DETAILS
form part of the regulations but shall be submitted to the Faculty Board
for approval and shall be maintained in the Faculty Office for reference.
4.2 It shall comprise coursework, practical work, seminars and a

research project, which shall be assessed throughout the year, as
well as written and oral examinations.
5.

(INTERCALATED) HONOURS DEGREE IN HUMAN
ANATOMY (BSC HONS)
1.
164
2.
5.1.2 Options:
(i)
MBChB students:
Advanced Principles of Systematic Anatomy
And Comparative Anatomy
Advanced Systematic Histology
INTRODUCTION
Academic Regulations for Undergraduate degree courses of the
1.2 The BSc Honours degree shall be awarded to a candidate who has
successfully completed the approved courses and examinations in
Advanced Human Anatomy and shall normally be available to
approved students on the MBChB and BSc (Hons) in Occupational
Therapy and Physiotherapy and Nursing Science and Radiography
programmes. The degree shall be intercalated within the MBChB
and Occupational Therapy and Physiotherapy and Nursing Science
and Radiography programmes.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
2.1 To be eligible for admission on the BSc Honours degree course
applicants must have successfully completed at least the Part II of
the MBChB or Part II BSc (Hons) for Occupational Therapy and
Physiotherapy and Nursing Science and Radiography programmes
of study.
2.2 Applicants must normally have obtained a 65% or better aggregate
in Anatomy (or equivalent) in the first year of these programmes.
2.3 The Honours level pass must have been achieved at first sitting.
3.
APPLICATION PROCEDURES
3.1 Application for registration must be made through the Chairperson
of the Department of Anatomy and the Dean, College of Health
Sciences to the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
3.2 Registration shall normally take place in January of each year.
4.
PROGRAMME
4.1 The programme shall extend for one academic year on a full-time
basis at the University of Zimbabwe.
5.1 Candidates must pass the examination as a whole (i.e. pass mark is
450/900). The following papers shall form part of the examination:
5.1.1 Coursework (Continuous Assessment
300
Advanced Developmental Anatomy
50
Advanced Neuroanatomy
50
Research Project
150
Viva voce
150
TOTAL
700
(ii)
150
50
Occupational Therapy and Physiotherapy and Nursing

Science and Radiography students:
Advanced Functional Anatomy and Comparative
Anatomy
150
Advanced Histology
50
(Written papers shall consist of 1 hour Multiple Choice Question and

two hours Essays/Short Questions)
5.2
6.
Supplementary examinations may be permitted in accordance

with the provisions of the General Regulations and shall
normally be held in February.
SYLLABUS OUTLINE FOR THE BSC (INTERCALATED) HONOURS

DEGREE IN ANATOMY
6.1 The honours degree programme prepares the candidate for a better
and critical understanding of Anatomy after Part II of the MBChB
and BSc (Hons) Occupational Therapy and Physiotherapy and
Nursing Science and Radiography programmes, and it lays the
foundations for postgraduate training. To these ends the candidate
is exposed to basic and advanced research methodology-reads and
discusses selected published literature critically- carries out and
reports on a research project.
6.2 Courses for the BSc (Intercalated) Honours in Human Anatomy

The following courses shall be given for this programme:
6.2.1 Advanced Principles of Systematic Anatomy and
Comparative Anatomy
AT3M01
6.2.2 Advanced Developmental
Anatomy
AT3M02
6.2.3 Advanced Neuroanatomy
AT3M03
6.2.4 Advanced Systematic
Histology
AT3M04
AT3M60
6.2.6 Advanced Histology
AT3M05
6.2.7 Advanced Functional Anatomy and Comparative
Anatomy
AT3M06
6.3 Details of the Subject matter for each of the Courses
6.3.1 Advanced Principles of Systematic Anatomy and
Comparative Anatomy of: Nervous, cardiovascular,
gastrointestinal, endocrine, reproductive, respiratory, renal
and skin.
A detailed study of a selected organ system by dissection,
demonstrations (e.g. casts) and seminars.
6.3.2 Advanced Neuroanatomy
A detailed study of selected aspects of the nervous system
including neuroanatomy, neurophysiology, clinical
examination of the nervous system and therapeutics.
6.3.3 Advanced Systematic Histology
A detailed microscopic anatomy of selected organ systems
with emphasis to correlation between structure and function,
and where appropriate correlation with disease.
6.3.4 Advanced Developmental Anatomy (Embryology)
A detailed study of developmental aspects of selected organ
systems; anomalies (including teratogenesis) and their
clinical presentation and significance.
A research project shall run for two terms. This shall be
presented at a seminar and shall be presented as a
typewritten dissertation. The thesis shall be bound and
presented in accordance with the University regulations and
shall be examined at the end of May. Research techniques in
Anatomy shall be applied.
6.3.6 Advanced Functional Anatomy: A detailed study of applied
anatomy of the musculoskeletal system. This involves study
of the bones and muscles (grouped according to their
functions) and an in depth analysis of Joints and their
biomechanics.
6.3.7 Advanced Histology:
A detailed microscopic anatomy of selected tissues with
emphasis on the musculoskeletal system and clinical
application.
7.
Each candidate shall be notified of the results of the examination by the
8.
AWARD OF DEGREE
A Degree under the seal of the University shall be delivered to each
candidate who has successfully completed the approved courses and
examinations in accordance with these regulations. The degree shall be
classified in accordance with the General Regulations.

(INTERCALATED) HONOURS DEGREE IN HUMAN
PHYSIOLOGY
1.
INTRODUCTION
Academic Regulation for Undergraduate Degrees, which shall have
precedence over these College Regulations. The BSc Honours degree will
be awarded to a candidate who has successfully completed the approved
courses in advanced Human Physiology and the examinations set out
below.
The degree will be intercalated within the MBChB programme of studies
at the University of Zimbabwe.
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Candidates will be admitted into the programme after successful
completion of at least the MBChB Part II subjects and courses.
2.2 To be eligible for admission to the intercalated BSc Honours
programme an applicant must normally have obtained a good 2.1
grade or better in Physiology in the first two years of the MBChB
programme, the aggregate being at first sitting.
3.
3.1 Application for registration must be made with the
recommendation of the Chairman of the Department of Physiology
and the Dean, College of Health Sciences to the Deputy Registrar
(Academic).
3.2 Registration and the start of this programme shall normally take
place at the end of January.
165
4.
PROGRAMME
The programme shall extend over not less than one academic year on a
full-time basis at the University of Zimbabwe. It will comprise regular
coursework, seminars, written and oral examinations, and a research
project as detailed below.
5.
5.1 Each candidate shall be assessed throughout the year and examined
at the end of November.
The examination structure is outlined below:
Paper I
PY3M/01 = 300
PY3M/02 = 100
Advanced Cell Physiology

Advanced Gastrointestinal Physiology
Advanced Endocrine Physiology
Advanced Reproductive Physiology
Advanced Blood Physiology and the Immune System
Paper II
PY3M/03 = 100
Advanced Neurophysiology
Advanced Renal Physiology
Advanced Cardiovascular Physiology
Advanced Excitable Cell Physiology
Advanced Respiratory Physiology
Paper III
PY3M/04 = 100
Methodology and Techniques in Physiology
Paper IV
PY3M/05 = 100
Viva Voce
Paper V
PY3M/06 = 200
Project
Total
900
166
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Coursework and seminars will be assessed continuously through

the year.
Each candidate shall be required to complete a dissertation
which shall be examined orally.
A candidate must pass the examination as a whole with a mark
of at least 50%.
with the provisions of the General Regulations and will normally
be held in February.
6.
AWARD OF DEGREE
A Degree under the seal of the University shall be delivered to each
examinations in accordance with these regulations. The degree shall be
classified in accordance with the General Regulations.

DEGREE IN NURSING SCIENCE (MSC NS)
1.

1.1. These regulations should be read in conjunction with the
General Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by
Coursework (GAR) and the respective College regulations.
1.2. The General Academic Regulations take precedence over
these regulations.
2.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
3.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
3.1. To be admitted to the programme an applicant shall normally
have a bachelors degree in Nursing Science or an equivalent
degree OR a relevant first degree in a related field plus a
General Nurse qualification.
3.2. An applicant with other qualifications may be considered for
admission by the Senate on the recommendation of the
Department and Dean of the Faculty of Medicine. Normally
such candidates should also possess relevant experience and
may be required to pass a qualifying examination set by the
Department prior to the Senate deciding on their
acceptability for admission (GAR 3 1(b)).
3.3. Relevant experience in the chosen area of specialization is a
prerequisite for admission.
3.4. A candidate shall be admitted to the programme provided he
or she is registered, or is eligible to register, with the Nurses
Council of Zimbabwe.
4.

4.1. The Master of Science Degree in Nursing Science is offered in
any one of the following areas of clinical practice:
?
Maternal and Child Health / Midwifery,
?
Medical - Surgical Nursing;
?
Community Health Nursing;
?
Mental Health / Psychiatric Nursing.
Not all branches in clinical specialization are necessarily
4.2. The duration of the programme is eighteen months full-time
study or thirty-six months part-time study, commencing in
January of each year. Each academic year is divided into two
equal semesters. The first semester starts in January and ends
in July. The second semester starts immediately after the
end of the first semester and endsin December.
4.3. The programme is divided into two Parts. Part 1 comprises
courses taught over two semesters for full-time students and
four semesters for part-time students. Part 2 consists of a
taught course and the research component completed over a
semester for full-time students and two semesters for parttime students.
4.4. A full-time student normally completes the programme in
three semesters (S1, S2, S3) and a part-time student in six
semesters (S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6).
MNS 509
MNS 510
MNS 511
MNS 512
MNS 513
MNS 514
MNS 515
MNS 516
MNS 517
MNS 518
6.
5. EXAMINATIONS
5.1.
Formal written examination of a course takes place at the end
of the semester in which the course is taught.
5.2.
The duration of the formal written examination of a taught

course shall be as follows;
Code
Description
Duration
MNS 501
Statistics and Informatics and
Epidemiology
3 hrs
MNS 503
Nursing Research 1
3 hrs
MNS 504
Pathophysiology
3 hrs
MNS 505
Advanced Embryology and Neonatology
3 hrs
MNS 506
Advanced Practice Issues inMaternal
and Child Health/Midwifery 1
3 hrs
MNS 507
Advanced Practice Issues inMedical Surgical Nursing 1
3 hrs
MNS 508
Advanced Practice Issues in
Community Health Nursing 1
3 hrs
Nursing research 2
Advanced Nursing Administration
Advanced Nursing Education
Maternal and Child Health /Midwifery 2
Medical - Surgical Nursing 2
Community Health Nursing 2
Health Economics and Budgeting
Applied Neuroscience
Advanced Practice Issues in Mental
Health/ Psychiatric Nursing 1
Advanced Practice Issues in Mental
Health/ Psychiatric Nursing 2
2hrs
2 hrs
2 hrs
2 hrs
2 hrs
2 hrs
3 hrs
3 hrs
3 hrs
2 hrs
6.1. A taught course shall be assessed by continuous assessment and a
formal written examination which may include an oral
examination as stipulated by the Department. Continuous
assessment shall constitute 25% and the formal written
examination 75% of the final course mark.
6.2. The continuous assessment mark may be derived from any of the
following components: tests, case studies, client study
presentations, practicals, term paper, mini project, clinical
rounds/conferences and community rounds/conferences, as
stipulated by the Department.
6.3. The research project shall be assessed by a written dissertation and
an oral examination in defence of the dissertation.
7.
PROCESSING OF THE RESULTS

The examination results shall be processed in accordance with the
General Academic Regulations
8.

8.1. Normally a student should pass all Part 1 courses before
proceeding to Part 2.
8.2. A student shall be allowed to write supplementary
examinations in a failed course in accordance with the
167
9.
Supplementary examinations will be held in accordance with the
provisions of the General Academic Regulations soon after publication
of the results.

10.1. To be awarded the degree, a student must have passed all
the prescribed courses in the field of study.
10.2. The degree shall be classified taking into account the course units
of the prescribed courses that constitute the degree.
10.3. The degree classification shall be in accordance with the following
mark scheme:
80% and above
Distinction
70% - 79%
Merit
50% - 69%
Pass
Below 50%
Fail
11. PROGRAMME COURSES
Full-time and part-time students will take the courses in the semester
indicated.
168
Part 1 Courses
Core courses
Course
Code
MNS501
MNS502
MNS503
MNS509
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Statistics and Informatics
and Epidemiology
Advanced Health Assessment
Nursing Research 1
Nursing Research 2 MNS503
Course Full
Units
Time
Part
Time
20
7.5
12.5
20
S1
S1
S3
S4
S1
S1
S1
S2
Speciality courses
A student must take one course from each of lists A, B, C and D, according to
his/her chosen specialization. The courses must be taken in the semesters
indicated.
List A
Course
codeCourse description
Prerequisite Course Full

Units
Time
Part
Time
MNS504
MNS505
MNS516
Pathophysiology
Advanced Embryology
and Neonatology
Applied Neuroscience
7.5
S1
S1
7.5
7.5
S1
S1
S1
S1
Full
Time
Part
Time
List B
Course
codeCourse description
Prerequisite Course
Units
MNS506 Advanced Practice Issues
in Maternal and Child Health
Nursing / midwifery 1 MNS502 &
MNS505
15
MNS507Advanced Practice Issues
in Medical - Surgical
Nursing 1
MNS502 &
MNS504
15
in Community Health
Nursing 1
MNS502 &
MNS504
15
in Mental Health/
Psychiatric Nursing 1 MNS502 &
MNS516
15
List C
Course
Code
S1
S3
S1
S3
S1
S3
S1
S3
Full
Time
S2
S2
Part
Time
S2
S2
Prerequisite Course Full

Units Time
Advanced Practice Issues
in Maternal and Child
Health / Midwifery 2 MNS502
MNS 505 &
MNS506
15
S2
Part
Time
MNS510
MNS511
Prerequisite Course
Units
Advanced Nursing Administration 25
Advanced Nursing Education
25
List D
Course
Code
Course description
MNS512
Course description
S4
MNS513
Advanced Practice Issues

in Medical Surgical
Nursing 2
MNS502
MNS504 &
MNS507
in Community Health
Nursing 2
MNS502
MNS504 &
MNS508
in Mental Health/
Psychiatric Nursing 2 MNS502
MNS516 &
MNS517
Part 2 courses
MNS516, MNS517
& MNS518
15
S2
S4
15
S2
S4
15
S2
S4
a)
The research project shall be submitted in the form of a

dissertation of 10 000 - 15 000 words on a topic approved by
the Departmental Board of Nursing Science.
b)
The deadlines for submission of the dissertation are as
follows:
Full-time - May 31 of the final year;
Part-time - October 31 of the final year.
12. SYLLABUSES
In accordance with the provisions of the General Regulations, detailed
syllabuses for courses do not form part of these regulations but shall be
submitted to the Faculty Board for approval. Copies of the approved
detailed syllabuses are maintained in the Faculty Office for reference.
A student must take the following core courses;

Course
Code
MNS515
MNS570
Course description
Health Economics
and Budgeting
Dissertation
Prerequisite
MNS501
Course Full
Units
Time
20
40
MNS502
MNS503,
MNS509 and
EITHER
MNS505, MNS506
& MNS512
S3
S3
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTERS DEGREEIN

CLINICAL BIOCHEMISTRY (MDCB)
Part
Time
S5
S5&S6
(To be read in conjunction with the 'General Academic Regulations for

Masters Degrees by Coursework' (GAR))
1.
ENTRY QUALIFICATIONS (REF. GAR 3)

1.1 Applicants should normally have an appropriate honours degree or
equivalent from this university or a recognised university in one of
the following fields:
1.1.1
Biochemistry
1.1.2 Medical or Veterinary Science
1.1.3 Biological Sciences and Chemistry
1.1.4 Physiology
1.1.5 Pharmacy
1.1.6 Medical Laboratory Sciences
1.2 Applicants whose previous subject content is inadequate may be
required to attend courses to bring them to the appropriate
honours level before registering for the Masters programme.
1.3 Applicants must be registered with the relevant Council
2.

The programme is offered on a part-time basis and will run for two years.
OR
MNS504,MNS507
& MNS513
OR
MNS504, MNS508
& MNS514
OR
169
3.
4.
5.
170
6.
7.
PLACE OF STUDY
The course will be taught in the University but students may be seconded
to approved laboratories for practical instruction.
4.2 The formal examination in Part I shall be held after the completion of
all formal lectures in the course.
4.3 Part II research shall normally commence immediately after
satisfactory completion of Part I.
4.4 There shall be continuous assessment in both Part I and Part II. This
shall contribute 33% of the final mark.
MARKING SCHEME AND DEGREE CLASSIFICATION (REF GAR 6)
5.1 The degree may be awarded with distinction or with merit or
without classification. This shall be based on the marks attained
at the final examinations of Part I and Part II of the programme.
The Parts shall carry equal weighting.
5.2 The marking scheme shall be:
80% +
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
RESEARCH PROJECTS
Students will carry out a Research Project supervised by an appropriate
person approved by the College of Health Sciences Higher Degrees
Committee by Coursework (HDC). Where any student is permitted to
undertake his/her research project at another institution, there shall be
at least two supervisors, one of whom shall be from the University of
Zimbabwe.
ASSESSMENT OF CANDIDATES (REF. GAR 7)
7.1
Part I examinations shall be held in November of the first year of
the programme and shall consist of two courses:
i) Laboratory Practice and Management
ii) Basic and Clinical Biochemistry
The examination shall be as follows:
Code
Description
MDCB501MCQ Laboratory Practice and

Management
MDCB502
Laboratory Practice and
Management
(Long and Short Essays)
MDCB550
MDCB590
Oral Examination
Sub Total
MDCB503
MCQ Basic and Clinical
Biochemistry
MDCB504
Basic and Clinical
Biochemistry
(Long and Short Essays)
MDCB551
MDCB591
Oral Examination
Sub Total
TOTAL
7.2
7.3
Duration Weighting
(Hours) (Marks)
1
50
100
1/4
100
50
300
50
100
1/4
81/2
100
50
300
600
7.1.1 Examinations shall cover individual courses.

7.1.2 Continuous Assessment shall consist of class tests, essays,
laboratory reports, presentation of seminars, etc. done over
the year in each course to be allowed to sit for the written
examination in the course.
All candidates must normally have been deemed by the examiners
to have passed all the courses in Part I before proceeding to Part II.
At Part II, a Dissertation of a minimum of 10 000 and a maximum
of 15 000 words describing and discussing the results of a research
project shall be submitted by 30th September in the second year.
7.3.1 The examination at Part II shall be as follows:
Code
Description
(Hours)
MDCB570 Dissertation
MDCB571 Oral Examination
MDCB552 Continuous Assessment
TOTAL
Duration Weighting
(Marks)
300
_
100
200
600
7.3.2 Oral Examination (MDCB571)

The oral examination shall centre on the dissertation.
However, questions may be asked on any relevant topics
covered in the programme.
7.3.3 Continuous Assessment

(MDCB552)
The continuous assessment shall consist of assessment
made during the laboratory secondment.
7.3.4
Candidates will be required to have satisfied the
examiners on continuous assessment in order to defend
their dissertation.
7.3.5
Candidates will be required to pass the dissertation.
8.
DETERMINATION OF THE CANDIDATE'S RESULTS (REF GAR 8)

This will be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations.
9.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION (REF. GAR 11.5)

These will be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations.
10. RE-SUBMISSION OF DISSERTATION (REF GAR 10.6)

This will be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations except
that the re-submission shall be required within six months of the
decision of the Senate to permit representation.
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTERS DEGREE IN

GENERAL MEDICINE (MDGM)
(To be read in conjunction with the 'General Academic Regulations for
Masters Degrees by Coursework' (GAR))
1.
ENTRY REGULATIONS (GAR 3)

1.1 Applicants must be medical practitioners appropriately
registered with the Medical and Dental Practitioners Council of
Zimbabwe.
1.2 An applicant must have obtained an MBChB degrees of this
university or an equivalent degree of another university of an
approved standard, or have obtained a qualification by written and
clinical examination of a standard approved by the University of
Zimbabwe.
1.3 Candidates should be employed by the Ministry of Health as Junior
Resident Officers having already completed the first year rotation.
1.4 Applications must be submitted on the official application forms
provided through the Institute of Continuing Health Education of
the College of Health Sciences.
2.
DURATION OF PROGRAMME (REF GAR 4)

2.1 The duration of the programme, which shall normally commence
in each January, shall be three years part-time, during which time
the candidate shall be employed by the Ministry of Health.
2.2 Candidates may be exempted the first year of the course if they
have previously completed an internship rotation and a period of
training in Anaesthetics and Obstetrics and Gynaecology, and
have had at least two years' experience at the Government Medical
Officer Level or its equivalent. Such candidates will not be required
to be employed by the Ministry of Health on the Government
Medical Officer training scheme.
2.3 Decisions on applications for such exemptions shall be
recommended to Senate by the Higher Degrees Coursework
Committee of the College of Health Sciences.
3.
STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMME (REF GAR 5)

The programme shall be divided into two parts, Part I (first year) and
Part II (second and third year).
3.1 Part I of the programme shall consist of studies in the following
areas:
3.1.1 Medicine
3.1.2 Surgery
3.1.3 Trauma
3.1.4 Ophthalmology
3.1.5 Ear Nose and Throat Surgery
3.1.6 Paediatrics
3.1.7 Obstetrics and Gynaecology
3.1.8 Anaesthetics
3.1.9 Psychiatry
3.1.10 Community Medicine
3.1.11 Clinical and Forensic Pathology
3.2 During Part I of the programme, the candidate will be employed as a
Junior Resident Officer during the second year of the rotation which
will normally be in:
Paediatrics and Child Health (six months)
Obstetrics and Gynaecology (six months)
A shorter period in either or both of the above areas may be
undertaken providing the time made available is spent in either
Anaesthetics or Surgery or both.
3.3 During Part II of the Programme, the candidate will be posted to a
non-central (General Provincial) Hospital approved by the Higher
Degrees Coursework Committee of the College of Health Sciences
for the purposes of the degree. During this period, the candidate will
continue to receive instruction in a clinical context in the following
areas of study:
171
5.2 Research work shall be examined by dissertation (see Paragraph 3.6)

which shall be presented by January 31 of the year following the end
of the programme.
5.3 There shall be a formal examination in the November of the third
year of the programme consisting of:5.3.1 Written Papers
Paper I (CBSC501), of three hours duration shall be multiple
choice question paper of 100 questions, each question
equally weighted.
Paper II (MDGM502), of three hours duration, shall be of
essay or brief notes questions, the first of which shall be
compulsory and four out of five other questions shall be
answered. The compulsory question shall be allotted 40%
and the four other questions 15% each of the total marks for
Paper II.
Each paper shall be allotted 50% of the total marks available
for written papers.
5.3.2 Clinical Examination (MDGM580)
There shall be a clinical examination of approximately one
hour during which four short cases of general nature shall be
examined, presented and discussed.
(MDGM590)
There shall be an oral examination of approximately 30
minutes duration during which administrative,
organisational and community health aspects of the
programme shall be emphasised.
Part I Examination
Course assignments
out of
100
Written Papers (MDGM501/MDGM502) out of
100
Clinical Examination (MDGM580)
out of
75
Oral Examination (MDGM590)
out of
25
Dissertation (MDGM570)
out of
100
TOTAL
300
3.3.1 General Medicine

3.3.2 Paediatrics and Child Health
3.3.3 Surgery
3.3.5 Anaesthetics
3.3.6 Clinical and Forensic Pathology
3.3.7 Psychiatry
3.3.9 Community Health
3.4 Also during Part II of the programme, the candidate will return to the
College of Health Sciences for six one week periods (three periods
per year) during which there will be an attachment of the
candidate's choice to one of the following clinical units:3.4.1 Medicine
3.4.2 Surgery
3.4.3 Paediatrics and Child Health
3.4.5 Anaesthetics
3.4.6 Psychiatry
3.4.7 Pathology
3.4.8 Community Medicine
3.5 Also during Part II of the programme, the candidate shall be required
to submit six course assignments of between 3000 and 5000 words
on subjects approved by a Supervisor(s) appointed by the Higher
Degrees Coursework Committee of the College of Health Sciences.
Each course assignment shall be equally weighted. These course
assignments will constitute the coursework component of the
programme and shall comprise 30% of the full programme.
3.6 The research work component of the programme shall be submitted
in a dissertation of 10000-15000 words on a subject which has been
approved by the Supervisor(s).
172
4.
5.
MARKING SCHEME AND DEGREE CLASSIFICATION (REF. GAR 6)

4.1 The degree may be awarded with Distinction or Merit or without
classification.
4.2 The marking scheme shall be:80% +
=
Distinction
70% - 79% =
Merit
50% - 69% =
Pass
Below 50% =
Fail
5.1 Coursework shall be examined by course assignments (see
Paragraph 3.5)
6.
DETERMINATION OF CANDIDATES RESULTS (REF GAR 8)

6.1 The Departmental panel of Examiners shall comprise the Chairman
of the Institution of Continuing Health Education and Chairmen
and/or senior academic members of staff of the Departments of
Surgery, Medicine, Community Medicine, Paediatrics and Child
Health, Obstetrics and Gynaecology, Psychiatry, Pathology,
Anaesthetics and Clinical Pharmacology, and the External Examiner.
6.2 The Faculty Board of Examiners shall comprise the Dean and Deputy
Dean of the Faculty, the Chairman of the Institute of Continuing
Health Education, two members of each Departmental Panel of
Examiners and the External Examiner.
7.
These will be held in accordance with the General Academic Regulations
except that the examinations will be held in the May of the year following
the course.
8.
RE-PRESENTATION OF DISSERTATION
This shall be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations
except that the re-presentation shall be required within six months of
the decision of Senate to permit re-presentation.

DEGREE IN CLINICAL
EPIDEMIOLOGY (MCE)
(To be read in conjunction with the 'General Academic
Regulations for Certificates, Diplomas and Masters
Degrees by Coursework' (GAR))
1
ENTRY REGULATIONS (REF. GAR 3)

1.1 Applicants should normally have a good first degree in Medicine or
Nursing Science or an Honours degree in Science or Applied Science
in a health related discipline from a recognised institution.
1.2 Applicants should have at least three years post qualification
experience in an approved health field.
1.3 Applications from those with qualifications or experience other
than as described in 1.1 above, may be considered for places on the
programme on their individual merits.
2.
DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME (REF. GAR 4)

The programme shall normally commence at the beginning of each
academic year and shall be not less than three years part-time. During
this time candidates shall be working in appropriate posts as approved
by the Higher Degrees by Coursework Committee of the College of
Health Sciences for the purposes of the degree.
3.
STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME (REF. GAR 5)

3.1 The course shall be taught through distance education modules and
shall consist of three parts.
3.2 Part I is a core course, which will be undertaken in two semesters and
will consist of Epidemiology and Biostatistics.
3.3 Part II will be undertaken in two semesters and consists of Research

Protocol Design, Clinical Epidemiology, Clinical Economics and
Health Social Science.
3.4 Part III consists of a dissertation. Students must have satisfactorily
completed Part I and Part II of the course before proceeding to Part
III. The dissertation must be based on an approved protocol.
3.5 The programme shall include studies in the following courses:
3.5.1 Part I
Epidemiology
This subject includes introduction to basic concepts and
calculations in epidemiology, calculation of risks, cause and
bias, research designs, epidemic investigation, research
ethics and critical appraisal of journal articles. In addition,
students are taught how to undertake research using crosssectional, case-control, cohort, experimental research
designs and meta-analysis.
Biostatistics.
Subject includes exploratory data analysis, sample size
calculations, sampling distributions, confidence intervals,
hypothesis testing, use of a statistical package, regression
analysis, correlation, ANOVA and survival analysis.
3.5.2 Part II
Clinical Epidemiology.
Subject involves application of the principles of epidemiology
and biostatistics in a practical manner to improve medical
decision making as well as develop research skills which are
essential for investigating clinical and population based
health problems.
Health and Social Science.
Students are taught about the social, cultural and
psychological determinants of disease and risk behaviour as
well as the use of qualitative field methods in questionnaire
design. In addition, students will study models of health
behaviour which assist in the understanding of problems of
patient compliance and improves clinical decision-making
with regards to cost-effective prescribing practices.
Clinical Economics.
This subject includes, introduction to clinical economics, the
concept of opportunity cost in relation to health decisions,
economic measurement, cost-benefit and cost effectiveness
analyses, decision analysis and sensitivity analysis as well as
the use of clinical economics in policy making.
173
Research Protocol Development.

This subject includes learning how to develop a protocol
which can be used to seek funding or as a base for performing
research.
3.5.3 Part III
A dissertation, of a minimum of 10000 words, based on an
approved protocol, describing and discussing the results of a
research project shall be submitted.
3.6 The coursework component of the programme will be examined
through continuous assessments, based on the candidate's
performance in progress assignments, marked assignments as well
as formal examinations.
3.7 There would be use of distance education modules.
4.
174
5.
5.2.5 Research protocol will be marked on completion of the

protocol.
5.3 Part III
5.3.1 Part III will be assessed through a dissertation (MCE 570). The
dissertation will be assessed independently by two
appropriately qualified staff of the University who are not
directly involved with supervision of the candidate.
Subject
Part I
Semester I
Epidemiology
Biostatistics
Semester II
Epidemiology
Biostatistics
Part II
Semester I
Clinical Epidemiology
Semester II
Clinical Economics
Semester I and II
Health Social Science I
Research Protocol Design
Part III
Dissertation
TOTAL MARKS

4.1 The Master of Science in Clinical Epidemiology by coursework
degree shall be awarded with Distinction, or with Merit or without
classification based on the marks attained at Parts I, II and III
weighted in the ratio 1:2:3 respectively.
4.2 The Marking Scheme shall be:
80% +
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
ASSESSMENT OF CANDIDATE
5.1 Part I (MCE501)
5.1.1 Part I includes epidemiology and biostatistics
5.1.2 Epidemiology and biostatistics will be assessed through
continuous assessment (MCE550) (40% of marks) and
a written examination (60% of marks).
5.2 Part II (MCE502)
Continuous Assessment (MCE 551)
5.2.1 Part II includes clinical epidemiology, clinical economics,
health social science and research protocol development.
5.2.2 Clinical epidemiology assessment constitutes coursework
assignments.
5.2.3 Health Social Science assessment constitutes coursework
assignments (30% of total marks) and an assignment based
on a developed and pilot
tested health attitude
questionnaire report (70% of total marks).
5.2.4 Clinical Economics assessment will be based on written
assessment (60% of total marks) and a project (40% total
marks).
6.
Marks
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
400
1200
SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS (REF. GAR 10.5)

For candidates to proceed to Part II they must pass at Part I and for
candidates to proceed to Part III, they must pass Part II. Supplementary
examinations shall be in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.

DEGREE IN CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (MCPH)
6.
MARKING SCHEME AND DEGREE CLASSIFICATION (REF GAR6)

classification.
80% +
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
7.
ASSESSMENT OF THE CANDIDATE (REF GAR 7)

7.1
The examinations shall be held at the end of the academic year
and shall consist of written papers and an oral examination.
7.2
Written Papers:
There shall be 2 papers:
Paper I C MCPH 501 shall consist of multiple choice and short
answer questions (3 hours)
Paper 1 C MCPH 502 shall consist of long essays (3 hours)
7.3
Oral Examination (MCPH 590)
There shall be an oral examination covering the whole syllabus.
7.4
Continuous assessment MCPH 550 shall contribute 25% of the
final mark. Candidates must pass the continuous assessment to be
allowed to sit for the formal examinations. Students who do not
pass the continuous assessment will be informed two months
before the final examinations but they may submit the
dissertation.
7.5
A dissertation of 10 000 to 15 000 words shall be submitted two
months before the end of academic year.
7.6
A defence of dissertation consisting of a discussion related to the
results of the research project and methodology shall be
conducted.
(These regulations should be read in conjunction with the

'General Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by
Coursework' (GAR))
1.

1.1 Applicants should normally have an appropriate honours degree
or equivalent from this University or a recognised University in one
of the following fields:
1.1.1
Pharmacology
1.1.2
Medicine
1.1.3
Pharmacy
2.

The programme will be offered on a full-time basis and will run for 12
months starting in January and running till December of each year (Ref.
GAR 4)
3.
PLACE OF STUDY
The course will be taught at the University and students may be
seconded to approved institutions for practical attachments or for the
purpose of conducting a research project.
4.

The programme shall consist of coursework and a research project.
Written and oral examinations will be held at the end of the programme.
4.1 The coursework covers essential topics for clinical pharmacology
including basic and molecular pharmacology, therapeutics, clinical
pharmacokinetics, clinical toxicology, conduct of clinical trials, and
pharmacoepidemiology.
4.2 Students will be required to carry out an independent research
project that will result in submission of a dissertation.
4.3 Continuous assessment shall consist of marks given for written
assignments, laboratory reports and oral presentations.
5.
RESEARCH PROJECT
Students will carry out a Research Project under a supervisor approved
by the College of Health Sciences Higher Degrees Committee by
Coursework (HDC). A dissertation of 10 000 to 15 000 words arising
from the research project shall be submitted two months before the final
examinations.
8.
Paper I
Paper II
Oral Exam
Total
Dissertation
Total Marks
9.
DETERMINATION OF THE CANDIDATES' RESULTS

9.1
This will be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations
(Ref. GAR 8).
9.2 For a candidate to pass the programme, he/she must obtain an
aggregate pass mark in the written examinations and pass the
dissertation and continuous assessment.
100
100
100
300
200
300
800
175
4.2 Part I of the Programme shall consist of studies in the following

areas:
4.2.1 Microbial physiology and metabolism
4.2.2 Microbial genetics
4.2.3 Laboratory diagnostic techniques
4.2.4 Laboratory management and safety
4.2.5 Epidemiology, statistics and research methodology
4.2.6 Medical Bacteriology
4.2.7 Medical Parasitology and Entomology
4.2.8 Medical Virology
4.2.9 Medical Mycology
4.2.10 Medical Immunology and Immunochemistry
4.2.11 Antibiotics and Chemotherapeutics
4.3 Continuous Assessment in Part I shall consist of class tests, essays,
laboratory reports, presentation of seminars done during the year.
4.4 Part II shall normally commence immediately after satisfactory
completion of Part I and shall consist of:
4.4.1 Laboratory attachment
4.4.2 Research project to be done during laboratory
attachment.
4.5 There shall be continuous assessment in Part II. This shall consist
of laboratory reports and written assignments relating to the
laboratory attachment. The supervisors will give a mark to the
student based on his/her performance during this period.
10. SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION (REF. GAR 11.5)

10.1 This will be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations.
10.2 A candidate who obtains an aggregate mark of between 40% and
49% will be required to write a supplementary examination in all
the written examinations.
11. RE-SUBMISSION OF DISSERTATION (REF. GAR 10.6)
This will be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations and
the re-submission shall be required within three months of the decision
of Senate to permit re-submission.

DEGREE IN MEDICAL MICROBIOLOGY (MMB)
Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework' (GAR))
1.
176

1.1 Applicants should normally have an appropriate honours degree or
equivalent from this University or a recognised University in one of
the following fields:
1.1.1 Medical Microbiology
1.1.2 General Microbiology
1.1.3 Biological Sciences
1.1.4 Medical Technology
1.1.5 Veterinary Science
1.1.6 MBChB
1.1.7 Equivalent recognised degree.
1.2 Applicants whose previous qualification is inadequate but have
sufficient recognised experience in the field may be required to
attend courses and sit examinations to bring them to the
appropriate honours level before registering for the Masters
programme.
2.
DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME (REF. GAR 4)

The programme is offered on a part-time basis and will run for two years.
3.
PLACE OF STUDY
The course will be taught in the university and students will be seconded
to approved laboratories for practical instruction.
4.
STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME (REF GAR 4)

5.
RESEARCH PROJECT
Students will carry out a Research Project supervised by an appropriate
person approved by the College of Health Sciences Higher Degrees
committee by Coursework (HDC). Where any student is permitted to
undertake a research project at another Institution, there shall be at least
two supervisors, one of whom shall be from the University of Zimbabwe.
A dissertation of 10000-15000 words describing and discussing the
research project shall be submitted.
6.

6.1 Part I examination shall be held in November of the first year of the
programme and shall consist of:
6.1.1 Written Papers
There shall be three papers of three hours duration each:
Paper I (MMB501) shall consist of 100 multiple choice
questions.
Paper II (MMB502) shall consist of long and short essays
on Laboratory Management and Diagnosis including
Statistics and Epidemiology.
Paper III (MMB503) shall consist of long and short essays
on Basic and Clinical Microbiology
Oral Examination (MMB590)

There shall be an oral examination (MMB590) of
approximately 30 minutes per candidate covering the
whole Syllabus.
6.1.3
Continuous Assessment shall contribute 30% of the final
mark. Candidates must pass the continuous assessment
to be allowed to sit for the formal examinations.
6.2 Part II examination shall be held in November of the second year of
the programme and shall consist of:
6.2.1 A Dissertation (MMB570) of 1000015000 words
describing and discussing the research project. It shall
be submitted by the 30th of September in the second
year.
6.2.2 Continuous Assessment (MMB551) shall consist of reports
and assignments and also a mark from the supervisor based
on his/her performance during this period (ref. 4.6). This
shall contribute 30% to the final mark.
6.2.3 Candidates will be required to have passed the continuous
assessment before being allowed to proceed with the
submission of dissertation.
6.2.4 Defence of Dissertation
There shall be a discussion of the dissertation relating to the
results of the research project as well as research
methodology. Questions may be asked on any topic relevant
to the programme.
The marking scheme shall be:

80% +
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
The final mark will be an aggregate of Part I and Part II total marks which
carry equal weighting.
6.1.2
7.
8.
7.1 Part I:
Paper I
Paper II
Paper III
Oral Examination
Continuous
Assessment
TOTAL MARKS
7.2 Part II:
Dissertation
Continuous
Assessment
TOTAL MARKS
out of
out of
out of
out of
100
100
100
50
out of
150
500
out of
350
out of
150
500

classification.
9.
DETERMINATION OF THE CANDIDATE'S' RESULTS (REF GAR 8)

9.1 This will be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations.
9.2 Proceeding with Course
All students must normally have been deemed by the internal
examiners to have passed all examinations in Part I before
proceeding to Part II.
9.3 For a candidate to pass the programme he/she must obtain an
overall pass mark combining marks of Part I and Part II and also
pass the continuous assessment in Part II as well as the
dissertation.
10. SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS (REF. GAR 11.5)

These will be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations.
Any candidate failing all three of the written papers in Part I will be
required to repeat the year.
11. RE-SUBMISSION OF DISSERTATION (REF GAR 10.6)
This will be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations except
that the re-submission shall be required within six months of the
decision of the Senate to permit re-presentation.

DEGREE IN PHYSIOTHERAPY
(These Regulations should be read in conjunction with the
'General Academic Regulations for Masters' Degrees by
Coursework' (GAR))
1.
ENTRY QUALIFICATIONS (GAR 3)

1.1 Applicants should normally have an Honours Bachelor of Science
Degree in Physiotherapy passed with a minimum of a Lower Second
division, two years of clinical experience and be registered with the
Medical Rehabilitation Council of Zimbabwe (MRCZ).
177
1.2 Applicants with a general degree or approved equivalent

qualification may be considered by Senate on the commendation of
the College of Health Sciences. Normally such applicants should also
possess relevant experience and they may be required to pass a
qualifying examination set by the University prior to Senate
deciding on their accceptability for admission.
2.
3.
178
DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME (GAR 4)

The programme is offered on a full-time basis. The programme shall
commence at the start of the Academic Year and shall run for two years.
During this time candidates shall be employed in appropriate posts with
actual clinical physiotherapy work responsibilities as approved by the
Committee for Higher Degrees by Coursework of the College of Health
Sciences for the purposes of the degree.
3.1 The programme will be taught at the College of Health Sciences but
students may be seconded to approved institutions for clinical
experience.
3.2 The programme shall consist of two parts. Part I shall take place in
the first year of the programme, Part II in the last three months of the
first academic year and the second year of the programme.
3.3 The programme shall include studies in the following areas, both in
the classroom and clinical settings:
3.3.1 Coursework studies in the following areas in the classroom
setting:
3.3.1.1 Computer Skills
3.3.1.2 Epidemiology
3.3.1.3 Research Methodology
3.3.1.4 Biostatistics
3.3.1.5 Rehabilitation Services Planning and Management
3.3.1.6 Communication Skills and Health Promotion
3.3.2 Advanced Clinical Skills shall have both theoretical and
practical components. The theoretical component will be
taught in the classroom. Advanced Practice will be taught in
the clinic and include twelve week clinical rotations through
three of the following areas of clinical specialisation:
3.3.2.1 Musculo-skeletal
3.3.2.2 Management
3.3.2.3 Neurological
3.3.2.4 Cardiorespiratory
3.3.2.5 Geriatrics
3.3.2.6 Community
Every placement will not be offered every year.
3.3.3 Research Projects

3.3.3.1 Students will carry out a Research Project
supervised by an appropriate person approved by
the College of Health Sciences Higher Degrees by
Coursework Committee (HDC).
3.3.3.2 Where any student is permitted to undertake
his/her research project at another institution,
there shall be at least two supervisors, one of whom
shall be from the University of Zimbabwe.
3.3.3.3 A dissertation of 10000 to 15000 words describing
and discussing the research project shall be
submitted by 30 September of the second year.
3.3.4 External Clinical Elective:
This shall comprise a three month clinical placement in a
chosen field of specialisation. It is strongly recommended
that this placement be held in an institution external to
Zimbabwe.
3.4 The coursework component of the programme will be examined
by continuous assessment, based on the regular assessment of the
candidate's performance in classwork and clinical work.
Continuous Assessment will comprise 33.3% (one third) of the
marks of the full programme.
4.

classification.
80% +
=
Distinction
70 - 79%
=
Merit
50 - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.

5.1 Coursework shall be continuously assessed by evaluation of the
candidate's performance in classwork and fieldwork.
5.2 Continuous assessment of Advanced Clinical Skills shall include
assignments, case reports, case presentations, assessment of
patient management skills, seminar presentations and assessment
of skills of clinical supervision.
5.3 Research work shall be examined by dissertation. This shall be
presented by the last day of the seventeenth month of the
programme.
5.3.1 Defence of Dissertation:
There shall be a discussion on the content of the candidate's
dissertation.
5.4. There shall be formal examinationsat the end of the second yearof
the programme consisting of the following:
5.4.1. Written Papers there shall be five papers each of which

shall be equally weighted.
Paper I (MPT501) of two hours duration, shall comprise
multiple choice questions.
5.4.3
Paper II (MPT502) of three hours duration, shall comprise

six questions on problems from Epidemiology and
Biostatistics, Research methodology and communication
skills and health promotion and Health services planning
and management. The student shall choose five. The
questions shall be of equal weighting.
Paper III (MPT503) of two hours duration, shall be a
combined paper comprising four essay or short answer
questions, two on data analysis and interpretation
(epidemiology and biostatistics) and two from the
Advanced Clinical Skills, (Community, Geriatrics, or
management modules) depending on the course on offer in
advanced clinical skills. The questions shall be of equal
weighting.
Paper IV (MPT504) of two hours duration, shall comprise
four essay or short answer questions from Advanced Clinical
Skills (Neurological or Cardiorespiratory). Two questions
may be on Physiotherapy Techniques and two on Clinical
Physiotherapy depending on the course on offer. The
questions shall be of equal weighting.
5.4.2
Paper V (MPT505) of three hours duration, shall comprise

six essay or short answer questions from the Advanced
Clinical skills (Musculo-skeletal) module. Three questions of
the six questions will be on Physiotherapy Techniques and
the other three on Clinical Physiotherapy. The student shall
choose five out of the six. The questions shall be of equal
weighting.
Clinical Examinations (MPT 580; 581; 582; 583)
There shall be four sessions of clinical examinations. Two
sessions will be on assessment of patients with two different
conditions. Two sessions will be on treatment of patients in
the assessed categories. Each assessment clinical
examination will be of approximately 45minutes duration.
Each treatment clinical examination will be of
5.4.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
approximately 60 minutes duration. The candidate must

pass the Advanced Clinical Practice component of the
advanced clinics with at least 50% for them to pass the
subject Advanced Clinics.
Oral examination (MPT590)
minutes duration based on the written components and any
other information within the courses learned.
Defence of Dissertation (MPT591)
There shall be a discussion of the content of the candidate's
dissertation (see 3.3.3).
Distribution of Marks:
Continuous Assessment of Coursework:
100
Continuous Assessment of Clinical Skills:
200
Examination
700
TOTAL
1000
Candidates must obtain an overall mark of 50% or higher in
continuous assessment before entering the second year of the
programme.
Candidates who fail to obtain a mark of 50% in the
examinations shall be eligibleto apply for re admission into the
second year of the programme.
6.
DETERMINATION OF RESULTS (GAR 8)

This will be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations.
7.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION (GAR 11.5)

These will be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations and
will be awarded to those candidates who receive an overall average of
between 40 and 49% in the examinations. Candidates will be required to
resit the parts of the examination (papers or clinical) in which they failed
to obtain a mark of 50%.
8.
RE-SUBMISSION OF DISSERTATION (GAR 11.6)

This shall be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations.
179

MEDICINE (ANAESTHETICS) (MMED ANAES)
(To be read in conjunction with the General Academic
Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework) (GAR)
1.
180
2.
3.
3.2

1.1 Applicants should have obtained the MBChB degrees of this or
another university of an approved standard, or have obtained a
qualification by written and clinical examination of a standard
approved by the University of Zimbabwe.
1.2 Applicants must have completed a suitable internship and be
appropriately registered with the Medical and Dental Practitioners
1.3 Candidates should have gained at least one year's postgraduate
experience in a provincial, general or district hospital.
1.5 Applicants must have obtained a Diploma in Anaesthetics from the
University of Zimbabwe or an equivalent qualification from other
Postgraduate Training Centres recognised by the University of
Zimbabwe.
1.6 In selecting candidates for this programme, the level of academic
achievement and clinical ability of the applicant will normally be
taken into consideration.
DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME (GAR 4)
2.1 The duration of the programme, which shall normally commence in
each January, shall be three years part-time. shall be divided into two
parts, Part I and Part II. Candidates shall normally be employed in the
appropriate posts in the departments or hospitals approved by the
Higher Degrees Coursework Committee of the College of Health
Sciences for the purpose of the degree throughout the programme.
2.2 Exemptions
2.2.1 Candidates who have already successfully completed an
equivalent Part I examination may apply for exemption from
the Part I course and examination.
2.2.2 Decisions on applications for such exemptions shall be
STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMME (GAR 5)
The programme shall be divided into two parts, Part I shall take place in
the first year of the programme, Part II in the succeeding two years.
areas:-
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.1.1 Applied Physiology

3.1.2 Applied Pharmacology
3.1.3 There shall be a Masters in Medicine Basic Sciences Core
Course covering areas of Anatomy, Physiology and
Biochemistry, Pathology and Clinical Pharmacology.
Part II of the programme shall consist of studies in the following
areas relevant to the practice of Anaesthetics:
3.2.1 Clinical Anaesthetics Practice
3.2.2 Pain Control
3.2.3 Anatomy
3.2.4 Clinical Medicine and Surgery
3.2.5 Clinical Chemistry and Measurement
3.2.6 The special branches of Anaesthetics and Intensive Care
including Neonatal, Neuro and Cardio-thoracic surgery
including open heart procedures.
During Part I of the programme the candidate shall be assessed on
presentations of theoretical work, case presentations and practical
assessments. Marks gained from these assessments will constitute
the course component of the programme for Part I.
During Part II of the programme the candidate shall be assessed on
at least 6 (six) assignments approved by the Department of
Anaesthesia and Critical Care Medicine. These coursework
components of the programme for Part II shall comprise 21% of the
full Part II examination marks.
The research work component of the programme shall be submitted
in a dissertation of 10000-15000 words on a subject which has been
approved by the Department of Anaesthesia and Critical Care
Medicine.
4.
MARKING SCHEME AND DEGREE CLASSIFICATION (GAR6)

classification.
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.

Paragraph 3.3 and 3.4).
which shall be presented by the end of June of the third year of the
programme.
5.3 Part I Examination
Part I of the examination shall be held in November of the first year
of the Programme and shall consist of:
5.3.1 Paper I: (CBSC501) : Basic Science Core Course examination:

A paper of three hours duration of 100 Multiple Choice
Questions.
5.3.2 Paper II (MAD502) : There shall be a paper of three hours
duration consisting of 100 Multiple Choice questions in
Applied Physiology and Pharmacology.
5.4 The Part II examination shall be held in the November of the third
year of the programme and shall consist of :5.4.1 Written Papers
Paper I (MAD503) shall be of 3 hours duration and consist
of 100 Multiple Choice questions.
Paper II (MAD504) shall be of 3 hours duration and consist
of 5 compulsory Essay questions.
5.4.2 Clinical Examination
(MAD580)
This shall be of 45 minutes duration.
5.4.3 Oral Examination (MAD590)
This shall be of 45 minutes duration. Both the Clinical and
Oral Examination shall test the ability of the candidate to
function as a Specialist and Consultant in Anaesthetics.
5.5.1 Part I Examination
Paper I:
out of
150
Paper II:
out of
150
Continuous Assessment out of
100
TOTAL
400
5.5.2 Part II Examination
Coursework:
out of
150
Written Papers: Paper I
out of
100
Paper II
out of
100
Total Paper Mark
350
Clinical Oral Examination out of
100
Oral Examination
out of
100
Total
550
Dissertation
out of
150
FINAL TOTAL
700
5.5.3 Candidates will be required to pass the Clinical examinations.
5.5.4 Candidates will be required to pass the Dissertation.
6.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS (REF GAR 10.5)

These should be held in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations except that the examination will be held in the following
May.
7.
RE-PRESENTATION OF DISSERTATION (REF, GAR 10.6)

except that re-presentation shall be required within six months of the
decision of Senate to permit representation.
8.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of the first and second years of Part II of the programme
annual assessments based on theoretical and practical performance
during that year and expressed as a percentage mark, will be
submitted by the Department of Anaesthesia and Critical Medicine
to the College of Health Sciences for onward transmission to
Academic Committee. A mark of 50% or more must be obtained in
each assessment before a student is allowed to proceed to the next
year of the programme.
8.2 Candidates shall be required to submit to the Department of
Anaesthesia and Critical Care Medicine an annual list of at least one
hundred cases in which they have participated as principal
Anaesthesia and Critical Care Medicine, assistant or teacher
countersigned by the supervisor during that period.
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTERS IN MEDICINE

(HISTOPATHOLOGY) (MDHP)
Regulations for Masters Degree by Coursework' (GAR))
1.

another university of an approved standard or have obtained a
1.3 Preference will be given to candidates who have gained at least one
year's postgraduate experience in a provincial, general or district
hospital.
1.4 Applications should be submitted on the official application forms
provided through the Institute of Continuing Health Education of the
College of Health Sciences.
181
2.
182
3.

2.1 The duration of the programme which shall normally commence in
each January, shall be four years part-time. Throughout the
programme, a candidate shall normally be employed in the
appropriate posts in the Departments or hospitals approved by the
Higher Degrees by Coursework Committee of the College of Health
Sciences for the purpose of the degree.
2.2 Exemptions
the Part I Course and examination.
2.2.2 Candidates who have successfully completed the Diploma in
General Pathology may apply for exemption from the Part I
Course and examination.
2.2.3 Candidates who have completed posts of an appropriate
nature and duration may apply for exemption from part or all
of Part I of the programme and up to one year of Part II of the
programme.
2.2.4 Decisions on applications for such exemption shall be
recommended to Senate by the Higher Degrees by
Coursework Committee of the College of Health Sciences.
The programme shall be divided into two parts. Part I shall take place in
the First year of the programme, and Part II in the succeeding three years.
3.1 Part I of the programme shall consist of the studies in the following
areas:
3.1.1 There shall be a combined Masters in Medicine Basic Science
Core Course covering areas of Anatomy, Physiology,
Biochemistry and Pathology.
3.1.2 Techniques and Principles in Histopathology
3.1.3 Use of stains in Histopathology
3.1.4 Principles of Histological Diagnosis
3.1.5 Introduction to Electron Microscopy
3.1.6 Introduction to Frozen Sections
3.1.7 Rotations in:-Medical Microbiology, Haematology and
Clinical Chemistry
3.1.8 Autopsy techniques
3.1.9 Surgical cut-up
3.1.10 Principles of General Pathology
3.1.11 Coursework shall be assessed continuously on the basis of
monthly tests in the Combined Basic Science Course (12.5%
of the total marks) and Clinical Assessment (12.5% of the
total marks).
3.2 Part II of the programme shall consist of studies in:3.2.1 Cardiovascular Pathology
3.2.2 Pulmonary Pathology
3.2.3 Gastrointestinal Pathology
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.4
3.2.4 Musculoskeletal and soft tissue Pathology

3.2.5 Gynaecologic and Breast Pathology
3.2.6 Genito-urinary Pathology
3.2.7 Haematopathology
3.2.8 Neuropathology
3.2.9 Perinatal Pathology
3.2.10 Cytopathology
3.2.11 Forensic Pathology
3.2.12 During Part II of the programme, there shall be exposure to
post-mortem and laboratory based pathology as well as
clinico-pathological consultation.
During Part II of the programme, the candidate shall be required to
submit a log book consisting of 1000 self reported surgical cases, 25
forensic autopsies, 50 medical interest autopsies, 200 nongynaecologicalcytology cases, 1000 pap smears (all of which
include built in assignments). These log books should be submitted
by June 30th of the fourth year of the programme. They will
constitute the coursework component of the programme and shall
comprise 20% of the full programme. The assignments shall be
evenly distributed throughout Part II of the programme (during
each of the years 2,3 and 4).
The research work component of the programme shall be submitted
in a dissertation of 10000 to 15000 words in a subject which has
been approved by the Department of Histopathology.
This dissertation shall be submitted to the Institute of Continuing
Health Education in the final form by the 30th of June of the fourth
year (final year) of the programme.
Any candidate who has not submitted the dissertation in paragraph
Above by the due date shall not be permitted to appear in the Final
(Part II) Examinations.
4.

4.1 The degree may be awarded with Distinction or with Merit or
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.
ASSESSMENT OF CANDIDATES
5.1 Coursework shall be examined by coursework assignments (see
paragraph 3.3). Candidates who have not achieved 50% in
continuous assessment cannot present themselves to the written
examinations.
5.2 Research work shall be examined by dissertation (see paragraph

3.5) which shall be presented by the end of June of the fourth year of
the programme.
5.3 The Part I examination will be held in November of the first year of
the programme and shall consist of:5.3.1 Written Papers
Paper I shall be a 3 hour paper of 100 multiple choice
questions covering the areas described Under 3.1.1 Basic
Sciences Course (CBSC501)
5.3.2 Paper II C There shall be a 3 hour paper consisting of 100
multiple choice questions on the remainder of the
programme (MDHP502)
5.3.3 Paper III C A One and half hour practical examination
comprising of 20 questions (MDHP580)
5.4 The Part II examination shall be held in November of the fourth year
and shall consist of:
Paper I
(MDHP503)
Paper II
(MDHP504)
Paper III
(MDHP505
5.4.2 Practical Examination (MDHP581)
Autopsy examination
3 hours
(20%)
Frozen section
30 minutes (10%)
Cytology
1 hour
(20%)
Surgical Pathology
(long and short cases)
2hours
(50%)
5.4.3 Oral Examination C 30 Minutes duration (MDHP592)
5.4.4 Defence of Dissertation (30 minutes discussion on
5.2)
(MDHP570)
Paper I
out of
100
Paper II
out of
100
Paper III
out of
100
out of
100
TOTAL
400
Written Papers
Practical Examination
Oral Examination
Total
Dissertation
TOTAL
out of
out of
out of
out of
out of
100
100
150
50
400
100
500
5.5.3 Candidates will be required to pass the practical examination.

5.5.4 Candidates will be required to pass the dissertation.
6.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION
General Academic Regulations except that the examination will be
held in the following May.
6.2 Determination of the offer of supplementary examinations for Part I
failures shall be in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
6.3 In determining the offer of supplementary examinations at Part II
the following components of the course shall be determinant:
(MDHP503B505)
6.3.2 Practical Examinations (MDHP581)
6.3.3 Dissertation
(MDHP570)
6.3.4 Any candidate who fails any of these components shall be
required to repeat the final year of the programme.
6.3.5 Candidates who are offered supplementary examinations
shall be required to supplement in all components of the
examination: i.e. written papers, Clinical examination and
Oral Examination.
7.
RE-PRESENTATION OF DISSERTATION (GAR 10.6)

except that the re-presentation shall be required within six months of the
decision of Senate to permit re-presentation.
8.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of the first and second years of Part II of the programme,
annual assessment based on theoretical and practical performance
during that year and expressed as a percentage mark will be
submitted by the Department of Histopathology to the College of
Health Sciences for onward transmission to Academic Committee. A
mark of 50% or more must be obtained in each assessment before a
student is allowed to proceed to the next year of the progrmme.
Histopathology an annual list of cases in the log book as described in
paragraph 3.4 in which they have participated as Pathologist,
Assistant or Teacher countersigned by the supervisor during that
period.
183
3.1.1

MEDICINE (MEDICINE) (MDMD)
1.
184
2.
3.
ENTRY REGULATIONS (GAR3)

1.3 Preference will be given to candidates who will have gained at least
one year's postgraduate experience in a provincial, general or
district hospital.
each January, shall be four years part-time.
2.2 Throughout the programme, candidates shall normally be
employed in the appropriate posts in the departments or hospitals
approved by the Higher Degrees by Coursework Committee of the
College of Health Sciences for the purpose of the degree.
2.3 Exemptions
equivalent Part I examination may apply for exemption
from the Part I course and examination.
nature and duration may apply for exemption from part or
all Part I of the programme and up to one year of Part II of
the programme.
The programme shall be divided into two parts, Part I shall take place in
the first year of the programme, Part II in the succeeding three years.
3.1 Part I of the programme shall consist of clinical application of
studies in the following areas:
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
4.
There will be a combined Masters in Medicine Basic

Sciences Core Course covering areas of Anatomy,
Physiological Chemistry, Physiology, Clinical
Pharmacology, Pathology, Statistics and Epidemiology.
3.1.2
General Medicine
3.1.3
Coursework shall be assessed continuously on the basis of
monthly tests in the Combined Basic Science Course
(12.5% of the total marks) and clinical Assessment (12.5
of the total marks). (MDMD550)
During Part I of the prgramme candidates will rotate through
posts as in paragraph 2.2 in General Medicine and they will attend
lectures in the topics mentioned in Paragraph 3.1.
Part II of the programme shall consist of studies in General
Medicine.
3.3.1 During Part II of the programme each candidate shall
submit six verbal course assignments and three written
assignments. These course assignments shall constitute
the coursework component of the programme and shall
make up 20% of the marks of the Part II programme
(MDMD551).
Each candidate will be required to:
3.3.1.1 present verbal assignments at six postgraduate
teaching sessions. Such presentations will
include journal reviews and case presentations;
3.3.1.2 submit three written case studies of between
3000 and 5000 words on subjects approved by
the Board of the Department of Medicine.
During Part II of the programme candidates shall be required to
submit research work of between 10000 and 15000 words as a
dissertation on a subject approved by the Departmental Board of
Medicine. This dissertation shall be submitted to the Institute of
Continuing Health Education in final form by the 30th of June of
the fourth year (Final Year) of the programme.
A candidate who has not submitted the dissertation in paragraph
3.4 above, by the due date shall not be permitted to sit for the Final
(Part II) Examination.

4.1 The Degree may be awarded with distinction or merit or without
classification. This shall be based on the marks attained at Part II
examination.
80% +
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.

5.1 Coursework shall be examined by course assignments as in
paragraphs 3.1.3 and 3.3.1 above.
5.2 Research work shall be examined by dissertation (see paragraph 3.4)
which shall be presented by the 30th of June of the Fourth year of the
programme to the Institute of Continuing Health Education.
Paper I (CBSC501)
There shall be a three hour paper of 100 multiple choice
questions covering the areas described Under
5.1.1 A Basic Sciences Core Course.'
5.3.2 Paper II (MDMD502)
There shall be a two hour paper consisting of 60 multiple
choice questions on the principles of general medicine.
5.4 The Part II examination shall be held in the November of the fourth
year and shall consist of:
Paper I (MDMD503) This paper will be a study of case
histories and examines a practicalknowledge of Internal
Medicine.
Paper II MDMD 504 A multiple choice examination paper will
be answered. The paper will cover all aspects of the Internal
Medicine including all the sub specialities.
Paper III (MDMD505)Clinical Slides and Data Interpretation
Slides. This paper comprises theinterpretation of laboratory
results, X-rays and ECGs and the recognition of clinical
abnormality as displayed in the slides that will be projected.
(MDMD580)
Including long and short cases, lasting approximately one and
half hours.
5.4.3 Oral Examination (MDMD590)
A 30 minute oral examination will be held and will cover
aspects of Internal Medicine with special reference to recent
advances. The examination will test the candidate's
knowledge of the most recent developments in Internal
Medicine and hence requires the candidate to keep up with
scientific journal articles.
5.4.4 Defence of Dissertation (MDMD570)
There shall be a discussion on the content of the dissertation
submitted under paragraph 5.2.
5.4.5 Continuous Assessment(MDMD551)
There shall be a continuous assessment at the end of the
years two, three and four of the programme inclusive as
described in paragraph 3.3.1.

Paper I
Paper II
TOTAL
Course Assignments
Case Studies Paper I
Multiple Choice Paper II
Clinical Studies Paper III
Clinical Examinations
Oral Examination
Total
Dissertation
FINAL TOTAL
5.6
out of
out of
out of
75
75
50
200
out of
out of
out of
out of
out of
out of
150
100
100
50
150
50
600
100
700
out of
For a candidate to pass the programme, he/she must obtain an

overall pass mark and also in both the clinical examination and
the dissertation.
6.

6.1 Supplementary examinations may be held in accordance with the
General Academic Regulations except that the examinations will be
Regulations.
6.3.1 Written papers
(MDMD503B505
(MDMD580)
6.3.3 Dissertation
(MDMD570)
6.3.4 Any candidate who fails any two of these components
shall be required to repeat the final year of the
programme.
6.3.5 Candidates offered a supplementary examination shall be
required to appear in all components of the Part III
examination, i.e. written papers, clinical examinations
and the oral examination.
7.
RE-PRESENTATION OF DISSERTATION (REF GAR 10.6)

These shall be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations
185
8.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of each year of the Part II programme annual assessments
based on theoretical and practical performance during that year and
expressed as a percentage mark, will be submitted by the
Department of Medicine to the College of Health Sciences for
onward transmission to Academic Committee. A mark of 50% or
more must be obtained in each assessment before a student is
allowed to proceed to the next year of the programme.
Medicine an annual list of at least fifty cases in which they have
participated as principal physician, assistant or teacher

MEDICINE (NEUROLOGICAL SURGERY) (MNSG)
1.
ENTRY REGULATIONS (REF GAR 3)

1.1 Applicants must have obtained the MBChB degrees of this or
1.2 Applicants must have completed a suitable internship and
appropriately registered with the Health Professions Council of
Zimbabwe.
1.3 Candidates should have gained at least one year's post registration
2.

each January shall be five years part-time.
2.2 Throughout the programme, candidates will normally be
employed in the appropriate posts within the relevant
departments or hospitals approved by the Higher Degrees by
Coursework Committee of the College of Health Sciences for the
purposes of the degree.
2.3 Exemptions
2.3.1 Candidates who have already completed an appropriate
course and examination equivalent to Part I of this course
may apply for exemption from this part of the course and
examination.
186
2.3.2
2.3.3
3.
Candidates who hold an MMED (Surgery) or equivalent

may apply for exemption from relevant parts of the
general surgical rotation up to a maximum of one year.
Decisions on applications for such exemptions shall be

the first year of the programme, Part II in the succeeding four years.
3.1 Part I of the programme shall consist of studies in Applied Basic
Sciences as follows:
3.1.1 Anatomy of the Central Nervous System
3.1.2 Physiology
3.1.3 Pathology
3.1.4 There will be a combined Masters in Medicine Basic
Science Core Course covering areas of Anatomy,
Physiological -Chemistry, Pathology, Clinical
Pharmacology, Statistics and Epidemiology.
3.1.5 There will be additional tutorials in the above subjects
specific to surgery and Neurological surgery.
3.1.6 Students will be encouraged to demonstrate in
Anatomy/Neuroanatomy, Physiology/Neurophysiology.
3.2 During Part I and II of the programme, candidates will rotate through
posts as in paragraph 2.2 in the following areas:3.2.1 General Surgery
3.2.2 Orthopaedics
3.2.3 Thoracic Surgery
3.2.4 Maxillofacial Surgery
3.2.6 The various disciplines of neurological Surgery.
3.2.7 Elective period.
3.3 During Part II of the programme there shall be an exposure to clinical
and operative neurosurgery.
3.3.1 Applied Surgical Anatomy of the central nervous system.
3.3.3 Clinical and operation art of the various aspects of
neurological surgery and principles of general surgery.
3.4 During Part II of the programme candidates shall be required to
submit three course assignments of between 3000 and 5000 words
on subjects approved by the Board of the Department of Surgery.
Each course assignment shall be equally weighted and these shall be
evenly spread throughout Part II of the programme (one during each
years 2,3,4, and 5 of the programme). These course assignments
shall constitute part of the second assignments (60%, examinations
40%) and together will comprise 25% of the marks of the full
programme.

submit research work of between 10000-15000 words as a
Surgery. This dissertation shall be submitted to the Institute of
Continuing Health Education in the final form by the 30th of June of
the Fifth year (Final year) of the programme.
3.6 Any candidate who has not submitted the dissertation in paragraph
3.4 above by the due date shall not be permitted to appear in the
Final (Part II) examinations.
4.
MARKING SCHEME AND CLASSIFICATION (REF GAR 6)

without classification. This shall be based on the marks attained at
Part II of the examination.
4.2 The marking scheme shall be:80%+
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.

5.1 Continuous Assessment shall be examined by course assignments
and annual examinations (see paragraph 3.4).
5.2 Research work shall be examined by dissertation (see Paragraph
3.5). This shall be presented to the Institute of Continuing Health
Education not later than 30 June of the fifth year of the programme.
5.3 The Part I examination shall be held in November of the first year of
Paper I
(CBSC501)
questions based on the programme described in paragraph
3.1, above.
Paper II
(MNSG502)
3.1.
(MNSG591)
minutes duration on all aspects of the Part I course.
5.4 The Part II examination shall be held in November of the fifth year
and will consist of:5.4.1
Written Papers
5.4.1.1 Paper I (MNSG503) shall be of two hours duration
and shall consist of 75 multiple choice questions.
5.4.1.2 Paper II (MNSG504) shall be of two hours duration

and shall consist of 10 short answer questions of
which 8 shall be answered.
5.4.1.3 Paper III (MNSG505) shall be an essay paper of three
hours duration where candidates shall be expected
to answer three questions.
Written papers shall test principles in theory of
operative neurological surgery, neurological theory
and the basic sciences and their application.
(MNSG580)
The examination shall be of approximately two hours
duration.
(MNSG592)
This examination shall be approximately 60 minutes
duration.
(MNSG550)
There shall be a continuous assessment at the end of the years
two, three and four of the programme inclusive as described
in paragraph 3.2.2.
5.5 Distribution of marks
Paper I
out of
75
Paper II
out of
75
Oral Examination
out of
50
out of
50
Sub Total
250
Written Papers
Oral Examination
Sub Total
Dissertation (MNSG570)
FINAL TOTAL
5.6 Candidates shall be required to
and the dissertation.
6.
out of
out of
out of
out of
100
100
150
50
400
out of
100
500
pass the Clinical Examinations

187

Regulations.
6.3.1 Written Papers (MNSG503-505)
6.3.2 Clinical Examination and Oral Examination MNSG580
and
MNSG592)
6.3.3 Dissertation (MNSG570)
Any candidate who fails any two of these components
shall be required to repeat the final year of the
programme.
7.
RE-PRESENTATION OF DISSERTATION (REF 10.6)

Re-presentation of a dissertation may be permitted by the Senate. In
such cases re-presentation shall be required within six months of the
8.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of the second, third and fourth years of the programme
annual assessments based on theoretical (Paragraph 3.4) and
practical performance during each year and expressed as a
percentage mark, will be submitted by the Department of Surgery
to the College of Health Sciences for onward transmission to the
8.2 Candidates shall be required to keep a prescribed log book.
188

MEDICINE (OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY)
(MOG)
1.


hospital.
2.

2.2. Throughout the programme, candidates shall normally be employed
in the appropriate posts in the departments or hospitals approved by
the Higher Degrees Coursework Committee of the College of Health
Sciences for the purposes of the degree.
2.3 Exemptions
2.3.1 Candidates who have already completed an appropriate Part I
examination of another professional college/university that
is recognised by the University of Zimbabwe may apply for
exemption from the Part I examination.
nature and duration may apply for exemption from Part I of
the programme and up to one year of Part II of the
programme.
3.

The programme shall be divided into parts. Part I shall take place in the
first year of the programme, and Part II in the succeeding three years.
areas:3.1.1 Anatomy
3.1.2 Biochemistry
3.1.3 Cell Biology and Genetics
3.1.4 Elementary Statistics and Epidemiology
3.1.5 Embryology
3.1.6 Endocrinology
3.1.7 The Foetus
3.1.8 Immunology
3.1.9 Microbiology
3.1.10 Pathology
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
4.
3.1.11 Pharmacology
3.1.12 Physiology
3.1.13 There shall be a combined Masters in Medicine. Basic Science
Core Courses covering areas of Anatomy, Physiological
Chemistry, Physiology, Clinical Pharmacology, Pathology,
monthly tests in the Combined Basic Course (12.5% of the
total marks) and Clinical Assessment (12.5% of the total
marks). (MOG550)
areas:3.2.1 Obstetrics
3.2.2 Gynaecology
3.2.3 Child Spacing
3.2.4 Maternal and Child Health
3.2.5 Reproductive Research Methodology and Epidemiology
3.2.6 Ethics of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
During Part II of the programme, the candidate shall be required to
submit a case book consisting of 10 obstetric and 10 gynaecology
long cases. These course assignments should be submitted by the
30th June of the fourth year of the programme and shall comprise
30% of the total continuous assessment.
Obstetrics and Gynaecology.
This dissertation shall be submitted to the Department of Institute
of Continuing Health Education in final form by the 30th of June of
the Fourth year (Final Year) of the programme.
Final (Part II) Examinations.

classification.
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.

paragraph 3.15.
3.4) which shall be presented by the end of June of the third year of
the programme.
5.3 The Part I examination will be held in the November of the first year
of the programme and shall consist of :5.3.1 Written Papers
Paper I (CBSC501)
questions covering the areas described under 3.1.14 'Basic
Sciences Core Course'.
5.3.2 Paper II (MOG502)
There shall be a three hour paper consisting of 60 multiple
choice questions and a short essay answer section.
and shall consist of:5.4.1 Written Papers
Paper I (Obstetrics) (MOG503) shall be of three hours
duration.
Paper II (Gynaecology) (MOG504) shall be of three hours
duration with three compulsory questions.
Paper III (Multiple Choice Questions) (MOG505) shall be of
two hours duration and comprise 75 multiple choice
questions.
Of the total marks available for written papers, 25% shall be
allotted to each of Papers I and II and 50% to Paper III.
5.4.2 Clinical Examination (MOG582)
There shall be two clinical examinations, each of
approximately one hour's duration in Obstetrics and in
Gynaecology. Of the total marks available for the clinical
examination, each examination shall be allotted 50%.
5.4.3 Oral Examination (MOG582)
There shall be an oral examination of approximately one
hour's duration.
Paper I
Paper II
Total
Course Assignments
(MOG552)
Written Papers
out of
out of
out of
75
75
50
200
out of
out of
100
100
189
out of
150
Oral Examination
out of
50
Total
400
Dissertation
out of
100
FINAL TOTAL
500
5.5.3 Candidates will be required to pass both Clinical
examinations in Obstetrics and Gynaecology separately.
overall pass mark and also pass each of the clinical examinations
separately as well as the dissertation.
6.
190

General Academic Regulations except that the Supplementary
examinations shall be held in the following May.
Regulations.
(MOG503, MOG505);
6.3.2 Clinical Examinations (MOG581 and MOG582)
6.3.3 Dissertation
(MOG570)
6.3.4 Any candidate who fails any two of these components shall
be required to repeat the final year of the programme.
oral examination.
7.

except that re-presentation shall be required within six months of
the decision of Senate to permit re-presentation.
8.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of each year at Part II of the programme annual
assessment based on theoretical and practical performance during
that year and expressed as a percentage mark will be submitted by
the Department of Obstetrics and Gynaecology to the College of
Health Sciences Higher Degrees Committee. A mark of 50% or more
must be obtained in each assessment before a student is allowed to
proceed to the next year of the programme.

Obstetrics and Gynaecology an annual list of at least fifty cases in
which they have participated as principal obstetrician or
gynaecologist, first assistant or teacher countersigned by the
supervisor during that period.

MEDICINE (PAEDIATRICS) (MPD)
Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework') (GAR)
1.

another university of an approved standard.
1.2 Applicants must have completed a suitable supervised internship
and be appropriately registered with the Medical and Dental
Practitioners Council of Zimbabwe.
one year's postgraduate experience within a Provincial, General or
District hospital.
2.

2.2 Throughout the programme, candidates shall normally be employed
in the appropriate posts in the departments or hospitals approved
by the Higher Degrees Coursework Committee of the College of
Health Sciences for the purpose of the degree.
2.3 Exemptions
Part I of the programme and up to one year of Part II of the
programme.
3.

the first year of the programme, and Part II in the succeeding three years.
3.1 Part I of the programme shall consist of clinical application studies in
the following areas:3.1.1 Community Paediatrics
3.1.2 Nutrition and growth
3.1.3 Central nervous system and neuromuscular system
3.1.4 Development
3.1.5 Therapeutics and poisoning
3.1.6 Infectious diseases. Allergy and Immunity
3.1.7 Perinatology
3.1.8 Metabolic diseases and endocrinology
3.1.9 Haematology and oncology
3.1.10 Genitourinary system
3.1.11 Fluids and electrolytes/Acid-base regulation
3.1.12 Respiratory diseases
3.1.13 Cardiovascular system
3.1.14 Gastrointestinal tract and hepatic/biliary system
3.1.15 Skeletal system, connective tissue and rheumatic disorders
3.1.16 Basic Science Core Course
There will be a combined Masters in Medicine Basic Science
Core Course covering areas of Anatomy, Physiological
Chemistry, Physiology and Statistics and Epidemiology.
monthly tests in the Combined Basic Science course (12.5%
total marks) (MPD550).
3.2 During Parts I and II of the programme, candidates will rotate
through posts as in paragraph 2.2 specifically in the following areas:3.2.1 Clinical Paediatrics and Child Care
3.2.2 Community Paediatrics
3.3 During Part II of the programme, the candidate shall be required to
submit two written assignments of between 3000 and 5000 words.
These coursework assignments shall constitute the coursework
component of the programme and shall comprise 20% of the final
mark at Part II.
Paediatrics and Child Health. This dissertation shall be submitted to
the Institute of Continuing Health education in the final form by the
30th of June of the fourth year (Final year) of the programme.
4.

= Distinction
70% - 79%
= Merit
50% - 69%
= Pass
Below 50%
= Fail
5.

paragraphs 3.1.3 and 3.3.1 above.
5.2 Research work shall be examined by dissertation (see paragraph 3.4)
which shall be presented by the 30th of June of the Fourth year of the
programme to the Institute of Continuing Health Education.
Paper I (CBSC501)
questions covering the areas described Under 5.1.1 A Basic
Sciences Core Course.'
5.3.2 Paper II (MDMD502)
There shall be a two hour paper consisting of 60 multiple
choice questions on the principles of general medicine.
year and shall consist of:
Paper I (MDMD503) This paper will be a study of case
histories and examines a practical knowledge of Internal
Medicine.
Paper II MDMD 504 A multiple choice examination paper will
be answered. The paper will cover all aspects of the Internal
Medicine including all the sub specialities.
Paper III (MDMD505) Clinical Slides and Data Interpretation
Slides. This paper comprises the interpretation of laboratory
results, X-rays and ECGs and the recognition of clinical
abnormality as displayed in the slides that will be projected.
(MDMD580)
Including long and short cases, lasting approximately one and
half hours.
(MDMD590)
A 30 minute oral examination will be held and will cover
aspects of Internal Medicine with special reference to recent
advances. The examination will test the candidate's
knowledge of the most recent developments in Internal
191
Medicine and hence requires the candidate to keep up with

scientific journal articles.
(MDMD570)
There shall be a discussion on the content of the dissertation
submitted under paragraph 5.2.
(MDMD551)
Paper I
out of
75
Paper II
out of
75
out of
50
TOTAL
200
Course Assignments
out of
150
Case Studies Paper I
out of
100
Multiple Choice Paper II
out of
100
Clinical Studies Paper III
out of
50
out of
150
Oral Examination
out of
50
Total
600
Dissertation
out of
100
FINAL TOTAL
700
5.6 For a candidate to pass the programme, he/she must obtain
an overall pass mark and also in both the clinical examination
192
6.

Regulations.
(MDMD503B505
(MDMD580)
6.3.3 Dissertation
(MDMD570)
6.3.4 Any candidate who fails any two of these components shall be
6.3.5 Candidates offered a supplementary examination shall be

required to appear in all components of the Part III
examination, i.e. written papers, clinical examinations and
the oral examination.
7.

8.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of each year of the Part II programme annual assessments
based on theoretical and practical performance during that year and
expressed as a percentage mark, will besubmitted by the
Department of Medicine to the College of Health Sciences for
onward transmission to Academic Committee. A mark of 50% or
more must be obtained in each assessment before a student is
allowed to proceed to the next year of the programme.
Medicine an annual list of at least fifty cases in which they have
participated as principal physician, assistant or teacher

MEDICINE (NEUROLOGICAL SURGERY) (MNSG)
1.

1.1 Applicants must have obtained the MBChB degrees of this or
appropriately registered with the Health Professions Council of
Zimbabwe.
1.3 Candidates should have gained at least one year's post registration
2.

each January shall be five years part-time.
2.2 Throughout the programme, candidates will normally be employed
in the appropriate posts within the relevant departments or
hospitals approved by the Higher Degrees by Coursework
Committee of the College of Health Sciences for the purposes of the
degree.
2.3 Exemptions
2.3.1 Candidates who have already completed an appropriate
course and examination equivalent to Part I of this course
may apply for exemption from this part of the course and
examination.
2.3.2 Candidates who hold an MMED (Surgery) or equivalent may
apply for exemption from relevant parts of the general
surgical rotation up to a maximum of one year.
3.

the first year of the programme, Part II in the succeeding four years.
3.1 Part I of the programme shall consist of studies in Applied Basic
Sciences as follows:
3.1.1 Anatomy of the Central Nervous System
3.1.2 Physiology
3.1.3 Pathology
3.1.4 There will be a combined Masters in Medicine Basic Science
Core Course covering areas of Anatomy, Physiological Chemistry, Pathology, Clinical Pharmacology, Statistics and
Epidemiology.
3.1.5 There will be additional tutorials in the above subjects
specific to surgery and Neurological surgery.
3.1.6 Students will be encouraged to demonstrate in
Anatomy/Neuroanatomy, Physiology/Neurophysiology.
3.2 During Part I and II of the programme, candidates will rotate through
posts as in paragraph 2.2 in the following areas:3.2.1 General Surgery
3.2.2 Orthopaedics
3.2.4 Maxillofacial Surgery
3.2.6 The various disciplines of neurological Surgery.
3.3 During Part II of the programme there shall be an exposure to
clinical and operative neurosurgery.
3.3.1 Applied Surgical Anatomy of the central nervous system.

3.3.3 Clinical and operation art of the various aspects of
neurological surgery and principles of general surgery.
submit three course assignments of between 3000 and 5000 words
on subjects approved by the Board of the Department of Surgery.
Each course assignment shall be equally weighted and these shall be
evenly spread throughout Part II of the programme (one during
each years 2,3,4, and 5 of the programme). These course
assignments shall constitute part of the second assignments (60%,
examinations 40%) and together will comprise 25% of the marks of
the full programme.
submit research work of between 10000-15000 words as a
the Fifth year (Final year) of the programme.
4.
MARKING SCHEME AND CLASSIFICATION (REF GAR 6)

=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.

5.1 Continuous Assessment shall be examined by course assignments
and annual examinations (see paragraph 3.4).
3.5). This shall be presented to the Institute of
Continuing Health Education not later than 30 June of the fifth year
of the programme.
193
194

Paper I (CBSC501)
3.1, above.
Paper II (MNSG502)
3.1.
5.3.2 Oral Examination (MNSG591)
5.4 The Part II examination shall be held in November of the fifth year
and will consist of:5.4.1 Written Papers
5.4.1.1 Paper I (MNSG503) shall be of two hours duration
and shall consist of 75 multiple choice questions.
5.4.1.2 Paper II (MNSG504) shall be of two hours duration
and shall consist of 10 short answer questions of
which 8 shall be answered.
5.4.1.3 Paper III (MNSG505) shall be an essay paper of
three hours duration where candidates shall be
expected to answer three questions.
Written papers shall test principles in theory of
operative neurological surgery, neurological
theory and the basic sciences and their application.
5.4.2 Clinical Examination (MNSG580)
The examination shall be of approximately two hours
duration.
5.4.3 Oral Examination (MNSG592)
duration.
5.4.4 Continuous Assessment (MNSG550)
5.5 Distribution of marks
Paper I
out of
75
Paper II
out of
75
Oral Examination
out of
50
out of
50
Sub Total
250
out of
100
Written Papers
out of
100
out of
150
Oral Examination
out of
50
Sub Total
400
Dissertation (MNSG570)
out of
100
FINAL TOTAL
500
5.6 Candidates shall be required to pass the Clinical Examinations and
the dissertation.
6.

Regulations.
6.3.1 Written Papers (MNSG503-505)
6.3.2 Clinical Examination and Oral Examination MNSG580 and
MNSG592)
6.3.3 Dissertation
(MNSG570)
Any candidate who fails any two of these components shall be
7.
RE-PRESENTATION OF DISSERTATION (REF 10.6)

such cases re-presentation shall be required within six months of the
8.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of the second, third and fourth years of the programme
annual assessments based on theoretical (Paragraph 3.4) and
practical performance during each year and expressed as a
percentage mark, will be submitted by the Department of Surgery to
the College of Health Sciences for onward transmission to the
8.2 Candidates shall be required to keep a prescribed log book.

MEDICINE (OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY)
(MOG)
1.
2.

hospital.
2.2. Throughout the programme, candidates shall normally be
approved by the Higher Degrees Coursework Committee of the
College of Health Sciences for the purposes of the degree.
2.3 Exemptions
2.3.1 Candidates who have already completed an appropriate Part I
examination of another professional college/university that
is recognised by the University of Zimbabwe may apply for
exemption from the Part I examination.
nature and duration may apply for exemption from Part I of
the programme and up to one year of Part II of the
programme.
3.

The programme shall be divided into parts. Part I shall take place in the
first year of the programme, and Part II in the succeeding three years.
areas:3.1.1
Anatomy
3.1.2
Biochemistry
3.1.3
Cell Biology and Genetics
3.1.4
Elementary Statistics and Epidemiology
3.1.5
Embryology
3.1.6
Endocrinology
3.1.7
The Foetus
3.1.8
Immunology
3.1.9
Microbiology
3.1.10
Pathology
3.1.11
Pharmacology
3.1.12 Physiology
3.1.13 There shall be a combined Masters in Medicine. Basic
Science Core Courses covering areas of Anatomy,
Physiological Chemistry, Physiology, Clinical
Pharmacology, Pathology, Statistics and Epidemiology.
3.1.14
Coursework shall be assessed continuously on the basis of
monthly tests in the Combined Basic Course (12.5% of the
total marks) and Clinical Assessment (12.5% of the total
marks). (MOG550)
3.2 Part II of the programme shall consist of studies in the following
areas:3.2.1 Obstetrics
3.2.2 Gynaecology
3.2.3 Child Spacing
3.2.5 Reproductive Research Methodology and Epidemiology
3.2.6 Ethics of Obstetrics and Gynaecology
submit a case book consisting of 10 obstetric and 10 gynaecology
long cases. These course assignments should be submitted by the
30th June of the fourth year of the programme and shall comprise
30% of the total continuous assessment.
Obstetrics and Gynaecology.
This dissertation shall be submitted to the Department of Institute
of Continuing Health Education in final form by the 30th of June of
the Fourth year (Final Year) of the programme.
195
5.4.3 Oral Examination (MOG582)

There shall be an oral examination of approximately one
hour's duration.
Paper I
out of
75
Paper II
out of
75
out of
50
Total
200
Course Assignments
(MOG552)
out of
100
Written Papers
out of
100
out of
150
Oral Examination
out of
50
Total
400
Dissertation
out of
100
FINAL TOTAL
500
196
4.

classification.
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.

paragraph 3.15.
3.4) which shall be presented by the end of June of the third year of
the programme.
of the programme and shall consist of :5.3.1 Written Papers
Paper I (CBSC501)
questions covering the areas described under 3.1.14 'Basic
5.3.2 Paper II (MOG502)
choice questions and a short essay answer section.
Paper I (Obstetrics) (MOG503) shall be of three hours
duration.
Paper II (Gynaecology) (MOG504) shall be of three hours
duration with three compulsory questions.
Paper III (Multiple Choice Questions) (MOG505) shall be of
two hours duration and comprise 75 multiple choice
questions.
Of the total marks available for written papers, 25% shall be
allotted to each of Papers I and II and 50% to Paper III.
5.4.2 Clinical Examination (MOG582)
There shall be two clinical examinations, each of
approximately one hour's duration in Obstetrics and in
Gynaecology. Of the total marks available for the clinical
examination, each examination shall be allotted 50%.
5.5.3 Candidates will be required to pass both Clinical examinations

in Obstetrics and Gynaecology separately.
6.

Regulations.
(MOG503, MOG505);
6.3.2 Clinical Examinations (MOG581 and MOG582);
6.3.3 Dissertation
(MOG570)
6.3.4 Any candidate who fails any two of these components shall be
oral examination.
7.

8.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of each year at Part II of the programme annual
assessment based on theoretical and practical performance during
that year and expressed as a percentage mark will be submitted by
the Department of Obstetrics and Gynaecology to the College of
Health Sciences Higher Degrees Committee. A mark of 50% or more
must be obtained in each assessment before a student is allowed to
Obstetrics and Gynaecology an annual list of at least fifty cases in
which they have participated as principal obstetrician or
gynaecologist, first assistant or teacher countersigned by the
supervisor during that period.

MEDICINE (PAEDIATRICS) (MPD)
1.

1.2 Applicants must have completed a suitable supervised internship
one year's postgraduate experience within a Provincial, General or
District hospital.
2.


approved by the Higher Degrees Coursework Committee of the
2.3 Exemptions
programme.
3.

3.1 Part I of the programme shall consist of clinical application studies
in the following areas:3.1.1 Community Paediatrics
3.1.2 Nutrition and growth
3.1.3 Central nervous system and neuromuscular system
3.1.4 Development
3.1.5 Therapeutics and poisoning
3.1.6 Infectious diseases. Allergy and Immunity
3.1.7 Perinatology
3.1.8 Metabolic diseases and endocrinology
3.1.9 Haematology and oncology
3.1.10 Genitourinary system
3.1.11 Fluids and electrolytes/Acid-base regulation
3.1.12 Respiratory diseases
3.1.13 Cardiovascular system
3.1.14 Gastrointestinal tract and hepatic/biliary system
3.1.15 Skeletal system, connective tissue and rheumatic
disorders
3.1.16 Basic Science Core Course
There will be a combined Masters in Medicine Basic Science
Chemistry, Physiology and Statistics and Epidemiology.
monthly tests in the Combined Basic Science course
(12.5% of the total marks) and Clinical Assessment (12.5%
of the total marks) (MPD550).
through posts as in paragraph 2.2 specifically in the following
areas:-
197
3.2.1 Clinical Paediatrics and Child Care

3.2.2 Community Paediatrics
submit two written assignments of between 3000 and 5000 words.
These coursework assignments shall constitute the coursework
component of the programme and shall comprise 20% of the final
mark at Part II.
Paediatrics and Child Health. This dissertation shall be submitted to
the Institute of Continuing Health education in the final form by the
4.

=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.

Paragraph 3.1.17 and 3.3. above.
5.2 Research work shall be examined by dissertation in Paragraph 3.4
above which shall be presented by the end of June of the fourth year
of the programme.
of the programme and shall consist of:5.3.1 Written Papers
Paper II
(MPD502)
There shall be three hour paper consisting of multiple choice
questions or short answer questions.
Paper I General Paediatrics (MPD503)
This shall consist of short essay questions to be answered in
three hours. Candidates will be required to answer all
questions.
198
Paper II General Paediatrics

(MPD504)
This shall consist of essay questions to be answered in three
hours. Candidates will be required to answer all questions.
Paper III Community Paediatrics
(MPD505)
This shall consist of essay questions to be answered in three
hours. Candidates will be required to answer all questions.
5.4.2 Clinical Examinations
(MPD580)
This shall be approximately of two hours' duration.
(MPD592)
(MPD570)
Defence of the dissertation may be required.
(MPD551)
described in paragraph 3.3
Paper I
out of
75
Paper II
out of
150
out of
75
Total
300
Written Paper
out of
100
out of
150
Oral Examination
out of
50
Dissertation
out of
100
out of
100
TOTAL
500
5.5.3 Candidates will be required to pass the Clinical examination.
6.
failures shall be in accordance with General Academic Regulations.
6.3 In determining the offer of supplementary examinations of Part II
(MPD503-MPD5050)
6.3.2 Clinical and Oral Examinations
(MPD580 and MPD592)
6.3.3 Dissertation
(MPD570)
6.3.4 A candidate who is offered supplementary examinations shall

be required to supplement in all components of the
examination: i.e. written papers, clinical examination and oral
examination.
7.

8.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of each year of the Part II of the programme annual
assessments based on theoretical and practical performance during
that year and expressed as a percentage mark, will be submitted by
the Department of Paediatrics and Child Health to the College of
Health Sciences for onward transmission to Academic Committee. A
mark of 50% or more must be obtained in each assessment before a
student is allowed to proceed to the next year of the programme.
Paediatrics and Child Health an annual list of at least fifty cases in
which they have participated as principal paediatrician, first
assistant or teacher countersigned by the supervisor during that
period.

MEDICINE (PSYCHIATRY) (MPZ)
Regulations for masters Degree by Coursework') (GAR)
1.

one year's postgraduate experience in a Provincial, General or
District Hospital.
1.5 Applicants must have obtained a Diploma in Mental Health from the
University of Zimbabwe or an equivalent qualification from other
postgraduate institutions recognised by the University of
Zimbabwe.
2.

each January, shall be three years part-time. Throughout the
programme, candidates shall normally be employed in the
appropriate posts in the departments or hospitals approved by the
University of Zimbabwe for the purpose of the degree.
2.2 Exemptions
appropriate Part I examination may apply for exemption
from the Part I course and examination.
programme.
3.

the first year of the programme, and Part II in the succeeding two years.
areas:3.1.1
Basic and Applied Neurosciences
3.1.2
Introduction to Psychology
3.2 Part II of the programme shall consist of studies in the following
areas:3.2.1
Clinical Psychiatry
3.2.2
Clinical Neurology
3.2.3
Child Psychiatry
3.2.4
Forensic Psychiatry
3.2.5
Community Psychiatry
3.3 During Part I and Part II of the programe, the candidates shall be
required to submit four course assignments in each part of between
3000 and 5000 words on subjects approved by the Department of
Psychiatry. Each course assignment shall be equally weighted.
These course assignments shall constitute the coursework
component of the programme and shall comprise 25% of the full
programme.
submit research work of between 10000 and 15000 words on a
subject which has been approved by the Board of the Department of
Psychiatry. This dissertation shall be submitted to the Institute of
the third year of the programme.
199
3.5 The candidate who has not submitted the dissertation stipulated in
paragraph 3.4 above, by due date shall not be permitted to appear in
the final (Part II) examinations.
200
4.

80%+
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.

5.1 Coursework (MPZ550) shall be examined by course assignments
(see Paragraph 3.3).
which shall be presented by the end of June of the fourth year of the
programme.
5.3 The Part I examination will be held in the following November of the
first year of the programme and shall consist of:5.3.1 Written Papers
Paper I (MPZ507)
There shall be a three hour paper covering areas described
under paragraph 3.1.1 (Basic and Applied Neurosciences)
made up of two parts. Part I shall consist of 30 multiple
choice questions. Part II shall consist of three long essays of
which two shall be answered.
Paper II (MPZ508)
There shall be a three hour paper covering areas described
under paragraph 3.1.2 (Introduction to Psychology) which
shall consist of five long essays, of which two shall be
answered.
Both these papers shall be set by the Department of
Psychiatry and each paper shall be equally weighted.
(MPZ590)
There shall be two oral examinations, in Basic and Applied
Neuro-Sciences (MPZ591) and in Psychology (MPZ592) of
approximately 30 minutes duration. Each oral examination
shall be allotted 50% of the total marks for oral examinations.
5.4 The Part II examination shall be held in the November of the third
year and shall consist of:5.4.1 Written Papers
Paper I: Clinical Psychiatry (MPZ509) shall be of three hours
duration consisting of six long essay questions two of which
shall be compulsory. Candidates shall be required to answer
four questions only.
Paper II: Clinical Neurology (MPZ510) shall be of three hours

duration consisting of six long essay questions of which four
questions shall be answered.
Paper III: Child Forensic and Community Psychiatry (MPZ511)
shall be of three hours duration and shall consist of three
sections (Child, Forensic and Community Psychiatry).
Candidates will be required to answer at least one question
from each section. Four questions shall be answered.
Each paper shall be equally weighted.
5.4.2 Clinical Examination (MPZ580)
There shall be a clinical examination of approximately two
hours.
(MPZ593)
This examination shall be of approximately 30 minutes
duration.
5.4.4 Defence of dissertation (MPZ570)
There shall be a discussion of approximately 30 minutes
duration on the content of the dissertation submitted under
paragraph 5.2.
(MPZ551)
There shall be a continuous assessment at the end of each
year of the programme inclusive as described in paragraph
3.3.
Written Papers
out of
200
Oral Examinations
out of
100
Course Assignments out of
100
TOTAL
400
Course Assignments out of
200
Written Papers
out of
300
out of
300
Oral Examination
out of
100
Dissertation (MPZ570) out of
100
TOTAL
1000
overall pass mark and also pass in both the clinical examination as
well as the dissertation.
6.

General Academic Regulations except that the supplementary
7.
8.
examinations will be held in the following May.

6.2 Determination of the offer of supplementary examination for Part I
failures shall be in accordance with General Academic Regulations
except that every candidate offered supplementary examinations
shall be required to supplement in all Parts of the examination (i.e.
written papers and oral examination).
6.3.1 Written Papers (MPZ509B511)
6.3.2 Clinical Examination (MPZ593)
6.3.3 Dissertation (MPZ570)
6.3.4 A candidate who fails any two of these components may not
be offered a supplementary examination.
examination i.e. written papers, clinical examination, and
oral examination.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of the year of Part I and at the end of each year of Part II of
the programme, annual assessments based on theoretical and
practical performance during the year and expressed as a
percentage mark will be submitted by the Department of Psychiatry
to the College of Health Sciences Higher Degrees by Coursework
Committee for onward transmission to Academic Committee. A
mark of 50% or more must be obtained in the annual assessment
before a student is allowed to proceed to the next year of the
programme.
8.2 Candidates will be required to submit to the Department of
Psychiatry written assignments described in paragraph 3.3 above,
evenly distributed throughout the years of the programme.

MEDICINE (RADIOTHERAPY AND ONCOLOGY
(MRO)
1.

District hospital.
2.

employed in the departments of Radiotherapy and Oncology or in
other hospital departments approved by the Higher Degrees by
Coursework committee of the College of Health Sciences.
2.3 Exemptions
of the Part I of the programme and up to one year of Part II of
the programme. Such candidates must however pass the Part
I examinations.
3.

the first fifteen months of the programme, and Part II in the succeeding
three years of the programme.
201
3.1 Part I
Part of the programme shall consist of studies in the following areas:
3.1.1 Physics
3.1.2 Medical Statistics and Cancer Epidemiology
3.1.3 Pathology
3.1.4 Radiobiology and Principles of chemotherapy
3.2 Part II
areas:3.2.1 Radiation Oncology
3.2.2 Medical Oncology
3.2.3 Cancer Epidemiology, Prevention and Screening
3.2.4 Palliative and Supportive Care
3.2.5 Experimental Cancer Therapy
3.3 During Part I and Part II of the programme, the candidates shall be
required to submit a casebook containing the records of 20 cases
managed by the candidate and approved for this purpose by the
Department of Radiology. These should be well-documented and
give full details of the presentation, investigation and management
of each case. The cases should be chosen so as to cover a broad
range of oncological problems. This casebook shall comprise part of
the coursework component of the programme.
submit research work. This dissertation shall be submitted to the
Institute of Continuing Health Education in the final form by the
final Part II examinations.
202
4.

=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.

Paragraph 3.3).
3.4) which shall be presented by the end of June of the fourth year of
the programme.
5.3 The Part I examination will be held in the March of the second year
Paper I (MRO501)
There shall be a paper to cover the areas described in
paragraph 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 in a paper of three hours duration
consisting of six essays/brief notes, of which four shall be
answered. Of the questions answered, three shall be on
Physics and one on Medical Statistics and Cancer
Epidemiology.
Paper II (MRO502)
There shall be a paper to cover the areas described in
paragraphs 3.1.3 and 3.1.4 of three hours duration consisting
of six essay/brief notes, of which four shall be answered. Of
the questions answered, two shall be on Pathology and two
on Radiobiology.
Paper III (MRO503)
There shall be a paper of two and half hours duration
consisting of 60 multiple choice questions, covering all
aspects of the Part I programme.
5.3.2 Oral Examination (MRO591)
year of the programme and will consist of :5.4.1 Written Papers
Paper I MRO504
Each paper shall be 3 hours duration and consist of 4
compulsory questions. Paper I shall include one question on
Cancer Epidemiology, Prevention and Screening.
Paper II MRO505
There shall be a paper of three hours duration and shall
consist of 4 compulsory questions. This paper shall include
one question on Palliative and Supportive Care.
Paper III (MRO506) shall be of two and half hours duration
and comprise of 60 multiple choice questions.
Apart from the designated questions, Papers I, II and III shall
cover all aspects of the Part II programme.
(MRO580)
There shall be a clinical examination consisting of long and
short cases lasting approximately one and half hours.
(MRO592)
There shall be an oral examination of thirty minutes duration
which may include any aspect of the Part II programme.
5.4.4 Practical Radiation Treatment Planning Examination
(MRO581).
This examination shall last approximately one hour.

5.4.5 Defence of Dissertation (MRO570)
There shall be a discussion of approximately one hour
paragraph 5.2.
(MRO550)
years two, three, and four or the programme inclusive as
described in paragraph 3.3.
Paper I
out of
100
Paper II
out of
100
Paper III
out of
100
Sub Total
300
Oral Examinations
out of
100
out of
100
FINAL TOTAL
500
5.5.2.
Part II Examination
Written Papers:
Paper I
out of
50
Paper II
out of
50
out of
100
Paper III
out of
50
Sub Total
250
out of
100
Oral Examination
out of
50
Practical Examination
out of
50
Dissertation
out of
50
FINAL TOTAL
500
5.5.3 Candidates will be required to pass the Clinical examination.
6.

6.1 Supplementary examination will be held in accordance with the
6.2 Determination of the offer of the supplementary examinations for
Part I failures shall be in accordance with General Academic
Regulations.
(MRO504-506)
6.3.2 Clinical, Practical and Oral Examinations (MRO580,581 and

592)
6.3.3 Dissertation
(MRO570)
6.3.4 Candidates who fail any two of these components shall be
shall be required to supplement all components of the Part II
examination i.e. written papers, clinical practical and oral
examinations.
7.

8.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of each year of the programme annual assessments based
on theoretical and practical performance during that year and
expressed as a percentage mark, will be submitted by the
Department of Radiology to the College of Health Sciences Higher
Degrees by Coursework Committee for onward transmission to
8.2 Candidates shall be required to present the cases described in
paragraph 3.3 above evenly distributed throughout the years of the
programme.

MEDICINE (SURGERY) (MSG)
1.

District hospital.
203
3.2 During Part II of the programme, candidates will spend an

appropriate time in posts in general surgery and relevant disciplines
of surgery, as in paragraph 2.2.
3.2.1 There shall be exposure to principles of surgery, surgical
pathology and the art of general surgery.
3.2.2 Each candidate shall be required to submit an annual course
assignment of between 3000 and 5000 words on subjects
approved by the Department of Surgery in each year during
years two to four inclusive. Coursework assignments shall be
equally weighted. These course assignments shall constitute
the course-work component of the marks at Part II and thus
20% of the total marks at Part II.
through posts as in paragraph 2.1 in the following areas:
3.3.1 Anaesthetics
3.3.2 General Surgery
3.3.3 Casualty
3.3.4 Urology
3.3.5 Gynaecology
3.3.7 Neuro Surgery
3.3.8 Orthopaedic Surgery
3.3.9 Elective Period
3.3.10 Peripheral Hospital Attachment
3.3.11 ENT (Ear, Nose and Throat)
3.4 During Part II of the programme, candidates shall be required to
Continuing Health Education in final form by the 30th of June of the
fourth year (Final year) of the programme.
3.5 Any candidate who fails to submit the dissertation in paragraph 3.4
above by the due date shall not be permitted to appear in the Final
(Part II) examination.

204
2.

approved by the Higher Degrees by Coursework Committee of the
2.3 Exemptions
programme.
2.3.3. Decisions on applications for such exemptions shall be
3.

areas:3.1.1 Anatomy
3.1.2 Physiology
3.1.3 Pathology
3.1.5 There will be additional lectures/tutorials in the above
subjects specific to surgery in general.
3.1.6 Students will be required to demonstrate in Anatomy and
Physiology.
total marks). (MSG551)
4.

4.2 The marking scheme shall be :80%+
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.

5.1 Coursework shall be examined by coursework assignments as in
paragraph 3.1.7 and 3.2.2 above. (MSG550)
5.2 Research work shall be examined by dissertation (MSG570) (see

paragraph 3.4) which shall be presented by the end of June of the
fourth year of the programme.
Paper I (CBSC501)
questions covering areas described under para. 3.1.4 'Basic
5.3.2 Paper II (MSG502)
choice questions on the remainder of the programme
described in paragraph 3.1.
5.3.3 Oral Examination (MSG591)
year and shall consist of:5.4.1 Paper I (MSG503)
There shall be a paper of two hours duration and shall consist
of 75 multiple choice questions.
Paper II (MSG504)
There shall be a paper of three hours duration and shall
consist of 10 short answer questions of which 8 shall be
answered.
Paper III (MSG505)
There shall be an essay paper of three hours duration where
candidates shall be expected to answer three questions.
Written papers test principles of the theory, Surgery,
Operative Surgery, Basic Sciences and their application to
surgery.
5.4.2 Clinical Examinations (MSG5580)
The examination shall be of approximately 60 minutes
duration.
5.4.3 Oral Examination (MSG592)
This examination shall be of approximately 30 minutes
duration.
5.4.4 Defence of Dissertation (MSG570)
duration of the content of dissertation submitted under
paragraph 5.2.
5.4.5 Continuous Assessment (MSG550)
described in Paragraph 3.2.2.

Paper I
out of 75
Paper II
out of 75
Continuous Assessment out of 75
Oral Examination
out of 75
TOTAL
300
Course Assignment
out of 100
Written Papers
out of 100
out of 150
Oral Examination
out of
50
Dissertation
out of 100
TOTAL
500
overall pass mark and a pass in both the clinical examination as well
as the dissertation.
6.
failures shall be in accordance with General Academic Regulations.
7.

8.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of the first and second years of Part III of the programme
annual assessments based on theoretical and practical performance
during that year and expressed as a percentage mark, will be
submitted by the Department of Surgery to the College of Health
Sciences Higher Degrees by Coursework Committee for onward
transmission to Academic Committee. A mark of 50% or more must
be obtained in each assessment before a student is allowed to
8.2 Candidates shall be required to submit to the Department of Surgery
an annual list of cases described in para. 3.2 in which they have
participated as surgeon, first surgical assistant or teacher
205

MEDICINE (UROLOGICAL SURGERY) (MUG)
1.
2.
206
3.

1.1 An applicant must have obtained the MBChB Degrees of this
university or an equivalent degree of another university of approved
standard.
1.2 An applicant must have completed a suitably supervised internship
District hospital.
1.4 All applications must be submitted on the official forms provided
through the Institute of Continuing Health Education of the College
of Health Sciences.
DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME (REF GAR4)
2.1 The duration of the programme, which normally commences each
January, shall be five years part-time.
2.2 Throughout the programme, candidates will normally be employed
in the appropriate posts within the relevant departments or
hospitals approved by Senate.
2.3 Exemptions
appropriate course and examination equivalent to Part I of
this course may apply for exemption from this part of the
course and examination.
2.3.2 Candidates who hold an MMed (Surgery) or equivalent may
apply for exemption from relevant parts of Part of the
programme.
STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME (REF GAR 5)
the first year of the programme. Part II will take place in the succeeding
four years of the programme.
3.1 Part I of the programme shall consist of clinical application of studies
in the following areas:
3.1.1 Anatomy
3.1.2 Physiology
3.1.3 Pathology
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

3.1.5 There will be additional lectures/tutorials in the above
subjects specific to surgery.
3.1.6 Students will be required to demonstrate in Anatomy and
Physiology.
total marks) (MUG550)
During Part II of the programme, candidates will spend an
appropriate time in posts in general surgery and relevant disciplines
of urological surgery as in paragraph 2.2.
3.2.1 There shall be exposure to principles of surgery, surgical
pathology and the art of general and urological surgery
3.2.2 Each candidate shall be required to submit an annual course
assignment of between 3000 and 5000 words on subjects
approved by the Department of Surgery in each year during
years two to four inclusive. Only one of these shall be in
general surgery.
These Course assignments shall be equally weighted. Course
assignments shall constitute the coursework component of
marks at Part II examination and thus 20% of the total marks
at the Final Examination (MUG551).
During Part I and Part II of the programme, candidates will rotate
through posts as in paragraph 2.2 specifically in the following areas:
3.3.1 General Surgery
3.3.2 Casualty
3.3.3 Vascular surgery
3.3.4 Plastic surgery
3.3.5 Gynaecological-urological surgery
3.3.6 The various disciplines of urological surgery
the fifth year (Final Year) of the programme.
4.

80%+
=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50%
=
Fail
5.

5.1 Coursework shall be examined by assignment as in paragraphs 3.1.7
and 3.2.2 above.
3.4) which shall be presented by the 30th of June of the fifth year of
the programme to the Institute of Continuing Health Education.
Paper I
(CBSC501)
There shall be a three-hour paper of multiple choice
questions covering areas described under 3.1.1 to 3.1.4 (Basic
Science Core Course)
Paper II
(MUG502)
There shall be a three-hour paper of multiple choice
3.1.5.
5.3.2 Oral Examination (MUG591)
5.4 The Part II examination shall be held in November of the fifth year of
the programme and will consist of:
Paper I (MUG503) shall be of three hours duration and shall
consist of multiple choice questions.
Paper II (MUG504) shall be of three hours duration and shall
consist of short answer questions.
Paper III (MUG505) shall be an essay paper of three hours
duration.
Written papers shall test principles in the theory of Urological
Surgery, Operative Urological Surgery, the application of
basic sciences and Surgery in General to Urological Surgery
and research skills.
5.4.2 Clinical Examination (MUG 592)
There shall be a clinical examination of 2 hours.

(MUG592)
duration.
5.4.4 Defence of Dissertation (MUG570)
paragraph 5.2.
5.4.5 Continuous Assessment (MUG551)
5.5.1 Part I
Paper I
out of 75
Paper I
out of 75
Paper II
out of 75
Oral Examination
out of 75
TOTAL
300
Written Papers
out of 100
out of 150
Oral Examination
out of 50
Dissertation
out of 100
TOTAL
500
5.6 A candidate must pass clinical examination as well as the
dissertation
6.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATION (REF GAR 10.5)

Regulations.
6.3.1 Written Papers (MUG503B505)
6.3.2 Clinical and Oral Examinations (MUG580 and MUG592)
6.3.3 Dissertation (MUG570)
6.3.4 Candidates who fail any two of these components shall be
207

shall be required to supplement all components of the Part II
examination: i.e. written papers, clinical and oral
examinations.
7.

Re-presentation of dissertation may be permitted by Senate. In such
cases re-presentation shall be required within six months of the decision
of Senate to permit re-presentation.
8.
ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
8.1 At the end of the Part II of the programme annual assessment based
on theoretical and practical performance during that year and
expressed as a percentage mark will be submitted by the
Department of Surgery to the College of Health Sciences Higher
Degrees by Coursework Committee for onward transmission to
8.2 Candidates shall be required to submit to the Department of Surgery
an annual list of cases described in paragraph 3.2 which they have
participated as surgeon, first surgical assistant or teacher
countersigned by the Clinical Consultant supervisor during that
period.
8.3 Candidates shall keep a log book in which :
(a)
competence at surgical procedures;
(b)
participation as first assistant, principal surgeon or teacher
shall be indicated by signature of the appropriate clinical
consultant.
208
REGULATIONS FOR THE DOCTOR OF MEDICINE

DEGREE (MD)
(EFFECTIVE FROM 1999)
1.
PREAMBLE
1.1 These Regulations shall apply to the Doctor of Medicine Degree
(MD) of the University of Zimbabwe.
1.2 Senate shall be the final authority for the interpretation of these
regulations.
1.3 Senate has authority to exempt any student from any of these
regulations.
1.4 A candidate who has been registered under these regulations shall
not be affected by regulations subsequently adopted unless agreed
in writing by the student.
2.
ELIGIBILITY
To be eligible to apply to make formal submission for the MD degree, an
applicant must be a graduate of this or another approved university in
the fifth or any subsequent year after his obtaining the MBChB degrees of
this university (or approved equivalent) which are recognised for
registration by the Medical and Dental Practitioners Council of
Zimbabwe.
3.
APPLICATION
3.1 Application for permission to make formal submission for the MD
degree must be made on the appropriate form issued through the
3.2 Applications should be submitted at least twelve months before the
intended date of submission of the thesis.
3.3 An applicant must submit with his/her application form verified
copies of his/her qualifications and evidence of postgraduate
research and experience. He/She must also submit with the
application a detailed protocol of about 15 000 words and including
the rationale, objective, design and specific hypothesis; the
methodology, sample size and preliminary results of the proposed
thesis, if available.
3.4 Applicants should nominate the department to supervise their
thesis. The appropriate departmental board will recommend the
supervisor/s for consideration by Senate. Where necessary an
external assessor may be appointed by the departmental board if
they do not have the expertise in the department to obtain an
opinion on the merits of the proposal before it is passed on to the
Faculty Higher Degrees Committee for their recommendation on
whether the application should be accepted.
The departmental board should report to the Faculty Higher
Degrees (Research) Committee within three months of receipt of a
viable application.
3.5 Each student is required to prepare their thesis under the direction
of a supervisor who shall be a member of the academic staff of the
University in the appropriate discipline. Normally, one or more
associate supervisors, either from within or outside the University
will be appointed. If the major part of a student's research
programmes is being conducted at an institution outside the
University, an associate supervisor at the institution shall, where
possible, be appointed.
3.6 The Deputy Registrar (Academic) will communicate the decision of
Senate to the applicant. A successful applicant may then proceed to
register for the MD degree and prepare for the examination.
4.
REGISTRATION
Formal registration shall be in accordance with the arrangements made
through the Deputy Registrar (Academic) and shall include completion
and submission of the appropriate examination entry form and payment
of the prescribed fees.
5.
PROGRAMME OF STUDY
5.1 The appointment of all supervisors shall be made by Senate on the
recommendations of the appropriate College of Health Sciences
5.2 The supervisors shall report on each student's progress at least twice
a year to the Faculty Higher Degrees (Research) Committee.
5.3 Students must maintain regular contact with the supervising
department and may be required to attend for certain periods at the
University as directed by their approved supervisor(s).
6.
7.
SUBMISSION OF THESIS
6.1 The thesis must be a substantial contribution to medical knowledge
and must contain original work worthy of publication. Published
work may be submitted in support of the thesis but the thesis must
not have previously been presented for any other degree. The thesis
must be accompanied by a letter from the supervisor indicating that
the thesis is of sufficient merit to warrant examination.
6.2 Work which has been completed in conjunction with others may be
accepted as part of the thesis provided that the contribution by the
candidate is proven and the extent to the contribution by the coauthor(s) is indicated and acknowledged.
6.3 Four copies of the thesis and published work in support of the thesis
shall be submitted, in loose-bound form, to the Deputy Registrar
(Academic).
6.4 The thesis shall be submitted in the following format:
Size of paper international A4 (210mm x 297mm). No restriction is
placed on the size of drawings or maps. There must be a margin of
40mm on the left-hand side of the page to allow for binding, a
margin of 10mm on the right-hand side, and margins of 20mm at
the top and at the bottom of the page.
Where there is a substantial computing in the thesis, a machinereadable copy of the source Programme shall be submitted together
with the copies of the thesis.
7.1 Each candidate shall be assessed principally on the merits of his/her
thesis. Exclusion from any formal examination shall require the
7.2 Initial assessment of the loose-bound copies shall be made by one

External Examiner and two Internal Examiners. The appointment of
both the Internal Examiners and the External examiners shall be
made by Senate on the recommendation of the Chairman of the
Department concerned through the appropriate Faculty Higher
Degrees Committee.
7.3 Each External Examiner will be required to submit a formal written
recommendation within three months of receipt of the thesis.
7.4 On receipt of the report from the External Examiner, the Deputy
Registrar (Academic) shall refer it to the Chairman of the
Department concerned through the Dean of the Faculty for
consideration by the Internal Examiners.
8
EXAMINATIONS AND DETERMINATION OF CANDIDATE'S RESULTS

8.1 The Board of Examiners for the degree of MD, consists of the
following:
The Dean or Deputy Dean of the College of Health Sciences
The Chairman of the College of Health Sciences Higher Degrees
Committee.
The Chairman of the Department concerned, the supervisor(s) for
the thesis, the examiners appointed in terms of Section 7.2.
Where appropriate, as determined by the Dean after consultation
with the Chairman of the Department concerned, other suitably
qualified members of the academic staff may also be assigned as
members of the Board of Examiners. The External Examiner shall be
a member of the Board of Examiners but shall attend only if deemed
essential by the Board. Normally, the External Examiner will not be
required to attend the meeting of the Board of Examiners.
8.2 After the Board of Examiners has considered the reports of the
Examiners appointed in terms of section 7.2, it may recommend to
Senate that the candidate be failed.
8.3 The Board of Examiners shall normally examine the candidate orally.
The Board of Examiners may require further examination through
written papers, or practical examination, or both on the Subject of
the thesis and, if they see fit, on Subject relevant thereto.
8.4 If the Board of Examiners is satisfied that the candidate should pass
the examination and be awarded the degree, it shall so recommend
to Senate.
8.5 If the thesis is adequate, but the candidate fails to satisfy the
Examiners at the oral examination, the Board of Examiners may
recommend to Senate that the candidate be permitted to represent the same thesis and submit to further oral or other
examination within a period of one calendar year.
8.6 The candidate may be required to make editorial amendments to
his/her thesis to the satisfaction of the Chairman of the Board of
Examiners, after consultation with the Chairman of the Department
concerned before lodgement of the final bound copies of
dissertation.
209
8.7 If the thesis, though inadequate, is of sufficient merit to justify such

action, the Board of Examiners may recommend to Senate that the
candidate be permitted to re-present his/her thesis in a revised form
within one calendar year from the decision of Senate with regard
thereto. The Board of Examiners shall not, however, make such
recommendation without submitting the candidate to an oral
examination or, exceptionally, if an oral examination is
impracticable, a written examination.
8.8 For the purpose of the oral, practical or written examination held in
connection with the thesis, the candidate will be required to present
himself/herself at such place as the University may direct and upon
such day or days as shall be notified to him by the Deputy Registrar
(Academic).
8.9 The MD degree shall not be classified.
9.
210
LODGEMENT AND DISTRIBUTION OF THESIS

The candidate shall be required to lodge with the Deputy Registrar
(Academic) three bound copies of the approved thesis. The copies shall
be bound in accordance with the following specifications:
Art vellum or cloth; overcast; edges uncut; lettered boldly up the back in
gold letters (letters should be from 5mm to 10mm in size) indicating
DEGREE, DATE, NAME.
10. NOTIFICATION OF RESULTS AND AWARD OF DEGREE

10.1 Each candidate shall be notified of the results of his/her
examination by the Deputy Registrar (Academic) after the report
from the Board of Examiners and the issue of a Pass List have been
approved by Senate.
10.2 A Diploma under the Seal of the University, shall be delivered to each
successful candidate, after the award of the degree has been
approved by Council.
2.2 In addition, an applicant must have an Advanced Level (or

equivalent) pass in Mathematics.
2.4 Normally, there shall be no exemptions from any component of the
programme.
3.
3.1 The duration of the programme shall be twenty-four (24) months
full-time, normally commencing in January.
3.2 The programme shall consist of two Parts. Part 1 will consist of the
formal taught component of the programme and Part 2 will consist
of both formally taught components and the research component,
during which time a candidate will undertake a practicum
(statistical consulting).
4.
EXAMINATIONS
There shall be formal written examinations of the taught components at
the end of Part 1 and at the end of Part 2 of the programme.
5.
5.1 The pass mark for every examination or assessment shall be 50%.
5.2 The continuous assessment mark shall be based on regular
assessment of the student's performance in class work and during
the practicum.
5.3 The assessment of the research work component shall be based on a
dissertation and an oral examination, presented by 30th August of
the second year of the programme, and approved projects from the
practicum.

DEGREE IN BIOSTATISTICS [MSc BIOSTATISTICS)]
1.

These Regulations are to be read in conjunction with the General
Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework (GAR), which
take precedence over these regulations.
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
2.1 An applicant should normally have a good first degree (upper
second or better) in Statistics, Medicine, Health, Social or Biological
sciences.
6.
6.1 A student who fails the continuous assessment shall be barred from
writing the end of course examinations. The overall result for such a
student shall be FAIL: ALLOWED TO APPLY TO REPEAT
theprogrammewhen next offered.
6.2 A student who fails a course within the range 40 49% may be
allowed to write a supplementary examination in accordance with
6.3 In the case of supplementing a dissertation, the resubmission of the

dissertation shall be within six months after publication of the
results.
6.4 A student who fails two or more Part 1 courses shall not be eligible to
proceed to Part 2. The overall result for such a student shall be FAIL:
ALLOWED TO APPLY TO REPEAT thefailed courseswhen next
offered.
6.5 The overall result of a student who fails one taught course at Part 1
shall be INCOMPLETE: PROCEED. Such a student shall be allowed to
register for Part 2 and repeat the failed course.
7.
AWARD OF THE DEGREE

7.1 To be eligible for the award of the degree, a student must pass each
of the following components:
?
Continuous assessment;
?
Written examinations, in which a student must attain an
overall pass mark, provided he or she fails no more than one
course with a mark of 40% or better.
?
Research project.
?
Practicum.
7.2
The degree shall be awarded using the following marking scheme:

80% and above
Distinction
70% - 79%
Merit
50% - 69%
Pass
Below 50%
Fail
COURSES
8.1 Part 1
Course
Course
Duration of
Code
description
examination
MBST500 Continuous Assessment
MBST501 Inferential Procedures 1
3 hours
MBST502 Principles of Epidemiology
3 hours
MBST503 Research Methods and
Public Health
2 hours
MBST504 Inferential Procedures 2
2 hours
8.2
Course
Code
100
100
Duration of
examination
MBST505 Confounding and Interaction

(modelling)
MBST506 Design and Design Issues
in Biostatistics
MBST570 Research Project
MBST580 Practicum
MBST590 Oral Examination
9.
Total marks
2 hours
100
2 hours
100
150
200
50
30 minutes
Course syllabuses
In accordance with the provisions of the General Academic Regulations,
detailed syllabuses for courses do not form part of these regulations but
shall be submitted to the Faculty Board for approval. Copies of the
approved detailed syllabuses shall be maintained in the Faculty Office for
reference.

PUBLIC HEALTH-FIELD EPIDEMIOLOGY TRAINING
PROGRAM [MPH-FETP]
1.
8.
Total marks
200
100
100
Part 2
Course
description

1.1. These regulations should be read in conjunction with the "General
Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework" (GAR)
and the respective Faculty regulations.
1.2. The General Academic Regulations take precedence over these
regulations.
Terms used in these regulations are as described in the General Academic
Regulations
3.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
3.1. An applicant should normally have a good first degree in Medicine
or an honours degree in any one of the following:
a. Health Sciences
b. Biological Sciences
c. Social Sciences
211
3.2. An applicant should have at least three years appropriate work

experience in a health field post-qualification
3.3. An applicant with relevant qualifications or experience other than
as described in 3.1 and 3.2 may be considered for admission into the
programme at the recommendation of the department and the
Dean
3.4. An application must be submitted on the official application form
the College of Health Sciences
3.5. An applicant for the part-time programme should have a qualified
filed supervisor (holder of an MPH degree or equivalent) at his/her
workplace and who is able to supervise him/her during the
fieldwork.
4.
212
4.1. The Programme will consist of a single Part, normally commencing
in January organized as a combination of formal courses taught
within the Department of Community Medicine, supervised public
health practice (fieldwork) and a research project.
4.2. The duration of the programme shall be not less than two years
fulltime and not less than three years part-time. During this time a
registered student shall be employed in an appropriate post with
actual public health responsibilities as approved by the Higher
for the purposes of the degree.
4.3. A field supervisor of the programme shall be approved by the Higher
4.4. The Programme shall include studies in the following areas, both in
the classroom and field setting:
4.4.1 Philosophy of Public Health
4.4.2 Epidemiology
4.4.3 Research Methodology
4.4.4 Biostatistics
4.4.5 Communicable and Non-communicable Disease Control
4.4.6 Maternal and Child Health/Family Planning
4.4.7 Health Services Planning and Management
4.4.8 Environmental and Occupational Health
4.4.9 Communication Skills
4.4.10 Health Informatics (including computer literacy)
4.5. In the First Year every student will have to attend academic classes in
the following four areas: Philosophy of Public Health, Epidemiology,
Research Methodology and Biostatistics.
4.6. An elective period of up to three months may be offered to a student
during the programme.
4.7. There will normally be 'no exemptions from any component of the
programme.
5.
EXAMINATIONS
5.1. There will be formal examinations in coursework at the end of the
second year for the fulltime programme and at the end of the third
year for the part-time programme.
5.2. There shall be four written papers and an oral examination each of
which is equally weighted
Code
Duration of
Course
Description
examination
MPH501 Multiple choice questions
2 hours
MPH502 Six essays or short notes
questions, of which a candidate
should answer five. Each
question shall be equally
weighted.
3 hours
MPH503 Six problems in data analysis
and interpretation, of which a
candidate should answer five.
Each question shall be equally
weighted.
3 hours
MPH504 Critical review of case studies or
case presentations or journal
articles, or a combination of two
or more of these
2 hours
MPH590 Oral Examination
30 minutes
Total
marks
50
50
50
50
50
5.3. The research work component of the programme shall be examined

by a dissertation (MPH570) of 10000 to 15000 words and an oral
defence (MPH560) of the dissertation by the student.
5.4. The dissertation shall be presented by 1 September of the second
year for a fulltime student and by 1 September of the third year for a
part-time student.
6.
6.1. The coursework component of the programme will be examined by
continuous assessment based on regular assessment of the
candidate's performance in class work and fieldwork.
6.2. A candidate must pass the continuous assessment for the taught
courses within the Department of Community Medicine to be able
to proceed to the supervised public health practice (field work).
6.3. Annual Assessment

6.3.1 At the end of the first year of the full-time programme, an
annual assessment .based on the candidate's continuous
assessment marks, and expressed as a percentage, shall be
submitted by the Institute of Continuing Health Education to
the College of Health Sciences for onward transmission to
Academic Committee. A mark of 50% or more must be
obtained before a candidate is allowed to proceed to the
subsequent year of the programme, for both the fulltime and
the part-time programme.
6.3.2 At the end of the second year of the part-time programme an
annual assessment, based on the candidate's continuous
assessment marks, and expressed as a percentage, shall be
submitted by the Institute of Continuing Health Education to
the college of Health Sciences for onward transmission to
Academic Committee. A mark of 50% or more must be
obtained before a candidate is allowed to proceed to final year
of the programme.
7.
8.

Examination results shall be processed in accordance with the General
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.
8.6.
1.
AWARD OF THE DEGREE

regulations
2.

Regulations on academic offences and penalties as described in the
General Academic Regulations for Undergraduate Programmes shall
apply.
3.

Posthumous and aegrotat provisions in the General Academic
Regulations shall apply to these regulations
4.

Examination results shall be published in accordance with the General

8.1. The results of a student shall be determined based the three
components of the programme:
COMPONENTS OF PROGRAMME
MARKS
Continuous Assessment (MPH550)
200
Formal Examinations (MPH501/502/503/504/590)
250
Research Project (MPH570/591)
150
TOTAL
600
8.1.1. The four written papers and the oral examination constitute
the formal examinations and are each weighted 1.
8.1.2. The Research Project has two components weighted as
follows
COMPONENTS OF THE RESEARCH PROJECT
WEIGHTING
1
Dissertation (MPH570)
2
2
Oral Defence of the Dissertation (MPH591)
1
A student barred from writing the formal examinations fails and is

allowed to apply to repeat the final year of programme.
A student who fails the formal examination component fails
overall and is allowed to apply to repeat the final year of
programme.
A student who fails the dissertation within the supplementable
range fails overall and is allowed to resubmit the dissertation in
To be awarded the degree, a student must pass each of the three
components of the programme as stipulated in 8.1,
The degree shall be awarded with Distinction or Merit or without
classification. Using 'the following mark scheme:
80% and above
Distinction
70% - 79%
Merit
50% - 69%
Pass
Below 50
Fail

Provisions in the General Academic Regulations on student appeals
against published results shall apply to these regulations.
An academic transcript shall be issued to a student in accordance with the
213
7.
3.1.4

A degree certificate shall be awarded in accordance with the General
8. COURSE SYLLABUSES
detailed syllabuses for courses do not form part of these regulations but
approved detailed syllabuses are maintained in the Faculty Office for
reference.
3.2 Submission of application for admission

3.2.1 An applicant must submit his/her application in accordance
3.2.2 An application for admission must be submitted on the
official application forms provided through the Institute of
Continuing Health Education of the College of Health
Sciences.
An applicant who is admitted into the programme must satisfy the
REGULATIONS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER IN

PUBLIC HEALTH [HEALTH PROMOTION] [MPHHP]
1.
214
2.
3.

1.1 These regulations should be read in conjunction with the University
of Zimbabwe General Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by
coursework, hereinafter referred to as the General Academic
Regulations and the College of HealthSciences Regulations for
Master of Science Degrees.
1.2 The General Academic Regulations take precedence over the
Faculty Regulations and these regulations.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Terms used in these Regulations are asdescribed in the General
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1
To be eligible for admission to the Masters Degree in Public
Health (Health Promotion) an applicant must have a good
BSc degree (2.1 or better) in Health Education and Health
Promotion or an approved equivalent.
3.1.2 At the recommendations of the Department and the Dean,
Senate may admit to the programme an applicant with
relevant qualifications and experience in a health promotion
setting other than described in 3.1.1.
3.1.3 An applicant must be registered with the Allied Health
Professions Council of Zimbabwe as a Health Promotion
Practitioner.
An applicant at admission has to be employed in an

appropriate post with actual health promotion
responsibilities.
4.

The programme will run for two years on a full-time basis, or three
years on a part-time basis.
4.1 The programme consists of two parts: Part 1 will be the course work
component consisting of (a) formal basic MPH courses and (b)
specialized health promotion courses taught in the Department of
Community Medicine and Part 2 will consist of coursework and
research component.
4. 1.1 Part 1 of the programme will be offered on full-time basis for
one year and on part-time basis for two years.
4.1.2 Part 2 will be offered full-time for a period of one (1) year and
part-time for a period of one year.
4.2 The programme will normally commence in January of every
year for full-time and every other year for part-time.
4.3 A student shall register for six (6) courses for Part 1, all of which are
core courses. Each course shall normally be taught over 12 months
for full-time and over 24 months for part-time. All courses shall be
single weighted.
4.4 For Part two (2) a student shall register six (6) courses all of which
are core courses. Each course shall normally be taught over 12
months for both full-time and part-time. All courses shall be single
weighted.
4.5 Each course shall have 6 contact hours per week excluding tutorials.
4.6 For a full-time student, the dissertation will normally be submitted
8.5
on or before 1st September of the Second Year and on or before 1st

of September of the Third Year for Part Time.
range fails overally and is allowed to resubmit the dissertation

inaccordance with the General Academic Regulations.
8.6
5.
6.
EXAMINATIONS
5.2 Formal examinations of taught courses shall take place at the end of
the year in which it was completed and eachwritten course shall be
examined over two or three hour paper as stipulated.
5.3 The dissertation shall be examined through a written research
report and an oral defence.
6.1 The formal examination shall constitute 70% and continuous
assessment 30% of the overall mark.
6.2 Coursework component of the programme shall be examined by
continuous assessment based on regular assessment of the
candidate's performance in class work, fieldwork, and written tests.
6.3 Research work shall be examined by a health social science project, a
dissertation and an oral defence. A wholly written dissertation shall
normally be 10 000 to 15 000 words.
9.
Re-presentation of the dissertation shall be in accordance with

the General Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by
Coursework. The re-submission shall normally be required within
three months of the decision of Senate to permit re-submission.
COURSES:
9.1 Part 1 (Full Time and Part Time) there shall be written
examinations at the end of Part 1.
Course
Code
MPHHP 501
MPHHP 502
MPHHP 503
MPHHP 504
MPHHP 505
MPHHP 507
MPHHP 551
7.
PROCESSING OF EXAMINATIONS RESULTS

Examination results shall be processed in accordance with the
8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4

To be eligible to proceed to Part 2, a student must pass at least
four (4) courses studied in Part 1.
A student who fails a course may be allowed to repeat that course
in accordance with the General Academic Regulations and Faculty
Regulations.
9.2
Course
Duration of
description
examination
Epidemiology and
Biostatistics
3 hours
Public Health Practice 4 hours
Ecology of health
Promotions 1
4 hours
Research Process
3 hours
Research Protocol design
Ecology of Health
Promotions 2
4hours
Weighting Marks
1
2
100
200
2
1
1
200
100
100
2
1
200
100
Part II (Full Time and Part Time) there shall be written

examinations at the end of Part II
Course
Code
MPHHP 506
MPHHP 507
MPHHP 508
MPHHP 509
MPHHP 590
Course
Duration of
description
examination
Knowledge
Management
3 hours
Ecology of Health
Promotions 2
4 hours
Management of Health
Promotion
Programmes
3 hours
Monitoring and
Evaluation
3 hours
Oral Examination
30 minutes
Weighting Marks
1
100
200
100
1
0.5
100
50
215
MPHHP 570
MPHHP 511
MPHHP 551
1.
Dissertation
Health Social Science Project
2
1
1

MEDICINE(OPHTHALMOLOGY)
(MMED OPHTHAL)
200
100
100
AWARD OF DEGREE
The degree shall be classified in accordance with the provisions of the
2.
[To be read in conjunction with the General Academic

Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework (GAR)]
1.
ENTRY REGULATIONS
1.1 Applicants must have obtained a Diploma in Ophthalmology of
this or another university of an approved standard, or have
obtained a qualification by written and clinical examination of a
standard approved by the University of Zimbabwe.
1.2 Applicants must have completed suitable internship in a
Provincial, Central or District hospital and be appropriately
registered with the Medical and Dental Practitioners' Council of
Zimbabwe.
1.3 Applications must be submitted on official application forms
the University of Zimbabwe, College of Health Sciences.
2.
The duration of the programme which normally commences each
January, is a three year fulltime programme. Throughout the
programme, candidates normally are employed in the appropriate posts
in the departments or hospitals approved by the Higher Degrees by
Coursework Committee of the College of Health Sciences for the purpose
of this degree.
The provisions of the General Academic Regulations on offences and

3.
POSTHUMOUS AND AGROTATE PROVISIONS

These shall apply as provided for in the General Academic Regulations.
4.
PUBLICATIONS OF RESULTS
Results shall be published in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
216
5.
ACADEMIC TRANSCRIPT
The transcript shall be issued in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
6.
AWARD OF DEGREE CERTIFICATE OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE

The degree certificate shall be awarded in accordance with the General
7.
SYLLABUSES
syllabuses for the Courses do not form part of the General or Faculty
Regulations but shall be maintained in the Faculty Office for reference.
2.1
Exemptions
2.1.1
Candidates are expected to fulfil continuous assessment
requirements for the whole programme.
2.1.2
Decisions on applications for such exemptions shall be
made by the Higher Degrees by Coursework Committee
of the College of Health Sciences subject to approval by
Senate.
2.1.3
Study leave
Before formal examinations begin, there is a period
of two weeks without academic instruction to allow
for individual study/revision.
3.

The Programme is divided into two parts; Part II takes place in the first
year, Part III in the second and third year.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
4.
Part I shall consist of studies in the Diploma in Ophthalmology.

(see Regulations for Diploma in Ophthalmology Programme)
Part II of the programme comprises scientific basis of
Ophthalmology in greater depth and scope than in the diploma
programme and include studies in the following areas:
3.2.1 Visual anatomy and embryology
3.2.2 Visual physiology and optics
3.2.3 Pathology (general surgical and ocular pathology)
Part III of the programme consists of didactic lectures, tutorials
and assignments in topics on the principles and practice of clinical
ophthalmology. It will include refraction, contact lens practice and
low vision aids. There will be an emphasis on geographic and
preventive ophthalmology. Students shall rotate in clinical areas
approved by the Faculty Higher Degrees by Coursework
Committee. Students shall undertake an approved supervised
project whose write-up shall constitute a dissertation.
During Parts II and III of the programme the following run
concurrently:
3.4.1 The candidate shall carry out a research project that shall
be submitted in a dissertation of 10000 to 15000 words on
a subject which has been approved by the Department of
Ophthalmology.
3.4.2 The candidates go for a rural attachment of at least one
month during which period he/she will be supervised by a
provincial ophthalmologist.
3.4.3 The candidates are attached to each of the following
specialties for at least 2 weeks:
3.4.3.1
Neurosurgery
3.4.3.2
ENT; (Ear, Nose and Throat)
3.4.3.3
Radiology (diagnostic and therapeutic).
During the entire programme the candidates are continuously
assessed by the teaching staff. This shall comprise about 20% (+
5%) of Parts II and III marks.
MARKING SCHEME AND CLASSIFICATION

4.1 The degree may be awarded with Distinction or Merit or
4.2
5.
The marking scheme is as follows:80% +

=
Distinction
70% - 79%
=
Merit
50% - 69%
=
Pass
Below 50% =
Fail
5.1 Candidates shall maintain authenticated records of the following
surgical operations:
(a) At least 100 cataract extractions; 60 standard extracapsular
cataract extractions; 40 small incision sutureless cataract
extractions
(b) At least 20 corneal perforation repairs
(c) At least 20 trabeculectomies
(d) At least 10 squint operations
(e) At least 20 laser treatments.
(f) At least 20 enucleations
(g) At least 20 exenterations
(h) At least 100 retinoscopies
(i) Fundus Fluorescein angiography 10 cases
(j) Visual fields 20 cases
(k) At least 5 Retinal detachments
(l) At least 5 Dacryocystorhinostomies
(m) At least 5 Corneal grafts
(n) At least 5 Orbitotomies
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Continuous assessment/coursework shall be in the form of four

written assignments (25%), evaluation of candidate's log-book
(25%), clinical presentations (25%) and candidate's overall day to
day performance (25%). The four written assignments shall
comprise two well-discussed case reports, one retrospective
study and one clinical audit.
Research work shall be examined by dissertation (see Paragraph
3.4.1) which is required to be submitted to ICHE by the 30th of June
of the final year of the programme.
Part I (refer to the current regulations for the Diploma in
Ophthalmology).
Part II Examinations are held in November of the first year of the
programme and consist of:
217
5.5.1
218
Written Papers
Paper I Visual anatomy and embryology
MOP504
(3 hours)
Paper II Visual Physiology and Optics
MOP505
(3 hours)
Paper III Pathology MOP506 (3 hours)
Clinical Examination MOP580 (1 hour 30 minutes)
Oral Examination MOP591-3 (see 5.5.2)
5.5.2
Oral Examination: There shall be three oral

examinations on each of the above subjects i.e.
Visual Anatomy and Embryology (MOP591) Visual
Physiology and Optics (MOP592) and Pathology
(MOP593) of Approximately 1 hour duration in
total. They shall be equally weighted.
5.5.3
Distribution of marks:
Visual Anatomy and Embryology:
i) Written paper
out of
ii) Oral paper
out of
Visual Optics and Physiology:
i) Written paper
out of
ii) Oral paper
out of
Pathology:
i) Written paper
out of
ii) Oral paper
out of
mark
out of
Clinical Examination on
Refraction and Optics
TOTAL MARKS OUT OF:
Paper I Principles of Ophthalmology (MOP507) (3 hours)

Paper II Practice of Ophthalmology (MOP508) (3 hours)
5.6.2 Clinical Examination (MOP581)
(2 hours)
5.6.3 Oral Examination (MOP594)
5.6.4 Dissertation MOP 570
5.7 DISTRIBUTION OF MARKS
Written Paper I
Written Paper II
Oral Examination
Dissertation
TOTAL
6.
DETERMINATION OF CANDIDATES' RESULTS

The department panel of examinations shall comprise of the Chairman
Department of Ophthalmology and academic staff which include
fulltime, part time and honorary lecturers who are involved in teaching
the programme.
7.
General Academic Regulations except that examinations will be
held in the following year in May for part II and III.
7.2 Determination of the offer of supplementary examinations for
Part II failures shall be in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
7.3 In determining the offer of supplementary examinations at Part III
7.3.1 Written Papers (MOP507 and MOP508)
7.3.2 Clinical Examination and Oral Examination
(MOP581 and MOP594)
7.3.3 Dissertation (MOP570)
Any candidate who fails any two of these components is
100
50
100
100
650
5.5.4 Candidates are required to pass the clinical examinations and

continuous assessment. A poor continuous assessment mark
(below 50%) may result in the Higher Degrees Committee
recommending to senate that the candidate be barred from
writing the examination.
5.6 PART III EXAMINATIONS
Part III Examinations shall be held in November of the fourth (final) year
100
100
100
100
100
100
600
5.7.2 Candidates are required to pass the Clinical examinations in Part III
and 5.5.4 above applies for this part as well.
5.7.3 Candidates are required to pass the Dissertation.
100
50
100
50
out of
out of
out of
out of
out of
out of
7.4
8.
Any candidate offered supplementary examinations should do so

in all components (i.e. written, clinical and oral).
3.1.5
RE-PRESENTATION OF DISSERTATION
such cases, representation shall be required within six months of the
3.2

3.2.1 A student must submit his/her application in accordance
3.2.2 Applications must be submitted on the official application
forms provided through the Institute of Continuing Health
Education of the College of Health Sciences
3.3
General Provisions
3.3.1 A student who is admitted must satisfy the provisions of
REGULATIONS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTERS IN

DENTISTRY (ORTHODONTICS) M Dent
(ORTHODONTICS)
1.

1.1 These regulations should be read in conjunction with the
General Regulations and the College of Health Sciences
Regulations for Masters Degrees.
1.2 The General Academic Regulations take precedence over the
College Regulations and these Regulations.
2.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Terms use in these Regulations are as described in the General Academic
Regulations.
3.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 To be eligible for admission to the Masters in Dentistry
(Orthodontics) M.Dent (Ortho) a student must have
obtained the BDS degree of this university or an approved
equivalent.
3.1.2 Applicants must have completed 1 year of internship or its
equivalent.
3.1.3 Candidates must have gained at least one year's clinical
experience in dentistry post internship
3.1.4 Candidates must be appropriately registered with the
Medical and Dental Practitioners Council of Zimbabwe
4.
Candidates shall throughout the programme normally be

employed in appropriate posts in the departments,
hospitals or institutions approved by the Higher Degrees
by Coursework Committee of the College of Health
Sciences for the purpose of the degree.

The programme will run for 4 years on a part-time basis.
4.1 The programme consists of two parts: Part I of the studies shall
consist of Clinical work, and the Basic Science Core Courses: The
Basic Science courses are divided into Course A and Course B
4.1.1 Core Course A: Oral Biology including Oral Anatomy, Oral
Histology, Oral Physiology, Bio-Statistics and
Epidemiology.
4.1.2 Core Course B: Principles of General Pathology, Oral
Pathology, Oral Medicine and Periodontology and Basic
Orthodontic subjects.
4.2 Part II of the programme shall consist of Clinical Work,
Coursework and a dissertation.
4.2.1 Coursework in Basic and Specialist Orthodontics subjects
4.2.2 Dissertation
4.2.3 The dissertation shall be submitted to the Institute of
Continuing Health Education in final form by the 30th of
June of the final year of the programme.
4.2.4 A candidate who has not submitted the dissertation as in
paragraph 4.2.2 above, by the due date shall not be
permitted to sit the Final Year Examinations and shall
allowed to apply to repeat the final year.
219
5.
EXAMINATIONS
5.2 Formal examination of taught components shall take place at the
end of the period in which it was completed.
5.2.1 The Part I examination will be held in the month of
November of the first year of the programme and shall
consist of the following:
5.3.2
5.2.1.1
220
5.3
Written Papers
5.2.1.1.1 Paper I
5.2.1.1.2 There shall be a three-hour paper
consisting of 100 multiple choice
questions covering areas described
under paragraph 3.1.1. Course A.
5.2.1.1.3 Paper II
5.2.1.1.4 There shall be a three-hour paper
consisting of 100 multiple choice
questions described in paragraph 3.1.2.
Course B.
5.2.1.1.5 Paper III
5.2.1.1.6 There shall be an essay paper of three
hours duration where candidates shall
be expected to answer all six questions
on any aspect of the Basic Sciences
course.
5.2.1.2 Oral Examination
5.2.1.2.1 There shall be an oral examination of
approximately 45 minutes duration on
all aspects of the Part I course.
The Part II examination shall be held in the month of November of
the fourth year and shall cover all aspects of Orthodontics training
5.3.1 Paper I
5.3.1.1 There shall be a paper of three hours
duration consisting of 100 multiple choice
questions.
5.3.1.2 Paper II
5.3.1.3 There shall be paper of three hours duration
consisting of 10 short answer questions.
5.3.1.4 Paper III
5.3.1.5
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
There shall be an essay paper of three hours

duration where candidates shall be expected
to answer all four questions.
5.3.2.1 The candidate is presented with all the
diagnostic materials of standard cases and is
asked to make diagnosis and treatment plan
before a panel of specialists. He/she is asked
to defend the diagnosis and treatment plan.
This examination shall be of approximately
120 minutes duration.
Research work shall be examined by a dissertation, which
shall be presented by the 30th June of the Final year of the
programme to the Institute of Continuing Health
Education.
The Dissertation shall be examined through written work of
between 10000 15000 words.
Defence of Dissertation
duration of the content of dissertation.
6.
6.1.1 The formal examinations shall constitute 70% and
continuous assessment 30% of the overall marks.
6.1.2 The research component shall be assessed through a
dissertation of 10000 to 15000 words and an oral defence
thereof.
6.1.3 Continuous assessment shall be assessed through
coursework assignments, knowledge, attitudes and
leadership attributes.
7.

8.
8.1 Examinations shall be processed in accordance with the General
8.2 To be eligible to proceed to Part II, a student must pass the Part I
examination.
8.3 A student who fails the overall Part I or Part II examinations may be
allowed to repeat in accordance with the General and College
Regulations.
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
Supplementary examinations are permitted in accordance with

the General Regulations.
For a candidate to pass the programme he/she must obtain an
overall pass mark with a pass mark in both the clinical
examination and the dissertation.
range fails overall and is allowed to resubmit the dissertation in
Re-presentation of the dissertation shall be in accordance with
General Academic Regulations for Masters degrees by
coursework. The resubmission shall normally be required within 3
months of the decision of Senate to permit resubmission.
9.
COURSE DESCRIPTION
9.1
Part I
Core Course
Course A
Code
Narration
Duration
MDO501
Oral Biology including Oral Anatomy
Oral Histology
Oral Physiology
Bio-Statistics and Epidemiology
3 hours
Marks
100
Core Course
Course B
Code
Narration
MDO502 Principles of General Pathology
Oral Pathology
Oral Medicine
Periodontology
Basic Orthodontics Subjects
Duration
Marks
3 hours
100
MDO551 Continuous Assessment

MDO590 Oral Examination
30 minutes
MDO503 Course A and B combined
3 hours
9.2 Part II
MDO504 Paper 1 Orthodontics
Paper 2 Orthodontics
Paper 3 Orthodontics
MDO551 Continuous Assessment
MDO590 Oral Examination
MDO580 Clinical Examination
3 hours
3 hours
3 hours
45 minutes
90 minutes
100
100
100
100

2. ACADEMIC OFFENCES AND PENALTIES
3. POSTHUMOUS AND AGROTATE PROVISIONS
These shall be published in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
4. PUBLICAITON OF RESULTS
Regulations.
The transcript shall be issued in accordance with the General
6. AWARD OF DEGREE CERTIFICATE OF THE UNIVERSITY OF
ZIMBABWE
The degree certificate shall be awarded in accordance with the
REGULATIONS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTERS IN

MEDICINE (OTORHINOLARYNGOLOGY) HEAD AND
NECK SURGERY M. MED.
(OTORHINOLARYNGOLOGY)
1.1
General Regulations and the College of Health Sciences
Regulations for Masters Degrees.
1.2
The General Academic Regulations take precedence over the
College Regulations and these Regulations.
221
222
3.1.1 To be eligible for admission to the Masters in Medicine
(Otorhinolaryngology) M. Med (ORLN) a student must
have obtained the MB.Ch.B. degrees of this university or an
approved equivalent.
3.1.2 Applicants must have completed their internship or its
equivalent.
3.1.3 Candidates must have gained at least one year's clinical
experience post internship
3.1.4 Candidates must be appropriately registered with the
Medical and Dental Practitioners Council of Zimbabwe
3.1.5 Candidates shall throughout the programme normally be
employed in appropriate posts in the departments, hospitals
or institutions approved by the Higher Degrees by
Coursework Committee of the College of Health Sciences for
the purpose of the degree.
3.2 Submission of application for admission
A student must submit his/her application in accordance with the
Applications must be submitted on the official application forms
provided through the Institute of Continuing Health Education of the
College of Health Sciences
4. STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME
The programme will run for 4 years on a part time basis.
4.1 The programme consists of two parts: Part I of the studies shall
consist of Clinical work, and the Basic Science Core Courses: The
Basic Science courses are divided into Course A and Course B
4.1.1 Core Course A: ORLN Biology including ENT Anatomy, ENT
Histology, ENT Physiology, Bio-Statistics and Epidemiology.
4.1.2 Core Course B: Principles of General Pathology, ENT
Pathology, ENT Medicine and Audiology and Basic ENT
subjects.
4.2 Part II of the programme shall consist of Clinical Work, Coursework

and a dissertation.
4.2.1
Coursework in Basic and Specialist ENT subjects
4.2.2 Dissertation
4.2.3 The dissertation shall be submitted to the Institute of
Continuing Health Education in final form by the 30th of June
of the final year of the programme.
4.2.4 A candidate who has not submitted the dissertation as in
paragraph 4.2.2 above, by the due date shall not be
permitted to sit the Final Year Examinations and shall be
allowed to apply to repeat the final year.
5.
EXAMINATIONS
5.2 Formal examination of taught components shall take place at the
end of the period in which it was completed.
5.2.1 The Part I examination will be held in the month of
November of the first year of the programme and shall
consist of the following:
5.2.1.1 Written Papers
Paper I
There shall be a three-hour paper consisting of 100
multiple choice questions covering areas described
under paragraph 4.1.1. Course A.
Paper II
There shall be a three-hour paper consisting of 100
multiple choice questions described in paragraph 4.1.2.
Course B.
Paper III
There shall be an essay paper of three hours duration
where candidates shall be expected to answer all six
questions on any aspect of the Basic Sciences Course
5.2.1.2 Oral Examination
5.3 The Part II examination shall be held in the month of November of the
fourth year and shall cover all aspects of Otorhinolaryngology
training and shall consist of:
5.3.1
5.3.2
Paper I
There shall be a paper of three hours duration consisting of
100 multiple choice questions
Paper II
There shall be paper of three hours duration consisting of 10
short answer questions
Paper III
There shall be an essay paper of three hours duration where
candidates shall be expected to answer all four questions.
The candidate is presented with all the diagnostic materials
of standard cases and is asked to make diagnosis and
treatment plan before a panel of specialists. He/she is asked
to defend the diagnosis and treatment plan.
This
examination shall be of approximately 120 minutes
duration.
5.4 Research work shall be examined by a dissertation, which shall be

presented by the 30th June of the Final year of the programme to the
Institute of Continuing Health Education.
5.4.1
5.4.2
The Dissertation shall be examined through written work of

between 10000 15000 words.
Defence of Dissertation
duration of the content of dissertation.
6. ASSESSMENT OF CANDIDATES
6.1 The formal examinations shall constitute 70% and continuous
assessment 30% of the overall marks.
6.2 The research component shall be assessed through a dissertation of
10000 to 15000 words and an oral defence thereof.
6.3 Continuous assessment shall be assessed through coursework
assignments, knowledge, attitudes and leadership attributes.
7.

8. DETERMINATION OF RESULTS
8.1 Examinations shall be processed in accordance with the General
8.2 To be eligible to proceed to Part II, a student must pass the Part I
examination.
8.3 A student who fails the overall Part I or Part II examinations may be
allowed to repeat in accordance with the General and College
Regulations.
8.4 Supplementary examinations are permitted in accordance with the
General Regulations.
overall pass mark with a pass mark in both the clinical examination
8.6 A student who fails the dissertation within the supplementable range
fails overall and is allowed to resubmit the dissertation in accordance
8.7 Re-presentation of the dissertation shall be in accordance with
General Academic Regulations for Masters degrees by coursework.
The resubmission shall normally be required within 3 months of the
decision of Senate to permit resubmission.
9.
COURSE DESCRIPTION
9.1 Part I
Core Course
Course A
Code
Narration
Duration
MORL501
ORLN Biology including ENT
Anatomy General Histology
ENT Physiology
Bio-Statistics and Epidemiology 3 hours
Core Course
Code
MORL502
MORL551
MORL590
MORL503
Course B
Narration
Principles of General Pathology
ENT Pathology
ENT Medicine
Audiology
Basic ENT Subjects
Oral Examination
Course A and B combined
Marks
100
Duration
Marks
3 hours
100
30 minute
3 hours
100
223
9.2 Part II
MORL504
Paper 1 Otorhinolaryngology
Paper 2 Paediatric ENT
Paper 3 Laryngology
H & N Surgery
MORL551
MORL590
Oral Examination
MORL580
3 hours
3 hours
100
100
3 hours
100
45 minutes
90 minutes
10. SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS

10.1
Supplementary examinations may be held in accordance
with the General Academic Regulations except that the
examinations will be held in the following May.
10.2
Determination of the offer of supplementary examinations
for Part I failures shall be in accordance with the General
10.3
Candidates offered supplementary examinations shall take
them in all subjects except the Continuous Assessment.
224
11. REPRESENTATION OF DISSERTATION

(Ref GAR 10.6)
except that representation shall be required within six months of the
12. ANNUAL ASSESSMENT
12.1 At the end of the first and second years of Part II of the
programme, annual assessments based on theoretical and
practical performance during that year and expressed as a
percentage mark, will be submitted by the Department of surgery
to the College of Health Sciences Higher Degrees by Coursework
Committee for onward transmission to Academic Committee. A
mark of 50% or more must be obtained in each assessment before
a student is allowed to proceed to the next year of the programme.
12.2. Candidates shall be required to submit to the Department of
Surgery an annual list of cases described in para. 3.2 in which they
have participated as surgeon, first surgical assistant or teacher
14. STUDENT APPEALS

These shall be published in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
16. PUBLICATION OF RESULTS
Regulations.
The transcript shall be issued in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
18. AWARD OF DEGREE CERTIFICATE OF THE UNIVERSITY OF
ZIMBABWE
The degree certificate shall be awarded in accordance with the General
FACULTY OF COMMERCE
4.1.2
REGULATIONS FOR UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE

PROGRAMMES
1.

1.1 These Faculty Regulations should be read in conjunction with the
General Academic Regulations for Undergraduate Degrees,
hereinafter referred to as the General Academic Regulations.
2.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Terms used in these Regulations the following terms are as defined in the
3.
PROGRAMMES
The undergraduate degree programmes offered in the Faculty of
Commerce are:
The Bachelor of Tourism and Hospitality Management Honours Degree
(HTHM)
The Bachelor of Bachelor Accountancy Honours Degree (HACC)
The Bachelor of Accountancy Honours Degree Part-time (HACC)
The Bachelor of Business Studies and Computing Science Degree (BSCT)
The Bachelor of Business Studies Honours Degree (HBBS)
4.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
4.1 To be admitted to the programme, a student must have satisfied
the minimum conditions for entry to Degree studies at this
University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the
4.1.1
To qualify for Normal Entry for the HACC, HACC PartTime,HBBS, BSCT and (HTHM) Honours Degree
Programme, a candidate should have:
4.1.1.1 5 O level subjects including a pass at
English Language and Mathematics AND
4.1.1.2 3 A level subjects which include TWO
Commercial subjects.
4.2
4.3
For the BSCT Honours Degree Programme, a

candidate should also have 3 A level subjects, 2 of
which must be commercial subjects and A level
Mathematics.
4.1.3 For the (HTHM) Honours Degree Programme
Geography would be considered as an appropriate
commercial subject.
Notwithstanding the provisions of the General Academic
Regulations governing Special Entry to undergraduate
programmes, a student may, in approved cases, be exempted
from taking Level 1 courses.
4.2.1 To qualify for entry through Special entry into Level 1
of the HACC, HACC - Part-Time, HBBS and HTHM
Honours Degree Programme, a candidate should
have 5 O Levels including Mathematics and English
and at least 2 A Level subjects.
4.2.2 In addition candidates should have successfully
completed the following:
4.2.2.1 For the HACC and HACC - Part-Time
Programmes - either the National Diploma
in Accountancy or ZAAT.
4.2.2.2 For the HBBS Programme an approved
National Diploma in Business Studies.
4.2.2.3 For the HTHM Programme an approved
National Diploma in Tourism and
Hospitality Management or equivalent
qualifications from a recognised institution
may be considered for direct entry into the
programme.
To be exempted from taking Level 1 courses of the HACC,
HACC - Part-Time, HBBS and HTHM degree programme, a
candidate should have 5 O Levels including Mathematics
and English and at least 2 A Level subjects.
4.3.1 For the HACC, and HACC Part-Time, Programme a
candidate must have successfully completed either
the Higher National Diploma in Accountancy and
Honours in Business Studies or have obtained such
professional qualifications or membership of Public
Accountancy and Auditing Board.
225
4.3.2
4.4.
4.5.
4.6
226
5.
For the HBBS Programme a candidate must have a

merit in the Diploma in Business Administration
and Higher National Diploma (HND) in Business
Studies.
4.3.3 For the HTHM Programme a candidate must have
successfully completed an approved Higher
National Diploma in Tourism and Hospitality
Management.
Exemption from taking Level 1 courses of the degree will be
subject to availability of places in the given class.
No candidate may be admitted, and credit shall not be given
for more than the number of courses prescribed for Level 1.
An Applicant for mature entry for the HACC, HBBS and
HTHM programmes must have satisfied the minimum
conditions for entry to Degree studies at this University as
prescribed under the entry requirements in the General
5.1 A student registered for the HACC, HACC - Part-Time, BSCT, HBBS
and HTHM degrees shall pursue approved courses of study for a
period of not less than four academic years on full-time basis,
except in the case of a student exempted from taking level 1
courses. A candidate for the HACC part-time programme shall
pursue approved courses of the study for a period of not less than
four and half years, except for those exempted from taking level 1
courses.
5.2 Courses in the degree programmes are taught at 4 levels of study.
5.3 A student is required to pass courses worth a minimum of 120
course units at each level of study, except in the case of exemption
from level 1 courses. In the case of the BSCT programme a
student shall take an extra Level 2 project course.
5.4 For Strategic Management, a student shall be required to write an
examination paper which includes a compulsory case analysis at
the end of Semester 2.
5.5 A student shall be required to complete a period of at least 30
weeks industrial attachment, which is the level 3 core course:
Industrial Attachment and professional Experience.
5.5.1
A student registered on the HACC part-time

programme may be exempted from the industrial
attachment requirement, and continue with taught
courses. Such students would be required, however to
complete a written project to be submitted within six
months after the completion of all taught courses. Any
such student on this programme must be serving articles
with a registered firm of Chartered Accountancy or
employed by a company recognised for such training by
ICAZ.
5.6 A failed course shall be repeated when it is next offered. A
repeated course shall take precedence over any higher level
courses.
5.7 A student repeating a Level 1 course may be allowed to register for
Level 2 courses for which the prerequisites have been passed. The
repeated course takes precedence over level 2 courses.
5.8 A student required to repeat a Level 2 course may proceed to
register for the Level 3 course and repeat that course while taking
Level 4 in the subsequent year of study.
5.9 A student repeating the Level 3 course may not register for any
Level 4 courses.
5.10 A full-time student shall not register for courses worth more than
160 course units in an academic year.
6.
EXAMINATIONS
6.1 End of course examination will normally be held at the end of the
semester in which teaching of the course is completed.
6.2 To be admitted to the examinations, a candidate must have
fulfilled all obligations with regard to the payment of fees in
accordance with the General (Fees) Regulations.
6.3 Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any
candidate orally.
6.4 Unless prescribed otherwise, examinations will be of three hours
duration.
7.1 Continuous assessment will account for 30% and end of course
examination shall account for 70% of the overall course mark.
7.2 A student whose continuous assessment mark is below 40%, fails
the course.
7.3 If in a given course a student does not do any coursework at all, the
overall mark should be 48% at most on the mark obtained.
7.4 For the HTHM Programme, as part of continuous assessment, a
student may be orally examined in the foreign language courses.
7.5 The overall result for the Industrial Attachment and Professional
Experience course shall be based on the following assessment:
Industrial and Academic Supervisor Assessment
50%
Attachment Report and Presentation
50%
8.
PROCESSING OF EXAMINATIONS
Examination results shall be processed as prescribed by General
9.
9.1 The determination of the results for each student shall be in
9.2 To be eligible to register for level 2 courses, a student must have
passed the prescribed level 1 courses worth at least 80 course
units.
9.3 To be eligible to register for the level 3 courses a student must have
passed the prescribed level 2 courses worth at least 80 course
units except for a student registered for the BSCT programme
who must pass prescribed courses worth at least 90 course units.
9.4 To be eligible to register for level 4 courses, a student must have
passed the level 3 course.
passed all the prescribed Level 1 or Level 2 or Level 3 courses.
9.6 The overall result INCOMPLETE: PROCEED shall apply to a student
who meets the requirements stipulated in Regulation 9.2 or 9.3
above, as the case may be.
9.7 The overall result INCOMPLETE: REPEAT FAILED COURSES shall
apply to a student:
?
who fails to meet the requirements stipulated in Regulation
9.2 or 9.3 above, or
?who in his or her final year of study, fails to graduate.
9.8
Degree Classification
The degree shall be classified on the results for Level 2, 3, and
4 courses as follows:
Full-Time
Level 2
Level 3
40%
20%
Level 4
40%
Part-time
Project in lieu of Industrial
Attachment

Regulations.
11. ACADEMIC OFFENCES
11.1 Conduct of a student shall be as prescribed in the General
11.2 A student whose conduct during the attachment is deemed to
have put the name of the University into disrepute and is in breach
of University student code of conduct shall be referred to the
University Disciplinary Committee for a hearing and any offence
that may involve suspension of a student shall automatically mean
the student will repeat the whole year.
227
12. SPECIAL REGULATIONS FOR EACH PROGRAMME

12.1 BACHELOR OF ACCOUNTANCY (HONOURS) DEGREE FULL-TIME
All the courses in this programme are core courses
Level 1 Courses
228
Level 2 Courses
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisites
Course
units
AC208
Intermediate Financial Accounting 1
AC104/AC114
10
AC207
Cost Accounting & Control 1
BS204
Corporate Finance 1
Course
units
AC210
Auditing 1
Business Administration 1
10
AC211
Accounting Information Systems 1
Business Mathematics
10
AC213
Research Method 1
AC218
AC217
BS207
Corporate Finance 2
BS214
Research Method 2 + Project
Course
Code
Description
BS101
BS107
Prerequisites
10
10
BS106/BS107
10
10
AC105/AC115
10
10
AC104/AC114
10
AC108
Business Law
AC105
Information Processing 1
10
CSCO102
Communication Skills for Commerce 1
10
AC104
Introductory Financial Accounting 1
10
AC220
Auditing 2
AC210
10
BS105
10
AC221
AC211
10
BS106
Business Statistics
10
CSC0103
ECON104
Principles of Microeconomics
12
AC118
Business Law 2
10
AC115
10
AC114
10
ECON109
Principles of Macroeconomics
12
10
BS106/BS107
10
10
10
Level 3 Course
Course
Code
AC380
Description
Prerequisites
Industrial attachment and professional experience
Course
units
120
Level 4 Courses
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisites
Course
units
AC408
Advanced Financial Accounting 1
AC208/AC218
10
AC407
Management Accounting & Control 1
AC207/AC217
10
AC404
Auditing and Investigation 1
AC210/AC220
10
AC405
Tax Law and Practice 1
10
AC421
International Accounting Regulatory Framework 1
10
AC403
Public Sector Accounting 1
10
AC418
AC208/AC218
10
AC417
Management Acc. & Control 2
AC207/AC217
10
Course Code
Description
Prerequisites
Course units
AC414
Auditing and Investigation 2
AC210/AC220
10
AC115
BS/101/BS105
10
AC415
Tax Law and Practice 2
10
AC118
Business Law 2
BS205
Management 2
BS101/BS105
10
AC208
AC413
AC208/AC218
10
AC210
Auditing 1
AC423
Professional Values, Ethics & Attitudes 1
10
BS204
Corporate Finance 1
AC424
Professional Values, Ethics & Attitudes 2
10
Year 2 Courses
Semester 1
10
AC104/AC114
10
10
BS106/BS107
10
Semester 2
12.2
BACHELOR OF ACCOUNTANCY (HONOURS) DEGREE

PART-TIME PROGRAMME HACC
Year 1 Courses
SEMESTER 1
Course Code
Description
AC104
Introductory Financial
Accounting 1
Communications Skills for
Commerce 1
SEMESTER 2
BS101
CSCO102
ECON104
BS107
Prerequisites
Prerequisites
AC207
AC217
Research Methods 1
BS101/BS105
10
AC218
AC104/AC114
10
CSCO103
Communication Skills for Commerce
10
AC211
10
Course units
Year 3 Courses
Semester 1
10
10
10
12
10
Course Code
Description
AC114
10
BS105
10
AC105
Information Processing I
10
AC108
Business Law 1
10
BS106
Business Statistics
10
ECON109
12
10
AC217
10
AC214
Research Methods 2 + Project
10
AC220
Auditing 2
AC221
Accounting Information Processing 2
10
AC380
Professional Project Report
120
AC105/AC115
10
Course units
Semester 2
AC404
Auditing & Investigations 1
AC210/AC220
10
AC407
AC207/AC217
10
BS207
Corporate Finance 2
BS106/BS107
10
AC403
10
229
Year 4
12.3
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS STUDIES AND COMPUTING

SCIENCE DEGREE
Level 1 Courses
All the Level 1 courses are core courses
Semester 1
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisites
Course
units
AC405
Tax Law & Practice 1
AC408
AC208/AC218
10
BS201
Management 1
BS101/BS105
10
AC417
AC207/AC217
10
AC413
AC208/AC218
10
AC423
Professional Values, Ethics and Attitudes 1
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisites
Course
units
AC414
Auditing & Investigations 2
AC210/AC220
10
AC415
Tax Law & Practice 2
AC418
AC218/AC208
10
AC420
Accounting Theory & Practice 2
AC210/AC220
10
BS205
Management 2
BS101/BS105
10
AC424
Professional Values, Ethics and Attitudes 2
10
10
Semester 2
230
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisites
Course
units
BS101
AC103
HCT112
HCT113
CSC0102
ECON104
BS105
AC113
HCT108
HCT109
Financial Accounting for Business
Fundamental Mathematical Structures
Programming 1
Data Structures and Algorithms
Logic Design and Switching Circuits
10
10
10
10
10
12
10
10
10
10
HCT114
Internet Programming
10
ECON109
12
Level 2 courses
All the Level 2 courses are core courses
10
10
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisites
HCT207
HCT210
HCT215
HCT216
HCT211
Introduction To Data Communication

Software Engineering
Microcontrollers, Microprocessors and Interfacing
Programming 2
Database Concepts
10
10
10
10
10
HCT214
HCT260
BS201
BS202
BS204
BS205
BS206
BS207
CSC0103
Discrete Mathematics
Practical Project
Management 1
Principles of Marketing 1
Corporate Finance 1
Management 2
Corporate Finance 2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
BS105
BS105
BS106
BS201
BS202
BS204
Course
units
Level 3 Core Course

Course
code
BS380
Description
12.4
Prerequisites
120
Level 4 Courses
A student shall take ALL the core courses and any TWO optional courses
Core Courses
Course
Code
HCT226
HCT470
HCT424
HCT222
HCT423
HCT201
BS408
BS402
BSFM201
BS409
Description
HCT407
HCT426
Data Communication and Networks

Research Methods
Programming Languages
Dissertation
Theory of Computation
Computer Organization & Architecture
Design and Analysis of Algorithms
Operating Systems
Strategic Management 1
Advanced Corporate Finance
Treasury Management
Prerequisites
BS207
BS408
Course
units
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Optional courses
Course
Code
AC202
BS001
BS003
BS005
BS010
BS011
BS012
BS016
BS414
BS415
BS419
Course
units
Industrial attachment and professional

experience
Description
Prerequisites
Management Accounting for Business 1

Managing Organisational Dynamics
International Business Management
Small enterprise Mgt. (&Development)
Management of Financial Institutions
Leadership Dynamics
Labour Relations
Human Resources Management
Marketing Research 1
International Finance
AC103/AC113
BS414
Course
units
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS STUDIES HONOURS DEGREE
Level 1 courses
Course
Code
Description
BS101
BS107
AC103
AC108
AC105
CSC0102
ECON104
BS105
BS106
AC113
AC118
AC115
ECON109
Business Law
Information Processing
Communications Skills for Commerce 1
Business Statistics
Business Law
Prerequisites
Course
units
10
10
10
10
10
10
12
10
10
10
10
10
12
231
Level 2 courses
Marketing Option
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisites
BS201
BS202
BS204
Management 1
Corporate Finance 1
BS105
BS105
BS106
BS016
BSM201
BS205
BS206
BS207
BS213
BS214
BSM002
BS401
Human Resources
Managing Quality
Management 2
Corporate Finance 2
Research Methods 1
Purchasing and Supply Management
Consumer and Buyer Behaviour
CSC0103
BS201
BS202
BS204
Course
units
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Finance and Banking option
Level 4 courses
Course
Code
BS201
BS202
BS004
BS204
BS213
BSFM201
BS205
BS206
BS207
BS208
BS214
BSFM202
Description
Prerequisites
Management 1
Banking Theory and Practice
Corporate Finance 1
Research Methods 1
Treasury Management
Management 2
Corporate Finance 2
Financial Risk Management
BS105
BS105
CSC0103
BS106
BS201
BS202
BS204
Course
Units
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Marketing Option
Course
Code
Description
BS408
BS414
BS423
BS410
BS416
BS412
BS409
BS415
BS411
BS413
BS018
BS424
Small Business Management
Marketing Management 1
International Marketing
Marketing Communication 1
Marketing Management 2
Marketing Communication 2
Services Marketing
Entrepreneurial Skills & Development
Management/Human Resources option
232
Course
Code
BS201
BS202
BS204
BS016
BS213
BS023
BS205
BS206
BS207
BS214
THM211
BS012
Description
CSC0103
Management 1
Corporate Finance 1
Human Resources
Research Methods 1
Training and Development
Management 2
Corporate Finance 2
Management of Organisational Behaviour
Labour Relations
Description
BS380
Industrial attachment and professional

experience
BS206
BS206
BS206
BS408
BS414
BS410
BS412
Course
units
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Finance and Banking option

Prerequisites
BS105
BS105
BS106
BS201
BS202
BS204
Course
units
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Level 3 course
Course
Code
Prerequisites
Course
Code
Description
BS408
BS423
BS418
Investment Analysis and Portfolio
Management.
Advanced Corporate Finance
Capital Markets
Project Management
International Finance
Credit Management
Corporate Banking
Services Marketing
BS402
BS407
BS405
BS409
BS419
BSFM403
BSFM404
BS018
BS424
Prerequisites
Course
units
10
10
10
BS207
BS408
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Management/Human Resources option

Prerequisites
Course
units
120
Course
Code
BS408
BS423
BS421
BSMGT402
BSH403
Description
Production Management
Management of Change
Negotiation Skills
Prerequisites
Course
units
10
10
10
10
10
BS405
BS409
BS011
BS018
BSMGT002
BS003
BS003
Project Management
Leadership Dynamics
Services Marketing
Business Ethics
International Business Management
BSMGT404
Managing Quality
12.5
BS408
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
BACHELOR OF TOURISM AND HOSPITALITY MANAGEMENT

HONOURS DEGREE PROGRAMME
Level 1 Courses
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisites
Course
units
THM111
10
AC 103
BS107
CSCO102
Introduction to Tourism & Hospitality

Mgt
BS106
ECON104
AC113
THM105
THM106
THM110
ECON109
Business Statistics
Financial Accounting for Business 2
Business and Hospitality Law
Foreign Language (French)
Hospitality and Tourism Marketing
10
12
10
20
20
10
12
10
10
10
Level 2 courses
Course
Code
Description
THM201
THM203
THM206
THM207
THM212
THM209
THM208
THM216
THM217
CHB1004
CHB1005
CSC0103
Hospitality Management
Property and Location Management
Introduction to Finance
Tourism Operations Management
Food Beverage Operations
Information Management
Rooms Division Management
Research Methods 1
Research Methods 2
Chinese for Tourism 1
Chinese for Tourism 2
Prerequisites
THM201
THM202
Course
units
10
10
10
10
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Level 3 Course
THM 380
Industrial Attachment and Professional Experience 120
Level 4 Courses
Course
Code
Description
Prerequisites
Course
units
THM401
Strategic Management
10
THM403
10
THM404
Services Marketing
10
THM405
International Hotel Management
10
THM412
Tour Operations
10
THM406
20
THM407
International Financial Management
10
THM411
Corporate Management
THM401
10
THM408
Consumer Behaviour
THM405
20
THM409
International Tourism Management
THM410
Hospitality Business Ethics
THM413
Tourism Planning and Management
10
In accordance with General Academic Regulations detailed syllabuses for

courses do not form part of Faculty Regulations but shall be kept in the
Faculty Office for reference.
233
DEPARTMENT OF ACCOUNTANCY REGULATIONS

FOR THE MASTER OF ACCOUNTANCY DEGREE
1.
Introduction
Regulations hereafter referred to as the General Regulations and the
Faculty of Commerce Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework.
4.5
Each student will register for ten (10) core courses. All ten
courses must be passed for a student to be allowed to proceed to
Part 3 of the programme. Each course consists of 120 hours of
teaching, of which 108 hours shall be lectures and 12 hours for
seminar. All courses are single weighted.
4.6
The dissertation shall normally start after the end of the second
semester in which Part 2 is completed in the case of part-time
students.
2.
A candidate must normally possess a good honours degree with a 2.1 or
better in Accounting and two (2) years post graduate work experience.
4.7
The dissertation shall be 20 000-25 000 words on an approved

topic. The dissertation shall normally be submitted at the end of
last month of Part 3 in the case of part-time students.
3.
3.1 The programme shall run for three years, on part-time basis
or one and half years on full-time basis.
4.8
A student may be required to attend a viva voce examination for

the dissertation.
234
4.
3.2
Part 1 and 2 of the taught component shall be offered on a parttime basis for four semesters.
3.3
Part 3 shall be offered for a period of two semesters on a part-time

basis.

4.1 The programme shall consist of two parts; Part 1 and 2 will be the
4.2
The programme shall normally commence in September.
4.3
Part I and 2: Course work lasting for four semesters within the two
years for part-time students. Part 3: A dissertation lasting one
semester on part-time basis.
Each semester shall normally involve 12 weeks of teaching
followed by 2 weeks of formal examinations.
4.4
5.
Examinations
5.1 Examinations shall be conducted in accordance with General
5.2
6.
Courses shall be examined at the end of each semester in which

they are taught, each course comprising one three-hour paper.
6.1 The mark for each course shall comprise the marks for continuous
assessment and the Formal examination in the ratio 40:60.
6.2
Continuous assessment shall include assignments and tests and

students shall be notified of their relative weightings at the
commencement of the course.
6.3
A student must pass Part 1 and 2 before proceeding to Part 3.

Those failing to do so may be allowed to repeat a course in
7.

Examination results shall be processed in accordance with item 8 of the
8.
Results shall be determined in accordance with item 9 of the General
9.
Course Description
MACC502
International Management
Accounting & Control
International Accounting &
Financial Reporting
International Financial
Management
Environment of International
Business
MACC504
MACC505
Examination
Duration
3
Weighting
Units
15
15
15
15
15
Management of Accounting
Information Systems
Accounting Theory and
Financial
The Global Financial
Regulatory
Corporate Finance
15
15
15
15
International Banking Capital

Markets
15
Research Methods
Part 2
MACC506
MACC507
MACC508
MACC509
MACC510
DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS STUDIES

REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF STRATEGIC
MARKETING DEGREE
Courses
Part 1
Course
Code
MACC501
MACC503
10. Course Syllabus

detailed syllabi for courses do not form part of these regulations but shall
be maintained in the Faculty Office for reference.
1.
Introduction
Academic Regulations for Masters Degree by Course work and the
Faculty of Commerce Regulations for Masters Degrees by Course work.
2.
better in Business Studies and two (2) years post graduate work
experience.
3.
3.1 The programme shall run for two and half years, on part-time
basis.
Prerequisite
Part 3
Course
Code
MACC570
Course Description
Dissertation
Examination
Duration
Weighting
Units
60
4.
3.2
3.3
Part 3 shall be offered for a period of one semester on a part-time

basis.

4.1 The programme shall consist of three parts; Part 1 and 2 will be the
4.2
235
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
236
4.8
5.
6.
Part I and 2: Course work lasting for four semesters within the two
years for part-time students. Part 3: A dissertation lasting one
semester on part-time basis.
Each student will register for ten (10) core courses. All ten
courses must be passed for a student to be allowed to proceed to
teaching, of which 48 hours shall be lectures and 12 hours for
seminar. All courses are single weighted.
students.
6.3
A student must pass Part 1 and 2 before proceeding to Part 3.

Those failing to do so may be allowed to repeat a course in
7.

Examination results shall be processed in accordance with item 8 of
8.
9.

last month of Part 3 in the case of part-time students.
the dissertation.
Courses
Part 1
Course Code
Course Description
Examination
Duration
3
Weighting
Units
MSM501
Strategic Marketing
15
MSM502
Consumer Behaviour
15
MSM503
15
MSM504
International Marketing
Strategy
Business Research Methods
15
MSM505
Accounting for Managers
15
Part 2
Examinations
5.1
MSM 506
Global Economy
15
MSM 507
Integrated Marketing
Communications
15
5.2
MSM 508
Strategic Brand Management
15
MSM 509
Service Marketing and

Consultancy
15
MSM 510
Electronic Marketing
15
60

6.1
continuous assessment and the Formal examination in the
ratio 40:60.
6.2
Part 3
MSM570
10.
Dissertation
Course Syllabus
In accordance with the provisions of the General Academic
Regulations, detailed syllabi for courses do not form part of these
regulations but shall be maintained in the Faculty Office for
reference.
1.
GRADUATE SCHOOL OF MANAGEMENT

REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF BUSINESS
ADMINISTRATION DEGREE
4.5
semester in which Part II is successfully completed in the case of
part-time students.
Introduction
4.6

topic. It shall normally be submitted at the end of last month of
Part III in the case of part-time students.
4.7

the dissertation.
2.
better and two (2) years post graduate work experience.
3.
3.1
The programme shall run for three years, on a part-time basis or
one and half years on full-time basis.
4.
5.
Examinations
5.2
6.

3.2
3.3

basis.
6.2

4.1
The programme shall consist of three parts; Part 1 and 2 will be
the course work component and Part 3, for dissertation.

6.3
A student must pass Part 1 before proceeding to Part 2. Those

failing to do so may be allowed to repeat a course in accordance
4.2
The programme shall normally commence in January and July.
4.3

4.4
Each student will register for twenty (20) core courses for Parts I
and II. All twenty (20) courses must be passed for a student to be
allowed to proceed to Part III of the programme. Each course
lectures and 12 hours for seminars. All courses are single
weighted.
7.

8.
237
9.
Courses
Part 1
Course
Code
MBA504
Course Description
MBA506
Weighting
Units
10
MBA565
10
MBA533
Management and
Organisation Behaviour
Accounting for Managers
10
MBA534
Business Information Systems
10
MBA535
Statistics for Manager
10
Business and its Environment
Semester 2
238
Semester 2
Examination
Duration
3
Prerequisite
10
MBA540
10
MBA528
Project Management
10
MBA573
Global Economy
10
Financial Services Option

1
10
MBA566
Financial Economics
10
MBA567
Financial Markets
10
10
MBA569
Risk Management
10
10
MBA545
10
10
Investment and Portfolio

Management
10
MBA536
Business Finance
10
MBA507
Managerial Economics
MBA539
Operations Research
MBA563
Communication and
Negotiating Skills
Part 2
Management Option
Semester 2
MBA540
10
MBA546
International Financial
Management
Global Economy
10
10
Corporate Governance and

Business Ethics
10
10
Examination
Duration
4
Weighting
Units
MBA573
Semester 1
MBA565
Course
Code
MBA513
Course Description
MBA527
MBA543
MBA531
10
Applied Corporate Finance
Marketing Management
MBA545
MBA522
MBA517
MBA535
MBA574
Corporate Governance and

Business Ethics
Examination
Duration
3
Weighting
Units
10
Human Resources
Management
Investment and Portfolio
Management
Business Law
10
10
10
Management of Change and

Complexity
10
Small Enterprise Management
MBA574
Part 3
Course
Code
MBA570
Course Description
Dissertation
60
10. Course Syllabus

Syllabuses for the courses do not form part of the General or Faculty
Regulations, but shall be maintained in the Faculty Office for reference.
DEPARTMENT OF TOURISM, LEISURE AND

HOSPITALITY STUDIES
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF SCIENCE IN
TOURISM AND HOSPITALITY
MANAGEMENT DEGREE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Introduction
better in Tourism and Hospitality Management and two (2) years post
graduate work experience.
3.1
The programme shall run for three years, on part-time basis or
one and half years on full-time basis.
3.2
3.3

basis.
5.
4.3

Each student will register for twenty (20) core courses for Parts I
and II. All twenty (20) courses must be passed for a student to be
allowed to proceed to Part III of the programme. Each course
lectures and 12 hours for seminar. All courses are single weighted.
4.5
semester in which Part II is completed in the case of part-time
students.
4.6

last month of Part III in the case of part-time students.
4.7

the dissertation.
Examinations
5.2
6.

4.1 The programme shall consist of three parts; Part 1 and 2 will be
the course work component and Part 3, will be for dissertation.
4.2
4.4
7.

6.2

6.3
A student must pass Part 1 and 2 before proceeding to Part

3. Those failing to do so may be allowed to repeat a course in
Examination results shall be processed in accordance with item 8 of
239
8.
9.
Courses
Course
Code
MTHM501
Course Description
Semester 1
Course
Code
MTHM508
Course Description
Research Methods
Examination
Duration
3
Weighting
Units
10
Examination
Duration
3
Weighting
Units
MTHM523
Applied Information Management
10
10
MTHM510
10
10
Southern Africa and Hospitality

Development
Entrepreneurship in Tourism and
Hospitality
Chinese for Tourism
10
10
MTHM502
Principles of Tourism & Hospitality

Management
Computing and Information Management
MTHM503
Economic Principles
10
MTHM504
Accounting and Finance
10
MTHM520
Hospitality Services Management
10
Semester 2
240
Part 2
MTHM505
Management and Organisational Behaviour
10
MTHM506
Tourism and Hospitality Law
10
MTHM509
10
MTHM521
Hospitality Marketing
10
MTHM522
French for Tourism
10
MTHM524
MTHM525
Semester 2
MTHM511
Tourism Development and the Environment
10
MTHM513
Tourism Operations Management
10
MTHM526
10
MTHM527
Travel and Tour Operations
10
MTHM528
Tourism Planning and Development
10
Examination
Duration
Weighting
Units
60
Part 3
Course
Code
MTHM570
10.
Course Description
Dissertation (6 months)
Course Syllabus
In accordance with the provisions of the general academic
regulations, detailed syllabi for courses do not form part of these
regulations but shall be maintained in the faculty office for
reference.
Bachelor of Teacher Education (Practical Subjects)

Bachelor of Education (Science and Mathematics Education)
Bachelor of Education (Special Needs Education)
Bachelor of Education (Teacher Education)
Bachelor of Education (Educational Management)
Bachelor of Education (Adult Education)
Bachelor of Education (Curriculum and Arts Education)
Bachelor of Education (Technical Education)
FACULTY OF EDUCATION
PROGRAMMES
1.
2.

1.1 These regulations shall be read in conjunction with the University of
Zimbabwe's General Academic Regulations.
regulations.
regulations.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
2.1 Area of Specialisation: means field from which a student draws most
of the required courses.
2.2 Elective: means a course a student may opt to take outside his/her
area of specialisation to complete the requirements of the
programme.
2.3 Equivalent course an equivalent course is one of similar weighting as
a failed course. A student is permitted to take an equivalent course if
the failed course is not on offer in two consecutive semesters. A core
or a compulsory course has no equivalent course.
2.4 Core Course means a compulsory course that must be passed in a
given programme.
2.5 Pre-requisite means a course that must be passed before the
specified courses can be attempted.
2.6 Attachment means a period of time during which a student is
assigned to a suitable government, non-government, professional
or other organisation, firm, school or other approved entity or to an
individual for the purpose of gaining practical skills or experience.
PROGRAMMES
The Faculty of Education offers the following degree programmes:
Bachelor of Education (Early Childhood Education)
Bachelor of Education (Primary Education)
5.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
To be admitted to a Bachelor of Education Degree Programme a
candidate must:
4.1 normally have one A Level pass or an approved equivalent in the
proposed area of specialisation.
4.2 have five '0' Level passes including English Language, a national
indigenous language or approved equivalent and any other
subject(s) deemed necessary by the host department.
4.3 have a teaching certificate or diploma in a relevant area of study.
4.4 have attained a satisfactory standard on any entrance test which the
University may deem necessary.
4.5 A student may be admitted into a degree programme at the
beginning of any semester, provided appropriate courses are on
offer. Not all and courses may be available in any one academic
semester. Other subjects and courses may be added to the list from
time to time.
5.1 The duration of the programme shall range from 4 to 8 academic
semesters.
5.2 A course in a programme may be designated core, pre-requisite or
elective.
5.3 A degree programme shall normally consist of a minimum of 240
course units, including all the core courses.
5.4 In a programme, a single course is worth 15 course units and is
normally taught in 60 contact hours. The project is a full single
course (15 course units).
5.5 A full-time student may register for not fewer than 60 course units
in a semester.
5.6 The following courses are compulsory for all degree programmes:
Communication Skills
Computer Applications in Education
Research Methods and Statistics
6.
CSED101
EDU101
EDU102
EXAMINATIONS
6. 1 Examinations for a course shall normally be at the end of the
241
6. 2 A failed course shall be repeated when next offered. A student may

be allowed to substitute an approved equivalent course.
6. 3 Where a project or a practical or an attachment constitutes part of
the examination, the student must complete and submit such
project or practical or attachment reports before the end of the
semester in which the project or practical or attachment is
scheduled. Three bound copies of the corrected project shall be
submitted before conferment of the degree.
6.4 A candidate must satisfy the coursework requirements for
admission to the examination.
6. 5 The Examiners may require a student to attend a viva voce
7.
242
7.1 A single overall mark shall be submitted for each course on a
student's profile in accordance with General Academic Regulations.
7.2 Normally, assessment of each course shall be based on continuous
assessment and end of course examinations and weighting shall be
as follows:
Continuous assessment =
30%
Examinations
=
70%
A student shall be required to attain a mark of at least 45% in the
examination. If the examination mark is below 45% then the overall
mark shall be the raw mark or 48%, which ever is the lower mark.
7.3 Each department shall determine components of course work
assignments that will be considered for final assessment.
7.4 For a course that includes a practicum or a research project,
continuous assessment alone shall be considered for final
assessment subject to submission of individual portfolios and
written reports respectively.
7.5 Degree classification shall be based on the best 16 courses including
all compulsory and core courses.
7.6 Normally to proceed from one academic semester to another, a
candidate shall be required to have passed all courses in the current
academic semester. However, a candidate who fails one or two
courses may be permitted to proceed to the next academic
semester carrying one or two courses.
8.

9.
SPECIAL REGULATIONS FOR EACH PROGRAMME

9.1 BACHELOR OF EDUCATION DEGREE (EARLY CHILDHOOD
EDUCATION) [B.ED (ECE)]
9.1.1 Entry qualification

For admission to the degree programme, an applicant must
normally have a teaching certificate in either Pre-School or
Infant Education or its equivalent recognised by this
University.
9.1 BACHELOR OF EDUCATION DEGREE (EARLY CHILDHOOD
EDUCATION) [B.ED (ECE)]
9.1.1 Entry qualification
For admission to the degree programme, an applicant must
normally have a teaching certificate in either Pre-School or
Infant Education or its equivalent recognised by this
University.
9.1.2 Level I Courses
9.1.2.1
9.1.2.2
Core Courses (60 course units)

Computers Applications in Education
Prerequisite Courses (105 course units)
Theories of Child Development
Historical and Philosophical Foundations of Early Childhood
Education
Learning and Development through Play
Information Technology in ECE Environments
Infants and Toddlers: Dimensions on Learning, Development
and Care
Nutrition, Safety and Health in Early Childhood
Planning, Development and Analysis of Early
Childhood Education Programmes
Curriculum Issues in Teacher Education
Practicum (30 course units)
EDU101
CSED101
EDU102
ECE101
ECE102
ECE103
ECE135
ECE119
ECE128
ECE134
ECE232
ECE210
9.1.3 Level II Courses

9.1.3.1 Electives (60 course units)
To proceed to electives, a candidate should pass all the
pre-requisite courses. A student may choose four
from the following courses for specialization in either
Infant (6 - 8 years) or Pre-school (0 - 5 years)
Infant (6 - 8 years)
Exploring the Human Sciences in Early Childhood
Teaching Mathematics to Young Children
Language Arts Programmes in Early Childhood
Education
Issues in Early Childhood Education
Art in Early Childhood Education
The Integrated Curriculum
Pre -School (0 - 5 years)
Expressive Arts in Early Childhood
The Pre -School Curriculum
Psychomotor and Eurhythmics in early Education
Drama in Early Childhood Education Programmes
Project (15 course units)
ECE109
ECE112
ECE113
ECE129
ECE216
ECE233
ECE118
ECE122
ECE226
ECE227
ECE260
9.2 BACHELOR OF EDUCATION DEGREE (PRIMARY EDUCATION) [B.

ED (PED)]
9.2.1
9.2.1.1
9.2.1.2
9.2.1.3
Level I Courses
Modern Studies in Educational Foundations
(45 course units)
Educational Philosophy
Educational Psychology
Educational Sociology
Methodologies of Primary Education
(15 course units)
Methods in Infant Education
Methods in Primary Education
Methods in Junior Education
EFPE301
EDU101
CSED101
EDU102
EFPE338
EFPE339
EFPE340
EFPE304
EFPE305
EFPE306
9.2.2
Level II Courses
9.2.2.1 Optional Courses (75 course units)
Students may select any five courses from the
following lists:
Infant Education
Historical and Philosophical Foundations of Early
Childhood Education
Theories of Development in Early Childhood
Learning and Development through Play
Teacher Education
History and Development of Teacher Education in
Zimbabwe
Effectiveness and Professional Development
of Primary School Teachers
Special Education
Philosophy and Models in Special Education
Identification and Treatment of Special Learning
Needs
Issues in Integration
Reading
Models and Processes in Reading
Beginning Reading in the Primary School
Development and Extension of Reading
Classroom Communication
Communication in Traditional and Classroom
Learning
Classroom Interactive Dynamics
Use and Development of Text
Educational Administration
Policy and Planning in Primary Education
Organization, Management and Administration
in Primary Education
Supervision and Evaluation in Primary Education
9.2.2.2 Subject Courses (30 course units)
Mathematics in Infant classes
Mathematics in Junior classes
Language Arts in Infant classes
Language Arts in Junior classes
EFPE307
EFPE308
EFPE309
EFPE310
EFPE312
EFPE313
EFPE314
EFPE315
EFPE316
EFPE317
EFPE318
EFPE322
EFPE323
EFPE324
EFPE319
EFPE320
EFPE321
EFPE325
EFPE326
EFPE327
EFPE328
243
Science and the Environment in Infant classes

Science and the Environment in Junior classes
Social Studies in Infant classes
Social Studies in Junior classes
Arts in Infant classes
Arts in Junior classes
Health Education in Infant classes
Health Education in Junior classes
9.2.2.3 Project (15 course units)
EFPE329
EFPE330
EFPE331
EFPE332
EFPE333
EFPE334
EFPE335
EFPE336
EFPE360

9.3.3.1
9.3.3.2
9.3 BACHELOR OF TEACHER EDUCATION (PRACTICAL SUBJECTS)

B.ED (TE PRAC) (OPTIONS IN ART AND DESIGN, MUSIC
EDUCATON, PHYSICAL EDUCATION)
244
9.3.1 Entry qualifications

Preference will be given to those with qualifications in the
proposed practical subject.
For admission to the programme an applicant must:
?
Have undergone training for the profession of teaching,
approved by the University of Zimbabwe, and have
passed an approved professional examination, with
preference being given to those for whom the proposed
practical subject is strongly represented;
?
In Music Education, applicants will undergo a
Proficiency Test in any of the following instruments:
marimba, mbira, ngoma, hosho, guitar or keyboard;
?
In Art and Design, applicants will be required to present
a Portfolio of their recent creative work;
?
In Physical Education, applicants will undergo a Physical
Fitness or Performance test.
9.3.3.3
9.3.3.4
9.3.2 Structure of the Programme

Normally, block attachment to a teachers' college or other
relevant institution for several weeks is required in the second
year. Fieldwork and other similar activities may be
undertaken during vacation periods.
9.3.5
9.3.5.1
9.3.5.2
Core Courses in Teacher Education (90 Course units)

Supervision and Evaluation In Teacher Education
Curriculum Issues, and Teaching and Learning in Teacher
Role of the Arts and Sport in Education
Prerequisite Courses (15 Course units)
Music Education
Ethnomusicology I
Art and Design
Design Foundations
Physical Education
Basic Skills and Techniques in
Individual and Team Sport
Specialist Core Courses (45 course units)
Music Education
Written and Aural Theory of Music / Transcription,
and
Analysis
Performance Techniques and Methodology
Practical Study in Voice or Instrument of Minor Specialization
Art and Design
Drawing I
Introduction to Visual Aesthetics
Painting I
Physical Education
Introduction to Exercise Science
Socio-Psychology of Sport
Basic Anatomy and Sports Medicine
Electives (15 Course units)
Music Education
Rudiments and Theory of Music
History of Music
Art and Design
Basic Design Theory
Visual Thinking Processes
Physical Education
First Aid and Emergency Care
History of Sport and Recreation
Level II Courses
Core Course in Teacher Education (15 Course units)
Practice and Analysis of Teaching
Core Courses - Specialist Courses (30 course units)
ETM105
CSED101
ETM107
EDU101
ETM109
EDU102
ETM101
ETAD106
ETPE102
ETM102
ETM103
ETM104
ETAD107
ETAD104
ETAD105
ETPE103
ETPE104
ETPE105
ETM112
ETM113
ETAD108
ETAD109
ETPE106
ETPE107
ETM206
9.3.5.3
9.3.5.4
Music Education
Ethnomusicology II
Practical Study in Voice or Instrument of Major Specialization
Foundations and Methods of Teaching Music
Art and Design
History of Art and Design
Colour and Design
Drawing II
Painting II
Foundations and Methods of Art and Design Educati on OR
any ONE of the following:
Painting III
Sculpture Methods
Fabric Design and Textiles
Printmaking Methods
Fine Art Photography
Drawing III
Physical Education
Advanced Skills and Coaching Techniques in Team Sport
Sports Administration and Development
Specialised Coaching in Football
Foundations and Methods of Teaching Physical Education
OR any ONE of the following:
Specialised Coaching in Netball
Specialised Coaching in Tennis
Specialised Coaching in Swimming
Specialised Coaching in Cricket
Specialised Coaching in Hockey
Music Education
Choral Conducting and Methodology
Music Cultures of the World
Art and Design Education
Understanding and Appreciating the Visual Arts
Child Art Development Studies
Physical Education
Sports Officiating
Physical Education for Special Populations
Project (15 Course units)
ETM201
ETM204
ETM208
9.4 BACHELOR OF EDUCATION DEGREE (SCIENCE AND

MATHEMATICS ) (BED SME)
ETAD 201
ETAD202
ETAD205
ETAD206
ETAD208
9.4.1 Entry Requirements

To be admitted to a Bachelor of Education Degree Programme, a
candidate must:
9.4.1.1 normally have one 'A' level pass or an approved
equivalent in the proposed area of specialisation.
ETAD207
ETAD209
ETAD204
ETAD210
ETAD211
ETAD212
9.4.1.2 have five 'O' level passes including English Language, a

national indigenous language or approved equivalent
and any other subject (s) deemed necessary by the host
department.
ETPE205
ETPE206
ETPE207
ETPE208
ETPE209
ETPE210
ETPE211
ETPE212
ETPE213
ETM209
ETM210
ETAD213
ETAD214
ETPE214
ETPE215
ETM260
9.4.1.3 have a teaching certificate or diploma in relevant area of

study.
9.4.1.5 have attained a satisfactory standard on any entrance
test which the University may deem necessary.
9.4.1.6 a student may be admitted into a degree programme at
the beginning of any semester, provided appropriate
courses are on offer. Not all and courses may be available
in any one academic semester. Other subjects and
courses may be added to the list from time to time.
9.4.2 Subject Specialization Courses (150 course units)
Each student should accumulate 150 course units from the
courses below or their equivalent as expressly approved by the
department.
245
9.4.3 Courses
9.4.3.1
9.4.3.2
9.4.3.2.1
9.4.3.2.2
9.4.3.3
9.4.3.3.1
246
9.4.3.3.2
9.4.3.4
9.4.3.4.1
9.4.3.4.2
Core Courses for All Options (60 course units)

Curriculum Theory
Geography Option
Specialization courses
Geomorphology
Biogeography
Urban Geography
Population Geography
Climatology
Hydrology
Agricultural Geography
Geographical Statistics and Fieldwork
Cartography for Teachers
Professional Development Electives (15 course units)
Pedagogical Issues in Geography
Biology Option
Specialization Courses
Introduction to Biological Statistics
Microbiology
Invertebrate Zoology
Vertebrate Zoology
Botany
Ecology
Genetics
Mycology
Plant Physiology
Animal Physiology
Pedagogical Issues in Biology
Chemistry Option
Atomic Structure
Inorganic Chemistry I
Organic Chemistry I
Analytical Chemistry II
Organic Chemistry II
Physical Chemistry
Industrial Chemistry
Chemistry of Natural Products
Environmental Chemistry
Pedagogical Issues in Chemistry
9.4.3.5
Mathematics Option
9.4.3.5.1
Introduction to Linear and Abstract algebra
Advanced Calculus
Numerical Analysis
Computer Programming in Mathematics
Ordinary Differential Equations
Probability and Statistics
Fundamentals of Analysis
Principles of Mechanics
History of Mathematical Development
Mathematical Problem Solving
Pedagogical Issues in Mathematics
Physics Option
Mechanics
Waves and Optics
Physics of Materials
Electricity and Magnetism
Modern Physics
Vector Analysis and Electromagnetism
Electric Circuits Analysis
Electronics
Solid State Physics
Environmental Physics
Professional Development Electives
Pedagogical Issues in Physics
EDU101
EDU102
ESME104
CSED101
ESMG106
ESMG107
ESMG108
ESMG109
ESMG110
ESMG111
ESMG207
ESMG208
ESMG209
ESMG206
9.4.3.5.2
9.4.3.6
9.4.3.6.1
ESMG215
ESMB107
ESMB108
ESMB109
ESMB110
ESMB111
ESMB204
ESMB205
ESMB206
ESMB202
ESMB203
9.4.3.6.2
9.4.4
9.5
Project
ESMM102
ESMM106
ESMM107
ESMM108
ESMM109
ESMM202
ESMM201
ESMM203
ESMM210
ESMM211
ESMM215
ESMP102
ESMP104
ESMP105
ESMP202
ESMP204
ESMP205
ESMP203
ESMP206
ESMP207
ESMP208
ESMP215
ESMR260
Bachelor of Science and Mathematics Education degree - (B.Ed

ODEL) open distance e-learning.
ESMC104
ESMC105
ESMC106
ESMC107
ESMC207
ESMC208
ESMC201
ESMC203
ESMC205
ESMC210
ESMC215
9.5.1 ENTRY REQUIREMENTS

To be admitted into the programme an applicant must have obtained
a pass at 'O' level in at least 5 subjects including English, Mathematics and
at least one science subject;
Normal entry
For normal entry, an applicant must satisfy the following conditions:
a) have obtained a pass at 'A' level in at least 2 (two) of the
following subjects or their recognized equivalents, one of which
must be in the area of specialization:
Biology
Mathematics
Chemistry
Physics
b) have obtained a satisfactory standard in any entrance test,

which the University may deem necessary. Special entry
9.5.3 COURSES
9.5.3.1 Level 1 courses
To complete the requirements for Level 1 of the programme, a
student must register for and pass courses worth 120 course
units taken from the common core courses list and the
specialization list, unless he/she has been exempted.
Common core courses
For special entry, an applicant must satisfy the following conditions:

a) have obtained a pass at 'A' level in at least 1 (one) of the following
subjects or their recognized equivalents, one of which must be in
the area of specialization:
Biology
Mathematics
Chemistry
Physics
a) have a teaching diploma in the relevant area of specialization;

b) have obtained a satisfactory standard in any entrance test, which
the University may deem necessary.
c) Exemption from 1st year level work, (d) constitutes 120 credits.
9.5.2 STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMME
A student may register as a full-time or part-time student.
The duration of the programme is six semesters on a full-time
basis or twelve semesters on a part time basis.
The programme is taught at three levels, Levels 1, 2 and 3.
A normal entry student shall register for all the stipulated courses
at the three levels while a special entry student shall be exempted
from Level 1 courses and the Attachment (Teaching Practice)
course.
A special entry student shall be credited with 120 course credits
from his/her Diploma studies.
A taught course shall have at least 60 contact hours of lectures,
tutorials and practicals.
Course
Code
ODELE101
ODELE102
ODELE103
ODELE104
Course description
Prerequisites
Educational Foundations1
Professional Studies
Educational Media Technology
Course
units
15
15
15
15
Biology
Course
Code
ODELB111
ODELB112
ODELB113
ODELB114
Course description
Prerequisites
Chemistry and Physics for Biology

Cell Biology
Health and Diseases
Methods of Teaching Biology
Course
units
15
15
15
15
Chemistry
Course
Code
ODELC111
ODELC112
ODELC113
ODELC114
Course description
Prerequisites
Volumetric Chemical Analysis

Separation, Electroanalytical and
Spectrometric Techniques
Introductory Chemistry I
Methods of Teaching Chemistry
Course
units
15
15
15
51
Mathematics
Course
Code
ODELM111
ODELM112
ODELM113
ODELM114
Course description
Prerequisites
Course
units
15
15
15
15
Prerequisites
Course
units
15
15
15
15
Basic Mathematics
Linear Mathematics
Calculus 1
Methods of Teaching Mathematics
Physics
Course
Code
ODELP111
ODELP211
ODELP113
ODELP114
Course description
Introductory Physics
Mechanics
Basic Mathematics for Physics
Methods of Teaching Physics
247
9.5.3.2
Level 2 courses
specialization list. Special entry are exempted from Teaching
Practice.
9.5.3.3 Level 3 courses

specialization list one of which is selected from the list of
optional courses.
Common core courses
Common core courses

Course
Code
ODELE201
Course description
Integration of ICT in Science and
Mathematics Curriculum
Educational Research & Statistics
Educational Foundations 2
Teaching Practice Attachment
ODELE202
ODELE301
ODELE204
Prerequisites
Course
units
15
15
15
15
ODELE 101
ODELB/C/M/P114
Biology
248
Course
Code
ODELB211
ODELB212
ODELB213
ODELB214
Course description
Prerequisites
Diversity of Algae
Diversity of plants
Diversity of animals
Plant Physiology
Course
units
15
15
15
15
Chemistry
Course
Code
ODELC211
ODELC212
ODELC213
ODELC214
Course description
Prerequisites
Introductory Chemistry 2
Organic Chemistry 1
Organic Chemistry 2
Physical Chemistry 1
ODELC 113
Course
units
15
15
15
15
Course description
Linear Algebra
Calculus 2
Geometry
Number Theory
Prerequisites
ODELM114
ODELM111
Course
units
15
15
15
15
Physics
Course
Code
ODELP215
ODELP212
ODELP213
ODELP214
Course Description
Prerequisites
Course
Units
15
15
Prerequisites
Course
Units
15
15
15
15
Project
Educational Management
Biology
Course
code
ODELB311
ODELB312
ODELB313
ODELB314
Course description
Microbiology
Mycology
Genetics
Animal Physiology
Optional specialization courses

ODELB315
ODELB316
Ecology
Evolution
15
15
Chemistry
Course
code
ODELC311
ODELC312
ODELC313
ODELC314
Course description
Inorganic Chemistry 1
Biological molecules
Prerequisites
ODELC 311
ODELC 214
Course
Units
15
15
15
15
Mathematics
Course
Code
ODELM211
ODELM212
ODELM213
ODELM214
Course
code
ODELR360
ODELE302
Course description
Statistical Physics
Mathematical Physics
Thermal Physics
Fluid Mechanics and Properties
of Matter
Prerequisites
Course
units
ODELP 113
15
15
15
ODELC315
ODELC316
Natural Products Chemistry
15
15
Mathematics
Course
Code
ODELM311
ODELM312
ODELM313
ODELM314
Course description
Prerequisites
Analysis
Numerical Methods
Differential Equations
Mechanics
ODELM212
ODELM212
ODELM212
Course
Units
15
15
15
15

ODELM315
ODELM316
Probability and Statistics

Linear Programming
ODELM111
15
15
Physics
Course
Code
ODELP311
ODELP312
ODELP313
ODELP314
Course description
Prerequisites

Atomic and Nuclear Physics
Waves and Optics
Electronics
Course
Units
15
15
15
15
9.6.3.2

ODELP315
ODELP316
Quantum Mechanics
Solid State Physics
15
15
9.6.3.3
9.6 Bachelor of Education (Special Needs Education) (BEd SNE)

9.6.1 Entry qualifications
For admission to the programme applicants must have
certificate in Education (CE Special Needs
Education) or its equivalent. An 'A' level pass or its equivalent
is an added advantage.
9.6.2.1
9.6.2.2
9.6.3
9.6.3.1

Introduction to the Philosophy, Sociology and Psychology of
Special Needs Education (including models in Special Education)
Aetiology and Medical Aspects of various Disabilities
Assessment Theories and Practices in Special Education
Guidance and Counselling in Special Needs Education
Electives (45 course units)
Disability and HIV/Aids
The Learning Disabled Child
Health Related Disorders
Inclusive Education
Level II Area of Specialisation Courses (75 course units)
Hearing impairment: Principles and Practices of Educating
Children with Hearing Impairments
Curriculum Management, Assessment and Teaching Techniques
Aetiology and Medical Aspects of Hearing Impairment
Language, Communication and Assistive Devices
9.6.4
EFSE101
EFSE102
9.7.1.1
EFSE106
EFSE107
EFSE108
EFSE109
EFSE 202
EFSE 205
EFSE 206
EFSE 207
EFSE 211
EFSE 202
EFSE 208
EFSE 209
EFSE 210
EFSE 211
EFSE 201
EFSE 202
EFSE 203
EFSE 204
EFSE211
EFSE260
9.7 Bachelor of Education Degree in Teacher Education (B.Ed. TE)

9.7.1
EFSE103
EDU102
EFSE105
CSED101
Rehabilitation for Integration

Research Based Enquiry
Visual impairment - Principles and Practices of Educating
Children with Visual Impairments
Aetiology and Medical Aspects of Visual Impairment
Communication and Instructional Systems (including Braille 1 and
2)
Orientation, Mobility and Rehabilitation
Mental Handicap Principles and Practices of Educating
Children with Mental Handicaps
Causes, Effects and Historical Perspectives of Mental Handicap
Cognitive, Social and Emotional Development
Rehabilitation for Integration and Models for Independent Living
9.7.1.2
Level I Courses
Core Courses (120 Course units)
Teaching and Learning in Teacher Education
Supervision and Evaluation in Teac her Education
Comparative Studies in Teacher Education
Practice of Teaching
Professional Courses (45 Course units)
Students should select either Infant Education or Junior Teaching
Methods courses.
Infant Education
General Principles for Teaching Young Children
Instructional Strategies for Pre-School and Infant Teachers
Practice of Teaching
Junior Teaching Methods
Methods for Teaching -Principles and Strategies
Methods for Teaching Science and Mathematics
Methods for Teaching Humanities
Optional Courses (60 Course units)
Infant Education
Theories of Child Development
249
ET101
ET102
ET103
ET104
ET105
EDU101
CSED101
EDU102
IE101
IE102
IE103
JMT101
JMT102
JMT103
EIE104
250
9.7.2
Principles of Curriculum Design

History and Philosophical Foundations of Infant
Administration of Infant and Per-Schools
Reading in the Curriculum
Theoretical Considerations
Classroom Practices
Literature for Children
Reading and Writing in the Curriculum
Philosophy and History of Education
Modern Philosophy
History of Education
Sociology of Education
Introduction to Sociology
Sociology of the School
Contemporary Social Problems and Education
Psychology of Education
Introduction to Educational Psychology
Human Development
Human Learning and Performance
Special Education
Introduction to Exceptional Children
Clinical Methods for Teaching Exceptional Children
EIE105
EIE106
EIE107
ERC101
ERC102
ERC103
ERC104
PHE101
PHE102
PHE103
9.8.3
9.9.1 Special Entry Requirements

9.9.1.1 To be eligible for admission into the Programme,
applicants must:
have passed the Diploma in Adult Education of the
University of Zimbabwe (or approved equivalent) with
a minimum of 2.2 and have at least 3 years experience
in the field of Adult Education and be currently
engaged in adult education.
PES101
PES102
PES103
9.9.2
9.9.2.1
9.8 Bachelor of Education degree in Educational Management (BEd

EM)
9.8.1
9.8.1.1
9.8.2
9.8.2.1
Level I Courses
Educational Leadership and Supervision
Introduction to Educational Planning and Development
Policy Studies in Education
Principles of Educational Management
Introduction to Economics of Education
Level II Courses (60 Course units)
Educational Business Management
Project Management and Evaluation
Measurement and Evaluation
Gender Issues in Education
EDU102
EDU101
CSED101
EM101
EM102
EM103
EM104
EM105
EM201
EM202
EM203
EM204
EM205
EM206
EM207
EM208
EM209
EM210
EM211
EM260
9.9 Bachelor of Education degree in Adult Education (B. Ad. Ed)
SE101
SE102
SE103
SP101
SP102
ET160
Management of Staff Development Programmes in Education

Leadership and Organizational Effectiveness
Curriculum Implementation, Change and Innovation
Organizational Development
Politics of Education
Management and Management of Primary Schools
Management and Management of Secondary Schools
Research Project (15 Course units)
9.9.3
9.9.3.1
9.9.3.2
9.9.4
Level I Courses
Administration and Management of Adult Education
Local and Comparative Studies
Problems and Issues in Adult Education
Techniques and Practice of Distance Education
Computer Application in Education
Level II Courses
Project Planning and Management I
Adult Literacy
Principles and Practice of Community Development
Elective Course (45 Course units)
Introduction to Entrepreneurship
Design and Development of Instructional Materials
Methods in Industrial and Vocational Education
Principles and Practice of Counselling
Principles of Instructional Design
Field Project (15 Course units)
ADE 101
AED 101
ADE 102
CSED 101
AED 103
EDU 101
EDU 102
AED 108
AED 106
AEC 104
AEC 103
AED 107
AED 102
AED 104
AED 105
AED 101
ADE 360
9.10 Bachelor of Education degree (Curriculum and Arts Education )

(BEd CAE)
9.10.1.4
For admission to the programme applicants must have Diploma in
Education in the area of specialization or its equivalent.
An 'A' level pass or its equivalent is an added advantage.
9.10.1
9.10.1.1
9.10.1.2
9.10.1.3
Level I Courses
Teaching Subject Pre-Requisites (15 course units)
English
Theories of Literature
History
Introduction to Historiography and Historical Methods
Ndebele
Survey of Ndebele Language and Literature
Religious Education
Contextual Framework for Religious Education
Shona
Survey of Shona Language and Literature
Teaching Subject Courses (45 course units)
English
Introduction to Modern Linguistics
Introduction to Applied Linguistics
Zimbabwean Literature in English
History
History of Central Africa from Iron Age to the Present
History of West Africa from 1855 to 1960
History of East Africa from 1855 to 1960
Ndebele
Language and Structure
Ndebele Syntax
The Ndebele Poem
Religious Education
Religious Education through Life Themes
The Gospels
African Traditional Religions
Shona
Language and Structure
Shona Syntax
The Shona Poem
9.10.2
9.10.2.1
CSED101
EDU101
EDU102
CAE105
CAH101
CAN101
CAR101
CAS101
CAE102
CAE103
CAE106
CAH105
CAH106
CAH107
CAN102
CAN103
CAN104
CAR102
CAR103
CAR104
CAS103
CAS104
CAS105
9.10.2.2
Electives (15 course units)

Curriculum Theory
Language and Learning
Special Education
Level II Courses
Teaching Subject Courses (90 course units)
English
African Literature in English
Applied Linguistics and Language Learning
CAC103
EM106
CAL101
EFY101
EFP101
EFS101
EFSP101
CAE205
CAE202
Non-African Literature in English

Specific Issues in Language and Literature
African-American and Caribbean Literature
Childrens Literature
History
History of Zimbabwe from Iron Age to Colonization
History of Southern Africa from Iron Age to Present
Industrialization of the Western World
Historical Theories of Imperialism
History of Zimbabwe, 1890 to the Present
History of Western Europe since 1900
Ndebele
The Ndebele Novel
The Ndebele Play
Aspects of Language and Development
Translation from and into Ndebele
Comparative Nguni
Ndebele Traditional Thought
Religious Education
Founding of the Jewish Nation
Acts of the Apostles and Epistles
Prophets of the Old Testament
Islam
Hinduism
Human Rights and Democracy Education in
Religious Education
Shona
The Shona Novel
The Shona Play
CAE201
CAE206
CAE207
CAE208
Aspects of Language and Development

Translation from and into Shona
Shona Dialects
Shona Traditional Thought
Professional courses (15 course units)
English
Pedagogical Issues in English
CAS203
CAS205
CAS206
CAS207
CAH205
CAH206
CAH203
CAH207
CAH208
CAH206
CAN201
CAN202
CAN203
CAN205
CAN206
CAN207
CAR201
CAR202
CAR203
CAR204
CAR205
CAR206
CAS201
CAS202
CAE207
251
9.10.3
History
Pedagogical Issues in History
Ndebele
Pedagogical Issues in Ndebele
Religious Education
Pedagogical Issues in Religious Education
Shona
Pedagogical Issues in Shona
Project ( 15 Course units)
Home Economics
Family Care and Health
Food Technology and Nutrition 1
CAH204
CAN204
CAR207
CAS204
CA360
9.11 Bachelor of Education Degree (Technical Education ( BEd TECH)

9.11.1 Entry Qualifications
Preference will be given to those with qualifications in the
proposed Technical Subject
9.11.2
9.11.2.1
9.11.2.2
252
9.11.2.3
Level I Courses
Core Course (45 course units)
Pre-Requisite Courses for All Options ( 30 course
units)
Agriculture
Applied Chemistry
Applied Botany and Genetics
Building Technology and Design
Applied Chemistry and Physics
Technical Mathematics
Home Economics
Applied Chemistry
Applied Physics
Metal Technology and Design
Technical Graphics and Design
Wood Technology and Design
Specialized Subject Area Core Courses (30
course units)
Agriculture
Plant Physiology
Soil Science
Trade and Technical Skills 1
Building Technology
CSED101
CSED102
EDU101
TEA107
TEA108
TEB109
TEB110
TEH111
TEH109
TEM112
TEM113
TET107
TET108
TEW112
TEW113
TEA109
TEA110
TEB111
TEB112
9.11.2.4

Principles of Design
Graphic Communication
Engineering Science
Applied Geometry
Principles of Design
Graphic Communication
Professional Electives (15 course units)
Methods of Teaching
Introduction to Foundations of the Curriculum
Curriculum Planning and Design
Curriculum Implementation and Evaluation
Agronomy
Animal Bleeding and Reproduction Physiology
Biochemistry and Animal Nutrition
Ruminant and Non-Ruminant Animal Production
Farm Mechanisation and Engineering
Organization and Management
Geometrical Drawing
Trade and Technical Skills II
Quantity Surveying and Estimating
Building Drawing and Design
Architectural Studies
Home Economics
Organisation and Management
Textile Science
Food Technology and Nutrition II
Food Services Management
Family Management and Economics
Clothing Design and Technology
Design and Manufacturing I
Principles of Engineering Science
Principles of Material Science I
Design and Manufacturing II
Principles of Material Science II
Design
Fundamentals of Material Science and Fabrication
Computer Graphics
TEH110
TEH107
TEM114
TEM115
TET103
TET102
TEW114
TEW115
TEA/B/H/T113,
TEM/W116
CAC101
CAC102
CAC103
EFS101
EFP101
TEA20
TEA207
TEA208
TEA 209
TEA 204
TEB208
TEB209
TEB210
TEB207
TEB 203
TEB 204
TEH210
TEH 211
TEH208
TEH212
TEH 213
TEH 214
TEH 211
TEM212
TEM 213
TEM 214
TEM 215
TEM216
TET208
TET201
TET 209
TET 210
9.11.4.
9.11.5

Building Drawing and Design
Design and Manufacturing I
Principles of Engineering Science
Principles of Material Science I
Design and Manufacturing II
Principles of Material Science II
Industrial Attachment Report (15 course units)
Industrial Attachment
Project (15 course units)
MASTER OF EDUCATION DEGREE

PROGRAMMES
TET211
TET 207
TEW213
TEW 214
TEW212
TEW215
TEW216
TEW217
1.

1.1 The following regulations apply to Master of Education degree
programmes. These regulations should be read in conjunction with
General academic regulations for Masters degrees.
regulations.
regulations.
2.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
2.1 Area of Specialisation : means field from which a student draws most
of the required courses.
2.2 Elective: means a course a student may opt to take outside his/her
area of specialisation to complete the requirements of the
programme.
2.3 Equivalent course: an equivalent course is one of similar content and
weighting as a failed course. A student is permitted to take an
equivalent course if the failed course is not on offer in two
subsequent consecutive semesters. A core or a compulsory course
has no equivalent course.
3.
PROGRAMMES
The Faculty of Education offers the following degree programmes:
Master of Education (Educational Management)
Master of Education (Curriculum and Arts Education)
Master of Education (Early Childhood Education)
Master of Education (Teacher Education)
Master of Education (Educational Foundations)
Master of Education (Educational Psychology)
Master of Science (Educational Psychology)
Master of Education (Science and Mathematics Education)
Master of Education (Technical Education)
Master of Education (Adult Education)
TEA/B/H/M/T/W 280
TEA/B/H/M/T/W260
9.12. Scheme of Examinations

9.12.1 All written examinations shall be of three hour duration.
9.12.2 Normally, to proceed from one academic semester to
another, a candidate shall be required to have passed all
courses in the current academic semester. However, a
candidate who fails one or two courses may be permitted
to proceed to the next academic semester carrying the
one or two courses.
10 SYLLABUSES
syllabuses for subjects/courses do not form part of these Regulations but
detailed syllabuses shall be maintained in the Faculty Office for reference.
253
4.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
To be admitted to a Master of Education Degree Programme, a candidate
must:
4.1 have obtained at least a lower second division in the area of
specialisation at B.Ed. degree level of this University or its approved
equivalent.
4.2 have attained a satisfactory standard on any entrance test which the
University may deem necessary.
4.3 Students may join the programme in any academic semester
provided the relevant courses are on offer. Not all the subjects and
courses may be available in any one academic semester. Other
subjects and courses may be added to the list from time to time.
5.
5.1 The duration of the programme shall range from 3 to 6 semesters.
5.2 A course in a programme may be designated core, pre-requisite or
elective and each is worth 15 course units.
5.3 A degree programme shall consist of a minimum of 180 course
units.
5.4 A dissertation shall consist of 30 course units.
5.5 A semester shall comprise not less than 15 weeks.
5.6 The following courses are compulsory for all degree programmes
5.5.1 Research Methods
5.5.2 Statistics
5.5.3 Information Technology in Education
254
6.
7.
EXAMINATION
6.1 End of course examination shall normally be at the end of the
6.2 A failed course shall be repeated when next offered. A student may
be allowed to substitute an approved equivalent course.
6.3 Where course projects or practicals or attachments constitute part
of the examination, the student must complete and submit such
projects or practicals or attachment reports before the end of the
semester in which the projects or practicals are scheduled.
6.4 A candidate must satisfy the coursework requirements for
admission to the examination.
6.5 The Examiners may require a student to attend a viva-voce
7.1 A single overall mark shall be submitted for each course on a
student's profile and in accordance with degree regulations.
7.2 Normally, assessment of each course shall be based on continuous
assessment and end of course examination and the weighting shall
be as follows:
=
50%
Examination
=
50%
A student shall be required to attain a mark of at least 45 percent in

the examination. If the examination mark is below 45 percent then
the overall mark shall be the raw mark or 48 percent whichever is the
lower mark.
7.3 Each department shall determine components of coursework
assignments that will be considered for final assessment.
7.4 For courses that include a practicum, or research project,
continuous assessment alone shall be considered for final
assessment subject to submission of individual portfolios and
written reports respectively. In the case of the dissertation, it shall be
submitted before the end of the semester in which it is scheduled.
Three bound copies of the corrected dissertation shall be submitted
before conferment of the degree.
8.
PUBLICATION OF RESULTS AND AWARD OF DEGREES

provisions of the General Regulations. To be awarded the degree a
student must pass a minimum of 180 course units including all core
courses.
9.
SPECIAL REGULATIONS FOR EACH PROGRAMME

9.1 Master of Education (Educational Management) (M.Ed.EM)
9.1.1
9.1.2.
9.1.3
Qualification for admission:

To be admitted to the programme a candidate must normally have
had a minimum of two years experience in an approved managerial
role.
Core Courses (105 Course Units)
Evolving Concepts in Educational Management
Government and Educational Policy
Educational Planning
Financial Management
Research Methods
Statistics
Information Technology in Education
Electives (30 Course Units)
Students should take two elective courses chosen from any one of
the three specialist areas below.
Educational Policy Studies
Economics of Education
EM501
EM502
EM503
EM504
EDU501
EDU502
EDU503
EM505
9.1.4
9.1.5
Politics of Education
Education and the Law
Equal Opportunities in Educational Management
Educational Assessment and Evaluation
Project and Programme Evaluation
Measurement and Evaluation
Guidance and Counseling
Marketing Management in Education
Governance in Higher Education Institutions
Internship (15 Course Units)
Dissertation (30 Course Units)
EM506
EM507
EM508
EM509
EM510
EM511
EM512
EM513
EM514
EM515
EM516
EM570
9.2 Master of Education ( Curriculum and Arts Education)

(M.Ed.CAE)
9.2.1
9.2.2
Core courses (90 Course Units)

Curriculum Planning, Design and Development
Foundations of the Curriculum
Current Themes and Issues in Education
- Macro and Micro
Perspectives
Research Methods
Statistics
Areas of Specialisation (60 Course Units)
Curriculum Studies
Instructional Design
Curriculum Analysis
Change and Innovation
Curriculum Evaluation
History Education
Curriculum Issues in History
Historiography and the Philosophy of History
Methodology, Techniques and Theory in Historical S tudies
Pedagogical Issues in History at Primary, Secondary and Tertiary
Levels
Developments in History: Implications for
the Curriculum in
Zimbabwe
Language Education: English
Theory of Language Teaching
The Psy
cho
and Socio
Linguistic Aspects of Language
Theory of Literature, Criticism and Research Methods

The teaching of Phonetics and Structure of Modern English
Measurement, Evaluation and Supervision in Language Education
Developments in English: Implications for the Curriculum Language
Education: Ndebele
The Psycho-and Socio-Linguistic Aspects of Language
Curriculum Issues in Ndebele
Applied Linguistics in the Teaching of Ndebele
as a Second
Language
Developments in Ndebele: Implications for the Curriculum Language
Education: Shona
ECAC505
ECAC506
ECAC503
EDU503
EDU501
EDU502
CAS505
CAS502
CAS503
CAS504
CAH501
CAH502
CAH503
CAH504
CAH505
ALE501
ALE502
ALE503
ALE504
ALE505
ALE506
ALN501
ALN502
ALN504
ALN503
ALN505
ALN506
9.2.3

The Psycho-and Socio-Linguistic Aspects of Language
Curriculum Issues in Shona
Applied Linguistics in the Teaching of Shona as a Second Language
Developments in Shona: Implic ations for the Curriculum Religious
Education
Curriculum Issues in Religious Education
Theory , Methodology and Techniques in the Teaching of Religious
Education
Measurement, Evaluation and Supervision in Religious Education
Pedagogical Issues in Religious Education at Primary, Secondary
and Tertiary Levels
Developments in Religious Education: Implications
for the
Curriculum
ALS501
ALS503
ALS504
ALS502
ALS505
ALS506
CAR501
CAR502
CAR503
CAR504
CAR505
ECAC570
9.3 MASTER OF EDUCATION (EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION)

[M.ED (ECE)]
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.3.1
9.3.3.2
9.3.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5

Research Methods
Statistics
Pre-Requisite (45 Course Units)
Theories of Infant Development
Culture and Cognition
Children and their Social Environment
A student is required to choose three courses from one
specialisation.
Child Development
Children at risk: Identification, Monitoring and Assessment
Pre-school Mental Tests
Cross Cultural and Comparative Child Studies:
Zimbabwe and Southern Africa as Child Development Contexts.
School Readiness across the Curriculum
Organisation, Adminis tration and Management of Early
childhood programmes
Development and Management of School for young children
Policy development and analysis in Early Childhood Development
Comparative Early Childhood Education
Laws and Regul atory Framework Governing Early Childhood
Education
Curriculum and Instruction
Diagnosis and remediation of reading problems
Ethno-science and Ethno- mathematics
Expressive Arts
Language Arts & Childrens Literature
Early Childhood Internship (15 Course Units)
EDU501
EDU502
EDU503
ECE501
ECE502
ECE507
ECE504
ECE505
ECE513
ECE515
ECE503
ECE508
ECE506
ECE509
ECE514
ECE516
ECE517
ECE510
ECE518
ECE519
ECE570
255
9.4 MASTER OF TEACHER EDUCATION (PRACTICAL SUBJECTS)

[MTED (PRACT)]
9.4.1
9.4.2
256

comparative and Case Studies in Teacher Education
Management and Administration of Teacher Education
Practical Teaching: Theory, Development and Support
Professional Studies in Teac her Education
Research Methods
Statistics
Optional Specialisation Courses (30 Course Units)
Option I: Psychology of Education
Cognition and Intellect
Personality and Socialisation
Physiological Aspects of Human Development
Option II: Philosophy and History of Education
Ethics and Education
Traditional Thought and Practice in Traditional African Society
Option III: Sociology of Education
Education and Social Change
Education and Social and Economic Development
Social Institutions and Education
Option IV: Pre-school and Infant Education
Assessment and Evaluation in Pre-school Education
Models in Early Childhood Education Programmes
Play in Early Childhood Education Programmes
Management and Administration of Pre-school and Infant Education
Open Education - The Informal Classroom
Current Issues in Infant Education (Legal, Health, etc.)
Option V: Evaluation Research in Teacher Education
Theories of Evaluation
Evaluation Models in Teacher Education
Case Studies in Evaluation
Option VI: Professional Knowledge in Secondary Education
(a subject - specific specialisation option may be selected)
Science Education
Philosophy, Epistemology and Sociology of Science Education
Curriculum Issues In Science Education
Pedagogical and Professional Development
Issues in Science Education
Primary and Secondary Environmental Science Education
Mathematics Education
Philosophy, Epistemology and Sociology of
Curriculum Issues In Mathematics Education
Pedagogical and Professional Development Issues in
English Education
Applied Linguistics and Language Teaching Methodologies
Second Language Teachin g Approaches
Analysis, Design, and Development of Language Materials
Home Economics Education
Curriculum Issues in Home Economics
ET 506
ET 509
ET 510
ET 513
ET512
EDU503
EDU501
EDU502
PSP501
PSP502
PSP503
PSH501
PSH502
PSH503
PSS501
PSS502
PSS503
PSI1501
PSI 502
PSI 503
PSI 504
PSI 505
PSI 506
PSR501
PSR502
PSR503
PSKS501
PSKS502
PSKS503
PSKS504
PSKM501
PSKM502
PSKM503
PSKE501
PSKE502
PSKE503
PSKH501
9.4.3
Nutrition Education
Consumer and Resources Management
Apparel Design
Home Economics in the Community
Option VII: Practical Subjects
Art and Design Education
Aesthetics and Criticism Seminar
Curriculum Development in Art and Design Education
Modern African Art
Management and Marketing of the Arts
Graduate Studio Art: Drawing, Painting, Sculpture,
Photography, or Printmaking
Music Education
Music Teaching in Higher Education
Music Learning and Performance in African Cultures
Music Curriculum Design Implementation and Evaluation
Voice or Instrument of Major Specialisation
Option VII: Professional Knowledge Junior Primary Education
(PSJ 5)
Teachi ng Practical Subjects
Teaching Science Subjects
Teaching Humanities
Teaching Language Arts
Teaching Reading
PSKH502
PSKH503
PSKH504
PSKH505
PSKA501
PSKA502
PSKA503
PSKA504
PSKA505
PSKME501
PSKME504
PSKME503
PSKME505
PSKME506
PSJ501
PSJ502
PSJ503
PSJ504
PSJ505
ET570
9.5 Master of Education (Educational Foundations)

9.5.1
9.5.2

Research Methods
Statistics
Areas of Specialisation (60 Course Units)
Sociology of Education: Theoretical and Historical Perspectives
Education, Social and Economic Development in the Third World
Contemporary Educational Problems
Sociology of the School
Classical Philosophy of Education
Philosophy of Knowledge and the Curriculum
Modern Philosophies of Education
Educational Thought and Practice in Traditional African Society
Human Development
EDU501
EDU502
EDU503
EF 530
EF 532
EF 540
EF 539
EF 510
EF 512
EF 513
EF 517
EF 541
EF 545
Educational Testing and Measurement

Guidance and Counselling
Educational Thought and Practice in Traditional African Society
History of Education in Zimbabwe
History of Educational Thought
History of Curriculum Development
9.5.3
9.5.4
Comparative Education
Educational Policy and Practice in Post Colonial Africa
Teacher Education in the Contemporary World
Case Studies in Curriculum Change
Case Studies in Educational Administration
Each student is required to take a total of three elective courses, two
from his/her area of specialisation and one from a different area of
specialisation.
Culture, Socialisation and Learning
Social Determinants of Education
Socio-linguistics
Sociology of Knowledge
Education and Social Change
Education and Occupation
Social Institutions and Education
Contemporary Social Problems and Education
Social Philosophy of Education
Morality and Education
Reasoning and Meaning in Education
Philosophical Analysis of Contemporary Educational Problems
Philosophy for Children
Research Techniques in Human Development
Cognition and Moral Development
Personality Theories and Personality
Development
Psycholinguistics
Cognitive Psychology
Research Seminar
Social Psychology
Educational Psychometrics
Advanced Educational Psychology
History of Adult Education
History of Higher Education
History of Education in more Developed Countries
History of Educational Co-operation in the Commonwealth
Contemporary Educational Problems in Developing Countries
Comparative Education
Education in Rural Communities
Multi-Cultural Education
The University in Contemporary Africa
Church and State in Education
Education in Socialist Societies
Contemporary Educational Problems in more Developed Countries
Dissertation (30 course units)
EF 564
EF 554
9.6 Master of Science (Educational Psychology)

9.6.1 Entry Qualifications
9.6.1.1 An applicant with an Honours degree in Psychology
and without a teaching qualification or experience
will be required to undergo a minimum of one year's
relevant in service training prior to embarking on this
programme.
9.6.1.2 An applicant with Honours degree in Psychology or its
equivalent and already employed by Schools
Psychological Services will be eligible for this
programme after a minimum of one year's
satisfactory service.
EF 521
EF 522
EF 520
EF 523
EF
EF
EF
EF
500
501
502
503
EF529
EF531
EF533
EF535
EF536
EF537
EF538
EF534
EF511
EF514
EF515
EF516
EF518
EF 542
EF 543
EF544
EF545
EF547
EF560
EF565
EF551
EF552
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.6.4
EF546
EF545
EF548
EF551
EF580
EF547
EDU501
EDU502
EDU503
EF581
EF570
9.7 Master of Education (Educational Psychology)

9.7.1
9.7.2
EF524
EF525
EF526
EF527
EF528
EF504
EF505
EF506
EF507
EF508
EF509
EF570

Special Education
Advanced Educational Psychometrics
Internship I
Cognitive Psychology
Research Methods
Statistics
Internship II (15 Course Units)
9.7.3

Research Methods
Statistics
Educational Testing and Measurement
Advanced Educational Psychometrics
Human Development
Cognitive and Moral Development
Personality Theories and Personality Development
Social Psychology
Special Needs Education
Dissertation (30 course units)
EDU501
EDU502
EDU503
EF564
EF551
EF541
EF542
EF543
EF545
EF565
EF554
EF568
EF570
257
9.8 Master of Education (Science and Mathematics Education)

9.8.1
9.8.2
258
9.8.3
9.8.4

Research Methods
Curriculum Theory and Development
Trends in Science and Mathematics Education
Statistics
Core courses in area of specialisation (45 Course units)
Biology Education
Curriculum and Pedagogical Issues in Biology Education
Evaluation and Assessment in Biology
Developments in Biology
Chemistry Education
Curriculum and Pedagogical Issues in Chemistry Education
Evaluation and Assessment in Chemistry
Developments in Chemistry
Geography Education
Curriculum and Pedagogical Issues in Geography Education
Evaluation and Assessment in Geography
Developments in Geography
Curriculum and Pedagogical Issues in Mathematics Education
Evaluation and Assessment in Mathematics
Developments in Mathematics
Physics Education
Curriculum and Pedagogical Issues in Physics
Education
Evaluation and Assessment in Physics
Developments in Physics
Professional Development in Science and Mathematics
Education
Change and Intervention Theory and INSET
Human Resource Development in Science
and Mathematics Education
Development and Management of Material Resources
Environmental Science Education
Curriculum and Pedagogical Issues in Environmental Science
Evaluation and Assessment in Environmental Science
Developments in Environmental Science Education
Issues in Biotechnology
Issues in Environmental Science
Issues in Public Health
Natural Product Chemistry
Steriochemistry
Issues in Physical Geography
Issues in Human Geography
Research-based Problem Solving in Professional
Developments in Science and Mathematics Education
Elements of Functional Analysis
Elements of Mathematical Modeling
Mathematical Methods in Physics
Condensed Matter Physics
Quantum Physics
EDU501
ESME509
EDU503
ESME510
EDU502
9.9 Master of Education (Technical Education) (M.Ed Tech)

9.9.1.
9.9.2
ESMB501
ESMB502
ESMB503
ESMC501
ESMC502
ESMC503
ESMG501
ESMG502
ESMG503
ESMM502
ESMM503
ESMP501
ESMP502
ESMP503
ESMD501
ESMD502
ESMD503
ESMS501
ESMS502
ESMS503
ESMB504
ESMS504
ESMB505
ESMC504
ESMC505
ESMC506
ESMG504
ESMG505
ESMD504
ESMM504
ESMM505
ESMP504
ESMP505
ESMP506
ESME570
9.9.3

Management of Technical/Vocational Institutions
History and Philosophy of Technical/Vocational Education
Research Methods
Statistics
Professional Electives (15 Course units)
Leadership in Organisations
Entrepreneurship
Project Management and Evaluation
Curriculum Issues in Technical/Vocational Education
Areas of Specialisation : Core Courses (45 Course Units)
AGRICULTURE
Animal Science Option:
Animal Nutrition
Animal Breeding and Health
Biometry
Crop Science Option:
Principles of Plant Breeding
Seed Technology
Biometry
Management and Organisation of Construction Projects
Occupational Safety in Construction
Blueprint Reading and Interpretation
Home Economics
Human Nutrition Option
Nutritional Physiology
Critical Issues in Nutrition
Metabolism of Energy Nutrients
Family Studies Option
Critical Issues Affecting Individuals and Families
Educational Sociology of Death and Dying
Resource Management for Individuals and Families
Textiles, Clothing and Design Option
Contemporary Issues in Textiles, Apparel Design and Con struction
Social and Psychological Aspects of Clothing and Textiles
Advanced Textile Science
Advanced Design and Manufacturing
Advanced Material Science
Advanced Engineering Science
Advanced Design
Advanced Technical Mathematics
Advanced Design and Manufacturing
Advanced Material Science
TE501
TE502
EDU501
EDU502
EDU503
TE503
TE504
TE505
TE506
TEA501
TEA502
TEA503
TEA504
TEA505
TEA503
TEB501
TEB502
TEB503
TEH501
TEH502
TEH503
TEH504
TEH505
TEH506
TEH507
TEH508
TEH509
TEM501
TEM502
TEM503
TET501
TET502
TET503
TEW501
TEW 502
TEW503
9.9.4
9.9.5
Technical Electives (15 course units)

Biodiversity Conservation
Principles of Crop Protection
Animal Physiology
Poultry and Pig Production
Building Construction Materials
Principles and Theory of Structures
Principles of Structural Design
Guidance and Counselling of Individuals and Families
Family Relations
Community Nutrition
Experimental Foods
Textiles Design and Dynamics
Architectural Design and Drawing
Mechanical Engineering Design and Drawing
Civil Engineering Design and Drawing
Applied Mechanics and Strength of Materials
Advanced Graphic Communication
Production Management
Dissertation (30 Course units)
TEA506
TEA507
TEA508
TEA509
TEB504
TEB505
TEB506
TEH510
TEH511
TEH512
TEH513
TEH514
TET504
TET505
TET506
TEM/W504
TEM/W 505
TEM/W506
TE570
10. SYLLABUSES
syllabuses for courses do not form part of the General or Faculty
Regulations, but shall be submitted through the Department concerned
to the appropriate Faculty Board. Copies of the detailed syllabuses shall
be maintained in the Faculty Office for reference.
9.10 Master of Education (Adult Education)
259
Level I Courses
9.10.1
9.10.2
9.10.3

History of Adult Education
Philosophical Foundations of Adult Education
Comparative Adult Education
Psychology of Adult Education
Statistics
Research Methods
Electives Courses (45 Course units)
Communication Theory and Educational Technology
Adult Education and Rural Development
Statistical Methods and Evaluation in Adult Education
Political Development and Social Change
Dynamics of Planned Change
Workers Education and Industrial Labour Relations
Educational Systems Planning
Constructing Achievement Tests
Population Dynamics and Population Education
Project Planning and Management II
Entrepreneurship Education
Principles, Techniques and Practice in Distance Education
Level II Courses
Dissertation (30 Course units)
MAE570
MAE500
MAE501
MAE502
MAE506
EDU502
EDU501
EDU503
MAE503
MAE504
MAE513
MAE505
MAE507
MAE508
MAE511
MAE512
MAE515
MAE518
MAE519
MAE520
1.4.1
FACULTY OF ENGINEERING
1.4.2
UNDERGRADUATE REGULATIONS
1.4.3
1
REGULATIONS FOR THE UNDERGRADUATE PROGRAMMES

1.1
1.2
260
1.4.4

1.1.1
These regulations should be read in conjunction
with the General Academic Regulations for
Undergraduate Degrees hereinafter referred to as
1.1.2
The General Academic Regulations take
precedence over these Faculty Regulations.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Approved First Aid Certificate means any First Aid
Certificate duly issued by the University of Zimbabwe, St.
John Ambulance Services, Zimbabwe Red Cross
Society
or any other Institutions recognized by the Republic of
Zimbabwe.
Mine Blasting License means a mine blasting license granted
in terms of the Government Explosive Regulations.
Survey camp means a practical course normally conducted
and examined outside campus for a period of up to two
weeks to afford the student a real practical surveying
experience. All other terms are as defined in the General
1.3
PROGRAMMES
The Faculty of Engineering offers the Bachelor of Science
Honours degree in the following SIX disciplines:
Civil Engineering; Electrical Engineering; Mechanical
Engineering; Metallurgical Engineering; Mining
Engineering; Geoinformatics and Surveying.
1.4
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
1.4.5
1.5
Prospective candidates must comply with Section 4

Entry requirements for acceptance are Advanced
Level passes in the THREE subjects Mathematics,
Physics and Chemistry, or acceptable equivalents.
For Geoinformatics and Surveying an A level pass
in Geography may be substitute for an A level pass
in Chemistry.
Except in the case of Metallurgical Engineering
candidates, the Chemistry requirement may be
waived, provided the candidate has a satisfactory
pass in Physics with Chemistry at 'O' Level.
For selection purposes, preference will be given for
'O' and 'A' Level passes in Technical Drawing and/or
Computer Science.
1.5.1
The minimum duration of the Bachelor of Science
honours degree in Engineering shall be 8 semesters.
1.5.2 The programme is taught and examined at 4 levels
of study. For each subject, there are prescribed
courses for each level of study.
1.5.3 Courses are designated as core or optional.
1.5.4 To successfully complete the programme, a student
must accumulate a minimum of 120 course credits
at each of the 4 levels of study taken from the
prescribed list for each of the major subjects.
1.5.5 Normally, a student may not register for courses
worth more than 140 course units in an academic
year.
1.5.6 In the case of Mining Engineering degree, a student
must successfully complete a period of industrial
attachment the duration of which shall not be less
than 36 weeks. In addition, to be awarded a degree
in Mining Engineering, a student must have
obtained an approved First Aid certificate generally
during the first four weeks of the attachment and a
Mine Blasting licence by the end of first semester of
Level 4.
1.5.7 At each of the levels of study 3 and 4, a student shall
undertake a project or projects worth 20 and 40
course units respectively, and submit
project
1.5.8
1.5.9
1.5.10
reports for assessment before the date specified by

the Departmental Board, failure of which will lead to
a penalty being imposed.
A student who fails a core course shall repeat that
course. A student who fails a required optional
course may repeat that course or take an equivalent
course specified in the subject regulations.
A student who is allowed to proceed with his studies
but having failed courses at a given level of study is
allowed to register for the next higher level courses
provided he/she has passed the prerequisites for
the courses and does not exceed the maximum
allowed course units in that year of study. Repeat
courses take priority over any other courses should
there be a clash on the timetable.
A course shall normally have four lecture hours and
three tutorial/laboratory hours per week except for
Engineering Drawing and Design which has five
lecture hours and five tutorial hours per week.
1.6
EXAMINATIONS
1.6.1
End of course examinations shall be in accordance
1.6.2 Unless specified otherwise in the subject
regulations, a written examination of a course is of 3
hours duration.
1.7
1.7.1
Assessment of a course shall include the mark of the
examination as well as the continuous assessment
mark in that course. Normally, the continuous
assessment shall contribute between 20% and 33%
of the final mark except for the Drawing and Design
courses in Mechanical Engineering,
Communication Skills for Engineers and Workshop
Practice where it contributes between 30% and
50% of the final mark.
1.7.2
A student who attains a mark less than 40% in the
continuous assessment fails the course. The mark
for the course shall be the lesser of the raw mark and
48%.
1.8

Examination results shall be processed as prescribed by
1.9

1.9.1
The determination of the results for each student
will be in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
1.9.2
In determining the degree classification, the
aggregate marks from Levels 2, 3, and 4 will be
weighted in the following ratios to arrive at the final
overall mark for classification of each of the degrees
indicated:
20%, 30% and 50% (Civil Engineering, Electrical
Engineering, Mechanical Engineering,
Metallurgical Engineering, Geoinformatics and
Surveying)
30%, 30% and 40% (Mining Engineering)
A candidate who qualifies for the award of a degree
but having completed Levels 2, 3 and 4 in more than
6 semesters shall normally be awarded the degree in
the Third Class division, irrespective of the final
overall mark.
1.9.3
PASS: PROCEED shall apply to a student who has
passed all the required Level 1 or Level 2 or Level 3
courses as stipulated in Regulation 11 of the Faculty
of Engineering.
1.9.4
INCOMPLETE: PROCEED shall apply to a student
who has accumulated at least sixty (60) and less
than one hundred and twenty (120) Level 1 or Level
2 or Level 3 course credits in a first sitting, subject
to Section 5 of the Faculty of Engineering
Regulations, in addition to repeating the failed
courses.
1.9.5
INCOMPLETE: APPLY TO REPEAT FAILED
COURSES shall apply to a student who accumulates
less than sixty (60) Level 1 or Level 2 or Level 3
course credits in a given academic year or a student
who fails any course(s) on a second or subsequent
sitting.
261
1.9.6
1.10
1.11
A student may be required to withdraw from the

programme in accordance with the General
AWARD OF THE DEGREE

The degree shall be awarded in accordance with the General
Civil Engineering Undergraduate Programme Courses
Civil Engineering Level 1 Courses : A student shall take ALL
the core courses.
COURSE
CODE
CE201
DESCRIPTION
CE202
Fluid Mechanics
15
CE203
Engineering Surveying
15
CE204
Geomechanics
15
CE205
Strength of Materials
15
CE206
Civil Engineering Design and

Communication
Engineering Geology
ME101
Engineering Mathematics 2
Paper 1
Engineering Mathematics 2
Paper 2
MT104
10
MT105
10
GL204
MT204
MT205
Course
Code
CSEN101
EE101
EE103
ME103
MT104
MT105
ME101
MG101
WSP180
262
N.B:
Description
Communication Skills for Engineers
Workshop Practice
Course Units
10
15
15
15
10
10
20
15
10
The above Level 1 Courses are common to all students doing the
following programmes: BSc Honours in Civil, Electrical, Mechanical,
Metallurgical and Mining Engineering
Civil Engineering Level 2 Courses : A student shall take ALL the core
courses.
Theory of Structures
PRE
REQUISITES
ME101
UNITS
15
15
10
Civil Engineering Level 3 Courses A student shall take ALL the core
courses and eight (8) other courses chosen from the optional courses
listed below:
Course
code
CE309
CE313
CE360
Optional
Courses
CE301
CE302*
CE304
Description
Prerequisites
Professional and Industrial Studies

Project
Analysis of Structures
Course
Units
10
10
20
10
Design of Structures
Geotechnology
CE201
CE201
CE204
CE306
CE307
CE308
Construction Materials
Transportation Systems and Structures
Water and Public Health Engineering
CE201
CE204
CE202
10
10
10
CE310
CE311
ME301
Water Resources
Civil Engineering Construction
Renewable Energy Engineering
CE202
10
10
10
10
10
* The examination of the course CE302 (Design of Structures) shall

be of 4 hours duration.
Civil Engineering Level 4 Courses :A student shall take the Core
course and at least FOUR other courses chosen from the optional
courses listed below:
COURSE
CODE
CE460
DESCRIPTION
Project
Optional
courses
CE401
Analysis of Structures
CE301
20
CE402
Design of Structures
CE302
CE404
Geotechnology
CE406
CE407
CE408
ME404
1.12
COURSE CODE
Core Courses
DESCRIPTION
CE309
Professional & Industrial Studies
10
CE313
10
20
EE360
Project 1
20
CE304
20
Optional Courses
Hydraulic Structures
CE310
20
Transportation Systems and

Structures
Water and Public Health
Engineering
Renewable Energy
Engineering
CE307
20
EE302
Analogue Electronics
EE201
10
EE303
Control Systems
MT204/205
10
CE308
20
EE304
Digital Electronics
EE206
10
ME301
20
EE305
Electrical Machines
EE202
10
EE307
Electrical Power Systems
EE203
10
EE308
Electromagnetics
EE203
10
EE310
Telecommunications
EE203
10
EE312
Microprocessor Fundamentals
EE206
10
EE311
Electronic Instrumentation
EE204
10
ME301
EE306
Electrical Networks
PREREQUISITES
CE360
UNITS
40
BSc Honours in Electrical Engineering Programme courses
Electrical Engineering level 2 Courses: A student shall take all the

core courses and one optional course
COURSE CODE
EE201
DESCRIPTION
Electrical Circuit Design
PREREQUISITES
EE101
UNITS
15
EE202
Electrical Machines
EE101
15
EE203
EE101
15
EE204
Electrical Measurements
EE101
15
EE206
Digital Electronics
EE101
15
EE207
EE101
15
MT204
MT104
10
MT205
MT105
10
Optional
Courses
ME201
Applied Mechanics
ME103
10
ME204
Thermo Fluids
ME103
10
Electrical Engineering level 3 Courses :A student shall take ALL the

core courses and eight (8) other courses chosen from the optional
PREREQUISITES
UNITS
10
EE203
10
Electrical Engineering level 4 Courses :A student shall take the Core

COURSE CODE
EE460
DESCRIPTION
Project
PREREQUISITES
EE360
UNITS
40
Optional
courses
EE403
Control Systems
EE303
20
EE405
Electrical Machines and Drives
EE305
20
EE406
Electrical Networks
EE306
20
EE407
Electrical Power Systems
EE307
20
EE408
Microwave Engineering
EE308
20
EE410
Power Electronics
EE302
20
EE411
Telecommunications
EE302/ EE310
20
EE412
Digital Signal Processing
EE302/ EE310
20
EE413
Computer Engineering
EE312
20
EE414
Telecommunications Network s &

Acoustics
EE310
20
ME301
20
ME404
263
1.13
BSc Honours in Geoinformatics & Surveying
Geoinformatics & Surveying Level 1: A student shall take ALL the core
courses.
264
COURSE
CODE
DESCRIPTION
SV304
Geodesy
MT204
10
SV305
Surveying 3
SV205
15
SV306
Cadastral Surveying
SV205
10
PREREQUISITES
UNITS
COURSE
CODE
DESCRIPTION
UNITS
SV311
Adjustment Computation
SV203
10
CSEN101
Communication Sk ills for Engineers
10
SV317
SV207
15
EE101
15
EE103
15
SV316
Digital Mapping & Geographic Information

Systems
Astro-Geodetic Systems
ME103
15
SV314
Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing
SV208
15
MT104
10
SV360
Survey Camp 2
SV260
15
MT105
10
RUP213
Aspects of Environmental Design
10
SV101
Surveying 1
15
CE309
10
SV105
Environmenta l Studies
15
SV106
Basic Mapping
15
Geoinformatics & Surveying Level 4 : A student shall take the Core

Geoinformatics & Surveying Level 2 : A student shall take ALL the

core courses.
COURSE CODE
SV460
DESCRIPTION
Project
Optional
courses
SV405
15
SV101
15
Basic Cartography
SV106
15
SV208
SV106
SV209
Engineering Surveying
SV101
SV210
Information Technology & Programming
SV260
Survey Camp 1
COURSE
CODE
MT204
DESCRIPTION
PREREQUISITES
MT104
MT205
MT105
SV203
Adjustment Computation
SV205
Surveying 2
SV207
SV101
10
PREREQUISITES
SV360
UNITS
40
Land Economics and Management
SV306 & CE309
20
SV414
Satellite Geodesy
SV304 &SV316
20
SV415
SV314
20
SV416
Advanced Engineering Surveying
15
SV413
Advanced Geographic Information Systems
SV317
20
15
SV412
Mining Surveying
SV305
20
10
SV418
Land Law
SV306
20
UNITS
10
10
SV305 & SV314
20
15
1.14 BSc Honours in Mechanical Engineering

Geoinformatics & Surveying Level 3: A student shall take ALL the
core courses
Mechanical Engineering Level 2 Courses: A student shall take ALL

the core courses and ONE optional course.
COURSE CODE
ME201
DESCRIPTION
Applied Mechanics
PREREQUISITES
ME103
ME202
Solid Mechanics
ME103
15
ME203
ME101
15
ME204
Thermo-Fluids
15
ME205
15
ME206
Manufacturing Technology
15
MT204
Engineering Mathematic 2 Paper 1
MT104
10
MT205
Engineering Mathematic 2 Paper 2
MT105
10
Mechanical Engineering Level 4 Courses: A student shall take the

Core course and at least FOUR other courses chosen from the
optional courses listed below:
UNITS
15
COURSE CODE
ME460
DESCRIPTION
Project 2
Optional
courses
EE403
Control Systems
ME401
Thermo-Fluids
ME403
ME404
PREREQUISITES
ME360
UNITS
40
EE303
20
ME304/309
20
Dynamics
ME303
20
ME301
20
Optional courses
EE202
Electrical Machines
EE101
10
ME405
Mechanical Engineering Design
ME306
20
EE201
Electronic Circuit Design
EE101
10
ME406
Solid Mechanics
ME308
20
ME410
Engineering Management
ME309
20
ME412
Power Plants
EE405
Electrical Machines
Mechanical Engineering Level 3 Courses :A student shall take ALL

the core courses and eight (8) other courses chosen from the
COURSE CODE
Core Courses
DESCRIPTION
PREREQUISITES
CE309
10
CE313
10
ME360
Project 1
20
1.15
20
BSc Honours in Metallurgical Engineering

Metallurgical Engineering Level 2 Courses: A student shall
take all the core courses
UNITS
Optional courses
20
EE305
COURSE
CODE
HCH101
DESCRIPTION
Physical Chemistry
HCH102
10
PREREQUISITES
UNITS
10
ME303
Dynamics
ME201
10
HCH105
General Chemistry
10
ME304
Fluid Mechanics
ME204
10
HCH 104
10
ME305
Industrial Systems Engineering
10
ME306
Mechanical Engineering Design
ME203
10
GL204
Geology for Engineers
15
ME307
Process Engineering
ME204
10
ME202
Solid Mechanics
ME308
Solid Mechanics
ME202
10
MIE203
Introduction to Mining and Metallurgy
10
EE309
Thermodynamics &Heat Transfer
ME204
10
MG203
Metallurgical Principles
15
EE305
Electrical Machines
10
MG205
Heat Transfer and Mass Transport
15
EE302
Control Systems
10
MT204
MT104
10
ME311
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning
10
MT205
MT105
10
ME301
10
MT204/205
ME103
15
265
Metallurgical Engineering Level 3 Courses: A student shall take ALL

the core courses and eight (8) other courses chosen from the
COURSE CODE
Core Courses
DESCRIPTION
PREREQUISITES
UNITS
CE309
10
CE313
10
MG360
Project 1
20
Optional Courses
266
MG309
Pyrometallurgy (Ferrous)
MG203
10
MG311
Hydrometallurgy
MG203/HCH105
10
MG 312
Mineral Processing
MG203
10
MG313
Physical Metallurgy
MG203
10
MG203
Pyrometallurgy (Non-Ferrous)
MG203
10
MG308
Chemical Energy and Environmental Studies
10
GL310
Ores and Resources
10
EE302
Control Systems
MT204/5
10
ME308
Solid Mechanics
ME202
10
MG316
Materials Technology
10
ME301
10
Metallurgical Engineering Level 4 Courses: A student shall take the

Core course and at least FOUR other courses chosen from the
COURSE CODE
MG460
DESCRIPTION
Project 2
Optional
courses
ME404
ME410
Engineering Management
MG401
Mineral Processing
MG312
20
MG404
Metallurgy of Iron and Steel
MG309
20
MG409
Pyrometallurgy Non-Ferrous
MG412
Hydrometallurgy
MG311
20
MG413
Physical Metallurgy
MG313
20
MG414
Materials Technology
MG316
20
MG415
Corrosion Engineering
MG313
20
MG416
Advanced Materials
MG313
20
1.16
PREREQUISITES
MG360
UNITS
40
ME301
20
20
20
BSc Honours In Mining Engineering
Mining Engineering Level 2 Courses: A student shall take all the core
courses
COURSE
CODE
EE202
DESCRIPTION
Electrical Machines
ME204
Thermofluids
15
MIE207
Surface Mining Technology
15
MIE208
Underground Mining Technology
15
MIE211
Rock & Soil Mechanics
10
MIE216
Information and Communication Technology
MT204
MT104
10
MT205
MT105
10
GL206
Fundamentals of Geology
10
MIE203
Introduction to Mining and Metallurgy
10
PREREQUISITES
EE101
UNITS
15
10
courses
COURSE
CODE
GL 317/8
DESCRIPTION
Mining Geology
MIE304
Mine Ventilation Practice
10
MIE313
Mining Machinery, Materials Handling and

Services
20
MIE314
Mine Surveying & GIS
10
MIE315
Mine Environmental Management Health

and Safety
10
MIE360
60
PREREQUISITES
GL206
UNITS
10
2.1.2.1
Applicants should have a minimum two years

relevant experience in the area of specialization
applied for.
2.1.2.2
Candidates with a Lower Second Class degree but

who have acquired good industrial experience in
the relevant fields may be considered for admission
into the Programme.
2.1.2.3
Candidates with equivalent qualifications may also

be considered for admission into the Programme
but may be required to sit for a qualifying
examination.
2.1.2.4
The Programme will be conducted in English and

any candidate with qualifications from a nonEnglish speaking country will be required to prove
proficiency in English by providing a Test of English
as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) or International
English Language Testing System (IELTS)
certificate or equivalent.
courses
COURSE
CODE
MIE405
DESCRIPTION
Mine Design and Planning
MIE406
Mineral Dressing
10
MIE412
Operations Research
15
MIE413
Small to Medium Scale Mining Enterprises
10
MIE415
Mining Law
15
MIE417
Mineral Economics and Management
15
MIE460
Project 2
2.1
PREREQUISITES
MIE360
UNITS
15
40
2.1.3
REGISTRATION
Application for admission with the necessary supporting
documents must be made to the Deputy Registrar
(Academic) on the appropriate form according to General
2.1.4

The programme duration is normally three semesters for
full-time students and six semesters for part-time students.
2.1.5

2.1.5.1 The programme comprises a taught part followed
by a Dissertation.

INTEGRATED WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT (IWRM)
2.1.1
INTRODUCTION
General Regulations for the Masters Degree by Coursework,
2.1.2
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
To be admitted into the Programme, candidates must have
normally obtained a first degree in an appropriate field with
a classification of Upper Second Class or better. The
appropriate fields would include Engineering, Natural
Sciences and Social Sciences.
2.1.5.2 The taught part comprises twelve courses and the

Group work Project of which eight courses and the
267
2.1.6
Group work Project are compulsory. Four electives

shall be conducted at the University of Zimbabwe
and any other institution within the region as
approved by the University of Zimbabwe Senate.
The approved institutions include, but are not
limited to, the University of Malawi, University of
Botswana, University of Western Cape, University of
Dar es Salaam, the Polytechnic of Namibia and the
University of KwaZulu Natal.
2.1.5.3 The taught component of the Programme is spread
over two semesters. During that time the full time
students must take the twelve courses and the
Group work Project. The part-time students may
complete the taught component of the Programme
in four semesters.
268
2.1.5.4 A standard course consists of about 80 contact

hours of which 60% are formal lectures and the
remainder comprises exercises, tutorials,
workshops, group work discussions, self study,
and/or laboratory work. At the end of each taught
course, an examination will be held.
2.1.5.5
2.1.5.6
SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS
2.1.6.1 Candidates are required to pass the eight
compulsory courses, the Group work, Project,
Research Methods and the four electives as listed
below. Courses may not necessarily carry the same
weighting and are assessed on the basis of one 3hour examination and continuous assessment.
examination and the continuous assessment in
each course.
2.1.6.2 Coursework shall contribute 25% of the final mark
in any taught course. The coursework shall
normally consist of at least three assessments.
COURSES
Code
Description
Course Units
Examination
Compulsory Courses
IWRM501
Principles of Integrated Water Resources

Management
10
1x3hr paper
IWRM502
Principles of Hydrology
10
1x3hr paper
IWRM503
Socio
- Economics of Water and
Environmental Resources
10
1x3hr paper
The Group work Project is scheduled for the second

semester and takes approximately four weeks at the
end of which assessment will be based on oral
presentation and the group work/individual
reports.
IWRM505
Policies, Laws & Institutions
10
1x3hr paper
IWRM560
Groupwork Project
15
IWRM537
GIS, Database Management &

Analytical Tools
15
1x3hr paper
IWRM538
Principles of Aquatic Ecology
10
1x3hr paper
The Dissertation (IWRM 570) will commence after

the successful completion of the taught part. It may
be undertaken either at the University of Zimbabwe
or at some other place approved by the University of
Zimbabwe Senate.
IWRM539
10
1x3hr paper
IWRM522
Principles of Water Quality &

Environmental
Paper Management
Water Resources Analysis & Planning
10
1x3hr paper
IWRM559
Research Methods
10
1x3hr paper++
IWRM570
Dissertation
60
+Assessed as described in 2.1.5.5

++50% contribution as continuous assessment and pre-requisite to IWRM
570.
Elective Courses
i)
Water Resources Management
Code
IWRM524
IWRM516
IWRM561
IWRM540
ii)
Description
Water Resources
Modelling
Groundwater
Management
Catchment Water
Management
Water Resources
Assessment &
Monitoring
Course Units
15
Examination
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
IWRM542
IWRM528
IWRM544
Description
Environmental Water
Quality Processes
Water Supply and
Treatment
Wastewater
Management
Water Utility
Management
Course Units
15
Examination
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
IWRM536
IWRM534
IWRM546
Description
Water Demand
Management
Water and
Development
Water and Security
Water Education for
Sustainable
Development
Description
Hydrogeology
River Engineering
Hydrological Processes
Hydrological Modelling
Course Units
15
15
15
15
Examination
1x3hr paper
1x3hr paper
1x3hr paper
1x3hr paper
Description
Water Quality
Management
Environmental
Management Tools
Environmental Water
Management
Management of Aquatic
Ecosystems
Course Units
15
Examination
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
Description
Catchment
Management
Agricultural Water
Management
Wetlands and
Agriculture
Agro-industrial Water
Use
Course Units
15
Examination
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
Description
Spatial Analysis for
Water Resources
Management
Earth Observations for
Hydrological Analyses
Advanced GIS
Earth Observation
Project
Course Units
15
Examination
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
15
15
1x3hr paper
1x3hr paper
Description
Conflict Resolution
Capita Selecta
Course Units
15
15
v) Water and Environment

Code
IWRM527
IWRM549
IWRM550
IWRM551
Code
IWRM523
IWRM552
IWRM553
IWRM554
vii) GIS and Earth Observation
iii) Water and Society

Code
IWRM509
Code
IWRM514
IWRM525
IWRM547
IWRM548
vi) Water and Land
Water Supply and Sanitation
Code
IWRM541
iv) Hydrology
Course Units
15
Examination
1x3hr paper
15
1x3hr paper
15
15
1x3hr paper
1x3hr paper
Code
IWRM555
IWRM556
IWRM557
IWRM558
viii) Other Courses

Code
IWRM537
IWRM530
Examination
1x3hr paper
1x3hr paper+++
269
+++ Capita Selecta caters for topical issues on demand and can be
offered at any of the 7 specialization institutions
2.1.6.3
2.1.6.4
2.1.6.5
2.1.6.6
270
2.1.6.7
2.1.6.8
2.1.6.9
2.1.6.10
2.1.6.11
The Civil Engineering Departmental Board in

consultation with specialization institutions shall decide
which courses are offered in a particular academic year.
The pass mark of 50% as prescribed in the General
Academic Regulations is the minimal acceptable mark
in all courses of the programme including the Group
work Project and the Dissertation.
A student who obtains a pass mark in all twelve courses
of the programme, Research Methods and in the Group
work Project shall be deemed to have satisfied the
examiners in the taught part of the programme and will
be allowed to proceed to carry out the Dissertation.
A student who fails up to two courses (excluding the
Research Methods course) of the taught part may apply
to repeat the failed course(s) and may be allowed to
carry on with the Dissertation.
A student who fails three or more courses (excluding the
Research Methods course) may apply to repeat the
failed courses.
The Dissertation shall be conducted in accordance with
guidelines set by the Department and the assessment
shall normally comprise of a thesis report and an oral
defence examination.
If a student passes the oral examination part but fails the
thesis part, the student shall be deemed to have failed
the Dissertation and the maximum aggregate mark
awarded shall not exceed 48%.
The Departmental Board may review and fix the final
submission dates as appropriate.
A student must pass the twelve courses, the Group work
Project and Research Methods and the Dissertation to
qualify for the award of the Master of Science Degree.
2.1.6.12
2.1.6.13
2.1.6.14
2.1.6.15
2.1.6.16
2.1.6.17
2.1.6.18
2.1.7
A student who fails the Dissertation by a mark of at least

40% may be allowed to resubmit on such conditions and
within such a period as may be specified by Senate. If the
Dissertation is still unsatisfactory after resubmission,
then the student may apply to repeat the Dissertation
on a new topic.
A student who fails the Dissertation by less than 40%
may be allowed to apply to repeat the Dissertation on a
new topic.
Within two weeks of examination, a student whose
Dissertation has satisfied the examiners as appropriate
is required to submit five bound copies and a soft copy
of the Dissertation after incorporating any comments
from examiners.
The aggregate mark for the award and classification of
the Master of Science degree shall be calculated on the
following basis:Taught component
65%
Dissertation
35%
A student must pass twelve courses, the Groupwork
Project and the Research Methods and the Dissertation
to qualify for the award of the Master of Science
Degree in Integrated Water Resources Management.
The aggregate mark of the taught part is the weighted
average of the thirteen components (the twelve courses
and the Groupwork Project).
Award of Master of Science Degree is aligned with
General Academic Regulations as follows: Pass, a Pass
with Credit, a Pass with Merit, or a Pass with Distinction
SYLLABUS
Regulations, detailed syllabi for courses do not form part of
these regulations. Copies of the approved syllabi shall be
maintained in the Department of Civil Engineering and
Faculty of Engineering Offices for assistance.
2.1.8
2.2
NOTIFICATION OF RESULTS AND AWARD OF DEGREE

Results shall be published and degrees awarded in
Regulations.
2.2.3
REGISTRATION
Application for admission with the necessary supporting
documents must be made to the Deputy Registrar
(Academic) on the appropriate form.
REGULATIONS FOR THE MSC IN WATER RESOURCES ENGINEERING

MANAGEMENT (WREM)
2.2.4

The programme duration is normally three semesters for
full-time students and six semesters for part-time students.
2.2.5

2.2.5.1 The programme comprises a taught part followed
by a Dissertation.
2.2.1
2.2.2
INTRODUCTION
General Academic Regulations for the Masters Degree by
Coursework, hereinafter referred to as the General
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
2.2.2.1 To be admitted into the programme, applicants
must have normally obtained a good honours first
degree in an appropriate field of Engineering, or
recognized Applied Science with a classification of
at least an Upper Second Class or equivalent.
2.2.2.2 Applicants with a relevant lower class degree who
have acquired at least two years in Industrial
experience in appropriate fields may be considered
for admission into the programme.
2.2.2.3 Candidates with equivalent qualifications may also
be considered for admission into the Programme
but may be required to sit for a qualifying
examination.
2.2.2.4 The Programme will be conducted in English and
any candidate with qualifications from a nonEnglish speaking country will be required to prove
proficiency in English by providing a Test of English
as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) or International
English Language Testing System (IELTS) certificate
or equivalent.
2.2.5.2 The taught part comprises nine courses, the

Groupwork Project and Research Methods. Five
courses, the Groupwork Project and Research
Methods are compulsory. Four courses are
electives. Each course consists of about 80 hours
consisting of lectures, exercises, tutorials,
workshops, fieldwork, laboratory work and any
other assigned activities. At the end of each
course an examination shall be held.
2.2.5.3 The Groupwork Project takes approximately four
weeks during the second semester. Assessment
shall be based on an oral presentation, the
groupwork report and individual reports.
2.2.5.4 The taught component of the Programme is spread
over two semesters. During that time the full time
students must take the nine courses and the
Groupwork Project. The part-time students may
complete the taught component of the Programme
over four semesters.
2.2.5.5 The Dissertation (WREM570) may be undertaken at
the University of Zimbabwe or at any other place
approved by the University of Zimbabwe Senate.
271
The Dissertation shall be conducted in accordance

with guidelines set by the Department and the
assessment shall normally comprise of a thesis
report and an oral defence examination.
2.2.6
272
2.2.6.1 Candidates are normally required to pass the five
compulsory courses, the Groupwork Project, the
four electives and Research Methods before
proceeding to Dissertation. Courses may not
necessarily carry the same weighting and are
assessed on the basis Research Methods.
examination and the coursework in each course, in
accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
2.2.6.2 The Departmental Board may decide which courses
are offered in a particular academic year.
2.2.6.3 Continuous assessment contributes 25% of the
final mark in any taught course. The continuous
assessment normally consists of at least three
assessments.
2.2.6.4 COURSES
2.2.6.4.1 Compulsory Courses
Code
WREM517
WREM518
WREM519
WREM520
WREM521
WREM531
WREM5**
WREM570
Description
Integrated Water Resources
Management
Hydrology and Applied
Hydraulics
Aquatic Ecology an d Water
Pollution Control
GIS, Remote Sensing & Data
Information Systems
Water Resources Analysis and
Planning
Research Methods
Groupwork Project
Dissertation
Weight
10
Examination
1x3 hr paper
10
1x3 hr paper
10
1x3 hr paper
10
1x3 hr paper
15
1x3 hr paper
10
15
60
1x3 hr paper+
++
+50% contribution as continuous assessment

+Pre-requisite to WREM 570 and assessed based on an oral presentation
and reports
++ Assessed as described in 2.2.5.3
2.2.6.4.2
Code
WREM507
WREM508
WREM509
WREM514
WREM515
WREM516
WREM522
WREM523
WREM524
WREM526
2.2.6.5
Elective Courses
Description
Hydrogeolgy
Water Resource Modelling
Advanced Hydrology
Water Chemistry and
Microbiology
Water treatment
Wastewater Treatment
Socio-economics of Water and
Policies, Laws and Institutions
Conflict Resolution
River Engineering
Weight
15
15
15
15
Examination
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
15
15
15
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
15
15
15
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
The pass mark for each taught course, the Groupwork

Project, Research Methods and Dissertation shall be 50%.
2.2.6.6 A student who obtains a pass mark in each of the

nine taught courses of the programme, Research
Methods and in the Groupwork Project shall be
deemed to have satisfied the examiners in the
taught part of the programme and shall be allowed
to proceed and carry out the Dissertation.
2.2.6.7 A student who fails up to two courses of the taught part
(excluding the Research Methods course) may apply to
repeat the failed course(s) and may be allowed to carry on
with the Dissertation.
2.2.6.13
Within two weeks of the oral examination, a

student whose Dissertation has satisfied the
examiners is required to submit four bound
copies and a soft copy of the Dissertation after
incorporating any comments from examiners.
Only after this shall a student be deemed to have
completed the Dissertation part.
2.2.6.14
The aggregate mark for the award and

classification of the MSc degree shall be
calculated on the following basis:-
2.2.6.8 A student who fails three or more courses of the taught part
(excluding the Research Methods course) may apply to
repeat the failed courses.
Taught component
Dissertation
2.2.6.15
2.2.6.9 The Departmental Board may review and fix the final
submission dates as appropriate.
2.2.6.10 If a student passes the oral examination part but
fails the thesis part, the student shall be deemed
to have failed the Dissertation and the maximum
aggregate mark awarded shall not exceed 48%.
2.2.6.11 On completion of the Dissertation the student is
required to submit three spiral bound copies for
assessment.
2.2.6.12 A student who fails the Dissertation by a mark of at
least 40% may be allowed to resubmit on such
conditions and within such a period as may be
specified by the University of Zimbabwe Senate. If
the Dissertation is still unsatisfactory after
resubmission, then the student may apply to
repeat the Dissertation on a new topic.
65%
35%
A student must pass the nine taught courses, the

Groupwork Project, Research Methods and the
Dissertation to qualify for the award of the
Master of Science Degree in Water Resources
Engineering and Management.
2.2.6.16
The aggregate mark of the taught part is the

average of the eleven components (the nine
taught courses, the Groupwork Project and
Research Methods).
2.2.6.17
The MSc degree shall be awarded with either, a

Pass, a Pass with Credit, a Pass with Merit or a
Pass with Distinction in accordance with the
2.2.7 SYLLABUS
maintained in the Department of Civil Engineering and
Faculty of Engineering Offices for assistance.
273
The second week is devoted to assessment and,

normally will involve revision and exercise classes
with a formal examination on the Friday afternoon
of the second week.
2.2.8
2.3

Regulations.
REGULATIONS OF THE MASTER OF SCIENCE IN COMMUNICATION
ENGINEERING DEGREE
2.3.1
2.3.2
Introduction
General Regulations for the Masters Degrees by coursework,
hereinafter referred to as the General Regulations
Entry Requirements
2.3.2.1 To be admitted into the programme, candidates
must be in possession of a First Degree in Electrical
Engineering or Electronic Engineering with a
classification of lower second class or better.
2.3.2.2 Candidates with a lower class degree but who have
acquired good industrial experience in the relevant
fields may be considered for admission into the
programme.
274
2.3.2.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.5.3 On satisfactory completion of the taught

component, the candidate then carries out an
extended project, carried out either at the
University, or more usually, at a candidate's place of
employment. On completion of the project work,
the candidate writes and submits a dissertation for
assessment.
Candidates with equivalent qualifications will also

be considered for admission into the Programme.
Registration
Application for registration, accompanied by the necessary
supporting documents must be made to the Deputy
Registrar (Academic) on the appropriate form.
2.3.5.1 The Programme comprises a taught part followed
by an independent projectleading to a dissertation
2.3.5.2 The taught part comprises ten courses, each of the
two weeks duration. The first week of each course
will involve formal lectures and selected
demonstrations.
2.3.6

The minimum period to complete the Masters programme
is one year in the case of full time students and two years in
the case of part-time students. Full time students are
expected to complete the Programme within two years
whereas part-time students must complete within four
years.
2.3.7
Scheme of Examination
2.3.7.1 Each candidate is required to take five core courses
listed below and any five optional courses.
2.3.7.2 The Departmental Board may from time to time
determine which optional courses will be offered.
2.3.7.3 The University marking scheme for p o s t g ra d u a t e
degrees will apply in all courses and for the
dissertation. That is, grades may be awarded as
follows:
80%
70%-79%
50%-69%
Below 50%
Distinction
Merit
Pass
Fail
2.3.7.4 A candidate who obtains a pass mark in a course

shall be deemed to have satisfied the examiners in
that course. A candidate must satisfy the examiners
in both the examination and the coursework in
each course.
2.3.7.5 A candidate who obtains a pass mark in every

course shall be deemed to have satisfied the
examiners in the taught part of the programme and
will be allowed to proceed and carry out the
dissertation.
2.3.8
2.3.7.6 A candidate who fails three or more courses will

normally be asked to discontinue from the
programme.
2.3.7.7 A candidate who fails one or two courses may
repeat the failed courses in the following year and
may be allowed at the discretion of the
Departmental Board of Examiners to carry on with
the Dissertation.
2.3.7.8 On completion of the project a candidate will be
required to submit two copies of the dissertation for
assessment.
2.3.7.9 The deadline for the submission of the Dissertation
will be 31 May in the second year following that of
registration in the case of full time students.
Part-time students have up to 31 May in the fourth
year following that of registration to submit their
dissertation. All candidates are required to attend an
oral examination.
2.3.7.10 A candidate must pass the ten taught courses and
the dissertation to qualify for the award of the
Master of Science degree in Communication
Engineering.
2.3.7.11 The aggregate mark for the award and classification
of the MSc degree shall be calculated on the basis of
the following weighting for the taught part and
Dissertation.
Taught part
Dissertation
Oral Examination
60%
30%
10%
2.3.7.12 The Master of Science Degree will be awarded with

either a Pass, a Merit or a Distinction according to
the General Regulations.
Syllabus
In accordance with provisions of the General
Regulations, detailed syllabi do not form part of these
regulations. Copies of the approved syllabi shall be
maintained in the Department of Electrical
Engineering and the Faculty of Engineering Offices for
assistance.
2.3.9
Notification of Results and Award of Degree

accordance with the provisions of the General
Regulations
COURSE
CODE
MCE501
DESCRIPTION
WEIGHT
EXAM
1X3hr paper
MCE502
Digital Transmission and Switching

Systems
Radio Engineering
1X3hr paper
MCE503
MCE504
Traffic Engineering
Data and Computer Networking
1
1
1X3hr paper
1X3hr paper
MCE505
Network Planning and Management
1X3hr paper
WREM560
Project Module
**
Optional Courses
The list of optional courses is found in the Electrical
Engineering and Faculty offices
2.4
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTERS OF SCIENCE IN

ELECTRICAL POWER ENGINEERING DEGREE
PROGRAMME (MSC EPEE)
2.4.1
Introduction
These regulations should be in conjunction with
General Academic Regulations for the Masters of
Science Degree by coursework, hereinafter
275
2.4.2
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
2.4.2.1 To be admitted into the programme, applicants
must be in possession of a first degree in Electrical
Engineering or Electrical and Electronic
Engineering with a classification of Lower Second
class or better.
2.4.2.2 Applicants with a third class degree or an approved
equivalent but who have acquired at least two years
of industrial experience in the Power Engineering
field maybe considered for admissions into the
programme. Applicants maybe asked to sit and
pass a qualifying examination.
276
2.4.4
2.4.4.1
Code
MEPE501
MEPE502
MEPE503
MEPE504
MEPE505
MEPE506
2.4.3 DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

2.4.3.1 The period required to complete the MSc
programme is one year in the case of full-time
students and two years in the case of part-time
students. The MSc programme will normally
start in June of each year.
MEPE507
MEPE508
2.4.3.2 The programme comprises a taught component

followed by a project.
MEPE512
MEPE570
MEPE509
MEPE510
MEPE511
Core Courses
Transmission and Distribution
Power System Modelling
Power Systems Dynamics and
Control
High Voltage and Insulation
Coordination
Power System Protection
Transmission and Distribution
System Planning
Independent Generation Works
Electrical Machines for Power
System
Condition Monitoring in Machines
and Power Systems
Modern Variable Speed Drive
Power Electronics for Power
Systems
Power Systems Economics
Dissertation
2.4.3.5 On satisfactory completion of the taught

component, the candidate then carries out a
project, either at the University or, more usually, at
the candidate's place of employment. On
completion of the project work, the candidate
writes and submits a dissertation for assessment.
Weight
1
1
1
Examination
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1
1
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1
1
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1
1
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1
1
1x3 hr paper
Report
Each course carries the same weight and is

examined by coursework and a 3-hour examination
paper.
2.4.3.3 The taught component comprises eight courses,

each of 70 hours duration for the formal lectures,
tutorials, laboratory work and coursework.
2.4.3.4 The taught component will comprise two
semesters of three months each. Half of the courses
will be taught in the first semester and examined at
the end of that semester. The remaining half of the
courses will be offered during the second semester
with examinations for those courses at the end of
the semester.
Each candidate is required to pass eight courses

listed below:
2.4.4.2
The Departmental Board may from time to time

determine which of the courses will be offered.
2.4.4.3
A candidate who obtains a pass mark in a course

in both the examination and the coursework in each
course.
2.4.4.4
A candidate who obtains a pass mark in eight

courses shall be deemed to have satisfied the
examiners in the taught component of the
programme and will be allowed to proceed to carry
out the project.
2.4.4.5
A candidate who passes only six or seven courses

maybe allowed, at their discretion of the
Departmental Board of Examiners, to carry on with
the project. The candidate may repeat the failed
courses when they are next offered or take up any
other courses on offer in order to satisfy the
requirements of 2.4.4.4.
2.4.4.6
A candidate who passes less than six courses may

apply to repeat. The candidature will only be
allowed to proceed with the project upon satisfying
the requirements of 2.4.4.4.
2.4.4.7
On completion of the project (MEPE570), a

candidate will be required to submit two copies of
the dissertation for assessment.
2.4.4.8
The deadline for submission of the dissertation will

be 31 May at the end of the enrolment year in the
case of full-time students. Part-time students have
up to 31 May in the second enrolment year to
submit their dissertation. A candidate may be
required to attend an oral examination.
2.4.4.9
A candidate must pass eight taught courses and the

dissertation to qualify for the award of the MSc
degree.
2.4.4.10
The aggregate mark for the award and classification

the following weighting for the taught component
Taught component
Dissertation
2.4.4.11
60%
40%
The MSc degree will be awarded with a Pass, a Merit

or a Distinction according to the schedule indicated
in the General Regulations.
2.5
2.4.1

accordance with provisions of the General Regulations.
2.4.2
SYLLABUS
In accordance with the provisions of the General
these Regulations but shall be submitted to the Faculty
Board for approval. Copies of the detailed syllabi shall be
maintained in the Department and Faculty Offices for
reference.
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN LAND

AND GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEMS (MSC LIS/GIS)
2.5.1
Introduction
General Academic Regulations for Masters by coursework
2.5.2
Qualifications for Admission

2.5.2.1 All applicants shall have obtained:
a)
an acceptable first degree in Surveying,
Engineering, Geography, Computer Science,
Mathematics, or acceptable equivalents; and
b)
a Postgraduate Diploma in LIS/GIS or an equivalent

acceptable to Senate.
2.5.2.2 Candidates with academic qualifications

recognised by professional institutions as degree
equivalents may only be admitted after satisfying
the Department through an interview and/or a
qualifying examination.
2.5.3
Programme of Study
2.5.3.1 The Programme of study shall normally extend
over a period of 15 months on a full time basis.
2.5.3.2 The MSc degree will be made up of two semesters
and candidates shall normally be examined at the
end of each semester.
277
2.5.3.3. Candidates who are deemed to satisfy examiners in MSc

programme will be awarded a Master of Science degree in
LIS/GIS.
2.5.4.6 The aggregate mark for the award and classification of

the MSc degree shall be calculated as a weighted sum of
marks in examinations and Dissertation specified in the
2.5.3.4 The programme to be pursued by each candidate, unless

exemption is given by Senate shall be as follows:
Semester 1
Professional and Organisational Behaviour, Software
Engineering, Advanced L a n d a n d G e o g r a p h i c a l
Information Management, Graphics, Algorithms and
Software
Semester 2
Dissertation
2.5.4
278
2.5.4.1 The pass mark as prescribed in the General
Regulations for Masters Degrees by coursework is
the minimum acceptable mark in all courses of the
Programme. The aggregate mark in the MSc is the
weighted average of the marks as specified in the
2.5.4.2
A student who obtains the pass mark in a given

course shall be deemed to have satisfied the
examiners in that course. A candidate must satisfy
the examiners in both the examination and the
coursework in each course. A candidate who
obtains a pass mark in the Dissertation shall be
deemed to have satisfied the examiners in the part.
The classification will be as follows:

Distinction
Merit
Pass
Fail
80% +
70%-79%
50%-69%
Below 50%
2.5.5
Syllabus
In accordance with provisions of the General Regulations,
detailed syllabi do not form part of these regulations.
Copies of the approved syllabi shall be maintained in the
Department of Geoinformatics & Surveying and the Faculty
of Engineering Offices for assistance.
2.5.6
Notification of Results and Award of Degree

accordance with the provisions of the General Regulations
2.5.7
MSc In Land and Geographic Information Systems Course

Description
COURSE
CODE
MLGIS501
DESCRIPTION
WEIGHT
EXAM
Professional and Organisational Behaviour
1x3hr paper
MLGIS502
1x3hr paper
MLGIS503
Advanced Geographic and Land Information

Mgt
Graphics, Algorithms and Software
5
4
1x3hr paper
1x2hr paper
Dissertation
(Oral & Written)
13
26
Presentation
2.5.4.3 A student who obtains a pass mark in every course

that part.
MLGIS504
2.5.4.4. A student who fails to satisfy the requirements of

will not normally be permitted to proceed to
Dissertation.
Two copies of the Dissertation covering the approved research

project shall be submitted by 31 March of the following year of study.
An oral examination may be arranged when the written part has been
accepted.
2.5.4.5 A candidate who satisfies the provisions of and shall

be awarded the Master of Science degree.
MLGIS570
2.6

MINERALS PRODUCTION, ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT
(MPEM)
2.6.1
Introduction
These regulations should be read in conjunction with the University
of Zimbabwe General Regulations for the Masters degrees by
Coursework, hereinafter referred to as the GENERAL ACADEMIC
REGULATIONS
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
Entry Requirements
2.6.2.1 To be admitted into the programme, a candidate must have
normally obtained a good first degree, from a recognised
University in an appropriate field of Engineering or Geology
with a classification of Lower Second or better.
2.6.2.2 A Candidate with a third class degree but who has acquired
good industrial experience in the relevant fields may be
considered for admission into the programme.
2.6.2.3 A Candidate with equivalent qualifications or other
academic qualifications recognised by professional
institutions as degree equivalents may also be admitted after
satisfying the Faculty Post-Graduate Admissions Committee
through an interview or sitting a qualifying examination.
Registration
Application for admission with the necessary supporting documents
must be made to the Deputy Registrar (Academic) on the
appropriate form. Registration normally takes place in January or
August of each year.
The period required to complete the MSc programme is one and half
(1) years in the case of full time students and three (3) years in the
case of part-time students. The MSc programme will normally start
in January of each year.
2.7.5.1 The programme comprises taught component followed by a
dissertation.
2.6.5.2 The taught component comprises ten (10) courses each of

approximately seventy (70) hours duration for formal
lectures, tutorials and laboratory work. At the end of
each course an examination will be written.
2.6.5.3 The taught component will comprise two (2) semesters.
Half of the courses will be taught in the first semester and
the other half in the second semester.
2.6.5.4 The dissertation will normally commence after the
successful completion of the taught part. It may be
undertaken either at the University of Zimbabwe or at some
other place approved by the University.
2.6.6
2.6.6.1 Each candidate is required to pass five (5) compulsory
courses as listed below. All courses carry the same credit and
are each assessed on the basis of a three hour
examination paper. A candidate must satisfy the examiners
In both the examination and the continuous assessment in
each course. Coursework shall contribute at least 30% of the
final mark in any course. The written examination shall
contribute 70% of the final mark in any course.
Code
Description
Compulsory Courses:
MPEM501
Research Methods in Minerals
Development
MPEM502
Legal Framework for Minerals
Development
MPEM503
Financing Minerals
Development Projects
MPEM504
Operations Research in the
Minerals Industry
MPEM505
Entrepreneurship and Venture
Management
MPEM560*
Dissertation
Course Unit
Examination
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
3
279
* The Dissertation is assessed by the supervisor and a co-examiner

agreed to by the Faculty
2.6.6.2 In addition candidates will be required to take five (5)
courses to be chosen from those offered in the particular
year and selected from twelve (12) courses listed below:
Elective Courses
Geology
Code
Description
MPEM506
Applied Structure
Geology
Gemology, Industrial
Rocks and Minerals,
Their Identification
Occurrence and Use
Mineral Deposit Studies
and Exploration
Occurrence and Use
Mineral
Resource
Evaluation
MPEM507
MPEM508
MPEM509
280
Course Unit
Examination
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
Course
Unit
1
1
Examination
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
Course
Unit
1
Examination
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
Mining
Code
Description
MPEM510
MPEM511
Mine Planning and Design

Applied Rock Mechanics and
Geotechnics
Ventilation, Safety, Health and
Small and Medium Scale
Mineral Production
Technology
GIS
MPEM512
MPEM513
MPEM514
1x3 hr paper
1x3 hr paper
Metallurgy
Code
Description
MPEM515
Process Modeling, Simulation

and Control
Chemical Metallurgy and
Mineral Processing
Hydrometallurgy and
Electrometallurgy
Ferro-Alloys Production and
Management
MPEM516
MPEM517
MPEM518
1x3 hr paper
2.6.6.3 The Departmental Board may decide which courses are

offered every semester and will, each year publish a
timetable of courses offered that year
2.6.6.4 The pass mark as prescribed in the general Regulations is the
minimum acceptable pass mark in all the courses of the
programme and in the dissertation.
2.6.6.5 A candidate who obtains a pass mark in all of the ten (10)
courses shall be deemed to have satisfied the examiners in
the taught component of the programme and will be
allowed to proceed to carry out the dissertation
(MPEM 560).
2.6.6.6 A candidate who fails more than two (2) courses of the
taught component may apply to repeat the failed courses,
and/or register for other elective courses as replacement
courses, if the failed courses are electives. A repeat
candidate will be allowed to proceed to the dissertation if
he/she passes the repeat courses. A repeat candidate will
normally be required to discontinue from the programme if
he/she fails on any repeat course or replacement course.
2.6.6.7 The deadline for the submission of the dissertation (MPEM
560) will be 30 June of each year for full time students
2.6.6.8 On completion of the dissertation the student is required to
submit three (3) bound copies plus one (1) electronic copy.
The student may be asked to attend an oral examination.
2.6.6.9 A candidate whose dissertation is unsatisfactory may be
allowed to resubmit on such conditions and within such
period of time as may be specified by the Board of
Examiners. If the dissertation is still unsatisfactory after
resubmission, then the candidate will be required to repeat
it.
A candidate will normally be required to discontinue from
the programme if he/she fails on a repeat dissertation.
2.6.6.10 A candidate must pass the ten courses and the dissertation
to qualify for the award of the Master of Science Degree.
2.6.6.11 A candidate who fails the dissertation, but whose
performance in taught component of the programme is
deemed satisfactory by the Board of Examiners, may upon
recommendation be awarded a Post Graduate Diploma
following section 14 of the General Academic Regulations.
2.6.6.12 The aggregate mark for the award and classification of the
MSc degree shall be calculated on the following basis:
Taught component
Dissertation
2.6.6.13 The MSc degree will be awarded with a Pass, Merit or

Distinction according to the General Regulations.
2.6.7
appropriate form. Registration normally takes place at the beginning

of March.
70%
30%
Syllabus
I n a c c o rd a n c e w i t h t h e p rov i s i o n s o f t h e G e n e ra l
maintained in the Department of Mining Engineering and
the Faculty of Engineering Office for reference.
2.7.5

2.7.5.1 The programme consists of two parts:
Part l: Taught courses for two semesters in the first year.
Part ll: Industrial attachment for 6 calendar months,
normally commencing in January of the second
year, and a research project.
2.7.5.2 Part l of the Programme
The coursework will normally run concurrently with the
Faculty of Engineering undergraduate year. During that
time the candidate will register for 8 core courses and
at least two optional courses. A course will be examined at
the end of the semester in which it is taught.
2.6.8
Notification and Award of Degree

2.7
REGULATIONS FOR MSC IN RENEWABLE ENERGY
2.7.1
Introduction
These Regulations should be read in conjunction with the General
Academic Regulations for the Masters Degrees by Coursework,
2.7.5.3 Part ll of the Programme

2.7.5.3.1Assessed Industrial Attachment will commence in
January of the second year and will last for 6
calendar months, at the end of which a report will
be presented by the candidate.
2.7.2
Entry Requirements
2.8.2.1
To be admitted to the programme candidates must have
obtained a good first degree in Engineering or Science or
equivalent qualifications.
2.8.2.2 Additionally, applicants should normally have at least two
years of relevant work experience.
2.7.5.3.2The research programme will normally commence

immediately after the second semester
examinations. It may be undertaken either in the
Faculty or at a firm to which the candidate is
attached. The Dissertation will normally be
submitted by end of October of the final year.
2.7.3

The programme is normally offered on a full-time basis for two
academic years.
2.7.4
Registration
Application for admission with the necessary supporting documents
must be made to the Deputy Registrar (Academic) on the
281
2.7.6
2.7.6.1 Each candidate is required to take and pass the 8 core
courses and at least 2 of the optional courses listed below:
Core Courses
282
Code
Description
Examination
Weight
MRE501
Statistics and Meteorology
1x3 hr paper
MRE502
Radiation Physics
1x3 hr paper
MRE503
Photovoltaics
1x3 hr paper
MRE504
Solar Thermal Collectors
1x3 hr paper
MRE505
Storage Components
1x3 hr paper
MRE506
Renewable Energy
Systems Compnents
1x3 hr paper
MRE507
Case Studies
1x3 hr paper
MRE570
Dissertation
1x3 hr paper
Optional Courses
Code
Description
Examination
Weight
MRE509
Wind Energy
1x3 hr paper
MRE510
Micro Hydro Power Plants
1x3 hr paper
MRE511
Thermodynamics Engines
1x3 hr paper
MRE512
Biomass and Biogas
1x3 hr paper
MRE513
Computer Simulation of
Renewable Energy Systems
Performance
1x3 hr paper
2.7.2.1 The Renewable Energy Committee, as the present

responsible body for the MSc programme, may from time to
time determine which of the courses will be offered in each
semester of the year.
2.7.2.2 The University marking scheme for postgraduate
coursework degrees will apply to all courses, the assessed
Industrial Attachment and the Dissertation as follows:
Distinction
80%
Merit
70%-79%
Pass
50%-69%
Fail
Bellow 50%
2.7.2.3 The pass mark will be 50%
2.7.2.4 A student who fails three or more of the minimum required
10 courses shall be required to withdraw from the
programme.
2.7.2.5 A candidate who fails one or two of the minimum required
ten courses shall proceed and carry the failed courses into
the following year. However, if the failed courses are
optional, then the student may take up any other optional
courses to make up the minimum required ten courses.
2.7.2.6 A candidate who fails Industrial Attachment (MRE560) may
be allowed to resubmit the report on such conditions and
within such period of time as may be specified by the Board
of Examiners.
2.7.2.7 On completion of the Dissertation (MRE570), a candidate
will be required to submit two copies of the dissertation for
assessment. A candidate maybe asked to attend an oral
examination.
2.7.2.8 A candidate whose Dissertation is unsatisfactory maybe
allowed to re-submit on such conditions and within such
period of time as maybe specified by the Board of
Examiners. If the Dissertation is still unsatisfactory after
resubmission, then the candidate will be required to repeat
it.
2.7.2.9 A candidate must pass the ten taught courses, the Industrial
Attachment and the Dissertation to qualify for the award of
the Masters of Science Degree in Renewable Energy.
2.7.2.10 The aggregate mark for the award and classification of the
MSc degree shall be calculated on the basis of the following
weighting for the taught Part, the Industrial Attachment and
the Dissertation:
Coursework
50%
10%
Dissertation
40%
2.7.2.11 The MSc degree will be awarded with either a Pass, Merit or a
Distinction according to the schedule indicated in 5.8.6.3
above.
2.7.3
Syllabus
In accordance with the provisions of the General Regulations,
detailed syllabi for courses do not form part of these regulations.
Copies of the approved syllabi shall be maintained in the Department
of Mechanical Engineering and the Faculty of Engineering Office for
reference.
2.7.4

the provisions of the General Regulations.
2.8
R E G U L AT I O N S F O R T H E M A S T E R S O F S C I E N C E I N
MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
DEGREE (MSc MSOM)
2.8.1
Introduction
Academic Regulations for the Masters Degrees by Coursework,
2.8.2
Entry Requirements
2.8.2.1 To be admitted into the programme, applicants must
normally be in possession of a good first Honours degree in
Mechanical Engineering or Production Engineering with a
classification of Lower Second Class or better.
2.8.2.2 Applicants with a third class degree or an approved

equivalent but who has acquired at least two years of
industrial experience in the relevant fields maybe
considered for admission into the programme. Such
applicants will be asked to sit and pass a qualifying
examination.
2.8.3

The period required to complete the MSc programme is one year in
the case of full-time students and two years in the case of part-time
students. The MSc will normally start in June of each year.
2.8.4

The Programme comprises a taught component followed by a
project.
2.8.4.1 The taught component comprises ten courses, each of 70
hours duration for the formal lecture, tutorials, laboratory
work and coursework.
2.8.4.2 The taught component will comprise two semesters of the
three months each. Half of the courses will be taught in the
first semester and examined at the end of that semester. The
remaining half of the courses will be offeredbduring the
second semester with examinations for the courses at the
end of the semester.
2.8.4.3 On satisfactory completion of the taught component, the
candidate then carries out a project, either at the University
or more usually at the candidate's place of employment. On
completion of the project, the candidate writes and submits
a Dissertation for assessment.
283
2.8.5
284
2.8.5.1 Each candidate is required to pass ten courses out of
those listed below:
Code
Description
Examination
Weight
MSOM501
Advanced Manufacturing Technology
1x3 hr paper
MSOM502
Manufacturing Systems Design
1x3 hr paper
MSOM503
Production Inventory Management
1x3 hr paper
MSOM504
Project Management
1x3 hr paper
MSOM505
Maintenance Engineering and

Management
1x3 hr paper
MSOM506
Total Quality Management
1x3 hr paper
MSOM507
Cleaner Production Tech nology
1x3 hr paper
MSOM508
Operations Management
1x3 hr paper
MSOM509
Concurrent Engineering
1x3 hr paper
MSOM510
Logistics and Marketing Management
1x3 hr paper
MSOM511
Management Information Systems
1x3 hr paper
MSOM512
Management Accounting
1x3 hr paper
MSOM513
Systems Modeling and Simulation
1x3 hr paper
MSOM514
Operations Research
1x3 hr paper
MSOM515
Computer Aided Engineering
1x3 hr paper
Each course carries the same weight and examined by coursework

and a 3-hour examination paper.
2.8.1.1
2.8.1.2
The Departmental Board may from time to time

determine which of the courses will be offered.
A student who obtains the pass mark in a course
in both the examination and the coursework in each
course.
2.8.1.3
2.8.1.4
2.8.1.5
2.8.1.6
28.1.7
2.8.1.8
2.8.1.9
2.8.1.10
A student who obtains a pass mark in ten courses

shall be redeemed to have satisfied the examiners in
the taught component of the programme and will
be allowed to proceed to carry out the project.
A student who fails one or two of the minimum
required ten courses may be allowed at the
discretion of the Departmental Board of Examiners,
to proceed and to do the Dissertation. The student
may repeat the failed courses when they are next
offered or take up any other courses on offer in
order to satisfy the requirements of 5.9.5.4.
A student who fails three or more courses may
apply to repeat. The student will only be allowed to
proceed with the Dissertation upon satisfying the
requirements of 5.9.5.4
On completion of the Dissertation, a student will be
required to submit two copies of the Dissertation
for assessment. A student may be required to
The deadline for the submission of the Dissertation
will normally be the end of May at the end of the
second enrolment year in the case of full-time
students or such other date that may be specified
by the Departmental Board of Examiners.
A candidate whose Dissertation is unsatisfactory
maybe allowed to resubmit on such conditions and
within such period of time as may be specified by
the Board of Examiners. If the Dissertation is still
unsatisfactory after resubmission, then the
candidate will be asked to repeat it.
A student must pass ten courses and the
Dissertation to qualify for the award of the Masters
of Science Degree.
The aggregate mark for the award and classification
the following weighting for taught component
and the Dissertation:
2.8.1.11
Taught component
60%
Dissertation
40%
The MSc degree will be awarded with a Pass, Merit
or Distinction according to the schedule indicated
in the General Regulations.
2.8.2
Syllabus
In accordance with the provisions of the General Regulations,
detailed syllabi for courses do not form part of these
regulations. Copies of the approved syllabi shall be maintained
in the Department of Mechanical Engineering and the Faculty
of Engineering Office for reference.
2.8.3

Results shall be published and degrees awarded in accordance
285
FACULTY OF LAW
3.2 Subject to the provisions of the General Regulations governing

special entry to undergraduate programmes a candidate may be
exempted from such courses as may be recommended by the Board
of the Faculty of Law to Academic Committee provided that no
candidate shall be given credit of more than 240 units and provided
that he/she shall not be permitted to complete the programme in
less than four (4) successive semesters full-time or six successive
semesters part-time from the date of first registration for the
programme. Candidates admitted to the LLB Honours in terms of
this regulation may not be given credit for the Dissertation (LB 470)
or Clinical and Practical Skills Training (LB 401).

DEGREE PROGRAMMES
REGULATIONS FOR THE BACHELOR OF
LAWS HONOURS DEGREE (LLB) (HONS)
1.
PREAMBLE
1.1 These Regulations should be read in conjunction with the General
Academic Regulations for undergraduate degrees, hereinafter
1.2 These Regulations are in respect of the LLB Honours Degree.
1.3 The LLB Honours Degree will be awarded to a candidate who has
successfully completed an approved programme in accordance with
these Regulations.
2.
DEFINITIONS
2.1 SEMESTER - A semester which shall be determined and set out in
the University calendar, shall normally, for the purposes of the LLB
Honours Degree, comprise 15 weeks made up as follows: six weeks
of teaching, one week with no formal teaching (reading week), six
weeks of teaching, one week for revision and one week for
examinations.
2.2 COURSE - A course shall be defined as in the General Regulations
namely as a separately examinable portion of a programme and for
the purposes of the LLB Honours regulations, a course unit shall
normally be valued at two hours of lectures and half an hour of
tutorials, thus the following definitions and course unit values shall
apply:
2.2.1 a twenty unit course shall normally consist of 40 hours of
lectures and 10 hours of tutorials and/or practical;
2.2.2 a ten unit course shall normally consist of 20 hours of lectures
and five hours of tutorials and/or practicals;
2.3 DISSERTATION The meaning of the term dissertation shall be as
defined in the General Regulations.
2.4 FORMAL EXAMINATION for the purposes of these regulations
formal examination shall mean a written examination of specified
duration written under the regulations or rules for end of course
examinations at the University of Zimbabwe.
3.
ENTRY REGULATIONS
3.1 To be admitted to the programme, a candidate must have satisfied
the minimum conditions for entry to degree studies at this
University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the
General Regulations, provided that mere satisfaction of the
minimum requirements will not guarantee entry to the programme.
286
4.
STRUCTURE OF THE DEGREE PROGRAMME

4.1 Except in the case of special entry when a lesser period may be
allowed, the LLB
Honours Degree Programme shall require full-time study over a
period of not less than eight (8) successive semesters or twelve (12)
successive semesters part-time study. Normally a candidate will be
required to complete the programme in not more than twelve (12)
successive semesters of fulltime study or eighteen successive
semesters of part-time study from the date of first registration for
the programme.
4.1.1 A candidate may, with the approval of the Faculty Board and
Academic Committee, and on such conditions as those
bodies shall determine, apply to transfer from full-time to
part-time study or vice versa at the end of a semester. In such
cases the Faculty Board shall recommend to Academic
Committee the number of semesters within which the
candidate shall complete the degree. A candidate shall not be
permitted to effect transfer from full-time to part-time study
or vice versa more than once within her/his undertaking of
the degree programme.
4.2 The LLB Honours Degree shall consist of a minimum of 520 course
units or a maximum of 530 units taken as follows:
4.2.1 Full Time: In the full-time programme each Level of the
Programme shall consist of two successive semesters.
4.2.1.1 Level One Level One Core Courses to the value of 60
units per semester
4.2.1.2 Level Two Level Two Core Courses to the value of 60
units per semester. A candidate may, subject to the
requirements relating to pre-requisite courses for
Level Two courses, proceed to Level Two from Level
One carrying Level One courses not exceeding 40
units, providing that the total value of courses taken
by such candidate may not exceed 60 units in a
semester and the total number of units for both
semesters may not exceed 120.
4.2.1.3 A candidate may only proceed from Level Two to

Level Three of the programme if he or she has
successfully completed all courses in Levels One and
Two. For the purposes of completing all such courses
a candidate who is repeating failed courses at Level
Two or taking courses remaining at Level Two having
failed courses at Level One and successfully
completed those during Level Two shall not be
regarded for the purposes of Regulation 4.1.1 of these
regulations as read with Regulation 5.7 of the General
Regulations as a part-time student.
4.2.1.4 Level Three Courses, including core courses, not
exceeding 80 units per semester and not exceeding
140 units for the Level.
4.2.1.5 Level Four Subject to the requirements relating to
pre-requisite courses for Level Four Core courses and
for Optional courses candidates may take, including
core courses, courses up to, 80 units per semester
provided that the total number of units taken at Level
Four shall not exceed 150 units.
4.2.1.6 The general scheme of the full time programme is set
out in Schedule 1 of these Regulations.
4.2.2 Part Time: In the part-time programme each Level of the
Programme shall consist of three successive semesters.
4.2.2.1 Level One Level One Core Courses to the value of 40
units per semester
4.2.2.2 Level Two Level Two Core Courses to the value of 40
units per semester. A candidate may, subject to the
requirements relating to pre-requisite courses for
Level Two courses, proceed in to Level Two from Level
One carrying Level One courses not exceeding 40
units, providing that the total value of courses taken
by such candidate may not exceed 40 units in a
semester and the total number of units for the three
Level Two semesters may not exceed 120.
4.2.2.3 A candidate may only proceed from Level Two to
Level Three of the programme if he or she has
successfully completed all courses in Levels One and
Two.
4.2.2.4 Level Three - Courses, including core courses, not
exceeding 60 units per semester and not exceeding
140 units for the Level. Provided that a candidate who
takes more than 40 units in a semester for the
purposes of completing 140 units in Level Three shall
not be regarded for the purposes of Regulation 5.7 of
the General Regulations as a full-time student.
4.2.2.5 Level Four Subject to the requirements relating to
pre-requisite courses for Level Four Core courses and
for Optional courses candidates may take, including

core courses, courses up to, 60 units per semester
provided that the total number of units taken at Level
Four shall not exceed 150 units. Provided that a
candidate who takes more than 40 units in a semester
for the purposes of completing 140/150 units in Level
Four shall not be regarded for the purposes of
Regulation 5.7 of the General Regulations as a fulltime student.
4.2.2.6 The general scheme of the part time programme is set
out in Schedule 2 of these Regulations
4.3 Courses and Course Unit Values.
Course
Core Courses
Level 1
Introduction to Law
History of Roman Dutch Law
Contract
Criminal Law
Constitutional Law
Statutory Interpretation
Codes Units Prerequisite

LB101
LB102
LB103
LB104
LB105
LB106
20
20
20
20
20
20
287
Core Courses
Level 2
Criminal Procedure
Family Law
Delict
Civil Procedure
Commercial Law
Evidence
Codes
Course
Units Prerequisite
LB201
Lb203
LB204
LB206
LB207
LB208
20
20
20
20
20
20
Level 3
Accounting for Legal Practitioners
Civil Procedure (Superior Courts)
Jurisprudence
Property Law
Legal Ethics
LB301
LB302
LB303
LB304
LB305
20
20
20
20
10
See Regulation 4.4
Lb401
40
Civil Procedure (Superior Courts)
LB 470
40
Level 4
Clinical and Practical Skills
Training
LB302
Dissertation
Criminal Law
LB103
Introduction to Law
Contract LB102
Introduction to Law
Criminal Law
LB 101
LB101,
LB103
288
Optional Courses
Law of Taxation
Law of Banking and Negotiable
Instruments
Administrative and
Local Government Law
Environmental and Local Planning
Law
Public International Law
Labour Law
Law of Succession
Criminology
Insurance Law
Law of Public and
Private Enterprises
International Economic and
Trade Law
Women's Law
Industrial and Intellectual Property
Law
Insolvency Law
Law of Public and Private
Enterprises
Conveyancing
Notarial Practice
Advocacy
Customary Law
Alternative Dispute Resolution
Human Rights Law
Private International Law
Competition Law
LB002
20
LB003
20
students in level four. The Dissertation shall include a minimum of

10 hours of lectures, and or seminars, on research methodology and
a minimum 10 hours of seminars, discussions or tutorials on analysis
of research data and writing up of a dissertation.
4.5.1 The Board of the Faculty of Law shall assign a supervisor and
an alternate supervisor from the academic staff of the Faculty
to each candidate. Such supervisor, or alternate supervisor in
consultation with the supervisor, shall supervise the
preparation of the candidate's research proposal, research
design and the writing up of the Dissertation. Assessment of
the Dissertation shall be carried out as specified in regulation
6.1 of these regulations.
LB004 20
LB005
LB006
LB008
LB009
LB010
LB011
20
20
20
20
20
20
LB012 20
ATTACHMENT
During the degree programme, candidates shall be required to
undertake and satisfactorily complete such period(s) as the Faculty may
determine from time to time, normally of eight weeks (8) duration,
within one or more branches of the legal profession, namely the Public
Sector and/ or the Private Sector, such attachment shall be monitored
and assessed by the Board of the Faculty of Law.
6.
6.1 Each course, other than Clinical and Practical Skills Training (LB401)
Advocacy (LB026) and the Dissertation (LB470) shall be assessed by
coursework assessment and a formal examination.
6.1.1 Subject to the provisions of regulations 6.2 and 6.3;
coursework shall comprise between 20% - 30% of the marks
for a course. The Faculty Board shall determine the
percentage of the total mark for any course that shall be
comprised by Coursework. Candidates shall be advised in
writing at the commencement of a course the value, unless it
is already stipulated in these regulations, that is to be given to
course work in that course.
6.2 The assessment of the Clinical and Practical Skills Training course
(LB401) shall be based on 20% for coursework, 40% for a practical
examination and 40% for a two hour formal examination.
6.3 The assessment of the Advocacy course shall be based on 20% for
coursework, 50% for a practical examination and 30% for a one and
a half (11/2) hour formal examination.
6.4 In the Dissertation there shall be no formal examination but each
candidate shall be required to choose a topic approved by the
Faculty Board and to write a dissertation thereon in English in not
less than 9000 but not more than 12000 words.
The dissertation shall be submitted on or before the date set
annually by the Board of the Faculty of Law for the submission of
dissertations.
LB013 20
LB015 20
LB018 20
LB 020 10
LB012
LB021
LB022
LB026
LB027
LB028
LB030
LB031
LB032
20
10
10
20
10
20
20
20
Property Law LB304

Property Law LB304
Property Law LB304

Property Law Lb304
4.4.1 The Faculty Board may, from time to time, determine in

which semester a Core course may be taken provided that
Legal Ethics LB305 may be taken as either a Level 3 or a Level
4 core course.
4.4.2 The Departmental Boards may, from time to time determine
which optional courses shall be on offer to candidates for the
degree, and in which semester such courses shall be offered.
Provided that an optional course will not be offered in a
semester if there are less than ten (10) candidates registered
for that course.
4.5 The Dissertation shall have a course unit weighting of 40 units and
shall be undertaken at level four of the degree programme for both
full-time and part-time students. The dissertation shall be shall be
carried out over two successive semesters for fulltime students in
level four and over three successive semesters for part-time
6.4.1 The marks awarded in the Dissertation shall be assigned, at

the completion of each phase of the phases of the
dissertation process, as follows
Phase 1 Research Proposal/Research Design
10%
(to be assessed when the Final Proposal is
submitted)
Phase 2 First Draft
20%
(to be assessed when the First Draft is submitted)
Phase 3 Final Draft
70%
6.4.2 The Dissertation shall be accorded an overall mark on the
standard university marking scale.
6.5 Each formal examination shall be held during an examination
period at the end of a semester, normally that of the semester in
which the course is completed.
6.5.1 Departments within the Faculty of Law shall specify within
the first two weeks of a semester in respect of each course
being formally examined at the end of that semester which
materials, if any, may be taken into the examination in each
course for which the Department is responsible and whether
they may be annotated or not.
6.5.2 The duration of the formal examination for courses shall be,
unless otherwise stated in these regulations, as follows:
20 unit course 3 hours
10 unit course 2 hours
Provided that the Faculty Board may determine, where
appropriate, that a course may be examined solely by a
practical or an oral examination or by a combination of
formal and practical or oral examination.
6.6 A period of attachment shall be assessed on a pass/fail basis as
follows:
Student report on attachment period
50%
Faculty appointed supervisor's assessment
30%
Attachment placement allocated supervisor 20%
Assessment shall be carried out as follows:
6.6.1 Each candidate must within fourteen (14) days of the
commencement of the semester immediately following the
period of attachment submit a report in the required form, on
his/her period of attachment. Such report shall be marked
by the Supervisor allocated by the Board of the Faculty of Law
to the candidate out of 50 marks.
6.6.2 A supervisor from among the Academic Staff of the Board of
the Faculty of Law shall be allocated to a candidate to
supervise his or her attachment. Such supervisor shall, in the
form prescribed by the Faculty Board, report on the
performance of the candidate out of 30.
6.6.3 Prior to the commencement of attachment an appropriately
qualified supervisor from the place of attachment shall be
nominated from the place of attachment, subject to the
approval of the Board of the Faculty of Law, to supervise the

candidate at the place of attachment. Such supervisor shall
assess the candidate in the form prescribed by the Faculty
Board and report on the performance of the candidate out of
20.
7.
PROCESSING OF EXAMINATION RESULTS AND DETERMINATION OF

EXAMINATION RESULTS
7.1 The processing of examination results and the determination of
examination results for candidates shall be carried out as
prescribed in Regulations 8 and 9, respectively, of the General
Regulations, provided that in relation to a period of attachment the
results shall be processed and determined as follows:
7.1.1 After the compilation of the marks for each candidate the
Faculty of Law Board of Examiners shall determine whether a
candidate has passed or failed the prescribed period of
attachment.
7.1.2 Candidates who fail to satisfactorily complete attachment/s
to which they are assigned, in terms of Regulation 6.6, shall
be required to repeat the period of attachment which has
been failed.
8.
AWARD AND CLASSIFICATION OF THE DEGREE

8.1 For the purpose of classification of the degree the marks obtained in
all levels of the Programme shall be taken into account.
8.2 The degree shall be classified into the divisions provided for in
Regulation 10.2 of the General Regulations.
9.
SYLLABUSES
syllabuses for Subjects/Courses do not form part of the General or
Faculty Regulations but shall be submitted to the Faculty Board for
approval. Copies of the detailed syllabuses shall be maintained in the
289
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTERS

IN WOMEN'S LAW MSWL
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 The Southern and Eastern African Regional Centre for Women's
Law hereinafter referred to as SEARCW Land the University of
Zimbabwe being aware of the professional, social and family
constraints that affect women's capacity to pursue postgraduate
studies on a full time basis away from their home countries have
endeavoured to provide a flexible programme format which
permits women candidates, in particular, to balance these
components of their lives in their pursuit of postgraduate studies.
Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework
(hereinafter referred to as the General Regulations).
290
2. QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMISSION

To be eligible for admission to the Masters in Women's Law, a candidate
must have obtained a first degree in Law of an appropriate standard from
this or another University, normally at second class level or above,
provided that candidates with a lower academic ranking but who have a
proven work record and/or research experience in women's law and
related issues may still be considered. Candidates with first degrees in
other disciplines may be considered if they have achieved the appropriate
academic standard and have relevant postgraduate experience in areas
related to women and law.
In the selection process the candidate's post graduation work and other
experience in areas related to women and the law will be taken into
account.
3. PROGRAMME DURATION AND STRUCTURE
The programme will normally commence in January of each alternate
year and will run until May of the following year.
3.1 The first semester shall consist of 16 weeks and will focus on theories,
and methodologies in Women's Law and inter-related human rights.
The first semester will be comprised of lectures, seminars, and
research methodology practicals. The courses in this semester, which
are all core courses are:
Theories and Perspectives in
Women's Law
MWL 501
20 units
Research Methodologies and
Methods in Women's Law
MWL 502
20 units
Human Rights and Women
MWL 504
20 units
Field Research
MWL 503
20 units
3.1.1
Contact hours for 20 unit courses are based on the following
breakdown:
Lectures
40 hours
Seminars and seminar presentations
20 hours
Practicals
20 hours
The first semester will normally be conducted from January
to March in the year in which the programme begins,
although the University reserves the right to vary the time
when the programme commences.
3.2 Between the first and second semesters students will be required to
undertake a five week period of field research based at a selected site
in Zimbabwe. Students will conduct research in groups and after the
week of active field research shall analyse, write up and present their
findings in individual reports based on individual topics within the
broader group based thematic topics.
Contact hours and field work hours per student:
Research Design
20 hours
Field Research
30 hours
Field Research Supervision:
5 hours
Data Analysis Supervision
10 hours
Supervision, critiquing of field reports
10 hours
3.3
The second semester which will run for 15 weeks, normally
commencing in mid-June of the year in which a programme
commences. In this semester candidates will:
3.2.1
take two options from the list of optional courses offered in

the MSWL programme, which are:
Women, Land, Environmental Resources and Law

Women, Land, Environmental Resources and Law
Masculinities, Gender and Law
Women, Commerce and Law in Africa
Women, Law Reform and Social Justice Strategies
Women and the Criminal Justice System
Women, Family, Social Realities and Law
Gender, Law and Sexuality
Woman, Labour and Social Security Law
Masculinities, Gender and Law
Women, Commerce and Law in Africa
Women, Law Reform and Social Justice Strategies
Women and the Criminal Justice System
Women, Family, Social Realities and Law
Gender, Law and Sexuality
Woman, Labour and Social Security Law
MWL 511
MWL 512
MWL 513
MWL 514
MWL 516
MWL 517
MWL 518
MWL 519
MWL 511
MWL 512
MWL 513
MWL 514
MWL 516
MWL 517
MWL 518
MWL 519
20 units
20 units
20 units
20 units
20 units
20 units
20 units
20 units
20units
20 units
20 units
20 units
20 units
20 units
20 units
20 units
3.2.1.1 The SEARCWL shall determine which optional

courses will be offered in each programme.
3.2.1.2 The SEARCWL may prescribe the maximum number of
students who may take an optional course, the normal
upper limit per optional course being 10 students. The
SEARCWL may also prescribe the minimum number of
students required for the mounting of a course, which
would normally be not less than 5 students.
3.2.2. During the second semester candidates will determine their
dissertation topic for the third semester and develop their
dissertation proposal and field work methodology and methods
under the guidance of supervisors approved by the Departmental
Board of the SEARCWL and appointed by the Director of the
SEARCWL.
3.4 In the third semester each candidate shall conduct field research and
present for examination a 20 000-25 000 word dissertation in a selected
field in Women's Law (see 3.2.2 above). The research for the dissertation
should be carried out in the candidate's home country, the writing up
will, normally, be conducted at the SEARCWL, University of Zimbabwe.
4. SCHEME OF ASSESSMENT/EXAMINATION
4.1 The scheme of assessment for each course in the course work
components of the degree shall be a combination of different forms
of assessment:
4.1.1
Semester 1
Theories and Perspectives in Women's Law
MWL 501
Human Rights and Women
MWL 504
In each of the above courses candidates will be required to
submit one or two written assignment which will constitute
35% of the total marks for the course. And write a four (4)
hour research examination which will constitute 65% of the
total marks for the course.
4.1.1.1
Research Methodologies and Methods in Women's Law
MWL 502
There shall be two components to this course:
1. Exploring research methodologies and methods which
shall be assessed as follows:
By two written assignments which shall constitute 25%
of the marks for the course; and
A three hour research examination which shall
constitute 50% of the marks for the course
2. ILS/ITC which shall be assessed as follows:
By practical/course work component which shall
constitute 10% of the marks for the course and a one
hour examination which shall constitute 15% of the
marks for the course.
4.1.1.2 Research Examinations
Candidates will be given the question paper for the research
examination at 9.00 on the morning of the examination and
will be required to hand in their completed paper by 13:00 on
the same day. (Provided that in the Research Methodologies
and Methods in Women's Law the research paper shall be of
three (3) hours duration.) Candidates may write such
examinations anywhere designated by the Director of the
SEARCWL as an examination venue within the SEARCWL
premises.
291
4.1.1.3 Field Research Semester 1

MWL 561
20 units
Candidates shall present an individual field report which
shall constitute 100% of the marks for the Field Research.
The report shall be presented in such format as from time to
time prescribed by the Departmental Board of SEARCWL.
course is altered an alternative submission date will be set for the

dissertation.Candidates shall be required to submit with their
dissertation a consolidation of their findings and a recommended
action plan which together shall not exceed in length one
thousand (1000) words in length and which shall comprise 10 % of
the marks awarded for the dissertation.
4.1.2 Semester 2
In each optional course offered the mode of assessment shall be a
combination of assessment of seminar presentations, written
assignments, practical exercises and a four (4) hour research
examination. The research examinations shall follow the format
prescribed in 4.1.1.
The Departmental Board of the SEARCWL shall advise candidates,
in writing, at the end of the first semester what form the
assessment for each of the optional courses on offer in that
academic year in the second semester shall take. However,
normally, the assessment will be constituted as follows:
292
Seminar Presentations - 15%

Written Assignment - 20%
Practical Exercise
- 15%
Research Examination - 50%
4.1.3 Evidence of Independent Work
In all presentations, assignments and practical exercises,
regardless of the course being pursued, each student shall be
required to submit a separate written assignment or separate
evidence of work carried out for presentations or practical
exercises even if the initial preparation and consultations were
carried out in the form of group work.
4.1.4 Semester 3
Dissertation MWL560
60 units
Candidates shall submit a dissertation between 20 000-25 000
words on an approved topic (see 3.3 above), normally, not later
than 15 May in the year after that in which they enrol for the
Masters in Women's Law. Provided that where the timing of the
Candidates shall submit one printed copy of the dissertation and

an electronic copy of the dissertation. The dissertation and the
electronic copy shall be prepared using such word processing
programme/s as is, from time to time, prescribed by the Director
of the SEARCWL.
5.
DETERMINATION AND NOTIFICATION OF RESULTS

In determining the results of each candidate the following shall apply:
5.1 The coursework components of the degree plus the field research
report shall be given a combined weighting of 60%, with each course
work component having equal weight with the other course work
components and the field research report, the dissertation shall be
given a weighting of 40% in the computation of the overall
classification of the degree.
Candidates must pass each course to be awarded the degree.
Provided that where a candidate fails a single course he or she may
rewrite that course when it is next on offer, and shall do so at his or
her expense.
5.2 In all other respects results shall be published and degrees awarded in
6. SYLLABI
In accordance with the provisions of the General Regulations detailed
syllabuses for subjects/courses do not form part of the General or Faculty
Regulations but shall be submitted to the Faculty Board for approval.
Copies of the detailed syllabuses shall be maintained in the Faculty Office
for reference.
FACULTY OF SCIENCE
4.
REGULATIONS FOR THE BSC HONOURS AND BSC

DEGREES
1.
2.
3.
APPLICATIONS OF THESE REGULATIONS

1.1. These Regulations should be read in conjunction with the General
Academic Regulations for Undergraduate
Degrees hereinafter referred to as the General Regulations.
1.2 These Regulations are in respect of programmes for the following
degrees offered by the Faculty of Science:
BSc Honours Degree
BSc Degree
1.3 The appropriate Degree will be awarded to a student who has
successfully completed an approved Programme in accordance with
these Regulations.
DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
Course Unit
In the Faculty of Science a course unit is defined so that a course with a
weighting of ten (10) course units shall be taught in 48 contact hours at
the rate of four (4 ) contact hours a week for a semester with at least two
(2) and not more than three of those hours being lectures.
DEPARTMENTS
Courses are available in the following Departments within the Faculty of
Science:
Biochemistry
Biological Sciences
Chemistry
Computer Science
Geography and
Geology
Mathematics
Physics
Institute of Food, Nutrition and Family Sciences
Statistics
ENTRY REGULATIONS
4.1 In order to qualify for normal entry to an Undergraduate Degree
Programme in the Faculty of Science, a prospective student must
satisfy the Entry Regulations specified in the General Regulations and
in so doing, must also meet the following Faculty requirements:
4.1.1 have obtained a Pass at A Level in at least two of the following
subjects or their recognised equivalents:
Biology
Chemistry
Geography
Mathematics
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
AND
have obtained a Pass at O Level in a third subject chosen
from those listed in Section 4.1.1;
AND
have obtained a Pass at O Level in Mathematics.
have obtained a Pass at A-Level in at least two subjects
including Mathematics and be a prospective student in one
Programme chosen from the BSc Honours in Computer
Science, the BSc Honours in Mathematics or the BSc
Honours in Statistics.
have obtained a Pass at A-Level in at least two subjects
including Geography, have obtained a Pass at O-Level in
Mathematics and be a prospective student in one
Programme chosen from the four Programmes offered by
the Department of Geography and Environmental Science.
NOTE: There are restrictions on the combinations of certain subjects. See

Schedule B2 of the General Regulations.
4.2 While the above requirements apply to entry to the Faculty of
Science as a whole, the following specific qualifications, or an
approved equivalent, are NORMALLY required by the indicated
Departments for initial entry to courses in that Department:
293
294
Biochemistry
A Level Chemistry and A Level Biology
Biological Sciences
A Level Biology or recognised equivalent
Chemistry
A Level Chemistry
Computer Science
A Level Mathematics
Geography& Environmental
Science
A Level Geography
Geology
A Level in Mathematics and at least one of Biology, Chemistry

or Physics
Mathematics
A Level Mathematics
Physics
A Level Physics or A Level Physical Science and A Level

Mathematics
Statistics
A Level Mathematics
Food, Nutrition and Family

Sciences
A Level Chemistry and O Level Biology or a recognised

equivalent
NOTE:
5.
These requirements refer to qualifications obtained prior to

entry to the University. Courses and subjects may have
additional pre-requisites based on courses studied at the
University.
STRUCTURE OF DEGREE PROGRAMMES

5.1 BSC Honours Degrees
5.1.1 Except in the case of special entry, where a lesser period may
be allowed, a BSc Honours Degree Programme requires full
time study over a period of four years. Normally a student will
be required to complete the Programme in not more than
eight years from the date of first registration for the
Programme.
5.1.2 Each student admitted to studies in the Faculty of Science
shall, in the first instance, be admitted to a BSc Honours
Degree Programme. A BSc Honours Degree Programme shall
consist of distinct courses with a total weighting of at least
480 course units which shall consist of taught courses worth
at least 360 course units in a single Programme, including a
course HBS111 Entrepreneurship and a course HBS201
Business Management for Scientists , these latter courses shall

be core courses in every BSc Honours Programme, and a
period of Industrial Attachment normally extending over one
Academic Year worth 120 course units and two additional core
courses in Communication Skills, (CSSC101 and CSSC102). At
initial registration a student shall register for Level 1 courses
worth at least 60 course units taken from the Level 1 Semester
1 courses of the programme for which he/she is registering
and, in addition, shall register for the Communication Skills
Course CSSC101. At the start of the second semester, he/she
shall register for further courses worth at least 60 course units
from the Level 1 Semester 2 courses of his/her chosen
Programme. Normally courses worth at least 120 course units
will be taken at Level 2 and further taught courses worth at
least 120 course units will be taken at Level 4. The Industrial
Attachment will normally be at Level 3 but may be delayed to
Level 4 if the dissertation project is carried out at the place
that the student is assigned for her/his Industrial Attachment
in which case the Level 4 courses, other than the dissertation
project, will be taken at Level 3. While courses shall be
designated as Semester 1 or Semester 2 courses, those
courses may be taught in the other semester if circumstances,
such as staff availability, so demand subject to the approval of
the Dean of Science.
5.1.3 In a BSc Honours Degree Programme, a student must pass at
least one project course examined by a dissertation and
having a weighting of at least 20 course units, hereinafter
referred to as the Dissertation Project. This course must be a
Level 4 course and will normally be taken in the final year of
study. This course shall be listed as a core course in the Special
Regulations for the Programme of which it forms a portion. In
an Honours Degree Programme the weighting of each
additional project course shall be at least 10 course units and
the total weighting of project courses in an Honours Degree
Programme shall not exceed 40 course units.
5.1.4 Final year honours students may be required to be in
attendance in the Department outside normal University
semesters to carry out work on the dissertation project
course.
5.1.5 In a given Programme offered in a particular department a
student may be required or allowed to take courses from an
ancillary Programme up to a total of at most 100 course units
provided that such courses are at the appropriate level in the
Programme from which they are taken.
These courses may be offered by Faculties other than the

Faculty of Science.
5.1.6 A department will normally assist each student in a
Programme under its control to find a place in a suitable
institution or commercial firm to undertake his/her Industrial
Attachment. The appropriate department must approve the
choice of the place of attachment and must liaise with that
institution so that a suitable person, to be called the
Placement Supervisor, employed by that institution, is
appointed to supervise the student's performance at that
institution. The department will assign a member of academic
staff to supervise each student's period of attachment. Such a
supervisor, to be called the Attachment Supervisor, must be in
regular communication with the student and his/her
Placement Supervisor and shall visit the student at his/her
place of attachment at least three times during the period of
attachment.
5.1.7 The following BSc Honours Programmes will be offered in the
Faculty of Science. Each Programme shall be described as the
BSc Honours Programme in followed by the title as listed
below
CODE
TITLE
REGISTERING
DEPARTMENT
SECTION FOR
SPECIAL
REGULATIONS
BCH
Biochemistry
Biochemistry
12.1
BZH
Biological Sciences
Biological Sciences
12.2
CHH
Chemistry
Chemistry
12.3
CTH
Computer Science
Computer Science
12.4
HGGENV
Environmental
Science
Geography and
Environmental
Science
12.5
HGGIS
Geographical
Information Science
and Earth Observation
Geography and
Environmental
Science
12.6
HGGB
Geographical
Biogeosciences
Geography and
Environmental
Science
12.7
HGGH
Geography of the
Geography and
Human Environment Environmental
Science
12.8
GLH
Geology
Geology
12.9
MTH
Mathematics
Mathematics
12.10
PHH
Physics
Physics
12.11
STSH
Statistics
Statistics
12.13
BScFS
Food Science and

Technology
IFNFS
12.14
HNS
Nutritional Science
IFNFS
12.16
5.2. Upgrading of a BSc Degree to a BSc Honours Degree.

5.2.1 A person who holds a BSc Degree of the University of
Zimbabwe with a major in an appropriate subject or an
equivalent qualification and has passed that major subject in
the upper second division or a higher division, may apply to the
University to be admitted to studies in the Faculty of Science to
upgrade that degree to a BSc Honours Degree Programme
offered by the appropriate department under these
Regulations. A person who has passed the major subject in the
lower second division and has at least two years of
postgraduate experience that is likely to have improved her/his
knowledge and understanding of the major subject may be
admitted to a Programme offered by the appropriate
department subject to a qualifying examination that confirms
that his/her knowledge and understanding has in fact
improved.
5.2.2 The upgrading programme will normally be a two year fulltime programme but may be taken over four years on a part
time basis. A student admitted to this programme will normally
undertake the Industrial Attachment and Level 4 of the BSc
Honours Programme. In doing so, the student will take Level 4
courses worth at least 120 course units, including the
295
5.3
296
Dissertation Project course (specified in 5.1.3.) from that

Programme (If in the particular Programme, the Industrial
Attachment is at Level 4, the student will have to take the
relevant number of courses at Level 3, the Industrial
Attachment and the Dissertation Project specified in 5.1.3).
He/she may also be required to take and pass lower level
courses that she/he did not take or did not pass in the BSc
Programme so that the total number of credits obtained in the
given subject in the BSc Programme and in the upgrading
Programme is at least 480 course units. Where such a student
has been in suitable employment for at least a year after
graduating from the BSc Programme, he/she may apply to
Senate for exemption from the Industrial Attachment. If
Senate agrees to such an exemption the length of the
programme shall be reduced accordingly.
BSc Degree
5.3.1 A student registered for a BSc Honours Degree Programme
whose progress is delayed by the failing of courses may either
opt to change his/her BSc Honours Programme, retaining
credit for courses he/she has passed which form part of the
new Programme, or may opt to do a BSc Degree in two distinct
major subjects. This latter course of action will normally be
taken by a student who, at the end of the third or fourth year
after initial registration, has not completed Level 2 of his/her
BSc Honours Programme or has not completed that Level of
the Programme with sufficiently good passes. For the
purposes of this Section a major subject is defined to be the
title of the BSc Honours Degree Programme, as listed in
Section 5.1.7, from which the courses taken are chosen. The
major subjects may include the subject of his/her original
choice of BSc Honours Programme or two different major
subjects. However the student must satisfy the entry
requirements for the two major subjects he/she chooses to do
in the BSc Degree programme. Moreover the student must
complete the BSc Degree Programme in not less than four
years nor more than eight years from the time of his/her
original registration for the BSc Honours Degree Programme.
5.3.2 A BSc Degree Programme shall consist of distinct courses with
a total weighting of at least 480 course units. The Programme
shall include two distinct major subjects as defined in 5.3.1
5.4
chosen from the BSc Honours Programmes listed in 5.1.7 (

excluding those offered by IFNFS) from which the courses shall
be chosen and shall include a period of Industrial Attachment
in one of the major subjects. For a major in a subject, a student
must study courses worth at least 180 course units in that
subject, including all core courses listed in the Special
Regulations for the appropriate Programme. Of these courses,
courses with a weighting of at least 80 course units must be
Level 2 or higher level courses. The level of a course is that
assigned to the course in the Special Regulations for the
relevant BSc Honours Programme. In satisfying these
conditions a course may only be counted once.
5.3.3 It should be noted that, for each type of Degree and for each
Programme, while studying a course, a student will be
expected to attend lectures and shall be required to attend all
practicals and tutorials in that course and to complete all
items of continuous assessment according to the published
timetable, regardless of the number of courses he/she is
registered for.
Selection of Courses
5.4.1 For each Level 2 or higher level course all pre-requisites that
apply to that course and whether it is a core course shall be
listed in the Special Regulations for the Programme of which
that course forms a portion. A student shall not be admitted to
a Level 2 or higher level course unless he/she has passed all
pre-requisites for that course prior to the start of the semester
in which he/she intends to study that course. A student shall
study all co-requisite courses for each course for which he/she
registers at the same time as or at an earlier time than that
course. Passing a co-requisite course cannot be a condition for
passing a course.
5.4.2 A student may be required to include in his/her Programme
approved courses offered by other faculties up to a total
equivalent to, at most, 80 course units. The weighting
allocated to a course from another Faculty shall be that
allocated to the course by that other Faculty. Normally a
course will only be approved if it is fully compatible with these
Regulations.
5.4.3 A student's selection of courses for a Degree Programme is
subject to the approval of the Dean of Science and the Boards
of all relevant Departments and to the following conditions:-
5.4.3.1 The course combination is feasible in terms of the

timetable.
5.4.3.2 The student shall not register for courses worth more
than 80 course units in a semester.
5.4.3.3 The chosen courses must enable the student to
complete his/her Programme in as close to the
minimum period as is possible and the student must
include courses that will allow him/her to complete the
requirements for a given level in preference to higher
level courses wherever possible.
5.4.3.4 The student shall not be allowed to carry a Level 1
course into Level 3 of his/her programme.
5.4.4 A student shall register at the start of each semester and may
only register for courses offered in that semester.
6.
6.1 The assessment of a practical course shall be based on written
reports submitted during the course according to a schedule laid
down by the appropriate Departmental Board.
6.2 The assessment of a field course or a project course shall be based
on written reports or on a dissertation submitted at a date
determined by the Departmental Board. Students shall be notified
of this date at the start of the course.
6.3 The assessment of the Industrial Attachment shall be based on 4
marks, a mark from the Placement Supervisor which shall be
justified by a brief written report, a mark from the Attachment
supervisor which shall also be justified by a brief written report, a
mark for the student's written report and a mark for the
presentation by the student based on his written report. The final
mark for the Industrial Attachment shall be calculated on those
four marks weighted in the ratio 1:4:4:1.
6.4 The assessment of a course containing theory and practical
components shall be based on an end of course theory
examination, continuous assessment (including both theory and
practical work) and may include an end of course practical
examination.
6.5 All other courses shall be assessed by continuous assessment and
an end of course examination.
6.6 The end of course examination for a course worth 10 course units
shall be of two hours duration, A course worth 20 course units shall
normally have a three hour end of course examination, but if there
is a practical component to the course the end of course theory
examination may be two hours long.
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
Where a course has an end of course practical examination, the

end of course practical examination may be held at a time and
venue different from that of the end of course theory examination
for the same course. The duration of the end of course practical
examination shall be specified in the Special Regulations for the
subject, but shall not be greater than ninety minutes in the case of
a course worth 10 course units nor greater than three hours in the
case of a course worth 20 course units. An end of course practical
examination shall have the same weighting as the end of course
theory examination.
A course with an end of course practical examination shall contain
a practical component in the continuous assessment. The
continuous assessment may be entirely practical or contain theory
and practical components, but the relative weightings shall be
stated in the Special Regulations for the subject.
In a course with a theory and a practical component the
weightings of the continuous assessment mark and the end of
course examination mark need not be within the limits stated in
the General Regulations but these weightings must be stated in the
Special Regulations for the subject. Furthermore the continuous
assessment weightings shall be between 25% and 75% of the
overall mark for the course.
For each course that contains a theory and a practical component,
the appropriate Departmental Panel of Examiners shall determine
for each student a theory continuous assessment mark, a practical
continuous assessment mark, an end of course theory
examination mark, an end of course practical examination mark
(where appropriate), an overall theory mark, an overall practical
mark, an overall mark and a final mark for the course. If a student
obtains an overall mark of at least 50%, an overall theory mark of at
least 50% and an overall practical mark of at least 40%, that
student shall pass the course and the final mark for the course shall
be the overall mark for the course. If a student obtains less than
50% in the overall theory mark for the course and an overall
practical mark of at least 40%, the student shall fail the course and
his final mark for the course shall be the overall mark or 48%,
whichever is the lesser. If a student obtains an overall practical
mark of less than 40% the student shall fail the course and the final
mark shall be the overall mark or 48%, whichever is the lesser
For each practical course, field course or project course and for
each student, the Departmental Panel of Examiners shall
determine a final mark for that student for that course based on
the assessment of the written reports or of the dissertation
submitted by that student. The Panel shall determine whether the
student has passed or failed the course.
297
6.12 For all other courses the Departmental Panel of Examiners shall
determine, for each student, a continuous assessment mark, an
end of course examination mark, an overall mark, a final mark
and whether the student has passed or failed. The final mark
for that course for that student shall be the overall mark for that
course.
6.13 Each Departmental Panel shall submit, for each course under
its control and for each student enrolled in that course, the final
mark and the result to the Faculty Board of Examiners. For
each student it shall indicate the number of credits obtained in
courses under its control.
7.
298
7.1 The examination results of a student shall be determined in
accordance with the General Academic Regulations for
Undergraduate Programmes.
7.2 The overall result PASS: GRADUATE shall apply to a student who has
completed all the requirements for the Programme he/she is
registered for.
passed all the prescribed Level 1 OR Level 2 OR Level 3 courses, as the
case may be, in the given programme.
7.4 The overall result INCOMPLETE: PROCEED CARRYING (followed by a
list of courses to be carried) shall apply to a student who has:
7.4.1 at least 100 credits at Level 1,OR
7.4.2 who has passed all prescribed Level 1 courses and has at least
100 credits at Level 2 OR
7.4.3 who has passed all prescribed Level 1 courses, has at least 100
credits at Level 2 and has completed the Industrial Attachment.
7.5 The overall result INCOMPLETE: REPEAT FAILED COURSES shall
apply to a student in Level 1 who has at least 60 credits but less than
100 credits or has passed all the prescribed courses at Level 1 and at
Level 2 has at least 60 credits but less than 100 credits or to a student
who, at the end of the academic year was expected to complete the
requirements for the Programme for which he/she is registered but
has failed to meet the requirements for graduating. No student in this
category shall be permitted to register for any course at a higher
Level.
7.6 The overall result INCOMPLETE: ALLOWED TO APPLY TO REPEAT
FAILED COURSES shall apply to a student who has less than 60 at the
Level for which he/she is currently registered or who has failed
courses during the current academic year at more than one Level.
Such a student, if allowed to repeat, shall only be permitted to
register for courses she/he has failed.
8. REPEATING OF COURSES
Normally a student who fails a course and elects to repeat that course will
be required to repeat the entire course including attending all lectures,
all tutorials, all practicals, writing the end of course examination and
doing all items of continuous assessment.
9
AWARDING A DEGREE AND CLASSIFICATION OF THAT DEGREE

9.1 To be eligible for the award of a BSc Honours Degree in a particular
Programme a student must satisfy ALL of the following conditions:
9.1.1 have passed courses worth at least 480 course units, of
which courses, courses worth at least 120 course units shall
be Level 1 courses, courses worth at least 120 course units
shall be Level 2 courses, courses worth at least 120 course
units shall be the Industrial Attachment and courses worth
at least 120 units shall be Level 4 courses, except that if the
Industrial Attachment in the particular Programme is at
Level 4,the student must pass courses worth at least 120
course units at Level 3 or a higher level; AND
9.1.2 of the courses passed, at least one shall be the Dissertation
Project course with a weighting of at least 20 course units;
AND
9.1.3 have passed all core courses listed in the Special Regulations
for that Programme; AND
9.1.4 have passed the Communications Skills courses CSSC101
and CSSC102.
9.2 To be eligible for the award of a BSc Honours Degree after being
admitted to the Programme to upgrade a BSc Degree to a BSc
Honours Degree, as described in Section 5.2, a student must satisfy
ALL of the following conditions:
9.2.1 have passed Level 4 courses worth at least 120 course units,
except that if the Industrial Attachment in the particular
Programme is at Level 4,the student must pass courses
worth at least 120 course units at Level 3 or a higher level;
AND
9.2.2 of the courses passed at least one course shall be the
Dissertation Project with a weighting of at least 20 course
units; AND
9.2.3
9.2.4
have passed all courses that he/she was required to take at

Level 1 and Level 2 in order to improve the total number of
credits obtained in the major subject in the BSc Degree and
in the upgrading Programme to at least 480 course units
including the Industrial Attachment UNLESS he/she has
been exempted by Senate from the Industrial Attachment.
have passed all core courses listed for a major in that subject
in the BSc Degree and all core courses listed in the Special
Regulations for the upgrading Programme.
9.3 To pass a major subject in a BSc Degree Programme a student must:

9.3.1 pass each core course listed in the Special Regulations in the
appropriate BSc Honours Programme; AND
9.3.2 pass courses worth at least 180 course units in that subject.
At least 80 of the course units passed must be for Level 2 or
higher level courses.
9.4 To be eligible for the award of a BSc Degree a student must have:
9.4.1 passed two major subjects; AND
9.4.2 passed courses worth at least 480 course units including the
Industrial Attachment. Courses worth at least 160 course
units shall be for courses at Level 2 or a higher level; AND
9.4.3 passed the Communications Skills courses CSSC101 and
CSSC102.
9.5
Each Departmental Panel of Examiners shall, having determined

that a student is eligible for the award of a BSc Honours Degree in a
particular Programme, determine the division in which he/she has
passed that Degree.
9.5.1 In classifying the pass in a BSc Honours Degree Programme
the Board shall consider the weighted aggregate of three
marks,
9.5.1.1 The Level 2 mark which shall be the aggregate of
the marks for the Level 2 courses worth 120 course
units that the student has passed that give the
student the highest aggregate, provided that all
Level 2 core courses listed in the Special
Regulations for that Programme are included.
9.5.1.2 The Industrial Attachment mark obtained
according to Section 6.3 above.
9.5.1.3 The Level 4 mark which shall be the weighted
aggregate of the mark for the Dissertation Project
course worth at least 20 course units and the marks
for the Level 4 courses with a weighting of the
difference between 120 courses units and the

weighting of the Dissertation Project that the
student has passed that give the student the highest
aggregate, provided that all Level 4 core courses
listed in the Special Regulations for that
Programme are included.
If the Industrial
Attachment in that particular Programme is at Level
4, then the Level 4 mark shall be replaced by the
Level 3 mark which shall be the weighted aggregate
of the mark for the Dissertation Project course
worth at least 20 course units and the marks for the
Level 3 courses with a weighting of the difference
between 120 courses units and the weighting of the
Dissertation Project that the student has passed
that give the student the highest aggregate,
provided that all Level 3 core courses listed in the
Special Regulations for that Programme are
included.
9.5.1.4 The weighted aggregate of these three marks shall
be obtained by multiplying the Level 2 mark by 2,
the Industrial Attachment mark by 1 and the Level 4
mark or Level 3 mark (as appropriate) by 4.
9.5.1.5 The classification of the degree will then be
determined according to the General Regulations
except that if the student takes longer than three
years to complete Level 2, Level 3 and Level 4, the
division of the pass shall be the third division.
9.5.2 In classifying the pass in a BSc Honours Degree in an
upgrading Programme the Board will consider the
weighted aggregate of two marks, the Industrial
Attachment mark and the Level 4 mark or the Level
3 mark (as appropriate) calculated as in 9.5.1.2 and
9.5.1.3 above, respectively and the weighting shall
be as described in 9.5.1.4. If the student has been
exempted from doing the Industrial Attachment the
division of the pass shall be determined using the
Level 4 mark or the Level 3 mark (as appropriate). If
the student takes longer than the minimum period
to complete the upgrading Programme, the division
of the pass shall be the third division.
299
9.5.3
9.6
300
In classifying the pass in a BSc Degree Programme

the Faculty Board of Examiners shall consider the
weighted aggregate of three marks, the Industrial
Attachment mark and the Level 2 marks for each of
the major subjects obtained as described in 9.5.1.2
and 9.5.1.1 respectively. The weighting of the
various marks shall be achieved by multiplying Level
2 marks by 2 and Industrial Attachment marks by 1.
The division shall then be obtained using the
The Degree Certificate shall record that the student has been
awarded the BSc Honours Degree in the appropriate Programme,
with the area of specialization enclosed in parentheses and the
classification accorded to the Degree or that the student has been
awarded the BSc Degree, with the major subjects studied in that
Degree and the classification accorded to that Degree.
10. NOTIFICATION OF RESULTS

A list of results shall be published in accordance with Section 12 of the
11.1 BIOCHEMISTRY (BCH)

11.1.1 LEVEL 1 (BCH 1)
A student shall take courses worth at least 60 course units in each
semester.
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE
DESCRIPTION
HCH102
Inorganic Chemistry
HCH105
General Chemistry
HBC101
Cell Biology and

Microbiology
HBC102
Practical Techniques
in Biochemistry 1a
HBC103
Handling
Experimental Data
10
HBC104
Chemistry of
Carbohydrates and
Lipids
10

Co-requisite courses are preceded by a slash /
DESIGNATION
PREREQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE UNITS
10
10
10
Core
10
SEMESTER 2
PRE REQUISITE/
COREQUISITE
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HCH101
Physical Chemistry
10
HCH103
Organic Chemistry
10
HBC105
Chemistry of Amino Acids and

Proteins
10
HBC106
Chemistry of Nucleic Acids
10
HBC107
Protein Structure and Function
Core
10
HBC108
Enzymes and Bioenergetics:
Core
10
HBC109
Practical Techniques in Biochemistry Core

1b
HBS111
Entrepreneurship
DESIGNATION
Core
HBC102
COURSE
UNITS
10
10
11.1.2
LEVEL 2 (BCH 2)
A student shall take courses worth at least 60 course units in each
semester.
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
CO URSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
Core
PRE REQUISITE/
CO REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HBC109
10
HBC201
Practical Techniques in Biochemistry

2a
HBC202
Metabolism of Amino Acids and

Proteins
HBC203
Metabolism of Carbohydrates and

Lipids
Core
10
HBC204
Molecular Biology and Metabolism of

Nucleic Acids 1
Core
10
HBC205
Nutrition and Integration of

Metabolism
10
HBC206
Plant Biochemistry
10
HBS201
Business Management for Scientists
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HBC380
Core
PRE REQUISITE/ CO REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
120
SEMESTER 1
In addition to the Project (HBC470) and the two core courses, each
student shall take optional courses worth at least 30 course units.
10
PRE REQUISITE/
CO REQUISITE
COURSE
CODE
Each Student shall take the Dissertation Project (HBC470) which is

carried out over the two semesters. Optional courses may not be offered
in some semesters depending on availability of staff and student demand
for specific courses.
SEMESTER 2
DESIGNATION
SEMESTERS 1 and 2
11.1.4 LEVEL 4 (BCH 4)
10
Core
11.1.3 LEVEL 3 (BCH 3)
COURSE
UNITS
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
COURSE
UNITS
HBC 401
Practical Techniques in
Biochemis try 3
Core
10
HBC402
Clinical and Environmental

Toxicology
Optional
10
HBC 403
Biochemistry of Parasites and

Vectors
Optional
10
HBC404
Molecular Virology including

HIV
Optional
10
HBC405
Biochemistry Literature
Surveys.
Core
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HBC207
Immunology
HBC208
Mechanisms of Enzyme Action
HBC108
10
HBC209
Molecular Biology 2
HBC204
10
HBC210
Membrane Biochemistry
10
HBC211
Molecular Endocrinology
10
HBC406
Natural Products
Optional
10
HBC212
Enzyme Biotechnology
10
HBC470
Dissertation Project
Core
-----
HBC213
Practical Techniques in
Biochemistry 2b
10
Core
HBC201
10
301
SEMESTER 2
In addition to the Project (HBC470), each student shall take optional
courses worth at least 50 course units.
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISIT E
SEMESTER 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
COURSE
UNITS
HBZ106
Molecular Biology 1
Core for Option 1
10
Core for Option 1
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HBC407
Plant Polysaccharides
Optional
10
HBZ107
Genetics 1
HBC408
Clinical Biochemistry
Optional
10
HBZ108
Ecology 1
HBC409
Bioinformatics
Optional
10
HBZ109
Biometrics 1
HBC410
Plant Biotechnology
Optional
10
HBZ110
Biosafety
10
HBC411
Animal Biotechnology
Optional
10
HBZ111
Cytology and Histology
10
HBC412
Xenobiochemistry
Optional
01
HBS111
Entrepreneurship
HBC470
Core
20
11.2 BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES (BZH)

For the Degrees:
BSc Honours in Biological Sciences (Microbiology and Genetics}
BSc Honours in Biological Sciences (Botany)
BSc Honours in Biological Sciences (Zoology)
BSc Honours in Biological Sciences (Ecology)
302
11.2.1 LEVEL 1 (BZH 1)

SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
COURSE
UNITS
HBZ101
Origins of Life on Earth
10
HBZ102
Microbiology 1
10
HBZ103
Plant Biodiversity
Core for Op tion 2
10
HBZ104
Animal Biodiversity
Core for Option 3
10
HBZ105
Methods in Biology
10
HCT120
Introduction to the Use of

Computers
10
10
Core
10
Core
10
11.2.2 LEVEL 2 (BZH 2)

Each student, before embarking on Level 2 and higher level studies
must select one of the following areas of specialization which he/she
shall follow in Level 2 and Level 4.
Option 1
Genetics/Microbiology Option 3
Zoology
Option 2
Botany
Option 4
Ecology
In the two semesters combined, each student shall take the core courses,
optional courses worth at least 60 course units from the option chosen as
the main area of specialization and optional courses worth at least 30
course units from options other than the main area of specialization.
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HBZ C 201
Cell Biology
Core
10
HBS201
Business Management for

Scientists
Core
10
HBZ M201
Bacteriology
Core for Option 1
10
HB ZM202
Mycology
Core for Option 1
10
HBZM 203
Virology
Core for Option 1
10
HBZ M204
Immunology
Option 1
10
HBZ B201
Plant Form and Function
Core for Option 2
10
PRE REQUISITE/
CO REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HBZ B202
Plant Taxonomy
Option 2
10
HBZ B203
Plant Physiology
Option 2
10
HBZ Z201
Invertebrate Biology
Option 3
10
HBZ Z202
Tetrapod Biology 1
Option 3
10
HB ZZ03
Animal Physiology
Core for Option 3
10
HBZZ 204
Histology 2
Option 3
HBZE 201
Ecology 2
Core for Option 4
10
HBZ E 202
Plant Ecology
Option 4
10
HBZ E 203
Animal Ecolog y
Option 4
10
HBZ E 205
Ecoregions
Option 4
10
HBZ111
PRE REQUISITE/
CO REQUISITE
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HBZ C 202
Biometrics 2
Core
COURSE
UNITS
HBZ G 201
Molecular Biology 2
Core for Option 1
HBZ106
10
HBZ G 202
Population and Quantitative

Genetics
Option 1
HBZ107
10
HBZ G 203
Cytogenetics
Option 1
HBZ107
10
HBZ B204
Pteridophytes & Gymnosperms
Option 2
10
HBZ B205
Zimbabwean Flora
Option 2
10
HBZ B206
Diversity of Angiosperms
Option 2
10
HBZ P 202
Entomology 1
Core for Option 3
10
HBZ Z205
Anthropod Biology
Option 3
10
HBZ P 201
Parasitology 1
Core for Option 3
HBZ Z204
Ornithology 1
Core for Option 3
10
HBZ E 206
Global Climate Change
Option 4
10
HBZ E 207
Option 4
10
HBZ E 208
Animal Ecotoxicology
Option 4
10
10
HBZ2Z01
SEMESTERS 1 and 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HBZ380
Core
PRE-REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
120
10
SEMESTER 2
DESIGNATION
11.2.3 LEVEL 3 (BZH 3)
10
11.2.4 LEVEL 4 (BZH 4)

Each student shall take the Dissertation Project (HBZ470,) which is
carried out over the two semesters and has a weighting of 40 course
units. Some optional courses may not be offered in some semesters
depending on availability of staff and student demand for specific
courses.
In addition to the Dissertation Project (HBZ470) and the core course,
each student shall take optional courses, chosen from the main area of
specialization,chosen at Level 2, worth at least 60 course units and at
least one other optional course chosen from any option.
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HBZ C 401
Research Methods
Core
HBZ G 401
Applied Genetics
Option 1
HBZ G 402
Biotechnology
Option 1
HBZ G 403
Evolutionary Genetics
Option 1
HBZ107;HBZ2G02
10
HBZ M401
Environmental Microbiology
Option 1
HBZ2M01;HBZ2M02
10
HBZ M402
Industrial Microbiology
Option 1
HBZ2M01;HBZ2M02
10
HBZ M403
Plant Pathology
Option 1
HBZ B401
Evolutionary Botany
Option 2
HBZ103
10
HBZ B402
Pollination and Reproductive

Biology
Option 2
HBZ103
10
10
HBZ107
10
10
10
303
304
HBZ B403
Plant Systematics
Option 2
HBZ103;HBZ2B02
10
HBZ Z408
Mammalogy
Option 3
10
HBZ B404
Plant Ecophysiology
Option 2
HBZ103
10
HBZ E 406
Lentic Syst ems Ecology
Option 4
10
HBZ B405
Economic Botany
Option2
10
HBZ E 407
Aquaculture
Option 4
10
HBZ B406
Plant Conservation Biology
Option 2
HBZ E 408
Rangeland Ecology
Option 4
10
HBZ Z401
Ichthyology
Option 3
HBZ4S02
Option 4
10
HBZ Z402
Ornithology 2
Option 3
HBZ2Z04
10
HBZ470
Core
40
HBZ Z403
Tetrapod Biology 2
Option 3
HBZ2Z02
10
HBZ Z404
Endocgrine Physiology
Option 3
10
HBZ Z405
Ethology
Option 3
10
HBZ P 401
Parasitology & Histopathology
Option 3
HBZ E 401
Wetlands Ecology
Option 4
10
HBZ E 402
Ecosystems Management
Option 4
10
HBZ E 403
Fisheries Biology
Option 4
10
HBZ E 404
Lotic Systems Ecology
Option 4
10
HBZ E 405
Wildlife Ecology
Option 4
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HBZ4S01
Biological Modelling
Option 4
10
HCH102
Core
10
HCH104
Analytical Chemistry 1
Core
10
HCH105
General Chemistry
Compulsory
10
HCH106
Mineral Processing
Compulsory
10
HCH109
Mathematics for Chemists
Compulsory
10
HCT113
Programming 1
Optional
10
HBC104
Chemistry of Carbohydrates and Lipids
Optional
10
HPH 105
Atomic and Nuclear Physics
Optional
10
HSTS102
Applied Statistics 1
Optional
10
HBZ103
10
10
HBZ2Z04;HBZ2P01
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HBZ G 404
Genetic Control Mechanisms
Option 1
10
HBZ G 405
Bioinformatics
Option 1
10
HBZ M404
Developmental Biology
Option 1
10
HBZ B407
Ethnobotany
Option 2
10
HBZ B408
Herbarium & Botanic Gardens

Management
Option 2
HBZ Z406
Neuromuscular Physiology
Option 3
HBZ P402
Entomology 2
Option 3
HBZ Z407
Comparative Animal Physiology
Option 3
HBZ4B03
COURSE
UNITS
10
10
HBZ2P02
11.3.1 LEVEL 1 (CHH 1)
10
SEMESTER 2
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
11.3 CHEMISTRY (CHH)
10
10
Each student shall take the nine compulsory Chemistry courses,

HBS111 and optional courses worth at least 20 course units.
SEMESTER 1
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
SEMESTER 2
SEMESTER 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE-REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HCH101
Core
10
HCH103
Organic Chemistry 1
Co re
10
HCH107
Mineral Technology
Compulsory
10
HCH108
Materials Chemistry
Compulsory
10
HBS111
Entrepreneurship
Core
10
HBC105
Chemistry of Amino Acids

and Proteins
Optional
10
HBC106
Chemistry of Nucleic Acids
Optional
10
HCT109
Logic Design and Switching

Circuits
Optional
10
HSTS112
Optional
10
COURSE
COURSE
CODE
DESCRIPTION
HCH201
Quantum Mechanics
DESIGNATION
PRE-REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
Core
HCH101
10
Core
HCH104
10
and Spectroscopy
HCH204
Spectroscopic
Methods of Analysis 1
HCH208
Spectroscopic
10
Methods of Analysis 2
HCH209
Surface Chemistry
10
HCH210
Solid State Chemistry
10
HCH211
Medicinal and Natural
10
Product Chemistry
11.3.2 LEVEL 2 (CHH 2)

Each student shall take all courses
305
11.3.3 LEVEL 3 (CHH 3)

SEMESTERS 1 AND 2
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
UNITS
COURSE
HCH102
10
HCH480
HCH103
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE
DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HCH202
Main Group and

Transition Metal
Chemistry
Core
HCH203
Organic Chemistry 2
Core
HCH205
Production
Chemistry
10
HCH206
Polymer and
Industrial Organic
Chemistry
10
HCH207
Computer Modelling
and Computational
Chemistry
10
HBS201
Bu siness
Management for
Scientists
Core
PRE-REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
10
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
CODE
Core
PRE-REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
120
11.3.4
11.4
LEVEL 4 (CHH 4)
Each student shall carry out the Dissertation Project(HGC470) over

both semesters. All courses are compulsory.
SEMESTER 1
306
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HCH401
Chemical Kinetics
Core
10
HCH404
Electrochemical and
Chromatographic Methods
Core
10
HCH405
Organometallic and Bioinorganic

Chemistry
10
HCH406
Inorganic Synthesis and

Heterocyclic Inorganic Systems
10
HCH407
10
HCH470
Core
COURSE
UNITS
DESIGNATION
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HCT113
Programming 1
Practical
HCT112
Fundamental Mathematics
HCT120
Introduction to the Use of Computers
Practical
10
HSTS101
Probability Theory 1
Optional
10
HMTH101
Calculus 1
10
HMTH102
Linear Mathematics 1
10
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNI TS
10
10
SEMESTER 2
Each student shall take all five non-optional courses and at least
one optional course
20
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HCT108
Core /Practical
HCT113
HCT109
Practical
COURSE
UNITS
Logic Design and Switching

Circuits
HCT 114
Internet Programming
Practical
HCT113
10
Optional
HSTS101
10
HMTH101
10
SEMESTER 2
Each student shall continue with the Dissertation Project and shall
take all other courses listed below.
ION
COMPUTER SCIENCE (CTH)

11.4.1 LEVEL 1(CTH 1)
COURSE
UNITS
10
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPT
HCH402
Coordination Chemistry
Core
10
HSTS111
Statistical Inference 1
HCH403
Organic Synthesis and

Spectroscopy
Core
10
HMTH111
Calculus 2
HCT 115
Electronics
Optional/Practical
10
HCH408
Theoretical Chemistry
10
HBS 111
Entrepreneurship
Core
10
HCH409
Bioorganic Chemistry
10
HCH410
Fourier Transform and

Hyphenated Techniques
10
11.4.2 LEVEL 2 (CTH 2)
11.4.3 LEVEL 3 (CTH3)
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HCT207
Introduction to Data Communication
Practical
HCT216
Programming 2
Practical
HCT211
Database Concepts
Practical
HCT215
Microprocessors, Microcontrollers
and Interfacing
Practical
HBS201
Core
10
HCT201
Operating Systems
Core
10
HMTH202
Optional
HCT113
COURSE
UNITS
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
10
10
HCT380
Core
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
120
10
HCT109
HMTH102
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HCT214
Discrete Mathematics
HCT210
HCT204
Artificial Intelligence
HCT206
Design of Information System
Optional/Practical
10
HCT226
Practical
10
HCT222
Computer Organization &

Architecture
HCT233
Operations Research
Optional
10
HCT 260
Project
Core
10
HCT112
Core
COURSE
UNITS
10
10
10
HCT215
SEMESTER 1
Each student shall take all five non-optional courses and at least
one optional course
10
Each student shall take all five non-optional courses and at least one
optional course
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
11.4.4 LEVEL 4 (CTH 4)
10
SEMESTER 2
DESIGNATION
SEMESTERS 1 & 2
Industrial Attachment shall be for at least 10 months
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HCT 424
HCT 401
Computer Graphics
Practical
HCT 403
Application of Database Systems
Optional/Practical
HCT 402
Introduction to Parallel Processing
Optional
10
HCT 411
Knowledge Based Systems
Optional
10
HCT 414
Computer Networks
Practical
HCT 408
Numerical Analysis
HCT 426
Research M ethods
HCT108
Core
COURSE
UNITS
10
10
HCT211
10
HCT207
10
HCT112
10
10
307
SEMESTER 2
SEMESTER 2
Each student shall take all five non-optional courses and at least one
optional course. Each student shall start HCT470 in Semester 1.
308
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HGG1005
Earth System Dynamics 2
Core
HGG1004
HGG1006
Core
10
HGG 1007
Ecosystems and Biomes
Core
10
10
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HCT 4 24
HCT 415
VLSI Design
Optional
10
HGG1009
Spatial Statistics 2
Core
HCT 406
Formal Languages
Optional
10
HGG1010
Spatial Analysis
Core
10
HCT 428
Visual Programming
10
HBS111
Entrepreneurial Skills
Core
10
HCT 416
Human Computer Interaction
10
HCT 413
Advanced Topics in Computer

Science
Optional
10
HCT 412
Computer Aided Design and

Manufacturing
Optional
10
HCT 420
Computer Security
HCT 470
Dissertation
HCT 214
HCT407
Core
COURSE
UNITS
COURSE DESCRIPTION
COURSE
CODE
11.5
DESIGNATION
COURSE
CODE
10
10
20
GEOGRAPHY HONOURS IN ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE

(HGGENV)
11.5.1
LEVEL 1 (HGGENV 1)
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUIS ITE/

CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HGG1000
Geographic Thought and Practice
Core
10
HGG1001
Geographical Data and Analysis
Core
10
HGG1002
Geography of the Human

Environment
Core
10
HGG1003
Human Society and the

Environment
Core
10
HGG1004
Earth Sy stem Dynamics 1
Core
10
HGG1008
Core
10
HGG1008
10
11.5.2 LEVEL 2 (HGENVG 2)

SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE REQUISITE/ CO REQ UISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HGGENV2000
Geographic Information Science
Core
10
HGGENV2001
Remote Sensing
Core
10
HGGENV2002
Environmental Systems Analysis I
Core
10
HGGENV2004
Environmental Modelling 1
Core
10
HGGENV2006
Environmental Monitoring
Core
10
HGGENV2007
Biodiversity Conservation
Core
10
HBS201

Scientists
Core
10
SEMESTER 2
Not all optional courses will be on offer every year. Each student shall
select a maximum of two optional courses.
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRPTIONI
DESIGNATION
PRE REQUISITE/ COREQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HGGENV2003
Environmental Systems Analysis 2
Core
HGGENV2002
10
HGGENV2005
Environmental Modelling 2
Core
HGGENV2004
10
HGGENV2008
Natural Hazards and Society
Core
10
HGGENV2010
Ecological Restoration
Optional
10
HGGENV2011
Wildlife Management and Park

Design
Optional
10
HGGENV2012
Spatial Epidemiology
Optional
10
HGGENV2013
Environmental Pollution and Waste

Management
Optional
10
11.5.3 LEVEL 3 (HGGENV 3)

SEMESTERS 1 and 2
COURSE
CODE
COUR SE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HGGENV3000
Core
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HGGENV4003
Environmental Impact
Assessment 1
Core
HGGENV4004
Assessment Project
Core
HGGEN V4005
Global Environmental
Change 1
Core
10
HGGENV 4003
10
10
SEMESTER 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HGGENV4006
Global Environmental Change 2
Core
HGGENV 4005
HGGENV4007
Water Resources Modelling and

Management
Core
10
HGGENV4008
Core
20
HGGENV4009
Environmental Law and Policy
Optional
10
HGGENV4010
Rangeland Management
Optional
10
HGGENV4011
Resource Management
Optional
10
11.6
120
COURSE
UNI TS
10
GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SCIENCE AND EARTH

OBSERVATIONS (HGGIS)
11.6.1 LEVEL 1 (HGGIS 1)
11.5.4 LEVEL 4 (HGGENV 4)

SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HGGENV4000
Research Methods
Core
10
HGGENV4001
Natural Resources
Management
Core
10
Forest Carbon Mapping and

Modelling
Core
HGGENV4002
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HGG1000
Geograp hic Thought and

Practice
Core
10
HGG1001
Core
10
HGG1002

Environment
Core
10
HGG1003

Environment
Core
10
HGG1004
Core
10
HGG1008
Spatial Stati stics 1
Core
10
10
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
309
SEMESTER 2
Spatial Analysis with GIS 2
Core
HGGIS2006
10
HGGIS2010
GIScience for Environmental

Modelling
Optional
10
HGGIS2011
GIS and Remote Sensing of Natural

Hazards
Optional
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HGG1005
Core
HGG1004
10
HGG1006
Core
10
HGGIS2012
Computer Programming for GIS
Optional
10
HGG1007
Core
10
HGGIS2013
GIScience for Agricultural

Applications
Optional
10
HGG1009
Sp atial Statistics 2
Core
HGG1010
Spatial Analysis
Core
10
HBS111
Core
10
HGG1008
10

SEMESTERS 1 and 2

SEMESTER 1
310
HGGIS2007
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HGGIS2000
Geographic Information Science 1
Core
10
HGGIS2001
Remote Sensing
Core
10
HGGIS2002
Core
10
HGGIS2004
Global Positioning Systems and

Applications
Core
10
HGGIS2006
Spatial Analysis with GIS 1
Core
10
HGGIS2008
Natural hazard s and Society
Core
10
HBS201

Scientists
Core
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HGGIS3000
Core
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
120
COURSE
UNITS
SEMESTER 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUI SITE/

CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HGGIS2003
Core
HGGIS2002
10
HGGIS2005
Global Positioning Systems and

Applications 2
Core
HGGIS2004
10

SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HGGIS4000
Research Methods
Core
10
HGGIS4001
GIS Implementation in
Organizations
Core
10
HGGIS4002
Remote Sensing and Image

Processing 1
Core
10
HGGIS4004
Geographical Information Science 2
Core
HGGIS4005
Sensors and Earth Observing

Systems
Core
10
HGGIS4006
Geodatabase Design and

Management 1
Core
10
HGGIS2000
COURSE
UNITS
10
SEMESTER 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HGG1005
Core
HGG1004
HGG1006
Core
10
HGG1007
Core
10
HGG1009
Core
HGG1010
Spatial Analysis
Core
10
HBS111
Core
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HGGIS4003
Remote Sensing and Image

Processing 2
Core
HGGIS4002
10
HGGIS4007
Geodatabase Design and

Management 2
Core
HGGIS4006
10
HGGIS4008
Core
20
HGG IS 4009
GIScience for Infrastructure and

Asset Manageme nt
Optional
10
HGG IS 4010
GIScience and Remote Sensing

for Natural Resources Management
Optional
10
HGG IS 4011
Algorithms in GIS Modelling
Optional
10
HGG IS 4012
Hyperspectral Remote Sensing
Optional
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HGG IS 4013
Advanced Pattern Recognition in

Rem ote Sensing
Optional
10
HGGB2000
Core
10
HGGB2001
Remote Sensing
Core
10
GEOGRAPHICAL BIOGEOSCIENCES (HGGB)
HGGB2 002
Core
10
11.7.1 LEVEL 1 (HGGB 1)
HGGB2004
Fundamentals of Weather, Climate

and Ecosystems
Core
10
COURSE
UNITS
HGGB2005
Introduction to Water and

Landscapes
Core
10
11.7
COURSE
UNITS
SEMESTER 2
HGG1008
10
10
11.7.2 LEVEL 2(HGGB 2)

SEMESTER 1
PRE -REQUISITE/ CO REQUISITE
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HGG1000
Core
10
HGGB2006
Biogeochemical Cycles 1
Core
10
HGG1001
Geographical Data a nd Analysis
Core
10
HBS201
Business Management for Scientist s
Core
10
HGG1002

Environment
Core
10
HGG1003
Human Society and the Environment
Core
10
HGG1004
Core
10
HGG1008
Core
10
311
SEMESTER 2
SEMESTER 2
Not all optional courses will be on offer every year. A student shall
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HGGB2003
Core
HGGB2002
HGGB2007
Biogeochemical Cycles 2
Core
HGGB2006
HGGB2008
Core
10
HGGB2010
Landscape Ecology
Optional
10
HGGB2011
Spatial Ecology and Wildlife

Management
Optional
10
HGGB2012
Climate Science and Modelling
Optional
10
HGGB2013
Hydrology and Water Resources

Management
Optional
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
10
HGGB2002
Biogeography and Ecosystems 2
Core
HGGB2001
10
10
HGGB2005
Fluvial and Watershed

Geomorphology
Core
HGGB2005
10
HGGB2007
Applied Hydrology
Core
10
HGGB2009
Core
20
HGGB2010
Climatology and Global Climate

Change
Optional
10
HGGB2011
Global Ecosystem Dynamics and

Monitoring
Optional
10
HGGB2012
Environmental Hydrology
Optional
10
11.7.3 LEVEL 3 (HGGB 3)
312
11.8
SEMESTERS 1 and 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HGGB3000
C ore
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
11.8.1 LEVEL 1 (HGGH 1)

SEMESTER 1
120
11.7.4 LEVEL 4 (HGGB 4)

SEMESTER 1
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
GEOGRAPAPHY OF THE HUMAN ENVIRONMENT (HGGH)
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
COURSE
UNITS
HGGB2000
Research Methods
Core
10
HGGB2001
Biogeography and Ecosystems 1
Core
10
HGGB2003
Climate and Environmental Ch ange
Core
10
HGGB2004
Geomorphology & Soil Geography
Core
10
HGGB2006
Hydrology
Core
10
HGGB2008
Ecosystem Modelling
Core
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HGG1000
Core
10
HGG1001
Core
10
HGG1002

En vironment
Core
10
HGG1003

Environment
Core
10
HGG1004
Core
10
HGG1008
Core
10
SEMESTER 2
SEMESTER 2
Not all optional courses will be on offer every year. A student shall
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HG G1005
Core
HGG1004
HGG1006
Core
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HGG1007
Core
10
HGGH2007
Core
10
HGG1009
Core
10
HGGH2008
Disaster Risk Management
Core
10
HGG1010
Spatial Analysis
Core
10
HGGH2009
Core
10
HBS111
Core
10
HGGH2010
Climate Change Mitigation and

Adaptation
Optional
10
HGGH2011
Optional
10
HGGH2012
Human Dimensions of Climate

Change
Optional
10
HGGH2013
Spatial Modelling of Social-Ecological

Systems
Optional
10
HGGH2014
Geography of World Commerce
Optional
10
HGG1008
COURSE
UNITS
11.8.2 LEVEL 2 (HGGH 2)

SEMESTER 1
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
select a maximum of two optional courses
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
COURSE
UNITS
HGGH2000
Core
10
HGGH2001
Remote Sensing
Core
10
HGGH2002
Human Ecology
Core
10
HGGH2003
Fundamentals of Social and

Economic Geography
Core
10
HGGH2004
Economic Geography
Core
10
HGGH2005
Fundamentals of Population
Geography
Core
10
HGGH2006
Energy, Society and the

Environment
Core
10
HBS201

Scientists
Core
10
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
11.8.3 LEVEL 3 (HGGH 3)

SEMESTERS 1 and 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HGGH3000
Core
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
120
313
11.8.4 LEVEL 4 (HGGH 4)
11.9
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HGGH4000
Research Methods
Core
10
HGGH4001
Population and
Environmental Sustainability
Core
10
HGGH4002
Urban Landscapes and

Infrastructure
Core
10
HGGH4003
Advanced Social and

Economic Geography
Core
HGGH4004
Migration Patterns and

Drivers
HGGH4005
Spatial Population Analysis 1
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HGL101
Introduction to Mineralogy
Core
10
HGL102
Introduction to Petrology
Core
10
HG L103
Introduction to Geochemistry
10
HGL104
Introduction to Structural Geology

and Tectonics
Core
10
HGL105
Applied Geology 1
10
Core
10
HGL106
Economic Geology 1
10
SEMESTER 2
314
GEOLOGY(GLH)
11.9.1 LEVEL 1 (HGL 1)
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HGL111
GIS and Remote Sensing
HGL112
Sedimentology
10
HGL109
Introduction to Maps and Fieldwork
HGL119
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HGGH4006
Spatial Population Analysis 2
Core
HGGH4007
Environmental and Social Impact

Assessment (ESIA)
Core
10
HGGH4008
Core
20
HGGH4009
Geography of Tourism and

Recreation
Optional
10
HGGH4010
Geographies of Crime
Optional
10
HGGH4011
Gender and the Environment
Optional
10
HGGH4012
Human Vulnerability Analysis and

Disaster Response
Optional
10
HGGH4006
COURSE
UNITS
COURSE
UNITS
10
Core
10
SEMESTER 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE
CODE
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUI SITE/

CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
10
HGL102
10
Core
HGL101, HGL102
10
Crystallography and Silicate Structures
Core
HGL101,HGL102
10
HGL120
Advanced Mineralogy
Core
HGL101,HGL102
10
HBS111
Entrepreneurship
Core
10
11.9.4
11.9.2 LEVEL 2 (GLH2)
Level 4(GLH4)
SEMESTER 1
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HGL401
Advanced Igneous and Metamorphic

Petrology
10
HGL402
Geochemistry and Geochronology
10
10
HGL403
Advanced Structural Geology
10
HGL109
10
HGL404
10
Geotectonics (Plate tectonics)
HGL104
10
Ba sin Analysis and Hydrocarbon

Geology
HGL203
Geochemistry
HGL103
10
HGL405
Hydrogeology, Environmental Geology

and Engineering Geology
10
HGL220
Research Methods
Optional
10
HGL406
Ore Deposit Studies,
10
HBS201
Core
10
HGL407
Geostatistics and Ore Petrography
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HGL201
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
Igneous Petrology
HGL101
10
HGL202
Metamorphic Petrology &

Thermodynamics
HGL101
10
HGL206
Economic Geology 2
HGL106
HGL204
Rock Deformation and Structures
HGL205
SEMESTER 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HGL215
Applied Geology 2
HGL217
Mining Geology Applications
HGL218
Exploration Geology
HGL223
Geolog ical Evolution of Southern Africa
HGL281
Fieldwork 1
11.9.3
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
SEMESTER 2
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HG L105
Core
COURSE
UNITS
10
HGL109
DESIGNATION
HGL380
Core
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
PRE -REQUISITE/ CO REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
Mini-Project
HGL470
Dissertation Project.
Core
30
10
HGL453
Fieldwork
Core
10
10
SEMESTER 1 & SEMESTER 2

COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HGL423
Level 3 (GLH3)
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
10
10
Core
COURSE
CODE
COURSE
UNITS
120
10
315
11.10
MATHEMATICS (MTH)
11.10.2.
11.10.1.
In each semester a student shall take all the non-optional courses

andtwo optional courses, the optional courses shall be chosen from
one of the following Options: the Pure Mathematics Options (Option
1), the Applied Mathematics Options (Option 2) OR the Statistics
Options.(Option 3)
LEVEL 1 (MTH1)
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HMTH101
Calculus 1
10
HMTH102
10
HSTS101
HCT113
Programming 1
10
HMTH103
Introduction to Number Theory
10
HCT120
Introduction to Use of Computers
10
/HMTH101,
HMTH102
COURSE
UNITS
SEMESTER 1
10
SEMESTER 2
316
Each student shall take the non-optional courses and at least one
optional course.
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HMTH111
Calculus 2
HMTH112
Mathematical Discourse and

Structures
HMTH113
Ordinary Differential Equations
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HMTH101
COURSE
UNITS
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HMTH201
Analysis 1
Core
HMTH101
10
HMTH202
Core
HMTH102
10
HMTH212
Numerical Methods
HMTH101
10
HBS201

Scientists
Core
HMTH204
Vector Calculus
Option 2
HMTH111
10
HMTH224
Introduction to Mathematical
Modelling
Option 2
HMTH113
10
HMTH007
Number Theory
Option 1
HMTH 112
10
HMTH005
Algebra 1
Option 1
HMTH 112
10
HSTS201
Theory of Estimation and

Testing of Hypotheses
Option 3
HSTS111
10
HSTS213
Option 3
HSTS 101
10
10
10
10
HMTH101,HMTH102
HMTH114
Mathematical Packages
Practical
10
HBS111
Entrepreneurship
Core
10
HSTS111
Statistical Inference
Optional
HCT108
Optional
10
HMTH115
Decision Theory
Optional
10
HSTS 101, HMTH101
LEVEL 2 (MTH 2)
10
COURSE
UNITS
10
SEMESTER 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HMTH221
Optimisation
HMTH 231
Analysis 2
HMTH236
11.10.4.
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
C O-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HMTH201
10
Complex Variables
HMTH101
10
HMTH232
Fourier Series and Partial

HMTH101
10
HMTH214
Mechanics
Option 2
HMTH204
10
HMTH
Introduction to Financial
Mathematics
Option 2
HMTH201
10
HMTH215
Graph Theory
Option 1
HMTH015
Algebra 2
Option 1
HSTS212
Design and Analysis of

Experimental Data
Option 3
HSTS205
Demography
Option 3
10
HSTS203
Time Series Analysis
Option 3
10
HSTS215
Multivariate Methods
Option 3
10
11.10.3.
A student shall take the core courses HMTH 470 and HMTH 321 Real
Analysis 3 and four other courses. The Dissertation Project is worth
20 course units and is taken over both semesters.
10
Core
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HMTH 321
Real Analysis 3
Core
HMTH 231
10
HMTH 322
Complex Analysis 3
Optional
HMTH231, HMTH236
10
HMTH 329
Nonlinear Ordinary
Optional
HMTH212
10
HMTH334
Numerical Solutions of
PDEs
Optional
HMTH 212
10
HMTH328
Partial Differential Equations 1 Optional
HMTH 232
10
HMTH038
Group Theory 1
Optional
HMTH239
Fluid Mechanics 1
Optional
HMTH 204,HMTH
214
10
HMTH035
Commutative Algebra 1
Optional
HMTH 015
10
HMTH
Stochastic Control Theory
Optional
HMTH470
Core
10
HMTH005
10
10
LEVEL 3 (HMTH 3)
SEMESTERS 1 and 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HMTH380
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
LEVEL 4 (MTH 4)
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
UNITS
10
10
-
SEMESTER 2
A student shall take the core courses HMTH 470 and Real Analysis 4
and four other courses. The dissertation is worth 20 course units and
is taken over both semesters.
COURSE
UNITS
120
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HMTH
Real Analysis 4
Core
HMTH231,HMTH321
10
HMTH
Optional
HMTH035
10
HMTH
Complex Analysis 4
Optional
HMTH322
10
317
HMTH
Dynamical Systems and

Chaos
Optional
10
HMTH
Finite Element Methods
Optional
HMTH334
10
HMTH
Partial Differential Equations 2
Optional
HMTH328
10
HMTH
Group Theory 2
Optional
HMTH038
10
HMTH
Fluid Mechanics 2
Optional
HMTH239
10
HMTH470
Dissertation
Core
20
1.
The list below is of Level 4 courses which may or may not be on offer in a
particular year. The courses on offer and the semester in which they will
be taught will be listed at the time of registration for the first semester.
318
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE- REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HMTH323
Real Analysis 5
Optional
HMTH321
HMTH324
Complex Analysis 5
Optional
HMTH 326
Applied Group Theory
Optional
HMTH 327
Fluid Mechanics
Optional
HMTH 330
Perturbation Theory
Optional
HMTH 331
Calculus of Variations
Optional
HMTH 332
Control Theory
Optional
HMTH234
10
HMTH 333
Further Numerical Methods with

Optimisation
Optional
HMTH232,
HMTH231
10
HMTH 036
Topology
Optional
HMTH 037
Set Theory
Optional
HMTH015
10
HMTH 339
Field Extensions and Galois Theory
Optional
HMTH015
10
HMTH
Logic
Optional
HMTH 037
10
HMTH
Population Dynamics
Optional
HMTH224
10
HMTH
Advanced Graph Theory 1
Optional
10
HMTH
Advanced Graph Theory 2
Optional
10
2.
10
10
HMTH322
10
11.11
10
HMTH015
A candidate registered for BSc Honours Degree in Mathematics may

take, as part of Level 4 of his/her BSc Honours in Mathematics Level
4, courses worth at most forty course units from among the following
Statistics courses: HSTS403 Advanced Probability Theory 1,
HSTS4412 Advanced Probability Theory 2, HSTS423 Econometrics,
HSTS425 Operations Research, HSTS416 Stochastic Processes 1,
HSTS417 Stochastic Processes, HSTS408 Risk Theory 1, HSTS418
Risk Theory 2
Notes:
Each student shall submit the dissertation for HMTH 470, prepared
using TEX or LATEX, of between 50 and 60 pages by not later than
the end of teaching in the second semester of his/her final year. The
student will be required to present at least three seminars on his/her
project during the year and may be required to attend an oral
examination.
A student will be expected to spend most of the vacation between
the first and second semester working on the Dissertation Project
which forms part of HMTH 470. This work will normally require
him/her to be in attendance in the Department.
10
A student shall register for courses worth at least 60 course units in

Semester 1 and for courses worth at least 60 course units in Semester
2.
SEMESTER 1
10
10
PHYSICS (PHH)
11.11.1 LEVEL 1 (PHH 1)
COURSE
CODE
COURSE
DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE UNITS
HPH101
Mechanics 1
10
HPH102
Electricity and
Magnetism
10
HPH103
Waves and Optics 1
10
HPH110
Physics
Laboratory 1
Core
10
HMTH101
Calculus 1
10
HMTH102
Linear
Mathematics 1
10
SEMESTER 2
SEMESTER 2
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HPH206
Quantum Mechanics 1
HPH207
Electronics 2
HPH209
Solid State Physics 1
10
HPH211
Physics Laboratory 4
HPH110
10
HMTH113
HMTH101
10
Ordinary Differential
Equations
HCT215
Microcontrollers,
Microprocessors and
Interfacing
Optional
10
HPH 212
Medical Physics 1
Optional
10
HPH213
Meteorology 1
Optional
10
HPH214
Nanoparticle Physics 1
Optional
10
HPH215
Telecommunication
Systems 1
Optional
10
HPH216
Geophysics 1
Optional
10
HPH217
Renewable Energy
Sources1
Optional
10
HPH218
Environmental Physics 1
Optional
10
HPH219
Topics in Astrophysics 1
Optional
10
COURSE
DESCRIPTION
HPH104
Fluid Mechanics
and Thermal
Physics
10
HPH105
Atomics and
Nuclear Physics 1
10
HPH106
Electronics 1
HPH111
HMTH111
DESIGNATION
COURSE
CODE
COURSE
CODE
Core
Calculus 2
PRE- REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HCT113
Programming 1
Optional
10
HBS111
Entrepreneurship
Core
10
11.11.2 LEVEL 2 (PHH 2)

A student shall register for course worth at least 60 course units in
Semester 1 and for courses worth at least 60 course units in Semester
2. Of those courses, courses worth not more than 20 course units
shall be optional courses.
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HPH201
Mechanics 2
HPH101
10
HPH202
Electromagnetism
HPH102
10
HPH203
Waves and Optics 2
HPH103
10
HPH205
Atomic and Nuclear

Physics 2
HPH105
10
HPH210
HPH111
10
HMTH202
HMTH102
10
HBS201
Business Management
for Scientists
Core
Core
PREREQUISITE/ COREQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
10
DESIGNATION
PRE REQUISITE/ COREQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
10
HPH106
10
10
Core
HPH210
10
HMTH102
10
319
11.11.3 LEVEL 3 (PHH 3)
SEMESTER 2
A student shall register for the industrial attachment, which should

be carried out for a period of not less than 10 months at an approved
institution of training.
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HPH380
Core
PRE- REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
120
11.11.4 LEVEL 4 (PHH 4)

A student shall register for the Project (HPH470), which is carried out
in both semesters and for additional courses worth at least 50 course
units in Semester1 and for additional courses worth at least 50
course units in Semester2. A student may not register for more than
20 course units worth of optional courses
320
COURSE CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HPH401
Solid State Physics 2
HPH209
10
HPH402
Electromagnetic Theory
HPH202
10
HPH403
Quantum Mechanics 2
HPH206
10
HPH404
Research Methods
HPH405
Special Theory of Relativity
HPH47 0
Core
COURSE CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HPH406
Classical Dynamics
HPH407
Statistical Physics
10
HPH408
Electronic Instrumentation
10
HPH409
Element ary Particle Physics
10
HPH470
Core
HPH410
Medical Physics 2
Optional
HPH211
10
HPH411
Meteorology 2
Optional
HPH212
10
HPH412
Nanoparticle Physics 2
Optional
HPH213
10
HPH413
Telecommunication Systems 2
Optional
HPH214
10
HPH414
Geophysics 2
Optional
HPH215
10
HPH415
Renewable Energy 2
Optional
HPH216
10
HPH416
Environmental Physics 2
Optional
HPH217
10
HPH417
Topics in Astrophysics 2
Optional
HPH218
10
11.12
20
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HPH201
10
20
STATISTICS (STSH)
11.12.1
LEVEL 1 (STSH 1)
SEMESTER 1
10
10
Core
DESIGNATION
Each student shall choose at least one optional course

COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HSTS101
Core
10
HSTS102
Core
10
HSTS104
Statistical Computing 1
Core
10
HSTS114
Official, Social and Economic

Statistics
Optional
10
HMTH101
Calculus 1
Core
10
HMTH102
Core
10
HCT113
Programming 1
Optional
10
SEMESTER 2
Each student shall choose at least two optional course
COURSE CODE
COURSE
DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HSTS212
Design and Analysis

of Experiments
Core
10
10
HSTS203
Time Series Analysis
Core
10
10
HSTS214
Survey Techniques
and Sampling Theory
Optional
10
10
HSTS215
Multivariate Methods
Core
HSTS216
Industrial Quality
Control
Optional
HSTS204
Statistical Computing 2 Core
HSTS205
Demography
Optional
HMTH231
Analysis 2
Optional
HMTH232
Fourier Series and

Partial Differential
Equations
COURS E CODE
COURSE
DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HSTS111
Statistical Inference 1
Core
10
HSTS112
Core
HMTH111
Calculus 2
Core
HMTH112
Mathematical
Discourse and
Structures
Ordinary Differential
Equations
Optional
HCT108
Data Structures and

Algorithms
Optional
10
HBC111
Entrepreneurship
Core
10
HMTH113
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
SEMESTER 2
Each student shall choose at least 2 optional courses.
HMTH101
Optional
HMTH102
COURSE
UNITS
10
11.12.2 LEVEL 2 (STSH 2)

SEMESTER 1
Each student shall choose at least 1 optional course.
PRE - REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
HSTS211
COURSE
UNITS
10
10
HSTS104
10
10
HMTH201
10
HMTH101
10
11.12.3 LEVEL 3 (STSH 3)

SEMESTER 1 and 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE - REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HSTS201
Theory of Estimation and Testing of

Hypotheses
Core
HSTS111
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HSTS213
Core
HSTS101
10
HSTS380
Core
HSTS211
Regression Analysis and ANOVA
Core
HSTS112
10
HMTH201
Analysis 1
Optional
HMTH101
10
HMTH202
Core
HMTH102
10
HMTH212
Numerical Methods
Optional
HMTH101
10
HBS201
Core
10
PRE - REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
120
321
11.12.4 LEVEL 4 (STSH 4)

SEMESTER 1
Each student shall take the Dissertation Project (HSTS470), which is
done in both semesters and is worth 20 course units, and shall
choose optional courses worth at least 30 course units.
322
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HSTS403
DESIGNATION
SEMESTER 2
Each student shall take the Dissertation Project (HSTS470), which is
done in both semesters and is worth 20 course units, and shall
choose optional courses worth at least 40 course units.
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE - REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HSTS412
Advanced Probability Theory 2
Optional
HSTS403
10
HSTS417
Stochastic Processes 2
Optional
HSTS417
10
HSTS418
Risk Theory 2
Optional
HSTS408
10
HSTS426
Survival Models
Optional
HSTS406
10
HSTS411
General Linear Models 2
Core
HSTS401
10
HSTS414
Reliability Theory
Optional
HSTS213
10
HSTS211
10
PRE - REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
Advanced Probability Theory 1
HMTH201,HMTH2
31
10
HSTS416
Stochastic Processes 1
HSTS213
10
HSTS402
Non-Parametric Statistics
Core
HSTS408
Risk Theory 1
Optional
HSTS213
10
HSTS401
General Linear Models 1
Core
HSTS211
10
HSTS415
Dynamic Regression
Optional
HSTS425
Operations Research
Optional
10
HSTS413
Quality Management
Optional
10
HSTS423
Econometrics
Optional
10
HSTS470
Core
20
HSTS406
Bioassays and Modelling
Optional
10
HSTS405
Statistical Ecology
Optional
10
HSTS407
Actuarial Topics
Optional
10
HMTH421
Real Analysis 3
Optional
HMTH231
10
HMTH428
Partial Differential Equations 1
Optional
HMTH232
10
HSTS470
Core
10
HSTS211
NOTE: Not all courses will be available in each academic year.

11.13
FOOD SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY (BScFS)

11.13.1 LEVEL 1 (BScFS 1)
SEMESTER 1
DESIGNATION
PRE - REQUISITE/
CO- REQUISITE
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
COURSE
UNITS
HSTS104
10
HSTS102
10
HCH102
Inorganic Chemistry
10
HCH105
General Chemistry
10
HCH104
10
HFS103
Biology for Food and Nutrition Science
10
SEMESTER 2
SEMESTER 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HFN111
Institutional/ Food Service

Management
10
HFS112
Research Methods
10
HFS117
Mathematics for Food and Nutrition

Sciences
10
HFS102
Introduction to Food Science and

Nutrition
10
HCH101
Physical Chemistry
10
HCH103
Organic Chemistry
10
HBS111
Entrepreneurship
Core
COURSE
UNITS
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HFS210
Food Microbiology
HFS211
Food Toxicology
10
HSTS212
Design and Analysis of Experiments
10
HSTS112
HSTS102
10
HFN216
Principles of Nutrition: Macronutrients
HBC203, HBC202
10
HFN217
Principles of Nutrition: Micronutrients
HFN216,H BC202
and HBC203
10
10
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
HFS103
COURSE
UNITS
10

SEMESTER 1 AND 2

SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE - REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HBS201
Core
HBC203
Metabolism of Carbohydrates and Lipids
HCH103
10
HBC202
Metabolism of Amino Acids and Proteins
HCH103
10
HFS205
Food Analysis
HFS208
Food Engineering I
HFS206
HFS207
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPT
HFS380
ION
DESIGNATION
PRE - REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
Core
COURSE
UNITS
120
10
SEMESTER 1
10
COURSE
CODE
COURSE
DESCRIPTION
10
HFS404
Meat Technology
10
Sensory Evaluation of Food
10
HFS409
Cereal Technology
10
Quality Management Systems
10
HFS 401
Sanitation and
Legislation
10
HFS405
Food Engineering 2
HFS402
Dairy Technology
HFS470
HFS117
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/ COREQUISITE
HFS208
COURSE
UNITS
10
10
Core
323
SEMESTER 2
SEMESTER 2
COURSE
UNITS
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
Fats & Oils Technology

Product Development
and Marketing
Food Biotechnology
10
10
HFN111
Institutional/ Food Service

Management
10
10
HFS112
Research Methods
10
10
HFS117
Mathematics for Food and Nutrition

Sciences
10
HFS414
Fruit &
Vegetable Technology
Food Chemistry
HFS470
HFS102
Introduction to Food Science and

Nutrition
10
HCH101
Physical Chemistry
10
HCH103
Organic Chemistry
10
HBS111
Entrepreneurship
COURSE
CODE
COURSE
DESCRIPTION
HFS410
HFS411
HFS412
HFS413
11.14
DESIGNATION
PRE- REQUISITE/ COREQUISITE
10
20
Core
NUTRITION SCIENCE(HNS}
11.14.1 LEVEL 1(HNS 1)

SEMESTER 1
324
11.14.2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HSTS104
10
HSTS102
10
HCH102
Inorganic Chemistry
10
HCH105
General Chemistry
10
HCH104
10
HFS103
Biology for Food and Nutrition

Science
10
DESIGNATION
PRE- REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
Core
COURSE
UNITS
10
LEVEL 2(HNS2)
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE - REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
HBS201

Scientists
Core
HBC203
Metabolism of Carbohydrates and

Lipids
HCH103
10
HBC202
Metabolism of Amino Acids and

Proteins
HCH103
10
HFS205
Food Analysis
10
HFN218
Physiology
10
HFN201
Nutrition in Life Cycle Deficiency

and Disease
10
HFN202
Behavioral Science and Counseling
10
10
SEMESTER 2
SEMESTER 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
PRE - REQUISITE/
CO-REQU ISITE
HFS210
Food Microbiology
HFS211
Food Toxicology
HFN201
Techniques in Nutritional
Biochemistry and Metabolism
HSTS112
HFN218
Physiology
HFS103
HFN216
Principles of Nutrition:
Macronutrients
HBC203, HBC202
HFN217
Principles of Nutrition:
Micronutrients
HFN216, HBC202
and HBC203
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
HFN402
Public Health Nutrition
10
HFN406
Advanced Topics in Nutrition
10
HFN407
HFS414
Food, Nutrition and

Agricultural Systems
Nutrition Education and
Communication
Food Chemistry
HFN470
COURSE
UNITS
HFS103
HBC202, HBC203
HFN408
10
10
11.15
10
DESIGNATION
PRE - REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
10
HFN216, HFN217,
HBC202, HBC203
10
10
10
10
Core
20
METEOROLOGY (HMET)
11.15.1 Level 1
Semester 1
11.14.3 LEVEL 3 (HFN 3)
SEMESTER 1 and 2
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HFN381
Core
PRE -REQUISITE/
CO -REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
120
11.14.4 LEVEL 4 (HFN 4)
Pre/coRequisite
Course Code
Title
Designation
HMET101
Introduction to Meteorology
Core
Units
HPH101
Mechanics 1
10
HPH102
10
HMTH101
Calculus 1
10
HMTH102
10
HCT113
Programming 1
10
CSSC101
Communication Skills 1
10
Core
10
SEMESTER 1
COURSE
CODE
COURSE DESCRIPTION
DESIGNATION
HFS 401
Sanitation and Legislation
10
HFN401
Nutritional Epidemiology
10
HFN413
Nutritional Planning and

Programme Management
10
HFN417
Nutritional Assessment and

Surveillance
10
HFN404
Clinical Nutrition and Dietetics
10
HFN470
Core
PRE - REQUISITE/
CO-REQUISITE
COURSE
UNITS
Semester 2
Title
HMET106
Weather Analysis and Forecasting 1
HMET107
Statistical Methods in Meteorology
10
HMET109
10
HPH104
Atmospheric Radiation and Optical

Phenomena
Meteorological Instruments and
Methods of Observations
Fluid Mechanics and Thermal Physics
HMTH111
Calculus 2
HBS111
Entrepreneurship
Core
10
CSSC102
Communication Skills 2
Core
10
HMET103
Designation
Pre/coRequisite
Course Code
core
Units
10
10
10
HMTH101
10
325
11.15.2 LEVEL 2
11.15.4 LEVEL 4
A student shall register for at least 120 course units.
A student shall register for at least 120 course units
Semester 1
Semester 1
Course Code
Title
Designation
HMET201
Dynamic Meteorology 1
Core
HMET202
Tropical Meteorology
10
HMET204
Atmospheric Thermodynamics
10
HMET205
10
HMET206
Mesoscale and Convective Weather

Systems
HMTH103
Ordinary differential Equations
Pre/coRequisite
Units
10
core
HMET106
10
Course Code
Title
HMET401
Mid-latitude Weather Systems
HMET402
Dynamic Meteorology 2
HMET403
HMET407
Geographic Information Systems in

Meteorology
Boundary Layer Meteorology and
Micrometeorology
Research Methods in Meteorology
HMET470
Dissertation
HMET404
Designation
Title
HMET207
Cloud Physics and Precipitation
10
HMET209
Remote Sensing in Meteorology
10
HMET210
Numerical Weather Prediction
10
HMET211
Global Circulation and Climates
10
HBS201
HMTH202
Pre/coRequisite
Units
HMET201
10
10
10
10
core
20
core
HMTH102
Designation
CORE
Pre/coRequisite
120
Units
HMET405
Hydrometeorology
10
HMET406
Agrometeorology
10
HMET408
HMET409
Aeronautical Meteorology
10
01
HMET410
10
10
HMET470
Climate Change and Climate

Applications
Dissertation (continued)
Units
Designation
Pre/coRequisite
Title
A student shall register for the industrial attachment, which should

be carried out for a period of not less than 10 months at an approved
institution of training
HMET360
10
Course Code
11.15.3 LEVEL 3
Title
Units
Semester 2
Course Code
Course Code
Pre/coRequisite
10
Semester 2
326
Designation
core
core
HMET206
10
20

(MSc) DEGREE
2.4
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
These Regulations should be read in conjunction with the

General Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by
Coursework, hereinafter referred to as the General Academic
Regulations (GAR).
1.2
In addition to these Faculty of Science Regulations, there shall

be individual regulations for each programme specified below.
1.3
The General Academic Regulations shall take precedence over

these Faculty Regulations which, in turn, shall take precedence
over the individual programme regulations.
2.1 An applicant for admission to a Master of Science Degree must
normally have obtained an appropriate Honours Degree of this
University with a degree class of 2.1 or better or an equivalent
qualification from another Institution.
2.2 An applicant for admission to a Master of Science Degree who
has obtained an appropriate Honours Degree of this University
with a degree class of 2.2 or an equivalent qualification from
another Institution, may be considered for admission provided
she/he has been employed for a minimum of two years in a
position which will have resulted in an improvement of his/her
understanding of the content of the Honours Degree obtained
and such a person will be required to sit for a qualifying
examination and to pass that examination with a mark of 2.1 or
better.
2.3 An applicant is admitted to a Master of Science Degree
programme in a subject related to that taken in his/her
Honours programme.
3.
An applicant with a Bachelor's Degree of this University with

a degree class of 2.1 or better or an approved equivalent
qualification will normally be required to take the
appropriate programme that upgrades that Bachelor's
Degree to a Bachelor of Science Honours Degree of this
University, as detailed in Section 2.1 before being considered
for admission.
PROGRAMMES
Master of Science programmes offered by the Faculty are listed
below:
3.1 Master of Science Degree in Agricultural Meteorology.
(MAGM)
3.2 Master of Science Degree in Analytical Chemistry. (MACH)
3.3 Master of Science Degree in Applied Physics. (MAPH)
3.4 Master of Science Degree in Biotechnology (MBTC)
3.5 Master of Science Degree in Chemistry (MCH)
3.6 Master of Science Degree in Computer Science (MCT)
3.7 Master of Science Degree in Environmental Policy and Planning
(MEPPS)
3.8 Master of Science Degree in Exploration Geology (MXGL)
3.9 Master of Science Degree in Exploration Geophysics
(MXPH)
3.10 Master of Science Degree in Geography and Environmental
Science (MSGE)
3.11 Master of Science Degree in Mathematics (MTS)
3.12 Master of Science Degree in Statistics (MSTC)
3.13 Master of Science Degree in Tropical Entomology (MTE)
3.14 Master of Science Degree in Tropical Hydrobiology and
Fisheries (MTFH)
3.15 Master of Science Degree in Tropical Resource Ecology
(MTRE)
3.16 Master of Science Degree in Applied Geographic
Information Science and Remote Sensing (MGIRS)
3.17 Master of Science Degree in Climate Science and Modelling
(MCLIMOD)
327
4. STRUCTURE OF THE PROGRAMMES

4.1
The duration of an MSc programme shall be one of the
following:
4.1.1. A programme with a weighting of at least 200
course units which shall be of either one year and
six months duration on a full-time basis or 3 years
duration on a part-time basis.
4.1.2. A programme with a weighting of at least 240
course units which shall be of two years duration on
a full-time basis or four years duration on a parttime basis.
4.2
328
4.3
Each MSc programme is divided into two parts. Part 1 shall

be the coursework component and Part 2 shall be the
research component for at least six months duration. The
coursework component shall have a weighting of at least
120 course units and the duration shall be given in the
individual programme regulations. The research
component shall be weighted so that its weighting is within
the limits prescribed in the General Academic Regulations.
Normally the duration of each component shall conform to
the relative weighting, in terms of course units, of that
component compared with the overall weighting of the
programme.
Each course shall consist of a minimum of 60 contact hours,
including seminars and practicals, at least 48 contact hours
shall be lectures. The minimum number of contact hours for
each course in a specific programme shall be specified in the
individual programme regulations.
4.4
The combination of courses shall be as specified in the

individual programme regulations.
4.5
The length of a dissertation will normally be between 12 000

and 20 000 words but a dissertation consisting mainly of
computations need not conform to these limits. The
dissertation will normally be submitted on or before the end
of the last month of the programme.
EXAMINATIONS
5.1
5.2
Courses will be examined at the end of the semester in

which they are taught and each course comprises one paper
examinable for at least three hours. If there is a practical
component in the course, the end of course theory
examination may be two hours long.
5.3
Where a course has an end of course practical examination,

the end of course practical examination may be held at a
time and venue different from that of the end of course
theory examination for the same course. The duration of
the end of course practical examination shall be specified in
the individual regulations for the programme but shall not
be greater than three hours. Normally an end of course
practical examination shall have the same weighting as the
end of course theory examination.
5.4
External moderation of end of courses examinations shall

be in accordance with Section 6.2 of the General
Regulations.
5.5
To be admitted to a formal examination, a student should

attend lectures regularly. Attendance at seminars, tutorials
and practicals is compulsory.
5.6
Examiners may require a student to attend a viva voce

examination.
5.7
A student must pass Part 1 before proceeding to Part 2. A

student who fails a course will be allowed to supplement or
repeat the course.
6.
6.1 The assessment of a practical course shall be based on
written reports submitted during the course according
to a schedule laid down by the appropriate Departmental
Board.
end of course theory examination mark, an end of course

practical examination mark (where appropriate), an overall
theory mark, an overall practical mark, an overall mark and a
final mark for the course. A student shall pass the continuous
assessment and the end of course examination separately. A
student who fails continuous assessment shall be barred from
sitting for the end of course examination in accordance with
item 6.5 of the General Academic Regulations.
6.2 The assessment of a field course or a project course shall be

based on written reports or on a dissertation submitted at a
date determined by the Departmental Board. Students shall be
notified of this date at the start of the course.
6.9 For each practical course, field course or project course and for
each student, the Departmental Panel of Examiners shall
determine a final mark for that student for that course based on
the assessment of the written reports or of the dissertation
submitted by that student. The Panel shall determine whether
the student has passed or failed the course.
6.3 The assessment of a course containing theory and practical

components shall be based on an end of course theory
examination, continuous assessment (including both theory
and practical work) and may include an end of course practical
examination.
6.10 For all other courses the Departmental Panel of Examiners shall
determine, for each student, a continuous assessment mark, an
end of course examination mark and an overall mark and
whether the student has passed or failed. The final mark for that
course for that student shall be the overall mark for that course.
6.4 All other courses shall be assessed by continuous assessment

and an end of course examination.
6.5 The end of course examination for a course will normally be of
three hours duration, If there is a practical component in the
course, the end of course theory examination may be two hours
long.
6.6 A course with an end of course practical examination shall
contain a practical component in the continuous assessment.
The continuous assessment may be entirely practical or
contain theory and practical components, but the relative
weightings shall be stated in the individual regulations for the
programme.
6.7 In a course with a theory and a practical component the
weightings of the continuous assessment mark and the end of
course examination mark need not be within the limits stated in
the General Academic Regulations but these weightings must
be stated in the individual regulations for the programme.
Furthermore the continuous assessment weightings shall be
between 25% and 75% of the overall mark for the course.
6.8 For each course that contains a theory and a practical
component, the appropriate Departmental Panel of Examiners
shall determine for each student a theory continuous
assessment mark, a practical continuous assessment mark, an
6.11 Each Departmental Panel shall submit, for each course under its
control and for each student enrolled in that course, the final
mark and the result to the Faculty Board of Examiners. For each
student it shall indicate the number of credits obtained in
courses under its control.
7.

8.
329
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS
REGULATIONS FOR MASTER OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN
AGRICULTURAL METEOROLOGY (MAGM)
1.
Introduction
Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework, hereinafter
referred to as the General Regulations, and the Faculty of Science
2.
2.1 To be eligible for admission to the Master of Science Degree in
Agricultural Meteorology an applicant will normally be required to
have obtained a BSc Honours Degree in a physical science or an
appropriate engineering discipline, or in an agricultural or
biological science of this University with a degree class of 2.1 or
better or an equivalent degree.
330
3.
2.2
Normally an applicant with a BSc Degree with a major in a physical

science or an appropriate engineering discipline, or in an
agricultural or biological science with a 2.1 division pass or better of
this University or an equivalent degree will be required to register
to upgrade that degree to a BSc Honours Degree.
2.3
An applicant with an Honours Degree in a physical science or an

appropriate engineering discipline, or in an agricultural or
biological science of this University or an equivalent with a degree
class of 2.2 may be considered if she/he has a minimum of two
years of relevant experience, writes a qualifying examination and
passes with a grade of 2.1 or better.

3.1 The programme will run for 1 years (18 months) on a full time
basis or 3 years (36 months) on a part-time basis.
3.2 Part 1 of the programme will be offered on a full time basis for 1
year and on a part-time basis for 2 years.
3.3 Part 2 will be offered on a full-time basis for a period of six months
and for a period of 1 year on a part-time basis.
4.

4.1 The programme will consist of two parts; Part 1 will be the
coursework component and Part 2, the research component.
4.2 Part 1 will normally last for the first year for full-time students and
for the first two years for part-time students.
4.3 At Part 1, each full-time student shall register for courses worth at
least 120 course units in the first year while a part-time student will
normally register for courses worth at least 60 course units in each
year of the first two years.
4.4 If there are core courses in the specialty that a student registers for,
these courses should normally be taken in the first six months for
full-time students and in the first year for part-time students.
4.5 In order to pass Part 1 a student shall have to pass courses worth at
least 120 course units including all core courses for the chosen
specialty.
4.6 Each course is worth 15 course units and shall be taught over 72
contact hours, i.e. 48 hours of lectures and 24 hours of practicals,
tutorials and seminars.
4.7 The research component shall normally start after the end of the
first year in the case of full-time students and after the end of the
second year in the case of part-time students. It will last six
months for full-time students and 1 year for part-time students. A
full-time student may opt to do the research component on a parttime basis.
4.8 The research component shall consist of a research project which
will be assessed based on a dissertation of 12000 to 20 000 words
(60 100 pages) on an approved topic and seminar presentations
given according to a timetable determined by the Departmental
Board at the start of the component. The dissertation shall
normally be submitted on or before the end of 1 years for a fulltime student and on or the end of the third year in the case of parttime students.
5.
Examinations
Regulations and Faculty of Science Regulations.
5.2 Courses will be examined at the end of the semester in which they
are taught, and the end of course examination will comprise of one
two-hour paper for each course.
6.
7.
6.1 A taught course shall be assessed through continuous assessment
and end of course examination, in the ratio 30:70, respectively.
6.2 Continuous assessment will include the marks from practical
reports (for taught courses with practical component),
assignments, tests and /or a small scale project(s) and students will
be notified of their relative weightings at the commencement of the
course. The minimum number of assignments and tests shall be 3.
6.3 A student must pass Part 1 before proceeding to Part 2. Those failing
to do so may be allowed to supplement or repeat a course in
6.4 The Research Project of Part 2 shall be examined by a Research
Seminar and a Dissertation. The Research Seminar shall constitute
10% and the Dissertation 90% of the overall course mark.
6.5 To be awarded the degree, a student must pass each of the two Parts
of the programme.
6.6 The degree shall be classified in accordance with the General
Academic Regulations and the Faculty of Science Regulations for
the Master of Science Degree by Coursework.
COURSES
7.1 Part 1
A student should register for courses worth not less than 120 course
units.
CORE COURSES:
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MAGM501
Fundamentals of Meteorology and

Climatology
MAGM502
Weather, climate and agriculture
MAGM503
MAGM504
Examination
Duration
2 hrs
Designation
CORE
COURSE
UNITS
15
2 hrs
CORE
15
Agrometeorological measurements
and instrumentation
2 hrs
CORE
15
Micrometeorology
2 hrs
CORE
15
Designation
COURSE
UNITS
15
OPTIONAL COURSES
CODE
DESCRIPTION
Examination
Duration
2 hrs
MAGM505
Meteorological hazards and

extreme weather events in
agriculture
MAGM506
Analytical tools and methods

in agricultural meteorology
2 hrs
Optional
15
MAGM507
Water resource assessment

and management
2 hrs
Optional
15
MAGM508
Strategic use of climate

information
2 hrs
Optional
15
MAGM509
Coping with climate change

and variability
2 hrs
Optional
15
MAGM511
Operational
agrometeorology
2 hrs
Optional
15
MAGM512
Applications of Remote
Sensing and GIS in
Agriculture
2 hrs
Optional
15
MAGM513
Development of risk
management strategies in
Agriculture
2 hrs
Optional
15
Core
331
7.2
PART 2: Research Dissertation

A student shall register for the research dissertation, which
should be carried out for a period of six months for full time
study and 1 year for part time study. The Research Work may
commence at any time after the final coursework
examination. The Research Work may be undertaken either
in the university, at a firm to which the student is assigned or
at any other academic or non-academic institution
approved by the Department. The Dissertation will normally
be submitted on or before a given deadline.
(m) Cyclones and anticyclonic motions;

(n) Air masses and fronts: types and properties;*
(o) Atmospheric moisture;
(p) Clouds and their classification;
(q) Precipitation processes and artificial rain making;
(r)
(s) Weather charts;

(t)
CODE
DESCRIPTION
Examination
Duration
Designation
MAGM570
Research
Dissertation
Written
Report and
seminar
presentation
Core
8.
332
COURSE
UNITS
80
COURSE CONTENT
Core Courses
MAGM501
Fundamentals of Meteorology and Climatology
(a) The Earth and atmospheric composition;

(b) Vertical structure of the atmosphere;
(c) Variation in temperature with height;
(d) Sun, the Earth and seasons;*
(e) Solar radiation and laws of radiation;
(f ) Heat balance of the Earth and atmosphere;*
(g) Hydrological cycle;
(h) Climate change and global warming;*
(i)
Variation in pressure;
(j)
Hydrostatic equation;
(k) Vapour pressure, saturation deficit and the psychrometric equation;

(l)
Potential temperature and pressure gradient;
Thunderstorms and duststorms, haze, mist fog and dew;
Atmospheric moisture;
(u) Forecasting methods: short-, medium- and long-range forecasting

techniques, recent models used in forecasting and their limitations in,
and impact on, agriculture;
(v) Numerical weather prediction;
(w) El Nio and the Southern Oscillation;*
(x) Environmental indicators of weather changes;
(y) Local wind systems: land and sea breeze circulation, and mountain
and valley winds;
(z) Seasonal distribution of climatological elements over latitudes;
(aa) Climatic classification: Koppen and Thornthwaite systems;
(bb) Types of climate: humid and dry climates;
(cc) Climate change and global warming;*
(dd) Agroclimatic indices and different agroclimatic zones;
(ee) Frequencies of disastrous weather events in different regions;
(ff ) Atmospheric and soil drought;
(gg) Monsoons and elements of monsoon meteorology;
(hh) Rainfall variability;
(ii) Climatology of specific countries.
MAGM502 Weather, climate and agriculture

(a) Weather, climate and crop production: how weather and climatic factors
affect plant growth and development;
(b) Climatic water budget as a tool for agroclimatic analysis;
(c) Basic concepts of climate data use for crop planning and climatic risk
assessment: crop zoning;
(d) Basic concepts of weather data use for decision-making in relation to
agricultural operations: operational agricultural meteorology;
(e) Weather/climate and crop yield relationship, and an introduction to
crop-weather modelling;
(f ) Introduction to weather hazards and their impact on crop production;
(g) Weather-related aspects of pest and disease management;
(h) Agrometeorological information systems: the use of weather forecasts
in agriculture.
(i) Climatic factors (temperature, radiation, humidity, wind) affecting the
thermal balance in animals;
(j) Animal energy exchange processes and the need for the maintenance of
thermal balances in animals;
(k) Thermal indices for animal studies and management;
(l) Physiological and productive consequences of environmental stresses
and extreme weather events: loss of water from the body, growth rate
and body weight, food intake, milk production, and so on;
(m) Adaptive capacity for the alleviation of climatic stress in livestock;
(n) Contribution of animal husbandry to climate change and adaptation
strategies to reduce the resulting effects.
MAGM503 Agrometeorological measurements and instrumentation
(a)
Fundamentals of measurement techniques;
(b) Theory and working principles of various instruments: theoretical and
practical aspects of electroniccircuits and various sensors and
equipment used in agrometeorological research and applications
(barometers, thermometers, thermographs, psychrometers, hair
hygrometers, thermo hygrographs, raingauges, self-recording
raingauges, Duvdevani dew gauges, sunshine recorders and
pyranometers, lysimeters, open-pan evaporimeters, anemometers,
wind vanes, anemographs, soil thermometers);
(c) Soil heat flux plates and instruments for measuring soil moisture;
(d) Albedometers, photometers, spectroradiometers and quantum

radiation sensors;
(e) Ceptometer, pressure bomb apparatus, porometer, photosynthesis
systems and infra-red thermometers;
(f ) Discussions on instrument selection, sensor deployment and data
acquisition;
(g) Automatic weather stations and other electronic instruments;
(h) Data logger and data transmission systems;
(i) Measurement of surface energy fluxes;
(j) Remote-sensing measurements by radar and satellite;
(k) Working with the above instruments in the meteorological observatory,
taking observations of relevant parameters and computation and
interpretation of the data;
(l) Techniques for data verification and validation;
(m) Methods for data quality assurance and data quality control in
automated systems;
(n) Missing data generation;
(o) Visits to centres equipped with an advanced instrumentation facility not
available at the students' institutes.
MAGM504
Micrometeorology
(a) Detailed study of turbulence mechanisms and characteristics to
evaluate exchanges of momentum, energy and mass in the atmospheric
boundary layer;
(b) Evaluation of the structure, dynamics and processes of diffusion and
turbulent transfer using exchange models;
(c) Evaluation of the turbulent kinetic energy, stratified flows and stability
parameters required to estimate coupled momentum and energy and
mass exchanges;
(d) Turbulence and wind profiles near the Earth's surface;
(e) Influence of changing soil surface properties on wind flow dynamics;
(f ) Measurement and empirical relationships of wind and temperature
profiles over different surfaces;
(g) Control of the physical environment through irrigation, windbreaks,
frost protection, manipulation of radiation and water use through
intercropping systems;
(h) Simulation of boundary layer structure and dynamics;
(i) Micrometeorology of crop canopies and animal environment:
333
distribution of radiation, temperature, humidity, vapour pressure, wind

and carbon dioxide.
334
OPTIONAL COURSES
MAGM505
Meteorological hazards and extreme weather events in
agriculture
(a) Drought
?
Definitions; economic and social impacts; statistical
climatology of droughts; causes; forecasting droughts
(analogue, statistical, physical);
?
Coping with drought through early warning and monitoring;
planning; reduction of vulnerability; compilation of natural
resources inventories; information exchange; use of
geographical information systems to improve prediction, and
so on;
?
Artificial simulation of precipitation: principles and practices of
cloud seeding; problems of evaluation of experimental and
operational programmes;
(b) Hail
?
Definitions; damage; spatial and temporal distribution; growth
of ice particles; hail growth models; hail suppression concepts
and prediction;
?
Aspects of hail insurance;
(c) Frost
?
Definitions; types; formation mechanisms; large-scale and local
factors affecting the frequency and severity of frosts; methods of
frost protection;
?
Mitigation of frost impacts using climatology and forecasting;
?
(d) Floods
?
Definitions; causes; statistical climatology of floods; short- and
long-term impacts;
?
Extreme value analysis; use of unit hydrographs and probable
maximum precipitation;
?
Meteorological and hydrological forecasting of floods and use of
catchment runoff models;
?
Mitigation of impacts through forward planning and flood
warnings;
?
Flood insurance;
(e) Pests and diseases
?
Factors controlling migrant pests, including desert and red
locusts and army worms; role of meteorology in crop protection,
including spraying operations and integrated pest management;
?
Climatic factors affecting the spread and survival of pests and
pathogens;
?
Control methods;
(f ) Storage losses
?
Climatic conditions affecting storage losses; loss reduction
methods;
(g) Fires
?
Effects of controlled and uncontrolled burning; fire risk
assessment schemes;
(h) Wildfires
?
Definitions; damage; role of weather in the occurrence and
severity of wildfires; mitigating impacts; fire danger estimates;
(i) Extreme temperatures
?
Effects of high temperatures on crop and animal production;
(j) Winds
?
Effects of wind on crop production;
(k) Tsunamis
?
Causes and the effects on animals and crops.
(l)
Develop understanding of extreme meteorological phenomena,
impacts, actions, problems, solutions, policies and the remaining
challenges based on case studies
?
Description and characterization of selected extreme
meteorological events and of the impacts of these phenomena
on agricultural production and infrastructure.
?
Case studies to illustrate the events and impacts suffered by
farmers.
?
Action strategies available to farmers to counter similar
impacts.
?
Case studies of such action strategies and challenges
remaining (practicals are possible on the collection of local
case studies).
?
Case studies of problems encountered locally by farmers and
solutions they developed in coping with extreme
meteorological events.
?
Case studies of such solutions developed elsewhere for similar
problems.
?
Role of policies in promoting viable solutions to remaining
problems.
?
Scientific components of problems and solutions for coping
with extreme meteorological events and the remaining
challenges for the use of science to contribute to conducting
problem analyses and designing viable solutions.
?
Agrometeorological services to improve farmers' design
abilities in terms of solutions for coping with extreme
meteorological events (practicals are possible on the last two
subjects).
(m) Capacity to develop and implement effective early warning systems
?
History of early warning systems for extreme meteorological
events and their efficiencies in the
continent/region/country/subregion concerned (including
traditional techniques, yet with emphasis on the last two
decades).
?
Bringing such early warnings to users for discussion.
?
Successes and difficulties experienced by farmers with present
early warning systems.
?
Outlooks for present early warning systems, their effectiveness
and possible alternatives.
?
Trends in early warning systems and their use (practicals are
possible on the last subject).
?
Outlooks for early warning system alternatives and the
influences on decision-making concerning such alternatives.
?
Policies to promote efficient early warning strategies and to
support appropriate alternatives.
?
Systematic and standardized data collection on (changes in)
early warning strategies and the role of science in designing
and selecting them and increasing their efficiencies.
?
Agrometeorological services to increase farmers' assimilation
of warnings and their actual use (practicals are possible on the
last two subjects).
MAGM506 Anaytical tools and methods in agricultural meteorology
(a) Review of agroclimatic methods;
(b) Characterization of agroclimatic elements;

(c) Atmosphere sampling; temporal and spatial considerations; micro,
meso and macro climates;
(d) Network spacing; spatial and temporal methods;
(e) Geographical information system fundamentals and applications;
(f ) Numerical characterization of climatic features;
(g) Crop response to climate, time lags, time and distance constants and
hysteresis effects;
(h) Influence of climate on stress-response relations;
(i) Thermal time approach in agroclimatology: heat and radiation use
efficiency in crop plants;
(j) Applications for insectpest development and prediction;
(k) Comfort indices for humans and animals;
(l) Instrumentation and sampling problems;
(m) Design of agrometeorological experiments;
(n) Impact of natural and induced climate variability and change on crop
production;
(o) Basic knowledge of computer use in agriculture; the theory of
programming languages: BASIC, FORTRAN, C, C++ and Visual Basic;
(p) Empirical and statistical crop weather models and examples of their
application;
(q) Incorporating weather, soil, plants and other environment-related
parameters as subroutine and remote-sensing inputs in models;
(r) Growth and yield prediction models; crop simulation models;
forecasting models for insects and diseases.
MAGM507 Water resource assessment and management
Rainfall measurement: accuracy of raingauges, considering design, height,
levelling, exposure, rainfall climate etc. Data quality control, including double
mass analysis. Representivity of raingauges; correlation distances for daily,
monthly and annual values; random and systematic variability (with
topography). Assessment of area rainfall from networks, using Thiessen
polygon, isohyetal, kriging and other methods. Utility of remote sensing for
catchment rainfall, using radar, cold cloud duration etc.
Evaporation: estimation of evaporation from open water, bare soil and
vegetation (measurement methods in MAGM 507, 513). Interception capacity
and interception losses; and modelling.
Local water budgets: partition of rainfall into runoff, soil moisture and
percolation; surface infiltration rates and time to ponding.
335
336
Streamflow measurement: V-notch and weirs; streamflow measurement by

propeller and laser sensors, use of tracers; stage-flow calibrations, and their
stability, extrapolation methods.
Hydrological catchment modelling: quickflow and baseflow components of
runoff; surface flow, interflow and groundwater flow; Horton and Hewlett
concepts of catchment. Statistical rainfall-runoff models; conceptual and
numerical mechanistic models, e.g. bucket type models; lumped and
distributed models, as SHE. Calibration and validation of catchment runoff
models.
Water resource evaluation: climatological analysis using historic data;
reliable minimum supply effect of possible climate change; effects of land-use
change.
Precipitation modification: principles and practice of cloud seeding;
problems of evaluation of experimental and operational programmes
Water use in agriculture: irrigation methods, design and practice; advantages
and disadvantages of different application methods, including furrow,
overhead, tape and microjet; water use efficiency: irrigation scheduling.
Economic assessment of farm irrigation systems: Long term planning.
Economic assessment of large dams, small scale storage, water harvesting,
groundwater storage.
MAGM508 Strategic use of climate information
?
(a) Increasing awareness of potential climate hazards and mitigation
?
History of climate-related disasters (hazards and vulnerabilities)
suffered in the continent/region/country/subregion concerned
and their documented or remembered impacts (with emphasis on
the last two decades).
?
Hazards and their link to agricultural production risks (intraannual and interannual); efforts made in mitigating impacts of
(future) disasters prevention; discernable trends in the
occurrence and character of disasters, if any (practicals are
?
Expectations concerning future disasters.
?
Further efforts that could be made to mitigate the impacts of
disasters (prevent what can be prevented) and related policy
developments.
?
Systematic and standardized data collection on disasters and the
role of science in combating them; agrometeorological services to
increase farmers' awareness of climate-related disasters and

potential mitigation (practicals are possible on the last two
subjects).
(b) Selection of appropriate land-use and cropping patterns
?
Types and drivers of agricultural land-use and cropping patterns
(regionalized, by definition).
?
History of main present land-use and cropping patterns in the
continent/region/country/subregion concerned in relation to
environmental issues (including traditional techniques, yet with
emphasis on the last two decades).
?
land-use and cropping patterns.
?
Outlooks for present land-use and cropping patterns and possible
alternatives from an environmental point of view.
?
Recent trends in land-use and cropping patterns (practicals are
?
Land-use and cropping pattern impacts on agroecosystem
resources (process-oriented view).
?
Outlooks for alternative land-use and cropping patterns and what
influences decision-making on such alternatives.
?
Policies to protect viable land-use and cropping patterns and
support for appropriate alternatives.
?
Systematic and standardized data collection on (changes in) landuse and cropping patterns and the role of science in the selection
processes.
?
Agrometeorological services to increase farmers' design abilities
in terms of land-use and cropping patterns (practicals are possible
on the last two subjects).
c)
Adoption of preparedness strategies
?
Priority setting for preparedness strategies in agricultural
production.
?
Preparedness for meteorological disasters in development
planning.
?
Permanent adaptation strategies that reduce vulnerability to
hazards.
?
Preparedness as a coping strategy (practicals are possible on the
last subject).
?
AdvancedPreparedness for the reception of contingency
responses.
?
Preparedness as a community approach.
?
Policies that enhance preparedness strategies.
?
Systematic and standardized data collection on actual
preparedness strategies adopted in agricultural production and

the role of science in their selection.
?
Agrometeorological services to increase farmers' preparedness for
climate disasters and their awareness of potential mitigation
(practicals are possible on the last two subjects).
(d) Making more efficient use of agricultural inputs
?
Agrometeorological aspects of agricultural production inputs
and their history.
?
Determination of input efficiencies.
?
Other factors determining inputs and input efficiency.
?
Actual use of inputs in main land-use and cropping patterns of
the region (practicals are possible on the last subject).
?
Improvement of input efficiencies in agricultural production.
?
Policies that enhance increased input efficiencies.
?
Systematic and standardized data collection on agricultural
inputs, their efficiencies and their relation to climate.
?
Role of science in more efficient use of agricultural inputs.
?
Agrometeorological services to increase farmers' abilities for
more efficient use of inputs (practicals are possible on the last
three subjects).
(e) Selection of livestock management
?
History of livestock management patterns in the
continent/region/country/subregion concerned in relation to
environmental issues (including traditional techniques, yet with
emphasis on the last two decades).
?
livestock management strategies.
?
Outlooks for present livestock management strategies and
possible alternatives from an environmental point of view.
?
Recent trends in livestock management strategies (practicals are
?
Outlooks for alternatives in livestock management and what
influences decision-making on such alternatives.
?
Policies to protect viable livestock management strategies and
to support appropriate alternatives.
?
livestock management patterns and the role of science in

selecting them.
?
in terms of livestock management strategies (practicals are
possible on the last two subjects).
(f ) Adoption of microclimate modification techniques
?
Review of microclimate management and manipulation
methods (for example, Stigter's review tables in Griffiths (1994)).
?
History of microclimate modification techniques practised in the
continent/country/sub-region concerned (including traditional
techniques, yet with emphasis on the last two decades).
?
Possible improvements in the adoption of microclimate
modification techniques, given increasing climate variability and
climate change.
?
Local trends in the adoption of such techniques (practicals are
?
Outlooks for improved microclimate modification techniques.
?
Policies to support the introduction and extension of appropriate
microclimate management and manipulation.
?
microclimate modification patterns and the role of science in
their development.
?
in terms of appropriate microclimate modification patterns
(g) Protection measures against extreme climate
?
History of protection measures against extreme climate in the
continent/region/country/sub-region concerned (including
traditional techniques, yet with emphasis on the last two
decades).
?
protection measures.
?
Outlooks for present protection measures and possible
alternatives.
?
Trends in protection methods against extreme climate
(practicals are possible on the last subject).
337
?
Outlooks for improved or alternative protection measures and
what influences decision-making on such alternatives.

?
Policies to safeguard viable protection measures and to support
appropriate alternatives.
?
protection measures against extreme climate and the role of
science in their design.
?
Agrometeorological services to increase farmers' design
abilities in terms of such protection measures (practicals are
338
MAGM509 Coping with climate change and variability

(a) Increase capacity in using climate forecast information
?
History of the dissemination of climate forecast information in
the continent/region/country/subregion concerned and its
documented or remembered uses and impacts (with emphasis
on the last two decades).
?
Factors determining the demand, release and use of climate
forecasts for/in agricultural production (practicals are possible
on monitoring the present release and actual use of certain
climate forecasts).
?
Required improvements in climate forecasting.
?
Improvements needed in issuing climate forecasts.
?
Improvements required in the assimilation and use of climate
forecasts in all agricultural production.
?
Systematic and standardized data collection on issuing,
assimilating and using climate forecast information in
agricultural production and the role of science in improving
them.
?
Agrometeorological services to increase farmers' awareness of
climate forecast information, their assimilation potential and
their use of such information (practicals are possible on the last
two subjects).
(b) Develop the sustainable use of agroecosystem resources
?
History of the use of agroecosystem resources in the
continent/region/country/subregion concerned and their
documented or remembered sustainability, or the lack thereof
(with emphasis on the last two decades).
?
Factors determining the sustainable development and use of
agroecosystem resources (practicals possible on the actual use of

such resources).
?
Improvements needed in the sustainable development and use of
agroecosystem resources.
?
Policies to support such development and use.
?
Systematic and standardized data collection on agroecosystems and
the role of science in their sustainable development and use.
?
Agrometeorological services related to farmers' sustainable use of
agroecosystem resources (practicals are possible on the last two
subjects).
(c) Heighten awareness of increasing climate variability and climate risks
?
History of increasing climate variability in the
continent/region/country/subregion concerned and its
documented or remembered elevated risk (with emphasis on the last
two decades).
?
Factors determining the awareness of increasing climate variability
and climate risk, with examples of such increased awareness or lack
thereof in agricultural production (practicals are possible on
examples of increased awareness, or lack thereof ).
?
Outlooks for improved awareness of increasing climate variability
andclimate risk and factors determining such improvements in
agricultural production.
?
Policies to increase such awareness.
?
awareness of increasing climate variability and climate risk and the
role of science in the detection and awareness of such matters.
?
Agrometeorological services related to an increase in farmers'
awareness of the same (practicals are possible on the last two
subjects).
(d) Increase understanding of climate change adaptation strategies
?
History of climate change adaptation strategies for agricultural
production in the continent/region/country/subregion concerned
(with emphasis on the last two decades).
?
Documented or remembered understanding of such strategies, or
lack thereof.
?
Factors determining the understanding of such adaptation
strategies.
?
Examples of increased understanding or lack thereof in agricultural
production (practicals are possible on such examples).

?
Outlooks for an improved understanding of climate change
adaptation strategies and factors determining the increase of such
understanding in agricultural production.
?
Policies to increase such understanding.
?
Systematic and standardized data collection on (changes in) climate
change adaptation strategies and their understanding and the role of
science in such matters.
?
Agrometeorological services related to an increase in farmers'
understanding of such adaptation strategies (practicals are possible
on the last two subjects).
MAGM510 Operational agrometeorology
(a) Develop an understanding of the weather phenomena, short- and
medium-range weather forecasts, impacts, actions, problems, solutions,
policies and the remaining challenges based on case studies
?
Description and characterization of selected weather phenomena,
their impacts on agricultural production or their use therein.
?
Data assimilation and retrieval for tactical decision
?
Use of mesoscale models in farm decision-making, satisfying the
lead-time requirement.
?
History of short- and medium-range weather forecasting and its
documented uses and impacts (with emphasis on the last two
decades).
?
Case studies to illustrate weather phenomena and tactical decisionmaking to make use of or cope with these phenomena.
?
Possible roles of improved short- and medium-range weather
forecasting (practicals are possible on the collection of local case
studies).
?
Action strategies available to farmers to improve the use of or to cope
with selected weather phenomena requiring tactical decisionmaking, where necessary/possible making use of (improved) shortand medium-range weather forecasting.
?
Local case studies of such action strategies or similar strategies
developed elsewhere and the challenges remaining.
?
The role of policies in promoting viable solutions to the remaining
problems.
?
Scientific components of problems and solutions in terms of using
and coping with weather phenomena requiring tactical decisionmaking, and the challenges remaining for the use of science to
contribute to problem analysis and to design viable solutions, where
necessary/possible making use of short- and medium-range weather
forecasting.
?
Agrometeorological services to improve farmers' abilities to design
solutions in terms of using or coping with such weather phenomena
(b) Capacity to develop tactical applications for agricultural
management (for example, in the fields of pests, diseases and animal
husbandry)
?
Optimum weather requirements for various field operations and
animal maintenance and crop yields.
?
History of selected weather-related tactical applications for
agricultural management and their efficiencies in the
continent/region/country/subregion concerned (including
traditional techniques, yet with emphasis on the last two decades).
?
Bringing such tactical applications to users for discussion.
?
Case studies of successes and difficulties experienced by farmers with
present weather-related tactical applications (seed sowing, fertilizer
application, irrigation scheduling, harvest, crop drying, labour
utilization, controlling pests and diseases affecting crops, animal
protection requirements for optimum growth and production).
?
Outlooks for present tactical applications, their efficiencies and
possible alternatives.
?
Trends in such tactical applications and their use (practicals are
?
Outlooks for alternatives to present weather-related tactical
applications for agricultural management and the influences on
decision-making concerning such alternatives.
?
Policies to promote efficient tactical applications and to support
appropriate alternatives.
?
Systematic and standardized data collection on (changes in) such
tactical applications for agricultural management and the role of
science in designing and selecting them and increasing their
efficiencies.
?
Agrometeorological services to increase farmers' actual use of
339
tactical applications for using or coping with weather phenomena

340
MAGM511 Applications of Remote Sensing and GIS in Agriculture

(a) Retrieval of agro-meteorological parameters using satellite remote
sensing data:
?
Introduction
?
Approaches of retrieval of agro-meteorological parameters using
s a t e l l i t e d a t a : L a n d s u r fac e t e m p e ra t u re , A b s o r b e d
photosynthetically active radiation.
(b) Remote Sensing and GIS application in Agro-Ecological Zoning:
?
Introduction,
?
New tools for Agro-Ecological Zoning.
c) Droughts and Floods assessment and monitoring using remote
sensing and GIS:
?
Introduction,
?
Remote sensing for droughts,
?
Remote sensing for floods.
(d) Satellite based weather forecasting:
(e) Early warning for food security:
?
Use of NDVI for crop monitoring,
?
The structural vulnerability using satellite images: case study,
?
Contingency plan for food security,
?
The dissemination of information for the effective management.
MAGM512 Development of risk management strategies
(a) Risks in agricultural production
?
History of weather and climate as accepted agricultural risk factors in
the continent/region/country/subregion concerned and the
related documented risk concepts (including traditional concepts,
yet with emphasis on the last two decades).
?
History of and trends in defence strategies towards such risks in the
same continent region/country/subregion.
?
Preparedness for weather and climate risks (practicals are possible
on the last subject).
?
Weather- and climate-related risk managers and those who have to
cope with weather- and climate-related risks in agriculture.
?
Management and coping strategies for such risks, and the related
trends.
?
Policies to enhance and improve such strategies.
?
Systematic and standardized data collection on weather- and
climate-related risks in agriculture and the role of science in defining,
managing and coping with such risks.
?
Agrometeorological services to increase abilities to design risk
management strategies and strategies to cope with risks (practicals
are possible on the last two subjects).
(b) Risk characterization
?
Definitions and classifications of risks.
?
Characterization of weather- and climate-related risks in agriculture.
?
Water-related risks.
?
Radiation/heat-related risks.
?
Air and its movement-related risks.
?
Biomass-related risks.
?
Social and economic risk factors related to weather and climate
(practicals are possible on local recognition of the various risks).
?
Quantification approaches of weather- and climate-related risks in
agricultural systems.
?
Successes and difficulties in using scales and other tools for weatherand climate-related risk quantification.
?
The role of science in developing such scales and tools.
?
Policies to stimulate a quantitative and scientific approach to risk
characterization.
?
Challenges remaining (practicals are possible on the applications of
some scales and other tools).
c) Approaches and tools for dealing with risks
?
History of methods for weather- and climate-related risk assessment
in the continent/region/country/subregion concerned and their
documented evidence of application to agricultural/farming
systems.
?
Strategies for dealing with risks: mitigating practices before the
event.
?
Preparedness for the inevitable.
?
Contingency planning and responses.
?
Disaster risk mainstreaming (practicals are possible on local
recognition of the last strategies).
?
Modelling risk assessments.
?
Application of methods that enable the incorporation of weather
and climate factors determining risks.

?
Using short- and medium-range weather forecasting in risk
assessment approaches.
?
Using seasonal and long-term climate forecasts in risk assessment
approaches.
?
Systematic and standardized data collection on weather- and
climate-related risk assessments in agricultural production, and the
role of science in improving such assessments.
?
Agrometeorological services to increase risk assessment design
abilities (practicals are possible on the last two subjects).
(d) Outlook for farm applications
?
Farm applications not yet dealt with, such as making risk information
products more client friendly and the transfer of risk information
products to the primary and secondary users of such information.
?
Heterogeneity of rural populations in the areas of education, income,
occupation and information demands and the consequences for risk
information products and their transfer.
?
Livelihood-focused support, participation and community
perspectives (practicals are possible on local recognition of the
mentioned heterogeneity and its consequences).
?
Case studies of farm applications of risk information products,
including traditional technologies.
?
Improvements needed in the farm applications of such products and
the policies required to foster improvements, including the use of
intermediaries.
?
Role of science in designing and communicating improvements in
the farm applications of risk information products.
?
Agrometeorological services to increase the assimilation and use of
risk information products in farming (practicals are possible on the
last two subjects).
(e) Challenges in terms of developing coping strategies, including risk
transfer through insurance schemes
?
Challenges faced by coping strategies: combining challenges with
disaster risk mainstreaming, mitigation practices, contingency
planning and responses and basic preparedness.
?
Preparedness approaches to reduce emergency relief necessities.
?
Role played by insurance in risk spreading and transfer (practicals are

?
Challenge implementations: adaptation strategies, relief responses,
impact reductions, the many faces of preparedness.
?
Policies to better meet the challenges.
?
Systematic and standardized data collection on coping strategies for
weather- and climate-related risks in agricultural production and the
role of science in improving such coping strategies, including the
improved use of insurance approaches.
?
Agrometeorological services to foster the design, assimilation and
use of such coping strategies (practicals are possible on the last two
subjects).
(f ) Quantification of risks in agricultural systems associated with
weather and climate
(g) Risk assessment methods and their application to agricultural
systems of local and regional interest
(h) Application of risk management approaches to weather- and
climate-related problems
(I) Application of methods enabling the incorporation of seasonal and
long-term forecasts into risk assessment models
PART 2 COURSES
MAPH570 Research Dissertation
Research work is for six months for full time study and 2 years for part time
study. The Research Work may commence at any time after the final
coursework examination. The Research Work may be undertaken either in
the university, at a firm to which the student is assigned or at any other
academic or non-academic institution approved by the Department. The
Dissertation will normally be submitted on or before a given deadline.
341
CHEMISTRY DEPARTMENT
DEGREE IN ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY (MACH)
1.
INTRODUCTION
Faculty of Science Regulations for Master of Science Degrees.
2.
2.1. To be eligible for admission to the Master of Science Degree in
Analytical Chemistry an applicant will normally be required to have
obtained a BSc Honours Degree in Chemistry of this University with a
degree class of 2.1 or better, or an equivalent degree.
2.2. An applicant who has obtained a BSc Honours Degree in Chemistry of
this University with a degree class of 2.2 or an equivalent qualification
from another Institution, may be considered for admission provided
he/she has at least two years relevant postgraduate experience,
writes a qualifying examination and passes with a grade of 2.1 or
better.
2.3. Normally, an applicant with a BSc Degree with a major in Chemistry
will be required to register to upgrade that degree to a BSc Honours
degree in Chemistry before being considered for admission.
342
3.

3.1. The programme will run for 2 years on a full time basis or 4 years on a
part time basis.
3.2. Part 1 of the programme will be offered for 1 year on a full time-basis
and for 2 years on part-time basis.
3.3. Part 2 will be offered for 1 year on a full time basis and for 2 years on a
part-time basis.

4.1. The programme will consist of two Parts. Part 1 will be the
4.2. The programme will commence at the beginning of a semester.

4.3. At Part 1each fulltime student shall register for courses worth at
least 60 course units in each semester of the first year while a part
time student will register for courses worth at least 20 course units
in each semester of the first two years. Each course has a weighting
of 20 course units and consists of 96 hours contact time, 60 hours of
which are lectures, 30 being practicals and 6 hours constituting
seminars.
4.4. Part 2 will normally commence at the end of the second semester
for full time students and after the end of the fourth semester for
part time students.
4.5. The dissertation shall normally be submitted at least 2 months
before the end of the fourth semester for full time students or 2
months before the end of the eighth semester in the case of part
time students. Students shall be notified of this date at the
beginning of Part 2.
5. SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS
5.1. Examinations shall be conducted in accordance with the General
Regulations and the Faculty Regulations.
5.2. Courses will be examined at the end of the semester in which they
are taught and the end of course examination for each course is a
three hour paper.
5.3. Practical component for each course will be by course work.
6.1. The mark for each course will comprise of the marks for continuous
assessment and the formal examination in the ratio of 40:60.
6.2. Continuous assessment will be in accordance with the Faculty
Regulations and will include assignments, tests, practicals and
seminar presentations and the students will be notified of their
relative weightings at the commencement of the course. If not
specifically stated the weightings will be 6:12:15:7 respectively.
6.3. A student must pass Part 1 before proceeding to Part 2. A total of 8
courses, comprising 6 compulsory and 2 electives will be offered
at Part 1. A student is considered to have passed Part 1 when
he/she has passed all 6 compulsory courses and one elective.
6.4. A student who fails a course may be allowed to supplement or
repeat in accordance with the Faculty Regulations.
6.5.
6.6.
7.
Part 2 will be based on the assessment of dissertation by at least 2

examiners and the student performance at an oral examination.
The mark for dissertation will consist of the mark for write-up and
oral presentation in the ratio of 75:25.
Kinetic methods of analysis: Classification, principles and

applications.
Chemometrics
Error in measurements: Statistical analysis. Test methods. Validation
techniques.
Calibration: Theory. Methods. Analysis.
Sampling: Types. Theory. Challenges. Sample preparation.
Spreadsheet applications: Data analysis using software packages in
analytical chemistry.
COURSES
Part I
A student is expected to take all six compulsory courses and one elective.
Exam Unit
Code
Description
Designation
Course Units
MACH501
Classical Analysis and Chemometrics
Compulsory
20
MACH502
Analytical Atomic Spectroscopy
Compulsory
20
MACH503
Analytical Molecular Spectroscopy
Compulsory
20
MACH504
Electrochemical Methods
Compulsory
20
MACH505
Separation Methods
Compulsory
20
MACH506
Thermal and Radiochemical Methods
Compulsory
20
MACH507
Environmental and Green Chemistry
Elective
20
MACH 508
Laboratory Management and Research

Methods
Elective
20
Part II
Exam Unit
Code
Description
MACH570 Dissertation
Duration
Course units
120
8. COURSE CONTENT
I. MACH501: Classical Analysis and Chemometrics
Classical Analysis
Gravimetric Analysis: Precipitation and volatilization. Theories,
techniques and applications. Calculations on practical
determinations.
Volumetric analysis: Neutralization, precipitation, complexometric
and redox titrations. Calculations, principles and applications.
Non aqueous titrations: Theory. Advantages and applications.
II.
MACH502: Analytical Atomic Spectroscopy

Atomic absorption spectroscopy: Flame and furnace techniques.
Theory. Methods of analysis. Applications.
Atomic fluorescence spectroscopy: Principles. Instruments.
Applications.
Atomic emission spectroscopy: Methods. Principles. Applications.
Atomic ionization spectroscopy: Types. Theory. Techniques. Uses.
Atomic X-ray spectroscopy: Theory. Sources. Instruments.
Applications.
Surface spectrometric techniques: Types. Principles. Methods.
Applications.
III. MACH503: Analytical Molecular Spectroscopy

Optical methods: UV/VIS absorption, IR absorption, Luminescence,
Raman. Principles. Instruments. Uses.
Nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy: Theory. Techniques.
Applications.
Molecular mass spectrometry: Principles. Ionization techniques.
Instruments. Spectral interpretation.
Fourier transform methods: Principles. Techniques. Applications.
IV. MACH504: Electrochemical Methods
Electrogravimetry: Theory. Applications.
Coulometry: Constant current. Constant potential. Principles.
Methods. Applications.
Polarography: Classical polarography. Theory. Instrumentation.
Voltammetry: Types. Instrumental methods. Applications.
Amperometric titrations: Principles. Methods. Uses.
343
maintenance and method validation. Industrial relations.

Research Methods
Definition of research and outline of scientific research process.
Generating ideas. Research proposal. Sampling and data collection.
Data analysis methods. Dissertation writing. Publishing research
articles.
Potentiometry: Theory. Electrode types. Techniques.

Conductometric methods: Principles and applications.
Electrode Kinetics.
Biosensors.
V. MACH505: Separation Methods
Extraction techniques: Solvent extraction. Countercurrent
extraction. Theory. Organic and inorganic applications.
Gas chromatography: Theory. Instruments. Applications.
Liquid chromatography: Classical and high performance.
Instrumentation. Techniques. Applications.
Supercritical fluid chromatography: Principles. Methods.
Applications.
Electrochromatography: Theory. Types. Instruments. Uses.
Hyphenated techniques: Types. Techniques. Challenges.
Applications.
344
VI. MACH506: Thermal and Radiochemical Methods

Thermal Methods
Thermogravimetric analysis. Differential thermal analysis.
Differential scanning calorimetry. Thermomechanical analysis.
Thermometric titrations. Principles. Methods. Applications.
Radiochemical Methods
Neutron activation analysis. Isotope dilution techniques. Principles.
Analyses. Applications.
APPLIED PHYSICS (MAPH)
1.
Introduction
Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework,
hereinafter referred to as the General Regulations, and the Faculty of
Science Regulations for Master of Science Degrees.
2.
Applied Physics an applicant will normally be required to have
obtained a BSc Honours Degree in Physics of this University
with a degree class of 2.1 or better or an equivalent degree.
VII. MACH507: Environmental and Green Chemistry

Atmospheric chemistry. Theory. Equilibria. Methods of analysis.
Waste management. Management of hazardous chemicals.
Green Chemistry
Atom economy. Cleaner production. Bioengineering. Natural
product synthesis.Greener chemicals.
VIII.MACH508: Laboratory Management and Research Methods
Laboratory Management
Laboratory planning and design. Principles of management.
Laboratory safety. Purchasing and budgeting. Instrument
3.
2.2
Normally an applicant with a BSc Degree with a major in Physics

with a 2.1 division pass or better of this University or an
equivalent degree will be required to register to upgrade that
degree to a BSc Honours Degree in Physics.
2.3
An applicant with a BSc Honours degree in Physics with a

degree class of 2.2 of this University or an equivalent may be
considered if she/he has a minimum of two years of relevant
experience, writes a qualifying examination and passes with a
grade of 2.1 or better.

3.1 The programme will run for 1 years (18 months) on a full time
basis or 3 years (36 months) on a part-time basis.
3.2
3.3
Part 1 of the programme will be offered on a full time basis for 1

year and on a part-time basis for 2 years.
Part 2 will be offered on a full-time basis for a period of six
months and for a period of 1 year on a part-time basis.
5.
Examinations
5.1
5.2
4.

4.2
Part 1 will normally last for the first year for full-time students
and for the first two years for part-time students. 4.3 At Part 1,
each full-time student shall register for courses worth at least
120 course units in the first year while a part-time student will
normally register for courses worth at least 60 course units in
each year of the first two years.
4.4
If there are core courses in the specialty that a student registers
for, these courses should normally be taken in the first six
months for full-time students and in the first year for part-time
students.
4.5
In order to pass Part 1 a student shall have to pass courses worth
at least 120 course units including all core courses for the
chosen specialty.
4.6
Each course is worth 15 course units and shall be taught over 72
contact hours, i.e. 36 hours of lectures, 24 hours of practicals
and 12 hours of tutorials and seminars.
4.7
The research component shall normally start after the end of
the first year in the case of full-time students and after the end
of the second year in the case of part-time students. It will last
six months for full-time students and 1 year for part-time
students. A full-time student may opt to do the research
component on a part-time basis.
4.8
The research component shall consist of a research project
which will be assessed based on a dissertation of 12000 to
20000 words (60 100 pages) on an approved topic and
seminar presentations given according to a timetable
determined by the Departmental Board at the start of the
component. The dissertation shall normally be submitted on or
before the end of 1 years for a full-time student and on or the
end of the third year in the case of part-time students.
6.
7.
Courses will be examined at the end of the semester in which

they are taught, and the end of course examination will
comprise of one two and half-hour paper for each course.
6.1 A taught course shall be assessed through continuous
assessment and end of course examination, in the ratio 30:70,
respectively.
6.2 Each taught course shall have a practical component.
reports, assignments, tests and/or a small scale project and
students will be notified of their relative weightings at the
commencement of the course. The minimum number of
assignments and tests shall be 3.
6.4 A student must pass Part 1 before proceeding to Part 2. Those
failing to do so may be allowed to supplement or repeat a course
in accordance with the General Regulations.
Seminar and a Dissertation. The Research Seminar shall
constitute 10% and the Dissertation 90% of the overall course
mark.
6.6 To be awarded the degree, a student must pass each of the two
Parts of the programme.
Academic Regulations and the Faculty of Science Regulations
for the Master of Science Degree by Coursework.
COURSES
7.1 Part 1
A student should register for courses worth not less than 120
course units, of which not less than 45 must be from a chosen
option.
345
CORE COURSES:
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MAPH501
Medical Physics
DESCRIPTION
MAPH561
Biomedical
Instrumentation
Examination
Duration
2 hrs
CORE/PREREQ
COURSE
UNITS
15
CORE/PREREQ
Theory of Devices
Examination
Duration
2 hrs
Core
COURSE
UNITS
15
MAPH503
Materials Science
2 hrs
Core
15
MAPH562
Radiotherapy Physics
2 hrs
15
MAPH551
Computer Applications
Software
Continous
Assessment
Core
15
MAPH563
Medical Imaging
2 hrs
15
MAPH552
Workshop Practice
Continous
.
Assessment
Core
15
MAPH564
Biophysics
2 hrs
15
Radiation and Environmental Protection
OPTIONAL COURSES:
Industrial Physics
346
CODE
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MAPH521
Instrumentation Physics
MAPH522
Computerized Interfacing
2 hrs
15
MAPH523
Metrology and Testing
2 hrs
15
MAPH524
Data and Computer

Networking
2 hrs
15
2 hrs
15
MAPH525
Examination
Duration
2 hrs
CORE/PREREQ
COURSE
UNITS
15
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MAPH571
Radiation Physics
MAPH572
Nuclear Power and

Non-ionizing Radiation
2 hrs
15
MAPH573
Biological effects of
ionizing radiation
2 hrs
15
MAPH574
Radiation Protection
and regulatory control
2 hrs
15
MAPH575
Radiation and
Environmental
Protection
2 hrs
15
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MAPH531
Examination
Duration
2 hrs
CORE/PREREQ
MAPH532
Energy Sources
2 hrs
15
MAPH533
Atmospheric Physics
2 hrs
15
Laser and Plasma Physics

DESCRIPTION
Examination
Duration
2 hrs
CORE/PREREQ
COURSE
UNITS
15
MAPH541
Physics and
Technology of Lasers
MAPH542
Fibre Optics
2 hrs
15
MAPH543
Industrial Applications
of Plasma
2 hrs
15
CORE/PREREQ
COURSE
UNITS
15
7.2 PART 2: Research Dissertation

A student shall register for the research dissertation, which
should be carried out for a period of six months for full time
study and 1 year for part time study. The Research Work may
commence at any time after the final coursework examination.
The Research Work may be undertaken either in the university,
at a firm to which the student is assigned or at any other
academic or non-academic institution approved by the
Department. The Dissertation will normally be submitted on or
before a given deadline.
COURSE
UNITS
15
CODE
Examination
Duration
2 hrs
CODE
DESCRIPTION
MAPH570
Research Dissertation
Examination
Duration
Written Report and
seminar presentation
CORE/PREREQ
core
COURSE
UNITS
80
8.
COURSE CONTENT
Core Courses
MAPH501
Theory of Devices
Review of solid state and semiconductor physics. Physical processes

involved in various devices. Parametric amplifiers. Low temperature
devices, Josephson junction, SQUIDS, high temperature
superconductivity. Theory of quantum electronic and plasma
devices, optical instability.
MAPH503
Materials Science
Nucleation, growth and crystallisation. Viscoelastic behaviour.

Rubbery, glassy, elastomeric states. Hardening, fracture, creep,
fatigue. Recovery, recrystallisation, annealing, oxidation, corrosion.
MAPH551 Computer Application Software
Word processing: Word-for-Windows, including Microsoft Draw,
etc.
Spreadsheets: Framework III, Excel 4 or 5. Assembly Language
programming for Intel 8085, Intel 8086, ST6-series microcontrollers.
Electronic circuit schematics and PCB layour: Tango, Electronic
Workbench.
Conversion of schematic and PCB layout. AutoCAD, etc. The
student will be assigned a series of exercises which will be assessed
for the purpose of the examination.
MAPH552 Workshop Practice
This course will involve a series of lectures and practical exercises in
the Departmental Workshop.
Content:
Mechanical design and construction: tools and workshop processes,
materials, interpretation technical drawings.
Electronics: prototype development boards, preparation of printed
circuit boards. Construction of electronic equipment. Fabrication of
PCBs, population of PCBs, wiring and assembly of complete units.
Visit to industries to study workshop practice in action, massproduction techniques, etc.
OPTIONAL COURSES
INDUSTRIALS PHYSICS
MAPH521 Instrumentation Physics
Sensors, theory of electro-mechanical transducers, measurement in
control systems. Noise in measuring instruments, lock-in amplifiers.
Analysis and interpretation of data. Special techniques: nucleonic
instrumentation, nuclear magnetic resonance scanning, ultrasonic
scanning, scanning electron microscopy, scanning tunneling
microscopy.
Laplace and Fourier transform, Mason's Theorem and applications.
Feed back theory, performance criteria and stability tests. Phased
locked feed back systems. State space representation of mechanical,
hydraulic, electrical and thermal systems. Fibre optical control
systems, fluidic control systems.
MAPH522: Computerized Interfacing
Digital systems: data flow control, multiplexing, demultiplexing.
Data acquisition using the IBM PC bus. Serial, parallel interface
devices and ports.
Microprocessors and microcontrollers: assembly language RISC.
Applications in control systems and in instrumentation. Data
logging, real-time monitoring.
MAPH523
Metrology and testing
Scientific and industrial standards. ISO-9000. Manufacturing

specifications and ratings. Product standardization. Testing:
destructive and non-destructive.
MAPH524
Data and Computer Networking
Network: LAN, Token ring, Ethernet. TCP/IP, Standards: OSI 7-layer

model, interconnectibility. X25. Packet switching.
Protocols,
Routing, Flow Control. File and message transfer. Distributed and
integrated systems. Network design, management and control.
MAPH525
Discrete time signals and systems: linear shift-invariant systems,

linear constant-coefficient differential equations, sampling of
continuous-time signals. Z-transform theorem and properties.
347
Discrete Fourier series: properties, finite-duration sequences,

discrete Fourier transform. Fast Fourier transform: Goertzel
algorithm, Computational considerations. Digital filters: flow graph
and matrix representation, basic network structures, computeraided design of digital filters. Image enhancement. Spectral analysis.
ENVIRONMENTAL PHYSICS
MAPH531
Theory of ecosystems. Monitoring the environment. Air pollution

modelling. Non-linear thermodynamics. Self organization in nonequilibrium systems.
MAPH532
Energy Sources
Heat transfer and fluid dynamics. Availability and economics of

energy. Solar collectors. Solar energy for heating and cooling.
Photovoltaic applications. Biofuels and other energy sources.
Energy Storage.
348
MAPH533
Atmospheric Physics
Measuring the properties of the atmosphere. Synoptic dynamics.

Atmospheric thermodynamics. Planetary boundary layer dynamics.
Convective dynamics. Cloud physics. Lightning.
LASER AND PLASMA PHYSICS
MAPH541
Physics and Technology of Lasers
Einstein coefficients and light amplification.

Two-level and
multilevel laser systems. Laser spiking of laser cavity. Q-switching.
Mode locking. Interaction of radiation field with matter. Types of
lasers. Power supply requirements. Pumping systems and switching
circuits. Design consideration for different laser systems, materials
and components used in laser systems. Lasers in metrology,
fabrication and testing. Safety.
MAPH542
Fibre Optics
Fibre theory and fabrication characteristics. Non-linear fibre optics:

pulse propagation, grating compression. Scattering. Raman optical
fibre amplifiers. Optical modulation and switching. Optoelectronics.
MAPH543
Industrial applications of plasma and lasers.
Industrial lasers. Processes: fabrication, analysis. Welding, drilling,

holography, manufacturing. Applications in agriculture, fire
detection, surveillance and range finding. Plasma devices. Plasma
processing design, plasma etching, spraying evaporation, coal
gasification. Power generation, control fusion. Inertial compression
of plasma by lasers.
MEDICAL PHYSICS
MAPH561
Medical Electronics
Electrical safety for medical devices. The basic building blocks of

medical instruments; the instrumentation amplifier, filters,
analogue to digital conversion. Recording and display devices.
Physiological measurements; the ECG, EEG, Pulse Oximeter and
Evoked Potentials. Electrical therapeutics; the defibrillator and
electrical diathermy. Computers in medicine: picture archiving and
retrieval; the physiological signals. Telemetry and ambulatory
monitoring.
MAPH562
Radiotherapy Physics
Brachytherapy and teletherapy devices using isotopes. The

production of X-rays, neutrons and sub-atom particles. Devices; the
linear accelerator, betatron and cyclotron. The measurement of
radiation; ionization chambers, scintillation detectors, diodes and
thermoluminescent dosimetry. Primary and secondary standards.
The treatment planning process; the simulator and computerized
treatment planning.
MAPH563
Medical Imaging
The history of medical imaging. The production of X-rays.

Advanced techniques in X-ray; the tomogram digital subtraction and
computerized tomography. Nuclear medicine. Ultrasound.
Thermography. Magnetic resonance imaging. The digital
management of medical images. Introduction to image processing.
MAPH564
Biophysics
Biophysical techniques and principles: electrophoresis including

capillary electrophoresis, gas chromatography, liquid
c h ro m a t o g ra p hy i n c l u d i n g h i g h p e r fo r m a n c e LC .
Spectrophotometry. Physics of large molecules: diffusion, bloodbrain barrier. Viscous flow in blood, lymph. Biophysical diagnostics:
sickle cell anemia. Signal techniques: laser surgery. Physical stress:
hypothermia, fatigue, dehydration.
RADIATION AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
MAPH571: Radiation Physics
Basic physics and mathematics used in radiation protection; Basic
nuclear physics; Radioactivity; Nuclear reactions; Basic mathematics
;Statistics; Interaction of radiation with matter; Charged particle
radiation; Uncharged radiation. Sources of radiation; Natural
radiation; Human made radioactive sources; Radiation generators;
Dosimetric quantities and their measurement units and related
calculations; Types of radiation detectors and their operating
principles, characteristics and limitations; Appropriate detectors for
a given radiation field and dosimetric quantities.
MAPH572: Nuclear Power and Non-ionizing Radiation
The basic knowledge in nuclear physics and related matters; the
physical propagation of electromagnetic radiation, its interaction
and effect on biological tissue, and methods for calculating
dosimetry of non-ionising radiation. The biological effects of timevarying electromagnetic fields and radiation on humans, animals
and isolated cell preparations. Reactor operation and fuel
composition, Reactor decommissioning, fuel storage and disposal.
MAPH573: Biological Effects of Ionizing Radiation
Effects of radiation at the molecular and the cellular level; The
mechanisms of different types of biological effects following
exposure to ionizing radiation; Deterministic and stochastic somatic
effects; Stochastic hereditary effects; Effects on the embryo and
foetus; The models used to derive risk coefficients for estimating the
detriment; The various pathways by which the public might be
exposed to radiation as a result of practices and the methods for
determining the doses.
MAPH574:
Radiation Protection and regulatory control.
T h e I C R P ' s c o n c e p t u a l f ra m ewo r k a n d i n t e r n a t i o n a l
recommendations in radiation protection and safe use of radiation
sources. The role played by international organizations in radiation
protection. The elements of a regulatory infrastructure for radiation
protection and safety; Estimation of the doses to individuals arising
from both external and internal exposures. The elements of a
regulatory infrastructure for radiation protection and safety.
Protection against occupational exposure; Medical exposures in
diagnostic radiology, radiotherapy and nuclear medicine. Exposure
of the public due to practices; Intervention in situations of chronic
and emergency exposure. Training the trainers; Protection against
occupational exposure in nuclear
Installations; Safe transport of radioactive material; radioactive waste
management.
MAPH 575: Radiation and Environmental Protection
The legislative framework of environmental protection.
Establishment and verification of systems for environmental
protection, considering both legal and economic aspects. Practical
review of environmental protection as applied in the nuclear and
related industries; Radiological and nuclear accidents, and
approaches to mitigating the consequences on the environment.
PART 2 COURSES
MAPH570: Research Dissertation
Research work is for a period of six months for full time study and 1
year for part time study. The Research Work may commence at any
time after the final coursework examination. The Research Work may
be undertaken either in the university, at a firm to which the student
is assigned or at any other academic or non-academic institution
approved by the Department. The Dissertation will normally be
submitted on or before a given deadline.
349
DEPARTMENT OF BIOCHEMISTRY
DEGREE IN BIOTECHNOLOGY (MBTC)
1.
Introduction
2.
Biotechnology an applicant will normally be required to have
obtained a BSc Honours Degree in Biochemistry, Biological
Sciences, Agriculture, Food Science and Technology and
Nutritional Sciences, Medical or Veterinary Science of this
degree.
2.2 Normally an applicant with a BSc Degree with a major in
Biochemistry, Biological Sciences, Agriculture, Food Science and
Nutrition, Medical or Veterinary Science with a 2.1 division pass or
better of this University or an equivalent degree will be required to
register to upgrade that degree to a BSc Honours Degree in
Biochemistry, Biological Sciences, Agriculture, Food Science and
Nutrition, Medical or Veterinary Science.
350
2.3 An applicant with an Honours Degree in Biochemistry, Biological

Sciences, Agriculture, Food Science and Nutrition, Medical or
Veterinary Science with a degree class of 2.2 of this University or an
equivalent, may be considered if she/he has a minimum of two
years of relevant experience, writes a qualifying examination and
3.

3.1 The programme will run for a period of 24 months on a full-time
basis and for a period of 48 months on a part-time basis.
3.2 Part I of the programme will be offered on a full-time basis for one
academic year or for two academic years on a part-time basis.
3.3 Part II will be offered for a period of 12 months on a full-time basis

and for a period of two years on a part-time basis.
4.

4.2 Part I will normally be taught in one academic year on a full-time
basis and in two academic years on a part-time basis.
4.3 At Part 1, each full-time student shall register for courses worth at
least 60 course units in each semester of the first year. If there are
core courses in the specialty that a student registers for, these
courses should normally be taken in the first semester. In a given
semester, certain optional courses may not be available depending
on the availability of staff and/or the number of students wishing
to register for those courses. In order to pass Part 1 a student shall
have to pass courses worth at least 120 course units including all
core courses for the chosen specialty. Each course has a weighting
of 20 course units and consists of 96 hours of teaching, 48 hours of
lectures and 48 hours of practical classes, site visits, field trips or
seminars.
first year in the case of full-time students. It will last 12 months for
full-time students 24 months for part time students.
5. The research component shall consist of a research project which will be

assessed based on a dissertation on an approved topic and three seminar
presentations given according to a timetable determined by the
Departmental Board at the start of the component. The length of the
dissertation shall normally be 12000-20000 words. The dissertation shall
normally be submitted on or before the end of the second year for a fulltime student or on or before the end of the fourth year for a full-time
student.
6. Scheme of Examinations
are taught, and the end of course examination will comprise of one
three-hour paper.
7.
7.1
The mark for each course will comprise the marks for continuous
assessment and the end of course examination in the ratio 25: 75.
7.2
Continuous assessment will include assignments and tests and
7.3
failing to do so may be allowed to supplement or repeat a course in
7.4
The research component will be assessed by continuous
assessment based on the three seminar presentations and the
dissertation in the ratio 10:15:75.
7.5
The taught and research components will each contribute to the
final mark in the ratio of 50:50.
8.
COURSES
8.1
Part 1:
There shall be five compulsory courses and two non compulsory
courses. MBTC 501, 502, 503, 504 and 505 are compulsory.
Code
Description
MBTC 501
Research Methods
Prerequisites
3 hours
20
MBTC 502
Basic Microbiology
and Fermentation I
3 hours
20
MBTC 503
Plant
Biotechnology I
3 hours
20
MBTC 504
Recombinant DNA
Technology I
3 hours
20
MBTC 505
Recombinant DNA
Technology II
3 hours
20
MBTC 504
Exam duration
Course Units
MBTC 506
Fermentation II
MBTC 502
3 hours
20
MBTC 507
Enzyme
Technology
MBTC 502
3 hours
20
MBTC 508
Plant
Biotechnology II
MBTC 503, 505
3 hours
20
MBTC 509
Immunology
MBTC 504, 505
3 hours
20
MBTC 510
Molecular Virology
MBTC 504, 505
3 hours
20
MBTC 511
Environmental
Biotechnology
MBTC 502
3 hours
20
8.2
Part 2
MBTC570
9.0.
Dissertation
120
MSc in Biotechnology Course Content
MBTC 501: Research Methods From Biosciences

MBTC 502: Basic Microbiology
Classification of microorganisms: basic bacteriology, virology and
parasitology: techniques for culturing microorganisms; aerobes and
anaerobes: metabolism: mutations and gene mapping:
bioenergetics.
MBTC 503: Basic Plant Biotechnology
Plant growth and development: plant growth regulating substances:
virus elimination: virus indexing: plant micropropagation and
hardening off: microtuberization: international germplasm
exchange and in vitro storage. A preliminary survey of regeneration,
transformation and genetic improvement.
MBTC 504: Recombinant DNA Technology I
Introduction to Biochemistry, including purification and
characterisation of proteins, humoral immunity and
immunochemical techniques, and enzyme kinetics. Cloning vectors
(plasmids, bacteriophages, cosmids and YACS). DNA restriction and
modifying enzymes. Creation of CDNA and genomic libraries.
Analysis of recombinants by DNA purification and characterization.
351
strategies. Detection and diagnosis of viral diseases. Transmission,

virus movement in nature. Economic importance and antiviral
strategies.
Southern and Northern blotting, nucleic acid probes (preparation

and labelling).
MBTC 505: Recombinant DNA Technology II
In vitro amplification of DNA by PCR and its various applications,
sequencing, site-directed in vitro mutagenesis, RFLPs RAPDs.
Expression systems (bacteria, yeast, insect and mammalian) and
detection of expressed products. Any new developments in the field.
MBTC 506: Advanced Fermentation
Mathematical models of fermentation; kinetics and stoichiometry of
microbial growth; examples of industrial fermentation; construction
of yeast genetics systems with greater fermentation efficiency;
fermentation design and control: downstream processing;
applications and implications.
352
MBTC 507: Advanced Plant Biotechnology

Anther culture; embryo rescue; somaclonal variation with respect to
drought tolerance and herbicide tolerance; regeneration systems;
protoplast technology; plant vectors; appropriate plasmid
constructs; selection markers; tissue-specific promoters; targeting of
useful crop improvement: legal aspects; environmental concerns.
MBTC 511: Environmental Biotechnology

Microbial ecology, Microbial biotransformations, bioremediation,
waste treatment, water treatment, biogas production, bioleaching,
microbial and enzymatic degradation of complex compounds,
phytoremediation, biorecovery, green technologies, biodegradable
polymers.
DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY AND

ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
CLIMATE SCIENCE AND MODELLING (CLIMOD)
1.
PREAMBLE
Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework hereinafter
referred to as the General Regulations and Faculty of Science Regulations
for the Degrees of Master of Science by Coursework and the Faculty of
Science Regulations for the Master of Science Degrees.
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
2.1. To be admitted into the programme, an applicant must normally
have a good honours degree in Geography and/or Environmental
Science, or Physics (class 2.1 or better).
2.2. A candidate with a 2.2 and at least three years of relevant work
experience shall be admitted after passing a qualifying examination.
3.
3.1. The programme shall run for 18 months on a full-time basis or 36
months, on a part time basis
3.2. Part 1 of the programme will be offered on a full-time basis for two
semesters or on a part .time basis for four semesters.
MBTC 508: Enzyme Technology

A study of enzyme kinetics; ligands and functional group
modification; immobilized enzymes; industrial scale and enzyme
purification; substrate analogues; bioreactors.
MBTC 509: Applied Immunology
Fundamental immunology: Acquired immune response (antigens,
cellular components of response, antigen recognition molecules,
generation of diversity, activation of the response, role of
macrophages, structure/ function of lymphoid system, cytokines,
control of the response).
Applied immunology; Immunochemical techniques, cell isolation
and characterisation, vaccine development, antibodies as
experimental tools, manipulation of the immune response.
MBTC 510: Virology
Introduction to viruses, composition, structure, classification and
nomenclature of plant viruses. Genome organisation and expression
3.3. Part 2 of the programme shall be offered on a full-time for a period

of 6 months after the end of the second semester of Part I and part-
Course
Code
Description
Weight
Course
Units
CLIMOD001
Fluid Dynamics of the Atmosphere
20
CLIMOD002
Spatial Modelling for Climate Sciences
20
CLIMOD003
Atmospheric Physics
20
CLIMOD004
Environmental Modelling
20
CLIMOD005
Climate Change Modelling
20
CLIMOD 006
Research Methods
20
CLIMOD 007
20
CLIMOD 008
Remote Sensing
20
353
CHEMISTRY DEPARTMENT
PROPOSED REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF
SCIENCE DEGREE IN CHEMISTRY (MCH)
Part 1: Optional Courses

Course
Code
Description
CLIMOD009
Atmospheric Chemistry
20
CLIMOD 010
Terrestrial Ecosystems and Climate change
20
CLIMOD011
Climate Change and Agriculture
20
CLIMOD 012
Climate change Mitigation and Adaptation
20
CLIMOD013
Remote sensing of the Atmosphere
20
CLIMOD 014
Remote sensing of the Earth Surface
20
CLIMOD 015
Time series and Spectral analysis
20
CLIMOD016
Modelling Biogeochemical Cycles
20
CLIMOD017
Climate Change and Health
20
CLIMOD018
Climate Change and Disasters
20
Weight
Course
Units
1.
PREAMBLE
Academic Regulation for Masters Degrees by Coursework and the
2.
2.1
1.2 Normally an applicant with a BSc degree with a major in

Chemistry with a 2.1 division pass or better of this University
or an equivalent degree will be required to register to
upgrade that degree to a BSc Honours Degree in Chemistry.
Not all of the above Optional Courses will necessarily be available

each year.
354
1.3 An applicant with a BSc Honours Degree in Chemistry with a

degree class of 2.2 of this University or an equivalent degree
may be considered if she/he has a minimum of two years of
relevant experience, writes a qualifying examination and
Part 2: Core
Course
Code
Description
CLIMOD570
Dissertation and Research seminar
Weight
Course
Units
80
To be eligible for admission to the Master of Science Degree in

Chemistry an applicant will normally be required to have
obtained a BSc Honours Degree in Chemistry of this University
with a degree class of or better, or an equivalent degree.
3.

3.1
The programme will run for a period of 24 months on a fulltime basis and for 48 months on a part-time basis.
3.2 Part I of the programme will be offered on a full-time basis for

one academic year, or for two academic years on a part-time
basis.
3.3 Part II will be offered on full-time basis for a period of one
academic year, or on part-time basis for a period of two
academic years.
4.

4.1 The programme will consist of two parts. Part I will be the
coursework component, and Part II will be the research
component.
4.2 At Part I, each student shall register for courses worth at least
120 course units in the first year of the programme. Students
will be required to take all three compulsory courses and
another three from the chosen optional courses. Each course
has 96 hours of teaching (At least 48 hours of lectures and 48
hours of practical's and seminars).
4.3 Part II of the programme shall normally start after the end of
PartI.
4.4 Part II shall consist of a research project which will be based on a
dissertation on an approved topic. The length of the
dissertation shall be 12000-20000 words. The research project
shall be undertaken over a period of one academic year on a full
time basis, or over two years on a part time basis. The
dissertation must normally be submitted one month before the
end of project period.
5.
7.
6.1 The mark for each course will comprise the marks for
continuous assessment and the formal examination in the ratio
40:60, but in order to proceed to Part II, a student must have
obtained at least 50% pass mark in the formal examination of
the respective taught course.
6.2
Continuous assessments will be in accordance with Faculty
Regulations, and will include assignments, tests, practical's and
seminar presentations, and students will be notified of their
A student must pass Part I before proceeding to Part II. A

student who fails a course will be allowed to supplement or
repeat a course in accordance with General Regulations
6.4
Part II shall be assessed on the basis of the dissertation.
6.5
The taught and research components will each contribute 50%

of the final mark.
COURSES
PART 1
Exam Unit
Code
Description
Duration
Course units
MCH 501
3 hours
20
MCH 502
Analytical Chemistry 1
3 hours
20
MCH 503
3 hours
20
MCH 504
Organic Chemistry 1
3 hours
20
MCH 511
Physical Chemistry 2*
3 hours
20
MCH 512
Analytical Chemistry 2*
3 hours
20
MCH 513
Inorganic Chemistry 2*
3 hours
20
MCH 514
Organic Chemistry 2*
3 hours
20
MCH 51 5
Research Methods
3 hours
20
5.1 Courses will be examined at the end of the semester in which

they are taught, or at the end of the academic year. The end of
course examination for each course will comprise of one threehour paper.
6.
6.3
* Four optional courses offered, of which the student must choose two.
Part II
Exam Unit
Code
Description
MCH570
Dissertation
Duration
Course units
120
355
8.
AWARD OF DEGREE
8.1 The degree shall be awarded in accordance with the provisions
of the General Academic Regulations for the Masters Degree
by Coursework
for a Master of Science Degree by course work.
9.
COURSE CONTENT
I. MCH501 Physical Chemistry 1
356
Statistical and Chemical Thermodynamics

Statistical Thermodynamics: Basic Terms: probability, cell, and phase space,
micro And macro states, thermodynamic probability, statistical weight factor,
assembly, Ensemble and its classification and statistical equilibrium.
Derivation of Boltzmann-Maxwell, Bose-Einstein and Fermi-Dirac statistics,
Partition function and derivations of translational, rotational, vibrational and
electronic partition Functions and thermodynamic functions such as internal
energy, heat capacity, Entropy, work function, pressure, heat content, etc.
Partition function and third Law of thermodynamics. Applications of
partition function to monoatomic gases,Diatomic molecules, equilibrium
constant and equilibrium constants of metathetic Reactions. Fugacity and
Activity: Definition of fugacity and its determination by graphical, Equation
of state, approximate and generalized methods. Variation of fugacity With
temperature and pressure. Fugacity of solids and liquids. Mixture of ideal
Gases and real gases. Activities and Activity coefficients in liquid solution.
The Debye-Huckel Theory: Ionic interactions in solutions. Electrical potential
of Ionic atmosphere. Electrical free energy and activity coefficients. Mean
ionic Activity coefficients (D-H limiting law). Applications of D-H theory:
quantitative And qualitative, solubility in presence of added electrolyte and
osmotic Coefficient. The D-H theory in more concentrated solutions. D-H
theory and Equilibrium constant. The properties of solutions: Ideal solutions:
Properties, the Duhem Margules Equation, vapor pressure curves.
Composition of liquid and vapor in equilibrium Influence of temperature on
gas solubility and solid-liquid equilibria. Non ideal solutions: Deviation from
ideal behavior, vapor pressure curves, Liquid And vapor compositions.
General equations for liquid mixtures. Partially miscible Liquids. Dilute
solutions: Henry's law. Determination of molecular weights from Freezing

and boiling points. Free energy and Chemical reactions: Chemical equilibrium
and the equilibrium Constant: Equilibrium in homogeneous gaseous systems.
Homogeneous reactions In liquid solutions. Homogeneous reactions in dilute
solutions. Chemical equilibria in heterogeneous systems. Free energy change
in chemical reactions:
The reaction isotherm, standard free energy of reaction, the direction of
chemical Change. Variation of equilibrium constant with pressure and
temperature. Influence of temperature on heterogeneous reactions.
Integration of the Van't Hoff equation. Variation of standard free energy with
temperature. Simultaneous equillibria. Formation of standard free energies
and entropy changes and their applications. Macromolecular Physical
Chemistry, Basic concept of polymer chemistry: Classification of polymers.
Types of Polymer chains. Stereo regular polymers. Polymer nomenclature.
Functionality and polymerization concept. Chain polymerization: Free
radical polymerization: Methods of initiating free radical polymerization.
Chain transfer reactions. Kinetics of free radical polymerization and chain
transfer reactions. Factor affecting radical polymerization and properties of
the resulting polymer. Ionic (Catalytic) polymerization: Kinetics of cationic
and anionic polymerization. Coordination polymerization. Molecular weight
distribution. Copolymerization and its kinetics. Evaluation of reactivity ratios.
Methods of free radical polymerization: Bulk polymerization, solution
polymerization, emulsion polymerization and solid phase polymerization.
Polycondensation: Reaction route of polyfunctional compounds. Kinetics of
polycondensation reaction. Molecular weight control in polycondensation.
Nonlinear polycondensation. Statistics of linear polycondensation. Effect of
monomer concentration and temperature on direction of polycondensation
reaction. Polycondensation equilibrium and molecular weight of polymer.
Factors affecting the rate of polycondensation and molecular weight of the
polymer. Method of polycondensation: Melt, interfacial, solution and solid
phase polycondensation. Stepwise polymerization and ring scission
polymerization: Thermodynamics of ring transformation to a linear polymer.
Effect of temperature and monomer concentration on ring-polymer
equilibrium. Kinetics and mechanism of ring scission polymerization. Effect
of activator concentration and temperature on ring scission polymerization
and molecular weight of the polymer.
Symmetry and Group Theory

Symmetry and Group Theory: Symmetry elements and symmetry operations,
Definitions of group, subgroups, relation between orders of a finite group and
its Subgroup. Conjugacy relation and classes. Point symmetry group.
Schonflie's symbols, representations of groups by matrices (representation
for the Cn,Cnv,Cnh,Dnh etc. groups to be worked out explicitly). Character of
a representation. The great orthogonality theorem and its importance.
Character tables and their use in chemical bonding, Molecular orbital theory
and Hybridization. Strong field and Weak field approximation: Derivation of
Sine formula, Weak Field approximation : Splitting of the free ion terms of d2
in an octahedral Field, calculation in weak field approximation the energy of
various terms: 3A2g, 3T2g and 3T1g derived from 3F (d2) in an Oh field.
Strong Field approximation: Determining multiplicities by the method of
descen ding symmetry. Calculation of energy of various terms within the
frame-work of strong field approximation. Physical
And Materials
Chemistry, Macromolecular Physical Chemistry II Molecular weights and size:
Purification and fractionation of polymers: Fractional precipitation, partial
dissolution, gradient elution and GPC methods.
Molecular weight
determination: End-group analysis, cryoscopy, ebulliometry, membrane
osmometry, vapor pressure osmometry, light scattering (asymmetric and
Zimm plot methods), GPC and Ultracentrifugation (Sedimentation velocity
and equilibrium methods). Solution viscosity and molecular size:
Determination of viscosity and types of viscosities. Determination of intrinsic
viscosity, Huggin's constant and Kraemer's constant. Intrinsic viscosity and
molecular weight. Intrinsic viscosity and size, Chain branching. Super
molecular structure of polymers: Physical methods of investigation of
molecular structure of polymers: Optical and electron microscopy, X-ray,
electron and neutron diffraction techniques. Morphology of crystalline
polymers: Lamellar single crystals, fibrillar and globular crystals; Spherulites.
Phase transition in polymers: State of matter and phase state. First and
second Order phase transitions. Crystallization and glass transition. Factors
affecting crystallizability and glass transition temperature. Effect of
molecular weight and plasticizers on Tg. Glass transitions of copolymers. The
relation between Tg and Tm. and importance of Tg. Mechanism and kinetics
of polymer crystallization. Thermodynamics of melting and crystallization.
Melting temperatures of polymers. Free volume and packing density of
polymers.
II. MACH 502 Analytical Chemistry 1

Advanced Classical Analysis: Statistics/Chemometrics, Gravimetric Analysis,
Advanced volumetric analysis including acid base, redox, precipitation,
complexometric, potentiometric and conductometric titrations, Non
aqueous titrations, Use of organic reagents in the extraction and separation of
inorganic ions, Kinetic methods of analysis.
Electrochemical Methods of Analysis
Electrogravimetric and coulometric methods ( constant current and constant
potential coulometry), DC Polarography, Differential pulse polarography,
Pulse polarography, Stripping voltametry Practicals: Electrochemistry,
instrumentation, Classical methods, environmental analysis.
Instrumental Analysis
Analytical Spectroscopy: UV/Visible spectrophotometry, Infrared
spectrophotometry, Molecular fluorescence, Chemiluminescence; Atomic
absorption, Flame photometry, Emission spectroscopy, Related
instrumentation, Separation Methods: General theory of separation, solvent
extraction, counter current distribution, chromatography. Paper
chromatography, thin layer chromatography, Gas-liquid chromatography,
Classical column chromatography, Modern liquid chromatography, HPLC,
Ion-exchange chromatography, Ion chromatography, Molecular exclusion
chromatography or size exclusion chromatography, Affinity
chromatography, Electrophoresis and electro-focusing techniques,
Supercritical fluid chromatography.
Practicals: Spectroscopy and separation
III. MCH503 Inorganic Chemistry 1
Quantum Mechanics and its applications: MO-VB Theory: BornOppenheimer Approximation, Hydrogen Molecule ion. LCAO-Mo and VB
treatments of hydrogen molecule. Electron Density, forces and their role in
chemical bonding. Hybridization and valence MO's of H2O, NH3 and CH4
.Huckel pi-electron theory And its applications to Ethylene, Butadiene and
Benzene. Idea of Self-consistent Field method. Magneto chemistry:
Definition of Magnetic Properties, Types of magnetic bodies, Diamagnetism
and Pascal's Constant, Russell-Saunders or LS Coupling, Multiple widths
Large compared to kT, multiple widths small compared to kT, Stereo chemical
applications of Magnetic Properties of the First Transition Series, Lanthanides
and actinides, Determination of magnetic susceptibility by Gouy's Method,
357
358
Derivation of Van Vleck formula for Susceptibility. Mssbauer spectroscopy:

Introduction of Mssbauer effect, Isomer-Shift, Magnetic hyperfine
interactions. Quadrupole moment. Electric field Gradient. Quadrupole
splitting. Applications in structure determination. Uses of Inorganic reagents
in inorganic analysis: General discussion and uses Of some inorganic
reagents: Potassium bromate (KBrO3), potassium iodate (KIO3), ammonium
vanadate (NH4VO3), ceric suphate [Ce (SO4)2], ethylene diamine tetra acetic
acid (EDTA), Uses of Organic reagents in inorganic analysis: Cupferron, DMG,
dithiozone, aluminum, oxine, dithiooxamide, a-benzoinoxime, -nitro-naphthol, -nitroso--naphthol, diphenyl carbazone, diphenyl carbazide,
anthranilic acid, tannin, pyragallol, benzidine, salicylaldoxime, ophenanthroline. Organometallic Compounds: Introduction and Nature of
bonding in organometallic compounds of transition metals: s -bonded
organometallic compounds: Introduction, Classification and synthesis of bonded organotransition metal compounds, general characteristics,
chemical reactions, bonding and structure. bonded organometallic
compounds : Introduction and Classification of bonded organometallic
compounds 2alkene complexes: Preparative methods, physical properties,
chemical properties, bonding of structure. (b) 3 allyl (or enyl) complexes
preparation, physical of chemical properties.
Bioinorganic chemistry: Introduction to bioinorganic chemistry.
Classification and role of metal ions according to their action in Biological
System. Essential trace elements and chemical toxicology: Introduction of
trace elements. The essential ultratrace metals and non-metals. Iodine and
thyroid hormones, toxic elements, toxicity and deficiency. Transport and
storage of proteins: Metalloporphyrins, oxygen carriers-hemoglobin and
myoglobin, Physiology of blood. Electron spin resonance: Introduction to
Electron Spin Resonance, technique of electron spin resonance, interaction
between nuclear spin and electron spin:- hyper fine splitting, calculation and
energies of Zeeman levels, calculations of energies, frequency and the ESR
spectrum when one electron influenced by a single proton and one electron
delocalize over two equivalent protons.
Ion-Exchangers and their
applications: General introduction, classification of ion-exchangers and their
applications in the separation of following: Zinc and Magnesium, Chloride and
bromide, Cobalt and Nickel,KMnO4 and K2Cr2O7
Bioinorganic Chemistry
Transport and storage of metals: Transport and storage of Alkali and Alkaline
Earth Metals, Ionophores, Na/K (Sodium/Potassium)pump, Calcium Pump,
Scheme for (Ca2+,Mg2+)-ATPase, Ferritin, Transferrin, Transport and storage
of Iron in Plants, storage of Iron in microorganisms. Electron carriers:
Cytochromes Electron Carriers, Classification of Cytochromes, Cytochromes
c, Cytochromes b, Cytochromes P-450. Metalloenzymes: Mechanism of
E n z y m e Ac t i o n , M e t a l I o n s i n C a t a l y s i s , I s o m e ra s e s a n d
Synthetases,Adenosylcobalmin and Cynocobalmin (Vitamin -B12),
Absorption, Transport and Metabolic Function of Vitamin B12, Nitrogen
Cycle and its Fixation, Iron-Sulphur(Fe-S) Proteins. Photoredox and Nonprotein Metallobiomolecules: Chlorophyll (The Magnesium porpyrins),
Photosynthesis, Light Reaction, Dark Reaction: The Calvin Cycle. Metals and
its Complexes as Therapeutic Agents: General Remarks,Anticancer
Drugs(Platinum Complexes) Antiarthritis Drugs (Gold, Copper and its
Complexes).
IV. MCH 504 Organic Chemistry 1
Reaction path way: Homolytic and Heterolytic fission, Different types of
arrow notation, Electrophile and Nucleophile. Reactions Intermediate:
Carbonium ion, Carbanion, Free radical, Carbene, Nitrene, Benzene,
Enamines. Organic Reactions like: Aldol, Baeyer-Villiger, Barbier-Wieland,
Barton, Bechamp, Birch, Bouveault, Chi Chi Babin, Clemmensen, Dieckmann,
Darzen, Dakein, Diels Alder, ENE, Elbs persulphate, Favorskii, Friedal-crafts,
Grignard, Hofmann Loffler Freytag, Hydroboration Leuckart, Mannich,
Meerwien-pondorf, Michaedl addition, Oppenauer, Perkin, Reimer-Tiemann,
Reformatsky, Robinson-annulation, Rosenmund, Shapiro, Sharpless,
asymmetric epoxidation, Stobbe, Storke enamine, Wittig, Wolff Kishner,
Wilgerodt and other important reactions not listed above. Molecular
rearrangements like: Pinacol-pinacolone, Wagner-Meerwein, Demjanov,
Benzil-Benzilic acid,Favorskii, Arndt-eistert synthesis, Neber, Beckmann,
Hoffman, Curtius, Schmidt, Baeyer-Villiger, Shapiro reaction. Important
Reagents: Baker yeast, D.D.Q., Dicyclohexyl carbodimide, 1,3-Dithiane,
Gillman's reagent, Lithium diisopropylamine, Lithium dimethyl cuprate,
Osmium tetroxide, Selenium dioxide, Trimethyl silyliodide, Tri-n-butylene
hydride, Woodward and Prevost hydroxyation, Wilkinson's catalyst, Phase
transfer catalyst, Crown ethers and Merrifield resin, Peterson's synthesis and
other reagents not listed above. Pericyclic Reactions: Introduction: Stereo
chemistry, Theoretical basis of pericyclic reach M. O. theory and symmetry

property reactant and product orbital, Cycloaddition reaction [2+2] and
[4+2], Electrolytic reaction and sygmotropic rearrangement.
Photochemistry: Introduction, Electronic transition, Job lenskii diagram,
photosensitizations, photochemistry of carbonyl compound, unsaturated
system, aromatic and Heterocyclic compounds Aromaticity: Nonbenzene
aromatic compounds, azulenes, Tropolener (4n+2) Huckel rule and it's
applications.
V. MCH 511 Physical Chemistry 2
Nuclear And Radio Chemistry
Brief introduction of radioactivity, mass defect, binding energy, mean binding
Energy of stable nuclei. Disintegration theory: Nuclear stability and group
displacement law. Synthesis of radioisotopes: 14C, 3H, 35S, 36Cl, 82Br, 131I,
32P. Contribution of the discovery of artificial radioactivity in the field of
heavy element chemistry. Detection and measurement of radioactivity:
Ionization chamber, Geiger- Muller, proportional, scintillation counters,
Wilson cloud chamber, Health physics instrumentation: Film badges, Pocket
ion chambers, portable counters and survey meters, Accelerators: Van de
Graff and cyclotron. Nuclear fission and fusion. Nuclear reactor:
Characteristics of nuclear reactors and their applications. Nuclear reactors in
India. The four factor formula:The reproduction factor, reactor power, life and
critical size of reactor, and breeder Isotope effects and isotopic exchange
reactions: Isotope effect: Definition, physical and chemical isotope effects.
Generalities of isotope effects. Isotopic exchange: basic concept,
characteristics of isotopic exchange, mechanism of isotopic exchange,
kinetics of homogenous and heterogeneous isotopic exchange reactions,
selfdiffusion, and surface measurements. Primary radiation Chemical
Process, Direct interaction of radiation with matter, ionization, excitation,
neutron impact. Basic reactions involving active species produced in the
primary act, and Radiation dosimetry. Tracer: selection of radioisotopes as
tracer, Application of radioisotopes as tracersanalytical, physicochemical,
medical, agriculture and industrial applications. Neutron activation analysis.
Radiometric titrations and isotope dilution techniques.
Radiopharmaceutical, radioimmunoassay and radiation sterilization.
Physical And Materials Chemistry

Chemistry Of Materials
Thermal analysis of materials: Importance and applications of thermal
analysis in various fields of chemistry. Effects of various operating parameters
on thermal analysis. Derivation of general kinetic relationship. Single and
multiple heating rate methods for DSC/DTA and TGA techniques.(For
DSC/DTA: Kissinger, Ozawa, Borchardt and Daniels, Reich and FreemanCarroll methods. For TGA: Freeman-Anderson, Chatterjee, Friedman, Ozawa
and Flynn and Wall methods). Determination of thermal stability indexes,
softening temperature, flammability and glass transition temperature. Viscoelastic behavior of polymers: Introduction, Linear visco-elastic behavior:
Maxwell and Kelvin-Voigt models and creep behavior. Stress relaxation and
dynamic mechanical behavior. Mechanical spectra, Effect of molecular
weight, cross link density, crystallinity, tacticity, plasticizers, blending and
copolymerization on mechanical properties. Mechanical tests: Stress-strain
properties in tension. Fatigue test, impact test, tear resistance, abrasion
resistance, hardness. Optical properties: Transparent, opaque and translucent
materials, color, gloss, haze and transparency. Electrical properties: Volume
resistivity, dielectric constant and loss factor, dielectric strength, arc
resistance and electronic properties. Electrical conductivities of solid
polymers, Contact electrification and electrets, Frequency and temperature
dependence of dielectric constant and loss, Factors affecting dielectric
properties. Composite materials: Introduction, principles, properties and
classification of fiber- reinforced composites. Particulate composites
dispersion hardened composites. Mechanism of strengthening. Polymer
processing: Types of plastics, elastomers and fibers, Compounding and
processing techniques: Calendaring, diecasting, rotational casting, film
casting.
VI. MCH 512 Analytical Chemistry 2
Electrochemical Methods of Analysis: Amperometric titrations, Adsorptive
stripping voltametry, Square-wave voltametry, Electrode kinetics,
Potentiometry electrode, reference electrodes, metallic indicators and ion
selective electrodes, Biosensors.
Chemical Instrumentation
Elementary electronics, Microprocessor control, Computer languages and
computer interfacing. Laboratory management Practicals: Electrochemistry,
instrumentation, Classical methods, environmental analysis.
359
Analytical Spectroscopy
Raman spectroscopy and lasers, NMR spectroscopy, Electron spin resonance,
Mass spectrometry including electron impact, chemical ionization, field
ionization, desorption mass spectroscopy, plasma- MS, fast atom
bombardment-MS, quadropole-MS, spark source and time of flight.
Photocoustic spectroscopy: Fourier Transform Methods: FT- IR, FT-NMT, FTMS, FT-Raman spectrometry. Practical: Spectroscopy, hyphenated
techniques GC-MS, thermal analysis Radio Chemical Methods Of Analysis:
Theory counting statistics, Production for isotopes, Neutron activation
analysis gamma ray spectroscopy, Isotope dilution analysis, X-Ray Analysis,
X-ray diffraction, X-ray fluorescence Practicals: Spectroscopy and separation
Surface Analysis Techniques: Auger emission spectroscopy, Secondary
ionization mass spectroscopy, Ion scattering spectroscopy.
Thermal Methods of analysis: Thermogravimetric analysis, Differential
thermal analysis,
360
Selected Methods of Analysis

Automation in chemical analysis: Introduction, difference of automatic and
automated instrument, merits and demerits of automation, unit operation in
chemicals analysis, flow injection analysis-principle, instruments and
applications, discrete automatic systems, elemental analyzer, centrifugal
analyzer Atomic spectroscopy: Origins of atomic spectra, production of
atoms and ions, atomic emission spectrometry, atom absorption
spectrometry. Thermal methods of chemical analysis: Thermogravimetry,
Differential thermal analysis, Thermometry titration and Differential
scanning calorimetry: Principle, methodology, instrumentation and
applications
Raman spectroscopy: Raman effect, Mechanism of Raman effect, Advantages
and differences of Raman spectroscopy over IR spectroscopy, Difference
between fluorescence and Raman spectroscopy, Nature of Raman spectra,
Theory spectroscopy, Raman effect and molecular structure, Advances and
limitation of Raman spectroscopy
Electro chromatography: Principle of electrophoresis, experimental
assembly zone electrophoresis, Curtain electrophoresis, Applications of
electro chromatography, Reverse osmosis, Electro dialysis, Capillary
electrophoresis and applications.
Ion Exclusion Chromatography: Mechanism, matrices used, theory and

applications.
VII. MCH 513 Inorganic Chemistry 2
Statistical data analysis: Classification and definitions of errors. Accuracy,
precision, standard and pooled precision deviations. The t-test when an
accepted value is known, paired t-test, t-test, with multiple samples.
Rejection of data (Q-test), control charts and linear least squares. Statistical
consideration in radio activity, Use of computer in chemistry and industry
data mining patents, intellectual property rights and documentation aspects
in various regulatory affairs, Unit processes and unit operations, Nitration,
oxidation, reduction, sulphonation,
Animation, and other unit processes. Size reduction, Mixing, crystallization,
distillation, purification methods, chiral separation scale up operations from
lab to Kilo scale and pilot plant operations. Catalysis in industrial
applications: Phase Transfer catalyst, concept of Green Chemistry and atom
economy isolation of natural product based drugs and aromatics and
neutraceuticals.
Nano Technology: Introduction of nano materials and their size, the
fundamental science behind nanotechnology, Nanotechnology references,
M. Ratner and D. Ratner, Pearson Pro-drugs, drug delivery systems,
polymorphism, Selected topics in natural and synthetic food colours,
synthetic dyes in current use.
Selected Topics in Inorganic Chemistry
Catalysis: Homogeneous and Heterogeneous catalysis involving metal
complexes and organometallic compounds. Oxidative addition reductive
elimination, Insertion and desinsertion reactions, Hydroformylation,
Hydrogenetion, Carboxilation and Polymerisation. Fischer-trosch process.
Watergas shift reaction. Inorganic Polymers: Silicon Polymers, Organo Silicon
Polymers, Synthesis and their uses. Coordination Polymers: Nature and
reaction yielding coordination polymers. Synthesis of coordination polymer,
Use of polymeric ligands in synthesis of coordination polymers. Boron
Polymers: Different Boron polymers having B-H, B-N, B-P, B-B, B-O and B-C
bonds,Various uses of Inorganic polymers. Organometallic Compounds: 4cyclobutadyne Complexes, 5-cyclpentadynyl d-block metal Complexes,
fluxional Organometallic Compounds, Preparative methods, typical

reactions and applications. Cordination Chemistry: Reaction
Mechanism,Substitution Reaction of Octahedral Complexes, nature of
substitution, Reaction, Theoretical approach to substitution mechanism,
nucleophilic reactivity, Nature of central atom, Kinetic application of crystal
field theory, Substitution reaction of Co(III) complexes, Replacement of coordinated water, Acid catalysis. Stereochemical changes in octahedral
complexes: Molecular rearrangement complexes, Reaction of geometrical
and optical isomers, Isomerisation and racemisation of octahedral complex,
Ligand stereospecificity. Substitution Reaction of Square-Planer Complexes:
Transeffect and its theories, Mechanism of substitution reaction of Platinum
(II) complexes. Oxidation-Reduction Reaction: Outer sphere mechanism,
Inner sphere mechanism, two electron transfer, Application to synthesis of
coordination compounds. Complex Equilibria: Introduction, Computation of
stability constant from equilibrium data, Basic principle, Mathematical
functions and their interrelationships. Method of computing stability
constant: Method based on Half integral n values, Correction method,
Graphical methods, Numerical methods, Experimental determination of
composition and stability . Spectroscopic Methods: Methods of continuous
variations, pH-metric Irving-Rossotti method.
Bonding in Complexes
Theoretical Principles of Crystal Field Theory: Brief introduction to Spherical
harmonics. The shape of d-orbitals, Derivation of crystal field potential for
the tetragonal cubic and square plannar arrangement of ligands around
metal ion. Transformation of these potential from Cartesian to spherical
harmonics. Effect of V (Oct) and d1 system: Evaluation of the various integral
Involved, Solution of the secular determinant to obtain energies and
Corresponding wave functions. Crystal field splitting diagram for Oh,Td,
square plannar systems. Simple application of CFSE. Many electron system:
R.S.Coupling. Hund's and ground level, Determination of the function (L, Ml ,
S, Ms).Corresponding to the terms 3F, 3P, 1G, 1P and 1S obtained from d2
system by R.S.coupling. Application of group theory to vibrational
spectroscopy: Symmetry and Shapes of AB2, AB3, AB4, AB5, and AB6, mode
of bonding of ambidentate Ligands, ethylene dimine and diketonato
complexes, application of resonance Raman spectroscopy.
Electronic Spectra and Magnetic Properties of Transition Metal

Complexes: Spectroscopic ground states, correlation, Orgel and TanabeSugano diagrams for transition metal complexes (d1-d9 states), Calculations
of Dq, B and parameters, charge transfer spectra, spectroscopic method of
Assignment of absolute configuration in optically active metal chelates and
Their stereo chemical information, anomalous magnetic moments,
magnetic Exchange coupling and spin crossover.
VIII. MCH 514 Organic Chemistry 2
Advanced Medicinal Chemistry
Introduction to Medicinal Chemistry: Important terminology, Drug Design:
Development of new drugs, procedures followed in drug design, concepts of
lead identification and lead modification, structure-activity relationship
(SAR), factor affecting bioactivity, resonance, inductive effect, Isosterism,
Bio-isosterism and Spatial considerations, History and Development of
QSAR. Physicochemical parameters: Lipophilicity, electronic parameters,
steric parameters, Shelton and surface activity parameters and redox
potentials. Free Wilson analysis, Hansch analysis, Relationship between FreeWilson and Hansch analysis. Other Statistical methods. Pharmacokinetics:
Introduction to drug absorption, disposition, drug Metabolism, elimination.
Important pharmacokinetics parameters in defining Drug disposition and in
therapeutics. Mention of uses of pharmacokinetics in Drug development
process. Concept of prodrug and soft drug. Pharmacodynamics:
Introduction, concept of drug receptors interactions. Theories of drug
activity relationship, treatment of diseases by enzyme Stimulation and
enzyme inhibition, elementary treatment of drug receptor Interaction, LD50,
ED50, MIC and MEC etc. (Mathematical derivations of Equation
excluded).Membrane active drugs (Sulphonamides), xenobiotics and
Significance of drug metabolism in medicinal chemistry. Introductory
exposure of topics related to physiology, biochemistry and molecular
biology. Pharmacognocy: Natural products as pharmaceuticals, important
techniques In isolation of natural products, Case study of total synthesis of
natural drug Substances. Chirality: Chiral synthesis, racemic drugs,
separation and strategies for Enantiomeric pure drugs. Stereochemistry:
Fundamental of Stereochemistry, Important terminology of
stereochemistry, nomenclature etc., resolution, asymmetric synthesis, R and
S configuration, E and Z isomer, optical activity due to molecule dissymmetry
(allenes, spirans, diphenyl system). Conformational Analysis: Chirality,
361
mono-, di- and polysubstituted cyclohexane, decaline derivatives,

cholesterol. Stereo chemistry of fused ring and bridge ring and spirans, Stereo
selective and stereo regulator polymerization and other related topics,
Stereochemistry of N, S, P, As, S and B compounds, Advanced topics in
stereochemistry.
IX. Course MCH515
362
Research Methods
Definition of research & Outline of Scientific Research Process: Definition of
research, Defining a research problem, Literature review, Research objectives,
Hypotheses, Methods, Results , Discussion & Conclusions , Generating ideas:
Brainstorming, Use of systematic questions as prompts, Use of social and
ethical considerations to explore audience impacts, Finding information in
libraries or databases, Forming potential thesis or point of view, Writing a
research proposal, Steps in the development of a research proposal, Research
problem, Literature review, Objectives, Hypotheses, Methods, Work plan,
Budget Writing of a Dissertation: Introduction, Pertinent review of relevant
literature, Problem statement and justification, Objectives and hypotheses,
Materials and Methods, Sampling and data Collection, Data analysis
methods, Dissertation/Article Results section, Role of results section,
Discussion, Implications of the results, Presentation of discussion, Abstract,
Role of the abstract, References. Use of libraries and reference managers,
Various Spreadsheets, Statistical and Reference Management Softwares
used for research.
DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY AND

ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
Regulations for the Masters of Science degree in
Environmental Policy and Planning (MEPPS)
1. PREAMBLE
referred to as the General Regulations and Faculty of Science Regulations
for the Degrees of Master of Science by Coursework and the Faculty of

Science Regulations for the Master of Science Degrees.
2.1 A good honours degree, at 2.1 or better in Geography or
Environmental Science. Candidates with good honours degree in a
related discipline such as Agricultural, Biological and Physical
sciences may be admitted with the approval Senate.
2.2. A candidate with a 2.2 and at least three years of relevant work
experience shall be admitted after passing a qualifier examination.
3.
3.1 The programme shall run for three semesters on a full-time basis or
six semesters, on a part time basis
3.2 Part I of the programme shall be offered on a full-time basis for two
semesters and on a part time basis for four semesters
3.3 Part II of the programme shall be offered on a full-time for a period
of one semester and part-time for a period of two semesters.
3.4 The programme shall normally commence in February.

4.1 The study programme shall consist of two parts: Part 1 shall be
the coursework component and Part II shall be the Dissertation
and Research Seminar.
4.2 Part 1: Coursework lasting two semesters in the first year for fulltime students and at most four semesters within two years for
part-time students. Part II: A Dissertation and Research Seminar
lasting one semester full-time and two semesters part-time.
4.3 Part 1 shall normally commence in February. Each semester shall
normally involve 12 weeks of teaching and 1 week of private
study, followed by 2 weeks of formal examinations.
4.4 Each student register for twelve (12) courses for Part 1, ten of which
are core and two optional courses shall necessarily be available for
any one year. All twelve courses must be passed for a student to be
allowed to proceed to Part 2 of the programme. Seven (7) of the
twelve courses are double-weighted (MEPP506, MEPP511,
MEPP507, MEPP515, MEPP533, MEPP514 and MEPP508) while five
(5) are single-weighted. Each double-weighted course consists of
96 hours of teaching, that is, 48 hours of lectures and 48 hours of
practicals. Each single-weighted course consists of 48 hours of
teaching; 24 hours of lectures, and 24 hours of practicals.
4.5 The Dissertation and Research Seminar shall normally start after
the end of the second semester in the case of full-time students and
after the end of the third semester in case of part-time students.
4.6 The Dissertation shall be at least 10000 words and at most 20000
words in length on an approved topic. In the case of a Dissertation
with predominantly calculated solutions, pages that are less than
10000 words may be allowed. The Dissertation shall normally be
submitted at the end of six months from commencement in the case
of full-time students at or before the end of the 12 months, in the
case of part-time students.
5. EXAMINATIONS
5.1 Part 1 Examinations shall be conducted in accordance with the
General Academic Regulations. Courses shall be examined at the
end of each semester in which they are taught, each course
comprising one two-hour paper, in the case of single-weighted
courses and one three-hour paper in the case of a double-weighted
course.
assessment and the formal examination in the ratio 30:70 for all
courses except MEPP507, MEPP506, MEPP515 and MEPP511 which
shall have the ratio of 50: 50.
5.3 Continuous assessment shall include written and practical
assignments and tests. The minimum number of assignments shall
be two.
5.4 A student must pass Part I before proceeding to Part II. Those
failing to do so may be allowed to supplement or repeat a
course in accordance with the General Academic Regulations.
5.5 Part II which includes a Dissertation and a Research Seminar
consists of 50 course units, 40 course units for the Dissertation
and 10 Course units for the Research Seminar. The Research
seminar shall consist of an oral presentation for a period
prescribed by the Department and shall be on the research
proposal and findings of the dissertation.
6.
PART I: CORE COURSES
Code
Description
Exam Duration
Weighting
Course units
MEPP 531
Introduction to
2 hours
10
MEPP 506
Research Methods
3 hours
20
MEPP 507
Systems
3 hours
20
MEPP 508
Ecosystems
3 hours
20
MEPP 509
Population and the

Environment
2 hours
10
MEPP 511
Assessment
3 hours
20
MEPP 514
Environmental Planning
3 hours
20
MEPP 515
Remote Sensing
3 hours
20
MEPP 527
Climate Change
2 hours
10
MEPP 533
Environmental Policy and

Legislation
3 hours
20
363
PART I: OPTIONAL COURSES

Code
Description
Exam Duration
Weighting
Course
units
MEPP 517
Rangeland Management
2 hours
10
MEPP 52 1
Project Planning and Appraisal
2 hours
10
MEPP 523
Aquatic Ecology
2 hours
10
MEPP 524
Water Resources Management
2 hours
10
MEPP 528
Agriculture and the Environment
2 hours
10
MEPP 529
Health and the Environment
2 hours
10
Not all Optional Courses shall necessarily be available each year.
3.3 Part II will be offered for a period of six months on a full-time basi
and for a period of one year on a part-time basis.
PART II
Code
Description
MEPP570
Dissertation and
Research Seminar
Exam Duration
Weighting
Course units
50
4.
4.1 The Programme will consist of two parts; Part I will be the
coursework component, and Part II will be the research component.
4.3 At Part I, each student shall register for courses worth at least 120
course units in the first year of the programme. Students will be
required to take all the courses on offer during the year. In order to
pass Part I, a student shall have to pass all the courses. Each course
has a weighting of 15 course units, and consists of at least 60 hours
of teaching (at least 48 hours of lectures and at least 12 hours of
practicals and seminars).
4.4 Part II of the programme shall normally start after the end of the
theory coursework.
dissertation on an approved topic. The length of the dissertation shall
normally be 12000-20000 words. The research project shall be
undertaken over a period of six months on full time basis, or one year
on part time basis. The dissertation must normally be submitted one
month before the end of project period.
4.6 A mining related industry research project will be encouraged where
it is possible to arrange adequate supervision by the Department. In
making, such arrangements the Department will take into account
the extent of assistance available to the student from the
organization or institute.
5.
Examinations
are taught, or at the end of the academic year. The end of course
examination for each course will comprise of one three-hour paper.
DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY
DEGREE IN EXPLORATION GEOLOGY (MXGL)
1.
Introduction
2.
Exploration Geology an applicant will normally be required to have
obtained a BSc Honours Degree in Geology of this University with a
degree class of 2.1 or better or an equivalent degree.
2.2 An applicant with a BSc Honours Degree in Geology with a degree
class of 2.2 of this University or an equivalent degree may be
considered if she/he has a minimum of two years of relevant
experience, writes a qualifying examination and passes with a mark
of 2.1 or better.
2.3 An applicant with a BSc degree with a major in Geology with a 2.1
division pass or better of this University or an equivalent degree will
be required to upgrade that degree to a BSc Honours degree in
Geology.
364
3.

3.1 The programme will run for a period of 18 months on a full-time
basis and for a period of 36 months on a part-time basis.
6.
6.1 The mark for each course will comprise the marks for continuous
assessment and the end of course examination in the ratio 30:70
and 50:50 for practical courses, but in order to proceed to Part II, a
student must have obtained at least 50% pass mark in the formal
examination of the respective taught course.
COURSES
8.1 Part I
Code
Description
Core/Optional
Examination
Duration
Weighting
Units
MXGL505
Metallogeny
Core
3 hrs
15
MXGL506
Ore Deposits
Core
3 hrs
15
MXGL519
Gold Deposits and

hydrocarbon
deposits
Core
3 hrs
15
MXGL508
Applied Structural
Geology
Core
3 hrs
15
MXGL551
Field Trip 1 (10 days)
Core
15
MXGL520
Exploration
Geochemistry and
Geophysics
Core
3 hrs
15
MXGL553
Field Trip (10 days)
Core
15
MXGL521
Optional
3 hrs
15
6.5 The taught and research components will each contribute to the
final mark in the ratio of 60:40.
Remote Sensing
and GIS Applied to
Mineral Resources
MXGL522
Geostatistics,
orebody evaluation
and reserve
estimation
Optional
3 hrs
15
Award of Degree
MXGL523
Project
Management and
Evaluation
Optional
3 Hrs
15
MXGL524
Mineral Economics,
Legal and Fiscal
Framework
Optional
3 hrs
15
MXGL525
Environmental
Impact Assessment
Optional
3 hrs
15
MXGL518
Mining Exploration
Design and
Management
Core
3 hrs
15
80
6.2 Courses MXGL551 and MXGL553 will be examined by continuous

assessment only.
6.3 Part 2 Dissertation will be assessed as 50:10 for written and research
seminar Continuous assessments will be in accordance with Faculty
Regulations, and will include assignments, tests, practical and
seminar presentations, and students will be notified of their relative
weightings at the commencement of the course.
6.4 A student must pass Part I before proceeding to Part II. A student
who fails a course will be allowed to supplement or repeat that
course in accordance with General Regulations.
7.
8.
7.1
7.2
The degree shall be awarded in accordance with the provisions of

the General Academic Regulations for the Master's Degree by
Coursework.
The degree shall be classified in accordance with the General
Academic Regulations and the Faculty of Science Regulations for a
Master of Science Degree by Coursework.
Course
units
7.2 Part II
MXGL570
Research
Dissertation
365
MXGL505
Metallogeny
Metallogenic Concepts in Exploration and the Discovery of Giant Ore
Deposts
Introduction to metallogeny, Carlin trend , The standard-target technique of
ore prediction and metallogenic models; empirical versus conceptual models,
Global models and premises on what they are based; modern techniques;
experts systems, GIS applications , Introduction to giant ore deposits, Giants,
geology and politics; case history of giant gold discoveries as a by-product of
uranium exploration in the former USSR, The Archaean-Proterozoic
transition west of Harare:, Harare-Bindura Greenstone Belt, Great Dyke,
Copper deposits I the Magondi Mobile Belt.
366
MXGL506 Ore Deposits

Hydrothermal and Sedimentary Ore Deposits
Ore mineral textures and mineral paragenesis, Porphyry gold deposits, PNG,
Alteration patterns of hydrothermal mineral deposits, Drill cores and hand
specimens examples from the world class deposits and Zimbabwe, Field trip Visit to Shamva gold deposit, The geology of the Cooperbelt in the PanAfrican tectonic framework Base metal exploration of the Zambian
Copperbelt-type: target searching Copper deposits in northwestern
Botswana Geology and exploration techniques.
Magmatic Ore Deposits II
The exploration potential of ultramafic-mafic igneous complexes. The
Bushveld Complex Chromite deposits and implications for exploration. The
geology of the Great Dyke and its related ore deposits, Cu-Ni deposits in
Archaean komatiite/peridotite and Phanerozoic flood-basalt provinces.
Study of drill cores through the MSZ of the Great Dyke. The geology of
carbonatites and alkali ring complexes. Exploration in carbonatites.
Exploration for. Pegmatite-hosted ore deposits. Samples of various
carbonatite deposits in Zimbabwe and the Palabora mine. Visit to the Trojan
Ni-deposits. The geology of kimberlites, Diamond exploration in Southern
Africa , Exploration exercise for kimberlites and diamonds.
MXGL519 Gold Deposits and hydrocarbons
Gold Deposits in Relation to Time and Plate Tectonics
Recent developments on the tectonics of the Zimbabwe Craton and
implications for gold exploration, Gold exploration and data bases, Gold
deposits in relation to time and plate tectonics, Orogenic gold deposits with
emphasis on the Archaean of Western Australia, Canada and Zimbabwe, The
crustal continuum of orogenic gold deposits including specimen sets for
examination, Geological concepts in the exploration for large to giant
orogenic gold deposits, Stress mapping and prospectivity analysis,
Delineation of exploration targets on geological maps, Visit to the Eureca
gold deposit, VHMS deposits a review, Geochemical exploration for VHMS
deposits, Komatiite-hosted nickel deposits with emphasis on the Kambalda
deposits, Australia, Genetic model for komatiite-hosted nickel deposits and
their significance eo exploration specimen set for examination.
MXGL508 Applied Structural Geology 1
Principles of Structural Geology and Mapping Techniques and the Role of
Shear Zones in Mineralization
The geometry of Ore Bodies: Their description and classification,
Deformation zones and deformation zone rocks, Vein textures and
microstructures, Displaced ore bodies, Kinematic analysis and multiple fault
and shear sets, Dynamic analysis, Regional Tectonics, The big picture, Finding
the principal strains and stresses, Rocks and fluids in the crust, Deformation,
Fluid flow and mineralization, Case studies, Visit to Mazowe gold mine,
Lineaments, Structural controls on non-gold mineralization, Fractals.
MXGL551
10 days (field trip)
MXGL520
Exploration Geochemistry and Geophysics
Regolith Geology and Practical Exploration Geochemistry
Importance of regolith in modern exploration, Mineral stability and
weathering reactions; Deep weathering; distribution, characteristics,
material, regolith and landform, evolution/relationships, Regolith
terminology; identifying bedrock, Use of regolith-landform maps in
exploration, Regolith material regolith mapping, Ore deposits as
geochemical targets; Primary dispersion, Gold dispersion during regolith
evolution, Saprolite geochemistry: multi-element dispersion, Regolith
material, Regolith mapping, Landforms, regolith and exploration,
Geochemistry of ferruginous materials (gossans, laterites, lags etc), Nickel
laterites, Soil geochemistry, Calcrete geochemistry, Transported over burden:
recognition and use, Data analysis, interpretation and presentation; Lectures
and practicals, Stream sediments geochemistry, Sampling, sample,
preparation, analysis and analytical control, Partial extraction analyses in

exploration Geochemical models: application of Australian experience in
other regions (Africa; S. America).
Exploration Geochemistry and Analytical Techniques
Gold exploration in Zimbabwe during the 20th Century; Case study the Maligreen deposit: a discovery attributed to high resolution exploration
geochemistry. Visit to an exploration site, field sampling, Quality Control
procedures, AAS Multi-element analysis on the AAS, Data compilation and
reduction; statistical treatment of data; interpretation of data, Presentation
and group discussion.
Radiometrics, Resistivity, Gravity, Magnetics, Seismics
MXGL553
10 days (field trip)
MXGL521 Remote Sensing and GIS applied to mineral resources

remote sensing and electromagnetic radiation, Aerial photo interpretation,
How remotely sensed data is collected An overview of sensors, Remotely
sensed data relevant to geological studies, Introduction to image processing
software (IDRIS, ERMAPPER), Mini project, Examples of geological remote
sensing projects from industry, Introduction to Geographic Thinking,
Principles of Geographic Information Systems, ARCVIEW and MAPINFO
software, Database design Data models Geostatistics for GIS, Pre-processing
of information layers for the integration of GIS.
MXGL522
Geostatistics and Ore Reserve Calculations Geostatistics,
orebody evaluation and reserve estimation
Purposes of reserve estimation, estimation and techniques, Concept of
regionalised variables, Random variables and distribution, Classical statistics
versus geostatistics Concept of variance Laws of statistical distribution,
Linear regression, Regionalised variables and variograms, Basics of the semivariograms, Estimation of value and variograms, Interpretation of semivariograms Structural analysis of variograms, common and combined
models, Systematic variogram interpretation value of the geology, Case
studies of variography, The support effect and dispersion patterns, Estimation
and extension variance, Introduction to kriging, Point kriging, Block kriging,
Kriging without a mean, Kriging with a known mean, Interpretation of kriging
results, Kriging in reserve estimates, Estimation of variance on global
reserves, Kriging problems, Grade control and why the geology is important,
Block estimation, The variogram as a tool in estimation, Extrapolation with

geostatistical parameters.
Ore Reserve Calculation and Bankable Expertises
Basics of Mineral Deposit Statistics
Mean, Variance and Standard Deviation, Coefficent of Variation, Standard
Deviation and Variance of the mean, Estimation of error, Collection and
Treatment of Samples support-quality, character, Spcial Case of Gold,
Analysis and Results (Statistical Problems), Check-Analyses, Comparison of
Two Series of Analyses by Regression Analysis, Assessing Isolated high values
Statistical Outlier Tests, Comparison of Sample Series with different Support,
Derivation of an Upgrading Factor by comparing, Bulk-Samples and Drilling,
Comaprison of Sample Series with difference Sample Character (Core Drilling
Percussion Drill), Lab session (exercises, practical calculations), Treatment
of Sample Series with Different Sample Qualities, Assessment of Core Loss,
Determination of parameters (thickness, grade, density, volume, square,
tonnage). Weighting (grade, tonnage), Methods of Reserve Calculations
(sections, polygonal blocks), plan, maps, ore coefficient), Reserve/Resource
Calculation, Lab session (exercises, practical calculation), Demonstration of
Reserve Calculation, Example: Disseminated and structure-controlled Gold,
deposit of Las Huaquillas (Peru), Bias in Reserve Calculation, Application of
Cut Off-Levels, Operating Cost Cut-Off, Problems related to Cut-Off Levels,
Reserves/Resource Classification, National Systems, International Systems,
(CMMI/United Nations International Framework Classification for
Reserve/Resources), Geostatical Aspects of Reserve/Resource Classification,
requirements to Bankable Expertises, Lab session (exercises, practical
calculation).
Ore body Evaluation and Reserve Estimation
The composition and structure of data required to estimate a resource, 3-D
Orebody: How to create a 3-d model of the ore body using both geological
interpretation and grade information, all stored in the database, Compositing
of data and basic statistics, Variogram Modelling, using assay data from
within the orebody, Block Modelling the creation of a block model,
discussion on block sizes and orientations, Various ways of filling a block
model, including Kriging and inverse distance squares, Block modelling and
elementary mine design, based on the viable orebody, Discussion.
MXGL524
Mineral Economic
Mining and the Process of Economic Development, Mining and the
Local/Regional Economy Mining and Sustainable Development
Sustainability, Mineral Policy and Mining and Value Adding, Introductory
367
368
Applied Mine Finance Valuation Concepts; Commodity and Reserve

Exposure, Fundamental Value, Dividend Valuation Model, Mergers and
Acquisitions, Investment Decision Process, Costs and Revenues, Methods of
Mine Investment Analysis; Tine Value Concepts, Cash Flow Concepts,
Sensitivity and Risk Analysis; Market Risk, Project Risk, Geological Risk,
Discovery Risk, Inflation Effects, Taxation, Depreciation and Exploration
Expensing; Economic Analysis Methods, DFC Methods; Exploration
Economics The Exploration Decision; Raising Capital for Exploration/Mine
Development Source of Finance, Africa/Zimbabwe; Debt and Equity
Considerations, Debt/Equity Swaps, Hedging, International/Local sources,
Cost of Capital, Determining the appropriate Discount Rate, Prefeasibility/Feasibility Studies/Final Feasibility When things can Go Wrong,
forecasting, best-guessing?, Reading Company Statements Do ratios mean
anything? Creative Accounting the real story, Mineral Market Elements;
Market Structures Mineral Pricing Systems, The market vs Controlled
Marketing MMCZ, Producer prices, Competitive prices, Markets of Selected
Mineral Commodities, The LME System; Hedging commodities and exchange
rates; The Demand for Mineral Commodities, The Supply of Minerals; Primary,
Secondary; Commodity Price Forecasting, Commodity Price Forecasting
Sources of Price information, International Exploration and Mining
Investment Competitiveness; Role of Government, Zimbabwean Mineral
Policy Issues, Mineral Project Evaluation Case Studies.
Legal and Fiscal Aspects of Exploration, Risk and Exploration Management,
Due Diligence
Legal and fiscal aspects
Social position of the mining industry, How does the mining industry fit in a
country, decline of status, multinationals, Mineral rights; security of tenure,
state/individual, different licences, Financial aspects: Royalties, participation
joint ventures, corruption, Country rankings: Worldmarketsonline as an
example.
Risk and Exploration Management
JORC/SAMREC codes, Risk management, Financial aspects: What is an
acceptable exploration budget. What drives it?, Geological elements:
Practical, geological aspects, how to do the job, Budgeting/programming:
Realistic, achievable targets/goals.
MXGL525
Contamination and Pollution, Environmental Health, Chemical Speciation of
Pollutants, pH, redox processes and EH-pH diagrams, Acid Mine Drainage.
Mining and Pollution

Mining, Minerals Processing, Pollution and Drainage, Assessment of Pollution
Potential, Field and Laboratory Techniques, Pollution Control and
Management, Monitoring the Mine Site, Mine Pollution Case Study: Pyrite
Mine.
Components of Environmental Impact Assessment
Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment, Environmental Impact
Assessment policy in Zimbabwe, Tools and Techniques, Socio-economic
Surveys, Biophysical Surveys, Assessing Impact Significance, Monitoring and
Auditing, Impact Mitigation and Management, Environmental Impact
Assessment Report Writing and Reviewing, Managing the Environmental
Impact Assessment process, Mining in southern Africa, Case Studies, Gold
Mine Case Study, Base Metal Mine Case Study, PGE Mine Case Study.
MXGL518
Mining Exploration Design and Management
Overview of Mine Design and Planning
The Iterative Mine Design and Planning Cycle, Objectives of Mine Design and
Planning, Design and Planning of Feasibility, Underground Mine Design and
Planning, Mining Methods and Classification Criteria, Mining Method
Selection, Planning Development, Sizing the Production of a Mine, Break
Even Cut-off, Estimating Consumables, Labour and Equipment
Requirements, Rules of Thumb.
Open Pit Design and Planning
The Block Model, Selection of Block Dimensions, Open Pit Mining Method
Classification, Geometric Considerations, Stripping Ratios, Computerised
Methods, Mine Reclamation.
Equipment Selection
Selection of Drilling Equipment, Selection of Loading Equipment, Selection of
Hauling Equipment, Availability and Utilisation, Effective Operational Time,
Job Efficiency, Planning Equipment Replacement.
Mineral Processing
Types of Mineral Extraction Processes, Stages in Difference Extraction
Processes, Flowsheets and Metallurgical Accounting, Mineral Recoveries and
Product Grades, General Siting and Layout of Processing Plants.
MXGL523 Project Management and Evaluation

Regional targeting and project generation, Exploration program initiation
and full project management to best industry standards, Establishment of
health, safety, environment, and community systems and procedures,
Exploration program targeting, design, budgeting and implementation,
Periodic audits and reviews of exploration and evaluation projects,
integrated modelling, interpretation and target prioritization, Project
evaluation, valuations, due diligence, Independent Geologist's Reports.
MXGL570
Research work weight 4
Research dissertation
EXPLORATION GEOPHYSICS (MXPH)
1.0
2.0
Introduction
Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework,
hereinafter referred to as the General Regulations, and the Faculty
of Science Regulations for Master of Science Degrees.
2.1 To be eligible for admission to the Master of Science Degree
in Exploration Geophysics an applicant will normally be
required to have obtained a BSc Honours Degree in Physics of
this University with a degree class of 2.1 or better or an
equivalent degree.
2.2 Normally an applicant with a BSc Degree with a major in
Physics or equivalent degree with a 2.1 division pass or better
of this University or an equivalent degree will be required to
register to upgrade that degree to a BSc Honours Degree in
Physics.
2.3 An applicant with a BSc Honours Degree in Physics or an
equivalent degree with a degree class of 2.2 of this University
may be considered if she/he has a minimum of two years of
relevant experience, writes a qualifying examination and
3.0
4.0

3.1 The programme will run for 1 years (18 months) on a full
time basis or 3 years (36 months) on a part-time basis.
3.2 Part 1 of the programme will be offered on a full time basis for
1 year and on a part-time basis for 2 years.
3.3 Part 2 will be offered on a full-time basis for a period of six
months and for a period of 1 year on a part-time basis.
4.2 Part 1 will normally last for the first year for full-time students
and for the first two years for part-time students.
4.3 At Part 1, each full-time student shall register for courses
worth at least 120 course units in the first year while a parttime student will normally register for courses worth at least 60
course units in each year of the first two years.
4.4 If there are core courses in the specialty that a student registers
for, these courses should normally be taken in the first six
months for full-time students and in the first year for part-time
students.
4.5 In order to pass Part 1 a student shall have to pass courses worth
at least 120 course units including all core courses for the
chosen specialty.
4.6 Each course is worth 15 course units and shall be taught over 72
contact hours, i.e. 48 hours of lectures and 24 hours of
practicals and/or field surveys (fieldwork), tutorials and
seminars.
4.7 The research component shall normally start after the end of
the first year in the case of full-time students and after the end
of the second year in the case of part-time students. It will last
six months for full-time students and 1 year for part-time
students. A full-time student may opt to do the research
component on a part-time basis.
4.8 The research component shall consist of a research project
which will be assessed based on a dissertation of 12000 to
20000 words (60 100 pages) on an approved topic and
seminar presentations given according to a timetable
determined by the Departmental Board at the start of the
369
component. The dissertation shall normally be submitted on or

before the end of 1 years for a full-time student and on or the
end of the third year in the case of part-time students.
5.0
Examinations
5.2 Courses will be examined at the end of the semester in which
they are taught, and the end of course examination will
comprise of one three-hour paper for each course.
6.0
370
6.1 A taught course shall be assessed through continuous
assessment and end of course examination, in the ratio 30:70,
respectively.
6.2 Each taught course shall have a practical component and a
fieldwork component.
reports, assignments, tests and/or a small scale project and
course in accordance with the General Regulations.
Seminar and a Dissertation. The Research Seminar shall
constitute 10% and the Dissertation 90% of the overall course
mark.
6.6 To be awarded the degree, a student must pass each of the two
Parts of the programme.
for the Master of Science Degree by Coursework.
7.0
COURSES
7.1
Part 1
Course Code
Title
Examination
Duration
Designation Pre/Corequisite
MXPH511
Introduction to
2 hrs
15
MXPH512
Fundamental
Mathematics
2 hrs
15
MXPH513
Potential Fields
2 hrs
MXPH514
Electrical Methods
2 hrs
MXPH515
Time Signal Analysis

and Inverse Theory
2 hrs
MXPH516
Seismic Methods
2 hrs
15
MXPH517
Processing and Imaging
2 hrs
15
MXPH518
Rock Physics and

Reconnaissance
Techniques
2 hrs
MXPH512
Course
units
15
15
MXPH512
MXPH512
15
15
7.2
PART 2: Research Dissertation
A student shall register for the research dissertation, which should be
carried out for a period of six months for full time study and 1 year for
part time study. The research work may commence at any time after
the final coursework examination. The research work may be
undertaken either in the university, at a firm to which the student is
assigned or at any other academic or non-academic institution
approved by the Department. The Dissertation will normally be
submitted on or before a given deadline.
Code
Description
MXPH570
Research
Dissertation
Examination
Duration
Written
Report and
seminar
presentation
Core/Prereq
Core
Course
Units
80
8.
COURSE CONTENT
MXPH 511 Introduction to Exploration Geophysics
This course introduces the concepts and applications of modern
geophysical exploration. It begins an overview of a typical survey
sequence in a new exploration area covering the common
exploration methods including: satellite data, gravity,
electromagnetics, ground-penetrating radar, resistivity, seismics,
side-scan sonar, well logs, and drilling. The course aims to provide a
basic understanding of the underlying physics, the resolution and
spatial range of each technique, and the costs associated with
acquisition and processing. The focused is then on the three main
exploration methods: gravity, electromagnetics, and surface
seismics, and gives a deeper understanding of the constraints on
subsurface rock and fluid parameters constrained by each of the main
techniques. The course ends up with a detailed summary of the main
practical issues associated with acquisition and processing for the
three main geophysical exploration methods, and their relative
advantages and disadvantages.
MXPH 512
Fundamental Mathematics
Differentiation and integration; Ordinary Differential Equations;
Vectors and Geometry; Matrices and Determinants; Solving Linear
Equation Systems; Coordinate Transformations; Partial Derivatives;
Fields and Differential Operators; Partial Differential Equations;
Inverse problem.
MXPH 513
Potential Fields
Vectors and Potential Theory; Gravity; Magnetics; Potential Field
Processing and Transforms; instrumentation; field work and data
reduction.
MXPH 514
Electrical Methods
Self potential; Apparent resistivity; induced polarization; Time
Domain EM (air borne & ground); Frequency Domain EM; wireline
and downhole EM logging; instrumentation; field work and data
reduction.
MXPH 515
Time Signal Analysis and Inverse Theory
The Fourier series; Continuous and discrete Fourier transforms;
Sampling theorems; The convolution theorem; Auto-correlation and
cross correlation; filtering and deconvolution; Forward modeling;
parameter estimation and inversion; Least squares solution; overand under-determined problems; The co-variance matrix;
Linearisation of non-linear problems.
MXPH 516 Seismic Methods
Seismic Theory; Seismic Reflection; Seismic Refraction; field work
and data processing on the computer.
MXPH 517 Processing and Imaging
Airborne Magnetic data process and interpretation; Airborne
Electromagnetic data processing and interpretation; Advanced
Seismic data process and imaging; Time Domain Data processing
and imaging; Potential Field Imaging; Geophysical modelling and
data inversion, integration of geophysical survey methods.
MXPH518 Rock Physics and Reconnaissance Techniques
Brittle and ductile; Experimental Rock deformation; Laboratory
methods and demonstration; Coulomb friction; Failure criteria for
ideal elastic materials; Fracture nucleation; Static fatigue; Fluid flow
in porous, fractured media; Geophysical properties of porous,
fractured media; include anisotropy, what determines velocity
resistivity; etc., damage mechanics, effective medium theory,
poroelasticity, seismic wave propagation, Gamma Ray spectrometry,
Hydrogeology and ground water survey.
MXPH570 Research Project
The Research project will normally be a field project, but may include
an equipment design and construction component. A report on the
project must be handed in. (The project will carry at least 40%
weighting in the overall assessment).
371
4.3 Part 1 shall normally commence at the beginning of a semester.

Each semester shall normally involve 13 weeks of teaching and,
4.4 Each student registers for courses worth at least 120 course
units for Part 1, courses worth 100 course units are core and
courses worth 20 course units are optional. The programme is
organised into three areas of specialization namely Applied
Biogeosciences, The Human Environment and Applied
Environmental Science. A student shall select one
specialization area and take one (1) core course and at least one
(1) optional course from the selected area of specialization. Not
all optional courses shall necessarily be available for any one
year. All courses must be passed for a student to be allowed to
proceed to Part 2 of the programme. All courses are doubleweighted. Each double-weighted course consists of 96 hours of
teaching, that is, 48 hours of lectures and 48 hours of practicals.
The Dissertation and Research Seminar shall normally start
towards the end of the second semester in the case of full-time
students and after the end of the third semester in case of parttime students.
4.5 The Dissertation shall be at least 10000 words and at most
20000 words in length on an approved topic. In the case of a
Dissertation with predominantly calculated solutions, pages
that are less than 10000 words may be allowed. The Dissertation
shall normally be submitted at the end of six months from
commencement in the case of full-time students at or before
the end of the 12 months, in the case of part-time students.

DEGREE IN GEOGRAPHY AND ENVIRONMENTAL
SCIENCE (MSGE)
1.
PREAMBLE
referred to as the General Regulations and Faculty of Science
Regulations for the Degrees of Master of Science by Coursework and the
Faculty of Science Regulations for the Master of Science Degrees.
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
2.1 A good honours degree, at 2.1 or better in Geography or
Environmental Science. Candidates with good honours degree
in a related discipline such as Agricultural, and Physical sciences
may be admitted with the approval of the Senate.
2.2 A candidate with a 2.2 and at least three years of relevant work
experience shall be admitted after passing a qualifier
examination.
3.
3.1 The programme shall run for four semesters on a full-time basis
or eight semesters, on a part time basis.
3.2 Part I of the programme shall be offered on a full-time basis for
two semesters and on a part time basis for four semesters.
3.3 Part II of the programme shall be offered on a full-time basis for a
period of one semester 6 months and on part-time for a period of
12 months.
372
4.

the coursework component and Part II shall be the Dissertation
4.2
Part 1: Coursework lasting two semesters in the first year for fulltime students and at most four semesters within two years for
part-time students. Part II: A Dissertation and Research Seminar
lasting 6 months for full-time students and twelve months for
part-time students.
5.
EXAMINATIONS
General Academic Regulations. Courses shall be examined at
the end of each semester in which they are taught, each course
comprising one three-hour paper.
5.2 The mark for each course shall comprise the marks for
30:70 for all courses except MSGE02, MSGE03 and MSGE04
which shall have the ratio of 50: 50.
5.3 Continuous assessment shall include practical fieldwork or
laboratory practicals and written assignments and tests. The
minimum number of assignments shall be three.
5.4
5.5
6.
A student must pass Part I before proceeding to Part II. Those

Part II which includes a Dissertation and a Research Seminar
consists of 80 course units, 70 course units for the
Dissertation and 10 Course units for the Research Seminar.
The Research seminar shall consist of an oral presentation for
a period prescribed by the Department and shall be on the
research proposal and findings of the dissertation. The
dissertation and research seminar topic shall be selected
within the selected area of specialization.
Not all Optional Courses shall necessarily be available each year.

PART 2
Code
Description
MSGE570
Dissertation and Research

Seminar
Description
Exam Duration
Weighting
Course Units
MSGE501
Philosophy of Geography &

3 hours
20
MSGE502
Research Methods
3 hours
20
MSGE503
Science
3 hours
20
MSGE504
Remote Sensing
3 hours
20
Description
Exam Duration
Weighting
Course Units
MSGE515
Key Topics in Environmental

Science (Core)
3 hours
20
MSGE516
Hazards and Vulnerability

Analysis
3 hours
20
MSGE517
Biodiversity Assessment and

Monitoring
3 hours
20
MSGE518
Global Environmental
Change
3 hours
20
MSGE519
Environmental Polluti
on
3 hours
20
MSGE520
Assessment
3 hours
20
Course Units
80
DEPARTMENT OF STATISTICS
DEGREE IN STATISTICS (MSTC)
1.
Introduction
2.
Statistics an applicant will normally be required to have obtained
a BSc Honours Degree in Statistics of this University with a degree
class of 2.1 or better or an equivalent degree.
2.2 Normally an applicant with a BSc Degree with a major in Statistics
with a 2.1 division pass or better of this University or an equivalent
degree will be required to register to upgrade that degree to a BSc
Honours Degree in Statistics.
2.3 An applicant with a BSc Honours Degree in Statistics with a
degree class of 2.2 of this University or an equivalent degree may
be considered if she/he has a minimum of two years of relevant
experience, writes a qualifying examination and passes with a
grade of 2.1 or better.
PART 1: APPLIED ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE

Code
Weighting
AWARD OF THE DEGREE

The Master of Science degree in Geography and Environmental
Science stating the specialization area shall be awarded in
accordance with the provisions of the General Academic Regulations
for Masters Degree by Coursework.
PART1: COMMON CORE COURSES
Code
Exam Duration
373
3.

3.1 The programme will run for three semesters on a full time basis or
six semesters on a part-time basis.
Part 1 of the programme will be offered on a full time basis for two
semesters and on a part-time basis for four semesters.
3.2
Part 2 will be offered on a full-time basis for a period of six months
and part-time for a period of 12 months.
5.
374
4. Structure of the Programme

4.2 Part 1 will normally last for two semesters in the first year for
full-time students and for four semesters in the first two years
for part-time students.
4.3
At Part 1, each full-time student shall register for courses worth
at least 60 course units in each semester of the first year while a
part-time student will normally register for courses worth at
least 30 course units in each semester of the first two years. If
there are core courses in the specialty that a student registers
for, these courses should normally be taken in the first semester.
In a given semester, certain optional courses may not be
available depending on the availability of staff and/or the
number of students wishing to register for those courses. In
order to pass Part 1 a student shall have to pass courses worth at
least 120 course units including all core courses for the chosen
specialty. Each double course has a weighting of 20 course units
and consists of 96 hours of teaching, 48 hours of lectures and 48
hours of practical classes or seminars. Each single course has a
weighting of 10 course units and consists of 24 hours of
teaching and 24 hours of practical or seminars.
4.4
The research component shall normally start after the end of the
second semester in the case of full-time students and after the
end of the fourth semester in the case of part-time students. It
will last one semester of twenty weeks for full-time students and
two semesters of twenty weeks each for part-time students. A
full-time student may opt to do the research component on a
part-time basis.
4.5
The research component shall consist of a research project
which will be assessed based on a dissertation on an approved

topic and three seminar presentations given according to a
timetable determined by the Departmental Board at the start of
the component. The dissertation shall normally be submitted on
or before the end of the third semester for a full-time student
and on or the end of the sixth semester in the case of part-time
students.
Examinations
Part 1
5.1
5.2
6.
Courses will be examined at the end of the semester in which

they are taught, and the end of course examination for will
comprise of one three-hour paper.
6.1
continuous assessment and the end of course examination
in the ratio 25: 75.
6.2
/or a small scale project and students will be notified of their
relative weightings at the commencement of the course. The
minimum number of assignments and tests shall be 3.
6.3
repeat in accordance with the General Regulations.
6.4
The research component will be assessed by continuous
assessment based on the three seminar presentations and
the dissertation in the ratio 10:90.
7.
COURSES
MSTC513
Topics in
Probability
Theory
MSTC514
Further topic s in
Dynamic
Regression
Modeling
Course Units
HMTH201
3 hours
20
2 hourrs
10
Code
Description
Pre -requisite
Exam Duration
MSTC5 01
Multivariate
Methods
HSTS215
3 hours
20
MSTC515 Topics
Topics in
Reliability Theory
HSTS414
2 hours
10
MSTC502
Further Time
Series
HSTS203
3 hours
20
MSTC516
Further Topics
HMTH201
2 hours
10
7.2
Part 2
MSTC570
Optional Course: Select at least 80units

Code
Description
Pre -requisite
Exam Duration
MSTC503
Generalized
Linear Models
HSTS401/HSTS411
2 hours
MSTC504
Further
Stochastic
Processes
HSTS416/HSTS417
MSTC505
Non Parametric
and Robust
Statistics
HSTS402
3 hours
20
MSTC506
Survival Analysis
HSTC406
2 hours
10
MSTC507
Mathematical
Programming
HSTS425
2 hours
10
MSTC508
Further
Operations
Research
2 hours
10
3 hours
Course Units
10
20
HSTS425/MSTC507
MSTC509
Further
Econometrics
HSTS423
3 hours
20
MSTC510
Actuarial Topics
HSTS407
3 hours
20
MSTC511
Quantitative
Genetics
HSTS405/HSTS406
MSTC512/MEPP511
Environmental
Impact
Assessment
2 hours
HSTS406
3 hours
10
Dissertation
80
COURSE CONTENT
MSTC501 Multivariate Methods (double course and core course)
Review of matrix algebra: Partitioned matrices, differentiation with
vectors and matrices. Multivariate normal distribution: Samples
from multivariate normal populations, correlation and regression,
simultaneous inference about regression coefficients, Inference
about correlation matrix.
Hypotheses on means: MANOVA (Multivariate Analysis of variance
and covariance), Profile analysis, curve fitting for repeated
measurements.
Discriminant analysis: classification by linear discriminant function.
Canonical Correlation: Inference from covariance matrices.
Principal components: geometrical meaning, computation and
interpretation, sampling properties.
Factor analysis: mathematical model for factor structure, estimation
of factor loadings, testing of goodness of fit for the factor model,
factor rotation.
The analysis of categorical data: contingency tables, the general
loglinear model, goodness of fit statistics, hierarchical models.
Selection of a model. Introduction to cluster and correspondence
analysis.
20
MSTC502 Further Time Series (double course and core)

Review of time series analysis in the Time Domain: Stationary time
series, ARMA processes, linear processes, ergodicity, Kolmogorov's
theorem, characterization of the autocovariance function. Spectral
analysis of time series: spectral representation of the
375
376
autocovariance function, spectral representation of a stationary

time series, Herglotz' theorem, the spectrum, aliasing, discrete and
continuous spectra, spectra of white noise of ARMA processes.
Filtering: Linear filters, Impulse Response Function(IRF), transfer
function, gain function and phase function, Filter design, high and
low pass filters. Estimation of spectra: The discrete Fourier
transform, the periodogram, asymptotic properties of the
periodogram, smoothing the periodogram leakage, tapering,
calculation of the autocovariance using the discrete Fourier
transform, application to discriminant analysis of time series,
searching for periodicities, Fisher's test, separation of signal from
noise, complex demodulation.
Introduction to evolutionary Spectral analysis: oscillatory
processes, evolutionary spectra, uniformly modulated series,
estimation of evolutionary spectra, test for stationarity. Long
memory time series: fractionally differenced time series, estimation
of the long memory parameter d. Modeling long memory time
series.
MSTC503 Generalized Linear Models (single course)
Generalization of the classical linear model, link function, Algorithms
for fitting a generalized linear model. Models for binary and binomial
data. log linear models. Model diagnostic checking, residual analysis.
MSTC504 Further Stochastic processes (double course)
Diffusion processes: Continuous space processes, Markov processes,
forward and Backward Kolmogorov equations for transition
densities. Diffusion approximations.
Brownian motion: review Brownian motion including Brownian
Bridge, Brownian motion with drift, Geometric Brownian Motion.
Continuity of paths and maximum variables hitting times. Brownian
motion as a diffusion approximation of a random walk. The Ornstien
Uhlenbeck processes the telegraphic signal process. Review
Martingales and look at the martingale properties of the Brownian
motion. Option pricing: Options, arbitrage theorem, ensuring a win
or no win, Black-Scholes option pricing formula and application.
Developments in option pricing and the stock market. Stochastic
differential equations: review some differential equations,
stochastic differential equations or look at Renewal processes,
Branching processes, Point processes or Stationary processes.
MSTC505 Nonparametric and Robust Statistics (double course)

Review Order Statistics, their joint and marginal distributions.
Distribution free (over class), counting and ranking statistics. Ustatistics. Asymptotically nonparametric distribution free test
statistics, Power functions. Asymptotic relative efficiency. Testing for
randomness against different types of alternatives. testing for
symmetry, association and independence, paired samples and
random blocks in the nonparametric case. Robustness qualitative,
quantitative, optimal. Basic types of estimates. Asymptotic minimax
theory for estimating a location parameter. Idea about joint
estimation of location and scale. Robust regression.
MSTC506 Survival Analysis (single course)
Survival Analysis: Survivor function and hazard function, KaplanMeier type estimators, comparison of two groups of survival data,
Cox regression model, Cox Proportional hazards, derivation of the
partial likelihood estimate, asymptotic distribution, censored data,
testing of hazard rates testing.
Nelson-Aalen estimate of cumulative hazard rate in presence of
censoring, mle of estimate and actual estimate as well as
variance.Model of lifetime or failure rate from age x s a random
variable. Consistency condition, distribution and density functions of
random future lifetime, survival function and force of mortality for
the function, or hazard rate and derive relationships between them.
Gompertz and Makeham laws of mortality, the curtate lifetime from
age x and its probability function, expected value and variance of the
complete and curtate future lifetimes deriving expressions for them.
Two state model of single decrement and assumptions, comparison
with random lifetime model MLE for transition intensities in Markov
models, Poisson approximations, Binomial mortality model, MLE
estimator for probability of death.
Transition intensities of age exactly and using census
approximation, the principle if correspondence, exposed to
risk(waiting time) depending on age and sex, transition probabilities
including single decrement model the actuarial estimate, rate
interval,definitions of age at birthday, at specified calendar date, at a
specific policy.
MSTC507 Mathematical Programming (single course)

Advanced Linear Programming: Review of revised simplex method,
bounded variables, decomposition algorithms, and parametric
programming. and other procedures
Integer programming: Simple problems cutting plane techniques,
branch and bound algorithms.
Nonlinear programming: Separate, quadratic, geometric and
stochastic programming, linear combinations method, sequential
unconstrained, maximization techniques (SUMT) algorithm.
Dynamic programming: Further dynamic programming, problems
of dimensionality, solution of linear programming problems by
dynamic programming methods.
MSTC508 Further Operations Research (single course)
Inventory Models: Deterministic models, multiple item station
models, single item n-period dynamic models. Probabilistic models,
continuous review model single period and multiperiod.
Decision theory: Review decisions under uncertainty, Decision
theory and games, sequential games, complete classes of decision
functions and strategies. Markovian decision processes, Markovian
decision problems. Application of finite and infinite stage dynamic
programming to solve stochastic decision processes.
Queuing Theory: Further queuing theory, priority queues of service
M/G/1, tandem queues and analysis of queues by impeded Markov
chains.
MSTC509 Further Econometrics (double course)
Review of classical econometric/regression methods: Least squares
and Maximum likelihood estimation, restricted estimation and tests
of hypotheses, regression with autocorrelated errors,
heteroscedasticity, multicollinearity, Principal components analysis.
Simultaneous equations systems: Identification, Structural and
reduced forms, Indirect Least squares method, Method of
Instrumental variables, Two-stage least squares, Limited Information
Maximum likelihood, Mixed Estimation Methods, Three stage Least
Squares and Full information Maximum Likelihood.
Integrated Processes: Spurious regressions, Features of Integrated

processes.
Unit Root tests: Dickey-Fuller test, Augmented Dickey-Fuller test,
Phillips-Perron test etc
Co-integration Analysis: single equation, system of equations,
Estimation of co-integration vectors, Testing for co-integration:
Engle-Granger Two-step procedure, Johansen maximum likelihood
approach, Asymptotic distributions of estimators of co-integration
vectors, Error correction representation (ECR). Forecasting cointegrated variables, restricted and unrestricted VAR models.
Further topics.
MSTC510 Actuarial Science Topics (double course)
Introduction to Actuarial Science: definition, scope and role of
actuarial science in Zimbabwe. Techniques of life and Health
insurance, risk and security, insurance and assurance, pensions.
Review of basic probability theory: Event space, probability, random
variable, distribution function, expectation, stochastic processes,
Markov chains, transition matrix, martingale, Poisson processes, law
of averages, central limit theorem.
Common Business calculations and terminology: simple and
compound interest, present value, annuities, sinking funds,
amortization, financial derivatives, futures etc.........................................
Life Models and Statistical Inference: Loss distributions, calculation
of premiums, introduction to risk theory, utility functions and
survival functions , life tables, actuarial estimate of survival function,
confidence intervals and hypothesis testing, Poisson, Gamma,
lognormal and Pareto distributions, Aggregate claim processes, NCD
systems, Simulation of Insurance probability models, Markov models
for claim sizes, MCMC applications.
Further topics.
MSTC511 Quantitative Genetics (single course)
Review of Mathematical Modeling and Statistical Technique,
inheritance of discrete and continuous characteristics, design and
analysis of breeding programmes. Human applications, including
genetic counseling, Interpretation of data.
377
MSTC512/MEPP511 Environmental Impact Assessment

Ecological impact assessment, summarizing and evaluating impacts,
quantitatively and economically. Predicting impact on the physical
environment and biota. Landscape ecology .
378
MSTC513 Topics in Probability Theory (double course)

Sets and measures: sigma algebras, generating classes, minimal
generating classes, principles of appropriate sets, measures,
measurable sets, Borel sets, measurable spaces, Lebesgue measures,
Probability spaces, methods of introducing probability measures on
measurable spaces. Independence and conditional probabilities.
Random variables: Borel functions, simple functions, random walks,
Lebesgue integral. Expectation and its properties. the monotone
convergence theorem , applications of basic convergence theorem
in probability.
Probability inequalities: Markov's inequality, the Cauchy Schwartz
inequality, Jensen's inequality, Holders inequality, Minkowaski's
inequality, Applications.
Characteristic functions: Definition properties, inversion formula,
Convergence of sequences of random variables: Convergence in
distribution, in probability, with probability one, almost surely, in pth
mean. Kronecker's lemma.
Laws of large numbers: Kolmogorov's three series theorem. Zero-one
laws. Law of the iterated logarithm. Infinitely divisible laws and stable
laws. Continous Mapping theorem, Functional Central Limit
theorem( invariance principle)..
MSTC514
Further topics in Dynamic Regression Modeling (single

course)
This course deals with nonlinear regression models, modeling data
that does not conform to the usual expectations, incorporating
intervention analysis, change point analysis and other special
models which are excluded in linear models courses.
MSTC515 Topics in Reliability Theory (single course)
Structure of systems: series structure systems, parallel structure
systems. Functioning or failure of components. Minimal Path and
Minimal Cut sets in reliability, reliability of systems of independent
components.
Bounds on the reliability function: bridge system, method of

inclusion and exclusion, obtaining bounds on r (p).
System life: lifetime probabilities. Useful distribution: Wiebull
distribution, the gamma distribution, uniform, etc. expected system
lifetime and further topics.
MSTC516 Further Topics
Visiting lecturers and resident lecturers will have the opportunity to
offer specialized courses in their areas of research and or areas that
are growing in popularity but are not covered in the courses on offer.
Also students may with permission be allowed to take Mathematics
courses which are deemed useful in their progression in Statistics.
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

DEGREE IN TROPICAL ENTOMOLOGY (MTE)
1.
INTRODUCTION
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Tropical Entomology, an applicant will normally be required to have
obtained a BSc Honours Degree in Biological Sciences of this
degree where entomology was taken as a course.
2.2 Normally an applicant with a BSc (Honours) degree in Biological
Sciences or equivalent degree of this University with a 2.2 division
and at least three years relevant post qualification experience will be
required to write and pass a qualifying examination with a mark
representing a 2.1 division or better.
3.

3.1 The programme will run for three semesters on a full-time basis or
six semesters on part-time basis.
3.2 Part I of the programme will be offered on a full-time basis for two
semesters or part-time basis for four semesters.
3.3 Part II will be offered on a full-time basis for a period of one semester
or part-time for two semesters, although the length of the semester
will be twenty (20) weeks instead of the normal fifteen weeks.
4.

4.1 The Programme will consist of two parts. Part I will be the
coursework component, and Part II will be the research component.
4.2 Part I will normally last for two semesters on full-time basis or four
semesters on part-time basis.
course units in the first semester of the first year. The remaining
course units, including two specialization courses, will be offered in
the second semester. Students are required to take all seven nonoptional courses and one specialization course. In order to pass Part
I, a student shall have to pass courses worth at least 160 course units,
including all non-optional courses. Each course has a weighting of
20 course units, and consists of 96 hours of teaching, 48 hours of
lectures and 48 hours of practical classes and seminars.
second semester. It will last one semester of twenty weeks.
4.5 The research component shall consist of a research project which
will be based on a dissertation on an approved topic. The
dissertation shall normally be submitted on or before the end of the
third semester.
5.
5.1 Examination shall be conducted in accordance with General
Academic Regulations and Faculty of Science Regulations.
are taught, and the end of course examinations for each course will
comprise one three-hour paper.
6.
assessment and the formal examination in the ratio 40:60.
6.2 Continuous assessment will be in accordance with Faculty
Regulations, and will include assignments, tests, practicals and
6.3 A student must pass Part I before proceeding to Part II. A student
who fails a course will be allowed to supplement or repeat the
6.4 The research component will be assessed based on the dissertation.
7.
COURSES
7.1 Part I:
Courses in Master of Science in Tropical Entomology (MTE5)
Non-optional courses
Code
Description
Exam Duration
Course Units
MTE501
Research Methods
3 hours
20
MTE502
Insect Functional Morphology

and Systematics
3 hours
20
MTE503
Insect Physiology and

Biochemistry
3 hours
20
MTE504
Insect Ecology and Behaviour
3 hours
20
MTE505
Pest Management
3 hours
20
MEPP507
Geographic Information
Systems
3 hours
20
MEPP515
Remote sensing
3 hours
20
Specialisation options
Code
Description
Exam Duration
MTE507
Agricultural and Stored Product

Entomology
3 hours
MTE508
Medical and Veterinary Entomology
3 hours
Course Units
20
20
379
7.2 Part II
Course:
Master of Science in Tropical Entomology (MTE5)
Code
MTE570
380
Description
Weighting
4
Units
80
MTE 501
Research methods
1. What is research: Why do research, The scientific method, Ethics in science.
The research process:
Problem definition and selection, Problem analysis, Study plan. The research
proposal: Guidelines for writing a proposal, Planning the research, Site
selection, Sampling units, Replication. Data collection: Primary and
secondary data, Sources of data. Statistical and data management software:
Overview of software, Choice of appropriate package, Data entry and data
management. Sampling: Random number tables, Simple random sampling,
Stratified random sampling, Systematic sampling, Quadrat sampling.
Surveys: Planning a survey, Types of surveys, Phases of a survey, How to
sample, Questionnaire design, Implementing a survey, Data management,
Tabulation and further data analysis, Reporting. Modelling: Multiple linear
regression, Model checking and dealing with deviations from model
assumptions, General linear models, Model checking and dealing with
deviations from model assumptions, comparison of means, Introduction to
REML, Introduction to generalised linear models. Simple time series models:
Time series plots, Components of a time series, Smoothing. Analysis of
distribution of free data (nonparametrics): Ranked data, Scores, Alternative
methods of data analysis. Multivariate methods: Cluster methods, Principle
component analysis, Discriminant analysis, Factor analysis. Presentation of
research: Logging of data entry, Validation and analysis, Data presentation,
Graphs and diagrams, Report writing.
MTE502
Insect Functional Morphology and Systematics
Form and structure of the insect head and its appendages; Modifications of
mouthparts, Neck and Thorax; Leg adaptations and articulations; Origin and
development of wings (wing modifications and articulations); Appendages
and processes of the abdomen (Stridulation, Musculature, Spiracles,
Trachea); Modifications of the respiratory system; Modifications of
alimentary, reproductive and nervous systems; Embryonic and postembryonic development; Taxonomy and nomenclature; International Code of
Zoological Nomenclature; Species concept and speciation; Evolution;
Collection and curatorial techniques; Organization of insect genomes;

Genetic manipulation of insect populations; insect identification using
cytology and genetics. Practical work will be on general insect classification to
Order and family levels: Construction of dichotomous keys; Modifications of
female and male genitalia; Spiracular systems of some terrestrial and aquatic
insects.
MTE503
Insect Physiology and Biochemistry
Gross structure and functions of the insect integument parts; Ecdysis and
sclerotinization; Physiology of insect locomotion; Energetics of flight and
flight metabolism; Physiology of insect respiration; Generalised anatomy of
the insect digestive system; Extra-intestinal digestion (carbohydrates,
proteins, lipids); Enzyme activity and effects of pH and temperature;
Absorption (carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, water, inorganic ions); Nutrition
and intermediary metabolism; Water balance and osmoregulation; Excretion;
Circulatory system; Nervous and neuroendocrine systems; Hormone
analogues as insecticides; Physiology of aging, diapause and hibernation;
Chemical defence mechanisms; Thermoregulation; Bochemical basis of
insecticide resistance.
MTE504
Insect Ecology and Behaviour
Population ecology (measurement and factors regulating insect
populations); Predator-prey and host-parasitoid relationships; Competitive
interactions and consequences; Pest migrations; Construction and analysis of
life tables and their use in applied entomology; Mating and feeding behaviour,
response to host stimuli; Communication and activity patterns in insect
populations; Ecology and behaviour of insects as foundations for effective
pest management. Life table analysis; mortality and survivorship.
MTE505
Pest Management
Principles and practices of pest management; Economics of crop loss; Pest
management techniques (cultural, biological, chemical control, biological
control, quarantine and legislative control, host-plant resistance,
biotechnological methods); Biological control; Chemical control;
Development and detection of insecticide resistance; Toxicology of
insecticides; Insecticide formulations and application technologies; Sterile
insect techniques; Integrated pest management.
MTE507
Agricultural and Stored Product Entomology
Biology, ecology, economic importance and control of general pests (locusts,
African armyworm, cotton bollworm); Biology, ecology and economic
importance of specific insect and mite pests of particular crops; Stored grain
ecosystem; Primary infestation of grain; Assessment of stored grain weight
losses; Biology, ecology and control of some primary and secondary insects
pests of stored grain and pulses; Biology and ecology of crop pollinators.
MTE508
Medical and Veterinary Entomology
Pests of medical and veterinary importance (including epidemiology,
diagnostic, parasitology and immunology). Biology and ecology of mosquito
vectors of malaria, tsetse and fleas. Epidemiology of plague; Houseflies,
blowflies and myiasis; Ticks as vectors of animal diseases; Integrated vector
control; Vector insecticide resistance; Screening of insecticides and
acaricides; Insect defence mechanisms against parasites; Genetics of
vectorial capacity; Analysis of insect age structure with reference to
mosquitoes; Insectary design, construction and controls.
MEPP507
Geographic Information systems
Introduction to GIS: Geographical data; Definition of GIS, Components and
purpose of GIS. Conceptual models of geographical phenomena:
Conceptual models of real world geographical phenomena, Entities and
Fields; Models for representing spatial data; Raster spatial data model; Vector
spatial data model. Coordinate Systems and Projections: Coordinate systems
& Map projections, Coordinate transformation. Spatial data sources,
georeferencing & spatial data capture: Primary and secondary data sources;
Georeferencing; Spatial data input; digitizing and data manipulation. Global
Positioning Systems (GPS): Theory of GPS, Applications of GPS. Database
Management Systems (DBMS): Database design, Query design. Spatial data
analysis: Operators; Spatial data query; Neighborhood analysis; Overlay
analysis. GIS project: Designing and implementing a GIS project.
MEPP515 Remote Sensing
Introduction to remote sensing: Definition of Remote sensing; The Remote
sensing system. The electromagnetic spectrum (EM): EM interaction with
Earth Surface Materials; EM interaction with vegetation, EM interaction with
Soil, EM interaction with Water. Image acquisition and image structure:
Image structure, Image visualization. Sources and correction of radiometric
and geometric distortion: Sources and correction of radiometric distortion,

Sources and correction of geometric distortion. Spatial image enhancement:
Image filtering. Supervised Image Classification Techniques: Steps in
supervised classification, Parallel Piped classification, Minimum distance to
mean classification, Maximum likelihood classification. Unsupervised Image
Classification Techniques: Steps in unsupervised classification, Bbasic
clustering algorithm. Multispectral transformations of image data: Band
ratios, Vegetation indices. Applications of remote sensing: Applications in
vegetation monitoring, Applications in water resources and environmental
management, Other applications.

DEGREE IN TROPICAL HYDROBIOLOGY AND
FISHERIES (MTFH)
1.
INTRODUCTION
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Tropical Hydrobiology and Fisheries, an applicant will normally be
required to have obtained a good BSc Honours Degree in Biological
Sciences of this University with a degree class of 2.1 or better or an
equivalent degree.
and at least three years relevant post qualification experience will
be required to write and pass a qualifying examination with a mark
381
382
3.

3.1 The programme will run for a minimum period of 18 months up to a
maximum period of 24 months on a full-time basis and for a
minimum period of 36 months up to a maximum period of 48
months on a part-time basis.
3.3 Part II will be offered for a minimum period of six months up to a
months on a part-time basis.
4.

4.1 The Programme will consist of two Parts. Part I will be the
coursework component, and Part II will be the research
component.
required to take all the courses on offer during the year. In order to
pass Part I, a student shall have to pass all the courses. Each course
has a weighting of 20 course units, and consists of 96 hours of
teaching, 48 hours of lectures and 48 hours of practical classes and
seminars.
4.4 Part II of the programme shall normally start after the end of the
theory coursework.
dissertation on an approved topic. The length of the dissertation
shall be between 60 and 100 pages. The dissertation shall normally
be submitted three months before the end of the project year.
5. SCHEME OF EXAMINATION
are taught or at the end of the academic year. End of course
examinations for each course will comprise one three-hour paper
assessment and the formal examination in the ratio of 40:60.
6.2 Continuous assessments will be in accordance with Faculty
6.3 A student musts pass Part I before proceeding to Part II. A student
who fails a course, may be allowed to supplement or repeat the
6.4 Part II will be assessed based on the dissertation.
7. COURSES
Course:
7.1
Master of Science in Tropical Hydrobiology and Fisheries

(MTFH5)
Part I
Code
Description
Exam Duration
Weighting
Course
Units
MTFH502
Research Methods
3 hours
20
MTFH503
Tropical Limnology
3 hours
20
MTFH504
Fish Biology
3 hours
20
MTFH505
Applied Aquatic Ecology
3 hours
20
MTFH506
Conservation of Aquatic
Resources
3 hours
20
MTFH5**
Fisheries biology and

management
3 hours
20
MEPP507
Geographic Information
Systems
3 hours
20
MEPP515
Remote Sensing
3 hours
20
7.2 Part II
Course:
Master of Science in Tropical Hydrobiology and Fisheries
(MTFH5)
Code
Description
Weighting
MTFH570
MTFH590
Oral Examination
(see note 4)
Course
Units
80
Notes:
1.
The final mark for each course in Part I will comprise the marks for
Continuous Assessment and the formal examination in that course in
the ratio 40:60.
2.
Students are required to take and pass all of the eight courses prescribed
in Part I. All courses carry equal weighting, and the overall mark for Part I
will be the average of the final marks awarded for each course. Students
who fail to pass a course at first attempt may be permitted to write a
supplementary examination or to repeat the failed course. Students
must pass Part II.
3.
Whereas the final mark for each course in Part I will comprise marks for
continuous assessment and the formal examination in that course in
the ratio 40:60, each student will be required to pass on aggregate but
with no less than 45% in the formal examination. The final mark for a
student who attains less than 45% in the formal examination, but over
50% overall, will be reduced to 48%, and that student will fail the course.
4. The oral examination will normally be conducted within one month
of the date of submission of the research dissertation. No separate
mark shall be given for the oral examination. Instead, the oral
examination shall be used to confirm or adjust the mark awarded for the

DEGREE IN APPLIED GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION
SCIENCE AND REMOTE SENSING (MGIRS)
1.
PREAMBLE
referred to as the General Regulations and Faculty of Science
Regulations for the Degrees of Master of Science by Coursework and the
Faculty of Science Regulations for the Master of Science Degrees.
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
2.1 A good honours degree, at 2.1 or better in Geographical Science,
Geographical Information Systems, Remote Sensing,
Environmental Science, Geology or Spatial Statistics. Candidates
with good honours degree in a related discipline such as Physics,
Biology, Computer Science, and Agriculture may be admitted with
the approval of the Senate.
2.2 A candidate with a 2.2 and at least three years of relevant work
experience shall be admitted after passing a qualifying
examination.
3.
3.1 The programme shall run for one and a half years a full-time basis
or three years, on a part-time basis.
3.2 Part 1 of the programme shall be offered on a full-time basis for one
year and on a part time basis for 2 years.
3.3 Part 2 of the programme shall be offered on a full-time basis for a
period of 6 months and on part-time for a period of 12 months.
4.

the Coursework component and Part 2 shall be the Dissertation
4.2 Part 1: Coursework lasting two semesters in the first year for
full-time students and at most four semesters to be completed
within two years for part-time students.
4.3 Part 2: A Dissertation and Research Seminar lasting 6 months for
full-time students and twelve months for part-time students.
4.4 Part 1 shall normally commence at the beginning of a semester.
4.5 Each student registers for courses worth at least 120 course units
for Part 1; courses worth 60 course units are core and the other
courses worth 60 course units are optional. Not all optional
courses shall necessarily be available for any one year. All courses
must be passed for a student to be allowed to proceed to Part 2 of
the programme. All courses are double-weighted. A doubleweighted course consists of 96 hours of teaching, that is, 48
hours of lectures and 48 hours of practicals. The Dissertation and
Research Seminar (worth 80 course units) shall normally start
towards the end of the second semester in the case of full-time
students and after the end of the third semester in case of parttime students.
4.6 The Dissertation shall be at least 12,000 words and at most
20,000 words in length on an approved topic. In the case of a
Dissertation with predominantly calculated solutions, pages that
are less than 10,000 words may be allowed. The Dissertation shall
normally be submitted at the end of 6 months from
commencement in the case of full-time students - at or before
the end of the 12 months, in the case of part-time students.
383
5.
384
6.
EXAMINATIONS
General Academic Regulations. Courses shall be examined at the
end of each semester in which they are taught, each course
comprising one three-hour paper.
5.2 The mark for each course shall comprise the marks for
50:50 for all courses.
5.3 Continuous assessment shall include practical fieldwork or
laboratory practicals and written assignments and tests. The
minimum number of assignments shall be three.
5.4
failing to do so may be allowed to supplement or repeat a course
5.5 Part 2 which includes a Dissertation and a Research Seminar
consists of 80 course units, 70 course units for the Dissertation
and 10 Course units for the Research Seminar. The Research
seminar shall consist of an oral presentation delivered to an
academic audience at a time prescribed by the Department and
shall be on the research proposal and findings of the dissertation.
The Dissertation and Research Seminar topic shall be from the
selected area of specialization.
PART 1: CORE COURSES
Course
Code
Description
Examination
Duration
MGIRS01
Geographic
Information Science
Theory and Practice
3 hrs
MGIRS02
Remote Sensing and

Digital Image
Processing
3 hrs
20
MGIRS03
Research Methods
for Spatial Scientists
3 hrs
20
PART 1: OPTIONS
Course
Code
Description
Examination
Duration
Weighting Course
Units
MGIRS04
Spatial Statistics and Modelling
3 hrs
20
MGIRS05
Advanced GIS Analysis
3 hrs
20
MGIRS06
Advanced Digital Image Processing and

Analysis
3 hrs
20
MGIRS07
Applied GIS and Remote Sensing for

Biodiversity and Wildlife Management
3 hrs
20
MGIRS08
GIS and Remote Sensing for Disaster

Management
3 hrs
20
MGIRS09

Agriculture and Water Management
3 hrs
20
MGIRS10
Societal Applications of GIS and Remote

Sensing
3 hrs
20
MGIRS11

Terrestrial Carbon Estimation and
Monitoring
3 hrs
20
MGIRS12
GIS Algorithms and Programming
3 hrs
20
MGIRS13
Spatial Database Design and

Implementation
3 hrs
20
Weighting
Course
Units
MGIRS14
Remote Sensing of Global Environmental 3 hrs
20
20
MGIRS15
Change Hyperspectral Remote Sensing
3 hrs
20
MGIRS16
GIS for Environmental Impact

Assessment
3 hrs
20
MGIRS17
Web and Mobile GIS
3 hrs
20

DEGREE IN TROPICAL RESOURCE ECOLOGY (MTRE)
1. INTRODUCTION
Tropical Resource Ecology, an applicant will normally be required to
have obtained a BSC Honours Degree in Biological Sciences of this
University with a degree class of 2.1 or better or an equivalent degree.
and at least three years relevant post qualification experience will be
required to write and pass a qualifying examination with a mark
5.

3.1 The Programme will run for a minimum period of 18 months up to a
months on a part-time basis
academic year or for two academic years on a part time basis.
3.3 Part II will be offered for a minimum period of six months up to a
minimum period of 12 months up to a maximum period of 24 months
on a part-time basis.
4.1 The Programme will consist of two Parts. Part I will be the
coursework component, and Part II the research component.
4.2
Part I will normally be taught in one academic year on a full-time

4.3
At part I, each student shall register for courses worth at least 120
required to take all seven core courses and one specialisation
course selected from those on offer each year. In order to pass Part
1, a student shall have to pass courses worth at least 160 course
units, including all core courses. Each course has a weighting of 20
course units, and consists of 96 hours of teaching (48 hours of
lectures and 48 hours of practical classes and seminars).
4.4
Part II of the programme shall normally start after the end of the
coursework component, and will last for a minimum period of six
months and a maximum period of 12 months on full-time basis,
and a minimum period of 12 months and a maximum period of 24
months on part-time basis.
4.5
Part II shall consist of a research project which will be based on a

dissertation on an approved topic. The length of the dissertation
shall normally be between 60 and 100 pages. The dissertation shall
normally be submitted not later than three months before the end
of the project year.
Part I
5.2
6.
Courses will be examined at the end of the semester in which they

are taught, or at the end of the academic year in which they are
taught. End of course examinations for each course will comprise
of one three-hour paper.
assessment and the formal examination in the ratio 40:60, but in
order to proceed to Part II, a student must have obtained at least
50% pass mark in the formal examination of the respective taught
course.
6.2 Continuous assessment will be in accordance with Faculty
seminar presentations, and students will be notified of their
385
6.3
Students must pass Part I before proceeding to Part II. Those failing
6.4 The research component will be assessed based on the

dissertation.
6.5
7.
Students must pass Part II.
COURSES
7.1
Part I:
Courses Masters in Tropical Resource Ecology (MTRE 5)
Core Courses
386
Code
Description
Exam Duration
Course Units
MTRE501
3 hours
20
MTRE502
Introduction to Tropical Resource

Ecology
Research Methods
3 hours
20
MTRE503
Plant Ecology
3 hours
20
MTRE504
Wildlife Ecology
3 hours
20
MTRE511
Social Ecology
3 hours
20
MEPP507
Geographical Information Systems
3 hours
20
MEPP515
Remote Sensi ng
3 hours
20
Specialisation options
Code
Description
Exam Duration
Course Units
MTRE506
Conservation of Tropical Resources
3 hours
20
MTRE 512
Community-based Natural Resource

Management
3 hours
20
MTRE513
Resource Economics
3 hours
20
MTRE51 4
Resource Systems Management
3 hours
20
MTRE516
Conservation Systems Policy
3 hours
20
MTRE517
Advanced Research Methods
3 hours
20
MTRE518
Biodiversity and Ecosystems
3 hours
20
MTRE515
Aquatic Ecology
3 hours
20
Part II
Course Masters in Tropical Resource Ecology (MTRE 5)
Code
MTRE570
Description
Weighting
4
Units
80
MTRE501
Introduction to Tropical Resource Ecology
Current status of international agreements on global warming: The Kyoto
protocol; The Copenhagen Accord, Agenda 21, Millennium Development
Goals (MDGs), Life in the Universe, Water and Mars, Conditions of life as we
know it. The Earth atmosphere: Structure and composition. Drivers of the
earth's climate: The green house effect, Comparison between Earth and
Martian climates, Relative importance of green house gases, anthropogenic
emissions (Sources and sinks). Historic changes in the earth's climate: Sources
of evidence (Ice core evidence, Sediments, Tree rings, Paleontological).
Reconstructing past atmospheres: long-term past CO2, Ice cores,
Palaeontology, Distribution of ancient biomes. Impacts of climate change on:
Water resources, Biodiversity, Forest resources, Energy, Wetlands (Ecosystem
function, Agriculture, Health, Settlement, Infrastructure). Mitigation:
Emission scenarios and projecting future climate, International protocols
(UNFCC, Kyoto, Biodiversity, Ramsar, Desertification). Vulnerability and
adaptive capacity. Adapting to future climate (Health, Food security,
Energy). Autonomous adaptation and residual vulnerability: Planned
adaptation, Millennium development goals, Institutions and policies for
climate change, Copenhagen and Durban climate change meetings.
MTRE502
Research Methods
What is research and why do research? The scientific method, Ethics in
science. Research process: Problem definition and selection, Problem
analysis, Study plan. Research proposal: Guidelines for writing proposal, Site
selection, sampling units, replication. Data collection: Primary and secondary
data, Sources of data. Statistical and data management software: Overview
of software, choice of appropriate package, Data entry and data
management. Sampling: Simple random sampling, Stratified random
sampling, Systematic sampling, Quadrat sampling. Surveys: Survey planning,
Types of survey, Phases of a survey, Design of questionnaire, Implementing
survey, Data management. Modelling: Multiple linear regression, General
linear models, Introduction to REML. Simple time series models: Time series
plots, Components of a time series, Smoothing. Analysis of distribution of
free data (nonparametrics): Ranked data, Scores, Alternative methods of
data analysis. Multivariate methods: Cluster methods, Principle components,
Discriminant analysis, Factor analysis. Presentation of research: Validation
and analysis, Data presentation, Report writing.
MTRE 503
Plant Ecology
Methods in plant ecology: Key questions in plant ecology, Vegetation
description and measurement, Vegetation mapping, plant ecology
modelling. Plant population ecology: populations and population structure,
Natality and mortality, Life tables, Population growth, Density dependence
and density independence, Population dynamics (fluctuations, cycles and
chaos), Projection matrices. Plant community ecology: nature of
communities, Community composition (diversity and abundance), Spatial
patterns, Gradient analysis, Ordination and classification, Problem of
boundaries, Temporal patterns, Succession, Primary productivity, Nutrient
cycling, Processes influencing community structure (competition,
facilitation, models of coexistence, disturbance and community structure,
non-equilibrium and equilibrium theories, herbivory, fire, interactive effects).
MTRE 504
Wildlife Ecology
Population and community ecology (numbers & distribution): External
drivers and seasonality, Reproduction, Behaviour, Predators and parasites,
Structure of large mammal communities in relation to soil moisture and
nutrients, Competition and facilitation in multispecies systems. Large
mammal communities and community structure: Comparative studies and
analysis as a research tool, Allometry and scaling in mammalian physiology
and ecology, Body size and ecological traits, Large herbivore body size and
digestive anatomy, Evolutionary aspects, Ecological implications of body size.
Assembly and management of large mammal communities: Stocking rates
and carrying capacity in multispecies systems, Population growth rates and
harvesting, Pastoral systems and adaptive management strategies, Wildlife
production systems, Economics of wildlife as a land use, Adaptive
management of complex systems. Conserving biodiversity: Issues and
problems in southern Africa, Management paradigms and issues of scale,
Conservation of endangered species, Protected areas, Land use issues and
large scale conservation approaches, Linking social and ecological systems.
Methods in wildlife management: Census techniques for large mammals,
Sampling of invertebrate populations, Ageing criteria and indices of
condition, Feeding ecology, Diet and dung and scat analysis, Radio tracking
and telemetry, Capture and translocation.
MTRE506
Conservation of Tropical Resources
Characteristics of terrestrial ecosystems in tropical climates: Biophysical
aspects of tropical environments (climate, location, landforms, soil,
vegetation). Tropical resource systems (woodland-, grassland- and agroecosystems) within the framework of conventional and sustainable resource
use. Current and relevant conservation issues within the framework of global
change.
MTRE511
Social Ecology
Rural Economy, rural livelihoods and natural resources utilization: Rural
Economy, Livelihoods and natural resource exploitation, Role of technology
in natural resource exploitation and management, Natural resource use and
changing economic environment, Principles and rationale of natural
Resource valuation, Resource valuation techniques, Project appraisal and
evaluation in natural resources management, Resource mapping and GIS
applications in natural resource use and management. Social Sciences
Research Methodology: Overview of social science research methodology.
Principles and role of institutions in Natural Resource Management, and
Natural Resource Policy: Role of institutions in natural resource use and
management, Theories and principles in natural resource management,
Common property theory from an economic perspective, Compliance theory,
Community based natural resource management (CBNRM), Indigenous
technical knowledge and intellectual property rights, Models of institutional
analysis, Allocation of natural resources and exchange institutions, Natural
resource and environmental policy.
MTRE512
Community Based Natural Resource Management
Basics of wildlife and savanna ecology; Rural economy; Property rights, land
use incentives; Innovation and biodiversity conservation; Governance,
institutions, common property management. Performance and scale; Localglobal relationships; Performance and corruption; Capacity-building in
communities; Participatory research; Project management and performance
monitoring.
MTRE513
Resource Economics
Introduction to natural resource economics; Fundamentals of dynamic
optimisation; Economic efficiency and market failure; Tragedy of the
commons reassessed; Exploitation of resources in the market economy;
Optimal utilisation of resources over time; Influence of economic and
institutional factors on resource use.
MTRE514
Resource Systems Management
System components; Planning and management: Planning, design and
management objectives; Modelling of resource systems; Constrained and
unconstrained optimisation; Uncertainty and reliability analysis; Simulation
reliability, resilience and vulnerability of resource systems; Risk and
uncertainty analysis.
387
MTRE516
Conservation Systems Policy
Definitions; Conservation concepts and values; Overview of principles and
(MSC CT)
1.
PREAMBLE
Academic Regulations and with the Faculty of Science Regulations for
the Masters Degrees by Coursework.
2.
SPECIAL ENTRY REQUIREMENTS

Normally, applicants must hold either:
2.1 a good BSc Honours Degree in Computer Science or in a relevant
discipline, or
2.2 a good BSc General degree in Computer Science or in a relevant
discipline together with at least two years appropriate experience,
in which case the applicant may be required to sit for a qualifying
examination, if the department deems it necessary.
3.

The programme will run for 18 months on a full-time basis or 3 years on a
part-time basis.
3.1
Part I of the programme will be offered on a full-time basis for two
semesters and on a part-time basis for at most four semesters.
3.2
Part II will be offered full-time for a period of 6 calendar months
and part-time for a period of 12 calendar months.
4.

4.1
The programme will consist of two parts:
388
Part I:
Coursework lasting for 2 semesters in the first year for Full-time

candidates and at most 4 semesters within the first two years
for part-time candidates.
Part II:
A research project lasting 6 calendar months full-time or 12

calendar months part-time.
4.2
Part I will commence in March and will occupy two teaching

semesters on a full-time basis and at most 4 semesters within
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
5.
the first 2 years on a part-time basis.

Each semester will normally involve 12 weeks of teaching and
one week of private study followed by two weeks in which formal
examinations will be conducted.
Full-time students may be expected to remain on campus
during the vacation.
Each student will register for at least 6 courses for Part I. A
course will be examined at the end of the semester in which it is
taught. At least 6 courses must be passed for a candidate to be
allowed to proceed to Part II of the programme. A course may
have pre-requisites which a student must pass before
registering for the course.
Students will be allowed to register for existing courses in other
departments in any faculty if, in the opinion of the Departmental
Board, the syllabi for such courses are appropriate to the
programme and if those departments allow such registration.
(Such courses will form part of the courses mentioned in 4.4)
The research project will normally commence after the end of
the second semester in the case of full-time candidates and after
the end of the semester in which Part I is completed in the case
of part-time candidates. The dissertation will normally be
submitted on or before 31 July of the second year, in the case of
full-time candidates, and on or before 20 November of the
third year, in the case of part-time candidates. The research
project may be undertaken either in the university, at a firm to
which the student is assigned or at any other academic
institution approved by the Departmental Board.
389
COURSE MASTER OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER SCIENCE CODE (MCT)
Code
Description
Exam Duration
MCT501
2 hours
Course Units
1
MCT502
2 hours
MCT503
2 hours
MCT504
Operating Systems
2 hours
MCT505
Computer Architecture
2 hours
MCT506
2 hours
MCT507
Computer Graphics
2 hours
MCT508
Parallel P rocessing
2 hours
MCT509
Artificial Intelligence
2 hours
MCT510
Distributed Systems
2 hours
MCT511
Database Management Systems
2 hours
MCT512
Advanced Topics in Computer Science
2 hours
2.2
3.
DURATION AND DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF THE PROGRAMME

The Programme runs for 2 years for full-time students and 4 years for
part-time students.
The Programme normally commences in August.
4.

Full-time students
4.1 The Programme shall consist of two parts: Part I and Part II. Part I
shall be the Coursework component and Part II the Research
Component.
4.2 In Part I a student shall take a minimum of 8 Courses and a
maximum of 10 Courses.
4.3 A student will normally submit his/her dissertation by 31 May of
the year after that in which he/she commenced Part II.
Part-Time Students
4.4 The Programme consists of three parts: Part Ia, Part Ib and Part II.
Parts Ia and Ib comprise the Coursework component and Part II the
Research Component.
4.5 In each of Parts Ia and Ib a student shall take a minimum of 4
Courses and a maximum of 5 courses.
4.6 A student will normally submit his/her dissertation by the 31 May
of the second year after the year in which he/she began Part II.
Both Full-time and Part-time Students
4.7 Parts I, Ia and Ib will normally commence in August and end in
September of the next year. The Part will be divided into two
semesters but students will normally be required to remain on
campus for the duration of the Part.
4.8 The formal examination for a Course in Parts I, Ia and Ib will
normally be held two to three weeks after the end of lectures in
that Course or at the end of the semester in which the Course is
taught. Normally the timing of examinations for all courses will be
determined before the start of the Part. The duration of formal
examinations are as in Section 5.
Part II:
390
MCT570
Weighting
Part I 50%:
Part II 50%
Note:
The student should pass at least 6 courses in Part I. The overall mark for Part I
for each student will be the average of the 6 courses which gives the highest
aggregate. The student should pass the dissertation in Part II.
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF

SCIENCE DEGREE IN MATHEMATICS
1.
PREAMBLE
2.

To be admitted to the programme an applicant must normally have:
EITHER
2.1 a good Honours Degree in Mathematics or its equivalent;
OR
a good General Degree in Mathematics and suitable relevant

experience. Such an applicant may be required to attend an
Interview, undertake preliminary courses and/or pass a
qualifying examination as directed by the Mathematics
Departmental Board.
Code
Description
Exam Duration
MTS501
MTS502
Course Units
MTS543
Packings and Coverings 2
3 hours
3 hours
MTS544
3 hours
Group Theory 1
3 hours
Graph Theory and Linear

Optimization 1
MTS503
Category Theory 1
3 hours
MTS545
Graph Theory and Linear

Optimization 2
3 hours
MTS504
Topological Groups 1
3 hours
MTS506
Functional Analysis 1
3 hours
MTS526
3 hours
MTS527
Group Theory 2
3 hours
MTS528
Category Theory 2
3 hours
MTS529
Topological Groups 2
3 hours
MTS530
Functional Analysis 2
3 hours
MTS531
Further Topic in Pure Mathematics
3 hours
MTS532
Further Topic in Pure Mathematics
3 hours
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
Speciality: Graph Theory

Code
Description
Core
Exam Duration
Course
Units
MTS534
Advanced General Graph Theory 1
GT
3 hours
MTS535
GT
3 hours
MTS536
Algebraic Graph Theory 1
3 hours
MTS537
Matroid Theory with Applications 1
3 hours
MTS538
GT
3 hours
MTS539
GT
3 hours
MTS540
Algebraic Graph Theory 2
3 hours
MTS541
Matroid Theory with Applications 2
3 hours
MTS542
Packings and Coverings 1
3 hours
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.7
Certain courses are labelled as Core Courses within their

Speciality (Mod for Mathematical Modelling and GT for
Graph Theory). These Courses must be taken and
passed before the end of the Programme by each
student choosing that Speciality.
The assessment of each Course in Parts I, Ia and Ib will be
by continuous assessment and formal examination in
the ratio 25 : 75.
To pass Part I a full-time student must pass 8 Courses
including all Core Courses in the chosen Speciality.
Normally a full-time student must pass Part I before
proceeding to Part II. However, a student may
commence Part II pending the completion of
Supplementary Examinations and will normally be
allowed to carry up to two Courses into Part II.
To pass each of Parts Ia and Ib a part-time student must
pass 4 Courses. The 8 Courses passed in the Coursework
Component must include all Core courses in the chosen
Speciality.
A part-time student must pass at least 2 Courses in Part
Ia before proceeding to Part Ib.
Normally, part-time students must pass both Parts Ia
and Ib before proceeding to Part II.
However a student may commence Part II pending the
completion of Supplementary Examinations and will
normally be allowed to carry up to two Part Ib Courses
into Part II.
391
5.2
Part II (Full Time and Part Time)

Code
Title
MTS570 Research Dissertation
Core
Yes
Weighting
100%
A research seminar will have a weighting of 10%

5.3
Passing the Degree and Classification of the Degree

5.3.1 In order to be eligible for the award of a Degree a
student must pass all Core Courses and each Part of the
Programme.
5.3.2
5.3.3
392
For a full-time student Parts I and II are weighted equally

in the final assessment. For a part-time student parts Ia,
Ib and II are weighted in the proportion 25:25:50.
The Master of Science in Mathematics Degree
Certificate shall record the fact that the student has
been awarded the Master of Science in Mathematics
with the area of Specialization included in parentheses.
FACULTY OF SOCIAL STUDIES

PROGRAMMES
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE HONOURS IN
ADMINISTRATION DEGREE (HAD)
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE HONOURS IN ECONOMICS
DEGREE (HEC)
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE HONOURS IN POLITICAL
SCIENCE DEGREE (HPOS)
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE HONOURS IN PSYCHOLOGY
DEGREE (HPS)
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE HONOURS IN RURAL AND
URBAN PLANNING DEGREE (HRUP)
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE HONOURS IN REAL ESTATE
MANAGEMENT DEGREE (HREM)
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE HONOURS IN SOCIOLOGY
HONOURS DEGREE (HSO)
BACHELOR OF SOCIAL WORK HONOURS DEGREE
(HSW)
GENERAL REGULATIONS
1.

Academic Regulations for undergraduate degrees, hereinafter
referred to as the general regulations.
1.2 The General Academic Regulations take precedence over these
regulations.
2.
DEFINITION OF TERMS
In these regulations terms used are as described in the General
Regulations.
3.
PROGRAMMES
The Faculty of Social Studies offers the following undergraduate degrees:
Bachelor of Science Honours in Administration Degree (HAD)
Bachelor of Science Honours in Economics Degree (HEC)
Bachelor of Science Honours in Political Science Degree (HPOS)
Bachelor of Science Honours in Psychology Degree (HPS)
Bachelor of Science Honours in Rural and Urban Planning Degree (HRUP)
Bachelor of Science Honours in Real Estate Management Degree (HREM)
Bachelor of Science Honours in Sociology Degree (HSO)
Bachelor of Social Work Honours Degree (HSW)
Courses in the Faculty of Social Studies are taught in the following
Departments:
?
Centre for Population Studies
?
Centre for Applied Social Sciences
?
Department of Economics
?
Department of Political and Administrative Studies
?
Department of Psychology
?
Department of Rural and Urban Planning
?
Department of Sociology
?
School of Social Work
4.1 To be admitted to any of the Degree Programmes offered in the
Faculty of Social Studies, a candidate must have satisfied the
minimum condition for entrance to degree studies at this
University, as prescribed in the General Regulations.
4.2 Additional requirements for specific programmes:
4.2.1 In the case of the BSc Administration Honours Degree, a pass
in Mathematics at Ordinary Level;
4.2.2 In the case of the BSc Economics Honours Degree, a pass at
grade B or better at ordinary Level, or equivalent, in
Mathematics;
4.2.3 In the case of the BSc Psychology Honours Degree, passes at
Ordinary Level, or equivalent, in Mathematics and an
approved Science subject;
393
4.2.4 In the case of the BSc RUP Honours Degree and BSc REM
Honours Degree, a Grade B or better at Ordinary Level pass
in Mathematics and two Advanced Level passes including
Geography.
A student may apply for special entry into programmes offered by
the Faculty of Social Studies in accordance with provisions as
prescribed in the General Academic Regulations.
5.12 A student must not register for courses worth more than 72 course
units, per semester.
5.13 A level I student registered for a degree programme in the Faculty
of Social Studies may apply to transfer to a different degree
programme in the Faculty. In all cases, the transfer shall be subject
to the agreement of the Departmental Board responsible for the
Degree to which the student wishes to transfer and the Dean of
Social Studies.
5.1 The minimum duration of a degree is three or four years
depending on the number of levels at which the courses are taught.
5.2 Courses are taught at 3 or 4 levels of study.
5.3 A course weighted 12 course units shall be taught in a semester
and a course weighted 24 course units shall be taught in two
semesters of the same academic year. Each course consists of at
least three hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials per week.
5.4 A course may be designated core or optional for each degree
programme.
5.5 Not all optional courses will necessarily be on offer in any given
academic year.
5.6 All Social Studies students shall take a non credit computer
appreciation course totaling 40 hours in the course of the degree
programme.
5.7 All first year students shall do a Communication Skills course and
awarding of a degree shall depend on passing this course.
5.8 All final year students shall do a dissertation or project normally
researched over two semesters.
5.9 Subject to the approval of the Departmental Board and the Dean, a
student may take optional courses taught in other departments.
5.10 A student wishing to take optional courses from other
departments must satisfy the prerequisite requirements, if any,
contained in the regulations specific to the department concerned.
5.11 To be awarded a three level degree a student must take and pass
courses worth 144 course units at level 1, 120 course units at each
of levels 2 and 3. To be awarded an HSW Degree a student must
take and pass courses worth 144 course units at level 1, 132 at level
2 and 120 course units each at levels 3 and 4. To be awarded the
HRUP Degree a student must take and pass courses worth 144
course units at each level from level 1 to level 4. To be awarded an
HREM Degree a student must take and pass courses worth 144
course units at level 1, 120 course units at levels 2,3 and 4.
6. EXAMINATIONS
6.1 The end of course examination shall normally take place at the end
of the semester in which teaching is completed.
6.2 To be admitted to the examinations, a candidate must have
satisfactorily attended the approved course of study at the
University of Zimbabwe. Satisfactory attendance means
submission of all required written work and participation in all
prescribed seminars, tutorials, practical classes and fieldwork.
6.3 The end of course examination for a course of twelve units shall be
of three hours duration and that of a course of twenty four units
shall be of three or four hours duration, as specified in the subject
regulations.
6.4 The examiners may require a student to attend an oral
examination in a given course.
4.3
5.
394
7.
7.1
Normally, a course, other than a project course or a dissertation
course, shall be assessed by continuous assessment and an end of
course examination.
7.2 A fieldwork course or a practical course shall be assessed as
prescribed in the Departmental Regulations.
7.3 The assessment of a project OR dissertation course shall be based
on a written report submitted on a date prescribed in the
Departmental Regulations. The submission date will normally be
at the end of the semester in which the course is completed.
7.4 Unless stipulated otherwise in the Departmental Regulations,
continuous assessment shall contribute between 25% and 30% of
the overall mark for a course.
8.

The processing of the examination results shall be as prescribed in the
9.

The degree shall be classified in accordance with General Regulations.
4.2.

The degree shall be awarded in accordance with General.
4.3.
11. SYLLABUSES
In accordance with the provisions of the General Regulations detailed
syllabuses for Subjects/Courses do not form part of the General and
Faculty Regulations but shall be submitted to the Faculty Board for
approval. Copies of the detailed syllabuses shall be maintained in the
4.4.
REGULATIONS SPECIFIC TO THE BACHELOR OF

SCIENCE HONOURS IN ADMINISTRATION DEGREE
(HAD)
1.
Introduction
These regulations must be read in conjunction with the General
Academic Regulations for Undergraduate Degrees, hereinafter referred
to as 'General Regulations', and the Faculty of Social Studies Regulations
for Undergraduate Degree Programmes, hereinafter referred to as
'Faculty Regulations'.
2. Definitions
In these regulations the definitions used in the General Regulations and
the Faculty Regulations shall apply.
3.
4.
Entry Requirements
To be admitted to the Degree Programme a candidate must have satisfied
the minimum conditions for entrance to Degree Studies as prescribed in
the General Regulations and the Faculty Regulations, provided that the
mere satisfaction of the minimum conditions will not guarantee entry to
the programme.
Degree Programme Structure
4.1. Courses in this Degree are taken in three levels of study.
4.5.
4.6.
5.
The duration of the Degree programme is for a period of not less

than three academic years and not more than six academic years.
Failed courses may be repeated in the next semester in which the
courses concerned are taught.
To be awarded the Degree a student must have taken and passed
courses and / or course combinations that enable him / her to
obtain a total of three hundred and eighty-four (384) course units
as follows: one hundred and forty-four (144) course units in Level I;
one hundred and twenty (120) course units in Level II; and one
hundred and twenty (120) course units in Level III. A student may
take a maximum of seventy-two (72) course units per semester. All
core courses are compulsory.
At least one hundred and sixty-eight (168) of the course units in
Levels II and III must be derived from courses offered by the
department.
Courses weighted as twenty-four (24) course units are double
courses. Courses weighted as twelve (12) course units are single
courses.
A course weighted as twelve (12) course units will normally include
at least two hours of lectures and a one hour tutorial per week over
a semester.
Courses and Course Combinations

5.1. Level I
Core Courses
Semester 1
Course
Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
PA109
Introduction to
Political Science
PA108
Introduction to
Political Theory
PA107
Theories and Institutional
Framework of Public
Administration
AD105
Qualitative Social Science
Research Methods
CSSO101 Academic Communication
Skills for Social Sciences
Weight
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
12
395
Semester 2
Course Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
PA113
Political Science and
Governance
PA112
Political Theory II
PA111
Structures and Functions
of Public Administration
AD106 Quantitative Social Science
Research Methods
CSSO102 Professional Communication
Skills for Social Studies
396
Weight
Course
Units
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
Optional Courses
Courses equivalent to forty-eight (48) course units to be chosen from list A in
5.5 and from any level 1 courses offered in the Faculty of Social Studies or in
related Faculties, subject to the approval of the Dean and the Chairperson.
Students wishing to take optional courses from other departments must
satisfy the prerequisite requirements, if any, contained in the regulations
specific to the department concerned. Not all optional courses will
necessarily be on offer in any given academic year.
5.2.
Level II
Semester 1
Core Courses
Course
Code
AD201
AD204
AD203
Course
Description
Public Policy
Human Resources
Management
Local Government
Management
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course Course
Code
Description
AD205 Politics and Local
Governance
AD202 Policy Formulation
and Analysis
AD206 Public Personnel
Administration
Prerequisite
PA107 & PA111
Course
Units
12
PA107 & PA111
12
PA107 & PA111
12
Prerequisite
Weight
Weight
Course
Units
AD203
12
AD201
12
AD204
12
Optional Courses
Courses equivalent to forty-eight (48) course units to be chosen from list B in
5.6 and from any level II or III courses offered in the Faculty of Social Studies or
in related faculties, subject to the approval of the Dean and the Chairperson.
At least twelve (12) of the course units chosen must be from list B. Students
wishing to take optional courses from other departments must satisfy the
prerequisite requirements, if any, contained in the regulations specific to the
department concerned. Not all optional courses will necessarily be on offer in
any given academic year.
5.3.
Level III
Semester 1
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
AD305 Project Planning
AD202
AD302 Public Sector Development AD202
AD303 Development ManagementAD205
AD370 Dissertation
5.4
Weight
1
1
1
2
Course
Units
12
12
12
24
The dissertation is a double course normally researched over

two semesters. It must be submitted two weeks before the start of
examinations in the second semester. The length of the
dissertation shall be 8000 to 10000 words.
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course
Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
AD304
Change and
Development
AD302
AD301
Public Sector Finance AD305
AD306
Project Management
AD305
Weight
1
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
Optional Courses
Courses equivalent to twenty-four (24) course units to be chosen from list C
in 5.7 and from any level II or III courses offered in the Faculty of Social Studies
or in related faculties, subject to the approval of the Dean and the
Chairperson. At least twelve (12) of the course units chosen must be from list
C. Students wishing to take optional courses from other departments must
5.5. List A: Departmental Optional Courses which may be taken in

Level I
Semester 1
Course
Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
PA110
Introduction to Constitutional
Law and Politics
AD110
Public Sector Accounting
Semester 2
Course
Code
PA114
AD111
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Constitutional Rights
Public Sector Auditing
Weight
1
1
Weight
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
Course
Units
12
12
5.6. List B: Departmental Optional Courses which may be taken in

Level II
Semester 1
Course
Code
AD221
POS220
AD223
POS201
Course
Description
Administrative Law
Democracy and
Human Rights
Public Sector
Management
Governance in
Zimbabwe
Semester 2
Course
Course
Code
Description
Ad222
Health Service
Administration
POS222
Principles of
International Law
5.7.
Prerequisite
Course
Units
12
PA109 & PA113
12
PA107 & PA111
12
PA109 & PA113
12
Prerequisite
Weight
Weight
Course
Units
PA107 & PA111
12
PA110 & PA114
12
List C: Departmental Optional Courses which may be taken in

Level III
Semester 1
Course
Course Description Prerequisite
Code
AD322
Industrial Relations AD204
POS301
Politics and
Governance in Africa POS202
POS303
Modern Political Theory
Semester 2
Course
Course Description Prerequisite
Code
AD331
State Legal Liability AD221
POS331
Diplomacy
POS211
Weight
1
Course
Units
12
1
1
12
12
Weight
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
6. Scheme of Examination
6.1. Courses shall be examined at the end of each semester in which
they are taught, each course comprising one two-hour paper.
6.2. To be admitted to the examinations, a student must have
registered for and satisfactorily completed the prescribed scheme
of study. Such scheme of study shall include attendance of
lectures, seminars, tutorials and submission of required
assignments. Attendance of tutorials is compulsory.
6.3. All examinations will be conducted by continuous assessment and
end of course examinations, provided that the examiners may, in
addition, test any candidate orally. Supplementary examinations
may only be permitted if authorised by the General Regulations.
6.4. Continuous assessment shall count for 25% of the overall
assessment of a course, while end of course examinations shall
count for 75%.
6.5. The Degree classification shall be based on the two hundred and
forty (240) course units taken in Levels II and III.
397

SCIENCE HONOURS IN ECONOMICS DEGREE (HEC)
1. INTRODUCTION
to as the General Regulations, and the Faculty of Social Studies
Regulations for Undergraduate Degree Programmes, hereinafter referred
to as Faculty Regulations.
2. Definitions
398
3. Entry Requirements
3.1. To be admitted to the Bachelor of Science (Hons) degree programme
in Economics, a candidate must:
3.1.1. Have satisfied the minimum conditions for entrance to
degree Studies as prescribed inthe General Regulations and
the Faculty Regulations, provided that the mere satisfaction
of the minimum conditions will not guarantee entry to the
Programme.
3.1.2. Have, additionally a pass at Advanced level or equivalent, in
Mathematics.
4. Degree Programme Structure
4.1. The degree is to be taken in three levels of study for a period of not
less than three academic years and not more than six academic
years.
4.2. The degree programme consists of one hundred and forty four
(144) course units in level 1, one hundred and twenty (120) course
units in level II and one hundred and twenty (120) course units in
level III. A student may take a maximum of seventy two (72) course
units per semester.
4.3.
To be awarded the Degree a student must have taken and passed

courses and / or course combinations that enable him/her to
obtain a total of three hundred and eight four (384) course units.
At least one hundred and sixty eight (168) of the course units in
levels II and III must be derived from courses offered by the
department.
4.4. Courses weighted as twenty four (24) course units are double
courses.
4.5. A course weighted as twelve (12) course units will normally include
at least two (2) hours of lectures and a one (1) hour tutorial per
week over a semester. A course weighted as twenty four (24)
course units will normally include at least two (2) hours of lectures
and a one (1) hour tutorial per week over two (2) consecutive
semesters.
5. Courses and course combinations
5.1. Level 1
5.1.1. Students must take the equivalent of one hundred and forty
four (144) course units, seventy two (72) in each semester.
Semester 1
Core courses
Course
Code
ECON 104
ECON 105
ECON 106
CSSO 101
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Descriptive Statistics and
Probability Models in
Economics
Mathematics for Economics
Academic Communication
Skills for Social Sciences
Weight
1
Course
Units
12
1
1
12
12
12
Semester 2
Course
Code
ECON 109
ECON 110
ECON 111
CSSO 102
Semester 2
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Sampling theory and
Statistical Inference in
Economics
Mathematics for Economic
Analysis
Academic Communication
Weight
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
Optional Courses
Courses equivalent to forty-eight (48) course units to be chosen from list A

and from any level 1 courses offered in the Faculty of Social Studies or in
related faculties subject to the approval of the Dean and the Chairperson.
specific to the department concerned. Not all optional courses will necessarily
be on offer n any given academic year.
5.2 Level II
Students must take the equivalent of one hundred and twenty (120)
course units, sixty (60) in each semester. All level II courses offered by
the Department of Economics other than History of Economic
Thought, Political Economy and Social Economics require that
students have successfully completed Introduction to Economic
Principles.
Semester 1
Core courses
Course
Course
Code
Description
ECON 206 Microeconomics 1
ECON 205 Mathematics for
Economists
ECON 201 Applied Statistics
Prerequisite
ECON104, ECON106,
ECON 111
ECON104, ECON106,
ECON109, ECON 111
ECON104, ECON106,
ECON109 ECON 111
Weight
Course
Units
12
12
12
Course
Course
Code
Description
ECON 204 Macroeconomics
Prerequisite
ECON109, ECON105,
ECON111
ECON203 International Trade

Theory and Policy ECON104, ECON109
ECON202 Econometrics 1
ECON104, ECON105,
ECON109, ECON110
Weight Course
Units
1
12
12
12
Optional Courses
The equivalent of twenty four (24) course units in each semester, to be
chosen from either List B or List D below.
5.3.
Level III
Students must take the equivalent of one hundred and twenty
(120) course units, sixty (60) in each semester.
Semester 1
Course
Code
ECON303
ECON301
Course
Description
Microeconomics II
Development
Economics
Prerequisite
Course
Course
Code
Description
ECON 302 Macroeconomic
Theory and Policy
ECON 370 Dissertation
Prerequisite
Weight
ECON205, ECON206
Course
Units
12
ECON206
12
Semester 2
ECON204, ECON205
ECON202, ECON206
Weight
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
Optional Courses
The equivalent of thirty six (36) course units in the first semester and forty
eight (48) in the second semester, chosen from List B, C or D below. (from
3rd year courses only must be chosen).
399
5.4. List A: Options, which may be taken in the First Year
400
Course
Code
AC 108
AC 118
AC 103
AC 113
BS 101
BS 105
EH 102
GG 1010
GG 1020
AD110
AD111
PSY105
PSY102
PSY103
PSY104
SOC103
SOC104
SOC105
SOC106
5.5
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Business Law I
Business Law II
Financial Accounting for Business 1
Financial Accounting for Business II
Business Administration II
Economic History of Africa to 1900
Fundamentals of Physical Geography 1
Fundamentals of Physical Geography II
General Psychology
Introduction to Social Psychology
Selected Issues in Psychology
Issues in Social Psychology
Sociological Foundations
Introduction to Social Anthropology
Social Institutions
Issues in Social Anthropology
Weight
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Course
Units
10
10
10
10
10
10
24
10
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
List B: Departmental optional courses which may be taken in

Level I.
Semester 1
Course
Code
ECON 211
ECON 213
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Agricultural Economic Development
Environmental Economics
Weight
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
Semester 2
Course
Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
ECON212 Agricultural
Production
ECON206
ECON215 Industrial Economics
ECON217 Social Economics
Weight
1
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
5.6. List C: Departmental optional courses which may be taken

in Level III
Semester 1
Course
Code
ECON 311
ECON 317
ECON 313
ECON 314
ECON 319
ECON 320
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Agricultural Marketing
Natural Resources
Econometrics II
ECON 202
International Economics
Introduction to Labour Economics
Public Finance Theory
Weight
1
1
1
1
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
12
12
Semester 2
Course
Code
ECON 312
ECON 316
ECON 321
ECON 322
Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Description
Agricultural Economic Policy
1
Monetary Economics ECON 204, ECON 206
1
Labour Economics
1
Public Finance Policy and Practice
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
Candidates who have performed well in Level II of the degree may, with the
approval of the Departmental Board, submit a dissertation based on
supervised work on an approved topic. The dissertation will count as the
equivalent of twenty four (24) course units. It must be submitted two weeks
before the start of the examinations in the second semester.
5.7.
Course
Code
AC 202
BS 204
BS 208
EH 301
GG 2020
PL 3010
PS 311
List D: Non-Economics Options, which can be taken in either

Level II or Level III.
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Management Accounting For Business
Corporate Finance 1
Economic History of Southern Africa
Marxist Philosophy
Organisational Psychology
Weight
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
Course
Units
24
12
12
24
24
24
24
SO030
SO032
SO031
SO033
Introduction to Demography
Substantive Demography
Fundamentals of Demographic Techniques
Demographic Techniques
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
The Departmental Board of Economics must approve

combinations of courses selected.
6.
Scheme of Examinations
6.1
Examinations will normally be held at the end of each semester in
the case of single courses or in the case of double courses, at the
end of the academic year concerned.
6.2 To be admitted to the examinations, a student must have
registered for and satisfactorily attended the approved courses of
study. Such attendance includes submission of required written
assignments/tests, attendance of tutorial classes and
participation in prescribed tutorials.
6.3 Evaluation will be based on continuous assessment and end of
course examinations.
6.4 Continuous assessment shall count for 25% of the final mark and
the end of course examination shall count for 75% of the final
mark.
6.5 Examinations for single courses (12 course units) shall be for two
(2) hours duration and examinations for double courses (24
course units) shall be for three (3) hours duration.
6.6 A student will be required to pass the equivalent of three hundred
and sixty (360) course units in order to qualify for the award of
the degree.
6.7 The classification of the final degree will be based on the results of
the two hundred and forty (240) course units taken in levels II and
III in accordance with the scheme laid out in the General

SCIENCE HONOURS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE DEGREE
(HPOS)
1.
Introduction
2. Definitions
the minimum conditions for entrance to Degree Studies as prescribed in
the General Regulations and the Faculty Regulations, provided that the
mere satisfaction of the minimum conditions will not guarantee entry to
the programme.
4.1 Courses in this Degree are taken in three levels of study.
4.2 The duration of the Degree programme is for a period of not less
4.3 To be awarded the Degree a student must have taken and passed
as follows: one hundred and forty-four (144) course units in Level
1; one hundred and twenty (120) course units in Level II; and one
4.4 At least one hundred and sixty-eight (168) of the course units in
department.
4.5 Courses weighted as twenty-four (24) course units are double
courses.
401
4.6
A course weighted as twelve (12) course units will normally include

at least two hours of lectures and a one hour tutorial per week over
a semester.
5. Courses and Course Combinations

5.1. Level I
Semester 1
Core Courses
Course
Code
PA109
PA108
PA107
Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Description
Introduction to Political Science
1
Introduction to Political Theory
1
Theories and Institutional Framework
of Public Administration
1
AD105 Qualitative Social Science Research Methods
1
CSSO101Academic Communication Skills for
Social Sciences
1
402
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
12
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course
Code
PA113
PA112
PA111
Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Description
Political Science and Governance
1
Political Theory II
1
Structures and Functions of Public
Administration
1
AD106 Quantitative Social Science Research Methods
1
CSSO102Professional Communication Skills
for Social Studies
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
12
Optional Courses
Courses equivalent to forty-eight (48) course units to be chosen from list A in
5.5 and from any level 1 courses offered in the Faculty of Social Studies or in
related faculties, subject to the approval of the Dean and the Chairperson.
5.2.
Level II
Semester 1
Core Courses
Course Course
Code
Description
POS201 Governance in
Zimbabwe
POS220 Democracy and
Human Rights
POS211 International Relations
Prerequisite
Weight
Course
Units
PA109 & PA113
12
PA109 & PA113

PA109 & PA113
1
1
12
12
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
POS203 International
Organisations
P0S211
POS202 State Politics and
Society in Zimbabwe POS201
POS204 African Political Ideas
Weight
Course
Units
12
1
1
12
12
Optional Courses
Courses equivalent to forty-eight (48) course units to be chosen from list B in
5.6 and from any level II or III courses offered in the Faculty of Social Studies or
in related faculties, subject to the approval of the Dean and the Chairperson.
At least twelve (12) of the course units chosen must be from list B. Students
wishing to take optional courses from other departments must satisfy the
prerequisite requirements, if any, contained in the regulations specific to the
department concerned. Not all optional courses will necessarily be on offer in
any given academic year.
5.3.
Level III
Semester 1
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
POS301 Politics and
Governance in Africa POS202
POS303 Modern Political Theory
POS306 International Peace
and Security Studies POS211
POS370 Dissertation
2
24
5.4
5.5. List A: Departmental Optional Courses which may be taken in

Level I
Semester 1
Weight
Course
Units
1
1
12
12
12
The dissertation is a double course normally researched over two

semesters. It must be submitted two weeks before the start of
dissertation shall be 8000 to 10000 words.
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
POS304 Contemporary
Political Theory
POS303
POS302 Politics in Developing
Societies
POS202
POS307 Contemporary Conflict
Management Studies POS211
Weight
Course
Units
12
12
12
Optional Courses
in 5.7 and from any level II or III courses offered in the Faculty of Social Studies
or in related faculties, subject to the approval of the Dean and the
Chairperson. At least twelve (12) of the course units chosen must be from list
C. Students wishing to take optional courses from other departments must
Course
Code
PA110
AD110
Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Description
Introduction to Constitutional Law and Politics
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
Semester 2
Course
Code
PA114
AD111
5.6.
Course
Code
AD221
AD223
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Constitutional Rights
Weight
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
List B: Departmental Optional Courses which may be taken in

Level II Semester 1
Course
Description
Administrative Law
Public Sector
Management
Prerequisite
PA107 & PA111
Weight
1
Course
Units
12
12
Semester 2
Course Course
Code
Description
POS222 Principles of
International Law
AD205 Politics and Local
Governance
AD222 Health Service
Administration
Prerequisite
Weight
Course
Units
PA110 & PA114
12
PA107 & PA111
12
PA107 & PA111
12
403
5.7. List C: Departmental Optional Courses which may be taken in

Level III
Semester 1
Course
Code
AD322
AD303
AD305
Course
Description
Industrial Relations
Development
Management
Project Planning
Prerequisite
Weight
AD204
Course
Units
12
AD205
AD202
1
1
12
12

SCIENCE HONOURS IN PSYCHOLOGY DEGREE (HPS)
1.
Introduction
2.
Definitions
3.
Entry Requirements
To be admitted to the Degree Programme a candidate must have
satisfied the minimum conditions for entry to Degree Studies as
prescribed in the General Regulations and the Faculty Regulations,
provided that the mere satisfaction of the minimum conditions will not
guarantee entry to the programme.
4.
Degree Programme Structure

as follows: one hundred and forty-four (144) course units in Level
1; one hundred and twenty (120) course units in Level II; and one
4.4 At least one hundred and twenty (120) of the course units in Levels
II and III must be derived from courses offered by the department.
courses. The minimum contact hours for each course shall be at
least 60 hours.
Semester 2
Course
Code
AD306
AD304
404
Course
Description
Project Management
Change and
Development
AD331 State Legal Liability
POS331 Diplomacy
Prerequisite
Weight
AD305
Course
Units
12
AD302
AD221
POS211
1
1
1
12
12
12
6.1 Courses shall be examined at the end of each semester in which they
are taught, each course comprising one two-hour paper.
6.2 To be admitted to the examinations, a student must have registered
for and satisfactorily completed the prescribed scheme of study.
Such scheme of study shall include attendance of lectures,
seminars, tutorials and submission of required assignments.
Attendance of tutorials is compulsory.
6.3 All examinations will be conducted by continuous assessment and
6.4 Continuous assessment shall count for 25% of the overall
count for 75%.
6.5 The Degree classification shall be based on the two hundred and

5.1. Level 1 Courses
Semester 1
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Course
Code
Description
Units
PSY105 General Psychology
1
12
PSY102 Introduction to Social Psychology
1
12
1
12
2 Sociology Level 1 courses and 1 other course in the Faculty of Social Studies
Semester 2
Course Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Course
Code
Description
Units
PSY 103 Selected Issues in
Psychology
PSY100
1
12
PSY 104 Issues in Social
Psychology
PSY101
1
12
CSSO102 Professional Communication
1
12
2 Sociology Level 1 courses and 1 other course in the Faculty of Social Studies
Optional Courses
Courses equivalent to thirty -six (36) course units to be chosen from any level
1 courses offered in the Faculty of Social Studies or in related Faculties,
subject to the approval of the Departmental Board. Students wishing to take
optional courses from other departments must satisfy the prerequisite
requirements, if any, contained in the regulations specific to the department
concerned. Not all optional courses will necessarily be on offer in any given
academic year.
5.2 Level 2 Courses

Semester 1
Core Courses
Course Course
Code
Description
PSY209 Quantitative Research
Methods in Psychology
PSY210 Introduction to
Statistics and
Computing Science
PSY202 Psychobiology
PSY204 Child Development
PSY208 Sensation and
Perception
Prerequisite
Weight
Course
Units
PSY102/103/104/105
12
PSY102/103/104/105
PSY102/103/104/105
PSY102/103/104/105
1
1
1
12
12
12
PSY102/103/104/105
12
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course
Code
PSY203
PSY205
Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Description
Learning Principles
PSY102/103/104/105 1
Comparative
Psychology
PSY102/103/104/105 1
PSY207 Adolescence and
Adulthood
PSY204
1
PSY212 Qualitative Research
Methods in Psychology PSY102/103/104/105 1
PSY211 Applied Computing and
Statistical Analysis
PSY210
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
12
Optional Courses
405
5.3 Level 3 Courses

Semester 1
Core Courses
Course Course
Code
Description
PSY301 Psychometrics
PSY302 Psychopathology
PSY307 Cognition
PSY309 Organisational
Psychology
PSY 370* Dissertation
5.5
Prerequisite
Weight
PSY209/210/211/212
1
PSY209/210/211/212
1
PSY208/209/210/211/212 1
Course
Units
12
12
12
PSY209/210/211/212
PSY 209/210/211/212
12
24
1
1
One optional course available

Semester 2
Core Courses
406
Course
Code
PSY304
PSY308
Course
Description
Personality
Principles of
Psychotherapy
PSY 370* Dissertation
Prerequisite
Weight
PSY209/210/211/212
Course
Units
12
PSY302
PSY 209/210/211/212
1
1
12
24
One optional course available

5.4
* The dissertation is a double course normally researched over two

dissertation should be between 8 000 and 10000 words.
Optional Courses
and from any level II or III courses offered in the Faculty of Social Studies or in
related faculties, subject to the approval of the Departmental Board. At least
twelve (12) of the course units chosen must be from list C. Students wishing to
take optional courses from other departments must satisfy the prerequisite
requirements, if any, contained in the regulations specific to the department
concerned. Not all optional courses will necessarily be on offer in any given
academic year.
List C: Departmental Optional Courses which may be taken in

Level III
Semester 1
Course Course
Code
Description
PSY 303 Applied Principles of
learning
Prerequisite
Weight
PSY203/209/
210/211/212
PSY 305 Systems and Theories PSY 209/210/211/212
PSY 306 Psychology and Law
PSY 209/210/211/212
Semester 2
Course Course
Code
Description
PSY 310 Forensic Psychology
PSY 311 Contemporary Issues
in Psychology
PSY 312 Personnel Psychology
PSY 313 Consumer Psychology
6.
Prerequisite
1
1
1
Weight
Course
Units
12
12
12
PSY 306
Course
Units
12
PSY 209/210/211/212
PSY 209/210/211/212
PSY 209/210/211/212
1
1
1
12
12
12
6.1 Examinations will normally be held at the end of each semester in
the case of single courses or, in the case of double courses, at the
end of the academic year.
6.2 To be admitted to the examinations, a student must have registered
6.3 All examinations will be conducted by continuous assessment and
6.4 Continuous assessment shall count for 30% of the overall
count for 70%.
6.5 The Degree classification shall be based on the two hundred and
4.4. Level III will consist of the equivalent of eight compulsory courses
and two optional courses chosen from among the optional courses
on offer during the year plus compulsory Design Studio. The
courses will be taken at the rate of six courses per semester.
4.5 Level IV will consist of the equivalent of six compulsory courses and
two optional courses, four in each semester, plus compulsory
Regional Design Studio. In addition, students will also do either a
compulsory Design Project or Dissertation to be assessed through
both a written report and oral presentation.
4.6. Courses weighted as twenty-four (24) course units are double
courses.
4.7. A course weighted as twelve (12) course units will normally include
at least three hours of lectures and a one hour tutorial per week over
a semester. The Dissertation or Design Project course weighted at
twenty-four (24) course units will normally proceed through
working with the help of a supervisor. Design Studios are based on
practical work worth twelve (12) units each semester for 8
semesters.

SCIENCE HONOURS IN RURAL AND URBAN
PLANNING DEGREE (HRUP)
1. Introduction
2. Definitions
3.1. To be admitted to the Degree Programme a candidate must have
satisfied the minimum conditions for entrance to Degree Studies as
prescribed in the General Regulations and the Faculty Regulations,
provided that the mere satisfaction of the minimum conditions will
not guarantee entry to the programme.
3.2 Maths 'O' level B or better, A level pass in Geography and any one of
the following: Biology, Physics, Sociology, Accounts, Economics,
Chemistry, Mathematics
4.1. Courses in this Degree are taken in four levels of study.
4.2. The duration of the Degree programme is for a period of not less
than four academic years and not more than eight academic years.
4.3. To be awarded the Degree a student must have taken and passed
courses and/or course combinations that enable him/her to
obtain a total of five hundred and seventy-six (576) course units as
follows: one hundred and forty-four (144) course units in each
Level from Level I up to Level IV. A student may take a maximum of
seventy-two (72) course units per semester. All core courses are
compulsory.
5.
407

5.1.
Level I
Semester 1
Core Courses
Course
Code
RUP101
RUP 109
RUP114
RUP115
ECON 104
CSSO101
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Introduction to Planning
Environmental Systems
Statistics
Introduction to Spatial Planning
Principles of Micro-Economics
Academic Communication Skills
Weight
1
1
1
1
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
12
12
Semester 2
Core Courses
RUP217
Course
Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Code
Description
RUP112
Environmental Planning
1
RUP113
The City in History & Settlement Analysis
1
RUP117 Introduction to Planning Mathematics
1
RUP118
Design of land use plans
1
ECON109 Principles of Macro-Economics
1
CSSO102 Professional Communication Skills
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
12
12
5.2 Level II Courses

Semester 1
Core Courses
Course
Code
RUP202
408
RUP208
RUP211
RUP213
RUP214
RUP218
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Planning Techniques
and Methods
RUP117
Introduction to
Water Supply and Sewerage
Rural Planning, Society and Ecology
Aspects of Environmental Design
Residential Layouts
Designs
RUP115
Fundamentals of
Planning Theory
RUP101
Weight
Course
Units
12
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Code
Description
RUP209 Geographic Information System
and Planning
1
RUP210 Introduction to Road and
Building Infrastructure
1
RUP212 Rural Planning, the Economy and the State
1
RUP215 Planning Theory and
Practice
RUP101
1
RUP216 Designing Urban Settlements
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
12
Designing for Social and Economic

Infrastructure
RUP115
12
5.3 Level III Courses

Semester 1
Core Courses
Course
Code
RUP314
RUP319
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Regional Economic Theory
Introduction to Law
and Legal Method
RUP320 Urban Morphology
and Design
RUP213
RUP326 Real Estate Environment
RUP327 Design of Facilities
RUP214 & RUP217
Weight
1
Course
Units
12
12
1
1
1
12
12
12
Optional Courses
Students shall select one optional course at Level III from the following
options:
Course
Code
RUP321
RUP322
RUP324
RUP325
Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Description
Transport Economics and Logistics
1
Rural Resources and Planning
1
Principles of Project Planning and Management 1
Elements of Construction Industry
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course
Code
RUP317
RUP328
Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Description
Regional Planning Methods & Techniques
1
Planning Law and Practice
1
Architectural Aspects of Environmental Design
RUP213
1
RUP334 Property Valuation Management
1
RUP335
Design Models and the Environment
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
Optional Courses
Students shall select one optional course related to first semester optional
course at Level III from the following:
Course
Code
RUP330
RUP331
RUP332
RUP333
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Foundations of Public Transport
Rural Land and Development Policy
Project Planning and Design
Construction Economics
Weight
1
1
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
Not all optional courses will necessarily be on offer in any given academic
year.
5.4 Level IV Courses
Semester 1
Core Courses
Course
Code
RUP410
RUP411
RUP417
RUP421
RUP470
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Urban Development & Management
Planning Thought and Practice
Introduction to Regional Planning
Regional Design Studio
Dissertation
Weight
1
1
1
1
2
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
24
Optional Courses
Course
Code
RUP418
RUP419
RUP420
RUP422
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Aspects of Traffic Engineering
Principles of Project Management
Principles of Construction Practice
Rural Development and Agrarian
Transformation
Weight
1
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course
Code
RUP401
RUP416
RUP423
RUP427
RUP470
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Professional Planning Practice
Urban Policy and Planning
Regional Planning Policy and Strategies
Design and Plans
Dissertation/Design Project
Weight
1
1
1
1
2
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
24
Optional Courses
Course
Code
RUP424
RUP425
RUP426
RUP428
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Transport and Its Environment
Project Management Techniques
Construction Planning and Management
Issues in Sustainable Rural Development
Weight
1
1
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
Not all optional courses will necessarily be on offer in any given academic
year.
6.
6.1. Examinations will normally be held at the end of each semester
in the case of single courses or, in the case of double courses,
at the end of the academic year.
6.2. To be admitted to the examinations, a student must have
registered for and satisfactorily completed the prescribed
scheme of study. Such scheme of study shall include
attendance of lectures, seminars, tutorials and submission of
required assignments. Attendance of tutorials is compulsory.
6.3. All examinations will be conducted by continuous assessment
and end of course examinations, provided that the examiners
may, in addition, test any candidate orally.
6.4. Continuous assessment shall count for 33% of the overall
count for 67%.
409
6.5. The Degree classification shall be based on the four hundred and
thirty two (432) course units taken in Levels II, III and IV.

SCIENCE HONOURS IN REAL ESTATE MANAGEMENT
DEGREE (HREM)
1. Application of These Regulations
Academic Regulations for Undergraduate Degree Programmes,
hereinafter referred to as General Regulations and the Faculty of
Social Studies Regulations for Undergraduate Programmes,
hereinafter referred to as Faculty Regulations.
1.2 The General Regulations take precedence over these regulations.
410
2. Definition of Terms
In these regulations, the definitions used in the General Regulations and
Faculty Regulations shall apply.
3.
PROGRAMMES
The programme is of four years duration. Generally, all the candidates
shall take all the thirty four (34) courses and participate in the attachment
of students normally for 36 weeks.
Registration will follow the University of Zimbabwe academic calendar
year for undergraduate studies.
4.1 To be admitted to the Degree Programme, a candidate must have
satisfied the minimum requirements for entrance to Degree
Studies as prescribed in the General Regulations and the Faculty
Regulations, provided that the mere satisfaction of the minimum
requirements will not guarantee entry to the programme.
4.2 One must have passed both Mathematics and Geography at 'O'
Level.
4.3 To be admitted a candidate must have passed any two (2) of the
following A Level subjects Geography, Management of Business,
Mathematics, Accounting, Economics, Law, Statistics and
Technical Drawing.
4.4
A candidate who has the equivalent of Real Estate Council

Certificate, Diploma in Architectural Technology, Diploma in
Quantity Surveying, or Diploma in Town Planning and experience
in real estate or related fields is eligible to apply for admission
under special entry or mature entry.
5.1 The duration of the degree programme is for a period of not less
than four academic years full-time.
5.2 The Degree Programme comprises five hundred and sixteen (516)
course units consisting of one hundred and forty-four units at
Level I, one hundred and twenty for both Levels II and III and one
hundred and thirty two for Level IV. A student may take a
maximum of seventy two (72) course units per semester at Level I,
sixty at Level II, and seventy two at Level IV. Each course shall
consist of at least 30 hours of lectures and tutorials except the
dissertation and the industrial attachment.
5.3 Practical work shall form part of the programme, and in order to
acquire experience in this area, a student shall be attached to work,
which can expose him/her to practical real estate management
skills. This should be a place approved by the Chairman and the
Board. Normally, a student should complete at least 36 weeks of
professional attachment before proceeding to Level IV.
5.4 Supervision of industrial attachment will normally be done by a
member of staff designated by the Departmental Board. The
criteria for assessing the student shall be drawn and agreed by the
Departmental Board, giving a total of 120 Units. The criteria shall
be made available to each student before the start of industrial
attachment.
5.5 A failed course shall be repeated or carried when it is next offered.
6. Examinations
6.1 The courses shall be examined at the end of the semester in which
teaching is done and completed in line with the UZ academic year.
6.2 A minimum of two (2) assignments shall be submitted per each
semesterised course and three (3) for a double semester course.
6.3 Every Level IV candidate shall submit a dissertation before the
beginning of the final examinations. The written report shall
normally be between 8000 and 10000 words excluding
diagrammatic illustrations. Furthermore, the dissertation shall be
orally presented in front of a panel of examiners. The oral
examination shall constitute 10% of the dissertation mark.
7.
7.1
Each course shall be assessed using end of course examinations
marks and continuous assessment marks, in the ratio 70:30.
7.2 A candidates should pass both components separately. In the event
a student fails course examinations the score shall be 48% or the
actual mark which ever is lesser.
7.3 Attachment is normally assessed through visits by supervisors and
work reports and a written report by the student at the end of the
attachment. The score shall be a stand alone 120 Units. The
assessment criteria will be drawn up by the Department.
8.
Processing of Results
The results shall be processed in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations.
9.
9.1 These shall be in accordance with the General Academic
Regulations for Undergraduate Programmes.
9.2 A student can carry a maximum of two (2) courses in any
particular semester. Courses carried from level II are done at Level
IV.
9.3 A student cannot proceed to Level III carrying Level I courses.
9.4 The degree classification shall be based on the three hundred and
seventy two (372) course units taken in Levels II, III and IV. Level II
shall contribute 30%, Level III 30% and Level IV 40% in weight.
10. Award of the Degree

10.1 The degree shall be awarded in line with General Academic
10.2 To be awarded a degree, a student must have taken and passed a
total of five hundred and sixteen (516) course units including a
satisfactory attachment report.
11. Academic Offences and Penalties
These shall be determined in accordance with the General Academic
12. Posthumous and Aegrotat Provisions
The provisions shall be applied in accordance with the General Academic
13. Publication of Examination Results

14. Student Appeals Against Published Results
Appeals shall be in accordance with the General Academic Regulations
for Undergraduate Programmes.
15. Academic Transcript
Issuance of academic transcript shall be in accordance with the General
Academic Regulations for Undergraduate Programmes.
16. Award of A Degree Certificate of The University of Zimbabwe
The degree will be awarded in accordance with General Academic
17.
Courses
17.1
Core courses
Course
Code
REM 101
REM 102
REM 103
ECON 104
CSSO101
REM 104
REM 105
REM 106
ECON109
REM 107
REM 108
CSSO102
Level I Courses
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Urban Planning I
Urban Economics I
Statistics
Principles of Micro-Economics
Academic Communication Skills
Building Technology
Financial Accounting I
Building Studies
Principles of Macro-Economics
Valuation I
Professional Communication Skills
Weight
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
411

Core courses
Course
Code
REM 201
REM 202
REM 203
REM 204
REM 205
REM 206
REM 207
REM 208
REM 209
REM 210
412
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Urban Planning II
REM 101
Urban Economics II REM 102
Real Estate
Development I
Law I
Building Services
Financial
Accounting II
REM 105
Research and
Quantitative Methods
Valuation II
REM 107
Property and Facility
Management I
Real Estate Finance
and Investments I
Weight
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
1
1
12
12
12
12
17.3 Level III Courses

Core course
Course
Code
REM 380
Course
Prerequisite
Description
and Professional
Experience (student
attachment)
Weight
Course
Units
120
17.4 Level IV Courses

Level IV starts on satisfactory completion of level three in line with set out
criteria by DRUP.
Core courses
Course
Code
REM 401
REM 402
REM 403
REM 404
REM 405
REM 406
REM 407
REM 408
REM 409
REM 470
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Urban Management
Professional Practice
Real Estate
Development II
REM 203
Law II
REM 204
Negotiation, Arbitration and Mediation
Advanced Valuation
Valuation III
REM 208
Property and Facility
Management IIREM 209
Real Estate Finance
and Investments II
REM 210
Dissertation
Weight
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
24
18. Course Syllabuses

In accordance with the provisions of the General Regulations detailed syllabi
for courses do not form part of the General and Faculty Regulations, but shall
be submitted to the Faculty Board for approval. Detailed syllabi shall be
maintained in the faculty office for reference.

SCIENCE HONOURS IN SOCIOLOGY DEGREE (HSO)
1. Introduction
2. Definitions
the minimum conditions for entry to Degree Studies as prescribed in the
General Regulations and the Faculty Regulations, provided that the mere
satisfaction of the minimum conditions will not guarantee entry to the
programme.
courses and/or course combinations that enable him/or her to
as follows: one hundred and forty-four (144) course units in Level 1;
one hundred and twenty (120) course units in Level II; and one
4.4
At least one hundred and sixty-eight (168) of the course units in
Department.
4.5 Courses weighted as twelve (12) course units are single courses.
4.6 A course weighted as twelve (12) course units will normally include
at least three hours of lecturer and a one hour tutorial per week
over a fifteen week semester.
5.
5.1 Level 1
Semester 1
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
SOC103 Sociological Foundations
SOC104 Introduction to Social Anthropology
CSSO101 Academic Communication Skills
for Social Studies
SOC107 Philosophical Foundations
Weight
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
1
1
12
12
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
SOC105 Social Institutions
SOC106 Issues in Social Anthropology
for Social Studies
History of Enlightenment Thinking
Weight
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
1
1
12
12
Optional Courses
Courses equal to forty-eight (48) course units chosen from any Level I
courses offered in the Faculty of Social Studies, or in related Faculties, subject
to the approval of the Departmental Board.
5.2 Level 2 Courses
Semester 1
Core Courses
Course Course
Code
Description
SOC201 Qualitative Research
Methods
SOC204 Sociology of
Organizations
SOC205 Sociology of
Development
SOC217 Gender Studies
Prerequisite
Weight
Course
Units
SOC102/103/104
12
SOC103
12
SOC103/104/105/106 1
SOC103
1
12
12
413
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Code
Description
SOC202 Quantitative Research
Methods
SOC102/103/104/105 1
SOC203 History of Sociological
and Anthropological
Thought
SOC103/104
1
Course
Units
12
12
Optional Courses
Courses equivalent to forty eight (48) course units to be chosen from list A
and from any Level 2 courses offered in the Faculty of Social Studies or in
related faculties, subject to the approval of the Departmental Board. At least
twenty four (24) of the course units chosen must be from courses taught in
the Department of Sociology in list A.
414
List A: Departmental options which may be taken in level 2

Course Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
SOC208 Political Sociology
either SOC103 or 104
SOC209 Crime and Deviance
SOC210 Race and Ethnic
Relations
SOC211 Economy, Society &
Governance
SOC212 Sociology of Medicine either SOC103 or 104
SOC213 Sociology of Education either SOC103 or 104
SOC214 Sociology and
Anthropology of
Tourism
SOC215 Sociology of Mass
Communications
SOC216 Sociology of the Family either SOC103 or 104
SO030 Introduction to
Demography
SO032 Substantive
Demography
Weight Course
Units
1
12
1
12
1
12
1
1
1
12
12
12
5.3
Level 3 Courses
Semester 1
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
SOC301 Classical Social Theory SOC203
SOC370 Dissertation
SOC201/202
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course Course
Code
Description
SOC302 Contemporary Social
Theory
Special Issues Paper
5.4
Prerequisite
Weight
1
2
Weight
SOC203
One of SOC303,304
or 305
Course
Units
12
24
Course
Units
12
12
The dissertation is a double course normally researched over two

examinations in the second semester. The length of the dissertation
shall be 8 000 to 10 000 words.
Optional Courses
Courses equivalent to eighty-four (84) course units to be chosen from list B
and from any Level 3 courses offered in the Faculty of Social Studies or in
related faculties, subject to the approval of the Dean and the Departmental
Board. At least sixty (60) of the course units chosen must be from courses
taught in the Department of Sociology in list B.
List B: Departmental options which may be taken in Level 3
12
1
1
12
12
12
12
Course Course
Code
Description
SOC302 Advanced Statistical
Methods
SOC303 Special Issues in
Organisations
Development
Prerequisite
Weight
Course
Units
SOC201/202
12
SOC204
12
SOC205
12

Stratification
SOC206
SOC306 Rural Development
SOC205
SOC308 Sociology of Work and
Industrial Organization SOC204
SOC309 Labour Studies
SOC204
SOC310 Sociology of
Occupations and
Professions
SOC204
SOC311 Ritual, Religion and
Symbolism
SOC103
SOC312 Social Policy and Social
Administration
SOC205
SOC314 Sociology of the
Environment
SOC205
SOC313 Alternative Health Care
either
SOC204 or 205
SOC315 Special Area Study
SOC103/104
SOC316 Urban Sociology
SOC205
SOC317 Special Issues in Gender
Studies
SOC217
SO031 Fundamentals of Demographic Techniques
SO033 Demographic Techniques
6.5
The Degree classification shall be based on the two hundred and

1
1
12
12
1
1
12
12

SOCIAL WORK HONOURS DEGREE (HSW)
12
12
12
1. Introduction
Academic Regulations for Undergraduates hereinafter referred to as
'General Regulations'.
12
1
1
1
12
12
12
1
1
1
12
12
12
6.1 Examinations will normally be held at the end of each semester.
6.2
To be admitted to the examinations, a student must have registered

6.3
All examinations will be conducted by continuous assessment and

addition, test any candidate orally.
6.4
Continuous assessment shall count for 25% of the overall

count for 75%
2. Definitions
In these regulations the definition used in the General Regulations and
3. Entry qualifications
3.1 To be admitted to the Bachelor of Social Work (Honours) degree, a
candidate must have satisfied the minimum conditions for entrance
to undergraduate degree studies at the University of Zimbabwe as
prescribed by the General Regulations.
3.2 Candidates who possess the three (3) year Graduate Diploma in
Social Work of the University of Zimbabwe or an equivalent
qualification from other institutions may, subject to the production
of evidence of approved experience and, if required, by satisfactory
performance in a preliminary examination, be admitted into Part IV
of the BSW (Honours) Degree programme over one (1) year fulltime, under special entry programme.
4. Duration of the programme
4.1 The duration of the study is not less than four academic years and
not more than eight academic years.
4.2 The duration for the special entry programme shall be one
academic year and not more than two academic years.
415
416
5. Structure of the programme

5.1 Courses for this programme shall be taken at four (4) levels of study
5.2 To be awarded a Degree a student must have taken and passed
courses that enable him/her to obtain a total of 516 course units as
follows; one hundred and forty four (144) course units at level I; One
hundred and thirty-two (132) course units at level II; one hundred
and twenty (120) course units are level III and one hundred and
twenty (120) course units at level IV.
5.3 The Degree shall consist of four (4) parts with Part I consisting of
eight (8) taught courses and Part II consisting of ten (10) taught
courses. Part III shall consist of five taught courses. Part IV shall
consist of nine (9) taught courses plus a dissertation. In addition,
students shall be required to do practical learning in Parts II and III
(equivalent to one course unit in each part).
courses.
5.5 A course weighted as twelve (12) course units will normally include
at least three hours of lectures and a one hour tutorial per week over
a fifteen week semester.
6.1 Level 1 Courses
Semester I
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
HSW115 Introduction to Social Work
SOC103 Sociological Foundations
SOC104 Introduction to Social Anthropology
PSY102 Introduction to Social Psychology
PSY105 General Psychology
Weight
1
1
1
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
12
12
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
HSW116 Introduction to Social
Welfare Services
HSW115
SOC105 Social Institutions
SOC106 Issues in Social Anthropology
PSY103 Selected Issues in Psychology
PSY104 Issues in Social Psychology
for Social Studies
Weight
Course
Units
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
12
12

Semester 1
Core Courses
Course Course
Prerequisite
Weight
Code
Description
HSW201 Introduction to Socio-Economic
Development
1
HSW203 Introduction to Social Research
Methods
1
HSW205 Introduction to Social Work with Individuals
1
HSW207 Introduction to Social Work with Groups
1
HSW209 Introduction to Community Work
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
12
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course
Code
HSW202
HSW204
HSW206
Course
Description
Applied
Socio-Economic
Development
Basic Statistics and
Social Research
Methods
Applied Social Work
with Individuals
Prerequisite
Weight
Course
Units
HSW201
12
HSW203
12
HSW205
12
HSW208
HSW210
HSW280
Applied Social Work

with Groups
HSW207
Applied Social Work
with Communities HSW209
Introduction to
Practical Learning
12
12
Note: Introduction to Practical Learning entails 12 weeks of full-time

practical work under professional supervision.
6.3 Level 3 Courses
Semester 1
Core Courses
Course
Code
HSW307
HSW312
HSW310
HSW311
HSW314
Course
Code
HSW401
HSW403
HSW404
HSW411
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Integrated Social Work Methods
Social Policy and Administration
Individual and Social Pathology
Principles and Practice of Rehabilitation
Community Health
Weight
1
1
1
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
12
12
12
Course
Description
Practical Learning
Prerequisite
Weight
5
Course
Units
60
Note. Practical Learning entails 15 weeks of full-time practical work under

professional supervision.
Introduction to Practical Learning and practical learning assessment will be
on the basis of a combination of practical performance (40%), practical
learning report (40%) and seminar presentation (20%).
Course
Prerequisite
Description
Introduction to Management of Social
Welfare Organisations
Child Welfare Policy
Project Planning and Management
in Social Work
Counselling Theory
Weight
Course
Units
1
1
12
12
1
1
12
12
Semester 2
Core Courses
Course
Code
HSW406
HSW409
Semester 2
Course
Code
HSW380
6.4 Level 4 Courses

Semester 1
Core Courses
HSW410
HSW412
HSW470
Course
Description
Management of
Social Welfare
Organisations
Child Welfare Policy
and Practice
Design and Practice
Project Planning
and Management
Counselling Practice
Dissertation
Prerequisite
Weight
Course
Units
HSW401
12
HSW403
12
HSW404
HSW411
1
1
1
12
12
12
Optional Courses
Course
Course
Prerequisite
Code
Description
HSW407 Introduction to Rural
Development
HSW407
HSW408 Rural Development
Weight
1
1
Course
Units
12
12
7. Scheme of Examinations
7.1 Taught courses will be examined at the end of each semester. The
dissertation will be examined at the end of the Part IV academic
year.
417
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
In order to be admitted to the examination, a student must have

registered for and satisfactorily completed the prescribed scheme
of the study. Such scheme of study shall include attendance of
lectures, seminars, tutorials and submission of required
assignments. Attendance of tutorials is compulsory.
Evaluation of taught courses shall be based on both coursework
assessment and formal examinations.
Coursework shall contribute 25% towards overall assessment of a
course while the end of course examination shall contribute 75%
towards final mark.
The Degree classification shall be calculated on the basis 372
course units taken in the levels II, III and IV.
In the case of practical learning, examinations will be by assessment
of the performance of the student during placement.
Introduction to Practical Learning and Practical Learning are
assessed on the basis of a combination of practical performance
(40%), field report (40%) and seminar presentation (20%).
REGULATIONS FOR THE POSTGRADUATE

DEGREES OFFERED BY FACULTY OF SOCIAL
STUDIES
418
1. INTRODUCTION
Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by Course Work, hereinafter
referred to as the Regulations.
2.1 Normally applicants must have obtained an appropriate Honours
Degree from the University of Zimbabwe or a recognized University,
at 2.1 degree class or better.
2.2
Applicants with a Bachelor's or approved equivalent shall be

considered in accordance with the General Academic regulations.
3. PROGRAMMES
Postgraduate programmes offered by the Faculty are listed below:
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Master of Public Administration Degree (MPA)

Master of Science Degree in International Relations (MIR)
Master of Science Degree in Clinical Psychology (MCPS)
Master of Science Degree in Occupational Psychology (MOPS)
Master of Science Degree in Economics (MEC)
Master of Science Degree in Population Studies (MPOS)
Master of Science Degree in Rural and Urban Planning (MRUP)
Master of Science Degree in Social Ecology (MSEC)
Master of Science Degree in Sociology and Social Anthropology
(MSO)
3.10 Master of Social Work Degree (MSW)
4. STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMME
4.1
The duration of the MSc programme shall be three semesters for a

full-time programme and six semesters for a part-time programme.
4.2
The Programme shall normally commence in August.
4.3
The MSc programme is divided into two parts. Part 1 will be the
continuous assessment component for two semesters and Part 2,
the dissertation for one semester.
4.4
The minimum course units for the MSc programme shall be in

accordance with item 5.2 of the General Academic Regulations.
4.5
Each course shall consist of a minimum of 60 contact hours,

including seminars and practicals.
4.6
The combination of courses shall be as specified in the individual

programme regulations.
4.7
The minimum length of a dissertation shall be 15000 to 25 000

words. The dissertation has a weighting of 4 single courses. The
dissertations normally start after the end of the second semester in
the case of full time students and after the end of the semester in
which Part I is completed in the case of part-time students.
4.8
5.2
Courses will be examined at the end of each semester and each

course comprises one paper examinable for at least three hours.
5.3
External examining and moderation of formal examinations shall

be in accordance with items 6.2 of the General Academic
Regulations.
5.5
To be admitted to a formal examination, a student should attend

lectures, seminars, or practicals and submit the required
continuous assessment.
A student must pass Part 1 before proceeding to Part 2. A student
who fails a course will be allowed to supplement or repeat the
course.
6. ASSESSMENT
assessment and for the formal examination.
6.2
The ratio of continuous assessment to formal examination shall be

in accordance with item 7.6 of the General Academic Regulations
6.3
Each Department shall manage continuous assessment in

accordance with item 7.3 of the General Academic Regulations.
A student who fails continuous assessment shall be barred from
sitting for the formal examination in accordance with item 6.5 of
6.4

7.1 Examination results shall be processed in accordance with item 8 of
The dissertation shall be written in English.
5. EXAMINATIONS
5.4
7.
8. DETERMINATION OF RESULTS
8.1 Results shall be determined in accordance with item 9 of the
REGULATIONS SPECIFIC TO THE MASTER OF

SCIENCE IN PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION DEGREE
(MPA)
1. Introduction
Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework.
2. Entry Qualifications
To be eligible to apply for admission to the Master of Public
Administration programme, a candidate must normally have attained at
least one of the following qualifications:
2.1. a high standard of achievement in the BSc (Administration)
Honours Degree or BSc (Political Science) Honours Degree with a
2.1 or better.
2.2. a high standard of achievement in an approved Honours Degree in
a related discipline.
3. Duration of Programme
3.1 The programme shall run for three semesters on a full time bases
or six semesters on a part-time basis.
3.2 Part 1 of the programme shall be offered on a full time basis for two
semesters, and on a part-time basis for four semesters.
3.3 Part 2 shall be offered full-time for a period of one semester and
part-time for a period of two semesters.
4.1 The programme shall consist of two parts: Part 1 will be the course
work component and Part 2 the dissertation.
419
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
420
Part 1: Course work lasting for two semesters in the first year for
full-time students and at most four semesters within the two years
for part-time students. Part 2: A dissertation lasting one semester
full-time or two semesters part-time.
Part 1 shall normally commence in August. Each semester shall
normally have 12 weeks of teaching and 1 week of private study
Each student will register for ten courses for Part 1, all of which are
compulsory. All ten courses must be passed for a student to be
consists of 60 hours of seminars. All courses are single weighted.
semester in the case of full-time students and after the end of the
students. All students must pass the dissertation.
The dissertation has a weighting of 4 single courses.
The dissertation shall about 15 000 words on an approved topic. The
dissertation shall normally be submitted at the end of the third
semester in the case of full-time students and at the end of the
second semester after registering for Part 2 in the case of part-time
students.
5. Examinations
5.1. Examinations shall be conducted in accordance with General
5.2. Courses shall be examined at the end of each semester in which they
are taught, each course comprising one three-hour paper.
5.3. A student who fails to submit required course work may be denied
entry to the examinations.
5.4. Supplementary examinations may be permitted only if authorised
by the General Regulations.
5.5. Students who fail examinations may be allowed to repeat the
courses concerned in accordance with General Academic
Regulations.
5.6. A candidate must pass all taught courses before submitting the
dissertation.
5.7. Candidates may be permitted one occasion for the re-submission of
the dissertation.
6. Assessment of Courses
6.1. The mark for each course shall comprise the marks for continuous
assessment and the formal examination. Examinations shall count
for 75% and continuous assessment shall count for 25% of the
overall mark for each course.
6.2. Continuous assessment shall include written assignments, tests and
seminars.
6.3. A candidate must pass all taught courses and the dissertation in
order to be awarded the degree.
7.
Courses
7.1. Part 1 Taught Courses
Semester One
Code
Description
MPA509 Organisation Theory

and Management
MPA510 Human Resources
Management
MPA517 Management of Public
Finance
MPA511 Qualitative Research
Methods
MPA512 Strategic Planning and
Management
Semester Two
Code
Description
Exam
duration
Weight
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
Exam
duration
Weight
MPA513 E-Governance and

Management Information
Systems
3 hours
MPA514 Public Policy Formulation
Analysis
3 hours
MPA515 Quantitative Research
Methods
3 hours
MPA516 Programme Management
and Evaluation
3 hours
MPA517 Public Sector Reforms
and Management
3 hours
Units
Units
15
15
15
15
15
7.2 Part 2 - Dissertation

Semester Three
Code
Description
MPA570 Dissertation
Weight
4
Units
60
REGULATIONS SPECIFIC FOR THE MASTER OF

SCIENCE DEGREE IN CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY
(MCPS)
1. INTRODUCTION
2.1 Applicants must have obtained an Honours Degree in Psychology
from this University, or the equivalent, as evaluated by the Clinical
Psychology Teaching Committee. A good standard of achievement
in that degree will normally be required, but consideration will also
be given to relevant pre-clinical experience and to personal
suitability for clinical work, as evaluated by the Clinical Psychology
Teaching Committee.
2.2 To be admitted to the examinations for the degree, a candidate
must, over a period of two-calendar years:2.2.1 have satisfactorily undertaken such practical work as
directed by Clinical Psychology Teaching Committee;
2.2.2 have presented satisfactory reports of institutional visits,
patient assessments and therapeutic procedures as are
required by the Clinical Psychology Teaching Committee;
2.2.3 have maintained up-to-date files, available for inspection by
the examiners, on all assessment, therapeutic and research
procedures carried out;
2.2.4 have submitted such written assignments as are required by
course lecturers, at a satisfactory standard overall;
2.2.5 have attended such lectures, visits, practical demonstrations
and seminars as required by the Clinical Psychology
Teaching committee, and have actively participated in these
as required;
2.2.6 have demonstrated competence in dealing with patients

from the various cultural groups in the country presenting
themselves for psychological guidance including
elementary communication skills in a local language other
than English.
3. PROGRAMME DURATION
The Programme is of two years full-time duration. Registration normally
takes place in February.
4.1 Candidates will be required to pass three three-hour papers at the
end of the first year; and to pass one three-hour written paper and
to submit a satisfactory dissertation at the end of the second year.
Marks for each paper will consist of 75% for the written
examination and 25% for continuous assessment. Practical work
for each course will be assessed separately. This assessment will be
undertaken either by University or non-University staff, the latter
having supervised the students in their practical work settings and
having been appointed as Associate Supervisors by the Academic
Committee.
4.1.1 First Year: In the first year all three courses and the Practical
Work Assessment will each contribute 25% towards the final
assessment for the year.
Paper I: Psychopathology: MCPS501Conceptual models of
psychology: signs, symptoms and syndromes of child,
adolescent and adult disorders.
Paper II: Applied Psychophysiology: MCPS502 General
neuroanatomy and neurophysiology structure and
functions. Basic biochemistry and psychopharmacology.
Paper III: Introduction to Clinical Psychiatry: MCPS503
Phenomenology of psychiatric disorders; nosology of
psychiatric disorders. Introduction to psychiatric treatment.
Practical Work Assessment MCPS581
4.1.2 Second Year: The course and the practical work assessment
will each contribute 25% and the Dissertation will
contribute 50% towards the final assessment for the year.
Paper I: Clinical Practice: MCPS504 a detailed examination
of models and techniques of assessment and intervention,
and their application in clinical practice. Legal and ethical,
administrative and practical aspects of psychiatric care.
Dissertation: MCPS570 The Dissertation will be empirically
based, of an applied clinical nature, preferably with a
421
community emphasis. It will demonstrate the student's

ability to carry out independent research/investigatory
work in the Clinical Psychology area. Three typed copies (in
double-spacing) must be submitted. The length will
normally be of the order of 25000 to 35000 words. The
Dissertation will normally be submitted in November.
Practical Work Assessment MCPS582 Continuous
Assessment: Part I MCPS551 Continuous Assessment: Part II
MCPS552.
4.2 Examinations will normally, but not necessarily, be held in
November, as determined by the Clinical Psychology Teaching
Committee.
4.3 Supplementary Examinations will not be conducted, but on the
recommendation of the Clinical Psychology
4.4 Teaching Committee, the Examiners may require a candidate to
repeat any Part of the course or to take any examination for a
second time or to re-submit the dissertation after amendment.
422
5. PUBLICATION OF RESULTS AND AWARD OF DEGREES

Results shall be published and Degrees awarded in accordance with the
6. AEGROTAT PROVISIONS
The Degree may not be awarded on an Aegrotat basis.
7.
SYLLABUSES
syllabuses for subjects/courses do not form part of the General and the
Faculty Regulations but shall be maintained in the Faculty Office for
reference.
8. CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY TEACHING COMMITTEE

8.1 A Committee will be set up, comprising the Chairmen of the
Departments of Psychology and Psychiatry, and other full-time
members of these Departments involved in teaching on the MSc
Degree in Psychology.
8.2 The Chairman of the Department of Psychology shall be the
Chairman of the Clinical Psychology Teaching Committee and shall
appoint a Course Coordinator from among the members of the
Committee.
8.3 The Committee will be responsible to Senate, through the Board of
the Faculty of Social Studies, for the teaching and conduct of the
Degree as laid down in these Regulations. It will liaise with the

Ministry of Health, the Ministry of Labour, Manpower Planning and
Social Welfare and other outside bodies regarding the
implementation of the practical work requirements of the Degree.
Additionally, the Committee will submit to the Academic
Committee annually a list of associate Supervisors who shall be
appointed by Academic Committee for the purpose of assessing
students in their practical work.

SCIENCE IN ECONOMICS DEGREE (MEC)
(FULL TIME AND PART-TIME-PARALLEL
PROGRAMME)
1. Introduction
To be eligible to apply for admission to the Master of Science in
Economics, both full-time and part-time programme, a candidate must:
Possess a good honours degree with a 2.1 or better in the Bachelor
of Science Economics Honours Degree of the University of
Zimbabwe or any equivalent degree from another University
approved by Senate. Relevant working experience may also be
considered to applicants from other universities wishing to be
enrolled for the part-time programme.
3.1. The programme shall run for 3 semesters on a full time basis and 6
semesters on Part-time (parallel) programme.
3.2. Full-time students will go to Nairobi, Kenya for a Regional
Collaborative Masters in Economics Programme for Anglophone
Africa (except Nigeria) to do elective courses during vacation from
June to October, (semester 4). Students may do more than two

electives but the Departmental Board will select the best two
elective courses which contribute towards the degree programme.
Part 1 of the programme shall be offered on a full time basis for two
Part 2 shall be offered full-time for a period of one semester and

Regulations.
dissertation.
the dissertation.
4.1. The programme shall consist of two parts; Part 1 will be the course
work component and Part 2, the dissertation.
4.2. Part 1: Course work lasting for two semesters in the first year for
full-time students and at most four semesters within the two years
for part-time students. Part 2: A dissertation lasting one semester
full-time or two semesters part-time.
4.3. Part 1 shall normally commence in August. Each semester shall
4.4. The degree constitutes 10 taught courses and a dissertation. A
dissertation is done in the second year in the case of full-time
students and in the third year in the case of part-time students. All
core courses must be passed for a student to be allowed to proceed
to Part 2 and 3 of the programme. All courses are single weighted.
4.5. The dissertation shall normally start at the end of the second
semester. The dissertation should be about 15 000 to 25 000 words
in length on an approved topic. The dissertation shall normally be
submitted two weeks before the start of examinations of the
subsequent semester.
4.6. The dissertation has a weighting of 4 single courses.
assessment and the formal examination in the ratio 30:70. (A 3
hour paper in all courses, which will account for 70% and a
continuous assessment to account for 30% of the examination
marks).
6.2. Continuous assessment shall include assignments, tests and
seminars.
6.3. A student must pass all taught courses and the dissertation in order
to be awarded the degree. Those failing to do so may be allowed to
supplement or repeat a course in accordance with the General
3.3.
3.4.
5. Examinations
5.2. Courses shall be examined at the end of each semester in which
they are taught, each course comprising one three hour paper.
7. Courses
7.1 Part 1 Taught Courses
The examination duration of all the following courses is 3 hours. All
the courses are single weighted, (15 units). Students must take 6
core courses and 4 optional courses. Students on the collaborative
programme must select 2 courses from Section A and 2 courses
from Section B.
1st Semester courses (August to December)
Students will take 3 core courses and 2 optionals from Section A.
Code
Description
Exam duration
MEC 521 Microeconomics 1
3 hours
MEC 523 Macroeconomics Theory
3 hours
MEC 525 Quantitative Methods 1
3 hours
Weighting
1
1
1
Units
15
15
15
423
2nd Semester courses (February to June)

Students will take 3 core courses and 2 optionals from Section A.
Code
Description
Exam duration
MEC 522 Microeconomics II
3 hours
MEC 524 Macroeconomics Theory
3 hours
and Policy
MEC 526 Quantitative Methods II
3 hours
424
Weighting Units
1
15
1
15
1
7.2 Optional Courses

Section A (Courses offered by the University of Zimbabwe)
Code
Description
Exam duration
Weighting
MEC 527 Advanced Development
3 hours
1
Economics 1
MEC 528 Advanced Development
3 hours
1
Economics II
MEC 529 Labour Economics Theory
3 hours
1
MEC 530 Labour Economics Theory
3 hours
1
And Policy
MEC 531 Monetary Theory and Policy
3 hours
1
MEC 532 Monetary and Financial
3 hours
1
Economics
MEC 533 Economic Modelling
3 hours
1
MEC 534 Economic Planning and
3 hours
1
Policy
MEC 535International Economics I
3 hours
1
MEC 536International Economics II
3 hours
1
15
Units
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
Labour Economics
Economics of Human Resources (Education and Manpower Planning)
History of Economic Thought
Monetary Theory and Practice
Research Methods and Computer Applications
Corporate Finance and Investment
Health Economics
Managerial Economics
Game Theory and Information Economics
Transport Economics
Economics of Natural Resources and Environment
Population Economics
Economics of Public Enterprises
Advanced Econometrics
Rural Development
Urban and Regional Economics
Operations Research
African Economic History
[Not all courses may be available in any one year]
7.3 PART 2
Code
MEC 570
Description
Dissertation
Weighting
4
Units
60
7.4 A Dissertation (MEC 570) on a research topic must be submitted.
Not all options may be available in any one year.

Section B (These courses are offered only for students on the Regional
Collaborative Masters in Economics Programme for Anglophone Africa
(except Nigeria)).
Public Finance
Monetary Economics
International Economics
Industrial Economics
Agricultural Economics Economic Policy Analysis and Planning

SCIENCE DEGREE IN INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
DEGREE (MSCIR)
1. Introduction
To be eligible to apply for admission to the Master of Science in
International Relations programme, a candidate must normally have
attained at least one of the following qualifications:
2.1. a high standard of achievement in the BSc (Political Science)
Honours Degree or BSc (Administration) Honours Degree.
2.2. a high standard of achievement in an approved Honours Degree in a
related discipline.
3.
3.1 The programme shall run for three semesters on a full time bases or
3.2 Part 1 of the programme shall be offered on a full time basis for two
3.3 Part 2 shall be offered full-time for a period of one semester and
4.2 Part 1: Course work lasting for two semesters in the first year for fulltime students and at most four semesters within the two years for
part-time students. Part 2: A dissertation lasting one semester fulltime or two semesters part-time.
4.3 Part 1 shall normally commence in August. Each semester shall
4.4 Each student will register for ten courses for Part 1, all of which are
compulsory. All ten courses must be passed for a student to be
allowed to proceed to Part 2 of the programme. Each course consists
of 60 hours of seminars. All courses are single weighted.
4.5 The dissertation shall normally start after the end of the second
students. All students must pass the dissertation.
4.6 The dissertation has a weighting of 4 single courses.
4.7 The dissertation shall be about 15 000 words on an approved topic.
The dissertation shall normally be submitted at the end of the third
semester in the case of full-time students and at the end of the
second semester after registering for Part 2 in the case of part-time
students.
5. Examinations
5.3 A student who fails to submit required course work may be denied
5.4 Supplementary examinations may be permitted only if authorised
5.5 Students who fail examinations may be allowed to repeat the
Regulations.
5.6 A candidate must pass all taught courses before submitting the
dissertation.
5.7 Candidates may be permitted one occasion for the re-submission of
the dissertation.
assessment and the formal examination.
6.2 Examinations shall count for 75% and continuous assessment shall
count for 25% of the overall mark for each course.
6.3 Continuous assessment shall include written assignments, tests and
seminars.
6.4 A candidate must pass all taught courses and the dissertation in
7.
Courses
7.1. Part 1 Taught Courses
Semester One
Code
Description
Exam duration
MIR506 Theories of International
Relations
3 hours
MIR507 International Conflict
Management
3 hours
MIR508 Foundations of International
Economic Relations
3 hours
MIR509 Fundamentals of International
Law
3 hours
Weighting Units
1
15
15
15
15
425
MIR510 Qualitative Research Methods 3 hours

Semester Two
Code
Description
Exam duration
MIR511 Foreign Policy, Regional
and International
Organisations
3 hours
MIR512 Contemporary Strategic
Studies
3 hours
MIR513 Contemporary International
Economic Relations
3 hours
MIR514 International Legal Justice
3 hours
MIR515 Quantitative Research Methods 3 hours
Part 2 - Dissertation
Semester Three
Code
Description
MIR570 Dissertation
426
Weighting
4
15
Weighting Units
1
15
15
1
1
1
15
15
15
Units
60

DEGREE IN OCCUPATIONAL
PSYCHOLOGY DEGREE (MOPS)
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 The MSc Occupational Psychology degree is offered by the
Department of Psychology and leads to a professional Qualification
in Psychology.
1.3 The MSc Occupational Psychology is a two year full-time or three
and half years part-time programme. Students are required to
complete practical work during the vacations of the full-time
programme or to be in suitable employment for the part-time
programme. Students on the part-time programme will not be
exempted from the practical courses.
1.4 The Degree may be awarded with Distinction, Merit or without
classification.
1.5 The Degree is administered by a degree panel comprising all fulltime lecturers on the Programme and the Chairman of the
Department of Psychology, who is also the Chairman of the panel.
1.6 A course Co-ordinator is elected by the full-time lecturers from
among themselves.
2.1 Applicants admitted to the degree programme will:a) normally be in possession of good BSc Honours Degree in
Psychology;
OR
b) have qualifications deemed to be equivalent to (a) above.
Preference will be given to applicants with relevant work
experience.
2.2 Applicants whose Honours Degree in Psychology does not satisfy
2.1 above but who offer post-graduate experience considered
compensatory by the degree panel may be admitted to the
programme.
3. PROGRAMME STRUCTURE AND CONTENT
3.1 Registration normally takes place in January.
3.2 Structure
The programme consists of seven compulsory courses and a dissertation
which has the weight of three courses.
The Courses are:
Course Code
Industrial Psychology Theory
Industrial Psychology Practice
Personnel Psychology Theory
Personnel Psychology Practice
Advanced Statistics and Computing
Methods, Statistics and Computing for
Occupational Psychology
Dissertation
Process Skills
Advanced Psychometrics
Organizational Psychology Theory
Organizational Psychology Practice
MOPS 501
MOPS 551
MOPS 502
MOPS 552
MOPS 503
MOPS 505
MOPS 570
MOPS 506
MOPS 507
MOPS 504
MOPS 554
3.3 Syllabuses
In terms of the General Academic Regulations syllabuses do not
form part of the Faculty Regulations but shall be submitted to the
Faculty Board for approval and shall be maintained in the Faculty
Office for reference.
4.1 Each theoretical Course is examined by one three-hour written
paper in November of the year in which the course is taught and by
continuous assessment which counts for 40% of the final mark.
4.2 The three practical courses are examined by a written report in
November of the year in which the course is taught and by
continuous assessment which counts for 40% of the final mark.
4.3 The Methods, Statistics and Computing for Occupational
Psychology course is examined by the presentation in November of
the reports of all laboratory practicals conducted during the
academic year and by continuous assessment which counts for 40%
of the final mark.
4.4 The dissertation must be submitted by 30 June following the last
November examinations on the part-time programme and in
November of the last examination on the full-time programme.
5. PUBLICATION OF RESULTS AND AWARD OF DEGREE
5.1 Results shall be published and Degrees awarded in accordance with
5.2 The Degree may be awarded with Distinction, Merit or without
classification in accordance with the General Regulations.
5.3 Aegrotat degrees may not be awarded. Candidates who would
normally have qualified for an aegrotat degree may be permitted to
write special examinations, at the discretion of the Board of
Examiners and Senate.

SCIENCE IN POPULATION STUDIES DEGREE
(MPOS)
1. Introduction
Academic Regulations for the Masters Degree by Coursework hereinafter
referred to as General Regulations.
2. Entry qualification
2.1 To be eligible for admission to the Master of Science degree in
Population Studies programme, a candidate must normally have
2.1.1 A good first degree with at least a 2.1 in a discipline related to
Populations Studies such as: Sociology, Political Science and
Administration, Psychology, Social Work, Economics,
Geography, Agriculture, Rural and Urban Planning, Public
Health, Business Studies.
2.1.2 Applicants must have a pass in O-Level Mathematics.
3.1 The programme shall run for three semesters on a full-time basis.
3.2 Part 1 of the programme shall be offered on a full-time basis for two
semesters.
3.3 Part 2 shall be offered on a full-time basis for a period of one
semester.
4.1 The Programme shall consist of two parts; Part 1 will be the course
component and Part 2, the dissertation.
4.2 Part 1: Coursework lasting for two semesters Part 2: A dissertation
lasting for one semester.
4.3 Each semester shall normally involve 15 weeks of teaching.
4.4 Each student will register for eight (8) courses for Part 1, four
courses per semester. All eight courses must be passed for students
to be allowed to proceed to Part 2 of the programme. Each course
consists of 60 hours of teaching. All taught courses are single
weighted.
semester. All students must pass the dissertation.
4.6 The dissertation shall be between 15 000 and 25000 words on an
approved topic. The dissertation shall normally be submitted two
weeks before the examinations of the subsequent semester.
5. Examinations
are taught, each course comprising of one paper written for 3 hours.
427
428
Regulations.
dissertation.
the dissertation.
6.1 The mark for each course shall comprise of the marks for continuous
for 75% and continuous assessment shall count for 25% of overall
mark of each course.
6.2 Continuous assessment shall include assignments, tests and
seminars.
failing to do so may be allowed to supplement or repeat a course in
accordance with General Academic Regulations.
7.
Courses
7.1 Part 1
Compulsory Courses
First Semester
Code
Description
Weight Units
1
1
1
1
15
15
15
15
Second Semester
Compulsory Courses
Description
MPOS506 Demographic Techniques II

MPOS507 Reproductive Health
3 hours
3 hours
1
1
15
15
N.B. not all courses will be offered every year.

7.2
Part 2
MPOS 570
Dissertation

SCIENCE IN RURAL AND URBAN PLANNING DEGREE
(MRUP)
1. Introduction
Academic Regulations for Master Degree by coursework.
2. Entry qualifications
To be eligible for admission to the Master of Science in Rural and Urban
Planning programme, a candidate must normally have attained at least
one of the following qualifications:
A BSc Rural and Urban Planning Honours Degree with a 2.1 or better.
A relevant Planning Degree (2.1 or better) approved by Senate.
The programme shall run for three semesters on a full-time basis.
Examination
Duration
MPOS 501 Introduction to Demography 3 hours
MPOS 502 Demographic Techniques I
3 hours
MPOS 503 Population and Development 3 hours
MPOS 504 Research Methods
3 hours
Code
MPOS508 Mortality
MPOS509 Migration
Examination
Duration
3 hours
3 hours
Part 1 of the programme shall be offered on a full-time basis for two

semesters.
Part 2 shall be offered full-time for a period of one semester.
4.1 The programme shall consist of two parts; Part 1 will be the course
Weight Units
4.2 The programme shall normally commence in August.
1
1
4.3 Part 1: coursework lasting for two semesters in the first year for fulltime students. Part II: A dissertation lasting one semester full-time.
15
15
4.4 Each student will register ten (10) courses for Part 1 six (6) of which
shall be core and four optional. Optional courses shall be chosen
from a range of options available, but not all options shall
necessarily be available in any one year. All ten courses must be
passed for a student to be allowed to proceed to Part 2 of the
programme. Each course shall consist of 60 contact hours.
semester in the case of full-time students. All students must pass
the dissertation.
4.6 The dissertation shall be 20 000 to 25 000 words on an approved
topic. The dissertation shall normally be submitted on or before 30
November of the second year for full-time students.
4.7 A student shall attend a viva voce examination for the dissertation.
5. Examinations
Part 1
6. Assessment of courses
assessment and the Formal examinations in the ratio 40:60.
6.2 Continuous assessment shall include assignments, tests and or a
small scale project and students shall be notified of their relative
weightings at the commencement of the course. The minimum
number of assignments shall be two (2) per course.
6.3 A student must pass Part I before proceeding to Part II. Those failing
7.
COURSES
7.1 Part 1
Core Courses
Code
Description
MRUP501 Integrated Development

Planning
MRUP521 Development and
Management Issues
MRUP502 Research Methodology
and Urban Design
MRUP523 Research Methods
and Techniques
MRUP503 Public Policy Analysis
MRUP525 Public Policy Appraisal
and Techniques
Optional Courses
MRUP516 Local Institutional
Development
MRUP543 Local Economic
Development
7.2
Exam
Duration
Weighting Units
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
3 hours
1
1
15
15
3 hours
15
429
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
------
60
Part 2
MRUP570 Dissertation

SCIENCE IN SOCIAL ECOLOOGY DEGREE (MSEC)
1. Introduction
These Regulations should be read in conjunction with the provisions of
the General Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework
To be eligible for admission to the Master of Science in Social Ecology
programme, a candidate must normally have attained at least one of the
following qualifications:
Graduates, who have obtained a 2.1 or better degree in Social Sciences at
the University of Zimbabwe or equivalent approved by Senate, may apply
for admission to the programme. A high standard of achievement in the
first degree as determined by the Department will normally be required.
3.1 The programme shall run for three semesters on full-time and six
semesters on part- time basis.
3.2 Registration for the degree will normally be at the beginning of
August.
430
4.2 Part 1: Course work lasting for two semesters in the first year for fulltime students Part 2: A dissertation lasting one semester full-time.
4.3 Each semester shall normally have 12 weeks of teaching followed by
2 weeks of formal examinations.
4.4 Each student will register for eight courses in part one.
4.5 All courses must be passed for a student to be allowed to proceed to
seminars. All courses are single weighted.
4.7 The dissertation shall be between 15 000 and 25 000 words on an
weeks before the examinations of the subsequent semester in the
case of full-time students and at the end of the second semester
after registering for Part 2 in the case of part-time students.
5. Examinations

Regulations.
dissertation.
the dissertation.
assessment and the formal examination. The examination will
account for 70% and a continuous assessment to account for 30%
of the examination mark.
6.2 A continuous assessment shall include written assignment tests and
seminars.
7.
Courses
7.1.
(Semesters I)
Core courses
Code
Description
MSEC 501 Human Ecology

MSEC 505 Institutional Aspect of
Natural Resource
Management
MSEC 507 Qualitative Research
Methods and Tools for
Ecological Analysis
Semester II
Core Courses
MSEC 504 Natural Resource Policy
MSEC 506 Conflict Prevention,
Management
Resolution in Natural
Management use
Examination
duration
3 hours
Weighting Units
1
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
MSEC 508 Quantitative Research

Methods and Tools for
Ecological Analy
3 hours
15
Optional Courses
MSEC 510 Ecology Economics
MSEC 511 Environmental Communication
Skills
3 hours
MSEC 512 Environmental Management
and Protection
3 hours
MPOS 503 Population and Development 3 hours
15
1
1
15
15
PART 2 (one semester)

MSEC 570 Dissertation
60

SCIENCE DEGREE IN SOCIOLOGY AND SOCIAL
ANTHROPOLOGY DEGREE (MSO)
1. Introduction
These Regulations should be read in conjunction with the provisions of
the General Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by Coursework
To be eligible for admission to the Master of Science Degree in Sociology
and Social Anthropology programme, a candidate must normally have
2.1 A BSc Sociology Honours Degree with a 2.1 or better.
2.2 An appropriate Honours degree (2.1 or better) of this University or a
recognised equivalent approved by Senate.
The programme shall run for three semesters on full-time and six
semesters on part- time basis.
4.2 Part 1: Course work lasting for two semesters in the first year for fulltime students Part 2: A dissertation lasting one semester full-time.
4.3 Each semester shall normally have 15 weeks of teaching.
4.4 Each student will register for eight courses for part one. Two
compulsory and two optional courses in each semester.
4.5 All courses must be passed for a student to be allowed to proceed to
Part 2 of the programme. Each course consists of 60 contact hours.
All courses are single weighted.
4.7 The dissertation shall be between 15 000 and 25 000 words on an
weeks before the examinations of the subsequent semester in the
case of full-time students and at the end of the second semester
after registering for Part 2 in the case of part-time students.
The dissertation has a weighting of 4 single courses.
5. Examinations
Regulations.
dissertation.
the dissertation.
6.2 A continuous assessment shall include written assignment tests and
seminars.
431
7.
Courses
7.1 Part 1 (Two Semesters)
Core courses
Code
432
Description
Examination
duration
MSO 501 Issues in Anthropological
3 hours
and Sociological Theory
3 hours
MSO 513 Advanced Social Theory
3 hours
MSO 502 Issues in Qualitative
3 hours
MSO 514 Issues in Quantitative
3 hours
Optional Courses
MSO 508 Industrial Relations
3 hours
MSO 509 Industrial Sociology
3 hours
MSO 504 Social Policy and Social
Administration
3 hours
MSO 510 Urbanization and
Development
3 hours
MSO 511 The Sociology of Rural
Development
3 hours
MSO 515 Project planning and
management
3 hours
MSO 516 Issues in Quantitative
3 hours
PART 2 (one semester)
Dissertation
Weighting Units
1
1
1
15
15
15
15
15
1
1
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
60

SOCIAL WORK DEGREE (MSW)
1. Introduction
Regulations for the Masters in Social Work.
To be eligible for admission to the Master of Social Work programme, a
candidate must have attained at least one of the following qualifications:
A good honours degree in Social Work with a 2.1 or better or its
equivalent approved by senate. A minimum of 2 year approved practice
as a qualified Social Worker.
3.1. The programme shall run for three semesters on a full time basis or
3.2. Part 1 of the programme shall be offered on a full time basis for two
semesters and on a part-time basis for four semesters.
3.3. Part 2 shall be offered full-time for a period of one semester and
4.2 Part 1: Course work lasting for two semesters in the first year for fulltime students and at most four semesters within the two years for
part-time students. Part 2: A dissertation lasting one semester fulltime or two semesters part-time.
4.3 Each semester shall normally be 15 weeks of teaching.
4.4 Each student will register for eight (8) courses for Part 1, six of which
shall be core courses and two optional. Optional courses shall be
chosen from a range of options available, but not all options shall
necessarily be available in any one year. All eight courses must be
passed for a student to be allowed to proceed to Part 2 of the
programme. The minmum contact hours for each course shall be at
least 60 hours. All courses are single weighted.
4.5 Fieldwork coded Advanced Practical Learning shall normally start at
the end of semester for full-time students and not to be undertaken
in their full-time place of employment.
students. All students after passing all taught courses will proceed to
the dissertation.
4.8 The dissertation shall be between 15000 and 25000 words on an
weeks before the examinations of the subsequent semester.
5. Examinations
5.2. Courses shall be examined at the end of each semester in which they
Regulations.
dissertation.
the dissertation.
6.2. Continuous assessment shall include assignments, tests and
seminars.
6.3. A candidate must pass all taught courses and the dissertation in
7.
Courses
7.1. Part 1
Semester 1
Core Courses
Code
Description
MSW501
MSW505
MSW511
MSW512
Planning Social Services

for Development
Planning Social Welfare
Services and Social
Security
Management of Social
Services
Qualitative Research
Methods
Exam
Duration
Weighting
Units
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
Exam
duration
Weighting
3 hours
15
3 hours
15
Exam
Duration
Weighting
Core Semester 2
Code
Description
MSW580
Advanced Practical
Learning
Quantitative Research
Methods
MSW513
Optional
Code
Description
MSW506 Clinical Social Work

Theories
Applied Clinical Social Work
MSW510 Social Development Issues
MSW508 Introduction to Issues in
Gerontology 1
Units
Units
3 hours
3 hours
3 hours
1
1
1
15
15
15
3 hours
15
7.2. Part 2 - Dissertation

Semester Three
Code
MSW570
Description
Dissertation
Weighting
4
Units
60
433
FACULTY OF VETERINARY SCIENCE
2.2 For normal entry, a student must satisfy the general requirements
of Scheme B normally with passes in Chemistry, Biology,
Mathematics and Physics. Chemistry and Biology are compulsory
plus one of the other subjects must have been passed at Advanced
Level.
2.3 For special entry a student must satisfy one of the criteria which is
prescribed in the General Regulations and is approved by the
Faculty Board.
REGULATIONS FOR THE UNDERGRADUATE

PROGRAMMES
BACHELOR OF VETERINARY SCIENCE DEGREE
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE HONOURS DEGREES
3.
DATE OF EXAMINATIONS
Formal examinations will take place in each part of the programme.
Part I, which comprises three terms, will have formal (first professional)
examination in mid-year 2. Part II, which comprises three terms, will
have formal (second professional) examination at end of year 3. Part III
will have formal (third professional) examination at the end of year 4.
Part IV will have formal (final professional) examination at end of year
5. Examination will take place at end of the term in which each of the
following courses is presented:
Behaviour and Handling of Animals (year 1, term 2); Veterinary
Jurisprudence and Regulatory Control of Veterinary Medicinal
Products (each component of combined course will be examined
separately (year 5, term 1); Applied Business Management (year5,
term 1). Communication Skills for Veterinary Science, which is
presented in Part I of the BVSc degree programme will be examined by
continuous assessment and a formal examination (2 hours) to proceed
the first professional examination (year 2, term 1).
4.
To be admitted to any of the examinations for the above degree a
candidate must:4.1 be registered as a student of the University of Zimbabwe in
4.2 have completed approved courses at the University to the
satisfaction of the Chairman (men) of Department(s) concerned;
4.3 Additionally, to be admitted to the examination in the fifth year
of the programme a candidate must:4.3.1 during the Parts III and IV of the programme have
completed to thesatisfaction of the Dean of the Faculty a
minimum of 13 weeks of certified extra-mural/vocational
work attached to an approved veterinary surgeon or
institution;
BACHELOR OF VETERINARY SCIENCE DEGREE

(BVSC)
1.
434
2.
INTRODUCTION
1.1 These Regulations apply only to students who are registered for
the Bachelor of Veterinary Science Degree at the University of
Zimbabwe and should be read in conjunction with the General
Academic Regulations for Undergraduate Degrees, hereinafter
referred to as The General Regulations.
1.2 The Bachelor of Veterinary Science Degree will be awarded to
candidates who have successfully completed approved courses
and examinations in accordance with the regulations set out
below.
1.3 The Bachelor of Veterinary Science degree programme will be of at
least 5 years duration on a full-time study basis.
1.4 In addition to the required courses for specific degree
programmes, all Part I students will be required to register for and
to attend the Communication Skills Course in the 1st Semester.
The Communication Skills Course for Veterinary Science
(CSVE101) examination is compulsory.
2.1 To qualify for entry a prospective student must satisfy the Entry
Requirements for undergraduate degrees as prescribed in the
4.3.2 have submitted records of diseases/clinical cases seen

during the aforesaid periods and produce casebooks
attested to by the extra-mural teacher(s)/ supervisor. If
also required, these documents will be presented to the
Board of Examiners.
5.
5.1 The programme is divided into four parts. The courses within
each part are defined in Section 9 of these Regulations. The
components of examination for each course are defined in
Section 5.4 of these regulations.
5.2 Candidates must pass every course in a Part before proceeding to
the subsequent part.
5.3 Where formal examination includes written papers and/or an
oral examination, a candidate shall be deemed to have passed a
course when he/she has scored not less than 40% in the written
and practical components.
5.3.1 where deemed necessary by the examiners, a candidate
will present case records drafted during his/her extramural training described in section 4.3 above.
5.4 Examination Papers/Components
5.4.2 Part II
Course
Components of Examination
Computer Code
Animal Husbandry (AHV2)
Animal Husbadry Theory I

Animal Husbadry Theory II
Viva
AHV201
AHV202
AHV250 C
AHV290
3 hrs
3 hrs
10 min
Veterinary Parasitology (VP2)
Veterinary Parasitology Theory

Practical
Viva
VP201
VP280
VP250 C
VP290
3 hrs
2 hrs
10 min
Veterinary Pathology (PG2V)
Ve terinary Pathology Theory I

Veterinary Pathology Theory II
Practical
Viva
PG2V01
PG2V02
PG2V80
PG2V50 C
PG2V90
3 hrs
3 hrs
2 hrs
10 min
Veterinary Pharmacology
Toxicology (CP2V)
Pharmacology/Toxicology Theory
Pharmacology/Toxicology Practical
Viva
CP2V01
CP2V80
CP2V50 C
CP2V90
3 hrs
2 hrs
10 min
Veterinary Microbiology
(VM2V)
Veterinary Microbiology Theory I

Veterinary Microbiology Theory II
Practical
Viva
VM2V01
VM2V02
VM2V80
VM2V50
VM2V90
3 hrs
3 hrs
2 hrs
10 min
Duration
435
5.4.3. Part III
5.4.1 Part I
Course
Computer Code
Veterinary Anatomy (AT1V)
Anatomy Theory I
Anatomy Theory II
Practical
Viva
ATV101
ATV102
ATV180
ATV150 C
ATV190
Duration
3 hrs
3 hrs
2 hrs
hr
Veterinary Physiology (PY1V)
Physiology Theory I
Physiology Theory II
Practical
Viva
PYV101
PYV102
PYV180
PYV150 C
PYV190
3 hrs
3 hrs
1 hr
hr
Veterinary Biochemistry (BC1V)
Biochemistry Theory I
Biochemistry Theory II
Practical
Viva
BCV101
BCV102
BCV180
BCV150 C
BCV190
3 hrs
2 hrs
2 hrs
10 min
Animal Nutrition (NT1V)
Animal Nutrition Theory

Viva
NTV101
NTV150 C
NTV190
3 hrs
10 min
Communication Skills (CSVE101)
CSVE101
1 hr
Course
Computer Code
Clinical Medicine, General

Surgery, Anaesthesiology &
Radiology (CM3V)
Theory
Practical
Viva
CM3V01
CM3V80
CM3V50
CM3V90
3 hrs
1 hr
1/4 hr
Epidemiology/Herd Health
Wildlife & Exotic Medicine
(EH3V)
Theory
Practical
Viva
EH3V01
EH3V80
EH3V50 C
EH3V90
3 hrs
1 hr
1/4 hr
Equine Medicine & Surgery

(EM3V)
Theory
Practical
Viva
Theory
Practical
Viva
EM3V0 1
EM3V80
EM3V50 C
EM3V90
PP3V01
PP3V80
PP3V50 C
PP3V90
3 hrs
1 hr
1/4 hr
3 hrs
1 hr
1/4 hr
Public Health & Clinical

Pathology (PH3V)
Theory
Practical
Viva
PH3V01
PH3V80
PH3V50 C
PH3V90
3 hrs
1 hr
1/4 hr
Ruminant Medicine & Surgery

(RM3V)
Theory
Practical
Viva
RM3V01
RM3V80
RM3V50
RM3V90
3 hrs
1 hr
1/4 hr
Porcine & Poultry Medicine

(PP3V)
Duration
Small Animal Medicine &

Surgery (SM3V)
Theory
Practical
Continuous Ass essment
Viva
SM3V01
SM3V80
SM3V50 C
SM3V90
3 hrs
1 hr
1/4 hr
Theriogenology (TG3V)
Theory
Viva
TG3V01
TG3V50 C
TG3V90
3 hrs
1/4 hr
6.2
5.4.4 Part IV
Course
Computer Code
Duration
Clinical Veterinary Stu dies (CVS4V)
436

Oral/Practical
CVS4V01
CVS4V50 C
CVS4V80
1 hr
Large Animal Medicine

Oral/Practical
CVS4V02
CVS4V50 C
CVS4V80
1 hr
Surge ry/Anaesth./Radiology
Surgery/Anaesth./Radiology
Oral/Practical
CVS4V04
CVS4V50 C
CVS4V80
1 hr
Herd Health & Reproduction
Herd Health & Reproduction

Oral/Practical
CVS4V05
CVS4V50 C
CVS4V80
1 hr
Laboratory Diagn./Pathology
Laboratory Diagn./Pathology
Oral/Practical
CVS4V06
CVS4V50 C
CVS4V80
1 hr
Public Health
Public Health
Oral/Practical
CVS4V07
CVS4V50 C
CVS4V80
1 hr
Research Project
Communication Skills (CSVE301)
VTCL560
CSVE301
5.5 Repeat Students

A candidate who has failed a Part and is allowed to repeat it shall
normally not be exempted from re-attendance or re-examination in
any course in that Part unless he/she has gained a grade of 2.1 in the
course or courses concerned.
6.
A student who has failed to satisfy the examiners in the written

and/or practical component(s) of a formal examination but who
has obtained a pass mark in aggregate of the course shall be
required to sit all components of the course. The examination
shall be marked as Pass or fail; the mark awarded for the
component shall be 50% and the official transcript shall record
that the course was passed or failed as a supplementary
examination.
Subject to the provisions concerning supplementary examinations in
the General Regulations:
6.1
A student who fails to obtain a pass mark in aggregate in any
course may be permitted a supplementary examination in all
components of the formal examination.
7.
The results of each examination shall be published in accordance with
8.
AWARD OF DIPLOMA
A diploma for the Bachelor of Veterinary Science Degree (BVSc) under
the Seal of the University of Zimbabwe will be delivered to all
candidates who have successfully completed the requirements for the
award of the degree.
9.
CURRICULUM AND FORMAL CONTACT HOURS
Course
Lecture/
Tutorial (1 hr)
Practical
(3 hr)
Yr 1, Te rm 1
Vet. Anatomy
103
47
Vet. Physiology
60
Vet. Biochemistry
57
Communication skills
18
Total contact time
238
61
Vet. Anatomy
73
23
Vet. Physiology
110
11
Vet. Biochemistry
35
Behaviour & handling of animals
18
14
16
Total contact time
252
52
Yr 1, Term 2
Examination: Behaviour & handling of animals (Practical cum Oral)
Yr 2, Term 1
Veterinary Pharmacology and Toxicology
42
Veterinary Anatomy
39
15
Animal Husbandry (Production andManagement)
42
44
Total contact hours
280
56
40
Animal Nutrition
50
18
14
Veterinary Microbiology and Immunology
38
10
Total contact time
187
44
33
34
11
30
Animal Husbandry (Production and Management)
40
Epidemiology, Herd Health and Production Management, Diseases

of Wildlife
25
Nil
General Surgery, Anaesthesia, Radiology
20
Total contact hours
220
44
Year 3, Term 2
Examination: Communication skills (Continuous assessment plus 2-hr paper
FIRST PROFESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS

Course
Mark allocation
Continuous
Assessment
Theory
Practical
Oral
Veterinary Anatomy
30
40 (2 papers)
20
10
30
50 (2 papers)
10
10
30
40 (2 papers)
20
10
Animal Nutrition
20
50 (2 Papers)
15
15
Continuous
assessment
437
SECOND PROFESSIONAL EXAMINATION
Part II
COURSE
1. Epidemiology, Herd Health and Production Management, Diseases of

Wildlife
2. General Surgery, Anaesthesia, Radiology
Course
Lecture/
Tutorial (1 hr)
Practical
(3 hr)
Year 2, Term 2
Mark allocation
Continuous
Assessment
Theory
Papers
Practical
Oral
20
(2)50
20
10
Animal Husbandry (Genetics)
56
14
20
(1)40
20
20
Animal Husbandry (Biometric sand Computer Applications)
56
20
(2)50
20
10
Principles of Veterinary Microbiology, Immunology and

Parasitology
70
14
30
(1)50
10
10
Animal Husbandry
20
(2)50
15
15
70
14
28
Total contact hours
280
56
84
16
56
14
56
14
Year 3, Term 1
Porcine and Poultry Medicine
Part III
COURSE
40
20
10
Epidemiology, Herd Health and Production 30

Management, Diseases of Wildlife, Exotic
Animal Medicine
40
20
10
Public Health and Clinical Pathology
30
40
15
15
Theriogenology
30
60
10
Lecture/
Tutorial (1 hr)
Practical
(3 hr)
62
15
Small Animal Medicine and Surgery
64
Equine Medicine and Surgery
18
Ruminant Medicine and Surgery
64
30
Epidemiology, Herd Health and Production

Management, Diseases of Wildlife
28
40
10
Theriogenology
46
15
Total contact hours
352
64
56
12
28
65
15
Small Animal Medicine Clerkship
6 wks in each on a rotational basis
30
Large Animal Medicine Clerkship
6 wks
Epidemiology, Herd Health and Production

Management, Exotic Animal Medicine
70
Surgery, Anaesthesia and Radiology

Clerkship
6 wks
42
Theriogenology
39
13
Herd Health, Theriogenology and

AmbulatoryClinic Clerkship
6 wks
Total contact hours
330
60
Laboratory Diagnostics and Pathology

Clerkship
6 wks
Public Health and Practice Management

Clerkship
6 wks
Research Project
6 wks
Year 4, Term 1
Year 4, Term 2
438
30
THIRD PROFESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS

Course
Mark allocation
Continuous
Assessment
Theory
Paper
Practical
Oral
30
40
20
10
30
40
15
15
30
40
20
10
30
40
20
10
Part IV
COURSE
Year 5, Term 1
Veterinary Jurisprudence, Regulatory
Control of Veterinary Medicinal Products
Lecture/
Tutorial (1 hr)
16
Applied Business Management
14
Total contact hours
30
Contact hours per week
Teaching weeks
10
Examination
Yr 5, Terms 1 and 2
Clinical Case Presentations
Veterinary Jurisprudence, Regulatory

Control of Veterinary Medicinal Products
2 hr per week
During and upon completion of each clerkship rotation
Research Project
Dissertation and Oral Presentation of the project
12.
FOURTH (FINAL) PROFESSIONAL EXAMINATION

Courses
Continuous Ass
Practical
Oral
50%
35%
15%
Surgery/Anaesth/Radiology
50%
35%
15%
50%
35%
15%
Laboratory Diagn / Pathology
50%
35%
15%
Public Health
50%
35%
15%
Herd Health and Reproduction
50%
35%
15%
SUMMARY OF TEACHING (INCLUDING EXAMINATIONS) WEEKS

Yr/Term
10.
11.
CONTACT WEEKS
Yr 1, Term 1
15
Yr 1, Term 2
15
Yr 2, Term 1
15
Yr 2, Term 2
15
Yr 3, Term 1
15
Yr 3, Term 2
15
Yr 4, Term 1
18
Yr 4, Term 2
18
Yr 5, Term 1
21
Yr 5, Term 2
21
EXTRA-MURAL PRACTICAL WORK

All students will be required to undertake a certified total of three
months of extra-mural practical work after the end of the second year.
This practical work will be undertaken in private practices, state
veterinary services, laboratories, abattoirs, dairies for periods which
will be acceptable to the Dean.
SYLLABUSES
In accordance with the provisions of the Genera Regulations detailed
syllabuses for subjects/ courses will not form part of the General or the
Faculty Regulations but shall be prepared by the relevant Departmental
Boards and submitted to the Faculty Board for approval. Copies of the
detailed syllabuses shall be maintained in the Faculty Office and shall
be available, through the Faculty Office, for reference.
AWARD OF HONOURS AND DISTINCTIONS

A candidate registered in any Part of the BVSc degree programme may
be awarded Honours or Distinction in any one course or subject
provided that:12.1 The candidate's examination performance in a course or subject
is assessed on the following marking system:Marking System
75% = Distinction
65 74% = Honours
50 64% = Pass
0 49% = Fail
12.2 The candidate obtains a pass in every course or subject examined
for each Part at the first attempt.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE HONOURS DEGREE

(BSC HONS)
1.
INTRODUCTION
Academic Regulations for undergraduate degrees, herein after referred
to as the General Regulations which shall have precedence over the
Faculty Regulations. The BSc Honours degree will be awarded to a
examinations set out below. The degree is available in each of the
following subjects: Veterinary Anatomy, Veterinary Biochemistry and
Veterinary Physiology and will normally be available to approved
students on the BVSc Degree programme. The degree will be
intercalated within the BVSc programme.
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Candidates will be admitted into the programme after successful
completion of BVSc Part I in the case of Veterinary Biochemistry
and BVSc Part II in the case of Veterinary Anatomy and Veterinary
Physiology.
2.2 To be eligible to apply for admission to the intercalated Bsc
Honours programme an applicant must normally have obtained a
2.2 grade or better in the subject in which he/she wishes to
specialise.
439
2.3 The aggregate referred to in regulation 2.2 must have been

achieved at first sitting.
3.
3.1 Application for registration must be made through the Chairman
of the Department of Preclinical Veterinary Studies and the Dean
of Veterinary Science to the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
3.2 Registration will normally take place in March.
4.
PROGRAMME
The programme will extend over not less than one academic year on a
full-time basis at the University of Zimbabwe. It will comprise
coursework, practical work, written and oral examinations, seminars
and a research project as prescribed in the detailed regulations below.
5.
5.1 Each candidate shall take six three-hour written papers and a
half-hour oral examination, normally in November.
5.2 Practical work, coursework and seminars will be assessed
continuously through the year and will together constitute
33.3% of the overall mark.
5.3 Each candidate will be required to complete a dissertation
which may be examined orally.
5.4 A candidate must satisfy the examiners in the examination
as a whole.
5.5 Supplementary examinations may be permitted in accordance
with the provisions of the General Regulations and will
normally be held in February.
440
6.
7.
Each candidate will be notified of the results of the examination by
the Deputy Registrar (Academic).
AWARD OF DEGREE
A Diploma under the seal of the University will be delivered to each
examinations in accordance with the above regulations. The degree
will be classified in accordance with the General Regulations.

VETERINARY BIOCHEMISTRY
1.
SUMMARY STATEMENT ON THE INTERCALATED BSC HONOURS

DEGREE IN VETERINARY BIOCHEMISTRY
The Honours programme in Veterinary Biochemistry will be based on
the intensive post-Part I and II courses.
Honours training will provide the student with better preparation for
postgraduate study. The main features of the BSc Honours Degree
programme in Veterinary Biochemistry are:
(a) The Honours programme provides for teaching of Biochemistry
in greater depth than in a general programme.
(b) The course on readings in Biochemistry gives the student
training in critically reading the original literature in
Biochemistry.
c) The Honours Research Project gives the student some training in
pursuing a research project and writing up the results in a thesis.
2.
STRUCTURE OF THE INTERCALATED BSC HONOURS DEGREE IN

VETERINARY BIOCHEMISTRY
2.1 Admission to BSc Honours Degree in Veterinary Biochemistry
To be eligible for admission to the BSc Honours Degree
Programme in Veterinary Biochemistry, a candidate must have
achieved a grade of 2.2 or better in Veterinary Biochemistry I and
passed in all other BVSc Part I subjects at the first sitting.
2.2 Courses for Intercalated BSc Honours Degree in Veterinary
Biochemistry
Course
Computer Code
Course Description
Protein Structure and Function
HBC3V01
Advanced treatment of protein structure in relation to

regulatory modification and hormonal interactions.
Enzyme kinetics, membrane and muscle proteins, visual
pigments and immunochemistry.
Nucleic Acid Biochemistry
HBC3V02
Advanced treatment of structure and function of nucleic

acids and chromosomes. DNA damage and repair.
Virology recombinant DNA technology, and drug
analogues
Clinical Chemistry
HBC3V03
Sampling and handling of specimens, r eporting of results,

quality control. Tests for liver, intestinal, gastric,
pancreatic, renal, endocrine and thyroid function.
Practicals will include measurement of vitamins, enzymes,
sugars, amino acids and proteins, lipids, blood gases and
electrolytes.
Metabolic Regulation
HBC3V04
A study of regulation of various metabolic pathways.

Control mechanisms like hormones, promoters,
repressors are highlighted.
Carcinogenesis Toxicology and

Drug Metabolism
HBC3V05
A study of chemistry of a wide variety of xe nobiotics and

genotoxic substances, their chemical synthesis, their
metabolism and mode of action; cell detoxification
mechanisms. Environmental toxicology.
Biochemistry of Parasites
HBC3V06
A study of biochemical mechanisms involved in

parasitism. Strate gies for drug design, host -parasite
interaction, and impact on animal health care systems.
Advanced Techniques in
Biochemistry
HBC3V50
Laboratory purification and characterisation of selected

biomolecules. Techniques to include ultracentrifugation,
enzyme assays, use of radioisotopes, all models of
chromatography and electrophoresis.
Readings in Biochemistry
HBC3V51
Critical reading of original literature and data interpretation

(two papers; 1 200 words each)
Honours Research Project
HBC3V60
Laboratory research culminating in the presentation

of a seminar and a 20 page type written thesis
(6 000 8 000 words) during the third term
Viva/Oral
HBC3V90
2.3 Examinations
a) Courses HBC3V01, HBC3V02, HBC3V03, HBC3V04,
HBC3V05 and HBC3V06 by a three-hour written paper for
each course
b) Courses HBC3V50, HBC3V51 and HBC3V60 by continuous
assessment.
c) Oral Examination (HBC3V90).

VETERINARY PHYSIOLOGY
1.

DEGREE IN VETERINARY PHYSIOLOGY
The honours programme will provide the candidate with a more
comprehensive understanding of Veterinary Physiology following
Part II of the BVSc programme. The candidate will have the
opportunity to study Physiology in more breadth and depth than in
the BVSc programme, to gain experience in the critical reading of
original literature, to present a seminar, and to conceive, carry out,
and report on an original research project.
2.

VETERINARY PHYSIOLOGY
2.1
Admission to the BSc Honours Degree in Veterinary
Physiology
2.1.1
Candidates will be admitted into the programme after
successful completion of BVSc Part I.
2.1.2
To be eligible to apply, an applicant must normally have
achieved an aggregate Grade of 2.2 or better in Veterinary
Physiology (Parts I and II) at first sitting and satisfactory
passes in all part II subjects at first sitting.
2.2
Courses for the Intercalated BSc Honours Degree in Veterinary

Physiology
Course
Computer Code
Course Description
Advanced Systematic
PY3V01
Advanced physiological principles of the following systems: nervous,

cardiovascular, gastrointestinal, endocrine, reproductive, respiratory and
renal.
Advanced Cell
Physiology
PY3V 02
Advanced concepts of the structure and function of the cell membrane and
cytoplasmic organelles. The genetic control of protein synthesis, cell
function, and cell reproduction will also be included
Advanced Comparative
Gastrointestinal
Physiology
PY3V0 3
A detailed study on the consequence of an adopted feed preference and

sequenceof digestion and fermentation of grazing and browsing herbivores
(domestic and game) for the functioning of the GIT and the acquirement of
energy and essential nutrients
Advanced Reproductive
Physiology
PY3V04
Advanced principles of male and female reproductive physiology with an

emphasis on the domestic ruminant.
Clinical Pathophysiology
PY3V05
Selected topics in clinical veterinary pathophysiology with the help of

academic staff in the Departments of Clinical and Paraclinical Veterinary
Studies
Advanced techniques in
Physiology Research
PY3V06
Research techniques in physiology will be studied with an emphasis on

techniques currently in use in the Department of Preclinical V eterinary
Studies.Readings in Veterinary Physiology
Coursework Assessment
PY3V50
This will include term tests, practicals and assignments
Readings in Veterinary
Physiology
PY3V52
Critical Reading; The candidate must read and discuss critically with a
member of the academic staff at least five original research papers on two
physiological subjects. The candidate must present seminars on each of
the two subjects
Honours Research
Project
PY3V60
The candidate must conceive, carry out and report an original re search
project with the guidance of a member of the Department's academic staff.
This will consist of a two term laboratory research project culminating in the
presentation of a seminar and a 20 page type written thesis (6 000 -8 000
words) during the thirdterm
441
2.3
Examinations
2.3.1
Courses PY3V01, PY3V02, PY3V03, PY3V04, PY3V05 and
PY3V06 will each have a three hour written examination
paper in November
2.3.2 Courses PY3V52 and PY3V50 will be examined by
Continuous Assessment. Together they will constitute 33%
of the overall mark.
2.3.3 The Research project (PY3V60) will be examined in
November. The examination will include the report, a
seminar and may also be judged by oral examination.
2.3.4 Each candidate will have a half-hour oral examination,
normally in November covering relevant aspects of
Physiology (PY3V90)

VETERINARY ANATOMY
1.
442
2.

DEGREE IN VETERINARY ANATOMY
The honours programme is to be based on an intensive training in
veterinary anatomy after BVSc Part II. This provides an opportunity
to the candidate for critical search and survey of the published
literature in selected areas of the discipline. Also the student is
exposed to limited independent research and incorporating the
results thereof into a thesis.
VETERINARY ANATOMY
2.1
Admission to the BSc Honours Degree in Veterinary
Anatomy
2.1.1
To be eligible for admission to this programme, an applicant
should normally have achieved a 2.2 grade (60-69%) or
better aggregate in the Veterinary Anatomy I at the first
sitting and satisfactory passes in all other Part II subjects.
2.1.2
Courses for the Intercalated BSc Honours Degree in
Veterinary Anatomy:
Course
Computer Code
Course Description
Advanced systematic
bovine anatomy
AT3V01
Detailed study of a selected bovine organ system by dissection

and demonstration (10 lectures & 10 labs)
Advanced
comparative anatomy
AT3V02
Detailed study of selected organ systems human, porcine,

reptilian, piscine or other selected (relevant species) by dissection
and demonstration (10 lectures & 10 labs)
Avian anatomy
AT3V03
Detailed study of anatomy of the domestic fowl; preparation of

specimens of a natomical interest (20 lectures & 10 labs)
Neurosciences
AT3V04
The neuroanatomy and nuerophysiology of selected aspect of the

nervous system of domestic animals (20 lectures)
Advanced systmetic
histology
AT3V05
A detailed study of the microscopic anatomy of selected organ

system of domestic animal species of veterinary significance.
Emphasis will be laid on correlating the structural basis for
physiological functioning (20 lectures & 10 labs)
Advanced
developmental
anatomy
AT3V06
A comprehensive stud y of developmental aspects including

teratogenesis of selected organ systems of domestic animal
species of veterinary siginificance; Preparation of specimens of
embryological interest (20 lectures)
Readings in
veterinary anatomy
AT3V52
A critical survey of published literature on an assigned topic;

Presentation of paper based on proper appraisal of the material
available and candidates interpretations
Honours research
project
AT3V60
A two-term laboratory research leading to the presentation of a

seminar and 20-page typewritten thesis during the term. This will
be examined in term III
Coursework
assessment
AT3V50
This will include term tests, practicals and assignments
Note: Each laboratory session is of 3 hours duration

2.2
Examinations
2.3.1
AT3V01, AT3V02, AT3V03, AT3V04, AT3V05,
AT3V06, will have a 3-hour examination paper for
each course.
2.3.2 The courses AT3V500 and AT3V52 will be
examined by continuous assessment. Together they
will contribute 33% of the overall mark.
2.3.3 The research project (AT3V60) will be examined in
November. The examination will include the report,
a seminar and may also be judged by oral
examination.
2.3.4 Each candidate will have an oral examination of _
hour duration.
REGULATIONS FOR THE MASTER OF VETERINARY

SCIENCE DEGREE IN RUMINANT MEDICINE
[MVSC (RUMINANT MEDICINE)]
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 These regulations shall apply to candidates who register for the
MVSc in Ruminant Medicine and should be read in conjunction with
the General Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by
Coursework, hereinafter referred to as the General Regulations.
1.2 The programme shall consist of two parts, Part I shall consist of
taught coursework and Part II a research dissertation.
2.1. To be admitted into the programme, applicants should have a
recognized BVSc degree or equivalent, with a classification of lower
second class or better in Ruminant Medicine
2.2. Candidates with a third class in Ruminant Medicine but who have
acquired at least five years of good practicing experience in the
relevant field may also be considered for admission into the
programme and may be required to sit for a qualifying examination.
3.

3.1. The programme shall be offered on a full-time basis for two academic
years and shall normally commence at the start of the academic year.
4. REGISTRATION
4.1. Application for admission with the necessary supporting documents
should be made to the Deputy Registrar (Academic) on the
appropriate form.
5.

5.1. The programme shall comprise of two Parts, Part I shall consist of
taught courses and Part II shall consist of a research dissertation.
5.2. The taught part shall comprise of five compulsory and a selected
elective course. There will be a total of 512 contact hours and each
course shall consist of at least 60 contact hours of which about 60%
are formal lectures and the remainder shall comprise practicals.

Lectures and practicals shall normally be conducted under the aegis
of the University. The candidate, in liaison with the supervisor shall
make the choice of one elective course.
5.3. The taught component of the programme shall be spread over two
semesters. Professional examinations will be held at the end of the
second semester.
5.4. The dissertation will commence after successful completion of Part
I. The dissertation may be undertaken either at the University of
Zimbabwe or, at some other place approved by the University. Where
a candidate is permitted to undertake research work in another
place, an Associate Supervisor in that place will normally be
required. Before conducting the research, approval of the research
by the candidate's supervisor and by the Board of Clinical Veterinary
Studies Department shall be required.
6.1. Each candidate shall be required to pass all courses as listed below.
All courses will be assessed on the basis of one 3-hour examination
theory paper, one 3-hour practical paper, 15-minute oral and
coursework. The coursework shall be assessed through written
assignments, clinical/laboratory reports and fieldwork/laboratory
reports. A candidate must satisfy the examiners in both the final
examination and the coursework in each course. Coursework shall
contribute 30%, theory paper 40%, practical paper 20% and oral
10% of the final mark in any course. Each course will contribute
towards the final examination mark for Part I as indicated below.
Description
% Weight
Examination
Bacterial, viral & fungal diseases of

ruminants
30
1x3hr theory paper, 1x3hr practical paper,

1/4hr Viva
Parasitic diseases of ruminants
15

1/4hr Viva
Non-infectious diseases of ruminants
15

1/4hr Viva
443
Diagnostic approaches to ruminant

medicine, communication & extension
15

1/4hr Viva
Research Methods & Biostatics
14

1/4hr Viva
7.1. Part I
Elective course
11
hr theory paper, 1/2hr practical paper,

1/4hr Viva
Compulsory courses
6.2. A pass mark as prescribed in the General Regulations is the minimal

acceptable mark in all courses of the programme and the
dissertation.
6.3. A student may write a supplementary examination for a failed
6.4. Examination of Part II shall be in the form of a submitted
dissertation, an oral presentation of research findings, which shall
be examined by a Panel of Examiners. The written dissertation shall
contribute 80% and oral presentation 20% of the final mark in Part
II.
444
6.5. The deadline for submission of the dissertation shall normally be the
30th of May of the second year.
6.6. On completion of the dissertation the candidate will be required to
submit three copies for examination.
6.7. A candidate whose dissertation is unsatisfactory may be allowed to
re-submit on such conditions and within such period of time as
specified by the Board of Examiners, which shall normally be within
three months after notification of results.
6.8. After the dissertation has been examined and amended in
accordance with the discretion of the Board of Examiners, the
candidate shall submit three bound copies in accordance with the
General Regulations for Masters Degrees by Course work.
6.9. A student must pass all courses examined in Part I and Part II to
qualify for the award of the MVSc degree.
6.10. The MVSc degree will be awarded with a Pass, a Credit, a Merit or a
7.
PROGRAMME COURSES
Course description
Lecture
hours
Practical/Tutorial
hours
Total
hours
Bacterial, viral & fungal diseases of ruminants
110
50
160
Parasitic diseases of ruminants
60
16
76
Non-infectious diseases of ruminant s
60
16
76
Diagnostic approaches to ruminant medicine,

communication & extension
60
16
76
Research Methods & Biostatistics
50
22
72
Lecture
hours
Practical/Tutorial hours
Total
hours
Pharmacology
48
12
60
Ruminant surgery & anaesthesia
48
12
60
Pathology
48
12
60
Ruminant theriogenology & herd health
48
12
60
Elective courses
Course description
7.2. Part II
Course Code
Course Description
Dissertation
8. Detailed syllabuses of the courses do not form part of these regulations

but shall be kept in the Department of Clinical Veterinary Studies for
reference.

SCIENCE DEGREE IN SMALL ANIMAL MEDICINE
[MVSC (SMALL ANIMAL MEDICINE)]
1.
INTRODUCTION
MVSc in Small Animal Medicine and should be read in
conjunction with the General Academic Regulations for Masters
Degrees by Coursework, hereinafter referred to as the General
Regulations.
1.2 The programme shall consist of two parts, Part I shall consist of
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
2.1 To be admitted into the programme, applicants should have a
recognized BVSc degree or equivalent, with a classification of
lower second class or better in Small Animal Medicine
2.2 Candidates with a third class in Small Animal Medicine but who
have acquired at least five years of good practicing experience in
the relevant field may also be considered for admission into the
programme and may be required to sit for a qualifying
examination.
3.

3.1 The programme shall be offered on a full-time basis for two
academic years and shall normally commence at the start of the
academic year.
4.
REGISTRATION
4.1 Application for admission with the necessary supporting
documents should be made to the Deputy Registrar (Academic)
on the appropriate form.
5.

5.1 The programme shall comprise of two Parts, Part I shall consist of
taught courses and Part II shall consist of a research dissertation
and clinical case reports.
6.
5.2
The taught part shall comprise of five compulsory and a selected

elective course. There will be a total of 512 contact hours and
each course shall consist of at least 60 contact hours of which
about 60% are formal lectures and the remainder shall comprise
practicals. Lectures and practicals shall normally be conducted
under the aegis of the University. The candidate, in liaison with
the supervisor shall make the choice of one elective course.
5.3
The taught component of the programme shall be spread over

two semesters. Professional examinations will be held at the end
of the second semester.
5.4
The dissertation will commence after successful completion of

Part I. Clinical case reports will commence at the start of the
programme but will be examinable in the second year. The
dissertation may be undertaken either at the University of
Zimbabwe or, at some other place approved by the University.
Where a candidate is permitted to undertake research work in
another place, an Associate Supervisor in that place will
normally be required. Before conducting the research, approval
of the research by the candidate's supervisor and by the Board of
Clinical Veterinary Studies Department shall be required.
6.1 Each candidate shall be required to pass all courses as listed
below. All courses will be assessed on the basis of one 3-hour
examination theory paper, one 3-hour practical paper, 15minute oral and coursework. A candidate must satisfy the
examiners in both the final examination and the coursework in
each course. Coursework shall contribute 30%, theory paper
40%, practical paper 20% and oral 10% of the final mark in any
course. Each course will contribute towards the final
examination mark for Part I as indicated below.
445
Code
Description
MVSAM 501
Small Animal Internal Medicine
30
1x3hr theory paper, 1x3hr practical

paper, 1/4hr Viva
MVSAM 502
Small Animal Surgery, Anaesthesiology

& Radiology
18

paper, 1/4hr Viva
MVSAM 503
Small Animal Theriogenology & Clinical

Pathology
18

paper, 1/4hr Viva
MVSAM 504
18

paper, 1/4hr Viva
Elective Course
16

paper, 1/4hr Viva
6.2
6.3
446
6.4
% Weight
Examination
A pass mark as prescribed in the General Regulations is the

minimal acceptable mark in all courses of the programme and
the dissertation.
6.5
The deadline for submission of the dissertation and clinical case

reports shall normally be the 30th of May of the second year.
6.6
On completion of the dissertation the candidate will be required

to submit three copies for examination and also three copies
each of the case reports.
6.7
A candidate whose dissertation is unsatisfactory may be allowed

to re-submit on such conditions and within such period of time
as specified by the Board of Examiners, which shall normally be
within three months after notification of results.
After the dissertation has been examined and amended in

candidate shall submit three bound copies in accordance with
the General Regulations for Masters Degrees by Course work.
6.9
A student must pass all courses examined in Part I and Part II to

6.10 The MVSc degree will be awarded with a Pass, a Credit, a Merit or
a Distinction according to the General Regulations.
7.
PROGRAMME COURSES
7.1 Part I
Compulsory courses
A student may write a supplementary examination for a failed

Examination of Part II shall be in the form of a submitted
dissertation, an oral presentation of research findings, which
shall be examined by a Panel of Examiners, and five submitted
clinical case reports. The cases reports shall be assessed by
internal examiners and shall be equally weighted. The written
dissertation shall contribute 60%, oral presentation 20% and
clinical case reports 20% of the final mark in Part II.
6.8
Lecture
hours
Practical
hours
Total
Hours
Smal l Animal Internal Medicine
110
50
160
MVSAM 502
Small Animal Surgery, Anaesthesiology & Radiology
60
16
76
MVSAM 503
Small Animal Theriogenology & Clinical Pathology
60
16
76
MVSAM 504
50
22
72
Course
Code
Course description
MVSAM 501
Elective courses
Lecture
hours
Practical hours
Total
Hours
Pharmacology
48
12
60
MVSAM 506
Parasitology
48
12
60
MVSAM 507
Pathology
48
12
60
MVSAM 508
Microbiology
48
12
60
Course
Code
Course description
MVSAM 505
7.2 Part II
Course code
Course description
MVSAM570
Dissertation and Clinical case reports

reference.
4.
REGISTRATION
4.1. Application for admission with the necessary supporting
documents should be made to the Deputy Registrar (Academic) on
the appropriate form.
5.

5.1. The programme shall comprise of TWO Parts, Part I shall consist of
5.2. The taught part shall comprise of five compulsory courses. There
will be a total of 512 contact hours and each course shall consist of
at least 60 contact hours of which about 60% are formal lectures
and the remainder shall comprise practicals. Lectures and
practicals shall normally be conducted under the aegis of the
University.

SCIENCE DEGREE (MVSC) OR MASTER OF SCIENCE
DEGREE (MSC) IN VETERINARY EPIDEMIOLOGY
1.
second semester.
INTRODUCTION
1.1. These regulations shall apply to candidates who register for the
MVSc or MSc in Veterinary Epidemiology and should be read in
Regulations.

Zimbabwe or, at some other place approved by the University.
Where a candidate is permitted to undertake research work in
another place, an Associate Supervisor in that place will normally
be required. Before conducting the research, approval of the
research by the candidate's supervisor and by the Board of Clinical
Veterinary Studies Department shall be required.
1.2. The programme shall consist of two parts, Part I shall consist of
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
recognized BVSc or BSc degree or equivalent, with a classification
of lower second class or better in an Epidemiology course.
2.2. Candidates with a third class in an Epidemiology course but who
examination.
3.

3.1. The programme shall be offered on a full-time basis for two
academic year.
6.
coursework. A candidate must satisfy the examiners in both the
final examination and the coursework in each course. Coursework
shall contribute 30%, theory paper 40%, practical paper 20% and
oral 10% of the final mark in any course. Each course will
contribute towards the final examination mark for Part I as
indicated below.
447
Code
Description
MVVE 501
Principles of epidemiology,
disease control & evaluation of
diagnostic tests
20

paper, 1/4hr Viva
MVVE 502
Epidemiologic study designs
20

paper, 1/4hr Viva
MVVE 50 3
Data collection methods,

sampling strategies & descriptive
statistics/epidemiology
20

paper, 1/4hr Viva
MVVE 504
Analytical statistics/epidemiology
& application of computers in
epidemiology
20

paper, 1/4hr Viva
MVVE 505
Research reports, animal health

economics & disease modeling
20

paper, 1/4hr Viva
6.2
448
% Weight
Examination

the dissertation.
6.3

6.4

shall be examined by a Panel of Examiners. The written
dissertation shall contribute 80% and oral presentation 20% of
the final mark in Part II.
6.5
6.6
6.7
The deadline for submission of the dissertation will be the 30th

of May of the second year.
to submit three copies for examination.
6.8

6.9

qualify for the award of the MVSc or MSc degree.
6.10 The MVSc or MSc degree will be awarded with a Pass, a Credit, a
Merit or a Distinction according to the General Regulations.
7.
PROGRAMME COURSES
a.
Part I
Lecture
hours
Practical
hours
Total
hours
Principles of epidemiology, disease control &

evaluation of diagnostic tests
80
24
104
MVVE 502
Epidemiologic study designs
80
22
102
MVVE 503
Data collection methods, sampling strategies &

descriptive statistics/epidemiology
80
22
102
MVVE 504
Analytical statistics/epidemiology & application of

computers in epidemiology
80
22
102
MVVE 505
Research reports, animal health economics & disease

modeling
80
22
102
Course
Code
Course description
MVVE 501
b. Part II
Course code
Course description
MVVE 570
Dissertation

reference.

SCIENCE DEGREE IN VETERINARY MICROBIOLOGY
[MVSC (VETERINARY MICROBIOLOGY)]
1.
INTRODUCTION
MVSc in Veterinary Microbiology and should be read in
Regulations.
1.2
2.
The programme shall consist of two parts, Part I shall consist of

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
2.1 To be admitted into the programme, applicants should have a
recognized BVSc degree or equivalent, with a classification of
lower second class or better in Veterinary Microbiology
2.2
Candidates with a third class in Veterinary Microbiology but who

examination.
3.

3.1 The programme shall be offered on a full-time basis for two
academic year.
4.
REGISTRATION
4.1 Application for admission with the necessary supporting
documents should be made to the Deputy Registrar (Academic)
on the appropriate form.
5.

5.1 The programme shall comprise of two Parts, Part I shall consist of
6.
5.2
The taught part shall comprise of five compulsory and a selected

elective course. There will be a total of 512 contact hours and
each course shall consist of at least 60 contact hours of which
about 60% are formal lectures and the remainder shall comprise
practicals. Lectures and practicals shall normally be conducted
under the aegis of the University. The candidate, in liaison with
the supervisor shall make the choice of one elective course.
5.3
The taught component of the programme shall be spread over

two semesters. Professional examination will be held at the end
of the second semester.
5.4
The dissertation will commence after successful completion of

Part I. The dissertation may be undertaken either at the
University of Zimbabwe or, at some other place approved by the
University. Where a candidate is permitted to undertake research
work in another place, an Associate Supervisor in that place will
normally be required. Before conducting the research, approval
of the research by the candidate's supervisor and by the Board of
Paraclinical Veterinary Studies Department shall be required.
6.1 Each candidate shall be required to pass all courses as listed
below. All courses will be assessed on the basis of one 3-hour
examination theory paper, one 2-hour practical paper, 15minute oral and coursework. A candidate must satisfy the
examiners in both the final examination and the coursework in
each course. Coursework shall contribute 20%, theory paper
50%, practical paper 20% and oral 10% of the final mark in any
course. Each course will contribute towards the final
examination mark for Part I as indicated below.
449
Description
Bacteriology, Rickettsiology &
% Weight
23

1/4hr Viva
Mycology & Food Microbiology
15

1/4hr Viva
Immunology & Molecular Biology
15
1x3hr theory pap er, 1x3hr practical paper,

1/4hr Viva
Virology
23

1/4hr Viva
14

1/4hr Viva
Elective course
10
1x2hr theory paper, 1x2h r practical paper,

1/4hr Viva
Mycoplasmology

Examination
6.9

6.10 The MVSc degree will be awarded with a Pass, a Credit, a Merit or
a Distinction according to the General Regulations.
7.
PROGRAMME COURSES
7.1 Part I
Compulsory courses
6.2
6.3
450
6.4

the dissertation.
shall be examined by a Panel of Examiners. The written
dissertation shall contribute 80% and oral presentation 20% of
the final mark in Part II.
6.5
The deadline for submission of the dissertation and clinical case

6.6

to submit three copies for examination.
6.7
6.8

Lecture
hours
Practical/Tutorial
hours
Total
hours
Bacteriology, Rickettsiology & Mycoplasmology
90
26
116
Mycology & Food Microbiology
60
18
78
Virology
90
26
116
Immunology & Molecular Biology
60
18
78
50
22
72
Course description
Elective courses
Lecture
hours
Practical/Tutorial
hours
Total
hours
Veterinary Public Health
48
12
60
Epidemiology of Infectious Diseases
48
12
60
Course description
7.2 Part II
Course code
Course description
Dissertation

but shall be kept in the Department of Paraclinical Veterinary Studies for
reference.

SCIENCE DEGREE IN VETERINARY PARASITOLOGY
[MVSC (VETERINARY PARASITOLOGY)]

second semester.
by the candidate's supervisor and by the Board of Paraclinical
1. INTRODUCTION
MVSc in Veterinary Parasitology and should be read in conjunction
with the General Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by
second class or better in Veterinary Parasitology.
2.2. Candidates with a third class in Veterinary Parasitology but who
have acquired at least five years of good practicing experience in the
academic year.
4. REGISTRATION
5.

elective course. There will be a total of 512 contact hours and each
6.
coursework. A candidate must satisfy the examiners in both the final
Description
% Weight
Examination
Helminthology
23

paper, 1/4hr Viva
Protozoology
15

paper, 1/4hr Viva
Entomology
15

paper, 1/4hr Viva
Tick-borne diseases & Immunology
23

paper, 1/4hr Viva
14

paper, 1/4hr Viva
Elective course
10

paper, 1/4hr Viva
451
6.2 A pass mark as prescribed in the General Regulations is the

minimal acceptable mark in all courses of the programme and the
dissertation.
7.
7.1 Part I
6.3 A student may write a supplementary examination for a failed

Compulsory courses
6.5 The deadline for submission of the dissertation and clinical case
6.6 On completion of the dissertation the candidate will be required to
Practical/Tutorial
hours
Total
hours
He lminthology
90
26
116
Protozoology
60
18
78
Entomology
60
18
78
Tick-borne diseases & Immunology
90
26
116
50
22
72
Elective courses
6.7 A candidate whose dissertation is unsatisfactory may be allowed to

6.8 After the dissertation has been examined and amended in
Course description
Lecture
hours
Practical/Tutorial
hours
Total
hours
Molecular Biology
48
12
60
Epidemiology of Parasitic diseases
48
12
60
Histology and ultra structure of parasites
48
12
60
7.2 Part II
6.9 A student must pass all courses examined in Part I and Part II to
6.10The MVSc degree will be awarded with a Pass, a Credit, a Merit or a
Lecture
hours
Course description
6.4 Examination of Part II shall be in the form of a submitted

II.
452
PROGRAMME COURSES
Course Code
Course description
Dissertation
8.
Detailed syllabuses of the courses do not form part of these regulations but shall
be kept in the Department of Paraclinical Veterinary Studies for reference.

SCIENCE DEGREE IN VETERINARY PATHOLOGY
[MVSC (VETERINARY PATHOLOGY)]
1.
INTRODUCTION
MVSc in Veterinary Pathology and should be read in conjunction
with the General Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees by
2.
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
second class or better in Veterinary Pathology
2.2. Candidates with a third class in Veterinary Pathology but who have
acquired at least five years of good practicing experience in the
3.

academic year.
4. REGISTRATION
elective courses. There will be a total of 512 contact hours and each

second semester.
5.4. The dissertation will commence after successful completion of Part I.
The dissertation may be undertaken either at the University of
by the candidate's supervisor and by the Board of Paraclinical
6.1. Each candidate shall be required to pass all courses as listed below. All
courses will be assessed on the basis of one 3-hour examination
coursework. A candidate must satisfy the examiners in both the final
Description
% Weight
Examination
General Pathology
16

paper, 1/4hr Viva
Systematic Pathology
20

paper, 1/4hr Viva
Immunopathology & Immuno-histochemistry
20

paper, 1/4hr Viva
Pathology of common animal diseases
20

paper, 1/4hr Viva
14

paper, 1/4hr Viva
Elective course
10

paper, 1/4hr Viva
453
6.2 A pass mark as prescribed in the General Regulations is the

minimal acceptable mark in all courses of the programme and the
dissertation.
7.
7.1 Part I
6.3 A student may write a supplementary examination for a failed

Compulsory courses
Course description
Lecture
hours
Practical/Tutorial
hours
Total
hours
General Pathology
60
22
82
Systematic Pathology
80
22
102
Immunopathology & Immunohistochemistry
80
22
102
Pathology of common animal

diseases
80
22
102
6.6 On completion of the dissertation the candidate will be required to

Research Methods &

Biostatistics
50
22
72
6.7 A candidate whose dissertation is unsatisfactory may be allowed to

Elective courses
6.4 Examination of Part II shall be in the form of a submitted

II.
6.5 The deadline for submission of the dissertation and clinical case
454
PROGRAMME COURSES
6.8 After the dissertation has been examined and amended in

Lecture
hours
Practical/Tutorial
hours
Total
hours
Molecular Biology
48
12
60
Ep idemiology
48
12
60
Veterinary Public Health
48
12
60
7.2 Part II
6.9 A student must pass all courses examined in Part I and Part II to
6.10 The MVSc degree will be awarded with a Pass, a Credit, a Merit or a
Course description
Course code
Course description
Dissertation
8.
Detailed syllabuses of the courses do not form part of these regulations

but shall be kept in the Department of Paraclinical Veterinary Studies
for reference.

SCIENCE/MASTER OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN
ANATOMY
1.
2.
The programme may be taken part-time in which case Part I

shall be taken over the first year and first term of the second
year; total course hours for each of the courses shall remain
the same but shall be extended over a period of 24 weeks.
Part II shall take place over the second and third terms of the
second year and all of the third year.
3.6
With approval of the Departmental Board, a candidate may

on application be permitted to change from a full-time
programme to a part-time programme. The programme
assumed shall be adjusted on a pro rata basis to account for
coursework which has been taken under the previous
programme.
3.7
Lectures and practicals shall normally be conducted under

the aegis of the University of Zimbabwe.
3.8
A student shall normally conduct a research project in the

field of Anatomy under the aegis of the University of
Zimbabwe, in the area of interest to the student and
approved by the student's supervisor and by the Board of
Preclinical Veterinary Studies Department.
3.9
After approval by the Bard of Preclinical Veterinary Studies

Department, students may carry out part of their research
work at other Institutions in or outside Zimbabwe. Where a
student is permitted to work in another Institution or
Country, an Associate Supervisor in that Institution or
Country will normally be required.

1.1
These regulations shall apply to candidates who register for
the MVSc/MSc degree in Anatomy.
1.2
The regulation should be read in conjunction with the

General Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees
Programmes by Coursework.
1.3
The MVSc/MSc programme in Anatomy will be offered on a

full time basis (two year) and part time (three years). The
programme shall consist of two parts, Part I shall consist of
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
A Candidates should have one of the following degrees, with honours
in Anatomy, from recognized a Universities:
2.1
2.2
2.3
3.
3.5
BVSc degree or equivalent,

MBChB degree or equivalent,
BSc degree in a relevant discipline.

3.1
The programme shall normally commence at the start of the
academic year and will run for two years (Full-time) or three
years (Part-time).
3.2
3.3
3.4
The programme shall consist of two Parts, Part I shall consist

of taught courses and Part II consists of a research
dissertation.
Part II shall normally commence immediately after Part I.
The dissertation should normally be submitted not later
than 30 September of the second year (Full-time) or third
year (Part-time) of the programme.
455

SCIENCE/MASTER OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN
ANATOMY
1.
456
2.

1.1
These regulations shall apply to candidates who register for
the MVSc/MSc degree in Anatomy.
1.2
The regulation should be read in conjunction with the

General Academic Regulations for Masters Degrees
Programmes by Coursework.
1.3
The MVSc/MSc programme in Anatomy will be offered on a

full time basis (two year) and part time (three years). The
programme shall consist of two parts, Part I shall consist of
ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
A Candidates should have one of the following degrees, with honours
in Anatomy, from recognized a Universities:
2.1
2.2
2.3
3.
BVSc degree or equivalent,

MBChB degree or equivalent,
BSc degree in a relevant discipline.

3.1
The programme shall normally commence at the start of the
academic year and will run for two years (Full-time) or three
years (Part-time).
3.2
3.3
3.4
The programme shall consist of two Parts, Part I shall consist

of taught courses and Part II consists of a research
dissertation.
Part II shall normally commence immediately after Part I.
The dissertation should normally be submitted not later
than 30 September of the second year (Full-time) or third
year (Part-time) of the programme.
4.
3.5
The programme may be taken part-time in which case Part I

shall be taken over the first year and first term of the second
year; total course hours for each of the courses shall remain
the same but shall be extended over a period of 24 weeks.
Part II shall take place over the second and third terms of the
second year and all of the third year.
3.6
With approval of the Departmental Board, a candidate may

on application be permitted to change from a full-time
programme to a part-time programme. The programme
assumed shall be adjusted on a pro rata basis to account for
coursework which has been taken under the previous
programme.
3.7
Lectures and practicals shall normally be conducted under

the aegis of the University of Zimbabwe.
3.8
A student shall normally conduct a research project in the

field of Anatomy under the aegis of the University of
Zimbabwe, in the area of interest to the student and
approved by the student's supervisor and by the Board of
Preclinical Veterinary Studies Department.
3.9
After approval by the Board of Preclinical Veterinary Studies

Department, students may carry out part of their research
work at other Institutions in or outside Zimbabwe. Where a
student is permitted to work in another Institution or
Country, an Associate Supervisor in that Institution or
Country will normally be required.
EXAMINATIONS
4.1
Examinations of the taught component of the programme
shall be by end of course examination and continuous
assessment.
4.2
Part I is examined in four (4) separate papers, comprising the

following courses:
?
Paper 1:
?
Paper 2:
?
Paper 3:
?
Paper 4:
4.3
Examinations of Part II shall be in the form of a submitted

dissertation which shall be examined by a Panel of
Examiners, and an oral presentation of research findings.
The length of the Dissertation shall be between 10 000 and
15 000 words.
4.4
A student may write a supplementary examination for a

failed course in accordance with the General
4.5
A candidate shall submit, for examination, four copies of the

unbound dissertation.
4.6
5.
AT5V01and AT5V02
AT5V03 and AT5V04
AT5V05
Any two of the optional courses chosen
After the thesis has been examined and amended in

accordance with the discretion of the Board of Examiners,
the candidate shall have at least three copies bound and
submitted in accordance with the provisions of the General
ASSESSMENT OF EXAMINATION PAPERS

The assessment of the examination papers will be assessed as
follows:
5.1
Paper 1
Component
5.2 Paper 2
Component
% Weighting
20
End of course examination
4 hours
50
Practical examination
3 hours
20
Oral/viva
30mins
10
% Weighting
20
4 hours
50
3 hours
20
Oral/viva
30mins
10
5.3 Paper 3
Component
Duration
% Weighting
30
3 hours
60
Oral/viva
30 mins
10
Duration
% Weighting
5.4 Paper 4
Component
20
4 hours
50
3 hours
20
Oral/viva
30mins
10
5.5 Dissertation
The assessment of the dissertation shall be as follows:
Component
Duration
Duration
Duration
% Weighting
Written dissertation
80
Oral presentation of research

findings
20
457
6.
7.
6.1
To be awarded the degree a student must pass each of the
four (4) Part 1 papers and the Part II dissertation.
Optional courses
Course Code
Course Description
6.2
AT5V06
The degree will be classified according to the following mark

scheme
80 100%
Distinction
70 79%
Merit
50 69%
Pass
0 49%
Fail
AWARD OF THE DEGREE
7.1
To be awarded the degree, a student must lodge with the
University three bound copies of the corrected dissertation,
in accordance with the provisions of the General Academic
7.2
A candidate holding the BVSc or equivalent degree
shall be awarded the MVSc degree.
7.3
458
8.
Lecture
hours
Practical/Tutorial
hours
Total
hours
Avian Anatomy
15
30
45
AT5V07
Neuroanatomy
15
30
45
AT5V08
Endocrine Anatomy
15
30
45
AT5V09
Hemopoietic and Immune Systems
30
15
45
AT5V10
Integumentary Systems
30
15
45
AT5V11
Reproductive Anatomy
25
30
55
And any other appropriate course(s) approved by the Department of

Preclinical Veterinary Studies Board.
8.2
Core course
A candidate holding the BSc, MBChB or equivalent degree

shall be awarded the MSc degree.
PROGRAMME COURSES
8.1
9.
Part I
Core courses
Course Code
Course Description
Lecture
hours
Practical/Tutorial
hours
Total
hours
AT5V01
Advanced Gross Anatomy
55
60
115
AT5V02
Evolutionary Anatomy
35
30
65
AT5V03
Advanced Histology and

Development Biology
55
60
115
AT5V0 4
Anatomy of Laboratory Animals and

Wildlife
30
35
65
AT5V05
40
20
60
Part II
Course Code
Course description
AT5V60
Dissertation
Detailed syllabuses of the courses do not form part of these

regulations but shall be kept in the Faculty office for reference.

UZ Prospectus 2015 To 2018

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UZ Prospectus 2015 To 2018

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROSPECTUS 2015-18

UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE MAIN CAMPUS

630 Churchill Avenue

UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE COLLEGE OF HEALTH

Teaching and Non Teaching Departments on the University Site:

+263-775 426 268

UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE LAKE KARIBA

+263-61- 2751 / 3035

UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE LIBRARY

UNIVERSITY OF ZIMBABWE MARONDERA COLLEGE

UNIVERSITY OFFICE HOURS

EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBERS

Chief Emergency Controller

Deputy Chief Emergency Controller

Zimbabwe Republic Police

+263-279-20239 / 20227 / 20240

Direct Line +263-4-336603

Cell+263-772 305 094

Cell+263-772 938 088

Dean of Students: Dr M Madambi

West End Clinic

Radiation Officer: Dr Chanaiwa

Direct Line +263-4-333514

Direct Line +263-4-700666/8

17. Child Line

18. Poisoning Information Centre

Principal Officers of the University

Chancellor: His Excellency, Cde R.G. Mugabe, President of the Republic of

Vice Chancellor:Professor L.M. Nyagura, BSc (London) UK, MSc (UNISA),

Pro Vice Chancellor (Business Development): Dr T Munyanyiwa, Msc (UZ)

Mr S. Chevo, B. Admin (Hons) (UZ) Zimbabwe

Mr V. Mugabe, BACC (UZ), B. Compt (UNISA), CA(Z)

Mrs A.C. Chikonzo, Postgrad. Dip. (University of Botswana),

Senior Proctor: Dr C. Manyeruke, HPA (UZ), MIR (UZ), PhD (UZ)

GENERAL INFORMATION FOR

ACADEMIC CONDUCT AND RE-ADMISSION

The University of Zimbabwe has 10 faculties in the following areas:

Cutting across department and faculty boundaries is the University Library

The senate may recommend to the Vice-Chancellor that the privilege of

For individual counseling in academic, financial and personal matters,

When registering as a member of the University, a student is expected to read

STUDENT AFFAIRS DIVISION

Students are encouraged to participate fully in residential life activities to

The Division of Student Affairs is an administrative arm of the University that

The Student Affairs Division, through the Accommodation Office, is also

intellectual development of students. The Division provides a wide range of

responsible for the efficient allocation of accommodation to students in line

with the following University priority list:

graduation. Leadership and social skills development, financial aid and

students with disabilities, foreign students without relatives in

graduation from the University of Zimbabwe.

Zimbabwean students facing challenges in raising their educational fees can

Harare, MBCHB Part IV & V and BVSc Part V students.

The demand for University accommodation is very high because the

Final Year Undergraduate students whose homes are out of Harare,

Third Year Undergraduate students of four year programmes

Second Year Undergraduate students whose homes are out of Harare

First Year undergraduate students whose homes are out of Harare,

Final Year students whose homes are in Harare.

First Year Undergraduate students whose homes are in Harare.

Postgraduate students whose homes are out of Harare.

COUNSELLING AND ADVISORY SERVICES

STUDENT HEALTH SERVICES